Press Alt + R to read the document text or Alt + P to download or print.

No preview available

The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutWORK ORDER - RFP - 8106 UTILITY INFRASTRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION SERVICES FOR WATER, WASTEWATER, AND STORMWATER FACILITIES CAPITAL IMPROVEMENTS (2)CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR DWRF UV System Construction H-WRF-2016-19 October 2016 Hydro Construction Company, Inc. 301 East Lincoln Avenue Fort Collins CO 80524 Fort Collins Utilities 700 Wood Street Fort Collins CO 80521 Carollo Engineers, Inc. 10822 West Toller Drive, Suite 200 Littleton, CO 80127 DWRF UV Construction Agreement Forms October 2016 00500-1 SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT FORMS 00525 Work Order, Notice of Award, and Bid Schedule 00525-1 00530 Notice to Proceed 00530-1 00600 Bonds and Certificates 00600-1 00610 Performance Bond 00610-1 – 00610-2 00615 Payment Bond 00615-1 – 00615-2 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00630-1 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00635-1 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00640-1 00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR) 00650-1 – 00650-2 00651 Lien Waiver Release (SUBCONTRACTOR) 00651-1 – 00651-2 00660 Consent of Surety 00660-1 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate 00670-1 – 00670-2 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 – 00800-8 00900 Addenda, Modifications and Payment 00900 00950 Work Order Change Order 00950-1 00960 Application for Payment 00960-1 – 00960-4 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 1 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Project name UV Final GMP HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 2 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount Gen Cond 0331 1- 1000.000 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1065.100 Surveys 2,070 2,500 2,685 537 7,792 1100.100 Project Management 77,280 12,029 1,504 90,812 1102.100 Site Supervision 151,800 27,924 5,370 185,094 1250.100 Offices 4,140 12,888 5,370 22,398 1260.100 Utilities 7,518 7,518 1270.100 OSHA & Safety 4,968 9,000 3,222 17,190 1400.100 Misc. Labor Expense 6,900 2,148 3,222 12,270 1470.100 Winter Conditions 3,105 20,943 3,222 27,270 1485.100 Mobilization/Demobilization 4,968 5,000 2,685 12,653 1622.100 Fuels 15,036 15,036 GENERAL CONDITIONS 255,231 16,500 78,617 47,686 398,033 4,680.00 Labor hours 4,480.00 Equipment hours 1900.000 OWNED EQUIPMENT 1900.100 Skidsteers 6,766 6,766 1900.105 Backhoe/Loaders 34,347 34,347 1900.120 Cranes 20,700 47,686 2,900 71,285 1900.140 Pick-up Trucks 15,466 15,466 OWNED EQUIPMENT 20,700 104,264 2,900 127,864 606.000 Labor hours 16000.000 ELECTRICAL 16000.001 Electrical 171,015 171,015 ELECTRICAL 171,015 171,015 0331 1- 275,931 0 187,515 182,881 50,585 696,912 5,286.00 Labor hours 4,480.00 Equipment hours Gen Cond 275,931 0 187,515 182,881 50,585 696,912 5,286.00 Labor hours 4,480.00 Equipment hours HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 3 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount Parshall Flume 0320- Parshall Flume Wall 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 218 218 3310.260 Place- Walls 477 477 3350.130 Patch & Grind 20 20 3390.170 Curing 110 8 90 208 3510.610 Waterstop 189 189 CONCRETE 110 957 477 230 1,774 481.02 Labor hours Parshall Flume Wall 1.481 cy 110 957 0 477 230 1,774 481.02 Labor hours 0320- NPT Channel Wall 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 229 229 3310.260 Place- Walls 501 501 3350.130 Patch & Grind 21 21 3390.170 Curing 110 9 90 209 3510.610 Waterstop 200 200 CONCRETE 110 980 501 230 1,821 537.184 Labor hours NPT Channel Wall 1.56 cy 110 980 0 501 230 1,821 537.184 Labor hours 0330 2- Effluent Channel Tremie Seal 3000.000 CONCRETE 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 9,350 9,350 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 1,388 1,388 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 4 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount CONCRETE 9,350 1,388 10,738 34.00 Labor hours Effluent Channel Tremie Seal 68.00 cy 0 9,350 0 1,388 0 10,738 34.00 Labor hours 0330 2- Parshall Flume Slab 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 42 42 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 4,051 4,051 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 2,456 2,456 3390.170 Curing 110 52 89 252 3510.610 Waterstop 1,554 1,554 CONCRETE 110 6,221 2,456 230 9,017 3,525.75 Labor hours Parshall Flume Slab 27.56 cy 110 6,221 0 2,456 230 9,017 3,525.75 Labor hours 0330 2- 2000.000 SITEWORK 2221.110 Saw Cut/Hammer 2,907 800 8,000 573 516 12,796 2221.250 Demo- Items 1,347 600 859 430 3,236 2221.310 Demo Misc. Metals 2,020 750 1,500 537 161 4,968 2240.120 Water Pumps 10,102 44,110 4,833 4,296 63,341 SITEWORK 16,376 2,150 53,610 6,802 5,402 84,340 234.67 Labor hours 106.67 Equipment hours 11000.000 EQUIPMENT 11392.030 Parshall Flumes 1,347 20,235 215 21,797 EQUIPMENT 1,347 20,235 215 21,797 240.00 Labor hours 15000.000 MECHANICAL 15203.001 DI Flange Pipe by LF 949 3,850 537 269 5,605 MECHANICAL 949 3,850 537 269 5,605 64.00 Labor hours 16000.000 ELECTRICAL 16000.001 Electrical 17,438 17,438 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 5 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount ELECTRICAL 17,438 17,438 0330 2- 18,672 26,235 71,048 7,339 5,886 129,180 538.67 Labor hours 106.67 Equipment hours Parshall Flume 19,004 43,742 71,048 12,162 6,574 152,530 5,116.614 Labor hours 106.67 Equipment hours HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 6 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount Sitework 02607- 6" Sanitary Sewer 2000.000 SITEWORK 2221.105 Core Drill Concrete 750 750 2502.010 Pipe Trenching 5,331 4,251 306 9,889 2502.012 Trench Shoring 1,020 1,020 2502.014 Pipe Bedding 467 467 2502.016 Pipe Cover 467 467 2502.018 Spoils Removal 263 263 2512.801 SDR 35 Pipe 285 285 SITEWORK 5,331 1,219 1,013 5,272 306 13,141 320.275 Labor hours 128.853 Equipment hours 3000.000 CONCRETE 3310.195 Place - Concrete Collar 526 250 215 161 1,152 CONCRETE 526 250 215 161 1,152 44.35 Labor hours 6" Sanitary Sewer 95.00 lf 5,858 1,469 1,013 5,486 467 14,293 364.625 Labor hours 128.853 Equipment hours 02607- 4" UV Channel Drain Line 2000.000 SITEWORK 2221.105 Core Drill Concrete 600 480 1,080 2502.010 Pipe Trenching 2,694 2,148 290 5,132 2502.012 Trench Shoring 291 291 2502.014 Pipe Bedding 117 117 2502.016 Pipe Cover 117 117 2502.018 Spoils Removal 120 120 2512.801 SDR 35 Pipe 36 36 SITEWORK 2,694 870 600 2,439 290 6,893 161.700 Labor hours 65.420 Equipment hours 4" UV Channel Drain Line 8.00 lf 2,694 870 600 2,439 290 6,893 161.700 Labor hours 65.420 Equipment hours HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 7 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 02607- 4" Sink Drain Line 2000.000 SITEWORK 2221.105 Core Drill Concrete 250 240 490 2502.010 Pipe Trenching 4,041 3,222 483 7,746 2502.012 Trench Shoring 485 485 2502.014 Pipe Bedding 143 143 2502.016 Pipe Cover 143 143 2502.018 Spoils Removal 292 292 2512.801 SDR 35 Pipe 60 60 SITEWORK 4,041 595 532 3,707 483 9,359 241.442 Labor hours 96.99 Equipment hours 4" Sink Drain Line 30.00 lf 4,041 595 532 3,707 483 9,359 241.442 Labor hours 96.99 Equipment hours 0328- 24" Drilled Pier 1000.000 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1065.100 Surveys 342 350 161 853 GENERAL CONDITIONS 342 350 161 853 8.00 Labor hours 2000.000 SITEWORK 2220.980 Disposal Expense 949 1,654 95 2,698 2475.980 Caisson- Sub 19,673 19,673 SITEWORK 949 19,673 1,654 95 22,371 16.00 Labor hours 3000.000 CONCRETE 3100.112 Forms- Sonotubes 644 644 3210.206 Rebar- Column 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 2,463 2,463 3310.270 Place- Piers & Columns 4,535 4,535 CONCRETE 2,463 4,535 644 7,642 37.66 Labor hours 24" Drilled Pier 16.76 cy 1,292 2,813 19,673 6,189 900 30,866 61.66 Labor hours HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 8 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 0330 2- AHU Concrete Slab 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 11 11 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 939 939 3390.170 Curing 110 12 89 212 3510.610 Waterstop 273 273 CONCRETE 110 1,757 230 2,097 499.65 Labor hours AHU Concrete Slab 6.39 cy 110 1,757 0 0 230 2,097 499.65 Labor hours 0330 2- Transformer Pad 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 3 3 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 196 196 3390.170 Curing 110 2 90 202 CONCRETE 110 723 230 1,063 168.804 Labor hours Transformer Pad 1.333 cy 110 723 0 0 230 1,063 168.804 Labor hours 0330 2- New SBB/HVT Pad 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 9 9 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 980 2,533 3,513 3390.170 Curing 110 9 90 209 CONCRETE 110 999 2,533 90 3,732 6.84 Labor hours New SBB/HVT Pad 6.67 cy 110 999 2,533 0 90 3,732 6.84 Labor hours HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 9 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount New SBB/HVT Pad 6.67 cy 110 999 2,533 0 90 3,732 6.84 Labor hours 0330 2- 2000.000 SITEWORK 2110.210 Sitework Sub 5,962 1,074 3,222 10,258 2221.110 Saw Cut/Hammer 5,382 1,629 698 7,709 2221.550 Exterior Conc Demolition 673 1,289 537 2,499 2223.100 Demo Site 2,910 720 3,786 967 8,383 2240.110 Wellpoints 3,798 4,000 14,000 3,437 2,148 27,383 2255.100 Shoring 32,220 32,220 2316.201 Site Exc- Earth 14,203 8,820 9,649 601 33,273 2319.302 Bldg Fill- Earth 8,171 7,688 195 16,055 2320.010 Base- Gravel 1,078 4,160 1,925 258 7,420 2512.101 PVC Sch 40 2,374 3,000 480 1,074 537 7,465 2531.004 Drywell 1,347 1,500 687 161 3,695 2531.006 Manholes 6' 9,892 14,000 2,000 4,983 618 31,493 2740.120 Asphalt Paving - SY 54,660 54,660 2770.110 Curbs- Precast 831 525 4,200 1,128 338 7,022 2785.120 Surface Applications 120 120 2900.990 Landscaping Sub 18,000 18,000 SITEWORK 56,620 36,125 94,060 70,569 10,280 267,654 1,535.994 Labor hours 1,002.855 Equipment hours 3000.000 CONCRETE 3000.990 Concrete 1,263 3,000 3,750 1,611 806 10,429 CONCRETE 1,263 3,000 3,750 1,611 806 10,429 15.00 Labor hours 16000.000 ELECTRICAL 16000.001 Electrical 70,597 70,597 ELECTRICAL 70,597 70,597 0330 2- 57,883 39,125 168,407 72,180 11,085 348,680 1,550.994 Labor hours 1,002.855 Equipment hours Sitework 72,098 48,350 192,759 90,001 13,774 416,983 3,055.71 Labor hours 1,294.12 Equipment hours HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 10 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount UV 0316- Detail 6/S-UVD-12 3000.000 CONCRETE 3150.625 Chamfer 4 4 3210.202 Rebar- Footing 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 1,002 1,002 3310.160 Caissons 586 586 3350.130 Patch & Grind 99 215 107 422 3510.610 Waterstop 525 525 CONCRETE 99 1,527 800 111 2,538 9.69 Labor hours Detail 6/S-UVD-12 6.82 cy 99 1,527 0 800 111 2,538 9.69 Labor hours 0320- Effluent Channel/Weir Wall - A 3000.000 CONCRETE 3150.625 Chamfer 8 8 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 8,387 8,387 3310.260 Place- Walls 1,348 1,348 3350.130 Patch & Grind 103 103 3390.170 Curing 110 32 90 232 3510.610 Waterstop 1,103 1,103 CONCRETE 110 9,632 1,348 90 11,180 129.91 Labor hours Effluent Channel/Weir Wall - A 57.06 cy 110 9,632 0 1,348 90 11,180 129.91 Labor hours 0320- Weir Channel Wall - A 3000.000 CONCRETE 3150.625 Chamfer 9 9 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 1,203 1,203 3350.130 Patch & Grind 44 44 3390.170 Curing 110 9 90 209 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 11 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 3510.610 Waterstop 179 179 CONCRETE 110 1,445 90 1,644 20.262 Labor hours Weir Channel Wall - A 8.19 cy 110 1,445 0 0 90 1,644 20.262 Labor hours 0320- Weir Channel Wall - B 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 648 648 3310.260 Place- Walls 596 596 3350.130 Patch & Grind 24 24 3390.170 Curing 110 5 90 205 3510.610 Waterstop 326 326 CONCRETE 110 1,002 596 90 1,798 14.033 Labor hours Weir Channel Wall - B 4.41 cy 110 1,002 0 596 90 1,798 14.033 Labor hours 0320- Weir Channel Wall - C 3000.000 CONCRETE 3150.625 Chamfer 3 3 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 370 370 3310.260 Place- Walls 947 947 3350.130 Patch & Grind 14 14 3390.170 Curing 110 29 90 228 3510.610 Waterstop 357 357 CONCRETE 110 769 947 92 1,919 9.015 Labor hours Weir Channel Wall - C 2.52 cy 110 769 0 947 92 1,919 9.015 Labor hours 0320- Effluent Channel Wall - B 3000.000 CONCRETE HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 12 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 3150.625 Chamfer 4 4 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 730 730 3310.260 Place- Walls 427 427 3350.130 Patch & Grind 27 27 3390.170 Curing 110 19 90 219 3510.610 Waterstop 84 84 CONCRETE 110 859 427 94 1,490 12.295 Labor hours Effluent Channel Wall - B 4.964 cy 110 859 0 427 94 1,490 12.295 Labor hours 0320- Effluent Channel Wall - C 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 730 730 3310.260 Place- Walls 427 427 3350.130 Patch & Grind 22 22 3390.170 Curing 110 9 90 209 3510.610 Waterstop 168 168 CONCRETE 110 1,451 427 230 2,218 344.022 Labor hours Effluent Channel Wall - C 4.964 cy 110 1,451 0 427 230 2,218 344.022 Labor hours 0320- Weir Channel Wall - D 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 730 730 3310.260 Place- Walls 427 427 3350.130 Patch & Grind 45 45 3390.170 Curing 110 19 90 219 3510.610 Waterstop 84 84 CONCRETE 110 877 427 90 1,504 11.922 Labor hours Weir Channel Wall - D 4.964 cy 110 877 0 427 90 1,504 11.922 Labor hours HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 13 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount Weir Channel Wall - D 4.964 cy 110 877 0 427 90 1,504 11.922 Labor hours 0320- Weir Channel Wall - E 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 304 304 3310.260 Place- Walls 178 178 3350.130 Patch & Grind 28 28 3390.170 Curing 110 12 90 212 3510.610 Waterstop 252 252 CONCRETE 110 596 178 90 973 8.62 Labor hours Weir Channel Wall - E 2.07 cy 110 596 0 178 90 973 8.62 Labor hours 0320- Weir Channel Wall - F 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 319 319 3310.260 Place- Walls 187 187 3350.130 Patch & Grind 20 20 3390.170 Curing 110 8 90 208 CONCRETE 110 347 187 90 734 5.33 Labor hours Weir Channel Wall - F 2.172 cy 110 347 0 187 90 734 5.33 Labor hours 0320- Effluent/Weir Channel Wall - D 3000.000 CONCRETE 3150.625 Chamfer 4 4 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 730 730 3310.260 Place- Walls 427 427 3350.130 Patch & Grind 45 45 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 14 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 3390.170 Curing 110 19 89 219 3510.610 Waterstop 210 210 CONCRETE 110 1,003 427 94 1,634 12.474 Labor hours Effluent/Weir Channel Wall - D 4.964 cy 110 1,003 0 427 94 1,634 12.474 Labor hours 0320- Effluent/Weir Channel Wall - E 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 1,043 280 1,324 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 973 973 3310.260 Place- Walls 569 569 3350.130 Patch & Grind 22 22 3390.170 Curing 110 9 90 209 3510.610 Waterstop 273 273 CONCRETE 110 2,321 569 370 3,370 345.33 Labor hours Effluent/Weir Channel Wall - E 6.62 cy 110 2,321 0 569 370 3,370 345.33 Labor hours 0320- UV CLSM Fill 3000.000 CONCRETE 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 415 415 3310.260 Place- Walls 382 382 CONCRETE 415 382 797 3.11 Labor hours UV CLSM Fill 4.444 cy 0 415 0 382 0 797 3.11 Labor hours 0320- UV Channel Wall - A 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 4,552 4,552 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 15 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 3310.260 Place- Walls 2,428 2,428 3350.130 Patch & Grind 418 418 3390.170 Curing 110 176 90 375 3510.610 Waterstop 1,260 1,260 CONCRETE 110 6,927 2,428 230 9,694 5,583.38 Labor hours UV Channel Wall - A 30.963 cy 110 6,927 0 2,428 230 9,694 5,583.38 Labor hours 0320- UV Channel Wall - B 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 4,146 4,146 3310.260 Place- Walls 2,423 2,423 3350.130 Patch & Grind 182 182 3390.170 Curing 110 96 89 296 3510.610 Waterstop 1,050 1,050 CONCRETE 110 5,474 2,423 89 8,097 48.955 Labor hours UV Channel Wall - B 28.204 cy 110 5,474 0 2,423 89 8,097 48.955 Labor hours 0320- UV Channel Wall - C 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 517 517 3350.130 Patch & Grind 38 38 3390.170 Curing 110 20 90 220 CONCRETE 110 1,097 230 1,437 1,156.902 Labor hours UV Channel Wall - C 3.52 cy 110 1,097 0 0 230 1,437 1,156.902 Labor hours 0320- Fill Openiing - S229 2000.000 SITEWORK HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 16 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 2221.110 Saw Cut/Hammer 149 72 161 58 440 SITEWORK 149 72 161 58 440 3.00 Labor hours 3.00 Equipment hours 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 109 109 3310.260 Place- Walls 64 64 3350.130 Patch & Grind 10 10 3390.170 Curing 110 4 89 204 3510.610 Waterstop 189 189 CONCRETE 110 834 64 230 1,238 506.775 Labor hours Fill Openiing - S229 0.741 cy 259 906 0 225 288 1,678 509.775 Labor hours 3.00 Equipment hours 0320- SPT Wall 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.210 Rebar- Wall 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 196 196 3310.260 Place- Walls 215 215 3350.130 Patch & Grind 18 18 3390.170 Curing 110 8 90 207 3510.610 Waterstop 189 189 CONCRETE 110 932 215 230 1,487 340.664 Labor hours SPT Wall 1.333 cy 110 932 0 215 230 1,487 340.664 Labor hours 0326- Weir Support Column 3000.000 CONCRETE 3150.700 Set Anchor Bolts 69 200 107 376 3210.206 Rebar- Column 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 38 38 3310.270 Place- Piers & Columns 22 22 3350.130 Patch & Grind 7 7 3390.170 Curing 110 3 90 203 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 17 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount CONCRETE 179 248 22 197 647 3.26 Labor hours Weir Support Column 0.26 cy 179 248 0 22 197 647 3.26 Labor hours 0326- Effluent Channel Vertical Fillets 2000.000 SITEWORK 2221.110 Saw Cut/Hammer 1,590 192 241 206 2,229 SITEWORK 1,590 192 241 206 2,229 32.00 Labor hours 32.00 Equipment hours 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.206 Rebar- Column 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 275 275 3310.270 Place- Piers & Columns 859 859 3350.130 Patch & Grind 36 36 3390.170 Curing 110 15 90 215 CONCRETE 110 848 859 230 2,047 1,517.51 Labor hours Effluent Channel Vertical Fillets 2.00 cy 1,700 1,040 0 1,100 436 4,276 1,549.51 Labor hours 32.00 Equipment hours 0330 2- Effluent Channel/Weir Slab 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 84 84 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 13,271 13,271 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 2,618 2,618 3390.170 Curing 110 64 90 264 3510.610 Waterstop 662 662 CONCRETE 110 14,602 2,618 230 17,560 659.571 Labor hours Effluent Channel/Weir Slab 90.28 cy 110 14,602 0 2,618 230 17,560 659.571 Labor hours HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 18 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount Effluent Channel/Weir Slab 90.28 cy 110 14,602 0 2,618 230 17,560 659.571 Labor hours 0330 2- North Entrance Deck 3000.000 CONCRETE 3100.120 Void Form 149 504 103 756 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 108 108 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 4,146 4,146 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 1,272 1,272 3390.170 Curing 110 48 89 248 CONCRETE 259 5,328 1,272 333 7,192 1,126.585 Labor hours North Entrance Deck 28.204 cy 259 5,328 0 1,272 333 7,192 1,126.585 Labor hours 0331 1- Weir Channel CLSM Fill 3000.000 CONCRETE 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 2,506 2,506 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 1,238 1,238 CONCRETE 2,506 1,238 3,744 13.403 Labor hours Weir Channel CLSM Fill 26.81 cy 0 2,506 0 1,238 0 3,744 13.403 Labor hours 0331 1- Weir Channel Slab 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 29 29 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 1,970 1,970 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 1,209 1,209 3390.170 Curing 110 8 90 208 3510.610 Waterstop 1,050 1,050 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 19 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount CONCRETE 110 3,057 1,209 90 4,466 2,276.30 Labor hours Weir Channel Slab 13.403 cy 110 3,057 0 1,209 90 4,466 2,276.30 Labor hours 0331 1- UV Channel Slab - A 3000.000 CONCRETE 3150.625 Chamfer 2 2 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 7 7 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 436 436 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 255 255 3390.170 Curing 110 4 90 204 3510.610 Waterstop 210 210 CONCRETE 110 657 255 91 1,113 4.725 Labor hours UV Channel Slab - A 2.963 cy 110 657 0 255 91 1,113 4.725 Labor hours 0331 1- Weir Channel Fillet - A 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 520 520 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 592 592 3390.170 Curing 110 7 90 207 CONCRETE 110 1,048 592 230 1,981 480.84 Labor hours Weir Channel Fillet - A 3.78 cy 110 1,048 0 592 230 1,981 480.84 Labor hours 0331 1- Weir Channel Fillet - B 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 20 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 573 573 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 653 653 3390.170 Curing 110 8 89 208 CONCRETE 110 1,103 653 230 2,096 425.272 Labor hours Weir Channel Fillet - B 4.17 cy 110 1,103 0 653 230 2,096 425.272 Labor hours 0331 1- UV Channel Slab - B 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 39 39 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 2,069 2,069 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 2,418 2,418 3390.170 Curing 110 40 90 240 3510.610 Waterstop 1,050 1,050 CONCRETE 110 3,719 2,418 230 6,478 2,445.281 Labor hours UV Channel Slab - B 14.074 cy 110 3,719 0 2,418 230 6,478 2,445.281 Labor hours 0331 1- Effluent Channel Fillet/Ramp 2000.000 SITEWORK 2221.110 Saw Cut/Hammer 166 30 54 43 292 SITEWORK 166 30 54 43 292 3.333 Labor hours 3.333 Equipment hours 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 917 917 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 573 573 3390.170 Curing 110 6 89 206 CONCRETE 110 1,445 573 230 2,358 564.602 Labor hours HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 21 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount Effluent Channel Fillet/Ramp 6.67 cy 276 1,475 0 627 273 2,650 567.935 Labor hours 3.333 Equipment hours 0331 1- Electrical Room Slab 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 38 38 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 5,379 5,379 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 1,297 1,297 3390.170 Curing 110 52 90 252 CONCRETE 110 5,991 1,297 230 7,628 2,763.18 Labor hours Electrical Room Slab 36.593 cy 110 5,991 0 1,297 230 7,628 2,763.18 Labor hours 0331 1- UV Room Slab 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 38 38 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 5,379 5,379 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 1,297 1,297 3390.170 Curing 110 52 89 252 CONCRETE 110 5,991 1,297 230 7,628 1,848.59 Labor hours UV Room Slab 36.593 cy 110 5,991 0 1,297 230 7,628 1,848.59 Labor hours 0331 1- SPT Elevated Deck 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 7 7 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 22 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 343 343 3310.230 Place- S-O-G 376 376 3390.170 Curing 110 7 90 207 3510.610 Waterstop 284 284 CONCRETE 110 1,162 376 230 1,878 762.82 Labor hours SPT Elevated Deck 2.333 cy 110 1,162 0 376 230 1,878 762.82 Labor hours 0331 1- Electrical Housekeeping Pad 3000.000 CONCRETE 3210.106 Rebar- Dowels 522 140 662 3210.208 Rebar- SOG 3220.110 Wire Mesh- Rolls 7 7 3310.100 Concrete- Buy 174 174 3390.170 Curing 110 5 90 205 CONCRETE 110 708 230 1,048 982.054 Labor hours Electrical Housekeeping Pad 1.19 cy 110 708 0 0 230 1,048 982.054 Labor hours 0331 1- 2000.000 SITEWORK 2221.110 Saw Cut/Hammer 14,647 1,811 52,905 6,250 3,352 78,966 2221.250 Demo- Items 5,556 1,279 2,051 1,100 9,985 2221.310 Demo Misc. Metals 397 350 215 107 1,070 2240.120 Water Pumps 2,020 806 242 3,067 2319.314 Squeegee Fill 943 7,280 1,985 314 10,522 2910.210 Filter Fabric 199 625 67 891 SITEWORK 23,762 11,345 52,905 11,307 5,182 104,501 313.731 Labor hours 189.69 Equipment hours 3000.000 CONCRETE 3000.990 Concrete 185,246 185,246 3100.120 Void Form 415 6,143 188 6,746 3200.980 Rebar- Buy & Sub 79,786 79,786 CONCRETE 415 85,929 185,246 188 271,778 35.94 Labor hours 4000.000 MASONRY HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 23 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 4000.980 Masonry Sub 949 500 81,000 376 269 83,094 MASONRY 949 500 81,000 376 269 83,094 16.00 Labor hours 5000.000 METALS 5000.980 Structural Roof 4,747 8,800 2,041 537 16,125 5310.110 Steel Decking 2,694 535 322 3,551 5520.300 Handrails- Aluminum 2,020 150 193 2,364 5530.400 Grating- Aluminum 7,861 840 1,418 783 10,902 5590.100 Misc Steel 169,816 169,816 METALS 17,322 170,501 9,640 3,458 1,835 202,757 568.93 Labor hours 80.00 Equipment hours 6000.000 WOOD & PLASTICS 6415.450 Plastic Laminate 4,361 750 1,611 806 7,527 WOOD & PLASTICS 4,361 750 1,611 806 7,527 120.00 Labor hours 7000.000 THERMAL & MOIST PROTECT 7920.200 Caulking 8,000 8,000 THERMAL & MOIST PROTECT 8,000 8,000 8000.000 DOORS & WINDOWS 8110.200 Doors- Hol Metal Frames 2,136 9,351 510 349 12,346 DOORS & WINDOWS 2,136 9,351 510 349 12,346 112.00 Labor hours 9000.000 FINISHES 9960.100 Special Coatings 58,883 58,883 FINISHES 58,883 58,883 10000.000 SPECIALTIES 10430.100 Exterior Signs & Letters 397 1,500 161 2,059 10670.100 Metal Storage Shelving 2,848 6,000 752 322 9,922 SPECIALTIES 3,246 7,500 752 483 11,981 160.00 Labor hours 11000.000 EQUIPMENT 11270.060 U.V. Sterilizer 5,051 500 1,289 806 7,645 11286.050 Gates - Slide 10,466 71,000 3,222 859 85,547 11508.020 Mixers - Static 905 2,500 269 107 3,781 EQUIPMENT 16,422 74,000 4,779 1,772 96,973 869.80 Labor hours 13000.000 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13122.100 Metal Roof & Downspouts 36,570 36,570 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 36,570 36,570 15000.000 MECHANICAL 15215.101 PVC Pipe Sch 40 2,374 6,500 537 806 10,216 HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 24 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Description Quantity Labor Amount Material Amount Subcontract Amount Equipment Amount Other Amount Total Amount 15410.004 Plumbing Subs 15,500 15,500 15410.051 Service Sinks 298 5,000 54 5,352 15801.000 HVAC Subs 55,242 55,242 MECHANICAL 2,672 11,500 70,742 537 859 86,310 184.03 Labor hours 16000.000 ELECTRICAL 16000.001 Electrical 356,504 356,504 ELECTRICAL 356,504 356,504 0331 1- 71,286 371,376 859,490 23,330 11,744 1,337,225 2,380.43 Labor hours 269.69 Equipment hours UV 76,819 457,592 859,490 50,307 17,591 1,461,801 26,855.403 Labor hours 308.022 Equipment hours HYDRO CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. Standard Estimate Report Page 25 UV Final GMP 10/28/2016 9:25 AM Estimate Totals Description Amount Totals Hours Rate Cost Basis Cost per Unit Percent of Total Labor 443,852 40,313.725 hrs 14.45% Material 549,685 17.90% Subcontract 1,310,812 42.69% Equipment 335,351 6,188.806 hrs 10.92% Other 88,525 2.88% 2,728,225 2,728,225 88.84 Perform & Payment Bond - 2 yr. 38,279 B 1.25% 38,279 2,766,504 1.25 Profit & Overhead 304,316 11.000 % T 9.91% 304,316 3,070,820 9.91 Total 3,070,820 DWRF UV Construction Bonds and Certificates October 2016 00600-1 SECTION 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR) 00651 Lien Waiver Release (SUBCONTRACTOR) 00660 Consent of Surety 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD CERTIFICATE HOLDER © 1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2014/01) AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE CANCELLATION CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) JECT LOC POLICY PRO- GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ DAMAGE TO RENTED EACH OCCURRENCE $ MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GENERAL AGGREGATE $ PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ DED RETENTION $ CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR $ AGGREGATE $ UMBRELLA LIAB EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LIAB DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MM/DD/YYYY) POLICY EXP (MM/DD/YYYY) LIMITS PER STATUTE OTH- ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ $ $ ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below (Mandatory in NH) OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY Y / N AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED SCHEDULED HIRED AUTOS NON-OWNED AUTOS AUTOS AUTOS COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT BODILY INJURY (Per person) BODILY INJURY (Per accident) DWRF UV Construction Certificate of Substantial Completion October 2016 00635-1 SECTION 00635 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION TO: City of Fort Collins PROJECT TITLE: DWRF UV System Construction Date of Substantial Completion: LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado OWNER: City of Fort Collins Project or Specified Part Shall Include: CONTRACTOR: CONTRACT DATE: Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project (or specified part of the project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. By: ENGINEER Authorized Representative Date The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. By: CONTRACTOR Authorized Representative Date The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially complete and will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01 a.m., on . The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under "Remarks" below. CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By: OWNER Authorized Representative Date REMARKS: DWRF UV Construction Certificate of Final Acceptance October 2016 00640-1 SECTION 00640 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE , 2017 TO: Gentlemen: You are hereby notified that on the day of , 2017, the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted the Work completed by Hydro Construction, Inc. for the City of Fort Collins project, DWRF UV System Construction A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final Payment for all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents which are dated . In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and guarantees will continue for the specified time from the following date: . Sincerely, OWNER: City of Fort Collins By: Title: ATTEST: Title: DWRF UV Construction Lien Waiver Release (Contractor) October 2016 00650-1 SECTION 00650 LIEN WAIVER RELEASE (Contractor) TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER) FROM: (CONTRACTOR) PROJECT: DWRF UV System Construction. 1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project. 2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project. 3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project. 4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred as a result of such claims. 5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any labor and material bonds for the project. DWRF UV Construction Lien Waiver Release (Contractor) October 2016 00650-2 Signed this day of , 2017 CONTRACTOR By: Title: ATTEST: Secretary STATE OF COLORADO ) )ss. COUNTY OF LARIMER ) Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2017, By Witness my hand and official seal. My Commission Expires: Notary Public DWRF UV Construction Lien Waiver Release (Subcontractor) October 2016 00651-1 SECTION 00651 LIEN WAIVER RELEASE (Subcontractor) TO: (CONTRACTOR) FROM: (Subcontractor) PROJECT: DWRF UV System Construction. 1. The Subcontractor acknowledges having received payment, except retainage, from the CONTRACTOR for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the Subcontractor for the CONTRACTOR or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project. 2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the Subcontractor voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which the Subcontractor may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against the CONTRACTOR or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against the project or against all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project. 3. The Subcontractor affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the Subcontractor or its' agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the Subcontractor by various sub-subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or against the CONTRACTOR or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project. 4. The Subcontractor agrees to defend and hold harmless the CONTRACTOR, the lender, if any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the Subcontractor's sub- subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants agents or assigns against the project or against the CONTRACTOR or OWNER, lender or Surety or their officers, employees, agents or assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred as a result of such claims. 5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and may be relied upon by the CONTRACTOR, OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any labor and material bonds for the project. DWRF UV Construction Lien Waiver Release (Subcontractor) October 2016 00651-2 Signed this day of , 2017 SUBCONTRACTOR: By: Title: ATTEST: Secretary STATE OF COLORADO ) )ss. COUNTY OF LARIMER ) Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2017, By Witness my hand and official seal. My Commission Expires: Notary Public DWRF UV Construction Consent of Surety October 2016 00660-1 SECTION 00660 CONSENT OF SURETY TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER") CONTRACTOR: PROJECT: DWRF UV System Construction. CONTRACT DATE: In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as indicated above, for bond of (Surety) hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this day of , 2017. (Surety Company) By: ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact. DWRF UV Construction Contractor Application for Tax Exemption Certificate October 2016 00670-1 DR 0172 (12/98) COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE DENVER CO 80261 (303) 232-2416 DO NOT WRITE IN THIS SPACE The exemption certificate for which you are applying must be used only for the purpose of purchasing construction and building materials for the exempt project described below. This exemption does not include or apply to the purchase or rental of equipment, supplies, and materials which are purchased, rented, or consumed by the contractor and which do not become part of the structure, highway, road, street, or other public works owned and used by the exempt organization. Any unauthorized use of the exemption certificate will result in revocation of your exemption certificate and other penalties provided by law. A separate certificate is required for each contract. Subcontractors will not be issued Certificates of Exemption by the Department of Revenue. It is the responsibility of the prime contractor to issue certificates to each of the subcontractors. (See reverse side). FAILURE TO ACCURATELY COMPLETE ALL BOXES WILL CAUSE THE APPLICATION TO BE DENIED. Registration/Account No. (to be assigned by DOR) 89 - Period 0170-750 (999) $0.00 CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Trade name/DBA: Owner, partner, or corporate name: Mailing address (City, State, Zip): Contact Person E-Mail address: Federal Employer’s Identification Number: Bid amount for your contract: $ Fax Number: ( ) Business telephone number: ( ) Colorado withholding tax account number: EXEMPTION INFORMATION Copies of contract or agreement pages (1) identifying the contracting parties and (2) containing signatures of contracting parties must be attached. Name of exempt organization (as shown on contract): Exempt organization’s number: 98 - Address of exempt organization (City, State, Zip): Principal contact at exempt organization: Principal contact’s telephone number: Physical location of project site (give actual address when applicable and Cities and/or County (ies) where project is located) Scheduled construction start date: Month Day Year Estimated completion date: Month Day Year I declare under penalty of perjury in the second degree that the statements made in this application are true and complete to the best of my knowledge. Signature of owner, partner or corporate officer: Title of corporate officer: Date: DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE CONTRACTOR APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE Pursuant to Statute Section 39-26.114(1)(a)(XIX) 6 DWRF UV Construction Contractor Application for Tax Exemption Certificate October 2016 00670-2 Special Notice Contractors who have completed this application in the past, please note the following changes in procedure: The Department will no longer issue individual Certificates of exemption to subcontractors. Only prime contrac- tors will receive a Contractor’s Exemption Certificate on exempt projects. Upon receipt of the Certificate, the prime contractor should make a copy for each subcontractor involved in the project and complete it by filling in the subcontractor’s name and address and signing it. The original Certificate should always be retained by the prime contractor. Copies of all Certificates that the prime contractor issued to subcontractors should be kept at the prime contractor’s place of business for a minimum of three years and be available for inspection in the event of an audit. Once an 89# has been assigned to you, please use the next five numbers following it for any applications submitted for future projects. This should be your permanent number. For instance, if you were assigned 89- 12345-0001, every application submitted thereafter should contain 89-12345 on the application. The succeed- ing numbers will be issued by the Department of Revenue. DO NOT enter what you believe to be the next in sequence as this may delay processing of your application. DWRF UV Construction Supplementary Conditions October 2016 00800-2 POINTS SC-4.2.1.2. Add the following new paragraph immediately following paragraph 4.2.1.2 of the General Conditions: 4.2.1.2.1 No drawing of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities referred to in Paragraph 4.3) which are at or contiguous to the site have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, except the following: 1. Geotechnical Engineering Report – UV Building at Drake Water Reclamation Facility, Fort Collins, CO July 8, 2016 by Lithos Engineering Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in the documents, but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or upon the completeness of any information in the report. SC-5 BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-5.4.7. Include the following parties or entities as additional Insureds, as provided in paragraph 5.4.7 of the General Conditions: 5.4.7.1.The City of Fort Collins, Colorado, 4316 LaPorte Avenue, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 5.4.7.2. Carollo Engineers, Inc., 10822 W. Toller Drive, Suite 200, Littleton, CO 80127 SC-5.4.8.1. Add the following new paragraph immediately following paragraph 5.4.8 of the General Conditions: 5.4.8.1.1. Limits of Liability. The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph numbers of the General Conditions listed below are as follows: 5.4.1 and 5.4.2 Coverage A - Statutory Limits Coverage B - $100,000 / $100,000 / $500,000. 5.4.3 and 5.4.5 Commercial General Liability policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy will include coverage for Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverage unless waived by the Owner. 5.4.6: The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). 5.4.9. This policy will include completed operations coverage / product liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy shall also include an Umbrella Excess Liability as follows: General liability and automobile liability insurance in an amount not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence in excess of the above stated primary limits. SC-6 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-6.14.3. Add the following new paragraph immediately following paragraph 6.14.2 of the General Conditions: DWRF UV Construction Supplementary Conditions October 2016 00800-3 6.14.3.1. The following Laws or Regulations are included in the Contract Documents as mandated by statute or for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR. Other Laws and Regulations apply which are not included herein, and are within the CONTRACTOR’S duty and responsibility for compliance thereto: 6.14.3.2. Notice to owners of Underground Facilities is required prior to excavations in the vicinity of such facilities. 6.14.3.2. Unless otherwise decided by reason of the amount of the Contract Price involved, or other good reason, before or at the time that the contract is awarded to a corporation outside the State of Colorado, such corporation must carry out the proper procedure to become authorized to do business in the State of Colorado, designate a place of business therein, and appoint an agent for service of process. Such corporation must furnish the OWNER with a certificate from the Secretary of State of Colorado, has been issued by its office and there shall also be procured from the Colorado Secretary of State a photostatic or certified copy of the designated place of business and appointment of agent for service of process, or a letter from the Colorado Secretary of State that such designation of place of business and agent for service of process have been made. 6.14.3.3 The CONTRACTOR must conform to the rules and regulations of the Industrial Commission of Colorado. Particular reference is made to rules and regulations governing excavation Work adopted by the Industrial Commission of Colorado. SC-6.35. Add the following new paragraphs immediately following paragraph 6.34 of the General Conditions: 6.35 Federal Requirements. As applicable, and as may be required for any Work Order, CONTRACTOR agrees to the following additional requirements. 6.35.1. CONTRACTOR agrees that he is subject to the provisions of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and related program requirements, as included in Appendix A of the Supplementary Conditions. 6.35.2. CONTRACTOR agrees to utilize the rural Area business Development Plan, as included in Appendix B of the Supplementary Conditions. 6.35.3. CONTRACTOR agrees to the Prohibition Against Listed Violated Facilities, as included in Appendix C of the Supplementary Conditions. 6.35.4. CONTRACTOR agrees to the provisions of the Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action to ensure equal employment opportunity and related attached documents, as included in Appendix D of the Supplementary Conditions SC-11 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE SC-11.6.2.7. Add the following new paragraph to paragraph 11.6.2 of the General Conditions. 11.6.2.7. Cost of the Work. Allowances for profit, overhead and mark-up prescribed by Article 4 of the Agreement shall be used in lieu of any CONTRACTOR’S fee, overhead, profit or mark-up allowances as prescribed in paragraphs 11.6.2.1, 11.6.2.2 and 11.6.2.3. DWRF UV Construction Supplementary Conditions October 2016 00800-4 SC-12 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES SC-12.3. Add the following language to the end of paragraph 12.3 of the General Conditions. 12.3 … Lost days due to abnormal weather conditions will be allocated as required. END OF SECTION DWRF UV Construction Supplementary Conditions October 2016 00800-5 APPENDIX A WILLIAMS-STEIGER OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT OF 1970 A. AUTHORITY (1) The CONTRACTOR is subject to the provisions of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. (2) These construction documents and the joint and several phases of construction hereby contemplated are to be governed, at all times, by applicable provisions of the Federal law(s), including but not limited to the latest amendment of the following: a. Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, Public Law 94-596; b. Part 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Chapter XVII of the Title 29, Code of the Federal Regulations. c. Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Chapter XVII of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations. B. SAFTEY AND HEALTH PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS (1) This project, its prime contractor and its subcontractors, shall at all times be governed by Chapter XVII of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction (29 CFR 22801), as amended to date. (2) To implement the program and to provide safe and healthful working conditions for all persons, general project safety meetings will be conducted at the site at least once each month during the course of the construction, by the construction superintendent or his/her designated safety officer. Notice of such meeting shall be issued not less than three (3) days prior, stating the exact time, location and agenda to be included. Attendance by the OWNER, architect, general foreman, shop steward(s) and trades, or their designated representatives, witnessed in writing as such, shall be mandatory. (3) To further implement the program, each trade shall conduct a short gang meeting, not less than once a week, to review project safety requirements mandatory for all persons during the coming week. The gang foremen shall report the agenda and specific items covered to the project superintendent, who shall incorporate these items in his/her daily log or report. (4) The prime contractor and all subcontractors shall immediately report all accidents, injuries or health hazards to the owner and architect or their designated representatives, in writing. This shall not obviate any mandatory reporting under the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. (5) This program shall become a part of the contract documents and the contract between the owner and prime contractor, prime contractor and all subcontractors, as though fully written therein. DWRF UV Construction Supplementary Conditions October 2016 00800-6 APPENDIX B RURAL AREA BUSINESS ENTERPRISE DEVELOPMENT PLAN The Contractor agrees and is required to utilize the following affirmative steps: A. Placing Small Businesses in Rural Areas (SBRA) on solicitation lists; B. Ensuring that SBRAs are solicited whenever they are potential sources; C. Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into small tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by SBRAs; D. Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirements of work will permit, which would encourage participation by SBRAs; E. Requiring the contractors if it awards subcontracts, to take the affirmative steps in subparagraphs A. through E. of this condition. DWRF UV Construction Supplementary Conditions October 2016 00800-7 APPENDIX C PROHIBITION AGAINST LISTED VIOLATED FACILITIES A. REQUIREMENTS (1) To comply with all the requirements of section 114 of the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 1857, et seq., as amended by Pub. L. 92-604) and section 308 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1251, as amended), respectively, which relate to inspection, monitoring, entry, reports and information, as well as other requirements specified in section 114 and section of the Air Act and the Water Act, respectively, and all regulations and guidelines issued thereunder before the award of this contract. (2) That no portion of the work required by this prime contract will be performed in a facility listed on the Environmental Protection Agency list of violating facilities on the date when this contract was awarded unless and until the EPA eliminates the name of such facility or facilities from the listing. (3) That the best efforts to comply with clean air and clean water standards at the facilities in which the contract is being performed. (4) To insert the substance of the provisions of this clause, including this paragraph (4), in any nonexempt subcontract. B. DEFINITIONS (1) Air Act means the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 1857 et seq.). (2) Water Act means the Clean Water Act, as amended (33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq.). (3) Clean Air Standards means any enforceable rules, regulations, guidelines, standards, limitations, orders, controls, prohibitions or other requirements which are contained in, issued under or otherwise adopted under the Air Act or Executive Order 11738, an applicable implementation plan as described in section 110(d) of the Air Act (42 U.S.C. 1857c-5(d), an approved implementation procedure or plan -under section 111(c) or section 111(d), or an approved implementation procedure under section 112(d) of the Air Act (42 U.S.C. 1857c-7(d). (4) Clean Water Standards means any enforceable limitation, control, condition, prohibition, standard or other requirement which is promulgated under the Water Act or contained in a permit issued to a discharger by the Environmental Protection Agency or by a State under an approved program, as authorized by section 402 of the Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1342), or by a local government to ensure compliance with pretreatment regulations as required by section 307 of Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1317). (5) Compliance means compliance with clean air or water standards. Compliance shall also mean compliance with a schedule or plan ordered or approved by a court of competent jurisdiction, the Environmental Protection Agency in accordance with the requirements of the Air Act or Water Act and regulations. (6) Facility means any building, plant, installation, structure, mine, vessel or other floating craft, location or site of operations, owned leased or supervised by a contractor or subcontractor, to be used in the performance of a contract or subcontract. Where a location or site of DWRF UV Construction Supplementary Conditions October 2016 00800-8 operations contains or includes more than one building plant, installation or structure, the entire location or site shall be deemed to be a facility except where the Director, Office of Federal Activities, Environmental Protection Agency, determines that independent facilities are located in one geographical area. DWRF UV Construction Addenda, Modifications & Payment Table of Contents October 2016 00900-1 SECTION 00900 ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS, AND PAYMENT 00950 Contract Change Order 00960 Application for Payment DWRF UV Construction Contract Change Order October 2016 00950-1 SECTION 00950 CHANGE ORDER NO. PROJECT TITLE: DWRF UV System Construction CONTRACTOR: PROJECT NUMBER: DESCRIPTION: 1. Reason for change: 2. Description of Change: 3. Change in Contract Cost: 4. Change in Contract Time: ORIGINAL CONTRACT COST $ 3,070,820.00 TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDERS 0.00 TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDERS 0.00 TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER 0.00 THIS C.O. % OF ORIGINAL CONTRACT 0.0% TOTAL C.O.’S % OF ORIGINAL CONTRACT 0.0% ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST $ 3,070,820.00 (Assuming all change orders approved) ACCEPTED BY: DATE: Contractor's Representative ACCEPTED BY: DATE: Project Manager REVIEWED BY: DATE: Title: APPROVED BY: DATE: Title: APPROVED BY: DATE: Gerry S. Paul, Director of Purchasing and Risk Management If over $60,000 cc: Project File Contractor Purchasing Page 1 of 4 PROJECT: DWRF UV System Construction (H-WRF-2016-19) OWNER: City of Fort Collins Utilities CONTRACTOR: APPLICATION NUMBER: 700 Wood Street APPLICATION DATE: Fort Collins, CO 80522 PERIOD BEGINNING: PERIOD ENDING: ENGINEERS: PROJECT NUMBER: CHANGE ORDERS: PAY APPLICATION: NUMBER DATE AMOUNT Application is made for Payment as shown below in connection with the Contract. The present status of the account for this Contract is as follows. Original Contract Amount: Net Change by Change Order: $ - Revised Current Contract Amount: $0.00 Total Work Completed to Date: Total Change Order Work to Date: Total Stored to Date: Total Completed and Stored Materials to Date: $0.00 Less Previous Payments: Amount due this Pay Application (before retainage): $0.00 Less Retainage: $ - Net Change by Change Order: $ - AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION: $0.00 Change Order %: 0.00% CERTIFICATION: The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that all obligations of CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with the WORK have been satisfied as required in paragraph 14.3 of the General Conditions of the Contract. The above Amount Due this Application is requested by the CONTRACTOR's Project Manager. Date: By: Payment of the above Amount Due This Application has been reviewed by the OWNER'S Resident Engineer. Date: By: Jill Burell, Resident Engineer Payment of the above Amount Due This Application has been reviewed by the OWNER'S Project Manager. Date: By: Link Mueller, Utilities Project Manager Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is approved by the OWNER. Date: By: Owen L. Randall, Chief Engineer DWRF UV Construction Page 2 of 4 Pay Request Period Ending: Contract Summary Cost Percent Item # Description Quantity UOM Unit Price Total Quantity Total Quantity Total Quantity Total Remaining Complete 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18a 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25a 26 27 28 Combined: Total Contract Amount Total This Period $ - Previous Billings Total Completed to Date Balance Remaining $ - Percent Complete Crosscheck $ - $ - Contract Summary: Original Contract Amount Change Orders To Date (see attached) Adjusted Contract Amount Total Completed to Date Total Materials Remaining @ Site Total Change Order Work to Date (see attached) Value of Work in Place Percent Complete Including Stored Materials Less Retention @ 10% up to 50% complete, 5% beyond 50% of Adjusted Contract Total to Date Less Retention Less Previous Billings Total Due This Period Previous Total to Date DWRF UV Construction 11/15/2016 Page 3 of 4 Change Change Order Summary This Period Previous Total to Date Cost Percent Order # Description Quantity UOM Unit Price Total Amount Quantity Amount Quantity Amount Quantity Amount Remaining Complete 1 Total Amount of Change Orders $ - Total This Period $ - Previous Billings $ - Total Completed to Date $ - Balance Remaining $ - Percent Complete #DIV/0! DWRF UV Construction 11/15/2016 Page 4 of 4 Bid Vendor Invoice Invoiced Item Amount This Month Previous Total Placed Previous Left on Hand Item Pay Request # Description Invoice # Date Quantity UOM Unit Price Total Amount Quantity Amount Quantity Amount To Date Quantity Amount Quantity Amount Quantity Amount Pipe Materials Claimed This Period: Item Reference Date - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - - lf - - - - - - - - - - - - Subtotal - - - - - - - - - - Total Materials Procured as Stored Materials $ - $ - $ - $ - Materials Installed This Period $ - Materials Installed Previous $ - Total Materials Remaining @ Site $ - Place This Month DWRF UV Construction Attachment A October 2016 ATTACHMENT A Bid/RFP #: 8286 Construction Contractor for Projects at the Water and Wastewater Treatment Facilities Work Order # H-WRF-2016-19 DWRF UV System Construction Drawings Sheet Title Revision Date Overall Sheet Pg # Revision Count Dsgnt. Holder Sheet Description Date SHEET DRAWING NO. DRAWING TITLE GENERAL 1 G - 01 COVER SHEET 10/21/2016 2 G - 02 SHEET INDEX AND DESIGN CRITERIA 10/21/2016 3 G - 03 PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM (LIQUID STREAM) 10/21/2016 4 G - 04 HYDRAULIC PROFILE 10/21/2016 5 G - 05 GENERAL LEGENDS 10/21/2016 6 G - 06 ABBREVIATIONS 10/21/2016 CIVIL 7 GC - 01 EROSION CONTROL DETAILS 10/21/2016 8 GC 02 GENERAL CIVIL DETAILS 1 10/21/2016 9 GC - 03 GENERAL CIVIL DETAILS 2 10/21/2016 10 C-UVD - 01 OVERALL SITE PLAN 10/21/2016 11 C-UVD - 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 10/21/2016 12 C-UVD - 03 YARD PIPING DEMOLITION 10/21/2016 13 C-UVD - 04 YARD PIPING PLAN 10/21/2016 14 C-UVD - 05 YARD PIPING PROFILES 10/21/2016 15 C-UVD - 06 GRADING AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN 10/21/2016 16 C-UVD - 07 FLOWLINE PLAN AND PROFILE 10/21/2016 DEMOLITION 17 GD - 01 DEMOLITION GENERAL NOTES 10/21/2016 18 DS-UVD - 01 DEMOLITION PLAN 1 10/21/2016 19 DS-UVD - 02 DEMOLITION PLAN 2 10/21/2016 20 DS-UVD - 03 DEMOLITION PLAN 3 10/21/2016 DWRF UV Construction Attachment A October 2016 21 DS-UVD - 04 DEMOLITION SECTIONS 1 10/21/2016 22 DS-UVD - 05 DEMOLITION SECTIONS 2 10/21/2016 ARCHITECTURAL 23 GA - 01 ARCHITECTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 1 10/21/2016 24 GA - 02 ARCHITECTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 2 10/21/2016 25 GA - 03 ARCHITECTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 3 10/21/2016 26 GA - 04 ARCHITECTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 4 10/21/2016 27 GA - 05 ARCHITECTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 5 10/21/2016 28 A-UVD - 01 CODE ANALYSIS, SCHEDULES, AND ROOF PLAN 10/21/2016 29 A-UVD 02 UV BUILDING ELEVATIONS 10/21/2016 30 A-UVD - 03 SECTION AND DETAILS 1 10/21/2016 31 A-UVD - 04 SECTION AND DETAILS 2 10/21/2016 STRUCTURAL 32 GS - 01 STRUCTURAL NOTES AND DESIGN CRITERIA 10/21/2016 33 GS - 02 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 1 10/21/2016 34 GS - 03 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 2 10/21/2016 35 GS - 04 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 3 10/21/2016 36 GS - 05 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 4 10/21/2016 37 GS - 06 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 5 10/21/2016 38 GS - 07 STRUCTURAL TYPICAL DETAILS 6 10/21/2016 39 S-UVD - 01 UV FACILITY PLAN 1 10/21/2016 40 S-UVD - 02 UV FACILITY PLAN 2 10/21/2016 41 S-UVD - 03 UV FACILITY PLAN 3 10/21/2016 42 S-UVD - 04 UV FACILITY PLAN 4 10/21/2016 43 S-UVD - 05 UV FACILITY PLAN 5 10/21/2016 44 S-UVD - 06 UV FACILITY SECTIONS AND DETAILS 1 10/21/2016 45 S-UVD - 07 UV FACILITY SECTIONS AND DETAILS 2 10/21/2016 46 S-UVD - 08 UV FACILITY SECTIONS AND DETAILS 3 10/21/2016 47 S-UVD - 09 UV FACILITY SECTIONS AND DETAILS 4 10/21/2016 48 S-UVD - 10 UV FACILITY SECTIONS AND DETAILS 5 10/21/2016 49 S-UVD - 11 UV FACILITY SECTIONS AND DETAILS 6 10/21/2016 50 S-UVD - 12 UV FACILITY SECTIONS AND DETAILS 7 10/21/2016 51 S-UVD - 13 UV FACILITY WEIR DETAILS 10/21/2016 52 S-UVD - 14 UV FACILITY DETAILS 10/21/2016 53 S-UVD - 15 UV FACILITY ROOF AND MEZZANINE DETAILS 10/21/2016 MECHANICAL 54 GM - 01 MECHANICAL LEGENDS AND 10/21/2016 DWRF UV Construction Attachment A October 2016 ABBREVIATIONS 55 GM - 02 MECHANICAL TYPICAL DETAILS 1 10/21/2016 56 GM - 03 MECHANICAL TYPICAL DETAILS 2 10/21/2016 57 M-UVD - 01 UV FACILITY LOWER PLAN 10/21/2016 58 M-UVD - 02 UV FACILITY UPPER PLAN 10/21/2016 59 M-UVD - 03 UV FACILITY SECTIONS AND DETAILS 1 10/21/2016 60 M-UVD - 04 UV FACILITY SECTIONS AND DETAILS 2 10/21/2016 61 M-UVD - 05 UV FACILITY SECTIONS AND DETAILS 3 10/21/2016 HVAC 62 GH - 01 HVAC LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS 10/21/2016 63 GH - 02 HVAC TYPICAL DETAILS 1 10/21/2016 64 H-UVD - 01 UV FACILITY PLAN 10/21/2016 ELECTRICAL 65 GE - 01 ELECTRICAL LEGEND 10/21/2016 66 GE - 02 ELECTRICAL ABBREVIATIONS 10/21/2016 67 GE - 03 TYPICALS 10/21/2016 68 GE - 04 TYPICALS 10/21/2016 69 GE - 05 TYPICALS 10/21/2016 70 GE - 06 SCHEDULES 10/21/2016 71 ESD- EDD - 00 PLANT POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATIC 10/21/2016 72 DESD- EDD - 10 POWER DISTRIBUTION SSB1208 - ONE-LINE DEMOLITION 10/21/2016 73 ESD- EDD - 10 POWER DISTRIBUTION SSB1208 - ONE-LINE 10/21/2016 74 ESD- EDD - 13 POWER DISTRIBUTION SSB1211 - ONE-LINE 10/21/2016 75 ESD- 1211DP1 - 01 UV BUILDING ONE-LINE 10/21/2016 76 SED - 02 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN 1 10/21/2016 77 SED - 02A ELECTRICAL DUCTBANK SECTIONS 10/21/2016 78 E-UVD - 01 UV BUILDING ELECTRICAL LOWER POWER AND CONTROL PLAN 10/21/2016 79 E-UVD - 02 UV BUILDING ELECTRICAL UPPER POWER AND CONTROL PLAN 10/21/2016 80 E-UVD - 03 LIGHTING, RECEPTACLES, AND GROUNDING 10/21/2016 INSTRUMENTATION 81 GI - 01 SYMBOLS & ABBBREVIATIONS - I 10/21/2016 82 GI - 02 SYMBOLS & ABBBREVIATIONS - II 10/21/2016 DWRF UV Construction Attachment A October 2016 83 GI - 03 SYMBOLS & ABBBREVIATIONS - III 10/21/2016 84 GI - 04 SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS - I 10/21/2016 85 GI - 05 SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS - II 10/21/2016 86 GI - 06 TYPICAL DETAILS 10/21/2016 87 I - 01 NETWORK DIAGRAM 10/21/2016 88 I - 02 NETWORK DIAGRAM 10/21/2016 89 PI-SBD - 01 SAMPLE BUILDING 10/21/2016 90 PI-SBD - 02 SAMPLE BUILDING 10/21/2016 91 PI-UVD - 01 UV DISINFECTION - I 10/21/2016 92 PI-UVD - 02 UV DISINFECTION - II 10/21/2016 93 PI-UVD - 03 UV DISINFECTION - III 10/21/2016 94 PI-UVD - 04 UV DISINFECTION - IV 10/21/2016 95 PI-UVD - 05 UV DISINFECTION - V 10/21/2016 96 PI-HVD - 01 UV HVAC 10/21/2016 97 PI-HVD - 02 UV HVAC 10/21/2016 Carollo Engineers assumes no responsibility for CAD drawings or other electronic documents that have been modified or reused for any other purpose or project. Electronic documents are not Contract Documents. These electronic documents are being furnished as a convenience for information and background purposes only, without any guarantee as to hardcopy compatibility. DRAKE WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY UV DISINFECTION SYSTEM PROJECT CAROLLO PROJECT NO. 10188A10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 100% SUBMITTAL VOLUME 1 OF 3 DIVISIONS 01-23 OCTOBER 2016 10822 West Toller Drive, Suite 200 Littleton, Colorado 80127 303-980-8260 Digitally signed by Jason C. Garside Contact Info: Carollo Engineers, Inc. Date: 2016.10.20 11:08:46-06'00' October 2016 TOC-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/00_00_02 (FS-100) CITY OF FORT COLLINS DRAKE WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY UV DISINFECTION SYSTEM PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 OF 3 DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION NO. TITLE 01_11_00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01_14_00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01_29_00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01_29_73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01_29_77 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01_31_19 PROJECT MEETINGS 01_32_34 PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01_33_00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01_35_21 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 01_35_22 SAFETY PLAN 01_35_44 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES 01_35_45 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES: BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES 01_41_00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01_42_13 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 01_45_00 QUALITY CONTROL 01_45_24 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 01_60_00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01_75_17 COMMISSIONING 01_75_19 WATER LEAKAGE TEST FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES 01_77_00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01_78_23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01_78_36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01_81_01 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA 01_81_02 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA 01_81_04 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE SECTION NO. TITLE 03_01_01 PREPACKAGED SMALL AGGREGATE REPAIR CONCRETE 03_01_05 CONCRETE MODIFICATION AND REPAIR 03_11_07 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03_15_00 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES Digitally signed by Jason C. Garside Contact Info: Carollo Engineers, Inc. Date: 2016.10.20 11:09:15-06'00' October 2016 TOC-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/00_00_02 (FS-100) 03_15_14 HYDROPHILIC RUBBER WATERSTOP 03_20_00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03_21_17 ADHESIVE-BONDED REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN CONCRETE 03_30_00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03_35_29 CONCRETE FINISHES 03_60_00 GROUTING 03_63_01 EPOXIES 03_63_02 EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT 03_64_24 EPOXY INJECTION SYSTEM 03_64_25 HYDROPHILIC FOAM POLYURETHANE RESIN INJECTION SYSTEM DIVISION 04 – MASONRY SECTION NO. TITLE 04_05_17 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04_05_18 ADHESIVE BONDING REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN MASONRY 04_05_23 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04_22_00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04_22_16 ANCHORED CMU VENEER DIVISION 05 – METALS SECTION NO. TITLE 05_05_24 MECHANICAL ANCHORING AND FASTENING TO CONCRETE AND MASONRY 05_12_00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05_14_05 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM 05_21_19 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05_31_00 STEEL DECKING 05_50_00 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION NO. TITLE 06_80_17 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION NO. TITLE 07_11_00 DAMPPROOFING 07_22_00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07_26_00 VAPOR RETARDERS 07_41_15 METAL SOFFITS 07_51_20 ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT October 2016 TOC-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/00_00_02 (FS-100) 07_60_00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07_61_13 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07_84_14 FIBROUS FIRE SAFING 07_90_00 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS SECTION NO. TITLE 08_11_13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08_71_00 DOOR HARDWARE DIVISION 09 – FINISHES SECTION NO. TITLE 09_91_00 PAINTING 09_96_01 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING SECTION NO. TITLE 22_42_01 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) SECTION NO. TITLE 23_05_93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23_07_13 DUCTWORK INSULATION 23_09_13 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC 23_17_43 ELECTRIC SNOW MELT SYSTEM - GENERAL 23_31_13 METAL DUCTS 23_33_00 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23_34_01 FANS 23_37_24 LOUVERS 23_81_14 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23_83_01 HEATING UNITS VOLUME 2 OF 3 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION NO. TITLE 26_05_00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26_05_09 LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500 HORSEPOWER 26_05_18 600-VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES 26_05_20 FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND APPURTENANCES 26_05_21 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS 26_05_26 GROUNDING AND BONDING 26_05_29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26_05_33 CONDUITS October 2016 TOC-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/00_00_02 (FS-100) 26_05_34 BOXES 26_05_35 WIREWAY 26_05_38 ALUMINUM CABLE TRAYS 26_05_44 DUCT BANKS 26_05_53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26_06_01 CONDUIT SCHEDULE 26_08_50 FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS 26_09_13 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26_12_20 LIQUID FILLED PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS 26_22_14 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26_24_14 GROUP-MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHBOARDS 26_24_16 PANELBOARDS 26_27_26 WIRING DEVICES 26_28_01 LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26_28_17 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26_29_05 MOTOR STARTERS 26_36_24 TRANSFER SWITCHES 26_41_01 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26_43_14 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26_50_10 LIGHTING: LED LUMINAIRES DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK SECTION NO. TITLE 31_00_00 EARTHWORK 31_05_15 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK 31_23_17 TRENCHING 31_23_19 DEWATERING 31_23_24 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM) 31_32_18.02 FILTER FABRIC 31_63_30 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS SECTION NO. TITLE 32_12_16 ASPHALT PAVING 32_13_13 CONCRETE PAVING/FLATWORK DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES SECTION NO. TITLE 33_05_01 SANITARY SEWER 33_05_02 WATERLINES 33_05_03 DISINFECTION 33_39_13 MANHOLES AND COVERS 33_71_21 PRECAST ELECTRICAL HANDHOLES AND ELECTRICAL MANHOLES October 2016 TOC-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/00_00_02 (FS-100) DIVISION 10 – PROCESS INTEGRATION SECTION NO. TITLE 40_05_00.01 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR GENERAL PIPING 40_05_00.03 PIPE IDENTIFICATION 40_05_00.09 PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING 40_05_06.03 PIPE COUPLINGS 40_05_06.55 PIPING INSULATION 40_05_07.01 PIPE SUPPORTS 40_05_07.03 PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM 40_05_17.05 COPPER WATER TUBE: SEAMLESS, ASTM B88 40_05_17.07 COPPER TUBE: SEAMLESS, ASTM B280 40_05_17.09 COPPER PIPE: ASTM B302 40_05_19.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE: AWWA C151 40_05_19.06 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE: ASTM A74 40_05_31.01 PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING 40_05_31.16 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 40_05_31.17 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: SCHEDULE TYPE 40_05_51.01 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR VALVES 40_05_52 SPECIALTY VALVES 40_05_57.13 MANUAL ACTUATORS 40_05_57.23 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 40_05_59.34 HEAVY-DUTY FABRICATED STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES 40_05_61 PLUG VALVES 40_05_63 BALL VALVES 40_05_65.24 CHECK VALVES 40_05_67.37 PRESSURE REDUCING AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES 40_61_00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION 40_67_01 CONTROL SYSTEMS: PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS 40_72_13 LEVEL MEASUREMENT: ULTRASONIC 40_75_29 ANALYZERS: AMMONIA 40_75_53 ANALYZERS: TURBIDITY 40_80_01 TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND COMMISSIONING DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT SECTION NO. TITLE 46_05_10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 46_05_11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 46_05_94 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING October 2016 01_11_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_11_00 (FS-100) SECTION 01_11_00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Detailed description of the Work. 1.02 THE WORK A. The Work consists of the following: 1. UV Disinfection System: a. Modifications to the existing Chlorine Contact Basin (CCB) for the installation of a two-channel UV System. Modifications structural demolition and installation of new concrete walls. b. Installation of UV Equipment for purposes of disinfection of secondary effluent flow, and associated instrumentation controls equipment. UV Equipment to be provided by the UV Supplier. Baffle plates to be installed as supplied by UV Supplier. c. Inlet and outlet isolation gates. d. UV Channel drains and associated isolation valves. 2. UV Facility: a. A new building located over the existing CCB. b. Building shall consist of a UV Room to provide access the UV equipment and to house sampling equipment and maintenance support equipment; and an Electrical Room to house the electrical equipment associated with the UV System. c. Final effluent sampling access and water quality analyzers. 3. Chlorination of NPW and RAS (scope of improvements to be determined). 4. Final clarifier weir covers: a. Fiberglass dome covers over all final clarifier weirs (materials supply and installation included as a separate project). 1.03 LOCATION OF PROJECT A. The Work is located at the Drake Water Reclamation Facility (DWRF) in Fort Collins, CO. 1.04 OWNER ASSIGNED SUBCONTRACTORS A. Assignment of subcontractors by Owner is not anticipated: 1.05 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. Owner will furnish the following products: 1. None. October 2016 01_11_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_11_00 (FS-100) 1.06 PRE-PURCHASED EQUIPMENT A. Contractor has purchased the following equipment outside of this contract for installation in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. UV Disinfection Equipment. 1.07 ACTIVITIES BY OTHERS A. Activities by others which may affect performance of work include: 1. None. 1.08 PARTIAL USE OR OCCUPANCY A. None. 1.09 ALTERNATES A. None. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_14_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_14_00 (FS-100) SECTION 01_14_00 WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Requirements for sequencing and scheduling the Work affected by existing site and facility, work restrictions, and coordination between construction operations and plant operations. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_11_00 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 1.02 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS ON SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK A. Wastewater projects: 1. Conduct Work in a manner that will not impair the operational capabilities of essential elements of the treatment process or reduce the capacity of the entire treatment plant below levels sufficient to treat the quality of raw wastewater to the water quality limitations specified in the discharge permit. 2. Conduct commissioning and process start-up activities as specified in Section 01_75_17 in a manner that will not impair the operational capabilities of essential elements of the treatment process or reduce the capacity of the entire treatment plant below levels sufficient to treat the quality of raw wastewater to the water quality limitations specified in the discharge permit. 3. The status of the treatment plant shall be defined as "operational" when it is capable of treating the entire quantity of wastewater received to the water quality limits specified in the discharge permit. B. Work sequence and constraints: 1. Utilize work sequencing, as agreed upon Owner and Engineer, necessary to minimize disruption of the existing facilities and to ensure compliance with permit requirements. C. Instrumentation and controls process performance testing: 1. After the Process Operational Period, test PCIS system as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.03 SHUTDOWN AND CONSTRUCTION CONSTRAINTS A. General shutdown constraints: 1. Some activities may be accomplished without a shutdown. 2. Apply to activities of construction regardless of process or work area. 3. Activities that disrupt plant or utilities operations must comply with these shutdown constraints. 4. Organize work to be completed in a minimum number of shutdowns. 5. Provide thorough advanced planning, including having required equipment, materials, and labor on hand at time of shutdown. October 2016 01_14_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_14_00 (FS-100) 6. Where required to minimize treatment process interruptions while complying with specified sequencing constraints, provide temporary pumping, power, lighting, controls, instrumentation, and safety devices. 7. Final determination of the permitting of shutdowns will be the sole judgment of the Owner. 8. Owner maintains the ability to abort on the day of the scheduled shutdown. B. Shutdown activities: 1. Scheduling: a. Perform between the hours agreed upon by Engineer or Owner. 2. Unplanned shutdowns due to emergencies are not indicated in this Section. C. Dewatering of existing process and disposal of residue: 1. The Owner and Contractor will coordinate to determine theprocedures required to dewater and dispose of liquid, solids, etc. a. Drainage and disposal of process unit liquids, solids, etc. into another treatment process unit on the plant site may be allowed if approved in advance by the Owner. b. Costs for dewatering, disposal of solids and residuals, and preparation of surfaces for the Work are Contractor’s responsibility, unless determined otherwise through coordination between Owner and Contractor. c. Contractor shall provide adequate time in schedules for draining and cleanup of basins and channels. 1.04 COMPLIANCE WITH NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEMPERMIT A. The existing facility is operating under the terms of a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System permit issued by the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment. This permit specifies the water quality limits that the plant must meet prior to discharge of effluent. A copy of the existing permit is on file for review at the Drake Water Reclamation Facility. B. Perform work in a manner that will not prevent the existing facility from achieving the finished water quality requirements established by regulations. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION OF PLANT AND MAINTAINING CONTINUOUS OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. Facilities or conditions required to keep the existing plant operational include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Electrical power including transformers, distribution wiring, and motor control centers. 2. Piping for conveyance of raw, partially treated and final effluent. 3. Disinfection of secondary effluent. B. Conduct the Work and provide temporary facilities required to keep the existing plant continuously operational. C. Do not remove or demolish existing facilities required to keep the existing plant operational at the capacities specified until the existing facilities are replaced by temporary, new, or upgraded facilities or equipment. October 2016 01_14_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_14_00 (FS-100) 1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE ACCESS A. Provide safe, continuous access to process control equipment for plant operations personnel. B. Provide access on 1-hour advance notice to process control equipment for plant maintenance personnel and associated maintenance equipment. 1.07 UTILITIES A. Provide advance notice to and utilize services of Underground Services Alert (U.S.A.) for location and marking of underground utilities operated by utility agencies other than the Owner. B. Maintain electrical, telephone, water, gas, sanitary facilities, and other utilities within existing facilities in service. Provide temporary utilities when necessary. 1.08 WORK SEQUENCE A. To be determined by Contractor and agreed upon by Owner and Engineer. B. Dewater the site to lower the groundwater elevation to below elevation 4,870.0 feet prior to demolition or drawing down existing basin water. C. All construction loading is to be placed a minimum of 6 feet-0 inches away from the exterior face of the existing walls on gridlines 1.1, 1.9, C and E of Structural Drawings. D. For work within existing FE Channel and install of PRPA pump station feed line extention, leave 5 feet-0 inches wide void full width of channel at existing pipe. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_29_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_29_00 (FS-100) SECTION 01_29_00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Payment for the various items of the Work Order executed by Owner and Contractor, as further specified herein, shall include all compensation to be received by the Contractor for furnishing all tools, equipment, supplies, and manufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and incidentals appurtenant to the items of work being described, as necessary to complete the various items of the Work all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances thereto, and including all costs of permits and cost of compliance with the regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction, including Safety and Health Requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the U.S. Department of Labor (OSHA). No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in the Work Order, and all costs therefore shall be included in the prices named in the Work Order for the various appurtenant items of work listed in Section 01_29_73. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 1.03 PAY ITEMS A. Payment to Contractor shall be established according to Section 01_29_73 Schedule of Values and Article 11 of the General Conditions of the Agreement executed between Owner and Contractor. Measurement will not be made for individual pay items associated with the Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) Agreement. The Engineer or Owner may at times during the execution of the Agreement field measure, estimate, and reference work to establish a reasonable check of the Contractor's progress as a basis for payment. B. Each pay item identified in the Schedule of Values shall be paid on a lump sum basis as a percentage complete per month. 1.04 PROCEDURE A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Engineer a pay application form approved by the Owner and Engineer containing the Schedule of Values. This form shall establish the basis for progress payments throughout the execution of the Work. B. The pay application form shall contain approval sections for both the Owner and Engineer. Failure to provide these sections will result in delayed or unprocessed pay applications. October 2016 01_29_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_29_00 (FS-100) C. Payment to the Contractor shall be in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. The Contractor shall provide the following supporting documentation for each pay application: 1. Permanent material receipts, vendor invoices, subcontractor and consultant billings; 2. Internal equipment, labor, and expendable material costs shall be provided through the Contractor's accounting system detail summary in the form of a Variance Report that outlines job costs per cost code expended on the project to date. 3. According to the Agreement and executed Work Order, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner and Engineer a summary of costs differing from the established contract value. The summary of project costs shall outline the additions and deductions to the GMP through the reporting period. The frequency of the reporting period shall be agreed to by the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer immediately following the Agreement or Work Order execution. The project cost summary shall be the basis for contract adjustments and allowed shared savings near or at the end of the contract time. 1.05 RETAINAGE A. The Contractor shall have the ability to request partial retainage releases from the Owner during the course of the Work Order. The Contractor shall submit such requests in writing to the Engineer for approval and recommendation to the Owner. Retainage release requests will be processed according to the General Terms and Conditions of the Agreement. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_29_73-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_29_73 (FS-100) SECTION 01_29_73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Requirements for preparation, format, and submittal of Schedule of Values. 1.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare Schedule of Values identifying costs of Major Items of Work and other costs as deemed appropriate to show adequate level of detail. A. Assign prices to Major Items of Work which aggregate the Contract Price. Base prices on costs associated with scheduled activities based on the Project Schedule for each Major Item of Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit preliminary schedule of values. B. Submit corrected schedule of values within 10 days upon receipt of reviewed Schedule of Values, but no later than 10 days prior to anticipated submittal of first Application for Payment. C. Upon request, support prices with data which will substantiate their correctness. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_29_77-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_29_77 (FS-100) SECTION 01_29_77 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for Payment. 1.02 FORMAT A. Develop satisfactory spreadsheet-type form. B. When Change Orders are executed, add Change Orders at end of listing of scheduled activities: 1. Identify change order by number and description. 2. Provide cost of change order in appropriate column. C. After completing, submit Application for Payment. D. Owner will review application for accuracy. When accurate, Owner will process payment. E. Execute application with signature of responsible officer of Contractor. 1.03 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. Provide Substantiating Data with cover letter identifying: 1. Project. 2. Application number and date. 3. Detailed list of enclosures. 4. For stored products with item number and identification on application, description of specific material, and proof of insurance coverage for offsite stored products. 5. Submit “certified” payroll, if applicable. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Application for Payment and Substantiating Data with cover letter. B. Submit Variance Report with supporting documentation for each pay application. 1.05 PAYMENT REQUESTS A. Prepare progress payment requests on a monthly basis. Base requests on the breakdowns of costs for each scheduled activity and the percentage of completion for each activity. October 2016 01_29_77-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_29_77 (FS-100) B. Indicate total dollar amount of work planned for every month of the project. Equate sum of monthly amounts to Guaranteed Maximum Contract Price. C. Generate Progress Payment request forms by downloading cost data to a spreadsheet type format. Identify each activity that has a cost associated with it, the cost for each activity, the estimated percent complete for each activity, and the value of work completed for both the payment period and job to date. D. Prepare summary of cost information for each Major Item of Work listed in the Schedule of Values. Identify the value of work completed for both the payment period and job to date. E. Payment period: 1. Monthly Application for Payment period shall begin on the 1st day of each month, and end on the last day of each month. 2. Submit Application for Payment to Owner no later than the 5th day of each month for work completed the previous month. 3. Owner will finalize Application for Payment by the 30th day of each month to allow time for processing and approval. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_31_19-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_31_19 (FS-100) SECTION 01_31_19 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Requirements for conducting conferences and meetings for the purposes of addressing issues related to the Work, reviewing and coordinating progress of the Work and other matters of common interest, and includes the following: 1. Preconstruction Conference. 2. Progress Meetings. 3. Pre-Installation Meetings. 4. Other Meetings. 5. Close-Out Meeting. 6. Post-construction Meetings. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_14_00 - Work Restrictions. 2. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 3. Section 40_61_00 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS OF MEETING PARTICIPANTS A. Representatives of entities participating in meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents. 1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Upon issuance of Notice to Proceed, or earlier when mutually agreeable, Resident Engineer will arrange preconstruction conference at the Drake Water Reclamation Facility. B. Preconstruction Conference invitees: Contractor's project manager and superintendent, Owner, Engineer, Resident Engineer, representatives of utilities, major subcontractors and others involved in performance of the Work, and others necessary to agenda. C. Purpose of conference: To establish working understanding between parties and to discuss Construction Schedule, shop drawing and other submittals, processing of submittals and applications for payment, and other subjects pertinent to execution of the Work. D. Resident Engineer will record minutes of meeting and distribute copies of minutes within seven (7) days of meeting to participants and interested parties. October 2016 01_31_19-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_31_19 (FS-100) 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Progress meetings will be held every week at the Drake Water Reclamation Facility. B. Resident Engineer will record minutes and distribute copies within five (5) calendar days after meeting to participants, with copies to Contractor, Owner, Engineer, and those affected by decisions made. 1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections or requested by Owner or Engineer, convene pre-installation meeting at Project site before commencing work of specific section. 1.06 OTHER MEETINGS A. Other meetings that will be required, if topics not addressed at weekly progress meetings, include pre-shutdown meetings, process start-up meetings, and electrical coordination and instrumentation meetings. 1.07 CLOSE-OUT MEETING A. Resident Engineer will schedule close-out meeting. B. Resident Engineer will make arrangements for meeting, prepare agenda with copies for participants, and preside at meeting. C. Attendance required: Owner, Engineer, Resident Engineer, Contractor, and Contractor’s Project Manager and Superintendent. D. Agenda: 1. Review punchlist completion. 2. Transfer of record documents. 3. Finalize payment. E. Resident Engineer will record minutes and within five (5) calendar days after meeting distribute copies to participants. 1.08 POST CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Meet with and inspect the Work 11 months and 23 months after date of Substantial Completion with Owner and Engineer. B. Arrange meeting at least 7 days before meeting. C. Meet in Owner’s office or other mutually agreed upon place. D. Inspect the Work and draft list of items to be completed or corrected. E. Review service and maintenance contracts, and take appropriate corrective action when necessary. October 2016 01_31_19-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_31_19 (FS-100) F. Complete or correct defective work and extend correction period accordingly. G. Require attendance of Contractor, Project Manager, or Superintendent, appropriate manufacturers and installers of major units of constructions, and affected subcontractors. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_32_34-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_32_34 (FS-100) SECTION 01_32_34 PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for photographs and videos. B. The purpose of the photographs and videos is to document the condition of the facilities prior to the Contractor beginning work at the Project site, the progress of the Work, and the Project site after Substantial Completion of the Work. C. The scope of the photographic and videographic documentation shall performed by the Resident Engineer. Contractor shall coordinate with Resident Engineer as necessary to provide support in photographic and videographic documentation. D. Resident Engineer will maintain photographic records of the project documenting pre-construction, construction, and postconstruction conditions. This work is completed as part of the daily log record and will include brief descriptions of the photograph with a time and date reference. E. Related sections: 1. Section 01_77_00 - Closeout Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_33_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) SECTION 01_33_00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Requirements and procedures for submittals. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_29_77 - Applications for Payment. 2. Section 01_77_00 - Closeout Procedures. 3. Section 26_05_09 - Low Voltage Motors Up to 500 Horsepower. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NSF International: 1. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Certificates: Describe certificates that document affirmations by the Contractor or other entity that the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Extra stock materials: Describe extra stock materials to be provided for the Owner's use in facility operation and maintenance. C. Maintenance material submittals: Use this article to categorize maintenance materials submittals requiring no Engineer action other than confirmation of receipt under an explanatory heading. D. Manufacturer's instructions: Instructions, stipulations, directions, and recommendations issued in printed form by the manufacturer of a product addressing handling, installation, erection, and application of the product; manufacturer's instructions are not prepared especially for the Work. E. Product data: Product data usually consists of manufacturers' printed data sheets or catalog pages illustrating the products to be incorporated into the project. F. Samples: Samples are full-size actual products intended to illustrate the products to be incorporated into the project. Sample submittals are often necessary for such characteristics as colors, textures, and other appearance issues. G. Spare parts: Describe spare parts necessary for the Owner's use in facility operation and maintenance; identify the type and quantity here, but include the actual characteristics of the spare parts in Product as part of the specification of the product. H. Shop drawings: Shop drawings are prepared specifically for the project to illustrate details, dimensions, and other data necessary for satisfactory fabrication or October 2016 01_33_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) construction that are not shown in the contract documents. Shop drawings could include graphic line-type drawings, single-line diagrams, or schedules and lists of products and their application. I. Submittals: Submittals are samples, product data, shop drawings, and others that demonstrate how Contractor intends to conform with the Contract Documents. J. Tools: Tools are generally defined as items such as special wrenches, gauges, circuit setters, and other similar devices required for the proper operation or maintenance of a system that would not normally be in the Owner's tool kit. 1.04 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide submittals that are specified or reasonably required for construction, operation, and maintenance of the Work. B. Provide submittal information from only 1 manufacturer for a specified product, unless otherwise approved by Engineer. C. Where multiple submittals are required, provide a separate submittal for each specification section. 1. In order to expedite construction, the Contractor may make more than 1 submittal per specification section, but a single submittal may not cover more than 1 specification section: 2. The only exception to this requirement is when 1 specification section covers the requirements for a component of equipment specified in another section. D. For example, circuit breakers are a component of switchgear. The switchgear submittal must also contain data for the associated circuit breakers, even though they are covered in a different specification section. E. Edit all submittals so that the submittal specifically applies to only the equipment furnished. Neatly cross out all extraneous text, options, models, etc., that do not apply to the equipment being furnished, so that the information remaining is only applicable to the equipment being furnished. F. Prepare submittals in the English language. Do not include information in other languages. G. Present measurements in customary American units (feet, inches, pounds, etc.). H. Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls, manufacturers, catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details. I. Indicate project designated equipment tag numbers from P&IDs for submittal of devices, equipment, and assemblies. J. Submittals shall be provided in electronic media format: 1. General: Provide all information In PC-compatible format using Windows® operating system. October 2016 01_33_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) 2. Text: Provide text documents and manufacturer’s literature using current version of Adobe® Acrobat® (i.e., PDF extension). 3. Graphics: Provide all graphic submittals (drawings, diagrams) utilizing current version of Adobe® Acrobat® (i.e., PDF extension). 1.05 SUBMITTAL ORGANIZATION A. Fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every component. B. Sequentially number pages within the tabbed sections: 1. Submittals that are not fully indexed and tabbed with sequentially numbered pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be returned without review. C. Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section. D. For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual devices must list the area where the device is used. E. Consolidate electronic format submittals with multiples pages into a single file. 1.06 SUBMITTAL COVER SHEETS A. Submittal Transmittal Form is provided in Appendix A of this Section. 1. Contractor submittal transmittal form is acceptable provided that it includes information, statements, and certifications comparable to the Submittal Transmittal Form. 2. Submittal Number Field: Required submittal numbering format (unless other format approved by Owner and Engineer): Section number-sequential number- resubmittal number: a. Example: 03_20_00-002-1: 1) “03_20_00” indicates the affected specification is Section 03_20_00. 2) “002” indicates the second submittal under this Section. 3) “1” indicates the first resubmittal of the Submittal. b. Contractor may add a separate numbering scheme for Contractor’s internal use. However, all correspondence with Engineer must include the required submittal numbering. 3. “From” Field: Provide name and address of company responsible for preparation of submittal. This could be General Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer, etc. 4. “General Contractor Reviewer” Field: Verify that the General Contractor has reviewed the submittal by signature. B. Contractor sign and date submittals indicating review and approval: 1. Signature indicates Contractor certifies that they have satisfied submittal review responsibilities and constitutes Contractor's written approval of submittal. October 2016 01_33_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) C. Attachments: 1. Specification section deviations: a. Provide a list of all numbered deviations, with reference to Specification Section and pertinent paragraph, with a clear explanation and reason for the deviation. 2. Drawings deviations: a. Provide a list of all numbered deviations, with reference to specific Drawing, with a clear explanation and reason for the deviation. Provide field dimensions and relationship to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials. D. Contractor: Prepare submittal information in sufficient detail to show compliance with specified requirements. 1. Determine and verify quantities, field dimensions, product dimensions, specified design and performance criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data. 2. Coordinate submittal with other submittals and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Check, verify, and revise submittals as necessary to bring them into conformance with Contract Documents and actual field conditions. 1.07 SUBMITTAL CONTENT A. Shop Drawings: 1. Contractor to field verify elevation, coordinates, and pipe material for pipe tie-in prior to the submittal of shop drawings to Owner and Engineer. 2. Details: a. Fabrication drawings: drawn to scale and dimensioned. b. Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all dimensions. c. Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. d. Component layout and identification. e. Weight. f. Finish. g. Temperature limitations, as applicable. h. Nameplate information. B. Product Information: 1. Product Data: a. Details: 1) Supplier name and address. 2) Subcontractor name and address. b. Include: 1) Catalog cuts. 2) Bulletins. 3) Brochures. 4) Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: signed by product manufacturer along with supporting reference data, affidavits, and tests, as appropriate. October 2016 01_33_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) 5) Manufacturer’s printed recommendations for installation of equipment. 6) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from manufacturer’s documents. 2. Completely fill out a Motor Data Sheet, as specified in Section 26_05_09, for every motor furnished: a. Submit 1 copy of the Motor Data Sheet to the Engineer for review as part of the associated equipment submittal. 3. Samples: a. Details: 1) Submit labeled samples. 2) Samples will not be returned. 3) Provide samples from manufacturer’s standard colors, materials, products, or equipment lines. a) Clearly label samples to indicate any that represent non-standard colors, materials, products, or equipment lines and that if selected, will require an increase in Contract Time or Contract Price. 4. Minor or incidental products and equipment schedules: a. Details: 1) Shop Drawings of minor or incidental fabricated products will not be required, unless requested. 2) Submit tabulated lists of minor or incidental products showing the names of the manufacturers and catalog numbers, with Product Data and Samples as required to determine acceptability. C. Design calculations: 1. Details: a. Defined in technical sections. b. For equipment and materials designed and manufactured by a supplier and not the Engineer, calculations are required to be submitted by Contractor. c. Calculations must bear the original seal and signature of a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located and who provided responsible charge for the design. D. Qualifications Statements: 1. Details: a. Defined in technical sections. b. Licensing documentation. c. Certification documentation. d. Education documentation. E. Quality assurance/control submittals: 1. Mill test reports: a. Details: 1) Submit certified copies of factory and mill test reports. 2) Do not incorporate Products in the Work which have not passed testing and inspection satisfactorily. October 2016 01_33_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) 2. Test reports: a. Details: 1) Include the following information: a) A description of the test. b) List of equipment used. c) Name of the person conducting the test. d) Date and time the test was conducted. e) Ambient temperature and weather conditions. f) All raw data collected. g) Calculated results. h) Clear statement if the test passed or failed the requirements stated in Contract Documents. i) Signature of the person responsible for the test. 3. Factory Acceptance Test: a. Details: Include complete test procedure and all forms to be used during test. 4. Certificates: a. Details: Defined in technical sections. b. For products that will be in contact with potable water, submit evidence from a nationally recognized laboratory that the products comply with the requirements of the NSF 61 standard. 5. Manufacturers’ field reports: a. Details: Manufacturer’s Certificate of installation and functionality compliance. 6. Field samples: a. Details: Defined in technical sections. 7. Test plans: a. Details: Defined in technical sections. 1.08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Contractor: Send submittal to Engineer. 1. Delivery: Deliver submittals to Engineer. 2. Timeliness: Schedule and make submissions in accordance with the requirements of the individual specification sections and in such a sequence as to cause no delay in Work. B. Engineer: Review submittal and provide response. 1. Review description: a. Engineer will be entitled to rely upon the accuracy or completeness of designs, calculations, or certifications made by licensed professionals accompanying a particular submittal whether or not a stamp or seal is required by Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. b. Engineer's review of submittals shall not release Contractor from Contractor's responsibility for performance of requirements of Contract Documents. Neither shall Engineer's review release Contractor from fulfilling purpose of installation nor from Contractor's liability to replace defective work. c. Engineer's review of shop drawings, samples, or test procedures will be only for conformance with design concepts and for compliance with information given in Contract Documents. October 2016 01_33_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) d. Engineer's review does not extend to: 1) Accuracy of dimensions, quantities, or performance of equipment and systems designed by Contractor. 2) Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures except when specified, indicated on the Drawings, or required by Contract Documents. 3) Safety precautions or programs related to safety which shall remain the sole responsibility of the Contractor. e. Engineer can Approve or Not Approve any exception at their sole discretion. 2. Review timeframe: a. Except as may be provided in technical specifications, a submittal will be returned within 10 work days. b. When a submittal cannot be returned within the specified period, Engineer will, within a reasonable time after receipt of the submittal, give notice of the date by which that submittal will be returned. 3. Schedule delays: a. No adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price will be allowed due to Engineer’s review of submittals, unless all of the following criteria are met: 1) Engineer has failed to review and return first submission within the agreed upon time frame. 2) Contractor demonstrates that delay in progress of Work is directly attributable to Engineer’s failure to return submittal within time indicated and accepted by Engineer. 4. Review responses: 1 copy of submittal will be returned to Contractor with one of the following reviewer’s response. a. Approved: 1) No Exceptions: a) There are no notations or comments on the submittal and the Contractor may release the equipment for production. 2) Make Corrections Noted - See Comments: a) The Contractor may proceed with the work, however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. b) Resubmittal not required. 3) Make Corrections Noted - Confirm: a) The Contractor may proceed with the work, however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. b) Submit confirmation specifically addressing each notation or comment to the Engineer within 15 calendar days of the date of the Engineer’s transmittal requiring the confirmation. b. Not approved: 1) Correct and Resubmit: a) Contractor may not proceed with the work described in the submittal. b) Contractor assumes responsibility for proceeding without approval. c) Resubmittal of complete submittal package is required within 30 calendar days of the date of the Engineer’s submittal review response. October 2016 01_33_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) 2) Rejected - See Remarks: a) Contractor may not proceed with the work described in the submittal. b) The submittal does not meet the intent of the Contract Documents. Resubmittal of complete submittal package is required with materials, equipment, methods, etc. that meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. c. Receipt Acknowledged: Filed for Record: 1) This is used in acknowledging receipt of informational submittals that address means and methods of construction such as schedules and work plans, conformance test reports, health and safety plans, etc. C. Contractor: Prepare resubmittal, if applicable. 1. Clearly identify each correction or change made. 2. Include a response in writing to each of the Engineer’s comments or questions for submittal packages that are resubmitted in the order that the comments or questions were presented throughout the submittal. a. Acceptable responses to Engineer’s comments are listed below: 1) “Incorporated” Engineer’s comment or change is accepted and appropriate changes are made. 2) “Response” Engineer’s comment not incorporated. Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is not made. Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or change requested by Engineer. b. Reviews and resubmittals: 1) Suppliers shall provide resubmittals which include responses to all submittal review comments separately and at a level of detail commensurate with each comment. 2) Supplier responses shall indicate how the supplier resolved the issue pertaining to each review comment. Responses such as “acknowledged” or “noted” are not acceptable. 3) Resubmittals which do not comply with this requirement may be rejected and returned without review. 4) Contractor shall be allowed no extensions of any kind to any part of their contract due to the rejection of non-compliant submittals. 5) Submittal review comments not addressed by the Contractor in resubmittals shall continue to apply whether restated or not in subsequent reviews until adequately addressed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the reviewing and approving authority. c. Any resubmittal that does not contain responses to the Engineer’s previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Resubmittal. No further review by the Engineer will be performed until a response for previous comments has been received. 3. Resubmittal timeframe: a. Contractor shall provide resubmittal within 15 days. b. When a resubmittal cannot be returned within the specified period, Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing. 1.09 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Provide closeout submittals as specified in Section 01_77_00. October 2016 01_33_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_33_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) APPENDIX A CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM October 2016 01_33_00-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_33_00 (FS-100) DOCUMENT 01_33_00 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM Owner: Date: Contractor: Project No.: Project Name: Submittal Number: Submittal Title: To: From: Specification No. and Subject of Submittal / Equipment Supplier Spec ##: Subject: Authored By: Date Submitted: Submittal Response Check Either (A) or (B): (A) We have verified that the equipment or material contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified in the project manual or shown on the contract drawings with no exceptions. (B) We have verified that the equipment or material contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified in the project manual or shown on the contract drawings except for the following deviations (list deviations): Certification Statement: By this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data, and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved shop drawings and all Contract requirements. General Contractor’s Reviewer’s Signature: Printed Name: In the event, Contractor believes the Submittal response does or will cause a change to the requirements of the Contract, Contractor shall immediately give written notice stating that Contractor considers the response to be a Change Order. Firm: Signature: Date Returned: PM/CM Office Use Date Received GC to PM/CM: Date Received PM/CM to Reviewer: Date Received Reviewer to PM/CM: Date Sent PM/CM to GC: October 2016 01_35_21-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_21 (FS-100) SECTION 01_35_21 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Demolition of portions of structures. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings include: 1. Demolition methods of load bearing structures not indicated on the Drawings. Contractor to notify Engineer and Owner in advance of demolition work so coordinated solution can be determined between Contractor, Owner, and Engineer. 2. Method of removing embedded relics and antiques. B. Submittals for information only: 1. Permits and notices authorizing demolition. 2. Certificates of severance of utility services. 3. Permit for transport and disposal of debris. 4. Demolition procedures and operational sequence. C. Project record documents: Include locations of service lines and capped utilities. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Dispose of debris in accordance with governing regulatory agencies. B. Comply with applicable air pollution control regulations. C. Obtain permits for building demolition, transportation of debris to disposal site and dust control. 1.04 PREPARATION A. Obtain permission from adjacent property owners when outriggers, swinging cranes, and other equipment may have to traverse adjacent property. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not interfere with use of adjacent buildings. Maintain free and safe passage to and from. B. Prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structures adjacent services, sidewalks, driveways, and trees. Provide and place bracing or shoring. Assume liability for movement, settlement, or collapse. Promptly repair damage. October 2016 01_35_21-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_21 (FS-100) C. Cease operations and notify Engineer immediately when safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. Do not resume operations until safety is restored. D. Provide erect and maintain barricades, lighting, guardrails, and protective devices as required to protect building occupants, general public, workers, and adjoining property. 1.06 EXISTING SERVICES A. Contractor to coordinate with Owner regarding capping and plugging of utility services. Owner shall notify affected utility company in advance and obtain approval before starting demolition. B. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. 1.07 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC A. Do not close or obstruct roadways without permits. B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private roadways. 1.08 MATERIALS A. Materials and equipment to be reinstalled: In accordance with Drawings and Specifications. B. Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment, devices, appurtenances, facilities, and services required for performing selective demolition work. C. Erect weatherproof closures for exterior openings. Maintain exit requirements. D. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions as required to prevent spread of dust, fumes, and smoke to other parts of building. On completion, remove partitions and repair damaged surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. E. Protect interior of building from rain and water damage. F. Provide and maintain protective devices to prevent injury from falling objects. G. Locate guardrails in stairwells and around open shafts to protect workers. Post clearly visible warning signs. H. Cause as little inconvenience to adjacent occupied building areas as possible. I. Protect landscaping, benchmarks, and existing construction to remain from damage or displacement. J. Carefully remove designated materials and equipment to be retained by Owner or reinstalled. Deliver materials and equipment when and where directed by Engineer. Store and protect materials and equipment to be reinstalled. October 2016 01_35_21-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_21 (FS-100) 1.09 DEMOLITION A. Demolish designated portions of structures and appurtenances in orderly and careful manner. B. Assume possession of demolished materials, unless specified otherwise. Remove demolished materials from site at least weekly. C. Prevent airborne dust. Use water or dust palliative when necessary. Provide and maintain hoses and connections to water main or hydrant. D. Do not burn materials on site. E. Immediately upon discovery, remove and dispose of contaminated, vermin-infested, or dangerous materials by safe means so as not to endanger health of workers and public. F. Backfill open pits and holes caused by demolition. G. Rough grade areas affected by demolition. H. Remove demolished materials, tools, and equipment upon completion of demolition. 1.10 REPAIR A. Repair damage caused by demolition. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION October 2016 01_35_22-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_22 (FS-100) SECTION 01_35_22 SAFETY PLAN PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Development and maintenance of a Construction Safety Plan. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. B. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA). 1.03 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PLAN A. Detail the Methods and Procedures to comply with, NFPA 70E, Federal, and Local Health and Safety Laws, Rules and Requirements for the duration of the Contract Times. Methods and procedures must also comply with the Owner’s Safety Plan. Include the following: 1. Identification of the Contractor's Competent Safety Director, or Certified or Licensed Safety Consultant who will prepare, initiate, maintain and supervise safety programs, and procedures. 2. Procedures for providing workers with an awareness of safety and health hazards expected to be encountered in the course of construction. 3. Safety equipment appropriate to the safety and health hazards expected to be encountered during construction. Include warning devices, barricades, safety equipment in public right-of-way and protected areas, safety equipment used in multi-level structures, personal protective equipment (PPE) as required by NFPA 70E. 4. Methods for minimizing employees' exposure to safety and health hazards expected during construction. 5. Procedures for reporting safety or health hazards. 6. Procedures to follow to correct a recognized safety and health hazard. 7. Procedures for investigation of accidents, injuries, illnesses, and unusual events that have occurred at the construction site. 8. Periodic and scheduled inspections of general work areas and specific workstations. 9. Training for employees and workers at the jobsite. 10. Methods of communication of safe working conditions, work practices and required personal protection equipment. 11. Provision of a site specific emergency action and evaluation plan. 12. Verify safety plan includes reference to and compliance with latest Owner safety policies. October 2016 01_35_22-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_22 (FS-100) B. Assume sole responsibility for every aspect of Health and Safety on the jobsite, including the health and safety of subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons on the jobsite: 1. Forward available information and reports to the Safety Director or Safety Consultant who shall make the necessary recommendations concerning worker health and safety at the jobsite. 2. Employ additional health and safety measures specified by the Safety Director or Safety Consultant, as necessary, for workers in accordance with OSHA guidelines. C. Transmit to Owner and Engineer copies of reports and other documents related to accidents or injuries encountered during construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_35_44-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_44 (FS-100) SECTION 01_35_44 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Procedures required when encountering hazardous materials at the Work site. 1.02 REFERENCES A. United States Code of Federal Regulation (CFR): 1. Title 29 - Labor: a. 1926.62 - Lead. 2. Title 40 - Protection of Environment. a. 261 - Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit laboratory reports, hazardous material removal plans, and certifications. B. Submit the following work plan: 1. Removal and Legal Disposal of Asbestos Cement Pipe Plan. a. Work plan shall include, but not be limited, to the following: 1) Schedule of work. 2) Security measures for work and disposal area. 3) Staff training: Contractor shall provide at least one competent person who is capable of identifying asbestos hazards at the job site for the entire duration of the AC pipe removal and disposal operation. 4) Trenching and removal of pipe procedure. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Adequately Wet: Penetration of the pipe wall with liquid to prevent release of particulates. B. Asbestos Cement Pipe: Also commonly referred to as AC Transite Pipe, AC pipe or ACP. Pipe that is generally composed of cement and asbestos fibers. C. Competent Person: A trained worker who is capable of identifying existing and predictable asbestos hazards, perform exposure assessment and monitoring, is qualified to train other workers, and has the authority to take immediate corrective action to eliminate a hazardous exposure. D. Non-friable Asbestos – Containing Material (NACM): Material containing more than 1 percent asbestos, that when dry, cannot be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure. October 2016 01_35_44-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_44 (FS-100) E. Regulated Asbestos – Containing Material (RACM): Category II non-friable ACM that has a high probability of becoming or has become crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder in the course of work. 1.05 OPERATING DIGESTERS A. Observe safety precautions in vicinity of operating digesters which contain digester gases, including methane, hydrogen sulfide, and carbon dioxide. 1.06 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES A. Contractor and Owner to coordinate regarding all hazardous materials procedures required for completion of the Work. B. Hazardous materials are those defined by 40 CFR and State specific codes. C. When hazardous materials have been found: 1. Notify immediately Owner, Engineer, and other affected persons. Coordinate with Owner and Engineer to identify a course of action. 2. Notify such agencies as are required to be notified by Laws and Regulations with the times stipulated by such Laws and Regulations. 3. Contractor or Owner to designate a Certified Industrial Hygienist to issue pertinent instructions and recommendations for protection of workers and other affected persons' health and safety. 4. Contractor and Owner to coordinate to identify and contact subcontractors and licensed personnel qualified to undertake storage, removal, transportation, disposal, and other remedial work required by, and in accordance with, laws and regulations. D. Forward to Engineer, copies of reports, permits, receipts, and other documentation related to remedial work. E. Assume responsibility for worker health and safety, including health and safety of subcontractors and their workers. 1. Instruct workers on recognition and reporting of materials that may be hazardous. F. File requests for adjustments to Contract Times and Contract Price due to the finding of Hazardous Materials in the Work site in accordance with Contract Documents. 1. Minimize delays by continuing performance of the Work in areas not affected by hazardous materials operations. 1.07 LEAD PAINT REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL A. Existing paint on the interior surfaces that may contain lead in concentrations which will require implementation of hazardous material compliance procedures as legislated by the following: 1. CFR, Title 29 and Title 40. October 2016 01_35_44-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_44 (FS-100) B. Remove samples of paint from the structures identified herein and have samples tested by a certified testing laboratory to determine lead content in samples. 1. Ensure that sufficient numbers of paint samples are removed and tested to provide adequate information regarding lead content in paint. 2. Ensure that samples contain the total thickness of the paint to the substrate where removed. 3. Ensure that each sample contains a sufficient quantity of paint to facilitate proper and adequate analyses by testing laboratory. 4. Ensure that samples are adequately identified with location from which it was removed. C. Laboratory testing of paint samples: In accordance with 40 CFR 261. D. Submit a plan, in coordination with Owner, for the removal, containment, and disposal of lead-based paint and associated debris. E. Prior to beginning work associated with the removal, containment, and disposal of lead-based paints, prepare and submit to the Owner and Engineer for his review the following: 1. Listing of lead paint removal equipment to be used. 2. Outline of procedures to be used to remove lead paint. 3. Data and specifications describing chemical stripping materials to be used. 4. Data and specifications describing abrasive blast materials and grit size to be used. 5. Plan describing lead paint removal, hazardous waste debris containment, and hazardous waste disposal methods. 6. Safety plan, consisting of a written plan of action covering operational requirements for safe removal of lead paint, safe handling and containment of waste and debris generated by the operation, and safe disposal of hazardous waste and non-hazardous waste materials, complying with the most stringent requirements of the following: a. Equipment and material manufacturer's safety sheets. b. 29 CFR 1926.62. F. Carry out lead paint removal, containment, and disposal work in accordance with the following SSPC guidelines: 1. SSPC-Guide 6. a. Open Abrasive Blast Cleaning with Expendable Abrasive. b. Open Abrasive Blast Cleaning with Recyclable Abrasive. c. Closed Abrasive Blast Cleaning with Recyclable Abrasive. d. Chemical Stripping. 2. SSPC-Guide 7. G. Assume responsibility, in coordination with the Owner and Engineer, for the proper utilization of the paint removal method selected. When abrasive blast cleaning is selected to remove lead-based paint, comply with all applicable federal, state, and local air quality, pollution, and environmental control regulations for blast cleaning. When chemical stripping is selected to remove the lead based paint, adhere to the chemical manufacturer's recommendations for the application of the product, the removal of the paint, and the containment of the debris. October 2016 01_35_44-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_44 (FS-100) H. Lead paint removal work shall be performed by a Contractor having prior experience in the removal method selected and shall provide at least 5 references of similar projects completed, 3 of which must have been completed within the past 12 months, documenting his experience. I. Utilize a minimum of Class 3 containment and ventilation system as described in SSPC-Guide 6 during lead paint removal and containment procedures as required for the conditions. J. Do not leave spent abrasive blast material, chemical stripping material, or lead paint debris uncontained on the project site overnight. K. Test each container of paint debris, spent blast cleaning abrasive, chemical stripping debris, and other waste material generated by the operation to determine the waste material hazardous waste classification. L. Assume responsibility, in coordination with the Owner and Engineer, for the disposal of lead paint waste and associated waste generated by the removal of the lead paint and the preparation of the surfaces for recoating. Dispose in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local requirements and regulations. M. Accurately complete the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest included at the end of SSPC-Guide 7. Indicate on the Manifest that the Owner is the hazardous waste generator, and obtain the Owner's Environmental Protection Agency identification number for use in completing the Manifest. 1.08 ASBESTOS MATERIALS A. It is the specific intent of these Contract Documents to exclude from the Work any and all products or materials containing asbestos. No products containing asbestos shall be incorporated in the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPE (ACP) A. The pipe to be removed from the ground has been in service for approximately 45 years. 1. The manufacturer and exact composition of the pipe to be removed is unknown. 2. ACP is generally manufactured using portland cement or pozzolan cement and asbestos fiber. 3. Common pipe lengths: 3 feet 3 inches, 6 feet 6 inches, 9 feet 9 inches, and 13 feet 0 inches. B. Pipe fittings. Separate from pipe brass, galvanized pipe, copper, cast iron, galvanized pipe or steel fittings and dispose of separately. October 2016 01_35_44-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_44 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ASBESTOS MATERIALS A. Notifications: 1. Contractor shall notify Owner a minimum of 3 working days in advance of commencing asbestos material removal operations. 2. Contractor and Owner to coordinate regarding all asbestos material removal operations. B. Work area: 1. Establish a regulated work area, using at a minimum, construction warning tape to establish limits of work area for the asbestos material removal. 2. On site stockpiling or storage of asbestos material designated for disposal shall not be allowed. C. Safety: 1. Conduct an Initial Exposure Assessment (IEA). 2. Provide a hand/face wash station. D. Worker qualifications: 1. Asbestos removal shall be performed by trained employees in conformance with Section (g) Methods of Compliance, of CCR, Title 8, § 1529, “Asbestos,” mandating wet methods, vacuum cleaners with HEPA filters to collect debris and prompt cleanup. E. Legal disposal: 1. Legal disposal of asbestos material is the Owner’s responsibility. 2. Contractor shall transport the asbestos material to the location designated by the Owner. 3.02 EXCAVATION OF AC PIPE A. Machine excavates to expose asbestos cement pipe. B. Hand excavates areas under pipe where breaks are planned. C. Pipe shall be pre-wetted prior to any breaks being made. D. Pipe shall be snapped using mechanical snapping methods. 3.03 AC PIPE REMOVAL A. All required pipe breaking operations shall require adequate pre-wetting with potable water. B. The Contractor shall make every effort to minimize the number of pipe breaks. Wherever possible, the pipe should be removed by pulling the pipe out of the pipe joint collars. C. Remove sections of AC pipe intact at joint collars by mechanical snapping methods between collars. October 2016 01_35_44-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_44 (FS-100) D. Wet and containerize waste materials as removed from the trench. Use lifting straps and methods that do not further damage the pipe. E. Sections of AC pipe that become cut, have broken edges or have any friable surface shall be wet at exposed fractures and immediately wrapped. 1. The pipe ends shall be sealed completely using a minimum 6-mil poly film wrap, which is securely fastened, taped to completely enclose the pipe and ACP appurtenances and shall have conspicuous, legible labeling that has the following or equivalent labeling: CAUTION: CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS. BREATHING ASBESTOS DUST MAY CAUSE SERIOUS BODILY HARM. F. AC Pipe sections shall not be left exposed in public view, either in trench or in disposal area. G. All connecting parts of pipe, rubber gaskets, and pipe couplings shall be discarded with pipe. H. AC pipe from this project only, shall be placed in the bin designated. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_35_45-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_45 (FS-100) SECTION 01_35_45 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES: BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Requirements for the preparation and implementation of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the Contractor's construction activities. This document (and others identified in this Section) will be used for the purpose of applying for and obtaining a General Construction Activity Stormwater Permit, if required. This permit authorizes the discharge of stormwater associated with construction activities from the construction site. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). B. United States Code of Federal Regulation (CFR): 1. 40 - Protection of Environmental: a. 117 - Determination of reportable quantities for hazardous substance. b. 302 - Designation, reportable quantities, and notification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Pollution Prevention Plan: 1. Prepare a site-specific Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) in accordance with Section A of the General Construction Activity Stormwater Permit. 2. Prepare a monitoring program and reporting plan in accordance with Section B of the General Construction Activity Stormwater Permit to the Owner for reference. 3. Submit to the Owner for reference a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan detailing the placement of physical Best Management Practices (BMPs) required for installation and the methods used to comply with those BMPs directed at operational procedures, Monitoring Program, and Reporting Plan. 4. The plan shall specifically address and detail changes from the alternatives called out in this Section. The Contractor’s preferred techniques shall show how it will comply with the stated objectives of the program. B. The entire plan shall be kept and maintained by the Contractor on the construction site during the duration of the project. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking the proper actions to prevent contaminants and sediments from entering the storm sewer drainage system should any unforeseen circumstance occur. The Contractor shall take immediate action if directed by the Engineer, or if the Contractor observes contaminants and/or October 2016 01_35_45-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_45 (FS-100) sediments entering the storm drainage system, to prevent further stormwater from entering the system. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall comply with the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE), county, city, and other local agency requirements regarding stormwater discharges and management. B. The Contractor shall not begin any construction work until the Owner receives the General Construction Activity Stormwater Permit, if required. The Contractor shall allow the Owner 30 days to obtain this permit after receipt of the information listed in this Section. C. The Contractor shall comply with the following prohibitions and limitations, which are contained in the Stormwater Permit: 1. Discharge prohibitions: a. Discharges of materials other than stormwater, which are not otherwise regulated by a NPDES permit, to a separate stormwater sewer system or water of the nation are prohibited. b. Stormwater discharges shall not cause or threaten to cause pollution, contamination (including sediment), or nuisance. c. Stormwater discharges regulated by this general permit shall not contain a hazardous substance equal to or in excess of a reportable quantity listed in 40 CFR 117 and 40 CFR 302. 2. Receiving water limitations: a. Stormwater discharges to any surface or groundwater shall not adversely impact human health or the environment. D. Requirements: 1. In order to comply with the permit mandates the City of Fort Collins has developed a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Program and summary of Best Management Practices (BMPs) that are suggested to be utilized by the Contractor. BMPs are measures or practices used to reduce the amount of pollution entering surface water. BMPs may take the form of a process, activity, or physical structure. Some BMPs are simple and can be put into place immediately, while others are more complicated and require extensive planning or space. They may be inexpensive or costly to implement. No additional compensation shall be made for implementation of BMPs. 2. The City of Fort Collins’s Stormwater Pollution Prevention Program and Summary of BMPs are available for review at the Drake Water Reclamation Facility. 1.05 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. The Contractor shall implement all activities required by the General Permit and as detailed in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan, Monitoring Program, and Reporting Plan. 1.06 NON-STORMWATER MANAGEMENT A. The Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan shall discuss any non-stormwater sources (i.e., landscaping irrigation, pipe flushing, street washing, and dewatering). October 2016 01_35_45-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_45 (FS-100) In addition, the Plan shall include standard observation measures and best management practices, including best available technologies economically achievable and best conventional pollutant control technologies that are to be implemented in order to reduce the pollutant loading to the waters. 1.07 AMENDMENTS A. The Contractor shall amend the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan, Monitoring Program, and Reporting Plan whenever there is a change in construction or operations which may affect the discharge of pollutants to stormwater. B. The Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan shall also be amended if it is in violation of any conditions of the general permit or has not achieved the general objective of reducing pollutants in stormwater discharges. C. All amendments shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 NOTICE OF TERMINATION A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary information for the completion of a Notice of Termination (NOT) upon completion of all construction activities (refer to Section C of the General Construction Activity Stormwater Permit for general requirements). PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Nonhazardous material/waste management: 1. Designated area: The Contractor shall propose designated areas of the project site, for approval by the Engineer, suitable for material delivery, storage, and waste collection that, to the maximum extent practicable, are near construction entrances and away from catch basins, gutters, drainage courses, and creeks. 2. Granular material: a. The Contractor shall store granular material at least 50 feet away from catch basin and curb returns. b. The Contractor shall not allow granular material to enter storm drains, creeks, or rivers. c. When rain is forecast within 24 hours or during wet weather, the Engineer may require the Contractor to cover granular material with a tarpaulin and to surround the material with sand bags. 1) All stockpiles are required to be protected immediately if they are not scheduled to be used within 14 days. 3. Dust control: The Contractor shall use potable water to control dust on a daily basis or as directed by the Owner. October 2016 01_35_45-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_45 (FS-100) B. Spill prevention and control: 1. The Contractor shall keep a stockpile of spill cleanup materials, such as rags or absorbents, readily accessible on-site. 2. The Contractor shall immediately contain and prevent leaks and spills from entering storm drains, and properly clean up and dispose of the waste and cleanup materials. a. If the waste is hazardous, the Contractor shall dispose of hazardous waste only at authorized and permitted treatment, storage, and disposal facilities, and use only licensed hazardous waste haulers to remove the waste off-site, unless quantities to be transported are below applicable threshold limits for transportation specified in State and Federal regulations. 3. The Contractor shall not wash any spilled material into streets, gutters, storm drains, creeks, or rivers and shall not bury spilled hazardous materials. 4. The Contractor shall immediately report any hazardous materials spill to the Owner and Engineer for reporting to all applicable regulatory agencies. C. Vehicle/equipment cleaning: 1. The Contractor shall not perform vehicle or equipment cleaning on-site or in the street using soaps, solvents, degreasers, steam cleaning equipment, or equivalent methods. 2. The Contractor shall perform vehicle or equipment cleaning, with water only, in a designated, bermed area that will not allow rinse water to run off-site or into streets, gutters, storm drains, creeks, or rivers. D. Vehicle/equipment maintenance and fueling: 1. The Contractor shall perform maintenance and fueling of vehicles or equipment in designated, bermed area(s) or over a drip pan that will not allow run-on of stormwater or runoff of spills. 2. The Contractor shall use secondary containment, such as a drip pan, to catch leaks or spills any time that vehicle or equipment fluids are dispensed, changed, or poured. 3. The Contractor shall keep a stockpile of spill cleanup materials, such as rags or absorbents, readily accessible on-site. 4. The Contractor shall clean up leaks and spills of vehicle or equipment fluids immediately and dispose of the waste and cleanup materials as hazardous waste, as described in section “Spill prevention and control” above. 5. The Contractor shall not wash any spilled material into streets, gutters, storm drains, creeks, or rivers and shall not bury spilled hazardous materials. 6. The Contractor shall report any hazardous materials spill to the Owner and Engineer and all applicable regulatory agencies. 7. The Contractor shall inspect vehicles and equipment arriving on-site for leaking fluids and shall promptly repair leaking vehicles and equipment. Drip pans shall be used to catch leaks until repairs are made. 8. The Contractor shall recycle waste oil and antifreeze, to the maximum extent practicable. 9. The Contractor shall comply with Federal, State, and City requirements for aboveground storage tanks. October 2016 01_35_45-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_45 (FS-100) 3.02 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS A. Paving operations: 1. Project site management: a. When rain is forecast within 24 hours or during wet weather, the Engineer may prevent the Contractor from paving. b. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to protect drainage courses by using control measures, such as earth dike, straw bale, and sand bag, to divert runoff or trap and filter sediment in addition to those already shown on the construction plan sheets. c. The Contractor shall place drip pans or absorbent material under paving equipment when not in use. d. The Contractor shall cover catch basins and manholes when paving or applying seal coat, tack coat, slurry seal, or fog seal. e. If the paving operation includes an on-site mixing plant, the Contractor shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local General Industrial Activities Stormwater Permit requirements. 2. Paving waste management: a. The Contractor shall not sweep or wash down excess sand (placed as part of a sand seal or to absorb excess oil) into gutters, storm drains, or creeks. 1) Instead, the Contractor shall either collect the sand and return it to the stockpile, or dispose of it in a trash container. b. The Contractor shall not use water to wash down fresh asphalt concrete pavement. B. Saw cutting: 1. During saw cutting, the Contractor shall cover or barricade catch basins using control measures, such as filter fabric, straw bales, sand bags, and fine gravel dams, to keep slurry out of the storm drain system. When protecting a catch basin, the Contractor shall ensure that the entire opening is covered. 2. The Contractor shall vacuum saw cut slurry and pick up the waste prior to moving to the next location or at the end of each working day, whichever is sooner. 3. If saw cut slurry enters catch basins, the Contractor shall remove the slurry from the storm drain system immediately. C. Concrete, grout, and mortar waste management: 1. Material management: The Contractor shall store concrete, grout, and mortar away from drainage areas and ensure that these materials do not enter the storm drain system. 2. Concrete truck/equipment washout: a. The Contractor shall not washout concrete trucks or equipment into streets, gutters, storm drains, creeks, or rivers. 1) Washout areas should be located at least 50 feet from storm drains, open ditches, or water bodies. b. The Contractor shall perform washout of concrete trucks or equipment in a designated area. October 2016 01_35_45-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_35_45 (FS-100) 3. Exposed aggregate concrete wash water: a. The Contractor shall avoid creating runoff from washing of exposed aggregate concrete. The Contractor shall collect and return sweepings from exposed aggregate concrete to a stockpile or dispose of the waste in a trash container. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_41_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_41_00 (FS-100) SECTION 01_41_00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Regulatory authorities and codes. 1.02 AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION A. Building Department: City of Fort Collins. B. Fire Department: Poudre Fire Authority. 1.03 APPLICABLE CODES A. International Code Council (ICC): 1. Building code: a. International Building Code (IBC), 2012. 1) City of Fort Collins local amendments. 2. Electrical code: a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA 70: National Electrical Code (NEC), 2014. 3. Energy code: a. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2012. 1) City of Fort Collins local amendments. 4. Fire code: a. International Fire Code (IFC), 2012. 5. Fuel gas code: a. International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) – 2012. 1) City of Fort Collins local amendments. 6. Mechanical code: a. International Mechanical Code (IMC), 2012. 1) City of Fort Collins local amendments. 7. Plumbing code: 1) International Plumbing Code (IPC), 2012. . PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION October 2016 01_42_13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_42_13 (FS-100) SECTION 01_42_13 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Abbreviations and meanings. 1.02 INTERPRETATIONS A. Interpret abbreviations by context in which abbreviations are used. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS A. Abbreviations used to identify reference standards: AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association AAN American Association of Nurserymen AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ABC Associated Air Balance Council AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists. ABPA Acoustical and Board Products Association ACGIH American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists ACI American Concrete Institute ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories ADC Air Diffusion Council ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers' Association (formerly AFBMA, Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers' Association) AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors AGMA American Gear Manufacturers' Association AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute AI Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AIMA Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association International, Inc. AMG Arizona Masonry Guild ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association API American Petroleum Institute ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers October 2016 01_42_13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_42_13 (FS-100) ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM ASTM International AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Protection Association AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society AWSC American Welding Society Code AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Institute of America BSI Building Stone Institute CFR United States Code of Federal Regulations CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CPSC U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission CRA California Redwood Association CRI Carpet and Rug Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards CSA CSA International CSI Construction Specifications Institute CTI Ceramic Tile Institute DHI Door and Hardware Institute EIFS Exterior Insulation and Finish System EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EPA United States Environment Protection Agency FDA Food and Drug Administration FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FHWA Federal Highway Administration FIA Factory Insurance Association FM FM (Factory Mutual) Global FS Federal Specifications FTI Facing Tile Institute GA Gypsum Association HI Hydraulic Institute HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICBO International Conference of Building Officials ICC International Code Council ICEA Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ISA International Society of Automation ISO International Organization for Standardization JIC Joint Industrial Council October 2016 01_42_13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_42_13 (FS-100) MAG Maricopa Association of Governments MIA Marble Institute of America ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association MS Military Specifications NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE NACE International NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Association NAVFAC Department of the Navy Facilities Engineering Command NBHA National Builders Hardware Association NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEC National Electrical Code NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NETA International Electrical Testing Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NFPA National Forest Products Association NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology NMWIA National Mineral Wool Insulation Association NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NSF NSF International NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute PDCA Paint and Decorating Contractors of America PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute PS Product Standard RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections RILEM International Union of Testing and Research Laboratories for Materials and Structures RTI Resilient Tile Institute SAE SAE International SCPA Structural Clay Products Association SDI Steel Door Institute SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SSPC Society for Protective Coatings TABB Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau TCA Tile Council of America October 2016 01_42_13-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_42_13 (FS-100) UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UNS Unified Numbering System USDA United States Department of Agriculture USACE U.S. Army Corps of Engineers VA Vermiculite Association WCLA West Coast Lumberman's Association WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WPA Western Pine Association WPOA Western Plumbing Officials Association WRC Welding Research Council WSCPA Western States Clay Products Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association B. Abbreviations used in Specifications and Drawings: a year or years (metric unit) A ampere or amperes am ante meridian (before noon) ac alternating current ac-ft acre-foot or acre-feet atm atmosphere AWG American Wire Gauge bbl barrel or barrels bd board bhp brake horsepower BIL basic impulse insulation level bil gal billion gallons BOD biochemical oxygen demand Btu British thermal unit or units Btuh British thermal units per hour bu bushel or bushels BV bed volume(s) C degrees Celsius cal calorie or calories cap capita cd candela or candelas cfm cubic feet per minute Ci curie or curies CIPP Cured-in-Place Pipe cm centimeter or centimeters cmu concrete masonry unit CO carbon monoxide Co. Company CO2 carbon dioxide COD chemical oxygen demand Corp. Corporation counts/min counts per minute October 2016 01_42_13-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_42_13 (FS-100) cu cubic cu cm cubic centimeter or centimeters cu ft cubic foot or feet cu ft/day cubic feet per day cu ft/hr cubic feet per hour cu ft/min cubic feet per minute cu ft/sec cubic feet per second cu in cubic inch or inches cu m cubic meter or meters cu yd cubic yard or yards d day (metric units) day day (English units) db decibels D/d column diameter to particle diameter ratio DB dry bulb (temperature) dc direct current diam diameter DO dissolved oxygen DS dissolved solids EBCT empty bed contact time emf electromotive force fpm feet per minute F degrees Fahrenheit ft feet or foot fc foot-candle or foot candles ft/day feet per day ft/hr feet per hour ft/min feet per minute ft/sec feet per second g gram or grams G gravitational force gal gallon or gallons gal/day gallons per day gal/min gallons per minutes gal/sec gallons per second gfd gallons per square foot per day g/L grams per liter gpd gallons per day gpd/ac gallons per day per acre gpd/cap gallons per day per capita gpd/sq ft gallons per day per square foot gph gallons per hour gpm gallons per minute gpm/ft2 gallons per minute per square foot gps gallons per second g/cm3 grams per cubic centimeter October 2016 01_42_13-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_42_13 (FS-100) h hour or hours (metric units) ha hectare or hectares hp high point hp horsepower hp-hr horsepower-hour or horsepower-hours hr hour or hours (English units) Hz hertz ID inside diameter ihp indicated horsepower Inc. Incorporated inch inch inches inches inches/sec inches per second J joule or joules JTU Jackson turbidity unit or units k kips K kelvin K thermal conductivity kA kiloampere kcal kilocalorie or kilocalories kcmil thousand circular mils kg kilogram or kilograms kip kilopound or kilopounds km kilometer or kilometers kN kilonewton or kilonewtons kPa kilopascal or kilopascals ksi kips per square inch kV kilovolt or kilovolts kVA kilovolt-ampere or kilovolt-amperes kW kilowatt or kilowatts kWh kilowatt hour L liter or liters lb/1000 cu ft pounds per thousand cubic foot lb/acre-ft pounds per acre-foot lb/ac pounds per acre lb/cu ft pounds per cubic foot lb/day/cu ft pounds per day per cubic foot lb/day/acre pounds per day per acre lb/sq ft pounds per square foot L/D Ratio Ratio of filter height to filter media particle diameter lin linear, lineal lin ft linear foot or feet lm lumen or lumens lmh liters per square meter per hour log logarithm (common) ln logarithm (natural) lx lux October 2016 01_42_13-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_42_13 (FS-100) m meter or meters M molar (concentration) mA milliampere or milliamperes max maximum mCi millicurie or millicuries meq milliequivalent meq/mL milliequivalents per milliliter MFBM thousand feet board measure mfr manufacturer mg milligram or milligrams mgd/ac million gallons per day per acre mgd million gallons per day mg/L milligrams per liter mrem millirem µF microfarad or microfarads Mil 0.001 inch (used for coating thickness) mile mile mil. gal million gallons miles miles min minimum min minute or minutes MLSS mixed liquor suspended solids MLVSS mixed liquor volatile suspended solids mm millimeter or millimeters mol wt molecular weight mol mole Mpa megapascal or megapascals mph miles per hour MPN most probable number MPT National Pipe Thread, male fitting mR milliroentgen or milliroentgens Mrad megarad or megarads mV millivolt or millivolts MW megawatt or megawatts µg/L micrograms per liter µm micrometer or micrometers µS/cm microSeimens per centimeter N newton or newtons N normal (concentration) ND not detected No. number Nos numbers NPT National Pipe Thread NRC noise reduction coefficient NTU or ntu nephelometric turbidity unit oc on center OD outside diameter ORP oxidation-reduction potential OT ortho-tolidine OTA ortha-tolidine-arsenite October 2016 01_42_13-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_42_13 (FS-100) oz ounce or ounces oz/sq ft ounces per square foot Pa pascal or pascals pl plate or property line pm post meridiem (afternoon) ppb parts per billion ppm parts per million ppt parts per thousand pr pair psf/hr pounds per square foot per hour psf pounds per square foot psi pounds per square inch psia pounds per square inch absolute psig pounds per square inch gauge PVC polyvinyl chloride qt quart or quarts R radius R roentgen or roentgens rad radiation absorbed dose RH relative humidity rpm revolutions per minute rps revolutions per second s second (metric units) S Siemens (mho) scfh standard cubic feet per hour SDI sludge density index or silt density index sec second (English units) SI International System of Units sp static pressure sp gr specific gravity sp ht specific heat sq square cm2 or sq cm square centimeter or centimeters sq ft square feet or foot sq inch square inch sq inches square inches km2 or sq km square kilometer or kilometers m2 or sq m square meter or meters mm2 or sq mm square millimeter or millimeters sq yd square yard or yards SS suspended solids STC Sound Transmission Class SVI sludge volume index TDS total dissolved solids TEFC totally enclosed, fan-cooled TKN total Kjeldahl nitrogen TLM median tolerance limit TOC total organic carbon October 2016 01_42_13-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_42_13 (FS-100) TOD total oxygen demand TOW top of weir TS total solids TSS total suspended solids TVS total volatile solids U U Factor/U Value U Coefficient of Heat Transfer U heat transfer coefficient UNS Uniform Numbering System US United States V volt or volts VA volt-ampere or volt-amperes W watt or watts WB wet bulb wg water gauge wk week or weeks WRT water remediation technologies wt weight yd yard or yards yr year or years (English unit) C. Abbreviations used on Drawings: As listed on Drawings or in Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_45_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_00 (FS-100) SECTION 01_45_00 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Quality control and control of installation. 2. Tolerances. 3. References. 4. Mock-up requirements. 5. Authority and duties of Owner’s representative or inspector. 6. Sampling and testing. 7. Testing and inspection services. 8. Contractor’s responsibilities. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. H. When specified, products will be tested and inspected either at point of origin or at Work site: 1. Notify Engineer in writing well in advance of when products will be ready for testing and inspection at point of origin. 2. Do not construe that satisfactory tests and inspections at point of origin is final acceptance of products. Satisfactory tests or inspections at point of origin do not preclude retesting or re-inspection at Work site. October 2016 01_45_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_00 (FS-100) I. Do not ship products which require testing and inspection at point of origin prior to testing and inspection. 1.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When Manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.04 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. E 329 - Standard for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. B. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. C. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where specific date is established by code. D. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. E. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. F. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents. 1.05 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this Section and identified in respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for remaining Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Engineer and is specified in product specification sections to be removed; remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Engineer. October 2016 01_45_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_00 (FS-100) 1.06 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE OR INSPECTOR A. Owner’s Project Representative employed or retained by Owner is authorized to inspect the Work. B. Inspections may extend to entire or part of the Work and to preparation, fabrication, and manufacture of products for the Work. C. Deficiencies or defects in the Work which have been observed will be called to Contractor’s attention. D. Inspector will not: 1. Alter or waive provisions of Contract Documents. 2. Inspect Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures for construction. 3. Accept portions of the Work, issue instructions contrary to intent of Contract Documents, or act as foreman for Contractor. Supervise, control, or direct Contractor’s safety precautions or programs; or inspect for safety conditions on Work site, or of persons thereon, whether Contractor’s employees or others. E. Inspector will: 1. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist Engineer in determining when the Work is, in general, proceeding in accordance with Contract Documents. 2. Report to Engineer whenever Inspector believes that Work is faulty, defective, does not conform to Contract Documents, or has been damaged; or whenever there is defective material or equipment; or whenever Inspector believes the Work should be uncovered for observation or requires special procedures. 1.07 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. General: 1. Prior to delivery and incorporation in the Work, submit listing of sources of materials, when specified in sections where materials are specified. 2. When specified in sections where products are specified: a. Submit sufficient quantities of representative samples of character and quality required of materials to be used in the Work for testing or examination. b. Test materials in accordance with standards of national technical organizations. B. Sampling: 1. Furnish specimens of materials when requested. 2. Do not use materials which are required to be tested until testing indicates satisfactory compliance with specified requirements. 3. Specimens of materials will be taken for testing whenever necessary to determine quality of material. 4. Assist Engineer in preparation of test specimens at site of work, such as soil samples and concrete test cylinders. October 2016 01_45_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_00 (FS-100) 1.08 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Contractor will perform Contractor quality control testing as required in the technical specifications for various work and materials. B. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of an “Owner’s independent testing firm” to perform testing and inspection as required in the technical specifications for various work and materials or stipulated in Section 01_45_24 to confirm Contractor’s compliance with Contract Documents. C. The Owner’s independent testing firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by Owner and requested by the Engineer. D. The qualifications of laboratory that will perform the testing, contracted by the Owner or by the Contractor, shall be as follows: 1. Has authorization to operate in the state where the project is located. 2. Meets “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification,” published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. 3. Meets requirements of ASTM E 329. 4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time specialist on staff to review services. 5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards (NBS) or accepted values of natural physical constants. 6. Will submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of NBS during most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection. E. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off-site testing inspections and source quality control as required by Engineer or Owner. F. Reports will be submitted by Owner’s independent testing firm to Engineer, Contractor, and Owner in triplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer. October 2016 01_45_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_00 (FS-100) G. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner’s independent testing firm, furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Engineer and Owner’s independent testing firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing. 2. Make arrangements with Owner’s independent testing firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor’s use. H. Limitations of authority of testing Laboratory: Owner’s independent testing firm or Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. I. Testing and employment of an Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. J. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by same Owner’s independent testing firm on instructions by Engineer. K. The Owner’s independent testing firm responsibilities will include: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. a. Including, but not limited to the following mixes and as required by the specifications for each: 1) Controlled low strength material. 2) Low density cellular concrete fill. 3) Cast-in-place concrete. 4) Cementitious grouts. 5) Masonry grout. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non- conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Engineer. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. L. Owner’s independent testing firm individual test reports: After each test, Owner’s independent testing firm will promptly submit electronically and three hard copies of report to Engineer and to Contractor. When requested by Engineer, the Owner’s independent testing firm will provide interpretation of test results. Include the following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector. October 2016 01_45_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_00 (FS-100) 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location in Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Certified test results stamped and signed by a registered Engineer in the State of Colorado. 10. Summary of conformance with Contract Documents. M. Resident Engineer will provide monthly report of certification to identify all work performed for special inspections and other contract requirements on this project. The following certified monthly report at a minimum will include but not limited to: 1. Results of testing. 2. Testing logs. 3. Outstanding deficiencies. 4. Various statistical data. 5. Testing curves (up to 4 types) as required by the Engineer. 1.09 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor will perform quality control testing and inspection as required in the technical specifications for various work and materials. B. Cooperate with Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory personnel and provide access to construction and manufacturing operations. C. Secure and deliver to Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. D. Provide to Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory and Engineer preliminary mix design proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by testing laboratory. E. Furnish electronic copy and 1 hard copy of product test reports. F. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to construction to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at Work site or at source of product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. G. Notify Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory 24 hours in advance of when observations, inspections, and testing is needed for laboratory to schedule and perform in accordance with their notice of response time. 1.10 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up October 2016 01_45_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_00 (FS-100) of equipment, and test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of the manufacturer’s representative to Engineer 30 calendar days in advance of required observations. Manufacturer’s representative subject to approval of Owner and Engineer. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to Manufacturer's written instructions. D. Refer to Section 01_33_00. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_45_24-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) SECTION 01_45_24 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: This Section describes the requirements for providing special tests and inspections. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 4. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 5. Section 03_21_17 - Adhesive Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete. 6. Section 04_05_18 - Adhesive Bonding Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Masonry. 7. Section 05_05_24 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C140 -Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. 2. C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 3. C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 4. C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. 5. C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. C. International Code Council (ICC): 1. International Building Code (IBC), 2012 with City of Fort Collins amendments. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Approved: Acceptable to or accepted by the Building Official. B. Building Code: As designated in Section 01_41_00. C. Building Official: Officer of the authority having jurisdiction charged with administration and enforcement of the Building Code, or a duly authorized representative. October 2016 01_45_24-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) D. Special Inspection: Inspection of the materials, installation, fabrication, erection, or placement of components and connections requiring the expertise of an approved special inspector to ensure compliance with the building code and the approved construction documents. 1. Structural observations shall not be construed as fulfilling the requirements for special inspection. E. Special Inspection, Continuous: Special inspection of work requiring special inspection by an approved special inspector who is present when and where the work is being performed. F. Special Inspection, Periodic: Special inspection of work requiring special inspection by an approved special inspector who is intermittently present when and where the work has been or is being performed. 1. Timing and frequency of inspections shall be as indicated in the technical sections of this Specification. G. Special Inspector: A qualified person, approved by the Building Official and acceptable to the Engineer, as having the competence necessary to inspect a particular type of construction that requires special inspection under the building code. H. Structural Observations: The visual observation of the structural system by a registered design professional for general conformance to the approved construction documents. 1. In accordance with building code provisions, structural observations may be required for the following: a. Structural observations for seismic resistance. b. Structural observations for wind resistance. 2. Special inspections and tests shall not be construed as fulfilling the requirements for structural observation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes special tests and inspections and structural observations of structural assemblies and components to be performed in compliance with IBC with City of Fort Collins amendments. B. These special tests and inspections are in addition to required inspections performed by the Building Official under IBC Section 110 - “Scope and Administration: Inspections.”. C. Specific elements of work listed in the following sub-paragraphs require special inspections and/or special tests. Detailed descriptions of the elements to be inspected and the tests to be performed are included in the Field Quality Control paragraphs found in Part 3 Sections in Divisions 2 through 46 of these Specifications. 1. Work specifically designated by the Building Official as requiring special inspection. 2. Steel construction. 3. Concrete construction. 4. Masonry construction. 5. Soils. October 2016 01_45_24-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) 6. Deep foundations. 7. Special work: a. Post-installed anchors in concrete and masonry. b. Adhesive bonded reinforcing bars and all thread rods in concrete. c. Adhesive bonded reinforcing bars and all thread rods in masonry. D. Duties of Owner: 1. As required by Chapter 17 of the Building Code, the Owner will employ one or more representatives, inspectors and/or independent testing firms to confirm Contractor’s compliance with the Contract Documents and to provide testing and inspection services, including special inspections and structural observations, during construction. E. Duties of Engineer and/or Resident Engineer: 1. Provide name(s) and contact information for independent testing firm(s) employed by the Owner to provide special inspections and tests required by Chapter 17 of the Building Code. 2. Contact special inspector(s) and arrange times of arrival on site based on scheduling information provided by the Contractor. 3. Receive reports from special inspector(s) and distribute copies to Owner, Contractor, and Building Official in a timely manner. 4. Notify Contractor of inspections or tests that report non-conforming work in a timely manner. F. Duties of Special Inspector(s) and/or Resident Engineer and/or independent testing firms: 1. Required duties of the special inspector(s) shall be as described in Chapter 17 of the Building Code and as included in this Section. 2. General: a. Review the construction documents for special inspection and testing requirements. b. With Engineer, attend pre-installation meetings for work requiring special inspections and tests. c. Arrive on site prepared for inspections or tests at the times requested by the Engineer. Notify Engineer and Contractor of their presence upon arrival. d. If required by the Building Official, sign in on the appropriate form posted with the building permit. 3. Observations: a. Observe assigned work for conformance with the Drawings and Specifications approved by the Building Official. b. Make observations and tests of the work elements at the frequencies specified herein. 4. Reporting: a. Provide timely reports of each inspection or test. b. Submit reports in a format acceptable to the Engineer and the Building Official. Include, at a minimum, the following items: 1) Date and time of inspection. 2) Name(s) of individual(s) performing the inspection or test. 3) Structures and areas of the structure where inspections were made or where tests apply. October 2016 01_45_24-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) 4) Work items found to comply with the requirements of the approved Contract Documents. 5) Any discrepancies between the requirements of the approved Contract Documents and the work observed. For each non- conforming item, include: a) Identification of the non-conforming item and its exact location in the Work. b) Specific description of how the item fails to conform. c) Specific references to relevant details of the Contract Documents. d) Names and titles of individuals notified and methods of notification. 5. Final report. If required by the Building Official, Resident Engineer will submit a final report stating that all required special inspections and testing were completed and reported, to the best of the inspector’s knowledge, in conformance with the approved Contract Documents. G. Duties of Contractor: 1. If required by the Building Official, prepare and submit “Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility” prior to beginning work on the systems or components listed in this Section. a. Submit statement in a format acceptable to the Building Official. b. Include, at a minimum, the following items: 1) Acknowledgement of Contractor’s awareness of special inspection and testing requirements for the Work. 2. Provide Engineer with adequate advance notice of work schedules and readiness for inspections. 3. Provide special inspectors with access to the construction documents approved by the Building Official. 4. Allow and facilitate access for performance of testing and inspection activities. 5. Furnish labor necessary to assist the special inspector in viewing construction and in obtaining and handling materials for testing. 6. When required by the Building Official, retain at the job site and with the construction documents approved by the Building Official, copies of all special inspection reports. Provide such records for review by the building department’s inspector upon request. 7. Bring non-conforming work into conformance with the requirements of the approved construction documents in a timely manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01_33_00. B. Field reports: 1. Special Inspector’s and/or Resident Engineer's reports of special inspections and/or tests. C. Closeout documents: 1. Special Inspector’s and/or Resident Engineer's final report to Building Official. October 2016 01_45_24-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Special inspectors shall be qualified to the satisfaction of the Building Official, and acceptable to the Engineer, for observation of the particular materials or operations requiring special inspection. 2. See detailed requirements of Part 3 of this Section for qualifications of inspectors of each type of materials. B. Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Before fabrication or construction of work designated as requiring special inspections or tests, Engineer shall conduct a pre-inspection meeting to review requirements and plans for those inspections and tests. a. Schedule additional meetings if necessary to discuss specific materials, fabrications, or elements of the Work. 2. Required attendees: a. Engineer and key personnel from design and field staff. b. Owner’s representatives, inspectors, and/or independent testing firms providing special inspections and tests. c. Building Official or his/her authorized representative. d. Contractor’s superintendent and key personnel. e. Other persons deemed by the Engineer and the Building Official to be critical to the quality and efficiency of the work. 3. Agenda for meeting shall include, at a minimum, the following items: a. Review of City of Fort Collins' requirements for special inspections and tests. b. Review of requirements of Drawings and Specifications. c. Discussion of responsibilities and limits of work for each of the parties in attendance. d. Discussions of flow of communications and reporting regarding special inspections and tests. e. Project and product safety requirements. 4. Prepare and submit minutes of the pre-installation meeting as specified in Section 01_33_00. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Testing: Where testing is required: 1. Special tests will be performed by the Owner’s independent testing firm as specified in Section 01_45_00. 2. Selection of the material to be tested shall be by the Engineer or the Owner’s independent testing firm, and not by the Contractor. October 2016 01_45_24-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) 3.02 SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall allow time necessary for Special Inspections as listed above. B. Sufficient notice shall be given so that the Special Inspections can be performed. This includes time for off-site Special Inspectors to plan the inspection and travel to site. 3.03 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS (IBC 1705) A. General: 1. Special inspections shall be as designated in IBC Section 1705 and the following paragraphs. 2. Provide continuous or periodic special inspection of each item as indicated. 3. Inspection of Fabricators (IBC Section 1704.2.5): a. For fabricated items submit documentation of fabricator’s inspection and testing program. B. Steel Construction (IBC Section 1705.2): 1. Structural steel construction: a. Special inspections and tests as indicated in Appendix B1 and Appendix B3. 2. Cold-formed steel construction: a. Special inspections and tests as indicated in Appendix B8. 3. Open Web Steel Joists and Joist Girders: a. Special inspections and tests as indicated in Appendix B10. C. Concrete Construction (IBC Section 1705.3): 1. Cast-in-place concrete construction: a. Special inspections and tests as indicated in Appendix C1. D. Masonry Construction (IBC Section 1705.4): 1. Reinforced concrete masonry construction: a. Special inspections and tests as indicated in Appendix D1. 2. Concrete or brick masonry veneer: a. Special inspections and tests as indicated in Appendix D1. E. Soils (IBC Section 1705.6): 1. Special inspections and tests as indicated in Appendix F. 2. Inspector qualifications: Registered geotechnical engineer, licensed in the State where the work is constructed, and having a minimum of 10 years of experience in the observation of soils, or his/her approved designee. F. Deep Foundations - Cast-in-Place (IBC Section 1705.8): 1. Special inspections and tests as indicated in Appendix G2. 2. Inspector qualifications: Registered geotechnical engineer, licensed in the State where the work is constructed, and having a minimum of 10 years of experience in the observation of drilled piers, or his/her approved designee. October 2016 01_45_24-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) G. Special Work (IBC Section 1705.1.1): 1. The following items are designated as Special Work requiring special inspection: a. Essential architectural, mechanical, and electrical construction. 1) Special inspections tests as indicated in Appendix A1. b. Adhesive bonded reinforcing bars and all thread rods in concrete. 1) Special inspections and tests as specified in Section 03_21_17. c. Adhesive bonding reinforcing bars and all thread rods in masonry. 1) Special inspections and tests as specified in Section 04_05_18. d. Mechanical anchoring and fastening to concrete or masonry. 1) Special inspections and tests as specified in Section 05_05_24. 3.04 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR WIND RESISTANCE (IBC 1705.10) A. Wind design criteria: Table 01455-A indicates IBC wind design criteria for the project, and the structures in this project that are assigned to each criterion. Table 01455-A: Project Wind Design Criteria Basic Wind Speed, Vult (3 second gust) Basic Wind Speed, Vasd (3 second gust) Exposure Category 135 miles per hour 105 miles per hour C B. Structures sited in Exposure Category C and having a Basic Wind Speed, Vasd of 110 miles per hour or greater are subject to "Special Inspection for Wind Resistance". 1. Based on this criteria, Special Inspections for Wind Resistance are required for the following structures: a. None. 3.05 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SEISMIC RESISTANCE (IBC 1705.11) A. Seismic design criteria: Table 01455-B indicates IBC seismic design criteria for the project, and the structures in this project that are assigned to each criterion. Table 01455-B: Structures by Seismic Design Category (SDC) Seismic Design Category Structures Assigned to Category “A” UV Building "B", “C”, “D”, “E”, “F” None B. Structures having a Seismic Design Category or C, D, E, or F are subject to "Special Inspection for Seismic Resistance". 1. Based on this criteria, Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance are required for the following structures: a. None. October 2016 01_45_24-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) 3.06 STRUCTURAL TESTING AND QUALIFICATION FOR SEISMIC RESISTANCE (IBC 1705.12) A. Elements of structures assigned to Seismic Design Categories C, D, E, and F are subject to non-destructive testing. 1. Based on this criteria, Structural Testing and Qualification for Seismic Resistance are required for the following structures: a. None. 3.07 STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS FOR SEISMIC RESISTANCE (IBC 1704.5.1) A. Structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E, or F shall be subject to Structural Observations for Seismic Resistance when one of the following criteria is met: 1. The structure is assigned to Risk Category III or IV. 2. The height of the structure is greater than 75 feet. 3. The structure is assigned to Seismic Design Category E, is classified as Risk Category I or II, and is greater than two stories above grade. 4. When so designated by the registered design professional responsible for the structural design. 5. When such observation is specifically required by the building official. B. Based on the above criteria, Structural Observations for Seismic Resistance are required for the following structures: 1. None. 3.08 STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS FOR WIND REQUIREMENTS (IBC 1704.5.2) A. Basic Wind Speed and Exposure: Table 01455-A indicates IBC Basic Wind Speed and Exposure Category and the structures on this project that are assigned to each combination of those design parameters. B. Structures having a Basic Wind Speed, Vasd of greater than 110 miles per hour shall be subject to Structural Observations for Wind Requirements when one of the following criteria is met: 1. The structure is classified as Risk Category III or IV. 2. The building height is greater than 75 feet. 3. When so designated by the registered design professional responsible for the structural design. 4. When such observations are required by the building official. C. Based on the above criteria, Special Inspections for Wind Resistance are required for the following structures: a. None. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. See Appendices listed below for schedules of special inspections and tests. 1. Appendix B1: Structural steel - Welding. 2. Appendix B3: Structural steel - Bolting. 3. Appendix B8: Steel - Cold formed (steel deck). 4. Appendix B10: Open Web Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 5. Appendix C1: Concrete - Cast-in-place. October 2016 01_45_24-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) 6. Appendix D1: Masonry - "Level B Quality Assurance." 7. Appendix F: Soils. 8. Appendix G2: Deep foundations - Cast-in-Place. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_45_24-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) APPENDIX B1 - SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: STRUCTURAL STEEL – WELDING Item No. Verifications / Inspections / Tests Reference Standard Frequency of Inspection During Task Listed Continuous Periodic Tasks prior to welding: AISC 360, Table N5.4-1 1 Welding procedure specifications (WPSs) available. X 2 Manufacturer certifications for welding consumables available. X 3 Material identification (type/grade). X 4 Welder identification system. X 5 Fit-up groove welds (including joint geometry): • Joint preparation. • Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel). • Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces). • Tacking (tack weld quality and location). • Backing type and fit (if applicable). X 6 Configuration and finish of access holes. X 7 Fit-up of fillet welds: • Dimensions (alignment, gaps at root). • Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces). • Tacking (tack weld quality and location). X 8 Check welding equipment. X Tasks during welding: AISC 360, Table N5.4-2 9 Use of qualified welders. X 10 Control and handling of welding consumables: • Packaging. • Exposure control. X 11 No welding over cracked tack welds. X 12 Environmental conditions: • Wind speed within limits. • Precipitation and temperature. X October 2016 01_45_24-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) Item No. Verifications / Inspections / Tests Reference Standard Frequency of Inspection During Task Listed Continuous Periodic 13 WPS followed: • Settings on welding equipment. • Travel speed. • Selected welding materials. • Shielding gas type/flow rate. • Preheat applied. • Interpass temperature maintained (min/max). • Proper position (F, V, H, OH). X 14 Welding techniques: • Interpass and final cleaning. • Each pass within profile limitations. Each pass meets quality requirements. X Tasks after welding: AISC 360, Table N5.4-3 15 Welds cleaned. X 16 Size, length, and location of welds. X 17 Welds meet visual acceptance criteria: • Crack prohibition. • Weld/base-metal fusion. • Crater cross section. • Weld profiles. • Weld size. • Undercut. • Porosity. X 18 Arc strikes. X 19 k-area. X 20 Backing removed and weld tabs removed (if required). X 21 Repair activities. X 22 Document acceptance or rejection of welded joint or member X October 2016 01_45_24-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) APPENDIX B3 - SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: STRUCTURAL STEEL - BOLTING Item No. Verifications / Inspections / Tests Reference Standard Frequency of Inspection During Task Listed Continuous Periodic Tasks prior to bolting: AISC 360, Table N5.6-1 1 Manufacturer’s certifications available for fastener materials. X 2 Fasteners marked in accordance with ASTM requirements. X 3 Proper fasteners selected for the joint detail (grade, type, bolt length if threads are to be excluded from shear plane). X 4 Proper bolting procedure selected for joint detail. X 5 Connecting elements, including the appropriate faying surface condition and hole preparation, if specified, meet applicable requirements. X 6 Pre-installation verification testing by installation personnel observed and documented for fastener assemblies and methods used. X 7 Proper storage provided for bolts, nuts, washers and other fastener components. X Tasks during bolting: AISC 360, Table N5.6-2 8 Fastener assemblies, of suitable condition, placed in all holes and washers (if required) are positioned as required. X 9 Joint brought to the snug-tight condition prior to the pretensioning operation. X 10 Fastener component not turned by the wrench prevented from rotating. X 11 Fasteners are pretensioned in accordance with the RCSC Specification, progressing systematically from the most rigid point toward the free edges X Tasks after bolting: AISC 360, Table N5.6-3 12 Document acceptance or rejection of bolted connections. October 2016 01_45_24-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) APPENDIX B8 - SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: STEEL - COLD-FORMED Item No. Inspections / Tests Reference Standard Frequency of Inspection During Task Listed Continuous Periodic 1 Steel Deck - Materials 1a Materials: Identification marks conform to ASTM standards specified in the approved construction documents and manufacturers indicated on approved shop drawings. X 2 Steel Deck - Installation 2a Installation instructions: Evaluation Service Report requirements. X 2b Welding: Floor and roof deck welds AWS D1.3 X October 2016 01_45_24-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) APPENDIX B10 - SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: OPEN WEB STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS Item No. Verifications / Inspections / Tests Reference Standard Frequency of Inspection During Task Listed Continuous Periodic Installation 1 End connections - welded or bolted. X 2 Bridging - horizontal and diagonal X October 2016 01_45_24-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) APPENDIX C1: SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: CONCRETE - CAST-IN-PLACE Item No. Inspections / Tests Standard Frequency of Inspection During Task Listed Continuous Periodic 1 Formwork: 1a Shape, location, and dimensions of the concrete member being formed. ACI 318: 6.1.1 X 2 Reinforcement: 2a Materials grade(s). Size, and placement. ACI 318: 3.5, 7.1-7.7 X 2b Weldability: For material other than ASTM A 706, confirm weldability and required procedures AWS D1.4 ACI 318: 3.5.2 X 2c Welding: Shear reinforcement AWS D1.4 ACI 318: 3.5.2 X 3 Anchors: 3a Cast-in: Prior to and during placement of concrete. ACI 318: 8.1.3, 21.2.8 X 3b Post-installed - general: Hole drilling and anchor installation ACI 318: 3.8.6, 8.1.3, 21.2.8 ES Report(s) X 3c Post-installed - adhesive anchors in horizontal and upwardly inclined positions: Hole drilling and anchor installation ACI 318: D.9.2.4 ES Report(s) X 4 Concrete and Shotcrete- General: 4a Verify use of required design mix. ACI 318: Ch.4, 5.2-5.4 X 4b Testing: At the time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete. ASTM C 172 ASTM C 31 ACI 318: 5.6, 5.8 X 4c Inspection of concrete placement for October 2016 01_45_24-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) APPENDIX D1 - SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: MASONRY - "LEVEL B QUALITY ASSURANCE (ACI 530-11)" Item No. Inspections / Tests Reference Frequency of Inspection During Task Listed Continuous Periodic 1 General: 1a Compliance with approved submittals. ACI 530.1: 1.5 X 1b Verification of f'm prior to construction. ACI 530.1: 1.4 B X 2 As masonry construction begins: 2a Proportions of site-prepared mortar. ACI 530.1: 2.1, 2.6.A X 2b Construction of mortar joints and placement of masonry units. ACI 530.1: 3.3.B X 2c Location of reinforcement and connectors. ACI 530.1: 3.4 X 2d Verification of f'm every 5,000 square feet of masonry construction. ACI 530.1 X 3 Prior to grouting: 3a Grout space. ACI 530.1: 3.2.D, 3.2.F X 3b Grade, type, and size of reinforcement and anchor bolts. ACI 530.1: 2.4, 3.4 X 3c Placement of reinforcement and connectors. ACI 530.1: 3.2.E, 3.4 X 3d Proportions of site-prepared grout. ACI 530.1: 2.6.B X 3e Construction of mortar joints and placement of masonry units. ACI 530.1: 3.3.B X 4 During construction 4a Size and location of structural elements: ACI 530.1: 3.3.F X 4b Type, size, and location of anchors and other details for anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames, and other construction. ACI 530: 1.2.1(e), 6.1.4.3, 6.2.1 X 4c Welding of reinforcement. ACI 530: 8.1.6.7.2, 9.3.3.4 (c), 11.3.3.4 (b) October 2016 01_45_24-17 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) APPENDIX F - SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: SOILS Item No. Inspections / Tests Reference Frequency of Inspection During Task Listed Continuous Periodic 1 Excavations: 1a Confirm that excavations extend to specified depth and have reached specified bearing material(s) X 2 Subgrade: 2a Confirm that materials below footings are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity. X 2b Prior to placement of controlled fill, observe subgrade and verify that site has been properly prepared. X 3 Fill and backfill: 3a Perform classification and testing of fill and backfill materials before installation. X 3b Verify use of specified materials and lift thicknesses, and compaction to specified densities during placement and compaction of fill and backfill X October 2016 01_45_24-18 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_45_24 (FS-100) APPENDIX G2 - SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: DEEP FOUNDATIONS - CAST-IN-PLACE Item No. Inspections / Tests Reference Frequency of Inspection During Task Listed Continuous Periodic 1 Prior to drilling 1a Confirm that materials conform to approved construction documents. X 1b Determine capacity of test elements. Conduct additional load tests as required. X 1c Verify location of drilled shaft. X 2 During drilling 2a Verify alignment/plumbness of drilled shaft. X 2b Verify installation of casing to protect sides of drilled shaft. X 2c Determine elevation of competent soils and required penetration(s) to achieve specified design capacity. X 3 Placement of deep foundation 3a Grades, lengths, placement details, and clearances of reinforcing steel. X 3b Verify use of required design mix. X 3c Determine theoretical volume of concrete to fill shaft and record the volume of concrete placed (as possible). X 3d Testing: At the time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete. X 3e Inspection of concrete placement for proper installation techniques. X October 2016 01_60_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) SECTION 01_60_00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Product requirements; product selection; product options and substitutions; quality assurance; delivery, handling, and storage; and manufacturer’s instructions. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Inclusive of material, equipment, systems, shop fabrications, source quality control. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). B. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components. 2. 372 - Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content. 1.04 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. B. Provide products by same manufacturer when products are of similar nature, unless otherwise specified. C. Provide like parts of duplicate units that are interchangeable. D. Provide equipment that has not been in service prior to delivery, except as required by tests. E. When necessary, modify manufacturer's standard product to conform to specified requirements or requirements indicated on the Drawings and contained in Laws and Regulations. F. Material requirements: 1. Materials: Provide corrosion resistance suitable for project conditions as specified in Section 01_81_02. 2. Dissimilar metals: Separate contacting surfaces with dielectric material. October 2016 01_60_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LEAD LIMITS A. Materials in contact with drinking waters: In accordance with NSF 61 and NSF 372. 2.02 PRODUCT SELECTION A. When products are specified by standard or specification designations of technical societies, organizations, or associations only, provide products that meet or exceed reference standard and Specifications. B. When products are specified with names of manufacturers but no model numbers or catalog designations, provide: 1. Products by one of named manufacturers that meet or exceed Specifications. 2. Engineer deemed "or equal" evidenced by an approved shop drawing or other written communication. C. When products are specified with names of manufacturers and model numbers or catalog designations, provide: 1. Products with model numbers or catalog designations by one of named manufacturers. 2. Engineer deemed "or equal" evidenced by an approved shop drawing or other written communication. D. When products are specified with names of manufacturers, but with brand or trade names, model numbers, or catalog designations by one manufacturer only, provide: 1. Products specified by brand or trade name, model number, or catalog designation. 2. Products by one of named manufacturers proven in accordance with requirements for or equals to meet or exceed quality, appearance and performance of specified brand or trade name, model number, or catalog designation. 3. Engineer deemed "or equal" evidenced by an approved shop drawing or other written communication. E. When Products are specified with only one manufacturer followed by "or Equal," provide: 1. Products meeting or exceeding Specifications by specified manufacturer. 2. Engineer deemed "or equal" evidenced by an approved shop drawing or other written communication. 2.03 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitution request procedure: 1. Submit a substitution request to Engineer. 2. Engineer will return initial opinion and request for additional information. 3. Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject the substitution request. October 2016 01_60_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) B. Substitution request contents: 1. Provide Substitution Request Form as specified in this Section. 2. Manufacturer’s literature including: a. Manufacturer’s name and address. b. Product name. c. Product description. d. Reference standards. e. Certified performance and test data. f. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Samples, if applicable. 4. Shop drawings, if applicable. 5. Reference projects where the product has been successfully used. a. Name and address of project. b. Year of installation. c. Year placed in operation. d. Name of product installed. e. Point of contact: Name and phone number. 6. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified including a list of significant variations. a. Design features. b. Design dimensions. c. Installation requirements. d. Operations and maintenance requirements. 7. Define impacts. a. Impacts to construction schedule. b. Impacts to other contracts. c. Impacts to other work or products. d. Impact to Contract Sum. 1) Do not include costs under separate contracts. 2) Do not include Engineer’s costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents. 3) Required license fees or royalties. e. Availability of maintenance services and sources of replacement materials. 8. Contractor represents the following: a. Contractor bears the burden of proof of the equivalency of the proposed substitution. b. Proposed substitution does not change the design intent and will have equal performance to the specified product. c. Proposed substitution is equal or superior to the specified product. d. Contractor will provide the warranties or bonds that would be provided on the specified product on the proposed substitution, unless Owner requires a Special Warranty. e. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work and will be responsible for the costs to make changes as required to the Work. f. Contractor waives rights to claim additional costs caused by proposed substitution which may subsequently become apparent. October 2016 01_60_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) C. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance under the following conditions: 1. No substitution request is made. 2. The substitution is simply implied or indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals. 3. The substitution request is submitted by a subcontractor or supplier. D. Substitution requests submitted after the deadline will not be considered unless the following evidence is submitted to the Engineer: 1. Proof that the specified product is unavailable for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor. a. Reasons may include manufacturing discontinued, bankruptcy, labor strikes, or acts of God. b. Contractor placed or attempted to place orders for the specified products within 10 days after the effective date of the Agreement. c. The substitution request is submitted to Engineer within 10 days of the Contractor discovering the specified product cannot be obtained. E. Engineer’s decision on a substitution requests will be final and binding. 1. Approved substitutions will be incorporated into the Contract Documents with a Change Order. 2. Requests for time extensions and additional costs based on submission of, approval of, or rejection of substitutions will not be allowed. 2.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ entities that meet or exceed specified qualifications to execute the Work. B. Inspect conditions before executing subsequent portions of the Work. Accept responsibility for correcting unsatisfactory conditions upon executing subsequent portions of the Work. 2.05 SHIPMENT, HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Shipment: 1. Mandatory requirements prior to shipment of equipment: a. Engineer approved shop drawings. b. Engineer approved Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. c. Submit draft operations and maintenance manuals, as specified in Section 01_78_23. 2. Prepare products for shipment by: a. Tagging or marking products to agree with delivery schedule or shop drawings. b. Including complete packing lists and bills of material with each shipment. c. Packaging products to facilitate handling and protection against damage during transit, handling, and storage. d. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment. 3. Transport products by methods that avoid product damage. B. Receiving: 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging. October 2016 01_60_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) C. Handling: 1. Handle equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage. 3. Upon delivery, promptly inspect shipments. a. Verify compliance with Contract Documents, correct quantities, and undamaged condition of products. b. Acceptance of shipment does not constitute final acceptance of equipment. D. Storage: 1. Immediately store and protect products and materials until installed in Work. 2. Store products with seals and legible labels intact. 3. Maintain products within temperature and humidity ranges required or recommended by manufacturer. 4. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. a. Repaint damaged painted surfaces. 5. Exterior storage of fabricated products: a. Place on aboveground supports that allow for drainage. b. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. c. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation under covering. 6. Store moisture sensitive products in watertight enclosures. 7. Furnish covered, weather-protected storage structures providing a clean, dry, noncorrosive environment for all mechanical equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment and special equipment to be incorporated into this project. a. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the “instructions for storage” of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. b. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer’s instructions for storage to the Engineer prior to storage of all equipment and materials. 8. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent materials mixing with foreign matter. Provide access for inspection. 9. Payment will not be made for improperly stored equipment and materials. 10. Provide equipment log including, as a minimum, the equipment identification, date stored, date of inspection/maintenance, date removed from storage, copy of manufacturer’s recommended storage guidelines, description of inspection/maintenance activities performed, and signature of party performing inspection/maintenance. E. Protection after installation: 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. a. Remove covering when no longer needed. b. Corroded, damaged, or deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project. October 2016 01_60_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) 2.06 SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Provide spare parts, maintenance products, and special tools as required by Specifications. B. Box, tag, and clearly mark items. C. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner to determine appropriate location and facility onsite to store spare parts, maintenance products, and special tools in enclosed, weather-proof, and lighted facility during the construction period. D. Spare parts and special tools inventory list, see Appendix A: 1. Equipment tag number. 2. Equipment manufacturer. 3. Subassembly component, if appropriate. 4. Quantity. 5. Storage location. E. Large items: 1. Weight: Greater than 50 pounds. 2. Size: Greater than 24 inches wide by 18 inches high by 36 inches long. 3. Stored individually. 4. Clearly labeled: a. Equipment tag number. b. Equipment manufacturer. c. Subassembly component, if appropriate. F. Smaller items: 1. Weight: Less than 50 pounds. 2. Size: Less than 24 inches wide by 18 inches high by 36 inches long. 3. Stored in spare parts box. 4. Clearly labeled: a. Equipment tag number. b. Equipment manufacturer. c. Subassembly component, if appropriate. G. Spare parts and special tools box: 1. Wooden box: a. Size: 24 inches wide by 18 inches high by 36 inches long. 2. Hinged wooden cover. a. Strap type hinges. b. Locking hasp. c. Spare parts inventory list taped to underside of cover. 3. Coating: As specified in Section 09_96_01. 4. Clearly labeled: a. The words “Spare Parts and/or Special Tools”. b. Equipment tag number. c. Equipment manufacturer. October 2016 01_60_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect components for shipping damage and conformance to Contract Documents. 3.02 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Owner may request advanced delivery of spare parts, maintenance products, and special tools. 1. Deduct the delivered items from inventory and provide transmittal documentation. 2. Coordinate with Resident Engineer and Owner for acceptance and storage of spare parts. B. Immediately prior to the date of Substantial Completion, arrange to deliver spare parts, maintenance products, and special tools to Owner at a location on site chosen by the Owner. 1. Provide itemized list of spare parts and special tools that matches the identification tag attached to each item. 2. Owner and Engineer will review the inventory and the itemized list to confirm it is complete and in good condition prior to signing for acceptance. 3.04 ATTACHMENTS A. Appendix A - Spare Parts, Maintenance Products, and Special Tools Inventory List. B. Appendix B - Sample Substitution Request Form. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_60_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) APPENDIX A SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS INVENTORY LIST Owner: Date: Contractor: Project No.: Project Name: Inventory List Spec Number: Spec Title Equipment Tag No.: Equipment Manufacturer: Quantity Subassembly Component Description Manufacturer’s Part Number Storage Location Ownership Transition Date (Contractor to Owner) Ownership Transition Verification (Owner Signature) October 2016 01_60_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) APPENDIX B SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM October 2016 01_60_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Owner: Date: Contractor: Project No.: Project Name: To: From: Re: Contract For: Engineering Project Number: Substitution Request Number: Specification Information Title: Number: Page: Article/Paragraph: Description: Proposed Substitution Product: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone: History: New Product 2-5 years old 5-10 years old More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: Point-by-point comparative data and impacts attached – REQUIRED BY ENGINEER October 2016 01_60_00-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) Reason For Not Providing Specified Item Reason: Similar Installation: Project: Address: Date Installed: Owner: Architect: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes, Explain: Benefit to Owner For Accepting Substitution Savings: ($) Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: No Yes (Add) (Deduct) days Supporting Data Attached Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports Reference Projects Other: Certifications The undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product, unless Owner requires a Special Warranty. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including Engineer design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. • Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. October 2016 01_60_00-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_60_00 (FS-100) Certifications Submitted by: Signed by: Firm Name Firm Address: Phone: Attachments: Engineer’s Review And Action Substitution accepted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01_33_00. Substitution accepted as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01_33_00. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments Additional Comments: Contractor Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer Engineer Other: Comments: October 2016 01_75_17-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) SECTION 01_75_17 COMMISSIONING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Requirements for each Commissioning phase of, the Project equipment/system and/or facility. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 3. Section 23_05_93 - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 4. Section 26_08_50 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 5. Section 40_05_00.09 - Piping Systems Testing. 6. Section 40_80_01 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning. 7. Section 46_05_10 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment. 8. Section 46_05_94 - Mechanical Equipment Testing. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Clean Water Facility Testing – Testing of complete facility utilizing clean water for purposes of confirming extended equipment/system operation prior to Process Start-up Phase. B. Commissioning – The process of planning, testing, and process start-up of the installation for compliance with contract requirements and demonstrating, through documented verification, that the project has successfully met the Contractual requirements. It includes training the Owner's staff to operate the facility. C. Commissioning Phases – The work activities of facility commissioning are grouped into the phases defined in the table below. Commissioning Planning Phase Testing and Training Phase Process Start-Up Phase Owner Training Plan and Schedule Source Testing Process Start-up Subsystem Testing Plan Owner Training Process Operational Period Clean Water Facility Testing Plan Installation Testing Functional Testing Clean Water Facility Testing Closeout Documentation October 2016 01_75_17-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) D. Component – A basic building block of equipment, subsystems, and systems that requires installation or functional testing but does not have an electrical connection or internal electronics. (Examples: filter effluent piping and manual isolation valves). E. Device – A basic building block of equipment, subsystems, and systems that requires installation or functional testing and does have an electrical connection or internal electronics. (Examples: filter level transmitter or water pump pressure transmitter). F. Equipment – An assembly of component(s) and devices(s) that requires installation or functional testing. (Examples: Pump, motor, VFD, Ozone Generator, UV Disinfection System, etc.). G. Facility – A grouping of process areas, systems, subsystems, equipment, components, and devices (Examples: treatment plant, pump station, etc.). H. Functional Testing – Testing performed on a completed subsystem to demonstrate that equipment/system meets manufacturers’ calibration and adjustment requirements and other requirements as specified. Functional testing includes operating equipment/system manually in local, manually in remote (or remote manual), and automatically in remote (in remote auto). I. Installation Testing – Testing to demonstrate that subsystem component (piping, power, networks, devices, etc.) is ready and meets the project requirements in advance of functional testing. Installation testing also includes manufacturers’ certification of installation and other requirements as specified to prepare equipment/system for Functional Testing. Also referred to as Field Acceptance Testing. J. Instrumentation and Controls Fine-Tuning – Improving the performance of the Instrumentation Process Control system by operating for an extended time period. K. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing – When applicable, the form is used during Source Testing for the manufacturer to confirm that the applicable source tests have been performed and results conform to the Contract Documents. The form is provided at the end of this Section. L. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance – The form is used during Installation Testing and Functional Testing. It is submitted at the end of Functional Testing to confirm that the equipment/system is installed in conformance with the Contract Documents and that it meets the Functional Testing requirements defined in the Contract Documents. The form is provided at the end of this Section. M. Process Area – A grouping of systems, subsystems, equipment, components, and devices that divide a facility into functional areas. (Examples: Filter Process Area or Chemical Area). N. Process Operational Period – A period of time after completion of the process start-up set aside for final Operational Testing to verify facility performance meets the Contract Document requirements. This period may specifically limit other construction activities. October 2016 01_75_17-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) O. Process Start-up Phase - Operating the facility to verify performance meets the Contract Document requirements. P. Process Start-Up – Activities conducted after the testing and training phase that are necessary to place systems or process areas into operational service. Q. Product – A system, subsystem, or component. R. Subsystem – A building block of systems made up from a grouping of components, devices, and equipment that perform a definable function. (Examples: Filter No. 1 Backwash Subsystem, Sedimentation Basin No. 1 Hoseless Sludge Removal Subsystem). S. System – A grouping of subsystems, equipment, components, and devices that perform a definable function. (Examples: Filter No. 1, Sedimentation Basin). 1.03 COMMISSIONING COORDINATION (CC) A. Contractor, Owner and Resident Engineer shall coordinate to provide commissioning coordination for the Project. B. CC responsibilities include the following: 1. Lead efforts relating to Commissioning. 2. Be thoroughly familiar with commissioning requirements in the Contract Documents. 3. Be regularly engaged and experienced in all aspects of commissioning. 4. Provide technical instruction for commissioning. 5. Provide primary interface with Engineer and Owner for efforts relating to Commissioning of Project facilities. 6. Coordinate training efforts. 1.04 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVES A. Qualification of manufacturer’s representative as specified in the Contract Documents technical Sections include the following: 1. Authorized representative of the manufacturer, factory trained and experienced in the technical applications, installation, operation, and maintenance of respective equipment/system with full authority by the equipment/system manufacturer to issue the certifications required of the manufacturer. 2. Competent, experienced technical representatives of equipment/system manufacturer for assembly, installation, testing guidance, and training. 3. Additional qualifications may be specified in the individual Sections. 4. Submit qualifications of the manufacturer’s representative no later than 30 days in advance of required observations. 5. Representative subject to approval by Owner and Engineer. 6. No substitute representatives will be allowed until written approval by Owner and Engineer has been obtained. B. Completion of manufacturer on-site services: Engineer approval required. October 2016 01_75_17-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) C. Manufacturer is responsible for determining the time required to perform the specified services. 1. Minimum times specified in the Contract Documents are estimates. 2. No additional costs associated with performing the required services will be approved. 3. Manufacturer required to schedule services in accordance with the Contractor’s project schedule up to and including making multiple trips to project site when there are separate milestones associated with installation of each occurrence of manufacturer’s equipment. D. Manufacturer’s on-site services as specified in the Contract Documents include the following: 1. Assistance during Commissioning Phase and Process Start-Up Phase. 2. Provide daily copies of manufacturer's representatives' field notes and data to Engineer. 3. Other requirements as specified in the Contract Documents. 1.05 PLANNING PHASE A. Overview of Planning Phase: 1. Define approach and timing for Commissioning. B. Owner training plan and schedule: 1. Training outcomes: a. Owner’s operations, maintenance, and engineering staff have the information needed to safely operate, maintain, and repair the equipment/systems provided under this Contract. 2. Training objectives: a. To instruct personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment/system. Instruction shall include step-by-step troubleshooting procedures with all necessary test equipment/system. b. To instruct personnel in the removal, inspection, and cleaning of equipment/system as needed. c. Training tailored to the skills and job classifications of the staff attending the classes (e.g., plant superintendent, treatment plant operator, maintenance technician, electrician, etc.). d. Provide supporting documentation, such as vendor operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Training schedule: a. Schedule Owner’s staff training within the constraints of their workloads. Those who will participate in this training have existing full-time work assignments, and training is an additional assigned work task, therefore, scheduling is imperative. Owner staff work schedules regularly shift, as treatment facilities are typically operated on an around-the-clock basis. 4. Training plan: a. Coordinate and arrange for manufacturer’s representatives to provide both classroom-based learning and field (hands-on) training, based on training module content and stated learning objectives. b. Conduct classroom training at location designated by Owner. October 2016 01_75_17-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) c. Scope and sequence: 1) Plan and schedule training in the correct sequence to provide prerequisite knowledge and skills to trainees. a) Describe recommended procedures to check/test equipment/system following a corrective maintenance repair. 5. Training scheduling coordination: a. Complete Owner training no sooner than 15 calendar days prior to start of process start-up of each system. 6. Meetings: a. Commissioning progress meetings will be held between Owner, Contractor and Resident Engineer throughout construction, to plan, scope, coordinate, and schedule future activities, resolve problems, etc. 1) Frequency: Monthly minimum. Increase frequency as needed based on complexity and quantity of commissioning activities. 7. Training sessions: a. Provide training sessions for equipment/system as specified in the individual equipment/system Section. b. Submit Commissioning Schedule not less than 30 calendar days prior to planned initial commissioning of each subsystem or system. 8. Schedule requirements: a. Provide detailed schedule of commissioning activities including durations and sequencing requirements. 1) Identify the following activities: a) Testing and Training Phase: (1) Source Testing. (2) Owner Training. (3) Installation Testing. (4) Functional Testing. (5) Clean Water Facility Testing. (6) Closeout Documentation. b) Process Start-Up Phase: (1) Process Start-Up. (2) Process Operational Period. (3) Instrumentation and Controls Fine-Tuning. b. Schedule manufacturer’s services to avoid conflict with other on-site testing or other manufacturers’ on-site services. c. Verify that conditions necessary to allow successful testing have been met before scheduling services. C. Subsystem testing plans: 1. Provide separate testing plans for each individual subsystem and system that include the following: a. Approach to testing including procedures, schedule, and recirculation requirements. b. Test objective: Demonstrate subsystem meets the design requirements as specified in the technical Sections. c. Test descriptions, forms, temporary systems (pumps, piping, etc.), shutdown requirements for existing systems, test forms, test logs, witness forms, and checklists to be used to control and document the required tests. October 2016 01_75_17-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) d. Test forms: Include, but not limited to, the following information: 1) Tag and name of equipment/system to be tested. 2) Test date. 3) Names of persons conducting the test. 4) Names of persons witnessing the test, where applicable. 5) Test data. 6) Applicable project requirements. 7) Check offs for each completed test or test step. 8) Place for signature of person conducting tests and for the witnessing person, as applicable. e. Define start-up sequencing of unit processes: 1) Include testing of alarms, interlocks, permissives, control circuits, capacities, speeds, flows, pressures, vibrations, sound levels, and other parameters. 2) Provide detailed test procedures setting forth step-by-step descriptions of the procedures for systematic testing of equipment/system. 3) Demonstrate proper rotation, alignment, speed, flow, pressure, vibration, sound level, adjustments, and calibration. a) Perform initial checks in the presence of and with the assistance of the manufacturer’s representative. 4) Demonstrate proper operation of each control loop function including mechanical, electrical, alarms, local and remote controls, instrumentation, and other equipment/system functions. a) Generate signals with test equipment/system to simulate operating conditions in each control mode. 2. Engineer approval of test plan is required prior to performing test. a. Revise and update test plans based on review comments, actual progress, or to accommodate changes in the sequence of activities. b. Submit test reports for each phase of testing for each equipment/system. c. Engineer approval of preceding test reports is required prior to start of next test. d. Tests will be rescheduled if test plan is not approved by the required deadline. 3. Contractor is responsible to reproduce and distribute final test procedures. D. Clean Water Facility Testing Plan: 1. Submit a Clean Water Facility Testing Plan equivalent to the requirements of the subsystem test plans a minimum of 30 calendar days prior to Clean Water Facility Testing. Clean water may be non-potable plant water if acceptable to Owner. 1.06 TESTING AND TRAINING PHASE A. Overview of Testing And Training Phase: 1. General: a. Include specified Source Testing, Owner Training, Installation Testing, Functional Testing, Clean Water Facility Testing, and Closeout Documentation required by this Section and the technical Sections. 2. Contractor responsibilities: a. Prior to testing, verify equipment protective devices and safety devices have been installed, calibrated, and tested. October 2016 01_75_17-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) b. Acceptable tests: Demonstrate the equipment/system performance meets the requirements stated in the Contract Documents. 1) When the equipment/system fails to meet the specified requirements, perform additional, more detailed, testing to determine the cause, correct, repair, or replace the causative components and repeat the testing that revealed the deficiency. B. Source Testing: 1. Also referred to as factory testing or factory acceptance testing (FAT). 2. Test components, devices, and equipment/system for proper performance at point of manufacture or assembly as specified in the technical Sections. 3. Notify the Engineer in writing when the equipment/system is ready for source inspection and testing. 4. Source Test Plan: a. As specified in this Section and other technical Sections. b. Source Testing requirements as specified in technical Sections. 1) Non-witnessed: Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2) Witnessed: 1 Owner's representative and 1 Engineer’s representative present during testing, unless otherwise specified, and provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. c. Prepared by Contractor as a result of discussions and planning emerging from regularly conducted commissioning meetings for source tests as specified in the Contract Documents. d. Provide the following items for each Source Test (unless determined by Contractor, Owner and Engineer that level of equipment complexity does not warrant all of the following source test plan elements; source plan requirements tailored to level of equipment complexity): 1) Purpose and goals of the test. 2) Identification of each item of equipment/system, including system designation, location, tag number, control loop identifier, etc. 3) Description of the pass/fail criteria that will be used. 4) Listing of pertinent reference documents (Contract Documents and industry standards or Sections applicable to the testing). 5) Complete description, including drawings or photographs, of test stands and/or test apparatus. 6) Credentials of test personnel. 7) Descriptions of test equipment to be used, product information, and all appropriate calibration records for the test equipment. 8) Test set-up procedures. 9) Detailed step-by-step test procedures. a) The level of detail shall be sufficient for any witness with a rudimentary technical aptitude to be able to follow the steps and develop confidence that the tests were being performed as planned. b) All steps are significant, and all steps shall be included in the procedures. 10) Sample data logs and data recording forms. October 2016 01_75_17-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) 11) Sample computations or analyses with the results in the same format as the final report to demonstrate how data collected will be used to generate final results. a) Complete disclosure of the calculation methodologies. b) Include a sample for each type of computation required for the test and analysis of the results. 12) Detailed outline of the Source Test report. 13) Sample test reports. e. Submit Source Test Plan and forms as specified in the technical Sections. 1) Submit a copy of the Source Test Plan at least 21 days before any scheduled test date. 2) Engineer approval of Source Test Plan required prior to beginning source testing. 3) Schedule the testing after approval of the test procedures submittal. f. Indicate the desired dates for source inspection and testing. 1) Notify the Engineer of the scheduled tests a minimum of 15 days before the date of the test. 5. Test results: a. Prepare and submit test results with collected data attached. 6. Contractor is responsible for costs associated with Owner's representatives (no more than 2 total representatives) witnessing Source Tests, unless otherwise approved by Owner. a. Include costs for at least the following: 1) On-site time: 1 day at the site plus travel time each direction, unless specified otherwise. 2) Transportation costs: a) Travel 1 day on commercial airline to site including air flight costs. b) Travel 1 day on commercial airline from site including air flight costs. c) Mid-size rental car or taxi services from hotel to and from the test site plus fuel, tolls, and airport parking at the departing airport. d) International travel: Per diem rates as established by the U.S. Department of State for the specific location and dates of travel. Travel expenses may include the direct cost of securing passports, visas, language interpreters, document translators, communications and internet access. 3) Hotel costs at a facility with an American Automobile Association 3 diamond rating or better for single occupancy room per person per day. 4) Meal allowance of $61 per person per day. 5) On-site time: 1 day at the site, unless specified otherwise. 6) Only actual costs will be documented and billed. b. If Source Test is not ready when the witnesses arrive or if the Source Test fails, the witnesses will return home with Contractor responsible for costs associated with the trip including costs described above. Contractor is responsible for rescheduling the Source Test and witnesses’ costs associated with the second trip including costs described above. c. Fees incurred such as airline reservation change fees, loss of fare due to purchase of nonrefundable tickets, hotel cancellation/rebooking fees, and similar expenses incurred as a result of OSS-requested changes to the October 2016 01_75_17-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) inspection schedule after the initial notification shall be borne by the Contractor. 7. Contractor is responsible for providing fuel, chemicals, and other consumables needed for Source Testing. C. Owner training: 1. Training instruction format: a. The training for operations and maintenance personnel shall be provided as one entity. b. Instructors shall apply adult education best practices, emphasizing learner participation and activity. c. Training delivery may include problem solving, question/answer, hands-on instruction, practice, evaluation/feedback tools, and lecture. d. Visual aids and hands-on practice sessions must support training objectives. e. Lecturing should be less than 30 percent of class time. f. Conduct hands-on instruction according to the following descriptions: 1) Present hands-on demonstrations of at least the following tasks: a) Proper start-up, shutdown, and normal and alternative operating strategies. b) Common corrective maintenance repairs for each group. c) Describe recommended procedures to check/test equipment/system following a corrective maintenance repair. 2) Use tools and equipment provided by manufacturer to conduct the demonstrations. a) Submit requests for supplemental assistance and facilities with the Contractor’s proposed lesson plans. 3) Contractor remains responsible for equipment disassembly or assembly during hands-on training situations involving equipment disassembly or assembly by Owner’s personnel. a) Provide written certification of proper equipment/system operation to Engineer after completion of hands-on training. 2. Class agenda: a. Include the following information in the agenda: 1) Instructor name. 2) Listing of subjects to be discussed. 3) Time estimated for each subject. 4) Allocation of time for Owner staff to ask questions and discuss the subject matter. 5) List of documentation to be used or provided to support training. b. Owner may request that particular subjects be emphasized and the agenda be adjusted to accommodate these requests. c. Distribute copies of the agenda to each student at the beginning of each training class. 3. Number of students: a. Estimated maximum class size: 15 persons. 1) Owner will determine the actual number of students. 2) Engineer will provide an estimated headcount 1 week prior to the class, so that the instructor can provide the correct number of training aids for students. October 2016 01_75_17-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) 4. Instructor qualifications: a. Provide instructors completely knowledgeable in the equipment/system for which they are training. b. Provide instructor’s technical preparation and instructional technology skills and experience. c. Sales representatives are not qualified instructors unless they possess the detailed operating and maintenance knowledge required for proper class instruction. d. If, in the opinion of the Owner, an appropriately knowledgeable person did not provide the scheduled training, such training shall be rescheduled and repeated with a suitable instructor. 5. Training aids: a. Instructors are encouraged to use audio-visual devices, P&IDs, models, charts, and so forth to increase the transfer of knowledge. b. Instructors shall provide such equipment (televisions, video recorder/player, computer, projectors, screens, easels, etc.), models, charts, and so forth for each class. c. Instructor is responsible for confirming with Engineer and Owner in advance of each class that the classroom will be appropriate for the types of audiovisual equipment to be employed. 6. Classroom documentation: a. Trainees will keep training materials and documentation after the session. b. Operations and maintenance manuals, as specified in technical Sections: 1) Provide a minimum of 2 copies of final Engineer-approved operations and maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01_78_23 for use during the classroom instruction. 2) Owner reserves the right to delay training for a particular equipment item if the operations and maintenance manuals for that equipment are incomplete, inaccurate, or otherwise unsuitable for use by the Owner’s staff. 3) No contract extensions or extra costs will be allowed for training delays due to operations and maintenance manual submittal delays. 4) Owner may waive requirement to have operations and maintenance manuals provide prior to training. c. Provide supplemental documentation handouts to support instruction. d. Digitally record audio and video of each training class, if requested by Owner. Contractor is responsible for recording any training classes conducted. 1) Include classroom and field instruction with question and answering periods. 2) Engineer approval required for producer of video materials from one of the following options: a) Qualified, professional video production company. b) Contractor demonstrates satisfactory skill. 3) Record in digital format and recording shall become property of the Owner. a) Provide audio quality that is not degraded during the recording of the field sessions due to background noise, space, distance or other factors. 4) Video files shall be file format and delivery medium as directed and approved by Owner. October 2016 01_75_17-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) 5) Provide 2 complete sets of video materials fully indexed and cataloged with printed labels stating session content and dates recorded. 6) The Contractor shall provide a written release from all claims to the recorded training material produced, if required. e. Training modules: 1) Provide a training module for each equipment category. 2) Divide each training module’s instructional content into discrete lesson plans. f. Lesson plans: 1) Provide performance-based learning objectives. 2) State learning objectives in terms of what the trainees will be able to do at the end of the lesson. 3) Define student conditions of performance and criteria for evaluating instructional success. a) Provide the following information: 4) Instruction lesson plan outlines for each craft. a) Provide specific components and procedures. 5) Minimum requirements: a) Hands-on demonstrations planned for the instructions. b) Cross-reference training aids. c) Planned training strategies such as whiteboard work, instructor questions, and discussion points or other planned classroom or field strategies. d) Attach handouts cross-referenced by section or topic in the lesson plan. e) Indicate duration of outlined training segments. 6) Provide maintenance instruction lesson plans including mechanical, instrumentation, and electrical aspects: a) Equipment operation: (1) Describe equipment’s operating (process) function and system theory. (2) Describe equipment’s fundamental operating principles and dynamics. (3) Identify equipment’s mechanical, electrical, and electronic components and features. (4) Identify support equipment associated with the operation of subject equipment. (5) Detail the relationship of each piece of equipment or component to the subsystems, systems, and process. (6) Cite hazards associated with the operations, exposure to chemicals associated with the component, or the waste stream handled by the component. (7) Specify appropriate safety precautions, equipment, and procedures to eliminate, reduce, or overcome hazards. b) Detailed component description: (1) Define Preventative Maintenance (PM) inspection procedures required on equipment in operation, spot potential trouble symptoms (anticipate breakdowns), and October 2016 01_75_17-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) forecast maintenance requirements (predictive maintenance). (a) Review preventive maintenance frequency and task analysis table. (2) Identify each component function and describe in detail. (3) Where applicable, group relative components into subsystems. (4) Identify and describe in detail equipment safety features, permissive and controls interlocks. 7) Provide the following information in equipment troubleshooting lesson plans: a) Define recommended systematic troubleshooting procedures as they relate to specific craft problems. b) Provide component specific troubleshooting checklists as they relate to specific craft problems. 8) Provide the following information in equipment Corrective Maintenance (CM) troubleshooting lesson: a) Describe recommended equipment preparation requirements as they relate to specific craft problems. b) Identify and describe the use of any special tools required for maintenance of the equipment as they relate to specific craft problems. c) Describe component removal/installation and disassembly/assembly procedures for specific craft repairs. d) Perform at least 2 hands-on demonstrations of common corrective maintenance repairs. (1) Additional demonstrations may be required by the Owner. e) Describe recommended measuring instruments and procedures, and provide instruction on interpreting alignment measurements, as appropriate. 7. Class logistics: a. Delivery time minimum: 4 hours. b. Delivery time maximum: 8 hours. c. Schedule specific sessions: 1) Minimum of 30 days in advance to allow Owner staffing arrangements to take place. 2) At the times requested by the Owner, within the period 7 a.m. to 7 p.m. Monday through Friday. a) Times scheduled will be at Owner’s discretion. 3) Owner approval and confirmation required for session schedules. 4) Provide minimum of 2 sessions for each class unless otherwise noted. a) The purpose of having multiple sessions on each class is to accommodate the attendance of as many Owner personnel working different shifts as possible. b) A maximum of 1 session per day for each class. 8. Distribute Training Evaluation Form following each training session. a. Training Evaluation Form is included in this Section. b. Return completed Training Evaluation Forms to Owner’s designated training coordinator immediately after session is completed. October 2016 01_75_17-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) c. Revise training sessions judged “Unsatisfactory” by a majority of attendees. 1) Conduct training sessions again until a satisfactory rating is achieved at no additional cost to Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with repeated training sessions including costs for trainee time. 9. Submittals: a. Prior to the training session: 1) Instructor qualifications: 30 calendar days prior to initial training session. 2) Training course materials: 14 calendar days prior to initial training session. a) Training agenda, lesson plan, presentation, and handouts. b) Other audio-visual aids utilized during each training course. c) Format: 2 electronic copies and 3 hard copies organized in notebooks. b. Post training session: 1) Training course materials: Due 14 calendar days after class completion. a) Video recordings. b) Class attendance sheet. c) Training agenda, final lesson plan, presentation, and handouts. d) Other audio-visual aids utilized during each training course. e) Provide materials for all sessions of the class in a single transmittal. f) Format: 2 electronic copies and 3 hard copies organized in notebooks. D. Installation Testing: 1. Perform subsystem testing according to approved Subsystem Testing Plans. 2. Initiate the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance for all equipment. a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance form is included in this Section. b. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance certifies the equipment meets the following requirements: 1) Has been properly installed, adjusted, aligned, and lubricated. 2) Is free of any stresses imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 3) Is able to be operated as necessary for Functional Testing. c. Form shall be submitted after completion of Functional Testing, as specified in this Section. 3. Coordinate Installation Testing with restrictions and requirements as specified in Section 01_14_00. 4. Perform coating holiday testing as specified in Section 09_96_01. 5. Perform pressure and leakage testing as specified in individual component Sections and Section 40_05_00.09. 6. Perform mechanical equipment Installation Testing: As specified below and in individual equipment Sections: a. Remove rust preventatives and oils applied to protect equipment during construction. October 2016 01_75_17-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) b. Flush lubrication systems and dispose of flushing oils. 1) Recharge lubrication system with lubricant recommended by manufacturer. c. Flush fuel system and provide fuel for testing and start-up. d. Install and adjust packing, mechanical seals, O-rings, and other seals. Replace defective seals. e. Remove temporary supports, bracing, or other foreign objects installed to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and erection. f. Check rotating machinery for correct direction of rotation and for freedom of moving parts before connecting driver. g. Perform cold alignment and hot alignment to manufacturer's tolerances. h. Adjust V-belt tension and variable pitch sheaves. i. Inspect hand and motorized valves for proper adjustment. 1) Tighten packing glands to ensure no leakage, but permit valve stems to rotate without galling. 2) Verify valve seats are positioned for proper flow direction. j. Tighten leaking flanges or replace flange gasket. 1) Inspect screwed joints for leakage. k. Install gratings, safety chains, handrails, shaft guards, and sidewalks prior to operational testing. l. Owner may perform some of the activities listed in this subsection (to be coordinated between Owner and Contractor). 7. Electrical devices and subsystems Installation Testing: As specified in the technical Sections. 8. Instrumentation devices and subsystems Installation Testing: As specified in the technical Sections. 9. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems Installation Testing: As specified below, and technical Sections. a. Perform testing of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment, balancing of distribution systems, and adjusting of ductwork accessories. b. Test hydronic systems, if required by technical Sections. E. Functional Testing: 1. Perform subsystem testing according to approved Subsystem Testing Plan. 2. Notify the Engineer 5 days prior to when the Work is ready for Functional Testing. a. Perform testing in the presence of the Engineer. 3. Determine Functional Testing durations with Owner’s input. a. Durations will vary depending on the availability of water for testing. b. Target minimum Functional Test duration: 8 hours. 1) Identify equipment/system that cannot be tested for a minimum of 8 hours as specified in technical Sections. 4. Perform Functional Testing as specified in technical Sections. a. Perform Functional Testing in addition to the other tests specified in the technical Sections. b. Perform Functional Testing to demonstrate that the component equipment functions as an entire system in accordance with the design requirements. c. Perform Functional Testing to demonstrate that the unit process has operated in a manner necessary to demonstrate equipment/system functions manually in local, manually in remote (or remote manual), and automatically in remote (in remote auto). d. Perform testing with Contractor-provided water. October 2016 01_75_17-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) e. Repair or replace parts that operate improperly and retest. f. Submit testing results as specified in the technical Sections to the Owner and Engineer for approval of Functional Testing results. 5. Provide completed Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance forms for all equipment. a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance form is included in this Section. b. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance certifies the equipment/system meets the following requirements: 1) Is suitable for satisfactory full-time operation under full-load conditions. 2) Operates within the allowable limits for vibration and noise. 3) Electrical and instrumentation requirements: a) Electrical equipment, instrumentation, and control panels are properly installed, calibrated, and functioning. b) Electrical Installation Testing is complete, and test results have been approved by the Engineer. (1) Noted deficiencies have been corrected. (2) Relays, circuit breakers, and other protective devices are set. c) Control logic for start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, control, and emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly functioning. d) Motor control is calibrated and tested. F. Clean Water Facility Testing: 1. Utilize plant water. 2. Do not begin Clean Water Facility Testing until Engineer has approved submittals for Functional Testing requirements. 3. Test entire facility with recirculating water supply at the design flow for the largest single process or system train to ensure proper complete facility (equipment/system) hydraulic performance. 4. Perform testing in the presence of the Engineer unless such presence is expressly waived in writing. 5. The purpose of Clean Water Facility Testing is to confirm extended equipment/system operation prior to process start-up. a. Testing shall occur for a minimum of 7 days with all systems operational to the extent possible. G. Closeout documentation: 1. Submittals: a. Provide records generated during Commissioning Phase of Project. 1) Required documents include but are not limited to: a) Training documentation. b) Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. c) Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. d) Daily logs of equipment/system testing identifying tests conducted and outcome. e) Test forms and documentation. f) Functional Testing results. October 2016 01_75_17-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) g) Logs of time spent by manufacturer's representatives performing services on the job site. h) Equipment lubrication records. i) Electrical phase, voltage, and amperage measurements. j) Insulation resistance measurements. k) Bearing temperature measurements. 2) Data sheets of control loop testing including testing and calibration of instrumentation devices and setpoints. Format: 2 electronic copies and 3 hard copies organized in notebooks. 1.07 PROCESS START-UP PHASE A. Overview of Process Start-Up Phase: 1. Operating the facility to verify performance meets the Contract Document requirements. B. Process Start-Up: 1. Perform process start-up in the presence of the Engineer. 2. Pre-start-up activities: a. Commissioning Documentation and Data Review. b. Start-Up Go/No-Go Decision Criteria. c. Building and Fire Inspection Compliance Check. d. Process Start-Up Sequence Review. 1) Submit a Process Start-Up plan for review by Engineer. 2) Include the following: a) Pre-start-up activities. b) Process Start-Up. c) Process Operational Period. e. Description of Temporary Testing Arrangement, if applicable. f. Final Process Start-Up Forms and Documentations. g. Final Operational Testing Plan. 3. Control loop tuning. a. Perform control loop tuning during system testing with water to the extent possible. 4. Process area start-ups. a. Process start-up individual process areas comprised of multiple interdependent systems where possible and beneficial to reduce complexity and risk of complete facility testing. b. Process area test flows may be limited by upstream and downstream process constraints (i.e., tank and basin volumes) and/or localized recirculation capabilities. 5. Facility-wide process start-up. a. Upon approved completion of pre-start-up activities, perform entire facility process start-up. 1) Complete control loop tuning during this phase of process start-up. 2) Continue process start-up operations until facility meets or exceeds the Contract requirements. b. Process control systems testing. 1) Test complete system instrumentation, controls and PLC, HMI, and LOI programming for the facility. c. HVAC systems start-up and testing. 1) Test complete HVAC system for the facility. October 2016 01_75_17-17 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) d. Ancillary systems start-up and testing. 1) Test complete security system, phone system, fire alarm system, etc. for the facility. e. Remaining equipment/system tests: 1) Conduct remaining specified equipment/system performance tests that could not be performed during the Testing and Training Phase due to inter-system and/or treatment process dependencies. C. Process Operational Period: 1. Prior to beginning the Process Operational Period: a. Conformance with treatment standards is required prior to Operational Testing, if applicable. b. Correct any outstanding punchlist items that are related to process operation prior to the Operational Testing. 2. Duration: 10 calendar days. 3. Engineer will be present for process operational period unless such presence is expressly waived in writing. 4. Prove facility conformance with Contract Document requirements. 5. Contractor to provide: a. Specified start-up materials and operating supplies. b. Necessary craft of labor assistance, in the event of an emergency equipment failure requiring immediate attention (emergency is defined as a failure of function which precludes the further operation of a critical segment of or the whole of the Work) with a response time of not more than 4 hours from the time of notification. c. Manufacturer’s authorized representative to supervise placing equipment/systems in operation and provide guidance during Operational Testing per applicable Section. d. Necessary manufacturer’s representatives and operating supplies for retesting systems that fail to pass the initial Operational Testing due to deficiencies in products of workmanship at no additional cost to the Owner. e. List of 24-hour “on-call” representative supervisory persons who will monitor the Operational Testing and serve as liaison for the Engineer and Owner. 6. Owner will provide: a. Operations personnel for duration of test. 7. Prior to date of Substantial Completion of Installation, the following construction coordination shall occur. a. Owner staff will operate the completed Project construction. b. Entire system shall continuously meet performance requirements and shall operate without fault, failure, or defect for a continuous period. c. Individual equipment/system failures that are corrected within 24 hours and do not prevent the entire project from continuously satisfying the established operational requirements shall not require the consecutive day test to be restarted unless the failure recurs. d. Restart the consecutive test period for any of the following conditions: 1) Any failure of the complete Project construction to meet operational requirements. 2) When malfunctions or deficiencies cause shutdown or partial operation of the facility, or results in failure of the complete Project construction to meet operational requirements. October 2016 01_75_17-18 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) 3) Any individual equipment/system failure that meets any of the following conditions: a) Requires more than 24 hours to correct, unless otherwise specified in Section 40_80_01. b) Recurs within the 24-hour correction period requiring further correction. 4) Immediately correct defects in material, workmanship, or equipment/system which became evident during Operational Testing. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION October 2016 01_75_17-19 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF SOURCE TESTING OWNER EQPT/SYSTEM PROJECT NAME EQPT TAG NO. PROJECT NO. EQPT SERIAL NO. SPECIFICATION NO. SPECIFICATION TITLE Comments: I hereby certify Source Testing has been performed on the above-referenced equipment/system as defined in the Contract Documents, and results conform to the Contract Document requirements. Testing data is attached. Date of Execution: , 20 Manufacturer: Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative Name (print): (Authorized Signature) If applicable, Witness Name (print): (Witness Signature) October 2016 01_75_17-20 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION AND FUNCTIONALITY COMPLIANCE OWNER EQPT/SYSTEM PROJECT NAME EQPT TAG NO. PROJECT NO. EQPT SERIAL NO. SPECIFICATION NO. SPECIFICATION TITLE I hereby certify that the above-referenced equipment/system has been: (Check Applicable) Installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Inspected, checked, and adjusted. Serviced with proper initial lubricants. Electrical/instrumentation and mechanical connections meet quality and safety standards. All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed. Functionally tested. System has been performance tested, and meets or exceeds specified performance requirements. NOTES: Attach test results with collected data and test report. Attach written certification report prepared by and signed by the electrical and/or instrumentation subcontractor. Comments: I, the undersigned manufacturer’s representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate this equipment/system, and (iii) authorized to make recommendations required to ensure that the equipment/system furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. Date: , 20 Manufacturer: Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative Name (print): By Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative: (Authorized Signature) October 2016 01_75_17-21 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) COMMISSIONING TRAINING EVALUATION FORM EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM ITEM: VENDOR/MANUFACTURER: DATE: NAME OF REPRESENTATIVE: 1. Was representative prepared? Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A 2. Was an overview description presented? Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A 3. Were specific details presented for system Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A components? 4. Were alarm and shutdown conditions Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A clearly presented? 5. Were step-by-step procedures for starting, Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A stopping, and troubleshooting presented? 6. Were routine/preventative maintenance Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A items clearly identified? 7. Was the lubrication schedule (if any) Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A discussed? 8. Was the representative able to answer all Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A questions? 9. Did the representative agree to research Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A and answer unanswered questions? 10. Comments: 11. Overall Rating: Satisfactory Unsatisfactory Note: Sessions judged “Unsatisfactory” by a majority of attendees shall be revised and conducted again until a satisfactory rating is achieved. October 2016 01_75_17-22 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) COMMISSIONING ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES MATRIX NO. TASK OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER Testing and Training Phase Source Testing 1 Source Testing Witness Lead Witness, Review Installation Testing 2 Electrical Conductor Testing No Action Lead Witness 3 Electrical Field Acceptance Tests No Action Lead Witness 4 Instrument Field Calibration No Action Lead Witness 5 Network Installation Testing Witness Lead Witness 6 Loop Testing Witness Lead Witness 7 Pressure Testing No Action Lead Witness 8 Leak Testing No Action Lead Witness 9 Holiday Testing No Action Lead Witness 10 HVAC Testing No Action Lead Witness 11 Motor Electrical Testing No Action Lead Witness Functional Testing 12 Network Operational Testing Witness Lead Review 13 Preliminary Run Testing Local/Manual Control Witness Lead Review 14 PCIS Functional Demonstration Testing - Local/Auto Control Testing - Remote/Manual Contact Testing - Alarm Testing - Control Loop Testing No Action Support Lead 15 Subsystem Start-Up and Testing Witness Lead Review 16 Equipment/System Start-Up and Testing Witness Lead Review 17 HVAC Start-Up and Testing Witness Lead Review 18 Corrosion Control Start-Up and Testing Witness Lead Review 19 Wide Area Network Communications Testing Support Lead Witness 20 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance No Action Lead Witness, Review Clean Water Facility Testing 21 Test Water Management Plan Finalization Support Lead Review 22 Clean Water Facility Testing Witness Lead Witness, Review October 2016 01_75_17-23 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_17 (FS-100) NO. TASK OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER Process Start-Up Phase Process Start-Up 23 Commissioning Documentation and Data Review Review Support Lead 24 Start-Up Go/No-Go Decision Criteria Review Support Review 25 Building and Fire Inspection Compliance Check No Action Lead Witness 26 HVAC Functionality Check No Action Lead Witness 27 Start-Up Sequence Review Support Lead Review 28 Temporary Testing Arrangement Finalization Support Lead Support 29 Start-Up Forms Finalization Support Lead Support 30 Operation Testing Plan Finalization Review Support Lead 31 Test Water Management Plan Finalization Support Lead Review 32 System Testing Support Support Lead 33 Control Loop Tuning Lead Support Witness 34 Process Area Start-Ups Support Support Lead 35 Facility-Wide Start-Up Support Support Lead 36 Process Control Systems Testing Support Lead Witness 38 HVAC Final Testing, Adjust, and Balancing Witness Lead Witness, Review Process Operational Period 39 Operational Testing Support Support Lead 40 Final Testing Reports Support Lead Review 41 Water Quality Testing and Documentation Support Lead Review Instrumentation and Controls Reliability Phase Instrumentation and Controls Reliability Period 42 As specified in Section 40_80_01 Legend: Lead: Primarily responsible for organization, coordination, and execution of task work product or result. Support: Assist the lead with organization, coordination, and execution of task work product or result. Witness: Observe and document completion of task work product or result. Review: As necessary to accept task work product result. No Action: Limited or no involvement. Notes: Responsibilities can be modified via coordination between Owner, Contractor, and Engineer. Responsibilities are project specific. October 2016 01_75_19-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_19 (FS-100) SECTION 01_75_19 WATER LEAKAGE TEST FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Hydrostatic leakage test for concrete water-holding structures. B. Related sections: 1. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Section 31_00_00 - Earthwork. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and acronyms. B. Definitions. 1. Damp spots: Surfaces where visible moisture can be picked up by a dry hand. 2. Containment structure, lined: Liquid-containing structure with barrier coating or membrane applied to the inside surfaces to prevent leaking of contents to the outside. 3. Containment structure, unlined: Liquid containing structure where only the concrete structure itself is used to prevent leaking of contents to the outside. C. Reference standards. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination. B. Pre-installation meetings. C. Sequencing. D. Scheduling. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Certificates. C. Delegated design submittals. D. Tests and evaluation reports: 1. Results of water leakage test for each structure and for each portion of a structure designated for testing. E. Manufacturer instructions. October 2016 01_75_19-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_19 (FS-100) F. Source quality control submittals. G. Field/site quality control submittals. H. Manufacturer reports. I. Sustainable design submittals. J. Testing plan by Resident Engineer, in coordinate with Contractor and Owner. K. Proposed procedures and products for repair of leaks. L. Qualifications statements. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Test structures and portions of structures listed in the following paragraphs for water leakage. 1. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall: a. Obtain all required permits for discharging testing water. b. Provide dechlorination of such water if required by the permits. c. Prepare and fill the structures. d. Provide access and equipment required for testing and for recording test results. e. Take measurements and make observations required for testing (by Resident Engineer). 2. At all times during testing, the Engineer shall have access to observe measurements by others or to make independent measurements. B. Test the following concrete structures for water leakage: 1. UV Channels and Weir Channel. 2. Final Effluent Channel (new structure construction). C. Required preparation for testing is designated in this Section. Waiver of, or failure to complete preparations shall not change the testing criteria or approval criteria for the areas tested. D. Retest structures and portions of structures until the evaluation criteria are satisfied. 3.02 TEST WATER SOURCE AND DISPOSAL A. Water used for the first filling of the tank will be furnished by Owner. B. After leakage testing is complete, Contractor shall dispose of water as approved by Owner. October 2016 01_75_19-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_19 (FS-100) 3.03 PREPARATION A. For each structure to be tested, prepare and submit a plan showing schedule and sequence of activities, method of filling, and methods of disposing of test water. B. Sequencing requirements: 1. Complete construction of concrete structure and cure concrete to obtain minimum specified 28-day compressive strength as specified in Section 03_30_00. a. Do not begin tests until all portions of structure are complete and have reached their minimum specified 28-day compressive strength. b. Do not begin tests until at least 14 days have passed since completion of the last concrete placement, unless shorter duration approved by Owner and Engineer. 2. Complete tests before: a. Covering any surface of the structure with materials that might mask the location of leaks or obscure damp concrete surfaces. Such coverings include, but are not limited to basin bottom grout, masonry veneer, stucco, plaster, and other coatings. b. Installation of equipment, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. c. Backfilling structures to elevations above the limits indicated in the following paragraphs. 3. Liners and coatings: a. Install liners that are mechanically locked to the concrete surface during placement of plastic concrete and before leakage testing. 1) Examine liners for pinholes, tears, and partially fused splices, complete all required liner integrity testing, and make required repairs before commencing leakage testing. b. Unless otherwise specified, do not install surface-applied protective or decorative coatings and linings until leakage tests have been completed. C. Weather requirements: 1. Tests on structures with tops open to the atmosphere shall not be scheduled for periods when the 10-day weather forecast indicates a substantial change in weather patterns. 2. Measurements of water surface levels in the structure shall not be scheduled for periods when the weather forecast indicates a difference of more than 35 degrees Fahrenheit between the ambient temperature readings at the times of initial and final measurements. 3. Tests shall not be scheduled for periods when the 10-day weather forecast indicates that the water surface may freeze before the test is complete. D. Groundwater requirements: 1. Bring groundwater to a level not higher than 3 feet below the bottom of the structure and maintain at that level for the duration of the test. E. Clean interior of structure: 1. Remove dirt, contaminants, and construction debris. 2. Flush floors and sumps to provide clean surfaces. 3. Remove standing water that would interfere with examination of surfaces, cracks, or joints. October 2016 01_75_19-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_19 (FS-100) F. Observe the structure, or portions of the structure being tested, for potential leak locations: 1. Give particular attention to cracks, open joints, voids, and honeycombed and repaired surfaces. 2. Visually observe openings, fitting, and pipe penetrations in the structure at both faces, if possible. 3. Repair potential leak locations in accordance with these Specifications and as approved by the Engineer. 4. Backfill excavations to the top of the structure foundation. Do not place backfill against water-bearing walls or over footings unless approved in advance by the Engineer. a. If requesting backfilling of walls before testing, include a description of methods that will be used to detect leakage in the backfilled areas. b. Engineer’s approval of backfilling before testing shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility to conduct leakage tests, to satisfy the leakage acceptance criteria for the structure, or to repair leaking portions of the structure, including those portions below or behind the backfill. 5. See Drawings and Section 31_00_00 for requirements to provide wall stability before backfilling. G. Inlets to/outlets from the structure: 1. Make inlets to and outlets from the structure watertight. a. Include valves; stop, sluice, and slide gates; and temporary bulkheads as required. b. Inlets and outlets not required to be operable may be temporarily sealed before testing of the compartments to which they open. c. Secure inlets used to fill the structure for testing to ensure that no water is entering or leaving the structure once it has been filled to the test level. 2. Adjustments to measured leakage at inlets and outlets based on manufacturer’s or Contractor’s estimates will not be allowed. a. Adjustments to measured leakage may be permitted by the Engineer, and, at his/her discretion, only when the Contractor makes specific measurements of leakage at each individual inlet and outlet using methods approved by the Engineer. 3.04 HYDROSTATIC LEAKAGE TEST FOR OPEN OR COVERED CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES (“HST-100”) A. Isolate sections of water-holding structures that can be isolated in actual operation. Fill and test sections for leakage separately. 1. Fill structures and sections of structures scheduled for testing to the normal operating water level indicated on the Hydraulic Profile indicated on the Drawings. B. Initial rate for filling of structures shall not exceed 4 feet per hour. C. HST-100 testing includes 2 parts, “Qualitative Testing,” and “Quantitative Testing,” as described in the following paragraphs: 1. HST-100, Part 1 - Qualitative Testing: a. During the first 24 hours after structures are filled, examine exposed concrete surfaces for damp spots or flowing water. 1) Make observations in early morning, at midday, and in late afternoon. October 2016 01_75_19-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_19 (FS-100) 2) Continue observations through the duration of the Quantitative Testing period. 3) Pay particular attention to conditions at joints, honeycombed areas, cracks, and repaired portions of the structure. b. Evaluation criteria: 1) The structure shall be considered to have failed these Qualitative Testing requirements if any of the following conditions are observed. a) Water droplets or moist areas on an outside surface that could only have originated inside the structure. b) Water is flowing or seeping from joints, cracks, or surfaces. (1) Exception: Dampness or wetness on top of a footing, in the absence of flowing water, shall not be considered as failure to meet this criterion. c) Moisture can be transferred to a dry hand from the outside surfaces of the filled area. c. Repairs and retesting: 1) Where damp spots or flowing water as described in the preceding paragraphs are observed, mark locations, provide repairs, and retest the structure as specified in subsequent paragraphs. Upon Owner's and Engineer's approval, Contractor may provide repairs while structure is still full of water, and confirm that no leakage is present. 2. HST-100 - Part 2: Quantitative Testing: a. If approved by the Engineer, Quantitative Testing may begin before repairs are made to areas failing Part 1 of this test; however: 1) Adjustments to volume loss calculations of Quantitative Testing based on observed leakage will not be permitted. 2) All defects identified for repair during Qualitative Testing shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before approval of the structure. b. Report the results of Quantitative Testing on “Leakage Test Report” included as Figure A at the end of this Section, or similar form prepared by the Contractor and containing at least the information included in Figure A. c. Unlined concrete structures: 1) Fill to the designated water surface elevation. Maintain that level for at least 72 hours before recording initial water levels for leakage test. 2) Duration of test: a) Theoretical time required to lower the water surface in the structure by 3/8 inch when leakage is occurring at the maximum allowable rate specified in subsequent paragraphs of this Section. b) The duration (“D”) of the test in days is determined by the following equation: D = 0.375 inches (0.005 in/in/day x H ft x 12 in/ft) Where: H = maximum liquid depth (1) Round results upward to the next full 24-hour period (day). (2) Minimum duration of test: 24 hours (1 day). (3) Maximum duration of test: 120 hours (5 days). October 2016 01_75_19-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_19 (FS-100) d. Lined concrete structures and secondary containment areas: 1) Fill to the designated water surface elevation. Recording of water levels for leakage tests may begin as soon as the designated water surface level is reached and the water surface is calm. 2) Duration of test: 72 hours (3 days). e. Measurements: Water level: 1) Record water levels at 24-hour intervals for the full duration of the test period. 2) Measure water levels at not less than 2 locations on opposite ends of the structure, and preferably at 4 locations spaced equally around the structure. Mark locations on the structure and take measurements at the same locations throughout the duration of the test. 3) Measure, to an accuracy of 1/16 inch, the vertical distance to the water surface from a fixed point on the structure above. f. Measurements: Temperatures: 1) As part of the first and last sets of level measurements, record water temperature at a depth of 18 inches below the water surface. Measure temperature at the same locations where level measurements are taken. This requirement may be eliminated if approved by Owner and Engineer. 2) Record ambient temperature at the time of each water level measurement. g. Measurements: Evaporation and precipitation: 1) Measure evaporation and precipitation by floating pans inside the structures during testing. a) For uncovered structures, measure both evaporation and precipitation. b) For covered structures that are well ventilated, measure evaporation. 2) Measure using specially constructed clear containers: a) Provide clear plastic, calibrated, open-top containers not less than 18 inches in diameter and 18-inches deep. b) Partially fill containers with water and float inside the structure. Make provisions to hold containers in place at each measurement location, but away from structure walls and items passing overhead, such as beams or pipes. c) Measure initial depth of water in each device. Measure changes in water level in each device at the same time measurements of the water level inside the structure are taken. h. Restart of test: 1) The Engineer may order a restart of the test when, in the Engineer’s opinion, measurements have become unreliable due to unusual precipitation or other factors. 2) If measurements or observed leakage during the testing period indicate that the allowable leakage requirements will be exceeded, the test may be terminated before completion of the full test period. Take appropriate actions to correct problems before restarting the test. October 2016 01_75_19-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_19 (FS-100) i. Calculations of leakage test results: 1) For each section of the structure tested, use water surface level records to calculate average loss of volume per 24-hour interval. a) For each 24-hour interval during the test, calculate the average of all measured drops in water level around the structure. b) Use the average drop thus determined to calculate an average loss of volume for each 24-hour interval. 2) Adjustments to leakage calculations: a) For uncovered basins, calculations shall be corrected for precipitation added to the structure. b) Calculations may be corrected for evaporation and water temperature. j. Evaluation criteria: 1) Unless otherwise specified, the average loss of volume during any 24-hour interval shall not exceed the limits shown in Table A. Table A – Loss of Volume Criteria for Leakage Tests Structure Type Maximum Loss of Water Volume • Structure fully lined prior to leakage test. • Secondary containment areas. No measurable loss over 72-hour test period. • Structure with monolithically placed membrane floor slab. 0.0125 percent of volume per 24-hour period. • Concrete paved canals, drying beds, lagoons, and similar structures. 0.100 percent of volume per 24-hour period. • Other containment structures. 0.050 percent of volume per 24-hour period. k. Repairs and retesting: 1) Structures and portions of structures that have satisfied the qualitative requirements of HST-100, but have failed to satisfy the quantitative requirements of HST-100 may be immediately retested for volume loss. a) If the structure fails the second test for volume loss, the structure shall be drained, and the Contractor shall observe the interior for probable areas of leakage. b) The structure shall not be retested until repairs to the probable areas of leakage are complete. 3.05 REPAIRS FOR RETESTING A. Locations showing damp spots or flowing water: 1. Mark locations of visible leaks and damp spots. 2. Drain structures for repair. 3. Repair defects causing damp spots and flowing water using methods approved by the Engineer. a. Repair both interior and exterior surfaces and make structures watertight. b. Submit proposed repair products and procedures for Engineer’s review. c. Refill structures for retesting. 4. Repeat filling, observations, and repairs until no leaks or damp spots appear. October 2016 01_75_19-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_19 (FS-100) B. Structures for which loss of water volume loss exceeds the limits specified after adjustments for evaporation, and precipitation: 1. Determine cause of volume loss. 2. Drain structures of water. 3. Repair defects causing loss of water volume using methods approved by the Engineer. a. Submit proposed repair products and procedures for Engineer’s review. 4. Refill water-holding structures. 5. Repeat testing and repairs until volume loss does not exceed specified limits. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_75_19-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_75_19 (FS-100) FIGURE A WATERTIGHTNESS TEST REPORT PROJECT: SUBMITTED BY: STRUCTURE: WITNESSED BY: AREA: TEST DATES: TEST DURATION: TEST DURATION: Surface area of structure tested: (square feet) Volume of structure tested: (cubic feet) Volume of structure tested: (gallons) Measured loss through gates, etc.: (gallons / day) Allowable loss of water volume: (per day) Allowable loss of water volume: (% in 24 hours) Allowable measured loss over test duration (inches): Measured loss of water: (gallons / day – From E below) Measured loss of water volume (%): (in 24 hours – From E below) Water Temperature: Start of test: °F End of test: °F Water Surface Elevation (top of structure to top of water) Location #1 Location #2 Location #3 Location #4 Initials** Day Date Time (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) 1 2 3 4 5 Changes in Level: A. Average change in level (feet): (Average of total charges for all locations) B. Correction for precipitation: (Measured from pan) C. Correction for evaporation: (Measured from pan) D. Corrected change in level (CL): E. Total days tested: F. Average measured % water loss in 24 hours: = (CL) x (surface area) x 100 (initial water volume) x (number of test days) Notes and field observations∗∗ ∗∗ Place date and initials at the beginning of each entry October 2016 01_77_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_77_00 (FS-100) SECTION 01_77_00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Contract closeout requirements including: 1. Final cleaning. 2. Waste disposal. 3. Touch-up and repair. 4. Disinfection of systems. 5. Preparation and submittal of closeout documents. 6. Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Perform final cleaning prior to inspections for Substantial Completion. B. Employ skilled workers who are experienced in cleaning operations. C. Use cleaning materials which are recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be cleaned. D. Prevent scratching, discoloring, and otherwise damaging surfaces being cleaned. E. Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of site work: 1. Police yards and grounds to keep clean. G. Remove dust, cobwebs, and traces of insects and dirt. H. Clean grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, paint, blemishes, sealants, plaster, concrete, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed surfaces, and fixtures and equipment. I. Remove non-permanent protection and labels. J. Polish waxed woodwork and finish hardware. K. Wash tile. L. Wax and buff hard floors, as applicable. M. Wash and polish glass, inside and outside. October 2016 01_77_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_77_00 (FS-100) N. Wash and shine mirrors. O. Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine. P. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Q. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters when heating, ventilation, and air conditioning units were operated during construction. R. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils when units were operated without filters during construction. S. Clean light fixtures and replace burned-out or dim lamps. T. Probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have been cleaned and are in like-new condition. 1.04 WASTE DISPOSAL A. Arrange for and dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris off-site: 1. Prior to making disposal on private property, obtain written permission from Owner of such property. B. Do not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances during disposal operations. C. Maintain disposal site in safe condition and good appearance. D. Complete leveling and cleanup prior to Final Completion of the Work. 1.05 TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR A. Touch-up or repair finished surfaces on structures, equipment, fixtures, and installations that have been damaged prior to inspection for Substantial Completion. B. Refinish or replace entire surfaces which cannot be touched-up or repaired satisfactorily. 1.06 FINAL CLEANING AND STERILIZATION [DISINFECTION] OF SYSTEMS OF PLANT FACILITIES A. Wash, wherever practicable, or broom sweep channels, pipe, basins, reservoirs, and tanks. B. Disinfect filter basins, reservoirs, clear wells, tanks, channels, and piping intended to carry potable water as follows or in accordance with AWWA Standards. C. Provide ample sampling outlets in pipe for testing. D. Fill pipe and other plant facilities with chlorine solution of sufficient strength to retain residual of not less than 10 parts per million at end of 24 hours. October 2016 01_77_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_77_00 (FS-100) E. When reservoirs and basins are too large to be economically [sterilized] [disinfected] by filling with chlorine solution, spray reservoirs and basins with solution containing 100 parts per million of chlorine. F. After disinfection, rinse entire potable water system with potable water sufficient to reduce chlorine residual to not more than 0.6 parts per million throughout system before system is put into service. 1.07 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS A. Submit following Closeout Submittals before Substantial Completion: 1. Punchlist (provided by Resident Engineer and Owner with Certificate of Substantial Completion) of items to be completed or corrected. 2. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities. 3. Project Record Documents. 4. Approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 5. Approved Warranties and Bonds. 6. Keys and Keying Schedule. 7. Completed contract requirements for commissioning and process start-up. B. Submit following Closeout Submittals before final completion of the Work and at least 7 days prior to submitting Application for Final Payment: 1. Punchlist of items have been completed and Engineer and Owner are satisfied that all deficiencies are corrected. 2. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens or Stop Payment Notices as outlined in Conditions of the Contract. 3. Release of claims as outlined in Conditions of the Contract. 4. Submit certification of insurance for products and completed operations, as specified in the General Conditions. 5. Final statement of accounting. 6. Consent of Surety as required by Owner. 1.08 EVIDENCE OF COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF GOVERNING AUTHORITIES A. Submit the following: 1. Certificates of Inspection: a. Mechanical: 1) Form U-1 "Manufacturer's Data Report for Unfired Pressure Vessels" for each pressure vessel furnished and installed. b. Electrical: 1) As required by Owner. 1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at Project site, available to Owner and Engineer, 1 copy of the Contract Documents, shop drawings, and other submittals in good order: 1. Mark and record field changes and detailed information contained in submittals and change orders. 2. Record actual depths, horizontal and vertical location of underground pipes, duct banks, and other buried utilities. Reference dimensions to permanent surface features. October 2016 01_77_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_77_00 (FS-100) 3. Identify specific details of pipe connections, location of existing buried features located during excavation, and the final locations of piping, equipment, electrical conduits, manholes, and pull boxes. 4. Identify location of spare conduits including beginning, ending, and routing through pull boxes and manholes. Record spare conductors, including number and size, within spare conduits and filled conduits. 5. Provide schedules, lists, layout drawings, and wiring diagrams. B. Make annotations in electronic format. C. Maintain documents separate from those used for construction: 1. Label documents "RECORD DOCUMENTS." D. Keep documents current: 1. Record required information at the time the material and equipment is installed and before permanently concealing. 2. Engineer will review Record Documents weekly to ascertain that changes have been recorded. E. Affix civil engineer's or professional land surveyor's signature and registration number to Record Drawings to certify accuracy of information shown. F. Deliver Record Documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor. G. Record Documents will be reviewed monthly to determine the percent complete for the monthly pay application. H. Updated Record Documents are a condition for Engineer’s recommendation for progress payment. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance service as specified in technical specifications. 1.11 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Obtain Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.12 FINAL COMPLETION A. When Contractor considers the Work is complete, submit written certification that: 1. Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Document: 2. Punch list items have been completed or corrected. 3. Work is ready for final inspection. B. Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness. C. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 1. Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. October 2016 01_77_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_77_00 (FS-100) 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send a second written certification to the Engineer that the Work is complete. 3. Engineer shall re-inspect the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_78_23-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_78_23 (FS-100) SECTION 01_78_23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Preparation and submittal of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Related sections: 1. Section 46_05_94 - Mechanical Equipment Testing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals before field quality control testing and before training of each piece of equipment or system. B. Submit 4 Manuals for each piece of equipment or system. 1. Submit Manuals electronically until all comments from Owner and Engineer have been incorporated. Indicate section and tab divisions on electronic Manuals. 2. Final Manuals shall be submitted as hard-copy and mailed to the Owner. 3. Make Manuals available at project site for use by construction personnel and Owner. 4. Make additions and revisions to the Manuals in accordance with Owner's review comments. 1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Preparation: 1. Provide Operations and Maintenance Manuals in 3-ring binders with rigid covers. Utilize numbered tab sheets to organize information. 2. Provide original and clear text on reproducible non-colored paper. 3. Provide all dimensions in English units. 4. Coordinate with Contractor to define Operations and Maintenance Manual compliance with Owner's Computer Maintenance Management System (CMMS). B. Contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Cover page: Equipment name, equipment tag number, project name, Owner's name, appropriate date. Manufacturer's name, address, phone number, and email address. Local Representative's name, address, phone number, and email address. Contractor's name, address, phone number, and email address. Spare Parts Supplier name, address, phone number, and email address. 2. Table of Contents: General description of information provided within each tab section. 3. Equipment Summary Form: Completed form in the format shown in Appendix A. The manufacturer's standard form will not be acceptable. October 2016 01_78_23-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_78_23 (FS-100) 4. Lubrication information: Required lubricants and lubrication schedules. 5. Control diagrams: a. Internal and connection wiring, including logic diagrams, wiring diagrams for control panels, ladder logic for computer based systems, and connections between existing systems and new additions, and adjustments such as calibrations and set points for relays, and control or alarm contact settings. b. Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control system. c. Complete set of control schematics. 6. Programming: Copies of all Contractor furnished programming. 7. Start-up procedures: Recommendations for installation, adjustment, calibration, and troubleshooting. 8. Operating procedures: a. Step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping equipment under specified modes of operation. b. Include safety precautions and emergency operating shutdown instructions. 9. Preventative maintenance procedures: Recommended steps and schedules for maintaining equipment. 10. Overhaul instructions: Directions for disassembly, inspection, repair, and reassembly of the equipment; safety precautions; and recommended tolerances, critical bolt torques, and special tools that are required. 11. Parts list: a. Complete parts list for all equipment being provided. Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished including generic title and identification number of each component part of equipment. 1) Include bearing manufacturer, model and ball or roller pass frequencies for every bearing. 12. Spare parts list: Recommended number of parts to be stored at the site and special storage precautions. 13. Drawings: a. Exploded view or plan and section views with detailed callouts. b. Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment. c. Provide electrical and instrumentation schematic record drawings. 14. Source (factory) quality control test results: Provide copies of factory test reports as specified in Section 46_05_94 or the equipment section. 15. Field quality control test results: After field-testing is completed, insert field test reports as specified in Section 46_05_94 or the equipment section. 16. Equipment Summary Form: a. Completed form in the format attached at the end of this Section. b. Insert Equipment Summary Form after the tab sheet of each equipment section. c. The manufacturer's standard form will not be acceptable. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. October 2016 01_78_23-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_78_23 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_78_23-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_78_23 (FS-100) APPENDIX A EQUIPMENT SUMMARY FORM 1. EQUIPMENT ITEM 2. MANUFACTURER 3. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(S) (maps equipment number) 4. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT 5. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS) NAMEPLATE DATA - Horsepower Amperage Voltage Service Factor (S.F.) Speed ENC Type Capacity Other 7. MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE Name Address Telephone Number 8. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 9. LUBRICANT LIST 10. SPARE PARTS (recommendations) 11. COMMENTS October 2016 01_78_36-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_78_36 (FS-100) SECTION 01_78_36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Warranty and bonds requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. For each item of material or equipment furnished under the Contract: 1. Submit form of manufacturer's warranty prior to fabrication and shipment of the item from the manufacturer's facility. 2. Submit form of manufacturer's special warranty when specified. B. Provide consolidated warranties and bonds within 15 calendar days of Substantial Completion. 1. Contents a. Organize warranty and bond documents: 1) Include Table of Contents organized by specification Section number and the name of the product or work item. b. Include each required warranty and bond in proper form, with full information, are certified manufacturer as required, and are properly executed by Contractor, or subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. c. Provide name, address, phone number, and point of contact of manufacturer, supplier, and installer, as applicable. 2. Hardcopy format: a. Submit 2 copies. b. Assemble in 3 D-side ring binders with durable cover. c. Identify each binder on the front and spine with typed or printed title "Warranties and Bonds"; Project Name or Title, and the Name Address and Telephone Number of the Contractor. 3. Electronic copy in PDF format. a. Submit 1 copy. 1.03 OWNER'S RIGHTS A. Owner reserves the right to reject warranties. B. Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the project if the required warranties have not been provided. 1.04 RELATIONSHIP TO GENERAL WARRANTY AND CORRECTION PERIOD A. Warranties specified for materials and equipment shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, both Contractor's general warranty and the correction period requirements. October 2016 01_78_36-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_78_36 (FS-100) B. Disclaimers and limitations in specific materials and equipment warranties do not limit Contractor's general warranty, nor does such affect or limit Contractor's performance obligations under the correction period. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS A. Written warranty issued by item's manufacturer. B. Project-specific information, properly executed by product manufacturer, and expressly states that its provisions are for the benefit of the Owner. C. Covers all costs associated with the correction of the defect, including but not limited to removal of defective parts, new parts, labor, and shipping. 1. When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that had been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. D. Provides a timely response to correct the defect. 1. Manufacturer shall provide, in a timely fashion, temporary equipment as necessary to replace warranted items requiring repair or replacement, when warranted items are in use and are critical to the treatment process, as defined by Owner. 2. In the case that Owner has to provide temporary equipment to replace function of warranted item requiring repair or replacement, manufacturer shall reimburse Owner for such costs associated with the temporary equipment. E. Warranty commence running on the date of substantial completion. 1. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit warranty within 10 calendar days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty period. F. Duration of Warranty: 2 years. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's special warranty is a written warranty published by the manufacturer which includes the requirements specified in the Section where the item is specified. 1. Includes Project-specific information and requirements, properly executed by product manufacturer, and expressly states that its provisions are for the benefit of the Owner. Technical sections indicate Project-specific requirements that differ from the minimum warranty requirements for that item. a. Examples include extending the duration of manufacturer's warranty or to provide increased rights to Owner. 2. Manufacturer's warranties commence on the date that the associated item is certified by Engineer as substantially complete. 1.07 WARRANTY WORK A. Contractor's responsibilities: 1. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the product, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with Contractor. October 2016 01_78_36-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_78_36 (FS-100) B. Replacement cost: 1. Upon determination that work covered by warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirement of the Contract Documents. a. Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether Owner has benefited from the use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. C. Related damages and losses: 1. When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace other work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work. D. Owner's recourse: 1. Written warranties are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitation on time in which Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. E. Reinstatement of warranty: 1. When work covered by a warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. a. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. 1.08 IMPLIED WARRANTIES A. Warranty of title and intellectual rights: 1. Except as may be otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, implied warranty of title required by Laws and Regulations is applicable to the Work and to materials and equipment incorporated therein. 2. Provisions on intellectual rights, including patent fees and royalties, are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. B. Implied warranties: Duration in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 1.09 BONDS A. Bond requirements as specified in the technical sections. B. Bonds commence running on the date of substantial completion. 1. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit warranty within 10 calendar days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of bond period. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. October 2016 01_78_36-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_78_36 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_81_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_81_01 (FS-100) SECTION 01_81_01 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Project design criteria such as temperature and site elevation. 1.02 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA A. All equipment and materials for the project are to be suitable for performance in wastewater treatment plant environment and under following conditions: 1. Design temperatures are: a. Outdoor temperatures: between 6 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Indoor temperatures for the following buildings: 1) Process areas: 50 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit. 2) Electrical rooms: 55 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Design groundwater elevation: 4,878.00. 3. Freeze-thaw conditions. 4. Moisture conditions: Defined in individual equipment sections. 5. Site elevation: Approximately 4,880 feet above mean sea level. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_81_02-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_81_02 (FS-100) SECTION 01_81_02 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Seismic design criteria for the following: 1. Anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Seismic design and design of anchorage for small tanks fabricated off site and shipped to the Project site. 3. Other structures or items as specified or indicated on the Drawings. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 03_21_17 - Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All-Thread Rods. 3. Section 05_05_24 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening To Concrete And Masonry. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. 7-10 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design in accordance with the requirements of the building code as specified in Section 01_41_00: B. Design spectral acceleration at short period, SDS: 0.143. C. Design spectral acceleration at 1 second period, SD1: 0.065. D. Design of non-structural components and their connections to structures: 1. Component amplification factor, ap: In accordance with ASCE 7, Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1. 2. Component response modification factor, Rp: In accordance with ASCE 7, Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1. 3. Component importance factor, Ip: Table 1: Component importance factor, Ip Component Description Ip Electrical Equipment and appurtenances provided and installed under Division 26. 1.5 E. Seismic Design Category (SDC) for certification of mechanical and electrical equipment as required by ASCE 7: 1. All areas: Seismic Design Category A. October 2016 01_81_02-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_81_02 (FS-100) F. Design requirements: Anchorage of equipment to structures. 1. Do not use friction to resist sliding due to seismic forces. Do not design or provide connections that use friction to resist seismic loads. Resist seismic forces through direct tension and/or shear on anchors and fasteners. 2. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the mechanical and electrical equipment for designing anchors for resisting overturning due to seismic forces. 3. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the tank for resisting overturning due to seismic forces. 4. Anchoring and fastening to concrete and masonry: a. Provide anchors specified in Sections 03_21_17 and 05_05_24. b. Use only cast-in anchors (anchor bolts or welded studs) for anchors at connections that resist seismic forces. c. Do not use concrete anchors, flush shells, sleeve anchors, screw anchors, powder actuated fasteners, or other types of post-installed mechanical anchors unless indicated on the Drawings or accepted in writing by the Engineer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and seismic calculations. B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed in the state where the Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 01_81_04-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_81_04 (FS-100) SECTION 01_81_04 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Wind design criteria. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 03_21_17 - Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All-Thread Rods. 3. Section 05_05_24 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening To Concrete And Masonry. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Building code criteria: Design for wind in accordance with building code as specified in Section 01_41_00: a. Risk category: III. b. Wind speed, Vult: 135 miles per hour. c. Wind speed, Vasd: 105 miles per hour. d. Exposure category: C. e. Topographic factor, Kzt: 1.0. 2. Resist wind forces through direct bearing on anchors and fasteners. Do not design or provide connections that use friction to resist wind loads. 3. Anchoring and fastening to concrete and masonry: a. Provide anchors specified in Sections 03_21_17 and 05_05_24. b. Use only cast-in and built-in anchors (anchor bolts and welded studs) for anchors at connections that resist wind forces. c. Do not use concrete anchors, flush shells, sleeve anchors, flush shells, screw anchors, powder actuated fasteners, or other types of post-installed mechanical anchors unless indicated on the Drawings or accepted in writing by the Engineer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and wind design calculations. B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed in the state where the Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. October 2016 01_81_04-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/01_81_04 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_01_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_01 (FS-100) SECTION 03_01_01 PREPACKAGED SMALL AGGREGATE REPAIR CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Prepackage concrete for the repair of concrete. B. Related sections: 1. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. C 39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 3. C 150 - Specifications for Portland Cement. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Manufacturer’s Instructions. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in unopened containers in clean, dry area with temperature between 45 and 90 degrees. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PREPACKAGED CONCRETE A. Coarse aggregate: 3/8 inch aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 33. B. Portland cement: Type I or II in accordance with ASTM C 150. C. Compressive strength: 5,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days minimum, in accordance with ASTM C 39. D. Packaged in multi-wall bags. E. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. BASF, Masterpatch 240 CR. 2. Sika, Sikacrete 211. October 2016 03_01_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_01 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Slump range: 4 to 6 inches. B. Mix in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Water for mixing: As specified in Section 03_30_00. D. Water cure concrete repair area as specified in Section 03_30_00. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_01_05-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) SECTION 03_01_05 CONCRETE MODIFICATION AND REPAIR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for modification and repair of concrete surfaces as shown on the Drawings and as specified. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_14_00 - Work Restrictions. 2. Section 01_29_00 - Payment Procedures. 3. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 4. Section 01_33_00 - Submittals Procedures. 5. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 6. Section 01_35_21 - Selective Site Demolition. 7. Section 03_21_17 - Adhesive Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete. 8. Section 03_63_01 - Epoxies. 9. Section 03_63_02 - Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Bonding Agent. 10. Section 03_11_07 - Concrete Formwork. 11. Section 03_15_00 - Concrete Accessories. 12. Section 03_15_14 - Hydrophilic Rubber Waterstop. 13. Section 03_20_00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 14. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 15. Section 03_60_00 - Grouting. 16. Section 03_64_24 - Epoxy Injection System. 17. Section 03_64_25- Hydrophilic Foam Polyurethane Resin Injection System. 18. Section 07_90_00 - Joint Sealants. 19. Section 09_96_01 - High Performance Coatings. C. Measurement and payment procedures: 1. Payment for work described under this Section is included in the lump sum price for the work based on repair types and quantities designated on the Drawings. 2. Where quantities of concrete modification and repair are greater than or less than the basic bid quantities described on the Drawings and specified, the Contract Price will be adjusted for the addition or reduction of work as described in Section 01_29_00. 3. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing all materials, labor, tools, and equipment necessary to complete the specified operation. 4. Payment will be made based on the units of modification or repair completed during each estimate period, as reported by the Contractor and confirmed by the Engineer. October 2016 03_01_05-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1. T-277 - Electrical Indication of Concrete's Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 503R - Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 2. C 78 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading). 3. C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compression Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-inch or 50 mm Cube Specimens). 4. C 157 / C 157M - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete. 5. C 266 - Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic-Cement Paste by Gillmore Needles. 6. C 293 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Center Point Loading). 7. C 469 - Standard Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson’s Ratio of Concrete in Compression. 8. C 496 - Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 9. C 596 - Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of Mortar Containing Hydraulic Cement. 10. C 666 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Rapid Freezing and Thawing. 11. C 672 - Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals. 12. C 779 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. 13. C 881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 14. C 882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear. 15. C 1202 - Standard Test Method for Electrical Indication of Concrete’s Ability to Resist Chloride Penetration. 16. D 638 - Standard Descriptive Nomenclature of Constituents of Aggregates for Radiation-Shielding Concrete. 17. D 732 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by Punch Tool. 18. D 790 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. D. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI): 1. Technical Guideline No. 210.3 - Guide for Using In-Situ Tensile Pulloff Tests to Evaluate Bond of Concrete Surface Materials. 2. Technical Guideline No. 310.2 - Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair. October 2016 03_01_05-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) E. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems - Fundamentals and Vocabulary. F. NSF International (NSF): 1. NSF Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Delamination: Separation along a plane parallel to a surface. In a concrete slab, horizontal splitting, cracking, or separation of the slab in a plane roughly parallel to and generally near the upper surface. B. Horizontal surface: Surface where repairs will be performed and repair materials placed in the direction of gravity. Overhead surfaces are not included. C. Open time: Time interval after mixing during which the material has the correct properties for placement. Also, time interval after placement of a bonding agent during which the bonding agent will properly adhere subsequently placed bond materials to the substrate. D. Popouts: Breaking away of small portions of a concrete surface which leave a shallow depression, typically conical or spherical in shape. E. Saturated surface-dry (SSD): Condition of concrete, aggregate particle or other porous solids when the permeable voids are filled with water and no water is visible on the exposed surfaces. F. Sounding: Technique to evaluate the condition of hardened concrete by striking or the surface with a steel hammer or dragging with a chain. Sound concrete will exhibit a clear, ringing sound. Dull, hollow, or rattling sounds indicate deteriorated or delaminated concrete. G. Spall: Shallow separated fragment of concrete, usually in the shape of a thin elongated section that has become detached from the larger concrete mass. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01_41_00. B. Product data: 1. For each repair material to be used, submit manufacturer’s product data indicating product name, location(s) where it will be used, and product properties to confirm requirements specified. a. If products will be extended by addition of aggregates, provide details of aggregates including gradation, mechanical properties, and proportions to be added. C. Repair procedures: 1. Part 3 of this Section includes a schedule of repair procedures to be used in the Work. Submit a procedure guide including the following information for October 2016 03_01_05-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) each repair procedure to be employed, whether specified herein or requested as an additional or alternative procedure by the Contractor: a. Cover sheet with the following information: 1) Project name. 2) General description of the repair procedure. Include repair procedure number for procedures scheduled in Part 3 of this Section. 3) Locations where the procedure will be used. b. Attachments: 1) Listing of steps in the procedure, including at a minimum, the following: Surface Preparation, Repair (including mixing, installation, and curing), Coating (if required) and Protection and Curing. 2) For each step indicate repair materials to be used, and provide manufacturer’s recommended preparation, mixing, installation, and protection and curing procedures. Include limits on environmental conditions to be avoided or maintained during the steps. Where time is critical, indicate maximum or minimum elapsed times for or between subsequent steps in the procedure. 2. Cold weather plan for protecting and curing repair materials when temperature during any part of a continuous 24-hour will fall below 45 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Hot weather plan for protecting and curing repair materials when temperature during any part of a continuous 24-hour period will rise above 85 degrees Fahrenheit. 4. Review of repair procedures will be for general conformance with the design concept and the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review shall not relieve Contractor for responsibility of providing materials and methods appropriate to the work indicated. D. Qualifications: 1. Qualifications of manufacturer of repair materials demonstrating compliance with the requirements of this Section. 2. Qualifications of Contractor and Contractor’s project superintendent demonstrating compliance with the requirements of this Section. a. Project descriptions including reference contacts. b. Manufacturer’s certificates of training for Contractor’s project superintendent overseeing concrete modifications and repairs and for key personnel who will prepare and construct those modifications and repairs. E. Manufacturer’s field reports: 1. Confirmation that authorized representative of manufacturer of repair materials was on site for the initial placement of each type of repair or repair material, and that representative observed the following: a. Preparation and condition of surfaces receiving repair products. b. Mixing and application of repair materials. F. Closeout documents: 1. Project Record Documents: a. Record drawings recording type, location and limits of each repair made for the work. 2. Warranties: a. Warranties for repair materials. October 2016 03_01_05-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer of repair materials: a. Certified as maintaining a quality assurance program conforming to the requirements of ISO 9001 at all facilities producing products specified. b. Shall have conducted, for a minimum of 10 years prior to the date of Notice to Proceed for the Work, a program of training, approving, and technically supporting contractors and their personnel in use of the products and techniques of their installation. 2. Contractor: a. In the following paragraphs, items pertaining to Contractor also apply to any subcontractor(s) engaged to provide concrete modifications or repairs. Provide: 1) A qualified project superintendent for concrete repairs to be on site full time during the duration of concrete modification and repair work. 2) Experienced personnel available and capable of completing the Work in the specified period. b. Provide personnel holding the following qualifications: 1) Contractor and Contractor’s project superintendent for modifications and repairs: Each demonstrating at least 5 years' experience in the type of repairs specified and including: a) At least 5 projects with repairs of types, procedures, and complexities equal to or greater than those required for this work. b) At least 3 of those projects performed under environmental conditions (temperature, wind, and humidity) similar to those expected during the duration of this Work. c) Experience in mixing and applying the specific products or systems to be used for the concrete repairs and modifications, as well as experience with equipment required for mixing and placing those products or systems. 2) Certificate(s) from the manufacturer of the repair products attesting that Contractor’s superintendent for concrete repairs and key personnel for the repair work have completed manufacturer’s training program for the use of the products or systems specified. Certificate(s) shall include: a) Names of personnel who completed the training, and b) Names of products for which those individuals received training. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Materials and procedures shall conform to all applicable federal, state, and local requirements. C. Pre-installation conference: 1. Before beginning concrete demolition or placement of repair materials, Contractor shall schedule and conduct a pre-modification and repair conference. October 2016 03_01_05-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) 2. Schedule conference at least 10 days prior to commencing work under this Section. a. Provide additional conferences if necessary to discuss specific concrete mixes or placing and curing conditions. b. Notify Engineer of location and time of each conference. 3. Required attendees: a. Contractor, including Contractor’s superintendent and key personnel. b. Subcontractors engaged for the modification and repair work. c. Technical representative(s) of each manufacturer who will be providing repair materials. d. Engineer. e. Sampling and testing personnel. f. Other persons deemed by the Engineer and Contractor to be critical to the quality and efficiency of the Work. 4. Agenda for the meeting shall include, at a minimum, the following items. a. Review of requirements of Drawings and Specifications. b. Discussion of points of interface and coordination between various trades or products to be used in the Work. c. Discussion of responsibilities and limits of work for each of the parties in attendance. d. Discussion of any ambiguities or proposed modifications to the Work. e. Contractor’s schedule for repair work. f. Environmental requirements for placement and curing of repair materials, and provisions to ensure that required conditions are provided. g. Project and product safety requirements. 5. Prepare and submit minutes of the pre-installation conference as specified in Section 01_33_00. D. Services of manufacturer’s representative: 1. A qualified and authorized technical representative of the manufacturer of repair materials shall be present on site for the first placement of each material. Representative shall: a. Observe preparation and condition of surfaces receiving repair products. b. Observe mixing and application of repair materials. c. Prepare field report of on-site observations and submit to Engineer as record information within 24 hours after site visit. Include in the report representative's statement that surfaces and materials were observed for consistency with manufacturer's recommendations, and note any discrepancies. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original, undamaged, unopened containers with manufacturer’s name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers intact and clearly legible. B. Store and condition products as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection: 1. Protect equipment and surfaces surrounding repairs and modifications from damage or spills. October 2016 03_01_05-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) B. Waste control and disposal: 1. Comply with all federal, state, and local laws and regulations regarding handling, storage, and disposal of debris and waste materials. 2. Ensure that products of demolition and repair do not damage or contaminate surrounding surfaces or repairs. 3. Collect and remove debris and waste material for proper storage and disposal. C. Environmental conditions: 1. Do not place concrete repair materials when surface or ambient temperatures and moisture conditions are outside manufacturer's recommendations for conditions at time of installation and curing. 2. Do not place concrete repair materials when surface and ambient temperatures during the next 72 hours are expected to drop below 40 degrees Fahrenheit or rise above 85 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Do not place concrete repair materials when rain or snow appear to be imminent or are expected within the next 24 hours, unless provisions acceptable to the Engineer are made to protect the work. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. See Section 01_14_00 - Work Restrictions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Repair materials shall be free of chlorides or alkalis (except for those attributable to water). 2. To ensure compatibility of materials and methods, a single manufacturer shall produce and provide all products used together in a single area of concrete repair. B. Manufacturers and products: 1. The Engineer has determined that the following manufacturer(s) can demonstrate qualifications and provide products conforming to the requirements of this Specification: a. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ. Denver Representative: Mark Tharnish. phone: 303-475-8282. 2. Product substitutions: a. Subsequent paragraphs of this Section specify repair products from the manufacturer(s) listed. Contractor and manufacturer of repair products shall review the concrete modification and repair work, and determine which products from manufacturer’s line will provide the required properties for compatibility, strength, workability, durability, and environmental conditions expected during construction, and for the Contractor’s operations. b. If, based on the preceding considerations, Contractor and manufacturer recommend products other than those that follow, submit such recommendations to Engineer as part of the required product and procedure submittals. October 2016 03_01_05-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) c. Engineer will consider Contractor’s request for use of products other than those specified based on the joint recommendations of Contractor and repair product manufacturer, providing such recommendation is submitted to Engineer in writing and includes the following information. 1) Cover letter listing proposed alternate repair products with explanation of reasons for requesting changes. 2) Full listing of all products and of preparation and installation procedures to be included in each specific type of repair. 3) Certificate of compliance from an approved independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and demonstrating that the substitute products meet or exceed the specified physical and performance criteria. 4) References for 5 projects where the proposed alternate products were installed and where those products have at least 3 years proven record of performance. Include project name, date of installation, description of all products used in the repair, and name of contact with telephone number. d. Decisions to permit the use of alternate products will be at the sole discretion of the Engineer, and the decision of the Engineer shall be final. C. Bonding agents: 1. Epoxy Bonding Agent: See Section 03_63_01. 2. Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Bonding Agent: See Section 03_63_02. D. Repair mortars - Cementitious: 1. General: a. Provide repair mortars specified. b. Appurtenances: 1) Water: Fresh potable water as recommended by the product manufacturer. 2) Aggregate (if required for extending the repair mortar based on the depth of mortar to be placed): Clean coarse aggregate of the type, size and gradation, quality, and moisture content recommended by the manufacturer of the repair mortar. 2. Hand applied cementitious repair mortar - horizontal surfaces: a. Description: 2-component, polymer modified, portland cement based, trowel-grade mortar. b. Product: 1) Sika Corporation - SikaTop 122 Plus. c. Performance properties: Property Requirement(1) Color: Concrete grey Water Contact: NSF 61 approved for potable water Application time:(2) 30 minutes minimum Finishing time:(2) 50 to 120 minutes Notes: (1) Values when tested with material and curing conditions at 73 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity unless otherwise noted. (2) Time after mixing of components for field-mixed volumes. October 2016 03_01_05-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) d. Material properties: Property Test Method(1) Value(2) Bond Strength: (minimum) C 882 modified(3) 28-days: 2200 psi Compressive Strength: (minimum) C 109 1 day: 2500 psi 7 days: 5500 psi 28 days: 7000 psi Splitting Tensile Strength: (minimum) C 496 28 days: 750 psi Flexural Strength: (minimum) C 293 28 days: 2000 psi Drying shrinkage C 157M less than 0.05 percent Chloride permeability AASHTO T-277 Approximately 500 coulombs Notes: (1) ASTM test method unless otherwise noted. (2) Values when tested with material and curing conditions at 73 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity, unless otherwise noted. (3) Mortar scrubbed into substrate 3. Hand applied cementitious repair mortar - vertical and overhead surfaces: a. Description: 2-component, polymer modified, portland cement based, non- sag mortar. b. Product: Sika Corporation - SikaTop 123 Plus. c. Performance properties: Property Requirement(1) Color: Concrete grey Water Contact: NSF 61 approved for potable water Application time:(2) 15 minutes minimum. Finishing time:(2) 20 to 60 minutes. Notes: (1) Values when tested with material and curing conditions at 73 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity unless otherwise noted. (2) Time after mixing of components for field-mixed volumes. October 2016 03_01_05-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) d. Material properties: Property Test Method(1) Value(2) Bond Strength: (minimum) C 882 modified(3) 28 days: 2,200 psi Compressive Strength: (minimum) C 109 1 day: 2,500 psi 7 days: 5,000 psi 28 days: 6,000 psi Splitting Tensile Strength: (minimum) C 496 28 days: 900 psi Flexural Strength: (minimum) C 293 28 days: 2,000 psi Drying shrinkage Chloride permeability AASHTO T-277 28 days: 500 coulombs Notes: (1) ASTM test method unless otherwise noted. (2) Values when tested with material and curing conditions at 73 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity, unless otherwise noted. (3) Mortar scrubbed into substrate. 4. Formed and poured self-consolidating concrete. a. Description: 1-component, self-consolidating, polymer modified concrete mix. b. Product: SikaCrete 211 SCC Plus c. Performance properties: Property Requirement Color: Concrete grey Water Contact: (Not approved under NSF 61 - Do not use in contact with potable water.) Coarse aggregate: Maximum 3/8 inch. Flowability / spread (minimum) Initial: 27-33 inches. 30 minutes after mixing: 15 inches. d. Material properties: Property Test Method(1) Value(2) Chloride Permeability: C 1202 28 days: < 650 coulombs Drying Shrinkage C 157 28 days: < 0.5 percent. Compressive Strength (minimum) C 109 1 day: 2,000 psi 7 days: 5,500 psi 28 days: 6,500 psi October 2016 03_01_05-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) Property Test Method(1) Value(2) Splitting Tensile Strength: (minimum) C 496 28 days: 1,000 psi Direct Tensile Pull-off: (minimum) ACI 503 7 days: 300 psi concrete substrate failure Notes: (1) ASTM test method unless otherwise noted. (2) Values when tested with material and curing conditions at 73 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity, unless otherwise noted. 5. Spray applied cementitious repair mortar - vertical and overhead surfaces. a. Description: 1-component, fiber-reinforced, shrinkage compensating cementitious mortar. b. Product: SikaRepair 224. c. Performance properties: Property Requirement Color: Concrete grey to dark gray Water Contact: NSF 61 approved for potable water d. Material properties: Property Test Method(1) Value(2) Density: (minimum) 125 lbs./cu.ft. Chloride Permeability: C 1202 28 days: < 500 coulombs Compressive Strength (minimum) C 109 1 day: 4,500 psi 7 day: 8,000 psi 28 days: 10,000 psi Splitting Tensile Strength: (minimum) C 496 28 days: 735 psi Direct Tensile Pull-off: (minimum) ACI 503 28 days: >350 psi Notes: (1) ASTM test method unless otherwise noted. (2) Values when tested with material and curing conditions at 73 degrees Fahrenheit and 100 percent relative humidity, unless otherwise noted. E. Topping mortar - cementitious: 1. General: a. Provide topping mortar(s) specified. b. Appurtenances: 1) Water: Fresh potable water as recommended by the product manufacturer. October 2016 03_01_05-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) 2) Aggregate (if required for extending the repair mortar based on the depth to be placed): Clean coarse aggregate of the type, size and gradation, quality, and moisture content recommended by the manufacturer of the repair mortar for the application conditions. 2. Screed applied, early strength gaining - horizontal surfaces: a. Description: 1-component, rapid hardening, portland cement based repair mortar with high early strength gain. 1) Product: Sika Corporation - SikaQuick 1000 with coarse aggregate. b. Performance properties: Property Requirement Color: Concrete grey Water contact: (Not approved under NSF 61 - Do not use in contact with potable water.) Working time for application:(1) Minimum 30 minutes after addition of water (for field-mixed volumes) Setting time ASTM C 266 Initial: 40-90 minutes Final: 60-120 minutes Notes: (1) Values when tested with material and curing conditions at 73 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity. c. Material properties: Property Test Method(1) Value(2) Compressive strength (minimum) Mortar: C 109 3 hours: 1,250 psi 1 day: 4,000 psi Concrete(3): C 39 7 days: 28 days: Drying Shrinkage: (maximum) C 596 28 days: 0.06% Direct Tensile Bond: (minimum) ACI 503 28 days: 300 psi concrete substrate failure Abrasion Resistance: (max. wear at 1 hour) C 779 28 days: 0.03 inches Chloride Permeability: (maximum) C 1202 28 days: 450 coulombs Modulus of Elasticity: (maximum) C 469 28 days: 4,600,000 psi Abrasion Resistance (max wear at 1 hour) C 779 28 days: 0.03 inches Freeze/Thaw Resistance: (minimum) C 666 28 days: 98% October 2016 03_01_05-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) Property Test Method(1) Value(2) Scaling Resistance: (minimum) C 672 50 cycles: 0.08 psf Notes: (1) ASTM test method unless otherwise noted. (2) Values when tested with material and curing conditions at 73 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity. (3) Mortar extended and tested with the addition of 25 pounds of clean, well- graded, saturated surface dry, low-absorption and high density coarse aggregate, and mixed to a 7-inch slump. F. Epoxy resin for crack repair: 1. Penetrating epoxy resin: a. Description: 2-component, 100 percent solids, moisture-tolerant, low-viscosity, high-strength, epoxy resin penetrating sealer conforming to ASTM C 881 Type I (for bonding hardened concrete to hardened concrete). b. Product: Sika Corporation: Sikadur 55 SLV. c. Performance properties: Property Requirement Potable water contact: Listed under NSF 61 (or top-coated with sealant or coating so- listed) Color: Clear Working time for application:(1) Minimum 20 minutes after mixing of components (for field-mixed volumes) Notes: (1) Values when tested with material and curing conditions at 73 degrees Fahrenheit and 50% relative humidity. d. Material properties: Property Test Method(1) Value(2) Bond Strength: hardened concrete to hardened concrete (minimum) C 882 2-day moist cure: 2,500 psi 14-day moist cure: 2,500 psi Flexural Properties: (minimum at 7 days) D 790 Flexural Strength: 8,500 psi Modulus of Elasticity(3) 3.2x105 psi Tensile Properties: (minimum at 7 days) D 638 Strength: 7100 psi Elongation at break: 10% Shear Strength: (minimum at 7 days) D 732 5800 psi October 2016 03_01_05-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) Property Test Method(1) Value(2) Viscosity: (mixed) 105 cps (approximately) Notes: (1) ASTM test method unless otherwise noted. (2) Values when tested with material and curing conditions at 71 to 75 degrees Fahrenheit and 45 to 55 percent relative humidity. (3) Tangent modulus of elasticity. e. Slip-resistant surface: Aggregate recommended by product manufacturer for broadcast into sealer where slip-resistant walking surface is indicated. 2. Injected epoxy resin: See Section 03_64_24. G. Urethane resin for crack repair: 1. Injected hydrophilic polyurethane resin: See Section 03_64_25. H. Joint materials: 1. Joint fillers: See Section 03_15_00. 2. Joint sealants and appurtenances: See Section 07_90_00. 3. Waterstops - polyvinyl chloride (PVC): See Section 03_15_00. 4. Waterstops - Hypalon sheet: See Section 03_15_00. 5. Waterstops - Hydrophilic rubber: See Section 03_15_14. I. Adhesive bonded reinforcing bars and all thread rods in concrete: See Section 03_21_17. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Steam clean and degrease surfaces designated to receive concrete repair materials prior to initial inspections and removal or repair of deteriorated concrete. B. The Drawings indicate types and quantities of repairs. Exact locations and limits of each will be determined during construction. 1. With Engineer and Owner, observe areas designated for modification and repair. Identify and mark limits of work areas. a. Floors: Confirm limits of spalled and de-bonded floor areas scheduled for repair by dragging a steel chain across the surface. b. Walls: Confirm extent of weak and loose material and voids at walls and deteriorated joints by performing “soundings.” 2. Mark such areas and compare quantities of repair anticipated with the base quantities shown on the Drawings before proceeding with construction. 3. If quantities exceed the base quantities, review overage with Engineer and determine whether certain marked areas will be excluded, or whether base quantities and Contract Price will be adjusted. Complete such marking and discussion before proceeding with modification and repair work. October 2016 03_01_05-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) 3.02 PREPARATION - GENERAL A. See Section 01_35_21 for general requirements for selective demolition. 1. Take necessary precautions and provide protective devices required to protect personnel, to support the main or appurtenant structures while concrete is removed, and to prevent damage to surrounding areas and equipment. 2. Prevent debris from falling into adjacent tanks, channels, equipment, or operating areas that remain in service. B. Where concrete modification and repair requires concrete forming, concrete reinforcement, or cast-in-place concrete, provide such items as specified under Sections 03_11_07, 03_20_00, and 03_30_00 respectively. 3.03 CONCRETE REMOVAL A. General: 1. Remove concrete to limits indicated on the Drawings or specified. 2. Concrete that is to be left in place, but is damaged by Contractor’s operations shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Repair areas affected by concrete removal to provide surfaces with strength and finish consistent with that of the surrounding concrete. B. Special techniques: 1. New openings through concrete: a. Create openings by: 1) Saw cutting completely through concrete, or 2) Scoring edges of opening with saw to at least 1 inch depth on exposed faces and removing concrete by chipping. b. Do not allow saw cuts to extend beyond edges of the opening. Make corners square and true by combination of core drilling and grinding or chipping. 2. Removal of concrete equipment pads, piping supports, etc. a. Remove bases for equipment and supports where so indicated on the Drawings. Intent of modifications at such locations is to leave remaining concrete surfaces such that little or no evidence of previous installation remains. 1) Remove portion of pad projecting above surface of parent concrete in floor, wall, etc. Cut existing reinforcement and anchor bolts extending from parent concrete into pad in accordance with techniques for cutting back embedments. 2) Observe surface of parent concrete. If minor grinding or surface restoration will provide intended appearance, make such repairs in accordance with this Section and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If minor grinding or surface restoration would leave surface rough, discolored, or with irregular patches, excavate additional concrete as described in the following paragraphs, and provide surface repair. a) Saw-cut clean, straight lines at or slightly beyond limits of the base. Cut shall be a minimum of 1 inch deep, but not more than the depth of concrete cover over the reinforcement minus 1/2 inch. Do not cut existing reinforcement in walls or slabs behind the base being removed. October 2016 03_01_05-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) b) Remove existing parent concrete within boundaries of scored lines to a depth of at least 1/2 inch. c) Provide surface repairs per procedure S/F-1 or S/W-1 of this Section. 3. Concrete excavation for repair: a. Excavate deteriorated surface concrete in areas indicated on the Drawings and as marked in the field. Expose a clean, sound surface for placement and bonding of repair materials. b. Excavation and surface preparation shall conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer of the repair materials and this Section. c. Make excavations that allow repairs to rebuild deteriorated concrete surfaces to their original lines with repair products placed at thicknesses not less than the minimums nor more than the maximums recommended by the manufacturer of the materials. d. Provide neat, uniform, undamaged edges surrounding areas of repair. 1) Cut boundaries of repairs to form simple, rectangular shapes without reentrant corners. 2) Prepare boundaries of repair areas with edges cut at approximately 90 degrees to the exposed concrete surface to prevent “feather- edged” conditions. e. Carefully remove concrete, avoiding damage to reinforcement. 1) If more than half the diameter of reinforcing bars is exposed by excavation of the surrounding concrete, or if exposed reinforcement appears to be corroded, chip out the concrete around and behind that reinforcement to provide a clear space of not less than 1 inch around the perimeter of the bar for placement of concrete repair materials. 3.04 CONCRETE SURFACE ROUGHNESS A. Prepare surfaces as indicated on the Drawings and specified, and as recommended by the manufacturer of concrete repair materials. B. Prepare surfaces in compliance with ICRI Technical Guideline No. 310.2. 1. Roughness and relief of concrete surfaces prepared for repair is designated in the Drawings and Specifications by a Concrete Surface Profile (CSP) number as defined by ICRI. 2. Obtain ICRI surface preparation sample specimens and have specimens available in the field for comparison to prepared concrete surfaces. C. Prepare surfaces using hydrojetting techniques. 1. Provide equipment capable of developing at least 5000 psi, and not less than 3,500 psi jet pressure and with rotating tip ("turbo tip"). 3.05 CONCRETE REPAIRS A. Prepare surfaces not requiring concrete removal in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the repair products. B. Where moisture content of existing concrete or repair materials is critical to subsequent repair procedures, test for moisture using methods acceptable to the manufacturer of the repair materials and the Engineer. October 2016 03_01_05-17 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) C. Special techniques: 1. Treatment of existing reinforcement, anchor bolts, or other ferrous embedments at removed concrete: a. Where existing items are shown or specified to remain for incorporation into new work, protect as indicated. b. Where existing items are not to be retained for incorporation into new work, cut off and protect as follows: 1) If new concrete will be placed against existing concrete at the removal line, cut reinforcement or embedments flush with line of concrete removal, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2) Where existing concrete at the removal line will be the final finished concrete surface, cut reinforcement or embedments at least 2 inches below the finished surface; paint cut ends of metals with epoxy as specified in Section 03_63_01; coat concrete surfaces in excavations with epoxy bonding agent as specified in Section 03_63_01; and fill excavations with dry-pack mortar as specified in Section 03_60_00. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Environmental conditions: 1. At all times, maintain temperature of curing concrete or concrete repair materials at or above 55 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Field inspections and testing: 1. Submit records of inspections and tests to Engineer within 24 hours after completion. 2. Confirm that surfaces receiving repair materials and coatings have moisture content not exceeding the percentage recommended by the manufacturer before materials are placed. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Special inspections and tests, and structural observations: Not required. 3.08 SCHEDULES - REPAIR PROCEDURES A. General: 1. Repairs indicated on the Drawings and marked at the site shall conform to the following schedule, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 2. Repair types designated on the Drawings and described in subsequent paragraphs are identified by the following naming scheme: October 2016 03_01_05-18 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) "Repair Type/Surface to be Repaired - Procedure Number" (e.g., “S/F-1” indicates a surface repair to the floor using procedure 1.) Repair Types Surface to Repair Procedure Number S = Surface F = Floor (Sequential identifier - see following paragraphs C = Crack W = Wall J = Joint OH = Overhead T = Topping R = Roof M = Misc B. Floors and walkways - surface restoration: 1. “S/F-1”: Repair localized area of spalled or pitted concrete - cementitious repair mortar: a. Preparation: 1) Remove loose, spalled, or delaminated concrete. a) Estimated depth of removal is 2 inches or less, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2) Prepare and clean surfaces where repair materials will be applied as recommended by the manufacturer of those materials. a) Provide perimeter of repair with vertical edge conforming to repair material manufacturer's recommendations and having uniform height of not less than 1/4 inch, or not less than 1 inch where repair product is extended with coarse aggregate. b. Repair and curing: 1) Do not apply bonding agents to prepared surfaces. Saturate the surfaces to be bonded, and all concrete at least 6 inches past the bonding area, for at least 24 hours prior to placing repair mortar. Just before placing repair mortar, remove standing water and provide moisture conditions in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2) Mix, place, and consolidate hand-applied cementitious repair mortar for horizontal surfaces. a) Extend mix with aggregate if recommended manufacturer for depth and area of placement. b) Work into repair area to provide dense, non-segregated repair. c) If repair depth exceeds manufacturer's maximum recommended placement thickness for repair material, build repair in successive lifts. Provide curing and surface re-preparation between lifts. 3) Finish repair to match surrounding concrete surfaces. 4) Protect and moist cure repair mortar for at least 7 days. 2. "S/F-2": Remove and restore floor surface - cementitious repair mortar: a. Preparation: 1) Remove concrete over designated area of floor. 2) Estimated depth of removal is 1-1/2 inches or less, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. a) Final depth of removal will be determined in the field based on depth of softened or deteriorated concrete and depth of grease penetration. October 2016 03_01_05-19 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) b) After steam cleaning and removal of surface layer, confirm competency of exposed surfaces by in-situ tensile pull-off tests conducted as specified in ICRI Technical Guideline 210.3. (1) Conduct at least 1 test for every 250 square feet of floor area to be resurfaced. (2) Surfaces will be considered acceptable if tests demonstrate an average bond value of not less than 250 psi, and with no tests reporting less than 85 percent of that value. 3) Prior to installing full areas of surface restorations, confirm adequacy of techniques, equipment, and materials proposed for the work by installing and testing sample concrete repairs in locations acceptable to the Engineer. a) Number of tests: Not less than 3 locations representing the range of conditions existing in the structure at areas to be resurfaced b) Area of repair at each test: Minimum 3 feet x 3 feet. c) Tests at each sample repair location: Not less than 2 in-situ pull- off tests conducted as specified in ICRI Technical Guideline 210.3 (1) Repairs shall be considered acceptable if tests demonstrate an average test value of not less than 350 psi, and with no tests less than 85 percent of that value, and failure of the repair in the concrete substrate below the repair material. d) Modify procedures and re-test until satisfactory results are achieved. 4) Prepare and clean surfaces where repair materials will be applied as recommended by the manufacturer of those materials. a) Prepare surfaces and roughen to designated surface profile using hydrojetting methods. b) Provide perimeter of repair with vertical edge having uniform height of not less than 1/4 inch, or not less than 1 inch where repair product is extended with coarse aggregate. b. Repair and curing: 1) Do not apply bonding agents to prepared surfaces. Saturate the surfaces to be bonded, and all concrete at least 6 inches past those surfaces, for at least 4 hours prior to placing repair mortar. Remove standing water and provide moisture conditions in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations before placing repair mortar. 2) Mix and place one of the following materials. Work, or otherwise consolidate material into repair area to provide dense, non- segregated repair. a) Hand-applied, polymer modified, cementitious, trowel grade repair mortar for horizontal surfaces. b) Self-consolidating, polymer-modified concrete mix. 3) Finish repair to match surrounding concrete surfaces. Protect and moist cure repair mortar for at least 7 days and as recommended by the repair mortar manufacturer. C. Floors - crack repairs: 1. "C/F-1": Epoxy resin injection. See Section 03_64_24. October 2016 03_01_05-20 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) 2. “C/F-2”: Epoxy resin injection with joint sealant at surface: a. Preparation: 1) Prepare crack by routing a groove for placement of joint sealant at the exposed surface of the repair. 2) Clean crack of bond-inhibiting materials and prepare as recommended by repair material manufacturer. b. Repair and curing: 1) Fill crack with low-viscosity epoxy resin for crack repair. Ensure that resin does not fill groove routed for sealant. 2) Protect and cure resin as recommended by manufacturer. c. Surface joint sealant: 1) Remove cured epoxy resin from sealant bonding surfaces. 2) Place joint primers, bond-break tape, and synthetic rubber sealing compound specified in Section 07_90_00 in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. “C/F-3”: Hydrophilic polyurethane resin injection. See Section 03_64_25. D. Floors - joint repairs: 1. “J/F-1”: Repair expansion joint at top/exposed face of slab: a. Preparation: 1) Remove cracked, damaged, and deteriorating sealants over length of joint. 2) Remove/rout joint fillers to at least 2 inches below surface of concrete at joint. 3) Prepare and clean surfaces where repair materials will be applied as recommended by the manufacturer of those materials. b. Repair: 1) Insert new cork joint filler material, as specified in Section 03_15_00, into routed and cleaned groove. Fill space between vertical edges on each side of joint. Hold top of joint filler below top of the concrete a depth equal to one half the width of the joint, but not exceeding 1/2-inch. 2) Clean and prime concrete edges at joint for installation of joint sealant. 3) Place joint primers, bond-break tape, and synthetic rubber sealing compound specified in Section 07_90_00 in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Walls - surface restoration: 1. “S/W-1”: Repair localized area of spalled or pitted concrete - cementitious repair mortar: a. Preparation: 1) Remove loose, spalled, or delaminated concrete. 2) Estimated depth of removal is 2 inches or less, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3) Prepare and clean surfaces where repair materials will be applied as recommended by the manufacturer of those materials. a) Provide perimeter of repair on a plane perpendicular to the face of the surface being repaired and with edge having a uniform depth of not less than 1/4 inch, or not less than 1 inch where repair product is extended with coarse aggregate. October 2016 03_01_05-21 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) b. Repair and curing: 1) Apply epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent to prepared SSD surfaces of all joints between existing concrete and repair materials. 2) Mix, place and consolidate hand-applied cementitious repair mortar within open time of bonding agent: a) Extend mix with aggregate if recommended by manufacturer for depth and area of placement. b) Work into repair area to provide dense, non-segregated repair. c) If repair depth exceeds manufacturer's maximum recommended placement thickness for repair material, build repair in successive lifts. Provide curing and surface re-preparation between lifts. 3) Finish repair to match surrounding concrete surfaces. 4) Protect and moist cure repair for at least 7 days. 2. "S/W-2": Remove and restore wall surface - cementitious mortar. a. Preparation: 1) Remove concrete over designated area of wall. a) Estimated depth of removal is 1-1/2 inches or less, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b) Final depth of removal will be determined in the field based on depth of softened or deteriorated concrete and depth of grease penetration. c) After steam cleaning and removal of surface layer confirm competency of exposed surfaces by in-situ tensile pull-off tests conducted as specified in ICRI Technical Guideline 210.3 (1) Conduct at least 1 test for every 250 square feet of wall area to be resurfaced. (2) Surfaces will be considered acceptable if tests demonstrate an average bond value of not less than 250 psi, and with no tests reporting less than 85 percent of that value. 2) Prior to installing full area of surface restoration, confirm adequacy of techniques, equipment, and materials proposed for the work by installing and testing sample concrete repairs in locations acceptable to the Engineer. a) Number of tests: Not less than 3 locations representing the range of conditions existing in the structure at areas to be resurfaced. b) Area of repair at each test: Minimum 3 feet x 3 feet. c) Tests at each sample repair location: Not less than 2 in-situ pulloff tests conducted as specified in ICRI Technical Guideline 210.3. (1) Repairs shall be considered acceptable if tests demonstrate an average test value of not less than 350 psi, and with no tests less than 85 percent of that value, and failure of the repair in the concrete substrate below the repair material. d) Modify procedures and re-test until satisfactory results are achieved. 3) Prepare and clean surfaces where repair materials will be applied as recommended by the manufacturer of those materials. a) Prepare surfaces and roughen to designated surface profile using hydrojetting methods. October 2016 03_01_05-22 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) b) Provide perimeter of repair on a plane perpendicular to the face of the surface being repaired and with edge having a uniform depth of not less than 1/4 inch, or not less than 1 inch where repair product is extended with coarse aggregate and on a plane perpendicular to the face of the wall. b. Repair and curing: 1) For hand-applied cementitious repair mortar: a) Apply epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent to prepared SSD surfaces of existing structure at all joints between existing concrete and repair materials. b) Mix and place cementitious repair mortar for vertical and overhead surfaces. c) Extend mix with aggregate if recommended by manufacturer for depth and area of placement. d) Work mix into repair area to provide dense, non-segregated repair. 2) For formed and poured self-consolidating concrete: a) Apply epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent to prepared SSD surfaces of existing structure at all joints between existing concrete and repair materials. b) Install forms as required to restore wall surface to original profile. Seal forms against leakage, and make provisions to ensure consolidation and to vent and eliminate entrapped air when concrete repair materials are installed behind form. c) Mix and place self-consolidating concrete. d) Consolidate to ensure dense, non-segregated repair. 3) For spray-applied material: a) Prepare surfaces to SSD condition b) Apply repair using wet shotcreting process equipment and procedures recommended by the manufacturer. c) Finish surfaces to smooth profile by steel troweling. 4) Finish repair to match surrounding concrete surfaces. 5) Protect and moist cure repair for at least 7 days and as recommended by the repair mortar manufacturer. F. Walls - crack repair: 1. "C/W-1": Epoxy resin injection. See Section 03_64_24. 2. "C/W-2": Epoxy resin injection with joint sealant at surface. a. Preparation: 1) Prepare crack by routing a groove adequate for placement of joint sealant at the exposed surface of the repair. 2) Clean cracks of bond-inhibiting materials and prepare as recommended by repair material manufacturer. b. Repair and curing: 1) Fill cracks with low-viscosity epoxy resin for crack repair. Ensure that resin does not fill groove routed for sealant. 2) Protect and cure resin as recommended by manufacturer. c. Surface joint sealant: 1) Remove cured epoxy resin from sealant bonding surfaces. 2) Place joint primers, bond-break tape, and synthetic rubber sealing compound specified in Section 07_90_00 in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. October 2016 03_01_05-23 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) 3. “C/W-3”: Hydrophilic polyurethane resin injection. See Section 03_64_25. G. Walls - joint repair: 1. "J/W-1": Repair expansion joint at inside/exposed face of wall. a. Preparation: 1) Remove cracked, damaged, and deteriorating sealants over full length of joint. 2) Remove/rout joint fillers to at least 2 inches below surface of concrete at joint. 3) Prepare and clean surfaces to which joint materials will be applied as recommended by the manufacturer of those materials. b. Repair: 1) Insert new cork joint filler, as specified in Section 03_15_00, into routed and cleaned groove. Fill space between edges at each side of joint. Hold exterior face of joint filler behind face of concrete a depth equal to one-half the width of the joint, but not more than 1/2 inch. 2) Clean and prime concrete edges at joint for installation of joint sealant. 3) Place joint primer, bond-break tape, and synthetic rubber sealing, all as specified in Section 07_90_00, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. “J/W-2”: Repair expansion joint at common walls between basins/channels. a. As indicated for J/W-1, but provide repair at both faces of wall. Where top of wall is exposed, make joint filler and sealant continuous up to and across top of wall. H. Roof - mortar topping and sealer: 1. “T/R-1”: Repair mortar topping: a. Preparation: 1) Provide sawcut at end of repair as shown on the Drawings. Take precautions to avoid cutting of any reinforcement in existing slab. 2) Prepare surface to receive topping by milling to ICRI surface profile CSP-6. Conduct milling operations using a light-weight walk-behind milling machine. 3) Saturate surfaces receiving topping, and all concrete within 12 inches of those surfaces for at least 24 hours before placing topping. b. Repair and curing: 1) Remove standing water from surfaces receiving topping and provide moisture conditions in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations before placing topping. 2) Do not apply bonding agents to prepared surfaces. Maintain saturated surface dry conditions on all surfaces until topping placement is complete. 3) Mix and place rapid hardening cementitious topping mortar. For repair depths greater than 1 inch, extend mix with 3/8-inch pea gravel aggregate. Finish topping with light broom finish to match surrounding concrete surfaces. 4) Protect and moist cure topping keeping surface continually saturated for at least 7 days after completion of finishing. 5) At cessation of moist curing, allow surface to dry slowly. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, temperature or wind conditions are likely to October 2016 03_01_05-24 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_01_05 (FS-100) result in rapid drying, Engineer may order additional curing or protection before removal. c. Coating: 1) Confirm that moisture content of newly placed topping and existing concrete conforms to recommendations of penetrating epoxy resin manufacturer before proceeding with coating. Provide additional curing as required. 2) Clean and prepare top surface of new topping and existing gallery roof slab as required by manufacturer of penetrating epoxy resin. Prepare using shot blasting techniques unless other means are specifically recommended. 3) Apply penetrating epoxy resin to topping and gallery roof in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Flood coat surface and use squeegee to pull to a thin layer. Provide non-slip surface by broadcasting clean silica sand at the rate of approximately 0.5 pounds per square foot. 4) Protect surface and allow epoxy resin to cure in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. After curing, remove loose sand and power wash surface. 3.09 CLEANUP A. Remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and debris and leave the work area in a clean condition. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_11_07-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_11_07 (FS-100) SECTION 03_11_07 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Concrete formwork. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 3. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 4. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Section 03_60_00 - Grouting. 6. Section 03_63_01 - Epoxies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. A 167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plant, Sheet, and Strip. 4. A 580 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire. 5. C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). C. U.S. Department of Commerce: 1. Federal Specifications: a. PS1-83 – Construction and Industrial Plywood. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Component span: Distance from center of support to center of support for one or more elements of a form. Example, if a form face or spanned between a support centered at elevation 100 and another support centered at elevation 102.5, the component span of that face would be 2.5 feet. B. Green concrete: Concrete that has not achieved 100 percent of its minimum specified compressive strength, f’c. October 2016 03_11_07-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_11_07 (FS-100) C. Void filler: Rigid foam board installed as permanent fill for spaces between concrete placements. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Design concrete forms, falsework, and shoring in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 2. Design forms and ties to withstand concrete pressures from Contractor’s rate of placement without bulging, spreading, or lifting of forms. 3. Limits on form deflections: a. Not exceeding 1/360th of the component span. B. Performance requirements: 1. Construct forms so that finished concrete conforms to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 2. It is intended that surface of concrete after stripping will present a smooth, hard, and dense finish that requires minimal finishing. 3. Provide a sufficient number of forms so that the Work may be performed expeditiously and so that the Work will present a uniform appearance of form patterns and finish. 4. Use forms that are clean and free from dirt, concrete, and other debris. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: 1. Forming system: a. Submit in such detail as the Contractor’s Engineer may require to evaluate whether the proposed system will comply with the intent and details of the Contract Documents. 2. Void filler: a. Manufacturer’s product data for filler boards and adhesive. b. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3. Form release agent: a. Manufacturer’s product data. B. Shop drawings: 1. Taper tie holes (if used): a. Proposed methods of sealing and finishing form tie holes. C. Samples: 1. Form ties. 2. Void filler. 3. Incidentals: a. Rustication strip(s). 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory requirements: 1. Install work of this Section in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. October 2016 03_11_07-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_11_07 (FS-100) B. Qualifications: 1. Manufactured formwork systems: a. Minimum 5-year history of successful use for structures like those included in the Work. b. Where used as formwork for architectural concrete: 1) Submit experience record demonstrating at least 5 projects for review when requested by the Contractor’s Engineer. Provide details, photos, references, and other data requested by Contractor’s Engineer. 2. Formwork designer: a. Professional engineer licensed in the state where the concrete will be constructed and having at least 5 years experience in the design and detailing of systems comparable to those to be used for this Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: 1. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as required to prevent damage or deterioration. 2. Store forms horizontally and fully supported to avoid deformation. 3. Store plastic coated forms and liners horizontally and under cover. 4. Do not expose products to open flame or other ignition sources. B. Void filler: 1. Store materials in a dry area, protected from sunlight and weather, until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Built-up plywood forms: 1. Built-up plywood forms may be substituted for prefabricated forming system subject to following minimum requirements: a. Size and material: 1) Full size 4-foot by 8-foot plywood sheets, except where smaller pieces are able to cover entire area. 2) Sheet construction: 5-ply plywood sheets, 3/4-inch nominal thickness, made with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that is coated or overlaid with a surface that is impervious to water and alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement. b. Wales: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch lumber. c. Studding and wales: Without loose knots and free of warps, cups, and bows. B. Steel or steel framed forms: 1. Steel forms: Provide forms that are: a. Rigidly constructed and capable of being braced for minimum deflection of finish surface. b. Capable of providing finish surfaces that are flat without bows, cups, or dents. October 2016 03_11_07-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_11_07 (FS-100) 2. Steel framed plywood forms: a. Provide forms that are rigidly constructed and capable of being braced. b. Plywood panels: 5-ply, 5/8-inch nominal or 3/4-inch nominal thickness, made with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that is coated or overlaid with a surface that is impervious to water and alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement. C. Form ties: 1. General: a. Form ties compatible with selected forming system and manufactured by a recognized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment. b. Do not use wire ties or wood spreaders in any form. c. Provide ties of type that accurately tie, lock, and spread forms. d. Provide form ties of such design that, when forms are removed, the tie locates no metal or other material within 1-1/2 inches of the surface of the concrete. e. Do not allow tie holes in forms for ties to leak during placement of concrete. 2. Cone-snap ties: a. Cone: Forming a cone shaped depression in the concrete with a minimum diameter of 1 inch at the surface and 1-1/2 inches deep. b. Provide neoprene water-seal washer, minimum 3/16-inch thick x 15/16- inch outside diameter, located near the center of the concrete. 3. Taper ties: a. Tapered hrough bolts at least 1-inch in diameter at the smallest end, or through-bolts utilizing a removable tapered sleeve of the same minimum size. b. Neoprene plugs for taper tie holes. Size so that after they are driven, plugs are located in the center third of the wall thickness. D. Dry pack mortar for filling taper tie holes. As specified in Section 03_60_00. Form release agent: 1. Effective, non-staining, non-residual, water-based, bond-breaking form coating that is compatible with form surfaces and concrete mixes used. 2. Non-toxic, not containing mineral oils or organic solvents, and complying with local, state and federal regulations for VOC release. E. Void filler: 1. Filler material: a. Expanded polystyrene rigid board conforming to ASTM C578. b. Thickness as indicated on the Drawings. c. Material properties as follows: 1) Density: 2.4 pounds per cubic foot, minimum. 2) Compressive strength: At 10 percent deformation, not less than 40 pounds per square foot. 3) Flexural strength: 60 pounds per square inch, minimum. 4) Flame spread index: Less than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Adhesive: a. As recommended by the manufacturer for securely attaching void fillers to adjacent concrete surfaces and for holding the fillers in place during concrete casting. October 2016 03_11_07-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_11_07 (FS-100) 3. Manufacturer: The following, or equal: a. ACH Foam Technologies, LLC, Tijuana, Mexico. F. Incidentals: 1. Wood strips: a. Coat with impermeable coating and provide kerf strip on the side not embedded in concrete. 2. Rustications and chamfers: a. Non-absorbent material compatible with surrounding form surfaces. b. Size as indicated on the Drawings and in Part 3 of this Section. 3. Keyways: a. Steel, plastic, or lumber treated with form coating, applied according to label directions. G. Prefabricated drainage layer: 1. High-strength woven geotextile bonded to a three-dimensional, impact- resistant, polyester core to form an assembly not less than 3/8 inch no more than 1 inch in thickness. Having configuration for overlapping and sealing adjacent panels to one another. Construction to prevent intrusion of concrete or paste into the flow channels. 2. Provide seals and accessories as required to ensure a free-draining system for monitoring movement of water into the drain space. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal. a. Mirafi, Inc.: Mira drain 9000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Forming systems and materials for structures and surfaces shall be as specified herein. 1. Rectangular walls and formed surfaces of slabs and beams: a. Plywood or steel forms in like-new and undamaged condition with sufficient strength, stiffness, and surface smoothness to produce the specified lines and finishes. 2. Circular walls and surfaces: a. As indicated for rectangular walls and forming smooth and uniform curves. 3. Columns: a. Rectangular: As specified for walls. b. Circular: Fabricated steel or fiber-reinforced plastic having semi-circular sections with flanges for bolting together. B. External angles/chamfered edges: 1. Where not otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide external corners of walkways, slabs, walls, beams, columns, and openings with 3/4-inch bevel, formed using true, dimensioned wood or solid plastic chamfer strip. 2. Where not otherwise indicated on the Drawings provide edges of expansion, control, and construction joints with 1/4-inch bevel formed using true, dimensioned wood or solid plastic chamfer strip. October 2016 03_11_07-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_11_07 (FS-100) 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site verification of conditions: 1. Do not place any concrete until all forms for that placement have been thoroughly checked for alignment, level, and strength, and for accurate location of all mechanical and electrical inserts or other embedded items. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean form surfaces that will be in contact with concrete before coating with form release agent and before setting forms. 1. Clean outside faces of forms as required to prevent introduction of dirt or contaminants into formed spaces and concrete. B. Form release agents: 1. Coat forms with acceptable form release agent, if required, prior to use or reuse. 2. Apply form release agent as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Steel forms: Apply form release agent as soon as forms are cleaned to prevent discoloration of concrete from rust. C. Lay-out and locate form joints and form ties in a uniform and uninterrupted pattern acceptable to the Engineer. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Set and align forms to line and grade: a. Limit deviations to tolerances specified and that will permit proper placement of structural Work and proper installation of mechanical and electrical equipment and piping. 2. Securely brace, support, tie down, or otherwise hold in place to prevent any movement. 3. Make adequate provisions to resist uplift pressures, lateral pressure on forms, and formwork deflection. 4. Keep form faces clean until permanent concrete is placed against them. 5. Cracks, openings, or offsets at joints in formwork: Close those that are 1/16-inch or larger by tightening forms or by filling with crack filler materials acceptable to the Engineer. 6. When a second lift is placed over previously set concrete, take special precautions at the interface between lifts to prevent: a. Spreading of forms. b. Vertical or horizontal displacement of forms. c. Grout "bleeding" onto previously placed concrete surfaces. 7. Pipe stubs, anchor bolts, and other embedded items: a. Set in forms where required and secure to prevent displacement. B. Install pipe and conduit in structures as indicated on the Drawings. Provide details to tightly seal formwork around penetrations before placing concrete. Form ties: 1. Cone-snap ties: a. Tie forms together at not more than 2-foot centers vertically and horizontally. October 2016 03_11_07-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_11_07 (FS-100) b. After forms are removed from wall, fill tie holes as follows: 1) Remove form ties from surfaces. 2) Roughen cone shaped tie holes by heavy sandblasting before repair. 3) Dry pack cone shaped tie holes with dry-pack mortar as specified in Section 03_60_00. 2. Taper ties. a. Clean taper ties and lubricate with non-staining form release agent before each use. b. Place taper ties with the large end at the following locations: 1) For liquid containing structures: at the liquid face of the wall. 2) For dry structures surrounded by soil: at the backfilled face of the wall. c. Taper ties may be used when forms are being set against previously placed or existing concrete walls when accepted by the Contractor’s Engineer. 1) Confirm capacity of the previously placed concrete to resist loads imposed by placement procedures. 2) Provide cast-in threaded inserts or drilled –in threaded anchors located so that no metal remains within the expansion joint between the walls after removal of the tapered through bolt. 3) Provide means of ensuring that inserts or anchors set in the first wall are protected from corrosion. d. After forms and taper ties are removed from walls, plug tie holes with neoprene plug as follows. 1) Heavy sandblast and then clean or water-blast tie holes. 2) After cleaning, drive neoprene plug into each tie hole using manufacturer’s recommended steel rod. a) During driving, position steel rod inside cylindrical recess in plug. At no time are plugs to be driven from the flat area outside their cylindrical recess. b) Final location of plug: Within the middle third of the wall thickness. e. Dry-pack taper tie holes with grout after neoprene plugs are set. 1) Coat tie hole surface with epoxy bonding agent and fill with dry pack mortar as specified in Section 03_60_00. 2) Place dry-pack mortar inside holes in layers with thickness not exceeding tie hole diameter and tightly compact each layer. 3) Dry-pack outside of hole no sooner than 7 days after packing the inside of hole. 4) Prepare and finish wall surface in area of dry-packed holes as follows: a) Provide finished surfaces free from sand streaks and voids. b) At locations exposed in the finished work, provide finishes matching texture and color of surrounding concrete. c) On the wet side of liquid containing structures and the soils side of below grade walls, cover dry-packed holes with minimum 10-mil coating of epoxy gel as specified in Section 03_63_01. Extend coating at least 2-inches past perimeter of filled holes. October 2016 03_11_07-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_11_07 (FS-100) C. Built-up plywood forms: 1. Studding: a. Spaced at 16 inches or 24 inches on center as required for strength and as required to limit deflections and prevent any bulging surfaces on faces of finished concrete work. b. Install studs perpendicular to grain of exterior plys of plywood sheets. 2. Wales: Form wales of double lumber material with minimum size as specified in this Section. 3. Number of form reuses: Forms may be re-used as long as the durability of surface coating or overlay used, and the condition of surfaces, edges, and corners is adequate to produce flat, smooth, hard, dense, and uniform finishes on the concrete when forms are stripped. D. Steel or steel framed forms: 1. Steel forms: a. Adequately brace form faces to ensure minimal deflection of finished surfaces. 2. Steel framed plywood forms: a. Rigidly construct and brace with joints fitting closely and smoothly. b. Number of form reuses: may be re-used as long as the durability of surface coating or overlay used, and the condition of surfaces is adequate to produce flat, smooth, hard, dense, and uniform finishes on the concrete when forms are stripped. 3. Built-up plywood forms as specified in this Section may be used in conjunction with steel forms or steel framed plywood forms for forming special conditions such as corbels and forming around items which will project through forms. E. Incidentals: 1. Keyways: Construct keyways as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Chamfers: a. Form chamfers (bevels) at concrete edges and corners unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. b. Reentrant corners and angles may be left square unless otherwise noted. 3. Level strips: Install level strips at top of wall concrete placements to maintain true line at horizontal construction joints. 4. Rustications: a. Fully seal shapes composed of compound strips and joints between strips and form surfaces to prevent migration of cement paste into the joints between surfaces. F. Encase pipes, anchor bolts, steps, reglets, castings, and other inserts, as indicated on the Drawings or as required, in concrete. Void filler: 1. Clean surfaces where filler will be attached of loose material, dust, and debris that would inhibit bonding of the void filler material to concrete surfaces. 2. Install filler in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Begin installation of board at one corner of surface to be covered. Tightly butt joints to form uninterrupted surface. Cut boards and fit as necessary to accommodate dimensions and conditions. G. Form cleaning and storage: 1. Clean forms after each use and discard damaged material. October 2016 03_11_07-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_11_07 (FS-100) 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Conform to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. B. The maximum deviation from true line and grade shall not exceed tolerances listed in the following paragraphs: C. General: In accordance with ACI 117-06, paragraphs 2.1 through 2.2 and section 4.0, except as modified in following: 1. Slabs: a. Slope: Uniformly sloped to drain or trench when slope is indicated on the Drawings. The variation in slope should not prevent a 10 feet long straight edge from resting on 1/8 inch thick steel end blocks. b. Slabs indicated to be Level: Have maximum deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet without any apparent changes in grade. 2. Form surface irregularities: In accordance with ACI 117 paragraph 4.8. a. All architectural concrete: 1) Class A. 2) Formed surface bowing not exceeding 1/400th of the component span. b. All other surfaces: 1) Class B. 2) Formed surface bowing not exceeding 1/360th of the component span. c. Circular tank walls: 1) For walls not exposed in the finished Work, the Contractor may deviate from the circular line indicated on the Drawings by substitution of straight panels provided the chord length created by the panels does not exceed 2 feet and the angular deflection at joints between adjacent panels does not exceed 3-1/2 degrees. 3. Member thickness: a. Variation from thickness shown on the Drawings: Minus 1/4 inch; plus 1/2 inch. 4. Inserts and embeds: Set inserts and embeds to tolerances required for proper installation and operation of equipment or systems that pertain to each item. a. Maximum tolerances: As follows: Item Tolerance Sleeves and Inserts Plus 1/8 inch. Minus 1/8 inch. Projected Ends of Anchor Bolts Plus 1/4 inch. Minus 0.0 inches. Anchor Bolt Setting Plus 1/16 inch. Minus 1/16 inch. 3.06 FORM REMOVAL AND REUSE A. See Section 03_30_00 requirements for curing and protection, including time limits on removal of forms from newly cast concrete. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. October 2016 03_11_07-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_11_07 (FS-100) B. Manufacturer’s services: 1. Furnish manufacturer’s representative to conduct jobsite training regarding proper storage, handling, and installation for personnel who will perform the installation. Contractor’s Engineer may attend training sessions. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineer shall provide on-site inspection and field quality assurance for the Work of this Section. B. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections. a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted submittals. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Contractor’s Engineer upon request. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_15_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_00 (FS-100) SECTION 03_15_00 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Waterstops. 2. Joint fillers. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 3. Section 03_15_14 - Hydrophilic Rubber Waterstops. 4. Section 07_90_00 - Joint Sealers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 203 - Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation. 2. C 624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. 3. C 882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear. 4. D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension. 5. D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 6. D 624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. 7. D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 8. D 746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact. 9. D 747 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Bending Modulus of Plastics by Means of a Cantilever Beam. 10. D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement. 11. D 1751 - Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 12. D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness. B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE): 1. CRD-C-572, Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. October 2016 03_15_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_00 (FS-100) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: B. Product data: 1. Waterstops: a. Polyvinyl chloride waterstops: Complete physical characteristics. b. Hypalon sheet waterstop: Product data sheets and manufacturer’s installation instructions; information of width of sealing strip to be provided. 2. Preformed expansion joint materials: a. Sufficient information on each type of material to determine conformance of material to requirements specified. C. Samples (when requested in writing by the Construction Manager): 1. Waterstops: a. Polyvinyl chloride waterstop: Minimum 12-inch long sample. b. Hypalon sheet waterstop: Minimum 12-inch long sample of sealing strip material. 2. Preformed expansion joint materials: Minimum 12-inch long sample. D. Laboratory test reports: 1. Waterstops. a. Polyvinyl chloride waterstops: Report demonstrating that average properties of material and finish conform to specified requirements. E. Certificates: 1. Waterstops. a. Polyvinyl chloride waterstop: Written certification that polyvinyl chloride waterstops supplied on this Project meet or exceed physical property requirements of USACE CRD-C-572 and the requirements of this Section. F. Manufacturer's instructions: 1. Instructions for splicing and installation of products supplied. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock-ups: 1. Waterstop joints: a. Welding demonstration: Demonstrate ability to weld acceptable joints in polyvinyl chloride waterstops before installing waterstop in forms. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging with containers unopened and labels intact and legible. Labels shall include manufacturer name, product name and identification, product batch numbers, date of manufacture, and date of expiration if relevant. B. Store materials off the ground, indoors, protected from moisture, and at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. C. Condition products as recommended by the manufacturer just prior to installation. October 2016 03_15_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_00 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATERSTOPS A. Waterstops - Polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 1. Materials: a. Manufactured from prime virgin polyvinyl chloride plastic compound containing the plasticizers, resins, stabilizers, and other materials necessary to meet the requirements of this Specification. No scrap or reclaimed material shall be used. b. Provide polyvinyl chloride waterstops complying with following requirements: Waterstops – PVC, Material properties Physical Characteristics Test Method Required Results Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 Not less than 1.3. Hardness ASTM D 2240 70 to 90 Type A Shore durometer. Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 Not less than 2,000 pounds per square inch. Ultimate Elongation ASTM D 638 Not less than 300 percent Alkali Extraction CRD-C-572 7 day weight change between minus 0.1 percent and plus 0.25 percent. Hardness change within 5 points. Low Temperature Brittle Point ASTM D 746 Not more than minus 35 degrees Fahrenheit. Water Absorption ASTM D 570 Not more than 0.15 percent after 24 hours. Accelerated Extraction Tensile CRD-C-572 Not less than 1,600 pounds per square inch. Stiffness in Flexure ASTM D 747 Not less than 600 pounds per square inch. Tear Resistance ASTM D 624 Not less than 225 pounds per inch. 2. Manufacturers: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Greenstreak Plastic Products Company, Inc. 2) Vinylex Corporation. 3. Types: a. Ribbed waterstops.Dumbbell style waterstops will not be allowed unless specifically noted on the Drawings. b. Dimensions as indicated on the Drawings. (See Typical Detail S106.) B. Joints. Provide manufacturer’s factory pre-fabricated joints for crosses (“+”), ells (“L”), and tees (“T”). October 2016 03_15_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_00 (FS-100) C. Waterstop: Hypalon sheet: 1. Materials: a. Sealing system consisting of permanently elastic, flexible Hypalon strip applied to span over joints or cracks in the structure, and bonded to concrete on each side of the joint or crack using epoxy adhesive. b. Hypalon rubber sealing strip. 1) Minimum thickness of at least 40 mils manufactured with perforations along the bonding edges to ensure water-tight mechanical bond to the concrete substrate. Strip width as required to place inside edges of bond lines at least 2 inches past the edge of any joint, and at least 3 inches past the line of any crack. 2) Material properties: a) Tensile strength. ASTM D 412: minimum 1,000 psi. b) Elongation at break. ASTM D 412: minimum 800 percent. c) Tear resistance. ASTM C 624, Die C: minimum 250 pounds per inch. d) Temperature performance: Specified properties maintained to -40 degrees Fahrenheit. e) Ozone resistance: No effects after minimum 3 months exposure to the following. (1) Water with ozone concentration at 3 ppm. (2) Air with ozone concentration at 300 ppm. c. Non-sag, two-part epoxy resin adhesive. 1) Adhesive compatible with the structural substrate and the Hypalon rubber sealing strip. 2) Adhesive with minimum pot life, working time, and tack-free time as required for the temperature and environmental conditions expected during application and curing. 3) Material properties: a) Bond strength. Hardened concrete to hardened concrete, ASTM C 882. (1) 2-day dry cure: minimum 2,200 psi. (2) 14-day moist cure: minimum 2,900 psi. b) Water absorption. (1) ASTM D 570, 24-hour immersion: 0.10 percent maximum. 2. Manufacturers and types. One of the following, or equal: a. Sika Corporation, Combi-Flex. D. Waterstops – Hydrophilic Rubber: See Section 03_15_14. 2.02 JOINT FILLERS A. General: 1. Use specific type in applications as indicated on the Drawings. 2. No scrap or recycled material shall be used. B. Expanded polystyrene joint filler material: 1. Type: Commercially available polystyrene board, having the following characteristics: a. Minimum flexural strength. ASTM C 203: 35 pounds per square inch. b. Compressive yield strength: Maximum 5 percent compression for pressures between 16 and 40 pounds per square inch. October 2016 03_15_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_00 (FS-100) C. Preformed expansion joint materials: 1. Synthetic sponge rubber expansion joint material: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Tammstech, Inc., Cementone. 2) Burke Concrete Accessories Inc., Neoprene Sponge Rubber Expansion Joint. 2. Preformed bituminous fiber expansion joint material: a. Materials: Asphalt-impregnated fiber board conforming to ASTM D 1751. b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Tammstech, Inc., Hornboard/fiber. 2) Burke Concrete Accessories Inc., Fiber Expansion Joint. 2.03 JOINT SEALANTS A. See Section 07_90_00 for joint sealants and appurtenances. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Construct construction joints, control joints, and expansion joints as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. 3.02 INSTALLATION - WATERSTOPS A. General: 1. Store waterstops to permit free circulation of air around the waterstop material and to prevent direct exposure to sunlight. 2. Install waterstops in concrete joints where indicated on the Drawings. 3. Make waterstops continuous: a. Carry waterstops in walls into lower slabs and join to waterstops in slabs with appropriate fittings of the same material. 4. In water-bearing structures, provide all joints below the normal operating water level with waterstops, whether indicated on the Drawings or not. 5. Set waterstops accurately to position and line as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Hold and securely fix edges in position at intervals of not more than 24 inches so that both waterstops and their edges do not move during placing of concrete. 7. Position the waterstop so that symmetrical halves of the waterstop are equally divided between the concrete pours. The center axis of the waterstop shall be coincident with the centerline of the joint. 8. Do not drive nails, screws, or other fasteners through waterstops in vicinity of construction joints. 9. Use wires at not more than 24 inches on centers near outer edge of the waterstop to tie waterstops into position. a. At the Contractor's option, special clips may be used in lieu of wires. 10. Terminate waterstops 3 inches from top of finish surfaces of walls and slabs unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. 11. When any waterstop is installed in the concrete on one side of a joint, while the other half or portion of the waterstop remains exposed to the atmosphere for more than 2 days, suitable precautions shall be taken to shade and protect October 2016 03_15_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_00 (FS-100) the exposed waterstop from direct rays of sunlight during the entire exposure and until the exposed portion is embedded in concrete. 12. When placing concrete at waterstops in slabs, lift the edge of the waterstop while placing concrete below the waterstop. Manually force the waterstop against and into the concrete. Then cover the waterstop with fresh concrete. B. Waterstops - polyvinyl chloride (PVC): 1. Install waterstops so that joints are watertight. 2. Weld joints using thermostatically controlled equipment recommended by waterstop manufacturer. a. The material shall not be damaged by heat sealing. b. Make joints by overlapping and then simultaneously cutting the ends of the sections to be spliced so they will form a smooth even joint. Heat the cut ends with the splicing tool until the plastic melts. Press the 2 ends together until the plastic cools. c. The continuity of the waterstop ribs and tubular center axis shall be maintained. d. The splices shall have a tensile strength of not less than 60 percent of the un-spliced materials tensile strength. e. Field joints shall be free of misalignment, bubbles, inadequate bond, porosity, cracks, offsets, and other defects which would reduce the potential resistance of the material to water pressure at any point. Replace defective joints. Remove faulty material from the site and disposed of by the Contractor at its own expense. 3. Only butt joints shall be allowed in the field. All crosses, “tees” and “ell” joints shall be factory pre-fabricated by the waterstop manufacturer. a. Butt joints of the ends of 2 identical waterstop sections may be made while the material is in the forms. b. All joints with waterstops involving more than 2 ends to be butt-joined together, and all joints that involve an angle cut, alignment change, or the joining of 2 dissimilar waterstop sections shall be prefabricated by the manufacturer prior to placement in the forms. c. Provide fabrications with strips of waterstop material extending not less than 24 inches beyond the joint. d. After inspection and acceptance, install such prefabricated waterstop joint assemblies in the forms and butt-weld the ends of the 24-inch strips to the straight run portions of waterstop. 4. Split type waterstop will not be permitted except where specifically indicated on the Drawings. C. Waterstop - hypalon sheet: 1. Install in full compliance with manufacturer’s recommended environmental conditions and procedures to provide a water-tight seal in the structure. 2. Schedule manufacturer’s product representative to be on site during initial installations to observe procedures and conditions, and to provide training in preparation and installation of the materials to be installed. 3. After product conditioning and surface preparation procedures are complete and just before placement of epoxy resin adhesive, mask adjacent concrete to protect from staining and placement of adhesive outside the manufacturer’s designated lines. October 2016 03_15_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_00 (FS-100) 4. Place adhesive taking precautions to prevent epoxy resin from entering the joint or crack to be covered. Maintain adhesive thickness and strip width as recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Install Hypalon rubber sealing strip as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Force sealing strip into epoxy adhesive as required to ensure water-tight bond to concrete substrate. 6. Finish bonded edges of sealing strip in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 7. Protect strip as required to maintain flexibility over the crack or joint. 8. Cure installation as recommended by the manufacturer. 9. Upon completion, remove masking. Clean area and leave in a neat and finished condition. 3.03 INSTALLATION – JOINT FILLERS A. General: 1. Place joint fillers as indicated on the Drawings and secure in position before placing adjacent concrete. a. Nailing of joint fillers to adjacent concrete or forming surfaces is not permitted. B. Preformed expansion joint material: 1. Fasten expansion joint strips to concrete, masonry, or forms with adhesive. C. Expanded polystyrene joint filler: 1. Fill holes and joints in filler with caulking to prevent entry of mortar into joint or passage of mortar or concrete from one side of joint to other. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. B. Field tests and inspections: 1. Waterstops – Polyvinyl chloride. a. Field joints. C. Manufacturer services: 1. Furnish manufacturer’s representative to conduct jobsite training for proper storage, handling, and installation of materials for personnel who will perform actual installation. Contractor’s Engineer may attend training sessions. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Waterstop joints: 1) Quality of joints will be subject to acceptance of the Engineer. 2) The following defects that represent a partial list that will be grounds for rejection. a) Offsets at joints greater than 1/16 inch or 15 percent of the material thickness, at any point, whichever is less. October 2016 03_15_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_00 (FS-100) b) Exterior crack at joint, due to incomplete bond, which is deeper than 1/16 inch or 15 percent of the material thickness, at any point, whichever is less. c) Any combination of offset or crack which will result in a net reduction in the cross section of the waterstop in excess of 1/16 inch or 15 percent of the material thickness, at any point, whichever is less. d) Misalignment of the joint, which will result in misalignment of the waterstop in excess of 1/2 inch in 10 feet. e) Porosity in the welded joint as evidenced by visual inspection. f) Bubbles or inadequate bonding. 2. Records of inspections. a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Contractor’s Engineer upon request. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_15_14-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_14 (FS-100) SECTION 03_15_14 HYDROPHILIC RUBBER WATERSTOP PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Hydrophilic rubber waterstop for use in concrete joints. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension. 2. D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 3. D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement. 4. D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit the following items for each type, style, and size of hydrophilic waterstop to be installed. 2. Product data: a. Manufacturer’s product data sheets. 1) Include complete physical dimensions, expansion characteristics, and laboratory test reports indicating that average material properties conform to the requirements specified. 2) Provide data sheets for all materials to be included in the waterstop system. 3. Samples: a. Minimum 6-inch long samples of each type of waterstop to be used if requested by the Contractor’s Engineer. 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions: a. Installation instructions and recommended installation details for the complete waterstop system, and for each component used in that system. October 2016 03_15_14-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_14 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HYDROPHILIC RUBBER WATERSTOP A. General: 1. System composed of flexible hydrophilic urethane polymer with preformed strips, adhesives, paste, fasteners, and other accessories required for a complete and watertight installation. a. To ensure compatibility of materials, a single manufacturer shall provide all products and accessories for the hydrophilic waterstop system. b. Products incorporating bentonite are not acceptable under this Section. c. Provide waterstop and accessories resistant to degradation under cyclic wetting and drying and to chemicals typically found in water treatment structures. B. Hydrophilic strip waterstop: 1. Pre-formed strips of flexible hydrophilic rubber designed to undergo controlled expansion when exposed to moisture. a. Strips manufactured to limit expansion in directions parallel to the plane of the joint, and to direct expansion against confining materials perpendicular to that plane. b. Provide normal or low-expansion pressure as scheduled and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Material conforming to the following performance requirements: Property Test Method Required Result Hardness Hs ASTM D 2240 Not less than 30 + 6 Shore A Durometer Type A.* Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 Not less than 142 pounds per square inch* Elongation ASTM D 412 Not less than 500 percent* Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 1.18 + 0.15 Expansion Coefficient (manufacturer) Not less than 1.9 by volume Water Absorption ASTM D 570 Not more than 0.15 percent after 24 hours * Based on pressed sheet of compound. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Hydrophilic strip: 1) Adeka Ultra Seal USA: MC-2010MN. 2) Greenstreak: Hydrotite CJ1020-2K. b. Low expansion hydrophilic strip: 1) Adeka Ultra Seal USA: KBA-1510FP. 2) Greenstreak: Hydrotite CJ0725-3K C. Hydrophilic paste waterstop: 1. Single-component gun grade paste of hydrophilic rubber designed to undergo controlled expansion when exposed to moisture after initial curing. October 2016 03_15_14-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_14 (FS-100) 2. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal. a. Adeka Ultra Seal USA: P-201. b. Greenstreak: Leakmaster LV-1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommended details. B. Prepare concrete joint surfaces: 1. Use wire brushing or scraping to expose an uncontaminated, solid surface. 2. Clean prepared surface with high-pressure air or water to remove residue and debris. 3. Confirm that prepared surfaces conform to manufacturer’s recommendations for surface profile and moisture conditions before installing materials. C. Provide manufacturer’s recommended lap, splice, and corner details for hydrophilic waterstops. 1. Use hydrophilic paste at all corner joints and overlap splices of hydrophilic strips. D. Hydrophilic strip waterstop: 1. Install primers and adhesives when recommended by the manufacturer before setting hydrophilic strips. 2. Keep hydrophilic strip taut during the fastening process. 3. Secure hydrophilic strip in place with concrete nails, screws, or adhesive. 4. Provide installation with no gap between the hydrophilic strip and the concrete to which it is attached. At rough or irregular surfaces, set hydrophilic strip waterstop strip in a bead of hydrophilic paste. a. Fill all voids and rough areas under the hydrophilic strip with hydrophilic paste. b. Allow hydrophilic paste to cure in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations before encapsulating paste in fresh concrete. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. B. Field tests and inspections: C. Non-conforming Work: D. Manufacturer’s services: 1. Furnish manufacturer’s representative to conduct jobsite training regarding proper storage, handling, and installation of hydrophilic rubber waterstops for personnel who will perform the installation. October 2016 03_15_14-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_15_14 (FS-100) 3.03 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special tests and inspections: As required by Section 01_45_24. B. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Observe construction for conformance with the Contract Documents and accepted submittals. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Contractor’s Engineer upon request. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Concrete construction joints: 1. Joint where hydrophilic strip waterstop is placed under all of the conditions listed below: Hydrophilic strip waterstop set in bed of hydrophilic paste waterstop. Screw strip to concrete substrate. a. Conditions: 1) Slab or wall thickness is greater than 10 inches; and 2) Waterstop is placed between 2 rows of steel reinforcement; and 3) Concrete cover from waterstop to nearest concrete face is at least 4 inches. 2. Joint where hydrophilic waterstop is placed under one of the conditions listed below: Low expansion hydrophilic strip waterstop set in bed of hydrophilic paste waterstop. Screw strip to concrete substrate. a. Conditions: 1) Waterstop is placed on 1 side of a single row of steel reinforcement, or 2) Concrete cover from waterstop to nearest concrete face is less than 4 inches. B. Pipe penetrations through concrete: 1. Pipe diameter less than 4 inches: Not allowed. 2. Pipe diameter of 4 to 24 inches: Continuous bead of hydrophilic paste waterstop, minimum 1/4 inch high by 1/2 inch wide, encircling pipe. 3. Pipe diameter greater than 24 inches: Continuous hydrophilic strip waterstop around perimeter of pipe, with hydrophilic paste seal at lapped ends of strip. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_20_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) SECTION 03_20_00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Bar supports. 2. Concrete reinforcing. 3. Thread bars. 4. Tie wires. 5. Mechanical reinforcing bar couplers and terminators. 6. Welded wire fabric. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 2. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 3. 350 - Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. A 143 - Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. 4. A 185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. 5. A 493 - Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel for Cold Heading and Cold Forging Bar Process. 6. A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. A 706 - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 8. A 767 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. October 2016 03_20_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) E. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 1. Manual of Standard Practice. F. International Code Council (ICC): 1. Evaluation Service (ES) Reports. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural concrete: Concrete surfaces that will be exposed to view in the finished work. 1. For purposes of this Section, includes concrete surfaces that are specified to receive paints or coatings. 2. Exposed concrete in open basins, channels, and similar liquid containing structures: Surfaces shall be considered exposed to view if located above a line 2 feet below the normal operating water surface elevation in that structure. B. Bars: Reinforcing bars as specified herein. C. Give away bars: Reinforcing bars that are not required by the Contract Documents, but are installed by the Contractor to provide support for the required reinforcing bars. D. Wire supports: Includes metal reinforcing supports constructed of steel wire as specified including individual high chairs, continuous high chairs, bolsters, and other similar configurations and shapes. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Drawings contain notes describing the size and spacing of reinforcing and its placement, details of reinforcing at wall corners and intersections, details of extra reinforcing around openings in concrete, and other related information. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: 1. Precast concrete bar supports: Manufacturer’s product data indicating compression strength of concrete and confirming dimensions and thickness(es)/height(s) to be provided for each location where used. 2. Reinforcing bar couplers: Manufacturer’s product data indicating type or size identification, and bar size(s) and grade(s) for which the coupler is suitable. Include installation and testing instructions. 3. Reinforcing bar terminators: Manufacturer’s product data indicating type or size identification, and bar size(s) and grade(s) for which the terminator is suitable. Include installation and testing instructions. B. Shop drawings: 1. Reinforcing shop drawings: a. Review of reinforcing shop drawings by the Engineer will be limited to general compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Reinforcing: a. Submit drawings showing bending and placement of reinforcing required by the Contract Documents. b. Shop drawings shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 315. October 2016 03_20_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) c. Clearly indicate structures or portions of structure covered by each submittal. d. Use the same reinforcing bar identification marks for placement drawings. bending details, and shipping tags. e. Submittals consisting solely of reinforcing bar schedules, without accompanying placement drawings, will not be accepted unless allowed under prior written agreement with the Engineer. f. Placement drawings: 1) Clearly show placement of each bar listed in the bill of materials. Include additional reinforcing at corners and openings, and other reinforcing required by details in the Contract Documents. 2) For locations with reinforced masonry walls above concrete and dowels from the concrete into the wall, show dowels at required locations on the shop drawings. 3) Clearly identify locations of reinforcing with coatings (e.g., galvanized or epoxy) or with yield strength other than ASTM A 615 Grade 60. 4) Show splice locations. 5) Indicate locations and types of mechanical reinforcing couplers, if used. 6) Show locations and types of reinforcing bar terminators, if used. g. Fabrication drawings: 1) If bend types or nomenclature differs from that recommended in the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, provide details showing bend types and dimensional designations. 2) Clearly identify reinforcing with coatings (e.g., galvanized or epoxy) or with yield strength other than ASTM A 615 Grade 60. C. Samples: 1. Bar supports/wire reinforcing supports: Samples of each type of chair and bolster proposed for use. Submit with letter stating where each type will be used. 2. Precast concrete bar supports: Samples of each type of precast support proposed for use. Submit with letter stating where each will be used. D. Test reports: 1. Certified copy of mill test for each steel used. Show physical properties and chemical analysis. a. Mill test reports may be submitted as record documents at the time reinforcing fabricated from that heat of steel is shipped to the site. In such cased, submit certificates under the shop drawing submittal number with the letter R appended to the end. (e.g., If the reinforcing was delivered as submittal “03_20_00-002-1”, the mill certificate would be delivered as submittal “03_20_00-002-R.”) 2. Reinforcing bar couplers: a. ICC ES approval report and test data confirming that couplers provide specified tension and compression strength and conform to specified limits on total slip within the splice sleeve. b. Certified copy of mill tests for heat(s) of steel incorporated in the materials shipped. October 2016 03_20_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) 3. Reinforcing bar terminators: a. ICC ES approval report and test data confirming that terminators provide specified tension strength. b. Certified copy of mill tests for heat(s) of steel incorporated in the materials shipped. E. Manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Reinforcing bar couplers: a. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. b. Manufacturer’s instructions for confirmation testing of couplers when bars are inserted in the field. 2. Reinforcing bar terminators: a. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. b. Manufacturer’s instructions for confirmation testing of terminators installed in the field. F. Procedures: 1. Welding procedures conforming to AWS D1.4 for reinforcing designated to be field welded. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and shipping: 1. Deliver bars bundled and tagged with identifying tags. B. Acceptance at site: 1. Reinforcing bars: Deliver reinforcing bars lacking rolled-in grade identification marks accompanied by manufacturer's guarantee of grade. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Bar supports: Do not place concrete until samples and product data for bar supports have been accepted by the Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing bars: 1. Provide reinforcing of the grades and quality specified, free from excessive rust or scale, and free from any unintended bends or other defects affecting its usefulness. 2. Reinforcing bars to be embedded in concrete. a. ASTM A 615 Grade 60 deformed bars, except as specified in the following paragraphs. 1) Actual yield strength based on mill tests of reinforcing provided shall not exceed the minimum yield strength specified in this Section by more than 18,000 pounds per square inch. 2) Ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to the actual tensile yield strength of the reinforcing shall not be less than 1.25. October 2016 03_20_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) 3. Reinforcing bars that are designated or required to be welded: a. Low alloy ASTM A 706 Grade 60 deformed bars. b. Alternate: ASTM A 615 Grade 60 reinforcing may be used in lieu of ASTM A 706 Grade 60 if the following requirements are satisfied: 1) The specific location for the proposed substitution is acceptable to the Engineer. 2) Acceptable welding procedures conforming to AWS D1.4 are submitted to the Engineer. 4. Thread bars: a. Reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM A 615 Grade 75 unless otherwise noted, and having continuous rolled-in pattern of thread-like deformations along entire length. 1) Substitution of shop-cut threads on regular reinforcing bars for thread bars is not permitted. b. Thread bar hardware, including nuts (hex and jamb),couplers, and washers (flat, spherical and beveled): 1) Provided by same manufacturer as the bars. 2) Capable of developing at least 125 percent of the yield strength of bar. c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) DYWIDAG-Systems International (DSI), DYWIDAG Threadbar, hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. 2) Williams Form Engineering Corporation, Grade 75 All-Thread Rebar, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153, minimum 3 mils coating thickness. B. Bar supports: 1. Wire supports: a. All stainless steel bar supports: 1) Conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice recommendations for types and details, but custom fabricated entirely from stainless steel wire conforming to ASTM A 493, AISI Type 316. b. Stainless steel protected bar supports: 1) Conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Class 2, Type A. a) Bright basic wire support fabricated from cold-drawn carbon steel wire with welded-on legs fabricated from stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 493, AISI Type 304. c. Bright basic wire bar supports: Conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Class 3. 2. Deformed steel reinforcing bar supports: a. As specified for reinforcing embedded in concrete, and bent to proper dimensions. 3. Precast concrete bar supports (“dobies”): a. Precast concrete blocks with cast -in annealed steel tie wires of 16 gage or heavier. b. Compression strength of concrete blocks: Equal to or exceeding the compression strength of the surrounding concrete unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. c. Block dimensions: Height to provide required concrete cover. Footprint dimensions not less than 3 inches by 3 inches (unless otherwise accepted by Engineer) and adequate to maintain proper cover while supporting weight of the reinforcing without settlement into the supporting surface. October 2016 03_20_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) C. Tie wires: 1. All concrete: Annealed steel. D. Welded wire fabric reinforcing: 1. In accordance with ASTM A 185 provided as flat sheets. Rolled wire fabric is not permitted. 2. Fabric may be used in place of reinforcing bars if accepted by the Engineer. a. Provide welded wire fabric having cross-sectional area per linear foot not less than the cross-sectional area per linear foot of reinforcing bars indicated on the Drawings. E. Mechanical reinforcing bar couplers and terminators: 1. Sleeve-threaded or sleeve-swaged type mechanical butt splice couplers and mechanically-attached terminators conforming to the requirements of ACI 318 and the following. 2. Sleeve-threaded type: Provide steel splice sleeve with tapered interior threads joining matching threads on the reinforcing bars. a. Provide unit with thread taper designed to avoid cross-threading of bars during assembly. b. Mark each sleeve with the heat treatment lot number. 3. Sleeve-swaged type: Provide seamless steel sleeve applied over the end of the reinforcing bars and swaged to the bars by means of a hydraulic press. 4. Strength and deformation characteristics: a. Only units holding a current ICC ES test report approval and documenting the following strength characteristics will be allowed for use: b. For mechanical couplers and terminators: Units capable of developing a tension strength not lower than the lesser of the following: 1) 160 percent of the ASTM-specified minimum yield strength of the reinforcing being spliced or terminated. 2) 95 percent of the ASTM-specified minimum ultimate strength of the reinforcing being spliced or terminated. c. For mechanical couplers, total slip of the reinforcing bars within the splice sleeve limited as follows: 1) For bar sizes #14 and smaller, elongation between gage points measured clear of the splice sleeve not exceeding 0.010 inches after coupler has been loaded to a tension of 30,000 pounds per square inch and load relaxed to a tension of 3,000 pounds per square inch. 5. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal: a. Reinforcing bar couplers: 1) ERICO, Inc: Lenton Mechanical Rebar Splicing System. 2) Dayton/Richmond: Dowel Bar Splicer System. b. Reinforcing bar terminators: 1) ERICO, Inc.: Lenton Terminator. 2) Dayton/Richmond: End Anchorage System. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop assembly: 1. Cut and bend bars in accordance with provisions of ACI 315, ACI 318, and ACI 350. 2. Bend bars cold and using recommended collars to develop recommended bend radius. October 2016 03_20_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) 3. Provide bars free from defects and kinks and from bends not indicated on the Drawings. 4. Bars to be fitted with mechanical couplers or terminators shall have ends cut square. B. Roll circumferential reinforcing to the radius required for its position in the structure before installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: 1. Reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric: a. Verify that reinforcing is new stock, free from rust scale, loose mill scale, excessive rust, dirt, oil, and other coatings that adversely affect bonding capacity when placed in the work. 2. Welded wire fabric: a. Verify that sheets are not curled, or kinked before or after installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface preparation: 1. Reinforcing bars: Thin coating of red rust resulting from short exposure will not be considered objectionable. Thoroughly clean any bars having rust scale, loose mill scale, or thick rust coat. 2. Partially embedded reinforcing: Clean to remove concrete or other deleterious coatings from dowels and other projecting bars by wire brushing or sandblasting before bars are embedded in subsequent concrete placements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Field bending and welding: 1. No field bending of bars will be allowed. 2. Welding: a. Weld reinforcing bars only where indicated on the Drawings or where prior acceptance is received from the Engineer AWS D1.4. b. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4 and welding procedures accepted by the Engineer. 1) Submit welding procedures. 2) Conform to requirements for minimum preheat and interpass temperatures. c. Do not tack-weld reinforcing bars. B. Placing reinforcing: 1. Accurately place reinforcing to meet position and cover requirements indicated on the Drawings and as follows: a. Tolerances for placement and minimum concrete cover: As listed in the following table. October 2016 03_20_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) Member Tolerance on Reinforcement Location Tolerance on Minimum Concrete Cover (2) Slabs, beams, walls, and columns except as noted below: 10 inches thick and less: + 3/8 inch - 3/8 inch More than 10 inches thick: + 1/2 inch - 1/2 inch Formed soffits: As noted above - 1/4 inch Longitudinal location of bends and ends of reinforcement: Conditions except as listed below: + 2 inches -1/2 inch At discontinuous ends of brackets and corbels: + 1/2 inch -1/4 inch At discontinuous ends of other members: + 1 inch -1/2 inch Notes: (1) + indicates “plus or minus”. – indicates “minus”. + indicates “plus”. (2) Tolerance on cover limited as noted, but decrease in cover shall not exceed one third of the minimum cover specified on the Drawings. b. Minimum clear spacing between bars in a layer: 1) As noted on the Drawings, but not less than the larger of 1.5 times the bar diameter or 1-1/2 inches. c. Minimum clear spacing between bars in 2 or more parallel layers: 1) Place bars in the upper layers directly above bars in the lower layers. 2) Minimum spacing between layers: As noted on the Drawings, but not less than the larger of 1.5 times the bar diameter or 1-1/2 inches. d. Limits on minimum clear spacing between bars shall also apply to the clear spacing between lap splices and adjacent splices or bars. C. Adequately secure reinforcing in position. D. Bar supports: 1. Provide in sufficient numbers, sizes, and locations to prevent sagging or shifting and to support loads during construction without vertical displacement and without gouging or indentation of the forming below the support. Quantities and locations shall not be less than indicated in ACI 315. 2. Do not use brick, broken concrete masonry units, concrete spalls, rocks, wood or similar materials for supporting reinforcing steel. 3. Do not use “give away bars” that have less cover than that required by the Contract Documents. Do not adjust the location of reinforcing required by the Contract Documents to provide cover for “give away bars.” 4. Provide bar supports of height to maintain the designated clear concrete cover. 5. Provide bar supports at formed vertical faces to maintain designated clear concrete cover. October 2016 03_20_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) 6. Schedule of bar support materials: a. Support against soil for concrete placed over earth and concrete seal slabs (“mud mats”): Precast concrete bar supports. 1) Use only below bottom mat of reinforcing. Precast supports may not extend through the concrete to support reinforcement above the bottom mat. b. Support for reinforcement in concrete placed against forms and exposed to earth, weather, or liquid in the finished work, unless otherwise noted: Stainless steel protected bar supports. 1) Ozone contactors: Support for reinforcement where those supports rest against forms for surfaces that will be exposed to ozonated water or ozone gas in the head-space of the finished work: All stainless steel bar supports. c. Support for reinforcement in concrete placed against forms and not exposed to earth, weather, or liquid in the finished work: “Stainless steel protected bar supports.” d. Support for reinforcement that is fully embedded between the mats of reinforcing for a concrete member: “Bright basic wire bar supports”, or “deformed steel reinforcing bar supports.” E. Tying of reinforcing: 1. Fasten reinforcing securely in place with wire ties. 2. Tie bars sufficiently often to prevent shifting. 3. Provide at least 3 ties in each bar length. a. Do not apply this requirement to dowel lap splices or to bars shorter than 4 feet, unless necessary for rigidity. 4. Tie slab reinforcing at every intersection around the perimeter of slabs. 5. Tie wall reinforcing, and slab reinforcing intersections at locations other than around the perimeter, at not less than every fourth intersection, and at spacings not greater than the following: Bar Size Slab Bars Spacing Inches Wall Bars Spacing Inches Bars Number 5 and Smaller 60 48 Bars Number 6 through Number 9 96 60 Bars Number 10 and Number 11 120 96 6. After tying: a. Bend ends of wire ties inward toward the center of the concrete section. Cover for wire ties shall be the same as the cover requirements for reinforcing bars. b. Remove all tie wire clippings from inside forms before placing concrete. F. Lap splices of reinforcing bars: 1. Lap bars at splices as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Unless specifically otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install bars at lap splices in contact with each other. Fasten lapped bars together with tie wire. 3. Where bars are to be lap spliced at concrete joints, ensure that bars project from the first concrete placement a distance at least equal to the lap splice length indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 03_20_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) G. Reinforcing bar mechanical couplers and terminators: 1. Install only at locations shown on the Drawings, or where prior written approval has been obtained from the Engineer. 2. Make splices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. a. Provide manufacturer’s standard equipment, jigs, clamps, and accessories as required. b. Tighten splices as recommended by the manufacturer. Minimum tightening torque shall not be less than 200 foot-pounds for all bar sizes. 3. Provide clear cover over couplers and terminators as indicated on the Drawings. a. Modifications to provide concrete cover, such as addition of concrete or repositioning of reinforcing may be completed only after prior written approval by the Engineer. b. If cover is less than required, contact Engineer for evaluation of conditions before placing concrete. H. Welded wire fabric reinforcing: 1. Install necessary wiring, spacing chairs, or supports to keep welded wire fabric in designated position in the member while concrete is being placed. a. Do not allow wire fabric to drape between supports unless such configuration is specifically required by the Drawings. 2. Bend fabric where indicated on the Drawings to fit work. 3. Straighten fabric to make perfectly flat sheet before placing in the Work. 4. Lap splice welded wire fabric as indicated on the Drawings. a. If lap splice length is not indicated on the Drawings, splice fabric in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. B. Field tests and inspections: C. Non-conforming Work: D. Manufacturer’s services: 1. Furnish manufacturer’s representative to conduct jobsite training regarding proper storage, handling, and installation of mechanical reinforcing bar couplers and terminators for personnel who will perform the installation. Engineer may attend training sessions. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special tests and inspections: As required by Section 01_45_24. B. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted submittals. b. Mechanical reinforcing bar couplers and terminators: 1) Provide special inspections and testing as required by the ICC-ES Report for each product installed. October 2016 03_20_00-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_20_00 (FS-100) 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_21_17-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_21_17 (FS-100) SECTION 03_21_17 ADHESIVE-BONDED REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Bonding reinforcing bars and all thread rods in concrete using adhesives as specified. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Requirements. 3. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 4. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 5. Section 03_20_00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 6. Section 05_12_00 - Structural Steel. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Standard B212.15 - Carbide Tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for Carbide Tipped Masonry Drills. B. ASTM international (ASTM): 1. C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. C. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): 1. AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. Surface Preparation Standards (SP). a. SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish technical data for adhesives, including: 1. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions (MPII). 2. Independent laboratory test results. 3. Handling and storage instructions. B. Quality control submittals: 1. Adhesive manufacturer's past project experience data on at least 3 similar projects supplied with proposed products within the last 3 years. 2. Special inspection: Provide detailed step-by-step instructions for the special inspection procedure in accordance with the building code as specified in Section 01_41_00. October 2016 03_21_17-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_21_17 (FS-100) 3. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc., Evaluation Services Report in compliance with the AC308-Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. 4. Installer qualifications: Submit evidence of successful completion of certification program for each installer of work described in this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer qualifications: a. All individuals performing the work described in this Section shall be certified by a qualified organization to install adhesive anchors by following the MPII. Those organizations deemed to be qualified are: 1) ACI-CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification Program. 2) An adhesive anchor manufacturer’s certification program, subject to acceptance by the Engineer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and protection: 1. Store adhesives and adhesive components on pallets or shelving in a covered- storage area. 2. Control temperature above 60 degrees Fahrenheit and dispose of product if shelf life has expired. 3. If stored at temperatures below 60 degrees Fahrenheit, test components prior to use to determine if they still meet specified requirements. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Seismic design category: In accordance with Section 01_81_02. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Like items of materials: Use end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve structural compatibility and singular responsibility. 2.02 ADHESIVE FOR SELF-CONTAINED CARTRIDGE SYSTEM A. Adhesive shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service report documenting acceptance under AC308 for use with cracked concrete and for the seismic design categories specified. B. Materials: 1. In accordance with ASTM C881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B or C depending on site conditions. 2. 2-component, 100 percent solids, insensitive to moisture. 3. Cure temperature, pot life, and workability: Compatible with intended use and environmental conditions. October 2016 03_21_17-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_21_17 (FS-100) C. Packaging: 1. Furnished in side-by-side cartridges with resin and hardener components isolated until mixing through manufacturer’s static mixing nozzle. Nozzle designed to thoroughly blend the components for injection from the nozzle directly into prepared hole. 2. Container markings: Include manufacturer's name, product name, batch number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions. D. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK: RE 500-SD. 2. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc., Pleasanton, CA: SET-XP. 2.03 ALL THREAD RODS A. Materials: As specified in Section 05_12_00. 2.04 REINFORCING BARS A. As specified in Section 03_20_00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Execution of this work is restricted to those installers certified through a qualified certification program described under Quality Assurance and accepted by the Engineer. B. The work shall be performed in strict accordance with the accepted MPII and the following instructions. Where the accepted MPII and the following instructions conflict, the MPII shall prevail. C. Provide adhesive packaged as follows: 1. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing multiple adhesive components in the proper mixing ratio, and fit into a manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun. 2. Dispense components through a mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes components. 3.02 HOLE SIZING AND INSTALLATION A. Drilling holes: 1. Determine location of reinforcing bars or other obstructions with a non-destructive indicator device, and mark locations with construction crayon on the surface of the concrete. 2. Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or other items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by Engineer. October 2016 03_21_17-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_21_17 (FS-100) B. Hole drilling equipment: 1. Electric or pneumatic rotary impact type with medium or light impact. 2. Drill bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15 unless required as a “condition of use” in the ICC Evaluation Report submitted. 3. Hollow drill bits with flushing air systems are preferred. Air supplied to hollow drill bits shall be free of oil, water, or other contaminants that will reduce bond. 4. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact equipment to prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during drilling process. C. Hole diameter: Reinforcing bar diameter or all thread rod diameter plus 1/8 inch. D. Obstructions in drill path: 1. If an existing reinforcing bar or other obstruction is hit while drilling hole, stop drilling hole and fill the hole with drypack mortar. Relocate the hole to miss the obstruction and drill another hole. Repeat the above until the hole has been drilled to the required depth. 2. Avoid drilling an excessive number of holes in an area of a structural member, which would excessively weaken the structural member and endanger the stability of the structure. Drypack holes which hit obstructions and allow drypack to reach strength equal to the existing concrete before drilling adjacent holes. Epoxy grout may be substituted for drypack when acceptable to Engineer. 3. When existing reinforcing steel is encountered during drilling and when acceptable to Engineer, enlarge the hole by 1/8 inch, core through the existing reinforcing steel at the larger diameter, and resume drilling at original hole diameter. 4. Bent bar reinforcing bars: Where edge distances are critical, and striking reinforcing steel is likely, and if acceptable to Engineer, drill hole at 10 degree angle or less from axis of reinforcing bar or all thread rod being installed. E. Install reinforcing bars and all thread rods to depth, spacings, and locations as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Do not install adhesive-bonded all-thread rods or reinforcing bars in overhead applications. F. Cleaning holes: 1. Insert long air nozzle into hole and blow out loose dust. Use compressed air that is free of oil, water, or other contaminants that will reduce bond. 2. Use a stiff bristle brush to vigorously brush hole to dislodge compacted drilling dust. 3. Repeat step 1. 4. Repeat above steps as required to remove drilling dust or other material that will reduce bond. The hole shall be clean and dry. G. Cleaning reinforcing bars and all thread rods: 1. Clean reinforcing bars and all thread rods over embedment length to bare metal, free of oil, grease, paint, dirt, mill scale, rust, or other coatings that will reduce bond. 2. Solvent clean reinforcing bar and all thread rods over the embedment length in accordance with SSPC SP-1 Solvent Cleaning. Provide an oil and grease free surface to promote bonding of adhesive to steel. October 2016 03_21_17-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_21_17 (FS-100) H. Filling hole with adhesive: 1. Fill hole with adhesive before inserting the reinforcing bar or all thread rod. Fill hole with adhesive starting from bottom of hole. Fill hole without creating air voids. 2. Fill hole with sufficient adhesive so that excess adhesive is extruded out of the hole when the reinforcing bar or all thread rod is inserted into the hole. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Do not permit Work described in this Section to be performed by individuals who do not hold the specified certifications and who have not completed the specified job site training. C. Field inspections and testing: 1. Results: Submit records of inspections and testing to Engineer by electronic copies within 24 hours after completion. D. Manufacturer's services: 1. Before beginning installation, furnish adhesive manufacturer's technical representative to conduct on-site training in proper storage and handling of adhesive, drilling and cleaning of holes, and preparation and installation of reinforcing bars and all thread rods. a. Provide notice of scheduled training to Engineer and Owner's Special Inspector(s) not less than 10 working days before training occurs. Engineer and Special Inspector(s) may attend training sessions. 2. Submit record, signed by the manufacturer's technical representative, listing Contractor's personnel who completed the training. Only qualified personnel who have completed manufacturer's on-site training shall perform installations. 3. Do not install holes or adhesive until training is complete. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Special inspections, special tests, and structural observations. 1. Provide as specified in Section 01_45_24. 2. Frequency of inspections: a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in this Section, provide periodic special inspection as required by the Evaluation Report for the product installed. b. Provide continuous inspection for the initial installation of each type and size of adhesive anchor. Subsequent installations of the same anchor may be installed with periodic inspection as defined in subsequent paragraphs of this Section. 3. Preparation: a. Review Drawings and Specifications for the Work to be observed. b. Review adhesive manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. c. Review Evaluation Report for "Conditions of Use" and "Special Inspection" requirements. October 2016 03_21_17-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_21_17 (FS-100) 4. Inspection: a. Initial inspection. Provide an initial inspection for each combination of concrete and reinforcing bar or all thread rod being installed. During initial inspection, observe the following for compliance with installation requirements. 1) Concrete: Class and thickness. 2) Environment: Temperature and moisture conditions of concrete and work area. 3) Holes: Locations, spacing, edge distances; verification of drill bit compliance with requirements; cleaning equipment and procedures; cleanliness of hole. Before adhesive is placed, confirm that depth and preparation of holes conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents, installation recommendations of the manufacturer, and "conditions of use" listed in the Evaluation Report. 4) Adhesive: Product manufacturer and name; lot number and expiration date; temperature of product at installation; installation procedures. Note initial set times observed during installation. 5) Reinforcing bars and all thread rods: Material diameter and length; steel grade and/or strength; cleaning and preparation; cleanliness at insertion; minimum effective embedment provided. b. Subsequent inspections. Subsequent installations of the same reinforcing bars or all thread rods using the same adhesive may be performed without the presence of the special inspector, provided that: 1) There is no change in the personnel performing the installation, the general strength and characteristics of the concrete receiving the inserts, or the reinforcing bars and all thread rods being used. Changes in any of these items shall require a new initial inspection. 2) For ongoing installations over a period of time, the special inspector visits the site at least once per day during each day of installation to observe the work for compliance with material requirements and installation procedures. 5. Records of inspections. a. Provide a written record of each inspection using forms acceptable to the Engineer and to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. b. Submit electronic copies of inspections reports to Engineer within 24 hours after completion of inspection. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_30_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) SECTION 03_30_00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Cast-in-place concrete. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_31_19 - Project Meetings. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 3. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 4. Section 03_11_07 - Concrete Formwork. 5. Section 03_15_00 - Concrete Accessories. 6. Section 03_20_00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 7. Section 03_35_29 - Concrete Finishes. 8. Section 03_60_00 - Grouting. 9. Section 03_63_01 - Epoxies. 10. Section 03_63_02 - Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Bonding Agent. 11. Section 03_64_24 - Epoxy Injection System. 12. Section 03_64_25 - Hydrophilic Foam Polyurethane Resin Injection System. 13. Section 07_90_00 - Joint Sealants. 14. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 2. 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. 3. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 4. 350 - Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. 5. Manual of Concrete Practice. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 31 -Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. C 40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. 5. C 42 - Standard Test Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 6. C 88 - Standard Test Method of Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. 7. C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 8. C 114 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement. October 2016 03_30_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 9. C 117 - Standard Test Method for Materials Finer that 75-m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. 10. C 123 - Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate. 11. C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 12. C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 13. C 138 - Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 14. C 142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregate. 15. C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 16. C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 17. C 156 - Standard Test Method for Water Loss [from a Mortar Specimen] Through Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete. 18. C 157 - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic- Cement Mortar and Concrete. 19. C 171 - Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 20. C 172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 21. C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 22. C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 23. C 289 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method). 24. C 295 - Standard Guide to Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete. 25. C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 26. C 311 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete. 27. C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 28. C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 29. C 1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 30. C 1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete. 31. C 1611 - Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete. 32. D 75 - Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. 33. D 2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting. 34. D 4791 - Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate. C. National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA). D. NSF International (NSF) / American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. NSF / ANSI 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. October 2016 03_30_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Alkali: The sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as sodium oxide. B. Architectural concrete: Concrete surfaces that will be exposed to view in the finished work. 1. For purposes of this Section, includes only those surfaces that receive paint or coatings. 2. Exterior concrete surfaces with portions above and below grade: Surface will be considered exposed to view of located above the grade line as defined in Section 03_35_29. C. Average daily temperature: Calculated by summing hourly measurements of air temperature in the shade at the face of the concrete, and dividing that sum by 24. In calculating the sum of the temperatures recorded. D. Cementitious materials: Includes all portland cement and pozzolan admixture(s). E. Class of concrete: Refers to a mix with characteristics, proportions, and constituents (including a specific combination of admixtures) as specified herein. 1. Any change in the source or characteristics of constituent materials, in the proportions of materials, or in the admixtures included in a mix shall be considered as creating a new and separate class of concrete. F. Cold weather concreting: Operations for placing, finishing, curing, and protecting concrete during cold weather. G. Green concrete: Concrete that has not achieved 100 percent of its minimum specified compressive strength, f’c. H. Hairline crack: Crack with a crack width of less than 4 thousandths of an inch (.004 inch) I. Hot weather. Any combination of ambient temperature, concrete temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and solar radiation intensity that creates conditions that will evaporate water from a free concrete surface at a rate equal to or greater than 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour as determined by the Menzel Formula and nomograph published in ACI 305 and included as Attachment A to this Section. J. Hot weather concreting: Operations for placing, finishing, curing, and protecting concrete during hot weather. K. Mass concrete: Concrete with a thickness of 36 inches or more. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance requirements: 1. General: a. Except as otherwise specified, provide concrete composed of portland cement, fly ash, fine, intermediate, and coarse aggregates, admixtures and water so proportioned and mixed as to produce plastic, workable mixture in accordance with requirements as specified in this Section and suitable to specific conditions of placement. October 2016 03_30_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) b. Proportion materials in a manner that will secure lowest water-cementious materials ratio that is consistent with good workability, and that provides a plastic and cohesive mixture, that is within the specified slump range. c. Proportion fine, intermediate, and coarse aggregates in manner such as not to produce harshness in placing or honeycombing in the Work placed. d. The mix shall be proportioned to maximize the aggregate content of the mix and minimize the cement content to produce a mixture adequate to meet the strength requirements of this specification while minimizing volumetric changes during curing. 2. It is the intent of this Section to secure for every part of the Work concrete of homogeneous mixture, that, when hardened, will have required strength, watertightness, and durability. a. It is recognized that some surface hairline cracks and crazing will develop in the concrete surfaces. b. Construction, control, and expansion joints have been positioned in structures as indicated on the Drawings, and curing methods have been specified to reduce number and size of these expected cracks resulting from normal expansion and contraction expected from the concrete mixes specified. c. Remove and replace, or repair as specified in Part III, non-conforming work and surfaces with cracks, voids and honeycombs, or surface wetness. 3. Workmanship and methods: Provide concrete work, including detailing of reinforcing, conforming with best standard practices and as set forth in ACI 318, ACI 350, and ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. All concrete data concerning concrete supplied to the site shall be coordinated through a single supplier. 2. Engineer has assumed a maximum of two mix designs for each class of concrete. B. Product data: 1. Submit data completely describing products. All data shall be submitted at one time. 2. Cement mill tests: Include alkali content representative of each shipment of cement for verification of compliance with specified requirements. 3. Pozzolans: a. Fly ash: Identify source and certify compliance with requirements of ASTM C 618 and this Section. 4. Admixtures: Manufacturer’s catalog cuts and product data indicating compliance with standards specified. a. If air entraining admixture requires test method other than ASTM C 173 to accurately determine air content, make special note of requirements in submittal. 5. Curing compound: Submit complete data on proposed compound. October 2016 03_30_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) C. Design data: 1. Concrete mix designs: a. Submit full details, including mix design calculations for concrete mixes proposed for use for each class of concrete. b. Include information on correction of batching for varying moisture contents of fine aggregate. c. Submit source quality test records with mix design submittal. d. Provide calculations demonstrating that the mixes proposed provide the required average compression strength of concrete (f'cr) based on source quality test records. D. Test reports: 1. Aggregates - General: a. Submit certified copies of commercial laboratory tests not more than 6 months old for samples of each aggregate proposed for use in concrete. b. Sieve analysis: Submit sieve analyses of fine, intermediate, and coarse aggregates being at any time there is significant change in grading of materials. c. Submit sieve analysis of combined gradation of the proposed mix for the following with the following sieve sizes: 1.5", 1", 3/4", 1/2", 3/8", #4, #8, #16, #30, #50, #100, #200. 1) Percent cumulative passing. 2) Percent cumulative retained. 3) Percent individual retained. 2. Aggregates - Fine: 1) Sieve analysis. 2) Clay lumps. 3) Reactivity. 4) Shale and chert. 5) Soundness. 6) Color. 7) Decantation. 3. Aggregates - Intermediate: 1) Sieve analysis. 2) Clay lumps and friable particles. 3) Reactivity. 4) Shale and chert. 5) Soundness. 6) Abrasion loss. 7) Coal and lignite. 8) Materials finer than 200 sieve. 4. Aggregates - Coarse: 1) Sieve analysis. 2) Clay lumps and friable particles. 3) Reactivity. 4) Shale and chert. 5) Soundness. 6) Abrasion loss. 7) Coal and lignite. 8) Materials finer than 200 sieve. October 2016 03_30_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 5. Cement: a. Mill tests, including alkali content, for each shipment of cement included in the Work. 6. Concrete mixes – Trial batches: a. Drying shrinkage test data. b. Submit data for each test cylinder. c. Submit data that identifies mix and slump for each test cylinder. d. If there is any change in suppliers or in quality of concrete mix constituents, submit new test data. E. Certificates: 1. NRMCA certification for all plants and trucks that will be used to supply concrete. F. Source quality control submittals: 1. Truck batch tickets for each load of concrete delivered to the site, whether accepted or rejected. G. Field quality control submittals: 1. Contractor’s notifications of readiness for concrete placement. 2. Contractor’s reports of field quality control testing. a. Include with each report the concrete batch ticket number and identification numbers for associated cylinders used for compressive strength testing. b. Testing results for slump, temperature, unit weight, and air entrainment. c. Testing results for compressive strength at 7 and 28 days, and for any compressive strength tests after 28 days. d. Note on batch ticket the maximum amount of water that was withheld and can be added on site as “Max add water.” Record on the batch ticket any water actually added at site. e. Note on the batch ticket the concrete mix classification as defined in Table A. H. Special procedure submittals: 1. Sequence of concrete placing: a. Submit proposed sequence of placing concrete showing proposed beginning and ending of individual placements. Submittal shall include plans sections and details to address all pours. 2. Cold weather concreting plan. 3. Hot weather concreting plan. 4. Repair of defective concrete: Submit mix design for repair materials to be used. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-installation meetings: 1. Schedule and conduct pre-installation meeting at least 10 days prior to batching and placing of concrete. a. Provide additional meetings if necessary to discuss specific concrete submittals, mixes, or placing and curing conditions. b. Notify Engineer of location and time of each conference. October 2016 03_30_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 2. Required attendees: a. Contractor including Contractor’s superintendent and key personnel. b. Subcontractor(s) providing pumping, placing, finishing, and curing. c. Ready-mix producer. d. Technical representative(s) of supplier(s) of concrete admixtures. e. Sampling and testing personnel. f. On-site inspectors representing Engineer. g. Engineer. h. Other persons deemed by the Construction Manager and the Contractor to be critical to the quality and efficiency of the Work. 3. Agenda: a. Review of requirements of Drawings and Specifications. b. Project and product safety requirements. c. Discussion of points of interface and coordination between various trades or products to be used in the Work. d. Contractor’s schedule for cast-in-place concrete work. e. Mix designs, mix tests, and submittals. f. Admixture types, dosing, performance, requirements for monitoring, and limits on dosing or re-dosing at the site. g. Placement and consolidation methods, techniques, and equipment and the effects of those methods on form pressures. h. Slump and limits on placing time or conditions to maintain placeability. i. Procedures for finishing, curing, and retention of moisture during these operations. j. Procedures and protection for hot and cold weather conditions. k. Requirements and coordination for inspections. l. Other Specification requirements requiring coordination between parties to the work. 4. Prepare and submit minutes of the pre-installation meeting as specified in Section 01_31_19. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and shipping: 1. Deliver, store, and handle concrete materials in manner that prevents damage and inclusion of foreign substances. 2. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for use. 3. Deliver aggregate to mixing site and handle in such manner that variations in moisture content will not interfere with steady production of concrete of specified degree of uniformity and slump. B. Acceptance at site: 1. Reject material containers or materials showing evidence of water or other damage. 2. Concrete mixes: Do not accept or incorporate into the Work concrete mixes that do not comply with specified requirements for water content, slump, temperature, and air content. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold weather concreting: During periods of cold weather as defined in this Section, implement cold weather concreting procedures as specified in Part III. October 2016 03_30_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) B. Hot weather concreting: During periods of hot weather as defined in this Section, implement hot weather concreting procedures as specified in Part III. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule placing of concrete in such manner as to complete all placing operations to from a pre-identified construction, control, or expansion joint to another pre- identified construction, control, or expansion joint. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Water for concrete mixes, for washing aggregate, and for curing concrete. 1. Potable water clean and free from oil and deleterious amounts of alkali, acid, organic matter, or other substances. 2. Chlorides and sulfate ions: a. Water for conventional reinforced concrete: Use water not containing more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion, or more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate ion. b. Water for prestressed or post-tensioned concrete: Use water not containing more than 650 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion, or more than 800 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate ion. 2.02 MATERIALS - CONCRETE MIX CONSTITUENTS A. Portland cement: 1. Conform to ASTM C 150, Type II or Type III. 2. Additional requirements: a. Low-alkali portland cement: Total equivalent alkalies not more than 0.60 percent. 3. Sulfate resistance: Limit tricalcium aluminate (C3A) content to 8 percent maximum. Single source: To provide uniformity of appearance, for each structure use only one source, type, and brand of portland cement for exterior walls and slabs that will be exposed in the finished work. a. Confirm adequate supply of cement over duration of project before making trial batches or beginning concrete placements. 4. Cement for finishing: Provide cement from same source and of same type as concrete to be finished. B. Aggregates: 1. General: a. Provide washed concrete aggregates that are sound, graded as specified, and free of deleterious material in excess of amounts specified. b. Sample aggregate for testing in accordance with ASTM D 75. c. Provide fine, intermediate, and coarse aggregates to produce in-place concrete unit weight as follows: 1) Normal weight concrete: Not less than 140 pounds per cubic foot. 2) Light-weight concrete: (Not used.) October 2016 03_30_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) d. Do not use aggregate made from recycled materials such as crushed and screened hydraulic-cement concrete, brick, and other construction materials. 2. Fine aggregate - normal weight concrete a. Clean natural sand or sand prepared from crushed stone or crushed gravel. b. Conforming to ASTM C 33 requirements for grading, deleterious substances, soundness, and alkali reactivity, except as modified in the following paragraphs. 1) Grading. Within limits specified in ASTM C 33. 2) Deleterious substances: not in excess of following percentages by weight. Table 03_30_00-A: Fine Aggregate, Limits on Impurities Item Test Method Percent (maximum) Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C 142 1 Material finer than 75-µm (No. 200) sieve (dirt, silt, etc removed by decantation) ASTM C 117 3 Coal and lignite ASTM C 123 0.5 Shale or Chert ASTM C 295 1 3) Organic impurities. Free of injurious amounts of organic matter, and producing a supernatant liquid with color not darker than “standard color” when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. 4) Soundness: Complying with requirements of ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88 using sodium sulfite solution. 5) Alkali reactivity: Considered “innocuous” when tested and evaluated in accordance with ASTM C 289. 3. Intermediate aggregate - normal weight concrete: a. Clean natural gravels, gravels and crushed gravels, crushed stone, or a combination of these materials. b. Conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 for grading, deleterious substances, soundness, and alkali reactivity, except as modified in the following paragraphs. 1) Grading: a) Size shall generally be defined as passing the 3/8" sieve and retained above the No. 50 sieve. b) Intermediate aggregate shall be generally cubical in shape without the presence of flat or elongated pieces when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4791. 2) Deleterious Substances: Not in excess of following percentages by weight, and having a total of all deleterious substances listed not exceeding 2 percent. October 2016 03_30_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) Table 03_30_00-B: Intermediate Aggregate, Limits on Impurities Item Test Method Percent (maximum) Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C 142 0.25 Shale or chert ASTM C 123 ASTM C 295 1 Materials finer than Number 200 sieve ASTM C 117 0.5* Coal and lignite ASTM C 123 0.5 * Except when material finer than Number 200 sieve consists of crusher dust, maximum amount shall be 1 percent. 3) Abrasion loss: Not exceed 45 percent after 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 4) Soundness: Loss not greater than 10 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88 using sodium sulfate solution. 5) Reactivity: Considered “innocuous” when tested and evaluated in accordance with ASTM C 289. 4. Coarse aggregate - normal weight concrete: a. Clean natural gravels, gravels and crushed gravels, crushed stone, or a combination of these materials. b. Conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 for grading, deleterious substances, soundness, and alkali reactivity, except as modified in the following paragraphs. 1) Grading: a) As specified in ASTM C 33 with “Size Number” as indicated in Table 03_30_00-D, Concrete Classes, except as otherwise specified or accepted by the Engineer. b) Weight of flat or elongated pieces (pieces having a length greater than 5 times average width or thickness) not exceeding 15 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4791. 2) Deleterious Substances: Not in excess of following percentages by weight, and having a total of all deleterious substances listed not exceeding 2 percent. Table 03_30_00-C: Coarse Aggregate, Limits on Impurities Item Test Method Percent (maximum) Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C 142 0.25 Shale or chert ASTM C 123 ASTM C 295 1 Materials finer than Number 200 sieve ASTM C 117 0.5* Coal and lignite ASTM C 123 0.5 * Except when material finer than Number 200 sieve consists of crusher dust, maximum amount shall be 1 percent. October 2016 03_30_00-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 3) Abrasion loss: Not exceed 45 percent after 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 4) Soundness: Loss not greater than 10 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88 using sodium sulfate solution. 5) Reactivity: Considered “innocuous” when tested and evaluated in accordance with ASTM C 289. C. Admixtures: 1. General: a. Do not use admixtures other than those specified unless written acceptance has been obtained in advance from the Engineer. b. Admixtures shall be compatible with concrete constituents and with other admixtures. All admixtures in a given mix shall be products of the same manufacturer to ensure compatibility. c. Admixtures for concrete that will be in contact with potable water: 1) Non-toxic and shall not impart taste or odor to the water. 2) Listed under NSF 61 for use in contact with potable water. d. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides calculated as chloride ion in excess of 0.5 percent by weight. e. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and add each admixture to concrete mix separately. 2. Air entraining admixture: a. Conforming to ASTM C 260 and providing entrained air percentages as specified in this Section. b. Provide entrained air as bubbles, evenly dispersed at the time of placement and during curing. 3. Pozzolan admixtures: 1) Do not use pozzolan as a separate admixture in concrete made with portland-pozzolan cement. b. Fly ash: 1) Class C or Class F fly ash conforming to requirements of ASTM C 618, except as modified herein. a) Class C may be used as admixture in concrete made with Type II portland cement. b) Class F with low levels of CaO required if used in concrete mixes containing aggregates classified as “potentially reactive” under ASTM C 289 evaluation for alkali-silica reactivity. 2) Loss on ignition for fly ash: Not exceeding 3 percent. 3) Fly ash may replace portland cement at ratio of 1.0 pound fly ash for each pound of portland cement, up to a maximum replacement of 25 percent of the weight of portland cement specified. 4) Fly ash shall replace a minimum 15 percent and a maximum 20 percent of the specified portland cement content for Class UW concrete. Replacement quantity shall be 1.0 pound of fly ash for each pound of portland cement. 4. Water reducing admixture: a. Conform to ASTM C 494, Type A (water reducing). 1) Type D (water reducing and retarding) may be used during periods of hot weather with prior acceptance by the Engineer. b. Not containing air entraining agents. October 2016 03_30_00-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) c. Liquid form before adding to the concrete mix. d. No decrease in cement is permitted as result of use of water reducing admixture. 5. Water reducing admixture/set retarding: a. Conform to ASTM C 494, Type D (water reducing and retarding) for Class UW concrete. b. Not containing air entraining agents. c. Liquid form before adding to the concrete mix. 6. High-range water reducing admixture (“Superplasticizer”): a. Conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or ASTM C 1017, Type I. b. Producing non-segregating plasticized concrete with little bleeding and the physical characteristics of low water/cement ratio concrete. c. Admixture shall maintain treated concrete in a plasticized state for not less than 2 hours. 7. Retarding/accelerating admixtures: a. Shall not be used without prior acceptance from the Engineer. 8. Shrinkage reducing admixtures: a. Conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or ASTM C 1017, Type I. b. Shall not contain expansive agents. c. Shall not be used without prior acceptance from the Engineer. d. Shall be compatible with requirements for air-entrainment. e. Provide shrinkage reducing admixture in sufficient dosage so as to produce shrinkage within the specified limits. f. Incorporate admixture to the concrete at the batch plant. Do not add to the mixing truck after the truck has left the batch plant. 9. Color pigments: a. Conduit encasement coloring admixture: 1) Color: Red color concrete used for encasement of electrical ducts, conduits, and similar type items. 2) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Davis Company, #100 Utility Red or other color as selected by the Owner. b) I. Reiss Company, Inc., equivalent product. 3) Conduit Encasement Concrete: Mix into each cubic yard of concrete coloring agent as recommended by manufacturer. b. Architectural concrete coloring admixture: (Not used.) 2.03 MATERIALS FOR PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING A. General: 1. Materials shall be compatible with concrete and with other materials. 2. Materials for placing, curing and finishing concrete that will be in contact with potable water: a. Non-toxic and shall not impart taste or odor to the water. b. Listed under NSF 61 for use in contact with potable water, or carrying other approval acceptable to the Engineer. B. Cement grout: 1. Use: For spreading over surface of construction and cold joints in concrete before placing additional concrete above those joints. 2. As specified in Section 03_60_00. October 2016 03_30_00-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) C. Concrete sealer: 1. As specified in Section 09_96_01. D. Evaporation retardant: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Master Builders Technologies, Cleveland, Ohio, Confilm. b. Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, Ohio, Eucobar. E. Sprayed membrane curing compound: 1. Combination curing and sealing products (“cure and seal”) will not be permitted. 2. Properties: a. Clear type with fugitive dye conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1D, and containing no wax, paraffin, or oils. b. For concrete placed or cured during hot weather, curing compound shall be as specified, except that: 1) It shall include a white, reflective fugitive dye, and reflect solar heat gain. F. Moisture loss during a 72-hour period shall not exceed 9 pounds per cubic yard when tested in accordance with ASTM C 156.Plastic membrane for curing: 1. Properties: a. Polyethylene film in accordance with ASTM C 171. b. Color: White. c. Thickness: Nominal thickness of polyethylene film shall not be less than 0.0040 inches when measured in accordance with ASTM D 2103. Thickness of polyethylene film at any point shall not be less than 0.0030 inches. d. Loss of Moisture: Not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface when tested in accordance with ASTM C 156. G. Surface sealant system: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Radcon Laboratories, Inc., Las Vegas, Nevada, Formula Number 7. b. IPA Systems, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Duripal. 2.04 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Provide adequate equipment and facilities for accurate measurement and control of materials and for readily changing proportions of material into mixers. 2. Maintain concrete batching and mixing equipment in good working order, and operate at loads, speeds, and timing recommended by the manufacturer or as specified. B. Batching equipment or batch plant: 1. Capable of controlling delivery of all individual materials to an accuracy of within 1 percent by weight. October 2016 03_30_00-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) C. Mixing equipment: 1. Mixers may be of stationary plant or truck mixer type as appropriate to the Work. 2. Capable of combining aggregates, cementitious materials, and water within specified time into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass, and of discharging that mixture without segregation. 3. Equip each mixer with device for accurately measuring and indicating quantity of water entering concrete, and with operating mechanism such that leakage will not occur when valves are closed. 4. Equip each mixer with device for automatically measuring, indicating, and controlling time required for mixing. a. Provide interlock device to prevent discharge of concrete from mixer before expiration of mixing period. 5. Transit-mixed concrete: Equipment in accordance with ASTM C 94. a. Equip each truck mixer with device interlocked so as to prevent discharge of concrete from drum before required number of turns and furnish such device that is capable of counting number of revolutions of drum. D. Other types of mixers: In case of other types of mixers, mixing shall be as follows: 1. Mix concrete until there is uniform distribution of materials, and discharge mixer completely before recharging. 2. Neither speed nor volume loading of mixer shall exceed manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Continue mixing for minimum of 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are in drum, and for batches larger than one cubic yard increase minimum mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof. 2.05 CONCRETE MIXES A. General: 1. Develop and provide mix design for each Concrete Class listed in Table 03_30_00-D. 2. Select and proportion mixes and document properties using one of the two methods that follow. Procedures and requirements for use of each alternative are specified in subsequent paragraphs of this Section. a. Field experience method. b. Trial batch method. 3. Organize and submit mix designs, together with data on all constituent materials and products, for Engineer’s review. 4. Do not place concrete until the mix design for that Concrete Class of has been accepted by Engineer. 5. After acceptance, do not modify accepted mixes or provide new mixes without Engineer’s prior review and acceptance of the proposed alternative. a. Exception: At all times, adjust batching of water to compensate for free moisture content of the fine aggregate used. b. For any change to approved mixes, Engineer may require new trial batching and testing program as specified in this Section before acceptance and use. c. If there is change in source or quality of any constituent of any concrete class or mix, the revised mix will be considered a new class of concrete and shall require full re-submittal of all data describing mix constituents, design, and testing. October 2016 03_30_00-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 6. For any re-test required, material sampling, mix designs, trial batch preparation and testing, modifications to mix designs, and any re-testing required to satisfy the requirements of these Specifications or to obtain satisfactory performance shall be at Contractor’s expense. B. Requirements for mix proportioning: 1. Develop and provide mixes that: a. Conform to the tabulated requirements for each Concrete Class. b. Can be readily worked into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without excessive vibration and without permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on surface. c. Prevent unnecessary or haphazard changes in the consistency of the concrete supplied. 2. Minimum specified compressive strength: a. Minimum specified compressive strength is designated at 28 days. b. For locations where the placed concrete is adequately protected and not subjected to loads for an extended period during construction, the Contractor may request that the period for achieving the minimum specified compressive strength be extended to 56 days. If accepted by the Engineer, provide mixes that achieve at least 80 percent of their minimum specified compressive strength after 28 days. 3. Water-cementitious materials ratio and water content: a. Do not exceed ratio of maximum net water to cementitious materials (w/c) specified in Table 03_30_00-D. C. Concrete Classes for use in the Work. 1. Provide concrete classes listed in Table 03_30_00-D. 2. Provide normal weight concrete unless otherwise noted. 3. Pumped concrete: Provide pumped concrete that complies with all requirements of this Section. Table 03_30_00-D: Concrete Classes Concrete Class(1) Minimum Specified Compressive Strength at 28 days, f'c(2) (pounds per square inch) Ratio of water to cementitious materials(3) (minimum – maximum). Cementitious Materials Content(6) (pounds per cubic yard of concrete by weight ) Cement Type (ASTM C150, low alkali) Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size(4) Air Entrainment (percent) (n/a: not applicable) Admixtures Required(5) Slump Range (inches) A 4,500 0.40 to 0.42 535 to 610 II 57 6+1.5 AEA WRA 2 to 4 A-NA 4,500 0.40 to 0.42 535 to 610 II 57 n/a WRA 2 to 4 A-SP 4.500 0.40 to 0.42 535 to 610 II 57 6+1.5 AEA WRA HRWR 3 to 6 October 2016 03_30_00-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) Table 03_30_00-D: Concrete Classes Concrete Class(1) Minimum Specified Compressive Strength at 28 days, f'c(2) (pounds per square inch) Ratio of water to cementitious materials(3) (minimum – maximum). Cementitious Materials Content(6) (pounds per cubic yard of concrete by weight ) Cement Type (ASTM C150, low alkali) Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size(4) Air Entrainment (percent) (n/a: not applicable) Admixtures Required(5) Slump Range (inches) B 4,500 0.40 to 0.42 535 to 610 III 57 6+1.5 AEA WRA 2 to 4 B-NA 4,500 0.40 to 0.42 535 to 610 III 57 n/a WRA 3 to 6 B-SP 4,500 0.40 to 0.42 535 to 610 III 57 6+1.5 AEA WRA HRWR 3 to 6 C 2,500 0.62 max. 423 II 57 6+1.5 AEA WRA 3 to 6 CE 3,000 0.62 max. 480 II 8 6+1.5 AEA WRA, CA 3 to 6 P 5,000 0.40 - 0.45 535 II 57 n/a WRA 7 to 9 UW(7)(8) 4,500 0.42 - 0.44 564 to 705 II 57 n/a WRA/SR VMA 5 to 7 Notes: (1) Sub classes within major concrete classes are designated as follows: SP: With high-range water reducing admixture NA: Without air entrainment. (2) At locations where concrete will not be subjected to load from other elements of the structure or from Contractor’s placing operations, maximum time period for achievement of specified compressive strength may be extended to 56 days when accepted by the Engineer. (3) W/C Ratio = Ratio of water to cementitious materials (cement plus fly ash) by weight. (4) Size number in ASTM C 33, Table 2 (5) Admixtures are designated as follows: AEA: Air entraining admixture CA: Coloring Admixture HRWR: High-range water reducing admixture SRA: Shrinkage reducing admixture VMA: Viscosity modifying admixture WRA: Water reducing admixture WRA/SR: Water-reducing/set retarding admixture (6) Maximum cementitous material content may be increased beyond the tabulated maximum if a shrinkage- reducing admixture is provided with Engineer's prior written approval. October 2016 03_30_00-17 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) D. Install Concrete Classes in accordance with the following requirements unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Class A concrete – structural concrete: a. Use Class A concrete (and variations A-NA and A-SP) at all locations except where Classes B, C, and CE are specified or indicated on the Drawings. 1) Class A-NA (Class A without air entrainment): Use for interior concrete slabs (not exposed to weather) scheduled to receive a steel troweled finish. 2) Class A-SP (Class A with high range water reducing admixture/ superplasticizer). May be used at Contractor’s option in lieu of Class A mix. 2. Class B concrete – high-early strength structural concrete: a. Class B concrete (and variations B-NA and B-SP) may be substituted for Class A concrete when accepted by the Engineer for areas where high- early strength concrete is needed and sulfate-resistant concrete is not required. 1) Class B – NA (Class B without air entrainment): Use for interior concrete slabs (not exposed to weather) scheduled to receive a steel troweled finish. 2) Class B-SP (Class B with high range water reducing admixture / superplasticizer). May be used in lieu of Class B mix when accepted by the Engineer. 3. Class C concrete – miscellaneous concrete fill and encasement: a. Use Class C concrete for fill at unauthorized excavation, for thrust blocks and ground anchors for piping, for bedding and encasement of pipe, and at other locations indicated on the Drawings. 4. Class CE concrete – Use for electrical duct bank encasement 5. Class P concrete – for drilled concrete piers. At Contractor's option, Class UW may be substituted for Class P concrete. 6. Class UW concrete – Use for concrete placement underwater. E. Concrete mix design documented by field experience: 1. Mix design: a. Prepare preliminary mix design for each Concrete Class. Submit mix design with product and testing data for materials to be used in the mix for Engineer’s review. 2. Historical records for similar mix. a. Determinations of similarity of materials and proportions between historical and proposed mixes shall be by the Engineer and that shall be final. b. Historical record – Materials: 1) Submit with each mix design the following data for a previously- supplied concrete mix similar to that proposed for this Work: 2) Records demonstrating that the previously supplied mix included similar materials and proportions as those of the proposed mix. a) Documentation that the same concrete supplier will provide both mixes. b) Documentation that the materials used were from the same suppliers and had essentially the same properties, demonstrated by test data, as those proposed. October 2016 03_30_00-18 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) c) Documentation that proportions of materials in the record mix are essentially the same as those proposed, and that the specified compressive strength of the record mix is within 500 pounds per square inch of that required by this Section. d) Concrete supplier’s statement describing any changes made to production of the record mix during the time period reported. e) Concrete supplier’s statement that preparation and quality control procedures for the record mix were essentially the same as those to be employed for this Work. c. Historical record – Testing: 1) Submit with each record mix, corresponding test data for slump, compressive strength (with relationships for rate of strength gain between testing ages), and drying shrinkage. 2) Only records satisfying the following requirements will be accepted. a) All tests were conducted within a period of 1-year preceding the date of the submittal. b) All tests were conducted over a period including not less than 45 days. c) The record of compressive strength testing includes at least 30 tests for slump and 28-day compressive strength. d) The record of compressive strength tests is consecutive. In other words, it includes all tests conducted on the subject mix within the 1-year time period described above (not just selected tests during that period). e) Submit concrete supplier’s sworn statement confirming that all tests for the record mix have been reported. f) Tests for drying shrinkage are essentially the same as those described in subsequent paragraphs of this Section for “concrete mix design documented by trial batch preparation and testing.” d. For mixes determined to be similar and to have an acceptable test history, acceptance criteria shall be as follows: e. Acceptance criteria: 1) Slump: All tests within limits specified for record mix. 2) Compressive strength: Average compression strength for tests, as determined by ACI 318 and ACI 350 not less than minimum required average strength 3) Drying shrinkage: Within limits stated in subsequent paragraphs of this Section for “concrete mix design documented by trial batch preparation and testing.” F. Concrete mix design documented by trial batch preparation and testing: 1. Mix design and trial batches: a. Prepare preliminary mix design for each Concrete Class. Submit mix design with product and testing data for materials to be used in the mix for Engineer’s review. 1) Determine water content of the mix based on curves showing the relation between water-cementitious materials ratio and the 7- and 28-day compressive strength of the concrete. 2) Determine each curve using 4 or more points, each representing the average compressive strength value of at least 3 specimens tested at each age. October 2016 03_30_00-19 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) b. After materials data and proposed mix designs have been accepted by Engineer, have trial batches for each concrete mix design prepared by Contractor’s independent testing laboratory. 1) Prepare trial batches for mix using the cement, aggregates, and admixtures to be used for the Work. 2) Provide batches of sufficient quantity to determine slump, workability, consistency, and finishing characteristics, and to provide sufficient specimens for testing indicated. c. For each trial batch, make and test specimens to determine and report slump, compressive strength (with relationships for rate of strength gain between testing ages), and drying shrinkage. 1) If trial batches do not produce concrete conforming to the specified requirements for slump, strength, workability, consistency, drying shrinkage, and finishing, change mix proportions and, if necessary, sources of materials. 2) Make additional trial batches and perform additional tests until a batch that conforms to requirements of this Section is produced. 2. Testing - Slump: a. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C 143. b. Acceptance criterion: Slump within range specified. 3. Testing - Compressive strength: a. Prepare a minimum of fourteen (14) 6 inch diameter by 12 inch long cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 for tests specified in this Section. After the full 56-day cure period, deliver 2 untested cylinders to the Engineer for permanent record of the trial batch. b. Determine average compressive strength: 1) Test at least 12 cylinders from each trial batch for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 39. 2) Test 4 cylinders at 7 days, another 4 at 28 days, and another 4 at 56 days. 3) Calculate average compression strength for 7-day tests, for 28-day tests, and for 56 day tests. 4) Calculate ratios for: a) Average 7-day strength to average 28-day strength. b) Average 28-day strength to average 56-day strength. c. Determine the required average compressive strength for each mix, f’cr, as described in the following paragraphs: 1) Calculate required average compressive strength (f’cr) based on the minimum specified 28-day compressive strength, f’c, plus a standard deviation determined from the test history available for that mix. 2) Determine f’cr as specified in ACI 318 and ACI 350, except as modified in the following paragraphs. a) Where 15 or more 28-day compressive strength tests are available, calculate standard deviation as described in the preceding paragraphs for “concrete mix design documented by field experience.” Add this standard deviation to the specified minimum compressive strength to determine the required average compressive strength (f’cr) for the mix. b) Where fewer than 15 compressive strength tests at 28-days are available, determine minimum required compressive strength, (f’cr) from Table 03_30_00-E. October 2016 03_30_00-20 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) TABLE 03_30_00-E: Required Average Compressive Strength, Fewer than Fifteen Tests Available Minimum Specified Compressive Strength, f'c (pounds per square inch) Required Average Compressive Strength, f'cr (pounds per square inch) Less than 3,000 f'c + 1,000 3,000 to 5,000 f'c + 1,200 Over 5,000 f'c + 1,400 d. Acceptance criterion: Average compressive strength of the 4 cylinders tested at 28 days, or of the 4 cylinders tested at 56 days when permitted by the Engineer, shall equal or exceed the required average compression strength, f'cr for that concrete mix design. 4. Drying shrinkage test: a. For Class A and B trial batches, prepare 10 drying shrinkage specimens in accordance with ASTM C 157 Divide specimens into two groups: one group including, and one group without shrinkage reducing admixture. Prepare, cure, and test both groups in accordance with ASTM C 157, except as modified in the following paragraphs. 1) Remove drying shrinkage specimens from molds at age of 23 hours plus or minus 1 hour after trial batching. Immediately place them in lime-saturated water maintained at 73 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus 3 degrees for at least 30 minutes. Remove specimens from the water, and wipe with a damp cloth, Measure to nearest 0.0001 inch to determine original length. Record measurements and re-submerge specimens in lime-saturated water at 73 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus three degrees for moist curing. 2) Maintain submerged curing conditions at 73 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus three degrees for 7 days. Seven days after batching, remove specimens from water and repeat measuring procedures. 3) Immediately store specimens in a humidity controlled room maintained at 73 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus 3 degrees, and at 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 4 percent for remainder of the test. 4) At periods of 14, 21 and 28 days after batching remove specimens from curing room and repeat measurements. b. Drying shrinkage test report: 1) Report measurements of all specimens at 1, 7, 14, 21, and 28 days after batching. 2) Using measured length at 7 days as base length for drying shrinkage, calculate the following for each measuring period: a) Drying shrinkage of each specimen. Determine as difference between the 7-day base length and measured length for each period. b) Average of these differences. If drying shrinkage of any specimen departs from the average of the measurements for each period by more than 0.0004 inch, disregard results obtained from that specimen. c) Percentage of drying shrinkage from batching to date of measurement. October 2016 03_30_00-21 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) c. Drying shrinkage acceptance criteria: 1) Average shrinkage of trial batch concrete specimen group at 28 days after batching when measured and cured as indicated shall not exceed 0.038 percent. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Sample and test materials in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Sampling, testing, and reporting frequency: a. In preparation for mix design submittals and trial batch tests. b. Whenever there is a change in source of the material, or a significant change in the characteristics or quality of materials from the same source. c. For each 10,000 cubic yards of concrete mix produced. d. At intervals not exceeding 90 calendar days unless shorter periods are required by the following paragraphs. 2. Pozzolan admixtures: a. Sample and test pozzolan admixtures in accordance with ASTM C 311. 3. Aggregate: a. Sample aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 136 and D 75. b. At least once every 30 days. 4. Portland cement: a. Determination alkali content by method set forth in ASTM C 114. b. At least once every 60 days. B. Batch materials in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Concrete batch weights: Control and adjust so as to secure maximum yield, and at all times maintain proportions of concrete mix within specified limits. 2. Aggregates: a. Obtain aggregate from a source capable of providing uniform quality, moisture content, and grading during any single day's operation. b. Furnish satisfactory means at batching plant for checking moisture content of fine aggregate for each batch. 3. Admixtures: a. Batch solutions using mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement. b. Air Entraining admixture: Add to batch in portion of the mixing water. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare and submit mix designs for each Concrete Class indicated in Table 03_30_00-D. B. Submit proposed sequence of concrete placements. After acceptance, adhere to proposed sequence of placing concrete, except when specific changes are requested by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer. 1. Use construction methods and sequence work to allow concrete placement to reach adequate strength and to be constructed with required support to prevent overstress of the concrete structure during construction. October 2016 03_30_00-22 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) C. Make provisions for monitoring weather conditions. 1. Install an outdoor weather station capable of measuring and recording ambient temperature, wind speed, and humidity Furnish instruments accurate to within 2 degrees Fahrenheit, 5 percent relative humidity, and 1 mile per hour wind speed. 2. Monitor the weather forecast beginning at least 48 hours prior to any concrete placement, and make provisions for cold weather concreting or hot weather concreting if those conditions exist or are forecast to exist during the period of placement, finishing, and curing. a. Record temperature, relative humidity, and wind speeds for each placement beginning at least 24 hours before scheduled delivery of concrete. D. Footings and slabs on grade: 1. Do not place concrete on ground or compacted fill until subgrade is in moist condition acceptable to the Engineer. 2. If necessary, sprinkle subgrade with water not less than 6 or more than 20 hours in advance of placing concrete. 3. If subgrade surface becomes dry prior to actual placing of concrete, sprinkle again, without forming pools of water. 4. Do not place concrete if subgrade is muddy or soft. E. Place no concrete without Engineer’s prior acceptance of conditions. F. Notify the Engineer in writing that all preparations are complete and ready for placement of concrete. 1. Submit notification to Engineer on forms provided by or acceptable to the Engineer, and bearing the signature of Contractor’s superintendent. a. Sample form is included at the end of this Section. See Attachment B. 2. Submittal of notification will be Contractor’s certification that preparations are complete and in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. 3. Provide notification for Engineer to make final observations at the locations of concrete placements not less than 24 hours before commencing placement of concrete. 3.02 CONCRETE JOINTS A. As far as practicable, construct concrete as a monolith. B. Locations of construction, control, expansion, and other joints are indicated on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. 1. In order to preserve strength and watertightness of structures, make no other joints, except as authorized the Engineer. 2. Construct joints where indicated and as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Provide and install waterstops, expansion joint material, synthetic rubber sealing compound, and other similar materials as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Sections 03_15_00 and 07_90_00. 4. Take special care to ensure that waterstops are secured in proper position. 5. Take special care to ensure that concrete is well consolidated around and against waterstops. October 2016 03_30_00-23 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) C. Time between placements of adjacent concrete separated by joints. 1. Concrete beside previously placed concrete. a. Provide not less than 3 days between placement of adjacent sections for the following: 1) Slabs. 2) Walls. 2. Concrete slabs above or beside previously placed concrete: a. Provide not less than 14 days between placement of the lower and upper pours for the following: 1) Walls over slabs: 2) Slabs over walls: 3) Slabs keyed into the sides of walls. D. Edges of joints: 1. Provide joints having edges as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Protect wall and slab surfaces at edges against concrete spatter and thoroughly clean upon completion of each placement. E. Keyways in joints: 1. Provide keyways in joints as indicated on the Drawings. F. Construction joints: 1. Before placing concrete against previously placed concrete at construction joints, thoroughly clean the prior placement of laitance, grease, oil, mud, dirt, curing compounds, mortar droppings, or other objectionable matter by means of heavy sandblasting. Wash surfaces just prior to successive concrete placement. 2. Cleaning of construction joints: a. Wash construction joints free of sawdust, chips, and other debris after forms are built and immediately before concrete or grout placement. b. Should formwork confine sawdust, chips, or other loose matter in such manner that it is impossible to remove them by flushing with water, use vacuum cleaner for their removal and then flush cleaned surfaces with water. c. Provide cleanout hole at base of each wall and column for inspection and cleaning. 3.03 MEASURING AND BATCHING MATERIALS A. Measurements of materials: 1. Proportion and measure cementitious materials and aggregates by weight. a. Weigh cementitious materials separately. b. If bulk cementitious materials are used, weigh them on separate visible scale that will accurately register scale load at any stage of weighing operation from zero to full capacity. c. Cement in unbroken standard packages (sacks) need not be weighed. 2. Mixing water: Measure by volume or by weight. 3. Other mix constituents: Measure by weight, except as otherwise specified or accepted by the Engineer. October 2016 03_30_00-24 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 4. Weighing and measuring devices: a. Use equipment designed and constructed for specifically for that purpose. b. Furnish devices capable of weighting successive quantities of individual material measured to within 1 percent of desired weight of that material. c. Measurements and measuring devices: 1) Subject to review by the Engineer. 2) Bearing valid seal of the department of weights and measures for the authority having jurisdiction over the Work. B. Batching: 1. Admixtures: added at the plant – not in the field. a. If in the field is permitted by the Engineer. 1) Overseen by concrete supplier’s trained technologist. 2) Adequate mixing. 3) Max time to placement is 90 minutes after water added to mix (initial batching) – not 90 minutes after any field additions/adjustments. 4) Slump at discharge after additions/modifications must conform to requirements of Table 03_30_00-D. 3.04 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING A. Machine mixing: 1. Prevent cementitious materials from coming into contact with aggregate or with water until materials are in mixer ready for complete mixing with all mixing water. 2. Procedure of mixing cementitious materials with sand or with sand and coarse aggregate for delivery to project site, for final mixing and addition of mixing water will not be permitted. 3. Remixing of concrete that has started to take its initial set (“retempering”) will not be permitted. 4. Discharge entire batch before recharging. 5. Volume of mixed material per batch: Not exceed manufacturer's rated capacity of mixer. B. Transit-mixed concrete: 1. Mix and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94. 2. Total elapsed time between addition of water at batch plant and discharging completed mix: a. Not to exceed 90 minutes nor 300 revolutions of the mixing drum. b. Under conditions contributing to quick setting, total elapsed time permitted may be reduced by the Engineer. 3. Temperature - minimum and maximum allowable during mixing and transporting: a. Minimum: 50 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Maximum: 90 degrees Fahrenheit. 4. Continuously revolve drum after it is once started until it has completely discharged its batch. a. Do not add water until drum has started revolving. b. Engineer reserves the right to increase required minimum number of revolutions or to decrease designated maximum number of revolutions allowed, if necessary, to obtain satisfactory mixing. The Contractor will not October 2016 03_30_00-25 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) be entitled to additional compensation because of such increase or decrease. C. Concrete delivery: 1. Furnish to the Engineer a delivery ticket for each batch of ready mixed concrete at the time of delivery. Include the following information on each ticket: a. Time of day concrete was batched and time of day that discharge from the truck is complete. b. Printed record of the individual weight of each of the following constituents in the batch: fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, cement, pozzolan, and water. c. Concrete Class as defined in Table 03_30_00-D and mix number as approved by Engineer. d. Type, brand, and quantity of each admixture in the batch. e. Total volume of any water added to the mix, and maximum volume of water that may be added to the mix after initial batching. f. Quantity of concrete delivered and numerical sequence of that delivery. g. Number of revolutions of transit truck at arrival on site, and total number of revolutions when discharge is complete. 2. Additional water may be only be added to the mix when the following conditions are fully satisfied: a. Batch ticket showing total volume of water already added and maximum volume of water that may be added is available for Engineer’s observation before any additional water is added. b. Total volume of water in the mix after the addition will be less than the maximum allowable volume of water indicated on the ticket. c. Volume of water added and time of addition are clearly marked for record on the batch ticket delivered to the Engineer. D. Conveying concrete: 1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that prevent separation or loss of materials. 2. Use equipment for chutes, pumps, and conveying of concrete of such size and design as to ensure practically continuous flow of concrete at delivery end without separation of materials. 3. Design and use chutes and devices for conveying and depositing concrete that direct concrete vertically downward when discharged from chute or conveying device. 4. Keep equipment for conveying concrete thoroughly clean by washing and scraping upon completion of any day's placement. 3.05 PLACING AND CONSOLIDATING A. Placing concrete: 1. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of completed preparations before placing concrete. a. Place forms, reinforcement, screeds, anchors, ties, and inserts in place before notification of readiness is given to the Engineer. b. Notify Engineer in writing that all preparations are complete and ready for placement of concrete. October 2016 03_30_00-26 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 2. Do not place concrete until: a. Reinforcement is secure and properly fastened in its correct position and loose form ties at construction joints have been retightened. b. Dowels, bucks, sleeves, hangers, pipes, conduits, anchor bolts, and any other fixtures required to be embedded in concrete have been placed and adequately anchored. c. Forms have been cleaned of debris and form release agents are applied as specified. 3. Do not place concrete: a. With slump outside the limits specified in Table 03_30_00-D. b. That has taken its initial set, or that has been re-tempered. c. During rainstorms or high velocity winds. 4. Keep sufficient protective covering on hand at all times for protection of concrete. a. Protect concrete placed immediately before rain to prevent water from coming in contact with concrete surfaces. b. Protect concrete placed before winds to prevent excessive drying or embedment of debris in the finished surfaces. 5. Depositing concrete: a. Deposit concrete at or near its final position to avoid segregation caused by re-handling or flowing. b. Do not deposit concrete in large quantities in one place and move it along forms with vibrator or by other methods. c. Do not drop concrete freely into place from height greater than 5 feet. d. Use tremies for placing concrete where drop is over 5 feet. e. Commence placement of concrete on slopes starting at bottom of slope. 6. Place concrete in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 24 inches in depth and bring up evenly in all parts of forms. 7. Continue concrete placement without avoidable interruption, in continuous operation, until end of placement is reached. 8. After concrete placement begins, it should continue without significant interruption. Plan and implement precautions to prevent any delay from exceeding 20 minutes. 9. Placement of concrete for slabs, beams, or walkways: a. If cast monolithically with walls or columns, do not commence until concrete in walls or columns below has been allowed to set and shrink. b. Allow set time of not less than 1 hour for shrinkage. c. Keep top surface of lower placement moist to prevent cold joints. B. Consolidating concrete: 1. Consolidate concrete with aid of acceptable mechanical vibrators. 2. Thoroughly consolidate concrete around reinforcement, pipes, or other shapes built into the work. 3. Provide sufficiently intense vibration to cause concrete to flow and settle readily into place and to visibly affect concrete over radius of at least 18 inches. 4. Vibrators: a. Keep sufficient vibrators on hand at all times to vibrate concrete as placed. b. In addition to vibrators in actual use while concrete is being placed, have on hand minimum 1 spare vibrator in operable condition. October 2016 03_30_00-27 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) c. Place no concrete until it has been ascertained that all vibrating equipment, including spares, are in serviceable condition. 5. Take special care to place concrete solidly against forms to leave no voids. 6. Take every precaution to make concrete solid, compact, and smooth, and if for any reason surfaces or interiors have voids or are in any way defective, repair such concrete in manner acceptable to the Engineer. 7. Do not over-vibrate so as to produce segregation. C. Placing and consolidating Class UW concrete: 1. General: a. Surfaces below water should be cleaned by scrubbing with a stiff bristled brush. b. Concrete placed underwater shall be placed using the tremie method with a high-slump, cohesive concrete mix resistant to washout of the cement particles. c. Flow of water in the area of the concrete placement must be ceased to reduce the risk of washout of the plastic concrete. d. Provide a 10-inch to 12-inch diameter tremie pipe adequately sized to avoid blockages by the plastic concrete. Splices in the pipe must be welded or flanged with watertight gaskets. 2. Placement: a. The end of the tremie pipe is temporarily sealed with a watertight, steel plug, inserted into the water, and dewatered. b. The tremie pipe is filled with concrete carefully to avoid breaking the seal until the concrete level in the tremie is well above the water surface elevation. c. Once filled with concrete, the tremie is lifted to break the seal and initiate the flow of concrete. A mound of concrete around the mouth of the pipe is quickly developed to seal the tremie pipe from filling with water. d. Once the seal is formed, the tremie continues to inject fresh concrete into the mass of concrete established around the tremie pipe. e. Do not lift the tremie further or break the seal. Maintain 3 to 5 feet of embedment of the tremie in the concrete mass. Ensure availability of fresh concrete to maintain the placement without delays. f. Continue to place concrete expediently and continuously with a placement rate of 1 to 2 feet vertical feet per hour. g. Load the tremie hopper uniformly. Do not surge load the tremie. The need to surge the tremie to maintain flow is indicative of loss of workability of the mix. h. Do not allow the plastic concrete mass to set during placement. As the concrete placement progresses, raise the tremie. Do not allow the tremie to discharge fresh concrete into concrete that has begun initial set. i. Do not move tremie pipe horizontally within the submerged mass of concrete. Distribute concrete by horizontal flow of concrete, up to a maximum of 10 feet. For placement beyond this horizontal distance, withdraw the tremie pipe, relocate, reestablish the seal, and resume the flow of concrete. j. Laitance or other unsuitable material should be removed during concrete placement with pumps or air-lifts as it accumulates. k. Concrete shall be placed to such elevation that after any unsound concrete has been removed from the surface, the finished elevations shall be those which are shown on the drawings. October 2016 03_30_00-28 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 3. Consolidation: a. Concrete placed underwater is conveyed to its final position and consolidated by gravity. b. Class UW concrete may not be mechanically vibrated to consolidate. 3.06 FINISHING CONCRETE A. Provide concrete finishes in accordance with Section 03_35_29 unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. Liquid evaporation retardant: Under conditions that result in rapid evaporation of moisture from the surface of the concrete, immediately after the concrete has been screeded, coat the surface of the concrete with a liquid evaporation retardant. Apply the evaporation retardant again after each operation as necessary to prevent drying shrinkage cracks. Conditions that result in rapid evaporation of moisture may include one or more of the following: 1. Low humidity. 2. Windy conditions. 3. Temperature of 85 degrees Fahrenheit or higher. C. Concrete sealer: 1. Floors and slabs to receive concrete sealer: See Room Finish Schedule on the Drawings and Section 03_35_29. 3.07 CURING A. General: 1. Cure concrete by methods specified in this Section. B. Keep concrete continuously moist and subjected to an average daily air temperature of at least 50 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 7 days after placement. Provide at least 350-degree days of curing. If hourly temperatures have been allowed to drop below 50 degrees Fahrenheit during the curing period, extend the curing time to compensate Schedule of curing methods: 1. Cure the following concrete surfaces using water curing or plastic membrane curing. a. Floor surfaces of water containment structures. b. Horizontal concrete surfaces. 2. Cure the following concrete surfaces by water curing, plastic membrane curing, or sprayed curing membrane at the Contractor's option. a. Surfaces not listed in the preceding paragraphs. C. Water curing: 1. Keep surfaces of concrete constantly and visibly wet day and night for period of not less than 7 days. 2. Begin water curing as soon as concrete attains initial set. 3. Maintain a wet surface by ponding, continuous sprinkling, covering with saturated burlap, or saturating the surface and covering it with plastic membrane. a. Provide plastic sheet material over the surface if required to maintain a wet surface during arid or windy conditions. October 2016 03_30_00-29 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) b. When plastic sheet materials are used, regularly monitor the surface for wetness, and add supplementary moisture if necessary. c. Secure plastic sheet material as specified for plastic membrane curing. 4. Use water having a temperature within 20 degrees Fahrenheit of the temperature of concrete, and not lower than the minimum temperature allowed for the concrete surface during curing. 5. For formed surfaces, each day that forms remain in place may counted as 1 day of water curing. a. Do not loosen form ties during period when concrete is being cured by leaving forms in place. b. No further water curing credit will be allowed for forms remaining in place after initial contact between concrete surfaces and forms is broken. D. Plastic membrane curing: 1. Install plastic membrane as soon as concrete is finished and can be walked on without damage. 2. Cover entire surface of finished concrete with membrane. 3. Anchor membrane to prevent uplift from wind or air trapped below the sheet. 4. Fully seal joints and edges to provide full seal around perimeter. 5. Keep concrete under plastic membrane moist, adding supplemental moisture if necessary. E. Sprayed membrane curing compound: 1. Apply sprayed membrane curing compound to concrete surfaces after repairing and patching, and within 1 hour after forms are removed. a. If more than 1 hour elapses after removal of forms, do not use membrane curing compound. Instead, provide water curing for not less than 7 days. b. Do not remove sprayed membrane curing compound from concrete in less than 7 days after initial application. c. Take care to apply curing compound in area of construction joints. See that curing compound is placed within construction joint silhouette. d. Contractor's Option: Instead of using curing compound for curing of construction joints, such joints may be water cured. 2. Apply sprayed membrane curing compound by mechanical, power operated sprayer with mechanical agitator that will uniformly mix all pigment and compound. a. Apply compound in at least 2 coats. b. Apply each coat in direction turned 90 degrees from preceding coat. c. Apply curing compound in sufficient quantity so that concrete has uniform appearance and that its natural color is effectively and completely concealed at time of spraying. d. Continue to coat and recoat surfaces until specified coverage is achieved and until coating film remains on concrete surfaces. 3. Thickness and coverage of curing compound: Provide compound having film thickness that can be scraped from surfaces at any and all points after drying for at least 24 hours. a. The Contractor is cautioned that method of applying curing compound specified herein may require more compound than normally suggested by manufacturer of compound and also more than is customary in the trade. b. Apply the amounts specified herein, regardless of manufacturer's recommendations or customary practice. October 2016 03_30_00-30 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) c. If the Contractor desires to use a curing compound other than one of the products specified, coat sample areas of concrete wall with proposed curing compound and also similar adjacent area with specified compound in specified manner for comparison. 1) If proposed sample is not equal or better, in opinion of the Engineer, in all features, proposed substitution will not be allowed. 4. After curing period is complete, remove curing compound placed on joint surfaces that abut fresh concrete or that will receive paints, coatings, or other adhered finishes. 5. Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer of the finish to be applied, remove curing compound by sandblasting. Provide manual, pressure washing, or blasting as necessary to fully remove curing compound. 6. Prior to final acceptance of the work, remove, by sandblasting or other acceptable method, any curing compound on surfaces exposed to view, so that only natural color of finished concrete is visible uniformly over entire surface. F. Curing Class UW concrete and Dewatering: 1. Maintain water over Class UW concrete for period of not less than 7 days. 2. Maintain the water temperature within the range as specified in the Cold Weather Concreting and Hot Weather Concreting sections of this Specification. 3. Dewater the area after the Engineer has determined that the concrete has reached sufficient strength. 3.08 PROTECTION A. General: 1. Keep forms in place as specified in the following paragraphs to provide curing and to protect concrete surfaces and edges from damage. 2. Immediately after forms are removed, carefully examine concrete surfaces, and repair any irregularities in surfaces and finishes as specified. B. Form removal: 1. Vertical forms: a. Remain in place minimum of 24 hours after concrete is placed. b. If, after 24 hours, concrete has sufficient strength and hardness to resist surface or other damage, forms may be removed. 2. Other forms supporting concrete and shoring: Remain in place as follows: a. Sides of footings: 24 hours minimum. b. Vertical sides of beams, girders, and similar members: 48 hours minimum. c. Slabs, beams, and girders: Until concrete strength reaches specified strength f’c or until shoring is installed. d. Shoring for slabs, beams, and girders: Shore until concrete strength reaches specified strength. e. Wall bracing: Brace walls until concrete strength of beams and slabs laterally supporting wall reaches specified strength. October 2016 03_30_00-31 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) C. Requirements due to weather condition: 1. Do not remove forms from concrete which has been placed when outside ambient air temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit until the following conditions are satisfied: a. Concrete has sufficient strength to allow form removal without damage to surfaces. b. At least 48 hours have elapsed since the end of concrete placement. c. Provisions are in place to maintain moisture for curing concrete, and temperature at or above the required minimum curing temperature specified. D. Loading of concrete members: 1. Placement of loads on or against green concrete is not permitted. 2. Do not place soil against walls, or fill over the top of concrete until conditions designated in the following paragraphs are satisfied: a. Walls have been cast to their full height in the structure and have achieved their minimum specified 28-day compressive strength. b. Connecting slabs and beams that brace the walls are in place, are complete, and (in the case of concrete) have achieved their minimum specified 28-day compressive strength. 3.09 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Implement cold weather concreting procedures during periods of cold weather as defined in this Section. 1. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R and this Section. B. Prepare a cold weather concreting plan. Maintain at least one copy of the plan on site. Provide plan for review if requested by the Engineer. 1. Include procedures for batching, delivery, placement, curing, protection, and for monitoring and recording the temperature of the concrete and the surrounding environment. 2. Describe procedure to be implemented in the event of abrupt changes in weather conditions or of equipment failure. 3. Review cold weather concreting plan during pre-construction meeting. Make provisions to address any concerns expressed by Engineer before beginning concrete placements. C. Preparation: 1. Do not place concrete over frozen subgrade materials. Provide insulating material and supplementary heat if required to maintain a thawed surface. 2. Do not place concrete around metallic elements whose temperature is less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit. If heating is required, use processes that do not alter the metallurgical properties of the elements. 3. Remove snow, ice, and frost from reinforcement, embedments, and forms. Schedule such removal immediately before concrete placement so that surfaces do not refreeze. D. Batching, delivery, placement and finishing: 1. Accelerating admixtures will not be permitted. October 2016 03_30_00-32 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 2. Based on temperature of the environment and the surfaces where concrete will be placed, select and maintain mix temperature as recommended in ACI 306R. a. Make provisions for temperature loss during delivery and placing. b. Place concrete at or slightly above the minimum recommended batch temperatures. Do not exceed these minimum values by more than 20 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Heating: If temperature of water or aggregates is below 35 degrees Fahrenheit, heat the materials. a. Mixing water: Do not heat above 140 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Aggregates: Heat uniformly to eliminate ice, snow, and frozen lumps of material. Avoid overheating. Do not exceed average temperature of 140 degrees Fahrenheit or spot temperature of 200 degrees Fahrenheit. E. Protection and curing: 1. Protect concrete to provide continuous warm moist curing immediately after placement and during protection period. 2. Minimum protection period: 7 days. a. For mixes using Type III cement, the protection period may be reduced by one day. 3. During and immediately after the protection period, maintain temperature in accordance with the following table. Provide record of temperature during placement and curing as specified in the following paragraphs. a. Furnish and locate maximum/minimum temperature recording thermometers in sufficient numbers to confirm concrete surface temperatures over full area and edges of concrete. Concrete Surface Temperatures - Normal Weight Concrete Section Thickness (inches) <12 12 to <36 36 to <72 During Protection Period: As maintained (minimum). 55°F 50°F 45°F After Protection Period: Gradual drop during first 24 hours (maximum). 50°F 40°F 35°F 4. Provide plastic sheeting, polystyrene foam sheets, insulating blankets, and supplemental heating if required to maintain moisture and the specified temperatures during protection. a. Protect insulating blankets from moisture in the concrete and from rain or snow using impermeable sheeting. b. Supplemental heating units: 1) Vent units to outside atmosphere. Do not exhaust heater flue gasses into the enclosed and protected area. 2) Make provisions to heat the flow freely within protected area, and to maintain a uniform temperature throughout the space. 3) Locate units to avoid local drying or uneven heating of concrete surfaces. c. Pay particular attention to maintaining required temperature and moisture at edges and corners. October 2016 03_30_00-33 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 5. At the end of the protection period, allow concrete to cool gradually to the ambient temperature. a. Maximum temperature drop over the first 24-hour period shall be as specified above. b. Where temperature of concrete exceeds ambient by 20 degrees Fahrenheit or more, loosen forms and leave in place for at least 24 hours before removal. c. If water curing has been used, maintain concrete temperature as specified in the following paragraphs for at least 24 hours after water curing is terminated. Allow water-cured concrete to air dry for at least 3 days before exposure to freezing temperatures. F. Additional cold weather provisions for Class UW concrete: 1. Make provisions for heating aggregates and mixing water. Provide means acceptable to the Engineer to heat and maintain the temperature of the water in which the concrete will be constructed. 2. Furnish mixed concrete having a temperature of not less than 60 degrees Fahrenheit and not more than 78 degrees Fahrenheit at the time of placement. a. Aggregates and mixing water may be heated to a maximum temperature of 150 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. The water in which the concrete will be placed must be heated to a minimum temperature of 40 degrees Fahrenheit. After concrete placement, maintain the water at this temperature until such time that the water is removed. 4. After dewatering, protect and allow the concrete to cool as indicated in the Protection and Curing section of this Specification. G. Temperature records: 1. For each area of concrete placed or cured during cold weather, record the temperature of concrete and the ambient environment. a. Maintain temperature records on site, and make records available for review by the Engineer upon request. b. Deliver a final copy of each record to Engineer for project files not more than 14 calendar days after the date concrete was placed. 2. Concrete delivered for placement. Measure and record temperature at the point of discharge in accordance with ASTM C 1064. Note temperature on the batch ticket. 3. Concrete during the protection period: a. Furnish and locate self-recording thermometers (maximum / minimum) around each placement. Number and location of thermometers shall be sufficient to represent temperatures around the entire concrete placement. 1) If concrete is protected with insulating materials, locate thermometers between face of concrete and insulating materials. b. Position thermometers to record the temperature at each edge or corner and at the middle of the placement area. 4. Include in the temperature record of each placement the following information, recorded legibly on a single sheet. 5. In the event that evaluations of the efficacy of concrete protection and curing are required, the lowest temperature recorded in any placement during each 24-hour period will be assumed to be the temperature at which the entire placement was maintained. October 2016 03_30_00-34 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 3.10 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Implement hot weather concrete procedures during periods of hot weather as defined in this Section. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 305R and this Section. B. If placements during hot weather are expected or if requested by the Engineer, prepare a hot weather concreting plan. Maintain at least one copy on site. Provide plan for review if requested by the Engineer. 1. Include procedures for batching, delivery, placement, curing, protection, and monitoring and recording the temperature of the concrete and the surrounding environment. 2. Describe procedures to be implemented in the event of abrupt changes in weather conditions or of equipment failure. 3. Review hot weather concreting plan during pre-construction meeting. Make provisions to address any concerns expressed by Engineer before beginning concrete placements. C. Preparation: 1. Do not place concrete against forms, reinforcement, or embedments with a surface temperature greater than 120 degrees Fahrenheit. If necessary to maintain maximum concrete temperature during placing, cool forms and reinforcement to temperature below 90 degrees Fahrenheit using water or shades. Do not allow water to puddle in forms or placement areas. 2. Moisten forms or subgrade to maintain a saturated surface without standing water or soft spots. 3. Provide windbreaks, shades, fog spray, sprinkling, wet cover, or other means required to protect concrete from premature loss of moisture and rapid temperature gain. D. Batching, delivery, placement and finishing: 1. Retarding admixtures will not be permitted. 2. Temperature of concrete delivered for placement shall not exceed 90 degrees Fahrenheit. a. Maintain uniform temperature in the mix below this level during batching, delivery, placing, and consolidation. b. Temperature of mix, even if below 90 degrees Fahrenheit, shall be as maintained to avoid loss of slump, flash setting, or cold joints in placements. 3. If necessary mix water may be chilled or replaced with ice to maintain mix temperature. 4. Place and finish concrete promptly. Place so that vertical lift lines will not be visible in exposed concrete surfaces. 5. Provide plastic sheeting, fog nozzles, shades or other means to reduce concrete temperature and protect from moisture loss. E. Protection and curing: 1. Furnish and locate maximum/minimum temperature recording thermometers in sufficient numbers to confirm concrete temperatures over full area and edges of concrete. October 2016 03_30_00-35 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 2. Flatwork. Protect and cure using water curing methods as specified in this Section. a. Water curing. Keep concrete continuously wet and make provisions for runoff. For sprinkling or soaker hoses, maintain temperature of water as close as possible to the temperature of the concrete to minimize effects of thermal shock. 3. Formed surfaces. Protect and cure using forms left in place or membrane curing methods as specified in this Section. a. Cover forms and keep continuously moist for at least 24 hours after placement. Loosen forms as soon as this can be accomplished without damaging the concrete. Maintain continuously moist surfaces by fogging or spraying with water, or by application of curing compound as specified. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. B. Field tests: 1. During progress of construction, testing to determine whether the concrete, as being produced, complies with requirements specified. 2. Sampling and testing shall be performed by Owner’s testing laboratory. See Section 01_45_24 for requirements. a. Cooperate in testing by allowing free access to the Work for testing laboratory to sample and test materials. b. Contractor is responsible for providing care of and curing conditions for test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31 until specimens are collected by testing laboratory. c. Owner’s testing agency will provide four firmly braced, insulated, heated, closed curing boxes, as needed to hold specimens. Include cold weather temperature and hot weather temperature control thermostat for initial curing and storage from time of fabrication through shipment to testing laboratory. 3. Testing shall include: a. Sampling of concrete in accordance with ASTM C 172. b. Temperature of concrete at delivery in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 1064 and as specified herein. c. Slump of concrete using slump cone in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 143. 1) Test slump at the beginning of each placement, as often as necessary to keep slump within the specified range, and when requested to do so by the Engineer. 2) Observe concrete during slump test for sign of segregation. a) Observe concrete to see if mortar or moisture flows from slumped concrete. b) Reject concrete if mortar or moisture flows out of mix. d. Unit weight of concrete in accordance with ASTM C 138. e. Air entrainment in accordance with ASTM C 173. 1) Test percent of entrained air in concrete at beginning of each placement, as often as necessary to keep entrained air within specified range, and when requested to do so by the Engineer. October 2016 03_30_00-36 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 2) Test air entrainment in concrete in accordance with ASTM C 173. If air entraining admixtures used for the Work require alternate testing procedures, advise the independent testing laboratory well in advance of the dates of testing, and confirm that appropriate equipment and personnel are provided for the test. f. Compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 39. Required number of cylinders is as follows: 1) Not less than 5 cylinder specimens, 6 inch diameter by 12 inch long, will be tested for each 75 cubic yards of each class of concrete with minimum of 5 specimens for each class of concrete placed and not less than 5 specimens for each day's placement. 2) One cylinder will be broken at 7 days, one at 14 days, and 2 at 28 days. The fifth cylinder may be used to evaluate strength after 28 days if requested by the Engineer. g. Provide full access for Engineer to observe concrete sampling and testing at any time. 4. Additional sampling and testing of Class UW concrete: a. Perform temperature, slump, unit weight, and air entrainment testing as previously described. Sample and test class UW concrete for these properties for every truck load of concrete. b. In addition to the testing previously listed, sample and test each truck load of concrete for the following properties in accordance with ASTM C 1611: 1) Slump flow. 2) Time to reach final spread. 3) Visual Stability Index (VSI). c. In lieu of the compressive strength testing previously described, sample as follows: 1) Cast four 5-gallon buckets below water using techniques described in this Section. 2) Permanently mark buckets with "3-day", "7-day", "28-day", and "Spare". 3) Provide specimen sets for each day of underwater concrete placement. If placement of concrete is interrupted and must be restarted, provide additional specimen sets. 4) Retrieve buckets from water cure at specified intervals and extract three cores from each bucket. Conduct compressive test in accordance with ASTM C 42. 5) Strength of underwater concrete shall be deemed acceptable if the compressive strength result from the extracted cores at the age of the specified strength is between 0.85 and 1.2 f'c with no individual strength test less than 0.75 f'c. C. Test completed liquid containment structures listed in Section 01_75_19 for watertightness. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Special inspections, special tests, and structural observations. 1. Provide as specified in Section 01_45_24. October 2016 03_30_00-37 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) C. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted submittals. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. D. Field tests: 1. Engineer may request, at any time, additional testing to confirm that materials being delivered and placed conform to the requirements of the Specifications. a. If such additional testing shows that the material do not conform to the specified requirements, the Contractor shall pay the cost of these tests. b. If such additional testing shows that the materials do conform to the specified requirements, the Engineer will pay the cost of these tests. 3.13 FIELD REPAIRS OF CONCRETE A. Remove and replace or repair non-conforming and defective work. 1. Provide repairs having strength equal to or greater than specified concrete for areas involved. B. Concrete not conforming to the specified requirements for properties of plastic concrete: Remove from the site and replace with conforming materials at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Temperature: Do not use concrete having a temperature above or below the limits specified herein. 2. Slump: Do not place concrete that does not conform to Specification requirements for slump. 3. Air entrainment: Do not use concrete that does not conform to Specification requirements for percentage of entrained air. C. Concrete not conforming to the specified requirements for compressive strength: 1. Concrete is expected to reach a higher compressive strength than that indicated as the specified compressive strength f'c in Table 03_30_00-D. 2. Strength of concrete will be considered acceptable if following conditions are satisfied. a. Averages of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results is greater than or equal to the specified compressive strength f'c. b. No individual strength test (average of 2 cylinders) falls below specified compressive strength f'c by more than 500 pounds per square inch. c. Where relationships between 7-day and 28-day compressive strength, or between 28-day and 56 day compressive strength, have been provided as part of the mix design submittals: 1) 7-day strength may be considered as an indication of 28-day strength provided effects of temperature and humidity between 7-day and 28-day are taken into account. 2) 28-day strength may be considered as indication of 56-day strength provided effects of temperature and humidity between 28 days and 56 days are taken into account. October 2016 03_30_00-38 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) 3. Whenever one, or both, of these two conditions is not satisfied, provide additional curing of affected portion followed by cores taken in accordance with ASTM C 42 and ACI 318 and comply with following requirements: a. If additional curing does not bring average of 3 cores taken in affected area to at least specified compressive strength f'c, designate such concrete in affected area as defective. b. The Engineer may require the Contractor to strengthen defective concrete by means of additional concrete, additional reinforcing steel, or replacement of defective concrete, all of the Contractor's expense. D. Concrete sections or surfaces with honeycombing and voids: 1. Provide repairs having surface appearance and finish consistent with that of the surrounding work, and acceptable to the Construction Manager. 2. Do not patch, repair, or cover defective Work without prior inspection by the Engineer. 3. Preparation of concrete for repair: a. Make no repair until Engineer has accepted methods for preparing surfaces and for making and curing repairs. b. Chip out and key-in imperfections in the Work to make them ready for repair. c. Coat bonding surfaces and edges of repair area with one of the following bonding agents as accepted by the Engineer. 1) Epoxy bonding agent as specified in Section 03_63_01; or 2) Epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent as specified in Section 03_63_02. 4. Methods of repair: a. Dry pack mortar method: 1) Use for holes having depth nearly equal to or greater than least surface dimension of hole, for cone-bolt holes, and for narrow slots cut for repair. 2) Smooth Holes: Clean and roughen by heavy sandblasting before repair. 3) Install dry-pack mortar as specified in Section 03_60_00. b. Cement mortar method: 1) Use for holes too wide to dry pack and too shallow for concrete replacement; and for comparatively shallow depressions, large or small, that extend no deeper than nearest surface reinforcement. 2) Install cement mortar as specified in Section 03_60_00. c. Concrete replacement: 1) Use when holes extend entirely through the concrete section or when holes are more than 1 square foot in area and extend halfway or more through the section. 2) Form, place, consolidate, and cure concrete of same mix as the surrounding work. E. Leaking cracks in concrete walls and slabs: 1. Repair cracks that develop in walls or slabs, and repair cracks that show any signs of leakage until all leakage is stopped. 2. Pressure inject visible cracks in the following areas, other than hairline cracks and crazing, with epoxy as specified in Section 03_64_24. a. Floors and walls of water bearing structures. October 2016 03_30_00-39 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) b. Walls and overhead slabs of passageways and occupied spaces where the opposite face of the member is exposed to weather or may be washed down and where the opposite face does not receive a separate waterproofing membrane. c. Other items not specified to receive separate waterproofing membrane including slabs over water channels, wet wells, reservoirs, and other similar surfaces. 3. Continue pressure injection of cracks as specified until structure is watertight and remains watertight for not less than 1 year after date of Substantial Completion or date of final repair, whichever occurs later in time. F. Leaking construction joints and expansion joints in concrete walls or slabs that include waterstops: 1. Repair any signs of leakage until all leakage is stopped. 2. Pressure inject visible leaks with hydrophilic polyurethane foam resin as specified in Section 03_64_25. 3. Continue pressure injection along joints lines as specified until structure is watertight and remains watertight for not less than 2 year after date of Substantial Completion or date of final repair, whichever occurs later in time. G. Walls and slabs at overhead channels that leak or sweat because of porosity or cracks too small for successful pressure injection with epoxy. 1. Seal on water or weather side by coating using surface sealant system, specified in this Section. 2. Apply as recommended by manufacturer published instructions. Where concrete continues to sweat or leak, apply additional coats of surface sealant until the sweating or leaks stop. 3. Continue application of surface sealant system as specified until structure is watertight and remains watertight for not less than 1 year after date of Substantial Completion or date of final repair, whichever occurs later in time. 3.14 ATTACHMENTS A. Attachment A: Menzel monograph for determining hot weather conditions based on temperature, relative humidity, and wind velocity. B. Attachment B: Contractor’s Concrete Placement Checklist Form. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_30_00-40 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) SECTION 03_30_00: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - ATTACHMENT A Monograph for determining hot weather conditions. Source: ACI 350R October 2016 03_30_00-41 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_30_00 (FS-100) SECTION 03_30_00: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - ATTACHMENT B. Concrete Placement Checklist Project: __________________________________ Class of Concrete Project No.: _______________________________ Test Cylinders Taken? Yes No Location of Placement _________________________________________ The Contractor certifies the above-proposed concrete placement is prepared as indicated and is in accord with the contract drawings and specifications. The Contractor requests permission to begin placement of concrete on the date of ______________ at ______________. The estimated number of yards is: ____________. The estimated duration of the placement is _______________. By: ______________________________ Contractor Released for placement by: ______________________________ Engineer Preparation Slab Contractor N/A Compaction Subgrade Filter Fabric/Drain Rock- ABC/Separator Fabric Drain Rock, Pea Gravel & Void Form Reinforcing Steel Screeds Embedded Items Contractor N/A A. Anchor Bolts B. Water Stop C. Rebar D. Electrical E. Plumbing Rough-in F. Mechanical G. HVAC Prep Wall Concrete Contractor N/A Access To Work Ladders Secured Clean up and Washed Out Reinforcing Steel Forms Contractor N/A A. Alignment & Grade B. Scaffolding C. Sleeves & Wall Castings D. Embedded Items E. Electrical F. Plumbing Rough-in G. Piping Record of Curing Conditions During Placement Start Finish Date Time Weather Temperature Comments Concrete Placement Equip. Contractor N/A A. Crane B. Buckets C. Hoppers D. Vibrators E. Elephant trunks F. Floodlights G. Pump Truck October 2016 03_35_29-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_35_29 (FS-100) SECTION 03_35_29 CONCRETE FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Concrete finishes. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 2. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 03_60_00 - Grout. 1.02 REFERENCES A. International Concrete Repair institute (ICRI): 1. Guideline No. 03732 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural concrete: 1. Concrete surfaces that will be exposed to view in the finished work. a. For purposes of this Section, includes exposed concrete surfaces that are designated to receive paint or coatings. b. Exposed concrete in open basins, channels, and similar liquid-containing structures: Surfaces shall be considered exposed to view if located above the water line as defined in this Section. B. Grade line: A reference line that separates surfaces considered to be above grade from those considered to be below grade. Located 12 inches below finished grades at the perimeter of the structure. C. Water line: A reference line that separates surfaces considered to be above the water level from those considered to be below the water level. For each water- bearing cell of a structure, located 2 feet below the normal operating water level in that cell. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock-ups: 1. Construct test panels showing finishing of formed surfaces for review by the Engineer. a. Test panels demonstrating concrete finishes for vertical surfaces: 1) Prepare test panels for F4 and F5 finishes and tie-hole repairs. 2. Construct test slabs showing finishing of un-formed surfaces for review by the Engineer. a. Test slabs demonstrating concrete finishes for horizontal surfaces: 1) Prepare test slabs for S1, S2, S4 and S5 finishes. October 2016 03_35_29-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_35_29 (FS-100) 3. Include the following elements in test panels and test slabs. a. Concrete joints: 1) Horizontal and vertical joints of the types included in the Work. b. Concrete repairs: 1) Repairs using materials and procedures proposed for the Work. 4. Prepare test panels at beginning of project for review by Engineer. 5. Panels and portions thereof accepted by the Engineer shall serve as the standard of quality and workmanship for the Work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and shipping: 1. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MIXES A. Cement mortar: 1. As specified in Section 03_60_00. B. Dry-pack mortar: 1. As specified in Section 03_60_00. C. Mortar mix for F4 finish (“F4 Mortar”): 1. Consist of 1 part cement and 1-1/2 parts of fine sand passing Number 100 screen. Mix with enough water and emulsified bonding agent to have consistency of thick cream. D. Mortar mix for F5 finish (“F5 Mortar”): 1. Consist of 1 part cement to 1-1/2 parts of sand which passes Number 16 screen. 2.02 NON-SLIP ABRASIVE A. Type: Aluminum oxide abrasive of size 8/16, having structure of hard aggregate. Homogeneous, non-glazing, rust-proof, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning compounds. B. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal: 1. Exolon Company, Tonawanda NY. 2. Abrasive Materials Incorporated, Hillsdale MI. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE FINISHING – FORMED SURFACES A. Scope: 1. Finish formed surfaces with one of the finishes specified in the following paragraphs and as indicated in the Schedule of Concrete Finishes in this Section. October 2016 03_35_29-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_35_29 (FS-100) 2. Formed surfaces typically include the following elements of the Work: walls; columns; elevated slabs and beams and their edges; and other items indicated on the Drawings or specified. B. General: 1. Provide setting and curing time from casting of concrete to removal of forms as specified in Section 03_30_00. 2. Provide curing after removal of forms as specified in Section 03_30_00. 3. Materials and mixes for finishes. a. Cement: Add white cement to mortars and grouts used for finishing if required to match color of repairs to surrounding surfaces. 4. Grinding: a. Grinding of architectural concrete is not permitted, unless demonstrated on the sample panel and accepted in advance by the Engineer. b. Where grinding of concrete surfaces is permitted: 1) Perform grinding using an iron-free wheel, such as an aluminum oxide wheel, to avoid entrapment of particles that produce rust stains. 2) At locations where plastic-protected reinforcing bar supports are used, limit grinding to a maximum depth of 1/16 inch. C. F1 finish: “Rough Form Finish”: Repair defective work. 1. Fill tile holes using dry-pack mortar. 2. After removal of any curing compounds, fill depressions 1 inch or larger in depth using. D. F2 finish: “Form Finish”: Repair defective work. 1. Remove fins. 2. Fill tie holes using dry-pack mortar. 3. After removal of any curing compounds, fill depressions 1/2 inch or larger in depth or width using cement mortar. For larger voids and depressions, use dry-pack mortar. 4. Leave surfaces with texture imparted by forms. E. F3 finish: “Smooth Form Finish”: Repair defective work. 1. Repair rough or irregular surface finishes resulting from failure of form release agent or other form conditions and provide a smooth, uniform surface appearance. 2. Remove fins: Grind offsets, projections, and rough spots smooth. 3. Fill tie holes using dry pack mortar. 4. After removal of any curing compounds, fill depressions 1/4 inch and larger in depth or width using cement mortar. For larger depressions, se dry pack mortar and top coat with cement mortar to provide uniform appearance. 5. Leave surfaces with texture that is generally smooth and uniform in appearance. F. F4 finish: “Rubbed Finish”: As specified for F3 Finish, except prepare surfaces and fill depressions 1/16 inch or larger in depth or width as follows. 1. Fill depressions. a. “Brush-off” sandblast surfaces to expose all holes near the surface of the concrete before filling depressions. October 2016 03_35_29-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_35_29 (FS-100) b. Thoroughly wet surfaces and begin filling depressions while surfaces are still damp. c. Use clean burlap, sponge rubber floats, or trowels, to rub plastic F4 mortar over the entire surface to be finished. Fill pits, holes, and depressions d. Wipe surfaces clean. Do not leave any mortar on the surface, except that within the depressions. 2. Cure: Moist cure surfaces. G. F5 finish: “Stoned Finish”: As specified for F3 Finish, and add stone finish as follows: 1. Fill depressions: a. Wet surfaces thoroughly with brush. b. Rub wetted surfaces with a hard wood float dipped in water containing 2 pounds of portland cement per gallon of water. c. Rub with surfaces until form marks and projections are removed. d. Using a brush, spread plastic grindings from the rubbing operation uniformly over the surface. Work the material in to fill pits and small voids. 2. Cure: Moist cure brushed surfaces for at least 72 hours. 3. Finish surfaces: a. After curing, obtain final finish by rubbing with a No. 50 grit carborundum stone. b. Continue rubbing until entire surface has a smooth texture and is uniform in color. 4. Cure: Continue curing for remainder of specified time. 5. Note: If surfaces have become too hard to finish as specified in the preceding paragraphs, the following alternative procedure may be used: a. Sandblast and wash related surfaces exposed to view, whether finished or not. b. While surfaces are still damp, rub surface with mortar mix for F5 finish. c. Finish by rubbing mortared surface with No. 60 grit carborundum stone. Add F5 mortar until surface is evenly filled without excess mortar. Continue stoning until surface is hard. d. Moist cure surface for 72 hours. e. After curing, make surface smooth in texture and uniform in color by rubbing with a No. 50 or No. 60 grit carborundum stone. f. Continue curing until 7-day curing period is complete. 3.02 CONCRETE FINISHING – UN-FORMED SURFACES A. Scope: 1. Finish un-formed surfaces with one of the finishes specified in the following paragraphs and as indicated in the Schedule of Concrete Finishes in this Section. 2. Un-formed surfaces typically include the following elements of the Work: top surfaces of footings; floor and roof slabs; tops of walls that do not have slabs cast above; and other items indicated on the Drawings or specified. B. General: 1. Concrete placement: a. Place concrete at a rate that allows spreading, straightedging, and darbying or bullfloating before bleed water appears. October 2016 03_35_29-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_35_29 (FS-100) b. Place, consolidate, strike-off, and level concrete to bring surfaces to required planes and lines. Eliminate high and low spots. c. Strike tops of walls and similar surfaces smooth and finish as specified to a texture consistent with that of adjacent formed surfaces. 2. Finishing personnel: a. Use qualified flatwork finishers acceptable to the Engineer. b. Unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, at least one finisher or the finishing supervisor shall hold certification as a Certified ACI Flatwork Concrete Finisher/Technician or as a Certified ACI Flatwork Technician as defined in ACI CP10, or equivalent. 3. Floating: a. Float surfaces using a hand float, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. b. If accepted by the Engineer, a bladed power float equipped with float shoes, or a power disk float may be used for floating operations. c. Tolerances for flatness specified may require re-straightening of the surface during finishing. Modify power equipment with alternate float shoes or other equipment if required to achieve these requirements. 4. Troweling: Where finishes require troweling, conform to the following requirements: a. Avoid excessive troweling. b. Use smaller trowels for successive troweling. c. Do not add dry cement or additional water to the surface during troweling. d. Finishing with a fresno trowel, or finishing to a “fresno finish” is not allowed. e. In lieu of hand steel troweling, a power machine for finishing concrete may be used if accepted by the Engineer. 1) Do not use power machine if concrete has not attained the set necessary to permit finishing without introduction of high and low spots into the concrete surface. 2) Use equipment in full compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3) Use smaller blades or higher pressure for each successive troweling. 4) Hand trowel areas of the concrete not accessible to power equipment. 5) Tolerances for flatness specified may require re-straightening of the surface during finishing. Modify power equipment with alternate shoes or other equipment if required to achieve these requirements. 5. Finishing tolerances: a. Slabs sloped to drain: Finish surfaces to adequately drain toward designated points or lines, regardless of tolerances specified. C. S1 finish: “Scratch Finish”: 1. Place, consolidate, and level concrete as specified. 2. Wait until the bleed-water sheen has disappeared, and the surface has stiffened sufficiently for floating. 3. Float to compact and seal the surface. Provide finish conforming to the “Conventional” floor flatness tolerance requirements of ACI 117 (maximum 1/2-inch gap in 10 feet), unless otherwise indicated. October 2016 03_35_29-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_35_29 (FS-100) 4. Before final set, roughen the surface with rakes. a. For sloped surfaces, rake grooves in the direction of drainage. b. Provide roughness equivalent to CSP 6 surface as designated by ICRI Guideline 03732. D. S2 finish: “Floated Finish”: 1. Place, consolidate, and level concrete as specified. 2. Wait until the bleed-water sheen has disappeared, and the surface has stiffened sufficiently for floating. 3. Float to compact and seal the surface. Provide finish conforming to the “Flat” floor flatness tolerance requirements of ACI 117 (maximum 1/4-inch gap in 10 feet), unless otherwise indicated. 4. Immediately re-float the slab to produce a uniform texture. 5. Remove laitance and leave surface clean. E. S3 finish: “Steel Trowel Finish”: 1. Place, consolidate, and level concrete as specified. 2. Apply evaporation retardant. 3. Provide S2 Floated Finish. 4. Re-straighten slabs after floating. 5. After surface moisture has disappeared, hand trowel the concrete to produce a smooth, impervious surface. 6. Provide at least 2 trowelings: a. Provide second troweling to burnish the surface. b. Continue troweling until work produces a ringing sound from the trowel. 7. Provide finish conforming to the “Flat” floor flatness tolerance requirements of ACI 117 (maximum 1/4-inch gap in 10 feet), unless otherwise indicated. F. S4 finish: “Steel Trowel Finish - Free of Trowel Marks”: 1. Finish as specified for S3 Steel Trowel Finish, except that final troweling shall remove all trowel marks from the slab surface. G. S5 finish: “Broomed Finish”: 1. Finish as specified for S3 Steel Trowel Finish, except provide 1troweling. 2. Finish surface by drawing a fine-hair broom lightly across the surface. a. Provide resulting roughness for a non-skid surface. Finishing and roughness shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer. b. Direction of brooming: 1) General: a) In same direction of and parallel to expansions joints. b) Perpendicular to primary direction of traffic. 2) For sloped slabs, parallel to the direction of drainage. 3) For round roof slabs, in the radial direction. H. S6 finish: “Non-Slip Abrasive Finish”: 1. Prepare and install abrasive as recommended by the manufacturer. a. Install abrasive at a rate of 25 pounds for each 100 square feet of surface area. 2. Place, consolidate, and level concrete as specified. 3. After concrete has hardened enough to support the weight of a person, and unless otherwise indicated by the abrasive manufacturer, apply approximately 2/3 of the abrasive material required for coverage. Apply using a shake screen October 2016 03_35_29-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_35_29 (FS-100) or other accepted method to ensure even coverage without segregation of the abrasive. 4. Finish as specified for S2 Floated Finish, except that re-floating is not required. 5. Apply remaining abrasive material at right angles to the first application and in locations necessary to provide the minimum specified thickness. 6. Immediately after the second application, re-float the surface to embed abrasive. 7. Finish as specified for S2 Steel Trowel Finish. Trowel abrasive into the surface, properly exposing material to produce a non-slip finish. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide field quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineer shall provide on-site inspections and field quality assurance for the Work of this Section. B. Field inspections: 1. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted submittals. 2. Provide record of each inspection. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. 3.05 SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE FINISHES A. Formed surfaces: See Table 03_35_29-A. B. Un-formed surfaces: See See Table 03_35_29-B. October 2016 03_35_29-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_35_29 (FS-100) Table 03_35_29-A: Concrete Finishes - Formed Surfaces Elements Location Surface exposure Finish Notes EXTERIOR SURFACES Walls Wet structure: Above grade line: Columns - Exposed to view F4 Slab edges - Covered F2 a, Below grade line: - No coating F1 - Bituminous coating F2 - Waterproofing F3 Dry structure: Above grade line: - Exposed to view F4 - Covered F2 a, Below grade line: - No coating F1 - Bituminous coating F2 - Waterproofing F3 INTERIOR SURFACES Walls Wet structure: Open basin: Columns - Above water line F4 Slab edges - Below water line F3 Covered basin - Above water line F3 - Below water line F3 Dry structure: Exposed to view F4 Covered F2 b, Overhead Wet structure: Open basin F3 c, d slabs and beams Covered basin F2 d Dry structure: Exposed F3 d Covered by ceiling F1 d Notes: a) Coverings include additional surfaces applied over the concrete, such as veneer, stucco or plaster, etc. b) Coverings include additional surfaces applied over the concrete, such as veneer, stucco, plaster, furring strips with drywall, etc. c) Applies only to overhead surfaces visible from normal pedestrian travel routes. d) At overhead slabs and beams, patch tie holes on sides of members. October 2016 03_35_29-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_35_29 (FS-100) Table 03_35_29-B: Concrete Finishes – Un-Formed Surfaces Element Location Exposure Finish Notes EXTERIOR SURFACES Footings Extensions Exposed S2 Covered by soil S2 Slabs and beams - Walking or possible Tops of treatment structures S5 (a) (b) above walking paths Stairs & landings S5 Roofs Exposed S5 Covered by roofing S2 Slabs and Unless All S3 beams - otherwise submerged noted Walls, Top of wall or All S3 One troweling Corbels corbel Sidewalks All S5 Equipment All S5 Slabs INTERIOR SURFACES Floor slabs Wet structure Exposed - Basins & channels S3 Covered - Basin bottom grout S1 - Concrete fill S1 Dry structure Exposed - Pipe galleries S4 (c) - Stairs & landings S4 - Shops & garages S4 - Equipment rooms S4 Covered - Tile on mortar bed S2 - Resilient flooring S3 - Carpet S3 Notes: (a) Includes slabs covering tanks, basins, channels and similar structures. (b) Includes tops of walls or beams that serve as walkways. (c) In galleries and pump stations with slabs subject to wetting, provide broom finish (S5) where indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_60_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_60_00 (FS-100) SECTION 03_60_00 GROUTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Non-shrink grout. 2. Non-shrink epoxy grout. 3. Cement grout. 4. Cement mortar. 5. Dry-pack mortar. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_31_19 - Project Meetings. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 3. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 4. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 5. Section 46_05_10 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (using 2-inch or [50-millimeter] cube specimens). 2. C 230 - Standard Specification for Flow Table for Use In Tests of Hydraulic Cement. 3. C 531 - Standard Test Method for Liner Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 4. C 579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical- Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. 5. C 939 - Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method). 6. C 942 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory. 7. C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink). 8. C 1181 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Creep of Chemical- Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cold weather: As defined in Section 03_30_00. B. Hot weather: As defined in Section 03_30_00. October 2016 03_60_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_60_00 (FS-100) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: 1. Non-shrink grout: Submit manufacturer's literature. 2. Non-shrink epoxy grout: Submit manufacturer's literature. 3. Cement grout: a. Mix design. b. Material submittals. 4. Cement mortar: a. Mix design. b. Material submittals. 5. Dry-pack mortar: a. Mix design. b. Material submittals. B. Test reports: 1. Non-shrink grout: Manufacturer’s test report demonstrating that the volume of non-shrink grout does not go below its initial placement volume when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1107. 2. Non-shrink epoxy grout: Manufacturer's test report demonstrating that shrinkage and expansion of non-shrink epoxy grout conforms to the requirements of this Section when tested in accordance with ASTM C 531. C. Manufacturer’s instructions: 1. Non-shrink grout: Manufacturer’s instructions for storage, conditioning, mixing, placing, finishing, and curing. 2. Non-shrink epoxy grout: Manufacturer’s instructions for storage, conditioning, mixing, placing, finishing, and curing. D. Manufacturer’s field reports: 1. Report of on-site observations and discussions during initial placement of each product, and during subsequent placements where presence of the manufacturer’s representative is required by the Contract Documents. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturers: non-shrink grout and non-shrink epoxy grout products. a. Nationally recognized manufacturer. b. Trained technical representatives available for on-site training and observations. c. For each product proposed for use, minimum 5-year history of successful installation under conditions similar to those in this Work. Submit record of experience with references and contact information if requested by the Contractor’s Engineer. B. Certifications. C. Field samples. D. Mock-ups. October 2016 03_60_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_60_00 (FS-100) E. Pre-installation meeting: 1. Schedule and conduct pre-installation meeting at least 10 days prior to batching and placing of grout. a. Provide additional meetings if necessary to discuss specific grout products or mixes, and specific placing or curing conditions. b. Notify Contractor’s Engineer and Engineer of the time and location of each meeting. 2. Required attendees: a. Contractor, including Contractor’s superintendent and key personnel for grouting operations. b. Subcontractors providing or installing grout. c. Technical representative(s) of manufacturer(s) of grout products. d. Sampling and testing personnel. e. Contractor’s Engineer. f. Engineer. g. Other persons deemed by the Contractor’s Engineer and Contractor to be critical to the quality of work under this Section. 3. Agenda: a. Review requirements of Contract Documents. b. Discuss project and product safety requirements. c. Discuss points of interface and coordination between various parties, trades, and products. d. Review grout products required and placement locations for each. 1) Delivery or site mixing procedures. 2) Procedures for placing and consolidating grout, including limits on environmental conditions and on placing time. 3) Procedures for finishing, curing, and moisture retention. 4) Procedures and protection requirements for hot and cold weather conditions. e. Requirements for inspection and testing. 4. Minutes: a. Prepare and submit minutes of each pre-installation meeting as specified in Section 01_31_19. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in their original, unopened packages or containers, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's product identification and printed instructions. B. Store materials in a cool dry place and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements. 1. Refer to manufacturer’s product information and installation instructions for physical and environmental limitations on or requirements for use of products. October 2016 03_60_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_60_00 (FS-100) 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Non-shrink grout (cement-based): 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, Shakopee, MN, Masterflow 928. b. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT, Five Star Grout. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE, CRYSTEX. d. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ, SikaGrout 328. 2. Description: Pre-proportioned and prepackaged cement-based mixture. a. Conforming to ASTM C 1107. b. Containing no metallic particles (such as aluminum powder (and no metallic aggregate (such as iron filings). c. Requiring only the addition of potable water for mixing. d. Water for pre-soaking, mixing, and curing: Potable water. 3. Consistency and characteristics: a. Free from the emergence of mixing water from within or the presence of water on its surface. b. Remaining at a minimum flowable consistency for at least 45 minutes after mixing at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit when tested in accordance with ASTM C 230. c. If at a fluid consistency, verify flowability in accordance with ASTM C 939. 4. Dimensional stability (height change): a. In accordance with ASTM C 1107, volume-adjusting Grade B or C at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Having 90 percent or greater bearing area under bases and base plates. 5. Strength: a. Minimum compressive strengths: At 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit, conforming to ASTM C 1107 for various periods from the time of placement, including 5,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C 109 as modified by ASTM C 1107. B. Non-shrink epoxy grout: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, Shakopee, MN, Masterflow 648 CP Plus. b. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT, Five Star Epoxy Grout. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., EPOGROUT 758. d. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ, Sikadur 42 Grout-Pak. 2. Description: 100 percent solids, pre-measured, pre-packaged system containing a 2-component thermosetting epoxy resin and inert aggregate. 3. Consistency and characteristics: a. Flow: Maintain a flowable consistency for at least 45 minutes at 70 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Thermal compatibility: Coefficient of thermal expansion: Not exceed 0.000018 inches per inch per degree Fahrenheit when tested in accordance with ASTM C 531, Method B. October 2016 03_60_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_60_00 (FS-100) 4. Dimensional stability (height change): a. Shrinkage or expansion: Less than 0.0006 inches/inch when tested in accordance with ASTM C 531. 5. Strength: a. Minimum compressive strength: 7,000 pounds per square inch at 24 hours, and 13,000 pounds per square inch at 7 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C 579, Method B. b. Compressive creep: Not exceed 0.0027 inches/inch when tested under a 400 pounds per square inch constant load at 140 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with ASTM C 1181. 2.02 MIXES: CEMENT-BASED A. Cement grout: 1. Mix: Same as concrete mix for class of concrete placed in construction above the cement grout, but with coarse aggregate removed and water quantity adjusted as required for flowability. a. Use water-to-cementitious materials ratio that is no more than that specified for concrete being placed above the cement grout. 2. Materials: a. Use the same materials for cement grout that are used for concrete placed in construction above. B. Cement mortar: 1. Mix: Same as concrete mix used for the surrounding construction, but with coarse aggregate removed and water quantity adjusted as required. 2. Use water-to-cementitious materials ratio that is no more than that specified for concrete being repaired. 3. Materials: a. Unless otherwise accepted by the Contractor’s Engineer, use the same materials for cement mortar that are used for surrounding concrete. b. At exposed concrete surfaces not to be painted or submerged in water: Use sufficient white cement to make color of finished patch match that of surrounding concrete. C. Dry-pack mortar: 1. Mix: Portland cement, concrete sand, and potable water. a. Proportions by weight: 1 part portland cement to 2 parts of concrete sand. b. Use only enough water so that resulting mortar will crumble to touch after being formed into ball by hand. 2. Materials: a. Portland cement: As specified in Section 03_30_00. b. Concrete sand: As specified in Section 03_30_00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect concrete surfaces to receive grout or mortar and verify that they are free of ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, paints, impregnations, and all loose material or foreign matter likely to reduce the bond or performance of grout or mortar. October 2016 03_60_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_60_00 (FS-100) B. Inspect base plated and anchors for rust, oil, or other substances likely to reduce the bond or performance of grout or mortar. C. Limit additional shrinkage of substrate after placement of grout and mortar. 1. Confirm that newly placed concrete has been cured and has attained its minimum specified compressive strength (f’c). D. Verify that surface around and placing temperature of pre-proportioned cement- based and epoxy grouts is not outside manufacturer’s recommended range. 3.02 PREPARATION A. For manufactured products, make arrangements to have manufacturer’s technical representative on site for pre-installation meetings and during initial placement of each product. B. Place grout and mortar only after alignment and elevation of structural members and equipment is correct and has been accepted by the Contractor’s Engineer. C. Surface preparation: 1. General: a. Remove grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, laitance, and other deleterious materials that may affect bond from concrete and base plates. 2. Concrete: a. Roughen concrete surfaces by heavy sandblasting, water-blasting, chipping, or other mechanical means. b. Remove loose or broken concrete. 3. Metal surfaces: Where placed against epoxy grouts, sandblast to a 2 to 3 mil peak-to-valley profile. D. Forms and head boxes for grout and mortar: 1. Construct forms for grout and mortar using materials with adequate strength to withstand pressures and placing procedures. 2. Make forms rigid and liquid tight. a. Caulk cracks and joints with sealants compatible with grout materials to be formed. b. Line forms with polyethylene, or carefully wax with 2 coats of heavy duty paste wax to ease grout release. c. When using head pressure for placement, make forms 4 to 6 inches higher than the base plate on one side. 3. For epoxy grouts, build chamfered corners and edges into the form. Cutting of edges after placement is not permitted. 4. Construct a sufficient number of head boxes to allow placement of grout without cold joints in a given pour. 5. Provide base plates with air relief holes, at least 1/8 inch in diameter, if required to avoid entrapping air. 3.03 INSTALLATION – GENERAL A. Grouting equipment bases and base plates: As specified in Section 46_05_10. October 2016 03_60_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_60_00 (FS-100) B. Grouting other base plates: 1. All base plate grouting shall take place from one side of a base plate to the other in a continuous flow to avoid trapping air. a. Maintain hydrostatic pressure against grout placement by keeping the level of the grout in the head box above the base plate. The head box should be filled to the maximum level and the grout worked down. 3.04 INSTALLATION – CEMENT-BASED GROUTS AND MORTARS A. Preparation: 1. Use cement-based grouts and mortars where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Surfaces. a. Provide “saturated surface-dry” conditions prior to placement. b. Remove all standing water before placing materials. B. Mixing, placing, and consolidating: 1. Non-shrink grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions to produce mix has flowable consistency and is suitable for placing by pouring. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum water content. 2. Site-proportioned mixes: a. Use mortar mixer with moving paddles for mixing grouts. Pre-wet the mixer and empty out excess water before beginning mixing. b. Do not use cement grout that has not been placed within 30 minutes after mixing. c. May be drypacked, flowed, or pumped into place. d. Do not overwork grouts. e. Do not re-temper grout by adding more water after initial stiffening. C. Finishing and curing: 1. Finishing: a. Cut back grout shoulders to the lower edge of base plates after grout has reached initial set. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide a 45-degree angle at shoulders. 2. Curing: a. Non-shrink grout: Cure in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b. Keep grout wet for a minimum of 7 days. Use wet burlap, a soaker hose, sun shading, ponding, and in extreme conditions, a combination of methods as required. c. Maintain grout above 40 degrees Fahrenheit until it has attained a compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch, and above 70 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 24 hours to avoid damage from subsequent freezing. 3.05 INSTALLATION – EPOXY-BASED GROUTS A. Preparation: 1. Use non-shrink epoxy grout where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Surfaces: Do not wet surfaces with water. Where recommended by the manufacturer, wet surfaces with epoxy products specified by the manufacturer. October 2016 03_60_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_60_00 (FS-100) B. Mixing, placing, and consolidating: 1. Mixing: a. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. b. Mix in complete units. Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of the mix. c. Pour the hardener into the resin and mix for at least 1 minute and until mixture is uniform in color. Pour the epoxy into a mortar mixer wheelbarrow and add the aggregate. Mix until aggregate is uniformly wetted. Over mixing will cause air entrapment in the mix. d. Keep temperature of non-shrink epoxy grout from exceeding manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Flow non-shrink epoxy grout into place using a head box. a. Perform all grouting with grout flowing from one side of the base plate to the other in a continuous flow that precludes entrapment of air. b. Position head boxes to maintain hydrostatic pressure against grout placement at all times. Keep level of grout in the box above the top of the space receiving grout. C. Finishing and curing: 1. Do not “cut back” edges of non-shrink epoxy grout to form chamfers. Build required chamfers and shapes into formwork in anticipation of grout placement. 2. Cure grouts in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. a. Do not wet cure epoxy grouts. 3. Do not allow any surface in contact with epoxy grout to fall below 50 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 48 hours after placement. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. B. Field tests and inspections: 1. Non-shrink grout: a. Test for 24-hour compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 942. 2. Non-shrink epoxy grout: a. Test for 24-hour compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 579, Method B. C. Manufacturer’s services: 1. Furnish technical representative of the manufacturer of non-shrink grout and non-shrink epoxy grout during preparation for and initial installation of each product: a. For pre-installation meeting. b. To conduct jobsite training regarding proper storage, handling, and installation of non-shrink grout and non-shrink epoxy grout for personnel who will perform the installation. Contractor’s Engineer may attend training sessions. c. During initial placement of each product. October 2016 03_60_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_60_00 (FS-100) 3.07 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special tests and inspections: As required by Section 01_45_24. B. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections. a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted submittals. 2. Records of inspections. a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Contractor’s Engineer upon request. 3.08 SCHEDULE OF USES A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, use grouts as listed in Table 03_60_00-A. Table 03_60_00-A: Typical uses for grouts and mortars. Material Use, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Non-shrink grout Grouting under equipment base plates, column based plates, beam bearing plates, and similar conditions. Non-shrink epoxy grout Grouting under large equipment base plates, or where bond between the base plate and the supporting structure is desired. Cement grout Spread over surface of construction and cold joints in concrete before placement of cast-in-place concrete above those joints. Cement mortar Shallow concrete repairs where accepted by the Contractor’s Engineer. Dry-pack mortar Filling of tie holes. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_63_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_63_01 (FS-100) SECTION 03_63_01 EPOXIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Epoxy. 2. Epoxy gel. 3. Epoxy bonding agent. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 3. Section 03_63_02 - Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Bonding Agent. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 2. D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. 3. D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance requirements: 1. Provide epoxy materials that are new and use them within shelf life limitations set forth by manufacturer. 2. Perform and conduct work of this Section in neat orderly manner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's data completely describing epoxy materials, and including test results and methods for strength in tension, flexure, compression, and bond; modulus of elasticity; coefficient of thermal expansion; and elongation. B. Quality control submittals: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Epoxy: Water-insensitive 2-part type low viscosity epoxy adhesive material containing 100 percent solids and meeting or exceeding following characteristics when tested in accordance with standards specified: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: October 2016 03_63_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_63_01 (FS-100) 1. BASF, MBT, Concresive Standard LVI. 2. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV. Physical Characteristic Test Method Required Results Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 8,000 pounds per square inch minimum at 14 days and 77 degrees Fahrenheit cure. Flexure Strength ASTM D 790 11,000 pounds per square inch minimum at 14 days and 77 degrees Fahrenheit cure. Compressive Strength ASTM D 695 16,000 pounds per square inch minimum at 24 hours and 77 degrees Fahrenheit cure. Bond Strength -- Concrete shall fail before failure of epoxy. Gel Time for 5 Mil Film -- 4 hours maximum at 77 degrees Fahrenheit. Elongation ASTM D 638 1 percent minimum at 14 days and 77 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Epoxy gel: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel. C. Epoxy bonding agent: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. BASF, MBT, Concresive Liquid LPL. 2. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL. 3. If increased tack time is required for concrete placement, epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent as specified in Section 03_63_02 may be used instead of epoxy bonding agent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and cure epoxy materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Epoxy: 1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Epoxy gel: 1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Use for vertical or overhead work, or where high viscosity epoxy is required. 3. Epoxy gel used for vertical or overhead work may be used for horizontal work. October 2016 03_63_01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_63_01 (FS-100) D. Epoxy bonding agent: 1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Bonding agent will not be required for filling form tie holes or for normal finishing and patching of similar sized small defects. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide field quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. B. Manufacturer’s services: 1. Furnish manufacturer’s representative to conduct jobsite training regarding proper storage, handling, and installation of each epoxy product for personnel who will perform the installation. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special tests and inspections: As required by Section 01_45_24. B. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted submittals. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_63_02-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_63_02 (FS-100) SECTION 03_63_02 EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01_45_24 - Special Testing and Inspections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens). 2. C 348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars. 3. C 496 - Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. C 882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used With Concrete By Slant Shear. B. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA): 1. FHWA-RD-86-193 - Highway Concrete Pavement Technology Development and Testing Volume V: Field Evaluation of SHRP C9206 Test Sites (Bridge Deck Overlays). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: 1. Not required for use product named in this section. 2. If substitute products are proposed for use, submit manufacturer’s product data demonstration equal performance to the product named. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Manufacturer as listed below. 2. Installer: Qualified personnel who have received and can document training in the installation of the products specified from manufacturer’s technical representative. B. Install materials in full compliance with all safety and weather conditions required by the manufacturer. October 2016 03_63_02-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_63_02 (FS-100) 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened containers including manufacturer’s name, labels, product identification, and batch number. B. Store all materials off the ground. Protect from rain, freezing, and excessive heat until used. C. Conditions products as specified by the manufacturer prior to installation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: 1. Do not apply material during periods of precipitation, or if such conditions appear to be imminent. 2. Do not apply materials during ambient temperature conditions that retard or accelerate open time of the material beyond those which allow proper placement and bonding of overlying concrete or repair materials. 3. Do not apply materials to surfaces with temperature or moisture conditions outside the manufacturer’s recommended range. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey, Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem. B. Substitutions: The use of other products other than those listed will be considered, providing the Contractor requests its use in writing to the Contractor’s Engineer. This request shall be accompanied by: 1. A certificate of compliance from an approved independent testing laboratory demonstrating that the proposed substitute product meets or exceeds specified performance criteria when tested in accordance with the test standards listed in this Section. 2. Documented proof that the proposed substitute product has a 5-year proven record of performance for bonding portland cement mortar/concrete to hardened portland cement mortar/concrete. Confirm record by submittal of descriptions and references for 5 successful installations that the Contractor’s Engineer can contact to investigate the proposed substitute. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive: 1. Component "A" shall be an epoxy resin/water emulsion containing suitable viscosity control agents. It shall not contain butyl glycidyl ether. 2. Component "B" shall be primarily a water solution of a polyamine. 3. Component "C" shall be a blend of selected portland cements and sands. 4. The material shall not contain asbestos. October 2016 03_63_02-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_63_02 (FS-100) 2.03 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Properties of the mixed epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive: 1. Pot life: 90 minutes at 73 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Contact time: Minimum of 6 hours at 95 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Color: Dark gray. B. Properties of the cured epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive (based on testing of material and curing at 73 degrees Fahrenheit and 45 to 55 percent relative humidity): 1. Compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 109: a. 3 day: 4,500 pounds per square-inch minimum. b. 7 days: 6,500 pounds per square-inch minimum. c. 28 days: 8,500 pounds per square-inch minimum. 2. Splitting tensile strength in accordance with ASTM C 496: a. 28 days: 600 pounds per square-inch minimum. 3. Flexural strength in accordance with ASTM C 348: a. 1,250 pounds per square-inch minimum. 4. Bond strength in accordance with ASTM C 882 for plastic concrete to hardened concrete after 14 days moist cure: a. Wet on wet, 0 hours open time: 2,800 pounds per square-inch minimum. b. 24 hours open time: 2,600 pounds per square-inch minimum. 5. The epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive shall not produce a vapor barrier. 6. Material must be proven to prevent corrosion of reinforcing steel when tested under the procedures set forth by the FHWA Program Report Number FHWA/RD86/193. Proof shall be in the form of an independent testing laboratory corrosion report showing prevention of corrosion of the reinforcing steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect surfaces near the points of application of the bonding agent to preclude spills, sloppy bonding lines, or other damage. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mix, apply, and cure in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures and limitations for product and surface conditions. B. Mixing the epoxy resin. 1. Shake contents of Component "A" and Component "B." 2. Empty entire contents of both packages into a clean, dry, mixing pail. Mix thoroughly for 30 seconds with a jiffy paddle on a low-speed drill operating at 400 to 600 revolutions per minute drill. 3. Slowly add the entire contents of Component "C" while continuing to mix for 3 minutes and until blend is uniform with no lumps. 4. Mix only that quantity that can be applied within its pot life. October 2016 03_63_02-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_63_02 (FS-100) C. Placement procedure: 1. Apply to prepared surface with stiff-bristle brush, broom, or "hopper type" spray equipment. Work slurry into the substrate and provide complete coverage of all surface irregularities. 2. Apply fresh concrete or repair mortars over the bonding agent well within its maximum recommended open time based on the ambient and substrate temperature conditions. D. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive in the manufacturer's current printed literature. 3.03 CLEANING A. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of spillovers onto adjacent areas. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. B. Manufacturer’s services: 1. Furnish manufacturer’s representative to conduct jobsite training regarding proper storage, handling, and installation of epoxy for personnel who will perform the installation. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special testing and inspections: As required by Section 01_45_24. B. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted submittals. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Contractor’s Engineer upon request. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_64_24-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_64_24 (FS-100) SECTION 03_64_24 EPOXY INJECTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Epoxy injection system. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_31_19 - Project Meetings. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 3. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 2. D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. 3. D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: 1. Submit manufacturer's data completely describing epoxy injection system materials. Include testing methods or standards and test results for strength in tension, flexure, compression and bond; flexural modulus of elasticity; coefficient of thermal expansion; and elongation. B. Manufacturer's instructions: 1. Manufacturer’s preparation and installation instructions for products to be used in the Work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: Minimum 5 years experience in application of similar products using similar application methods on projects of similar size and scope. B. Pre-installation meeting: 1. Conduct a meeting at the project site to comply with requirements of Section 01_31_19. 2. Schedule and complete meeting at least 1 week prior to beginning Work of this Section. 3. Review requirements for application including surface preparation; substrate condition and pre-treatment; minimum curing temperatures and period; weather conditions forecast for the installation period; and requirements of this Section and manufacturer’s recommendations for installation, protection, testing, inspection, and repair. October 2016 03_64_24-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_64_24 (FS-100) 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels and batch numbers legible and intact. Do not break seals on materials until ready for application. B. Store materials off the ground and protected from rain, freezing, or heat in excess of manufacturer’s recommendations until ready for use. C. Condition products as recommended by the manufacturer before use. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: 1. Ensure that temperature and moisture conditions of substrate and ambient air are within manufacturer’s recommended limits during application and curing of material. 2. Maintain temperature, humidity, and ventilation conditions recommended by the manufacturer in work areas during the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Master Builders, Inc., Concressive Standard LVI. 2. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV. B. Epoxy: 1. Use epoxy materials that are new and use them within shelf-life limitations set forth by manufacturer. 2. Water-insensitive 2-part type low viscosity epoxy adhesive material containing 100 percent solids and meeting or exceeding following characteristics when tested in accordance with standards specified: Physical Characteristic Test Method Required Results (results for product cured at approx 75 degrees Fahrenheit and 45 to 55 percent relative humidity during the period indicated.) Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 7,500 pounds per square inch at 14 days. Flexure Strength ASTM D 790 11,000 pounds per square inch at 14 days. Compressive Strength ASTM D 695 11,000 pounds per square inch at 24 hours. Bond Strength -- Concrete shall fail before failure of epoxy. Gel Time for 5 Mil Film -- 4 hours maximum. Elongation at break ASTM D 638 1 percent minimum at 14 days. October 2016 03_64_24-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_64_24 (FS-100) 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Injection pump: 1. Use positive displacement injection pump with interlock to provide in-line mixing and metering system for 2 component epoxy. 2. Use pressure hoses and injection nozzle designed to properly mix of 2 components of epoxy. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface preparation: 1. Clean area in vicinity of cracks that will be injected with epoxy. Clean cracks so they are free from dirt, laitance, and other loose matter. 2. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Surface protection: 1. Protect surfaces in and around the Work area from damage or spills. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install and cure epoxy materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Mixing: 1. Mix epoxy in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Do not use solvents to thin epoxy. C. Crack injection: 1. Apply adequate surface seal to crack or joint as required to prevent leakage of epoxy. 2. Establish injection points along cracks or joints at distances not greater than the thickness of cracked member. 3. For small amounts of epoxy, or where excessive pressure developed by injection pump might further damage structure, premixed epoxy and use hand caulking gun to inject epoxy if acceptable to the Contractor’s Engineer. 4. Crack injection sequence: a. Inject epoxy into crack at first port with sufficient pressure to advance epoxy to adjacent port. For vertical cracks, begin injection at the bottom port and work upward. b. Seal original port and shift injection to port where epoxy appears. c. Continue port-to-port injection until crack has been injected for its entire length. d. Seal ports, including adjacent locations where epoxy seepage occurs, as necessary to prevent drips or run out. e. After epoxy injection is complete, remove surface seal material and refinish concrete in area where epoxy was injected to match existing concrete. October 2016 03_64_24-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_64_24 (FS-100) 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove temporary coverings and protection from adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Remove and properly dispose of debris from the installation. Leave area in clean condition. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. B. Manufacturer’s services: 1. Furnish manufacturer’s representative to conduct jobsite training regarding proper storage, handling, and installation of epoxy for personnel who will perform the installation. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special tests and inspections: As required by Section 01_45_24. B. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted submittals. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Contractor’s Engineer upon request. END OF SECTION October 2016 03_64_25-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_64_25 (FS-100) SECTION 03_64_25 HYDROPHILIC FOAM POLYURETHANE RESIN INJECTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Hydrophilic foam polyurethane resin injection system. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittals. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D93 - Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester. 2. D2939 - Standard Test Methods for Emulsified Bitumens Used as Protective Coatings. 3. D3574 - Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials-Slab, Bonded, and Molded Urethane Foams. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's data completely describing polyurethane resin injection system materials. B. Quality control submittals: 1. Certificates of Compliance. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions. 3. Protection plan for surrounding areas and non-cementitious surfaces. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products: 1. Provide materials that are new and use them within shelf life limitations set forth by the manufacturer. B. Qualifications: 1. Installer: a. Minimum 5 years' experience in concrete repair with focus on application of similar systems and products to projects of similar size and scope. C. Pre-installation meeting: 1. At least 1 week prior to commencing work of this Section, convene a meeting at the project site to review and discuss the following: a. Surface preparation. b. Substrate conditioning and pre-treatment. c. Installation procedures. October 2016 03_64_25-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_64_25 (FS-100) d. Environmental conditions (including weather forecast) and curing requirements. e. Testing and inspection procedures. f. Protection of surrounding surfaces and equipment. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Labels shall indicate product identification, batch numbers, and shelf life. B. Store materials off the ground, away from moisture and direct sunlight, and at temperatures within manufacturer's recommended range. C. Pre-condition materials to manufacturer's recommended temperatures before using. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Take precautions to protect surfaces and equipment in the work area from damage and staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. BASF Building Systems: MasterInject 1210 IUG (formerly Concressive 1210 IUG). B. Resin: Provide polyurethane resin materials that are new and use them within shelf-life limitations set forth by manufacturer. 1. Water-insensitive 1-part type low-viscosity hydrophilic polyurethane resin adhesive material containing 100-percent solids and meeting or exceeding following characteristics when tested in accordance with standards specified: a. Uncured: Physical Characteristic Required Results Viscosity 400-600 CPS at 70 degrees Fahrenheit Flash Point greater than 220 degrees Fahrenheit Corrosiveness Non-corrosive Reaction Time 75 - 90 seconds at 80 degrees Fahrenheit Toxicity Non-toxic October 2016 03_64_25-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_64_25 (FS-100) b. Cured foam (1:1): Physical Characteristic Test Method Required Results Tensile Strength ASTM D 3574 150 - 400 pounds per square inch Elongation ASTM D 3574 400-1200 percent 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Injection pump and appurtenances: 1. Pump: Positive displacement type with interlock to provide in-line mixing and metering system for 1 component polyurethane resin. 2. Pressure hoses and injection nozzle of such design as to allow proper mixing of polyurethane resin. 3. Standby injection unit may be required. B. Resin pump: Operating pressure in excess of 2,000 pounds per square inch with a variable pressure control trigger mechanism with attached pressure gauge, on the downstream end of the material supply hose. C. Water pump: High-pressure water blaster capable of 1,000 pounds per square inch or higher pressure. D. Incidentals: To be determined by site conditions and Contractor. See Installation Bulletin 6I12 - Urethane Injection, from BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface preparation: 1. Confirm that surface temperatures and moisture conditions are within manufacturer's recommended limits. Condition surfaces to within those limits before commencing urethane injection. 2. Sweep or clean area in vicinity of cracks and joints that will be injected with polyurethane resin. 3. Clean cracks and joints so they are free from dirt, laitance, and other loose matter. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install and cure polyurethane resin materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Mixing: 1. Mix urethane in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. October 2016 03_64_25-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_64_25 (FS-100) C. Injection: 1. Apply surface seal to crack or joint to prevent escape of polyurethane resin. 2. Establish injection ports along seal at a spacing not greater than the thickness of the member. 3. Injection sequence: a. Inject polyurethane into crack or joint at first port with sufficient pressure to advance polyurethane to adjacent port. Start at lowest port along the injection line and work upward. b. Seal original port and shift injection to next adjacent port after polyurethane appears at the adjacent port. c. Continue port-to-port injection until each crack or joint has been injected for its entire length. 4. For small amounts of polyurethane, or where excessive pressures developed by the injection pump unit might damage the structure, material mixed and installed with a hand caulking gun may be used if acceptable to the Engineer. 5. Seal ports, including adjacent locations where polyurethane seepage occurs, as necessary to prevent drips and runs. 6. After injection is complete, remove surface seal material and re-finish concrete in the area where the polyurethane was injected to match surrounding concrete. Leave finished work and work area in a neat and clean condition. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Field inspections and tests: 1. Submit records of inspections and test to Engineer within 24 hours after completion. C. Manufacturer's services. 1. Pre-installation meeting. Provide manufacturer's technical representative to attend pre-installation meeting specified in Part 1, Quality Assurance. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Special inspections, special tests, and structural observation: 1. Not required. C. Field inspections: 1. Preparation. a. Review manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. 2. Required inspections: a. Observe surfaces to be injected for temperature and moisture conditions. b. Observe conditioning and preparation of urethane resin. c. Observe injection procedures for filling cracks. 3. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit to Engineer upon request. October 2016 03_64_25-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/03_64_25 (FS-100) 3.05 NON-CONFORMING WORK A. Cracks, after injection, shall show no evidence of running or seeping water. Re- inject as necessary to provide water-tight seal at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Rework surface finishes that do not match surrounding concrete to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION October 2016 04_05_17-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_17 (FS-100) SECTION 04_05_17 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Mortar and masonry grout. B. Related sections: 1. Section 04_22_00 - Concrete Masonry Units. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 2. C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 3. C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 4. C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 5. C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 6. C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 7. C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. 8. C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 9. C 1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Alkali: Sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as sodium oxide. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Mortar for masonry units: 1. Compressive strength: Minimum 1,800 pounds per square inch. 2. Water retention: Minimum 75 percent. 3. Lime: Increase in lime content may be permitted to adjust the mixture for initial rate of absorption of the masonry. 4. Color: a. For use with masonry units not receiving paints or coatings, and exposed to view in the finished Work: Provide mortar with coloring admixture. Color to be selected by Engineer to match color of masonry units selected. b. For use with masonry units covered by paints, coatings or exterior insulation and finish system, and not exposed to view in the finished Work: Coloring admixture not required for mortar. B. Masonry grout: 1. Compressive strength: Minimum to match the greater of 2,000 psi or the specified compressive strength of masonry, f’m. 2. Slump: Mixed to slump of 8 to 11 inches as determined by ASTM C 143. October 2016 04_05_17-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_17 (FS-100) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product data/test data: 1. Submit sources of cement, lime, and aggregates. 2. Cement: Submit manufacturer’s statements of conformance to material specifications indicated. Provide manufacturer’s chemical analysis and physical properties test results, along with confirmation that material conforms to requirements for low-alkali materials as specified herein. 3. Lime: Submit manufacturer’s statements of conformance to material specifications indicated. Provide manufacturer’s chemical analysis and physical properties test results. 4. Aggregates: Submit test reports on sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. B. Samples: Submit mortar color samples or color as approved on mock masonry wall. C. Design data: Submit proposed mix proportions for mortar and grout. Include available strength histories for mixes proposed. D. Quality assurance submittals: 1. Source quality control: Trial batch compression strength test results for: a. Mortar. b. Grout. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials for mortar and grout: Do not change source of materials that will affect the appearance of finished work after the work has started without prior acceptance by the Engineer. B. Pre-construction testing and confirmation of materials: 1. Trial batches: a. Have trial batches of mortar and grout prepared by testing laboratory acceptable to Engineer. b. Prepare trial batches with sufficient quantity to determine slump, workability, and consistency and to provide sufficient material for tests. 2. Mortar strength testing: a. Perform compressive strength tests on trial batches of mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780 by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Grout strength testing: a. Perform compressive strength tests of trial batches of grout in accordance with ASTM C 1019 by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. b. Before beginning construction, sample and test materials, and submit information specified in this Section to confirm that materials conform to the standards specified. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: 1. Cold weather requirements: a. In accordance with Sections 04_22_00. October 2016 04_05_17-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_17 (FS-100) 2. Hot weather requirements: a. In accordance with Sections 04_22_00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mortar: Cement-lime mortar in accordance with ASTM C 270, Maximum air content: 12 percent. B. Grout: Portland cement grout in accordance with ASTM C 476. C. Portland cement: In accordance with ASTM C 150, Type II, low alkali, containing maximum 0.6 percent total alkali. D. Hydrated lime: In accordance with ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Aggregate: 1. Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C 144. 2. Grout: a. Fine aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C 404, Size No. 2, Natural or Manufactured. b. Coarse aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C 404, Size No. 8. F. Admixtures: 1. Admixtures for grout and mortar shall be compatible with admixtures used for production of the masonry units. a. When submitting product data for admixtures, include documentation from the manufacturer of the masonry units indicating the admixtures used in the units and documenting compatibility of products. 2. Grout admixture: a. Expanding, retarding, and water-reducing admixture that produces a controlled expansion to compensate for loss of volume before grout hardens. b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Sika Corp., Sika Grout Aid, Type II. 2) Concrete Emulsions, Grout Aid GA-II. 3. Mortar coloring admixture: a. Conforming to ASTM C 979 and containing (by weight of cement) maximum 15 percent lime-proof, inorganic coloring compounds, and maximum 3 percent carbon black. b. Color: To be selected by Engineer from manufacturers’ standard color offerings. 1) Color will be selected to match that of the concrete masonry units 2) To ensure consistent color, provide all coloring admixture from a single manufacturer. 3) Deliver admixture pre-packaged for site mixing at a ratio of 1 unit of color per sack of portland cement in the mix. c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Solomon Colors, Inc. 2) Davis Colors. October 2016 04_05_17-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_17 (FS-100) 4. Mortar water repellent admixture: Provide same admixture used for integral water repellent in the concrete masonry units. a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Sika Corp., Sikaproof 85. 2) W.R. Grace, Dry Block Mortar. 3) BASF, Rheopel Plus Mortar Admixture. 5. Other admixtures: Prohibited, unless accepted by the Engineer. G. Water: Clean, clear, potable, free of oil, soluble salts, chemicals, and other deleterious substances. 2.02 MIXES A. Mortar mixes: 1. Mortar mixing: a. Mix on jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 270, to meet performance requirements. b. Add specified admixtures at the manufacturer’s recommended dosage rate. c. Mix in mechanical mixer and only in quantities needed for immediate use. Mix for minimum 3 minutes, and maximum of 5 minutes after materials have been added to mixer. 2. Measurement for ingredients for mortar shall be either by volume or weight. Measure by one of the following methods: a. Measurement by Volume: If ingredients are measured by volume, measurement of sand shall be accomplished by the use of a container of known capacity. b. Measurement by Weight: If ingredients are measured by weight, measurement of sand shall be based on the dry weight of sand of 80 pounds per cubic foot. c. Measurement by shovel count is not permitted. 3. Water shall be mixed with the dry ingredients in sufficient amount to provide a workable mixture that will adhere to the vertical surfaces of masonry units. a. Use no mortar that has been standing for more than 1 hour after being mixed. b. Whenever 90 minutes has elapsed since last batch was mixed, completely empty mixer drum of materials and wash down before placing next batch of materials. B. Grout mixes: 1. Grout mixing: a. Mix on jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 476 or in transit mixer to meet performance requirements with 8-inch to 11-inch slump. Grout shall have sufficient water added to produce pouring consistency without segregation. b. Add specified admixtures at the manufacturer’s recommended dosage rate. c. Mix for minimum of 5 minutes after ingredients are added and until uniform mix is attained. d. Use within 90 minutes after addition of mixing water. 2. Grout for hollow cell masonry units with cell dimensions exceeding 4 inches in both horizontal directions shall include coarse aggregate. October 2016 04_05_17-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_17 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install as specified in Sections 04_22_00. END OF SECTION October 2016 04_05_18-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_18 (FS-100) SECTION 04_05_18 ADHESIVE BONDING REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Bonding reinforcing bars and all thread rods in masonry using injectable, 2-component adhesive. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 3. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 4. Section 04_05_23 - Masonry Accessories. 5. Section 05_12_00 - Structural Steel. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Standard B212.15 - Carbide Tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for Carbide Tipped Masonry Drills. B. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): 1. AC58 - Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Masonry Elements. C. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. Surface Preparation Standards (SP). a. SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Evaluation Report: Report prepared by ICC-ES, or by other testing agency acceptable to the Engineer and to the Authority Having Jurisdiction, that documents testing and review of the adhesive product to confirm that it conforms to the requirements of ICC-ES AC58. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Furnish technical data for adhesives, including: 1. Independent testing laboratory results indicating allowable loads in tension and shear for masonry walls of the types included in the Work, with laod modification factors for temperature, spacing, edge distance, and other installation variables. 2. Handling and storage instructions. 3. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions (MPII). October 2016 04_05_18-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_18 (FS-100) B. Quality control submittals: 1. Special inspection: Detailed instructions for special inspection to comply with the building code specified in Section 01_41_00 and as required by the Evaluation Report for each product. 2. For each adhesive to be used, Evaluation Report confirming that the product complies with the requirements of ICC-ES AC58. 3. Installer qualifications: Submit evidence of successful completion of manufacturer's training program for each installer. C. Inspection and testing reports: 1. Inspections - Field quality control: Reports of inspections and tests. 2. Inspections - Field quality assurance: Reports of inspections and tests. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation requirements: 1. Have available at the site, and install reinforcing bars and all-thread rods in accordance with, the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 2. Installer qualifications. a. Individuals performing Work described in this Section shall demonstrate prior completion of manufacturer's training course for installation of the products used in masonry materials of the types included in the Work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and protect as follows, unless manufacturer has more stringent requirements. 1. Store adhesive components on pallets or shelving in a covered-storage area protected from weather. 2. Control temperature to maintain storage within manufacturer’s recommended temperature range. a. If products are stored at temperatures outside manufacturer’s recommended range, test components prior to use by methods acceptable to the Engineer to determine if the products still meet specified requirements. 3. Dispose of products that have passed their expiration date. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Seismic Design Category: As specified in Section 01_81_01 and as indicated on the Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Like items of materials: Use end products of one manufacturer to achieve structural compatibility and single-source responsibility. B. Adhesive shall have a current Evaluation Report documenting testing and compliance with the requirements of ICC-ES AC58. October 2016 04_05_18-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_18 (FS-100) 2.02 ADHESIVE FOR SELF-CONTAINED CARTRIDGE SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. 2-component structural adhesive, insensitive to moisture, and gray in color. 2. Cure temperature, pot life, and workability: Compatible with intended use and environmental conditions. B. Packaging: 1. Furnished in disposable, side-by-side cartridges with resin and hardener components isolated until mixing through manufacturer’s static mixing nozzle. a. Nozzle designed to thoroughly blend the components, in the proper mixing ratio, for injection from the nozzle directly into prepared hole. b. Provide nozzle extensions as required to allow full-depth insertion and filling from the bottom of the hole. 2. Container markings: Include manufacturer's name, product name, batch number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions. C. For installation in solid masonry and solid-grouted masonry (concrete or brick): 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK: HY-70 Adhesive Anchor System. b. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc., Pleasanton, CA: ET-HP Anchoring Adhesive. c. USP Structural Connectors, Burnsville, MN: CIA-GEL 7000 Masonry Epoxy Adhesive. 2.03 ALL THREAD RODS A. Materials: As specified in Section 05_12_00. 2.04 REINFORCING BARS A. As specified in Section 04_05_23. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise required for “conditions of use” in the Evaluation Report submitted, prepare and install holes, adhesive, and inserts (all thread rods or reinforcing bars) in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and this Section. 1. In the event of conflicts, the more restrictive provisions shall govern. B. Perform Work in strict compliance with the accepted MPII and the following provisions. Where the accepted MPII and the provisions conflict, the MPII shall govern. C. Install reinforcing bars and all thread rods to depth, spacing, and at locations indicated on the Drawings. 1. Do not install adhesive-bonded all-thread rods or reinforcing bars in upwardly inclined and overhead applications. October 2016 04_05_18-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_18 (FS-100) 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prior to completing manufacturer’s on-site training specified in this Section, do not: 1. Drill holes for reinforcing bars or all thread rods. 2. Mix or install adhesive in holes. B. Review manufacturer’s installation instructions and “conditions of use” stipulated in the Evaluation Report before beginning work. C. Confirm that adhesive and substrate receiving adhesive are within manufacturer’s recommended temperature range, and will remain so during the cure time for the product. 3.03 HOLE LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION A. Drilling holes: 1. Determine location of reinforcing bars or other obstructions with a non- destructive indicator device. Mark locations with on the surface of the masonry using removable construction crayon, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or other items embedded in the masonry without prior acceptance by Engineer. B. Hole drilling equipment: 1. Electric or pneumatic rotary impact type. a. Set drill to “rotation only” mode, or to “rotation plus hammer” mode in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and the requirements of the Evaluation Report. b. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches and “rotation plus hammer” mode is permitted, use lighter impact equipment to prevent micro-cracking and spalling from drilling. 2. Drill bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15. a. Hollow drill bits with flushing air systems are preferred. Air supplied to hollow drill bits shall be free of oil, water, or other contaminants that will reduce bond. C. Hole diameter: As recommend in the manufacturer’s installation instructions and the Evaluation Report. D. Hole depth: As recommended by the manufacturer’s installation instructions to provide minimum effective embedment indicated on the Drawings. E. Obstructions in drill path: 1. If an existing reinforcing bar or other obstruction is hit while drilling hole, stop drilling and fill the hole with dry-pack mortar. Relocate the hole to miss the obstruction and drill to the required depth. a. Allow dry-pack mortar to cure to strength equal to that of the surrounding masonry before resuming drilling in that area. b. Epoxy grout may be substituted for dry-pack mortar when acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Avoid drilling an excessive number of adjacent holes that would weaken the structural member and endanger the stability of the structure. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of distance between abandoned and relocated holes. October 2016 04_05_18-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_18 (FS-100) 3. When existing reinforcing steel is encountered during drilling and when acceptable to Engineer, enlarge the hole by 1/8 inch, core through the existing reinforcing steel at the larger diameter, and resume drilling at original hole diameter. 4. Bent bar reinforcing bars: Where edge distances are critical and interference with existing reinforcing steel is likely, if acceptable to Engineer, drill hole at 10-degree angle (or less) from axis of reinforcing bar or all thread rod being installed. F. Cleaning holes: 1. Insert air nozzle to bottom of hole and blow out loose dust. a. Use compressed air that is free of oil, water, or other contaminants. b. Provide minimum air pressure of 90 pounds per square inch for not less than 4 seconds. 2. Using a stiff bristle brush of diameter that provides contact around the full perimeter of the hole, vigorously brush the hole to dislodge compacted drilling dust. a. Insert brush to the bottom of the hole and withdraw using a simultaneous twisting motion. b. Repeat at least 4 times. 3. Repeat the preceding steps as required to remove drilling dust or other material that will reduce bond, and as required by the manufacturer and the Evaluation Report. 4. Leave prepared hole clean and dry. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF ADHESIVE AND INSERTS A. Clean and prepare inserts: 1. Prepare embedded length of reinforcing bars and all thread rods by cleaning to bare metal. The inserts shall be free of oil, grease, paint, dirt, mill scale, rust, or other coatings that will reduce bond. 2. Solvent-clean prepared reinforcing bars and all thread rods over their embedment length in accordance with SSPC SP-1. Provide an oil and grease- free surface for bonding of adhesive to steel. B. Fill holes with adhesive: Solid or solid-grouted masonry: 1. Starting at the bottom of the hole, fill hole with adhesive before inserting the reinforcing bar or all thread rod. 2. Fill hole without creating air voids as nozzle is withdrawn. 3. Fill hole with sufficient adhesive so that excess is extruded out of the hole when the reinforcing bar or all thread rod is inserted into the hole. 4. Where metal or plastic screens are required for use in masonry (units with hollow cells or holes, and multi-wythe brick walls), fill screen with adhesive and insert into hole in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Install reinforcing bars and all thread rods: 1. Install to depth, spacing, and locations as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Insert bars and all thread rods into hole in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Confirm that insert has reached the designated embedment in the hole and that adhesive completely surrounds the embedded portion. 3. Clean excess adhesive from the mouth of the hole. October 2016 04_05_18-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_18 (FS-100) D. Curing and loading: 1. Provide curing conditions recommended by the adhesive manufacturer for the period required to fully cure the adhesive at the actual temperature of the masonry. 2. Do not disturb or load anchors until manufacturer’s recommended cure time has elapsed. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control as specified in Section 01_40_00. B. Do not permit Work described in this Section to be performed by individuals who have not completed the specified job site training. C. Field inspections and testing: 1. Submit records of inspection and testing to Engineer in electronic format within 24 hours after completion. D. Manufacturers' services: 1. Before beginning installation, furnish adhesive manufacturer's technical representative to conduct on-site training in proper storage and handling of adhesive, drilling and cleaning of holes, and preparation and installation of reinforcing bars and all thread rods. a. Provide notice of scheduled training to Engineer and Special Inspector not less than 10 working days before training occurs. Engineer and Special Inspector may attend training sessions. 2. Submit record, signed by the manufacturer's technical representative, listing Contractor’s personnel who completed the training. Only qualified personnel who have completed manufacturer’s on-site training shall perform installations. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_40_00. B. Special inspections and tests, and structural observations: 1. Provide as specified in Section 01_45_24. 2. Frequency of inspections: a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in this Section, provide periodic special inspection as required by the Evaluation Report for the product installed. b. Provide continuous inspection for the initial installation of each type and size of adhesive anchor. Subsequent installations of the same anchor may be installed with periodic inspection as defined in subsequent paragraphs of this Section. 3. Preparation: a. Review Drawings and Specifications for the Work to be observed. b. Review adhesive manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures. c. Review Evaluation Report for "Conditions of Use" and "Special Inspection" requirements. 4. Inspection: a. Initial inspection. Provide an initial inspection by for each combination of masonry and reinforcing bar or all thread rod being installed. During initial October 2016 04_05_18-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_18 (FS-100) inspection, observe the following for compliance with installation requirements. b. Masonry construction: Type and thickness; whether fully or partially grouted; locations and types of voids and holes in units. c. Environment: Temperature and moisture conditions of masonry and work area. d. Holes: Locations, spacing, edge distances; verification of drill bit with requirements; cleaning equipment and procedures; cleanliness of hole. Before adhesive is placed, confirm that depth and preparation of holes conforms to requirements of the Contract Documents, installation recommendations of the manufacturer, and “conditions of use” specified in the Evaluation Report. e. Adhesive: Product manufacturer and name; lot number and expiration date; temperature of product at installation; installation procedures. Note initial set times observed during installation. f. Reinforcing bars and all thread rods: Material diameter and length; steel grade and/or strength; cleaning and preparation; cleanliness at insertion; minimum effective embedment provided. 5. Subsequent inspections. Subsequent installations of the same reinforcing bars or threaded rods using the same adhesive in the same masonry may be performed without the presence of the special inspector, provided that: a. There is no change in the personnel performing the installation, the type or details of the masonry receiving the inserts, or the reinforcing bars and all thread rods being used. Changes in any of these items shall require a new initial inspection. b. For ongoing installations over a period of time, the special inspector visits the site at least once per day during each day of installation to observe the work for compliance with material requirements and installation procedures. 6. Records of inspections. a. Provide a written record of each inspection using forms acceptable to the Engineer and to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. b. Submit electronic copies of inspection reports to the Engineer within 24 hours after completion. END OF SECTION October 2016 04_05_23-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_23 (FS-100) SECTION 04_05_23 MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Air and vapor barrier. 2. Adjustable wall ties. 3. Control joint filler. 4. Dovetail anchors. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Rebar Positioners. 7. Wire joint reinforcement, single wythe with eye-wire type. 8. Through-wall flashing. 9. Flashing sealant. 10. Mortar collection device. 11. Weep holes. 12. Masonry cleaner 13. Rigid insulation. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 03_20_00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Section 04_22_00 - Concrete Masonry Units. 4. Section 04_22_16 - Anchored CMU Veneer. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. A 951 - Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement. 5. C 549 - Standard Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation. 6. C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 7. D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. 8. D 2287 - Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds. October 2016 04_05_23-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_23 (FS-100) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. Reinforcement: Submit Masonry reinforcement drawings as specified in Section 03_20_00 for concrete reinforcement. Drawings shall include wall elevations and jointing as noted in Section 04_22_00 for all masonry. B. Product data: 1. Submit Manufacturer’s product data demonstrating compliance with the requirements of the Specifications, and indicating materials of fabrication, details of construction, and installation procedures for products specified. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials off ground and protect from weather. B. Protect materials from bending and distortion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Air and vapor barrier: Permeable fluid-applied air and vapor barrier, flexible over a wide temperature range, asphalt-free formulation and ABA evaluated. Provide manufacturer's standard primer, mastic and detail tape for a warrantied system. 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal: a. Hohmann & Barnard, ENVIRO-BARRIER VP. B. Adjustable wall ties: 2-piece zinc coated fabrications, minimum 3/16-inch diameter steel wire formed into hook or pin and eye pieces, with seismic clip, capable of restraining compression and tension forces from veneer. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Adjustable Wall Ties, including Seismic Hook (SH) and continuous W1.7 Veneer wire. C. Control joint filler: The key shall be of the width and shape as indicated on the Drawings. In accordance with ASTM D 2000 or ASTM D 2287. 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal: a. Hohmann & Barnard, VS Series. D. Dovetail anchor system: (Used only at concrete wall sections.) System consisting of dovetail slots cast into the concrete, dovetail anchors that tie the masonry veneer to dovetail slots, and continuous wires that are embedded in the masonry and connect to the dovetail anchors. a. Dovetail slot: 18 gauge, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, foam filled, and in 10-foot lengths. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Hohmann ad Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY, Model No. 305. 2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL, Model No. 100. b. Dovetail anchors: 23 gauge, 1 inch wide, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, and with seismic notch for October 2016 04_05_23-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_23 (FS-100) attachment to wire embedded in masonry. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Hohmann and Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY, Model No. 303SV. 2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL, Model No. 361. E. Reinforcing bars: 1. Deformed bars in accordance with ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 2. Provide reinforcing steel that is of quality specified, free from excessive rust or scale or any defects affecting its usefulness. F. Rebar positioners: 1. Z-shaped wire to bridge the cells of the block for positioning rebars in center of the block. a. Hohmann & Barnard, RB. G. Wire joint reinforcement, single Wythe type: In accordance with ASTM A 951 with ASTM A 82, 9-gauge, 3/16-inch wire side rails and 9-gauge cross ties, sized to suit application, and galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B (minimum 1.5 ounces zinc per square foot). 1. Manufacturers: Following or equal: a. Hohmann & Barnard, 270 LOX-ALL Adjustable Reinforcement Ladder Type Wall Reinforcement (9 gauge standard). H. Through-wall flashing: 1. Self-adhering stainless steel fabric flashing product. The adhesive is factory laminated, material is Class A consisting of a polymeric fabric with a single sheet of 304 stainless steel bonded to one side. Conforming to ASTM D3273. a. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Hohmann & Barnard, Mighty-Flash SA. 2. Drip edge: Factory-formed hemmed edge for uniform appearance. Depth as recommended by manufacturer. a. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Hohmann & Barnard, DP. 3. Termination Bars: For securing top edge of flashing to wall, stainless steel finish. a. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Hohmann & Barnard, T1. 4. Water based primer for self-adhesive membranes: Water-based primer, which imparts an aggressive, high-tack finish on treated surface. a. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Hohmann & Barnard, Primer-SA. 5. Corners and end dams: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel placed underneath flashing. a. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Hohmann & Barnard, ST/Steel. I. Flashing sealant: Non-staining, butyl-rubber compound, suitable for in-service temperature of -40 degrees Fahrenheit to 180 degrees Fahrenheit and compatible with the specified materials. October 2016 04_05_23-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_23 (FS-100) J. Mortar Collection Device: High-density polyethylene (HDPE) strands woven into a 90 percent open mesh, compressible and no fasteners required. 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Mortar Trap. K. Weep holes: 3/8 inch by 3-3/8 inch by 2-1/2 inch high honeycomb design to fit in head joint of veneer units to promote drainage of the air space cavity. 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal: a. Hohmann & Barnard, QV Quadro-Vent. 2. Weep holes shall be manufactured of ultraviolet-light resistant polypropylene cellular 3/8 inch thick. 3. Color shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard colors to most closely match the selected mortar color. 4. Size shall match the depth and height of the veneer units selected. L. Masonry cleaner: As recommended by manufacturer and in compliance with Section 07190. M. Rigid insulation: Rigid, polystyrene foam board insulation: 1. Insulation shall comply with ASTM C 578. 2. Minimum insulation R rating of 13.3 for required thickness. 3. Minimum insulation thickness shall be nominal 2 inches. 4. Insulation, in 16-inch widths, shall be friction fit horizontally between joint reinforcement, and held in place by vertical leg of pintle. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Reinforcing bars: 1. Cut and bend bars in accordance with building code as specified in Section 01410. 2. Bend bars cold. 3. Provide bars free from defects and kinks and from bends not indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: 1. Reinforcing bars: a. Verify that bars are new stock free from rust scale, loose mill scale, excessive rust, dirt, oil, and other coatings which adversely affect bonding capacity when placed in the work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Reinforcing bars: 1. Thin coating of red rust resulting from short exposure will not be considered objectionable. Thoroughly clean any bars that have rust scale, loose mill scale, or thick rust coat. October 2016 04_05_23-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_05_23 (FS-100) 2. Remove concrete or other deleterious coatings from dowels and other projecting bars by wire brushing or sandblasting before bars are embedded in subsequent masonry placement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install products as specified in Sections 04_22_00 and indicated on the Drawings. B. Reinforcing bars: 1. No field bending of bars will be allowed. 2. Welding: a. Weld reinforcing bars where indicated on the Drawings or acceptable to the Engineer. b. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4. c. Submit welding procedures. d. Do not tack weld reinforcing bars. C. Placing reinforcing bars: 1. Accurately place bars and adequately secure them in position. 2. Overlap bars at splices as indicated on the Drawings or specified. 3. If not indicated on the Drawings, lap splice bars in masonry in accordance with the building code as specified in Section 01_41_00. END OF SECTION October 2016 04_22_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) SECTION 04_22_00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Construction of concrete masonry walls. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_31_19 - Project Meetings. 2. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 4. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 5. Section 04_05_23 - Masonry Accessories. 6. Section 04_05_17 - Mortar and Masonry Grout. 7. Section 05_12_00 - Structural Steel. 8. Section 07_90_00 - Joint Sealers. 9. Section 09_96_01 - High Performance Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 90 - Standard Specification for Load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 2. C 140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. 3. C 1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cold weather: Conditions when the ambient air temperature falls below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Custom level of quality: Top rank, nearly free of chips, cracks, or other imperfections detracting from appearance when discernible and identified from distance of 15 feet under diffused lighting. 1. Obtainable only by skilled journeymen. 2. Five percent of installed units may contain slight cracks or small chips, not larger than 1/2 inch in any direction. October 2016 04_22_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) C. Standard level of quality: High quality, but conventional, nearly free of chips, cracks or other imperfections detracting from appearance when discernible and identified from distance of 20 feet under diffused lighting. 1. When level of quality is not specified, Standard Level of Quality shall be assumed. 2. Ten percent of installed units may contain slight cracks or small chips, not larger than 3/4 inch in any direction. D. Economy level of quality: Low quality with slight mismatching of textures and colors on exposed surfaces, but with no reduction in structural integrity leading to cracking, leaking, collapse, or other failure of basic structural nature. Where units are used in exposed wall construction, faces that are exposed shall not show chips, cracks, or other imperfections when viewed from distance of 25 feet under diffused lighting. 1. Ten percent of installed units may contain slight cracks or small chips, not larger than 1 inch in any direction. E. Hot weather: Conditions when the ambient air temperature exceeds either of the following: 100 degrees Fahrenheit; or 90 degrees Fahrenheit with a wind velocity greater than 8 miles per hour. F. Mortar smears: Mortar paste smeared across the permanent masonry construction during construction and absorbed into the masonry pores. G. Mortar splash: Dropped mortar, splashed onto the permanent masonry construction at the base of the wall or off the scaffolding. H. Mortar tag: Excess mortar between masonry units worked out of the joints during tooling or striking. I. Mortar stains: Mortar paste left after mortar tags are removed. J. Specified compressive strength of masonry, f’m: Minimum compressive strength required by the Contract Documents, and on which the project design is based. K. Wythe: Each continuous, vertical section of a wall, one masonry unit in thickness. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Compressive strength requirements: 1. Compressive strength of masonry shall equal or exceed the specified compressive strength of masonry, f’m, as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Compressive strength of the system of concrete masonry units, mortar, and grout will be determined in accordance with the Prism Test Method as specified under Quality Assurance. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of masonry unit included in the Work. 2. Submit manufacturers’ product data for proposed cleaning agent. October 2016 04_22_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) B. Shop drawings: Elevations of each wall indicating type and layout of units, type of mortar joints, bond pattern, reinforcing steel, connecting dowels, joint reinforcement, grouted cells, and control joints. 1. Shop drawings shall clearly show placement of reinforcing bars in the vertical and horizontal cells of masonry walls at the modular spacing of the masonry units and at the reinforcement spacing indicated on the Drawings. 2. Coordinate reinforcing details with shop drawings for reinforcing in concrete below the masonry walls indicated. Show dowels from concrete to masonry on concrete reinforcing shop drawings and at correct locations spacing for alignment with vertical cells of masonry units. 3. Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale. C. Samples: Include samples of stretcher units in sufficient quantity to illustrate color range. D. Test reports: 1. For masonry units: a. Compressive strength. b. Linear shrinkage. c. Moisture content as a percentage of total absorption. d. Total absorption. e. Unit weight. E. Manufacturer’s instructions: Submit written recommendations from the manufacturer of each masonry unit describing the cleaning procedures and cleaning agents appropriate for those units. F. Quality assurance submittals: 1. Submit a record of the mason’s evidence of qualifications. 2. Submit a record of the masonry cleaner’s evidence of qualifications. 3. Prism test reports. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Mason qualifications: a. The mason shall hold an appropriate contractor’s license in the state where the work will be constructed. b. The mason shall have not less than 5 years experience and shall have completed a minimum of 25 projects and at least 5 of which included the type of masonry units specified for this work. c. The mason shall have successfully completed the Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute’s masonry certification program and be designated as an RMMI “Certified Masonry Contractor.” 2. Masonry cleaner qualifications: a. The masonry cleaner shall have not less than 5 years experience and shall have completed a minimum of 25 projects and at least 5 of which included the type of masonry units specified for this work. B. Mock-up: 1. Prior to starting construction of masonry, Contractor shall design and construct mock-up panel demonstrating construction of masonry included in the Work. October 2016 04_22_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) 2. Mock-up panel is intended for use as the project standard of workmanship, construction, quality, appearance, and material selection. 3. Use accepted materials, containing each different kind and color of concrete masonry units and each different kind and color of mortar to illustrate wall design. 4. The mock-up shall be constructed by the mason who will be performing the work. 5. The mock-up shall be cleaned by the masonry cleaner and with the exact equipment and techniques proposed for the actual Work. 6. After acceptance by the Contractor’s Engineer, the Engineer, and the Owner, mock-up will become the standard of comparison for remainder of masonry work. The mock-up may be accepted with exceptions for details or conditions that will not be accepted in the final construction. In such cases, those areas of the mock-up not accepted will be clearly identified by the Engineer. 7. When not accepted by the Contractor’s Engineer, the Engineer and the Owner, construct another mock-up. 8. Upon completion of Project, dispose of mock-ups in legal manner at offsite location. C. Pre-installation meeting: 1. Schedule and conduct pre-installation conference at least 10 days prior to construction of mock-up panel. Re-convene conferees at least 10 days prior to masonry production work if requested by the Engineer. a. Provide additional conferences if necessary to discuss specific masonry submittals, materials, and construction conditions. b. Notify Contractor’s Engineer and Engineer of location and time of each conference. 2. Required attendees: a. Contractor including Contractor’s superintendent and key personnel. b. Subcontractors installing masonry. c. Subcontractors cleaning masonry. d. Sampling, testing, and inspecting personnel. e. Contractor’s Engineer. f. Engineer. g. Other persons deemed by the Contractor’s Engineer and Contractor to be critical to the quality and efficiency of the Work. 3. Agenda: a. Review of requirements of Drawings and Specifications. b. Project and product safety requirements. c. Discussion of points of interface and coordination between various trades or products used in the Work. d. Contractor’s schedule for masonry work. e. Submittals. f. Installation methods, techniques, and equipment and impacts to partially constructed work. g. Grouting methods, techniques, and equipment. h. Embedded items, blockouts, and penetrations. i. Procedures for protection for hot and cold weather conditions. j. Other Specification requirements requiring coordination between parties to the Work. 4. Prepare and submit minutes of the pre-installation conference as specified in Section 01_31_19. October 2016 04_22_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) D. Pre-construction testing and confirmation of materials and assemblies: 1. Before beginning construction, sample and test materials, and submit information specified in this Section to confirm that materials conform to the standards specified. 2. Confirmation of specified compressive strength of masonry (f’m) - Prism Test Method: a. After masonry unit, grout, and mortar submittals have been approved, masonry prisms shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ASTM C 1314. b. Masonry prisms shall meet or exceed the specified compressive strength of masonry, f’m. c. If the masonry prisms fail to meet the specified f’m strength, the Contractor shall adjust the masonry unit, grout, or mortar components of the masonry and resubmit, as necessary, to achieve the specified f’m strength. d. The masonry unit, grout, and mortar components of the masonry assemblage are not considered accepted until the masonry prisms have been demonstrated to have achieved the specified f’m strength. 3. Submit data for mortar as specified in Section 04_05_17. 4. Submit data for grout as specified in Section 04_05_17. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle concrete masonry units as required to prevent discoloration, chipping, and breakage. B. Store masonry units off the ground in a dry location, covered and protected from absorbing moisture. Locate storage piles, stacks, and bins to protect materials from heavy traffic. If the masonry units are delivered in shrink-wrapped packaging and condensation develops, remove the shrink-wrap packaging. C. Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise defective units from jobsite upon discovery. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conform with local regulatory requirements as specified in Section 01_41_00. B. Cold weather requirements: 1. Implement cold weather procedures when air temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. a. Begin preparations for cold weather when: 1) Ambient air temperature is 45 degrees Fahrenheit and falling. 2) Ambient temperature is forecast to drop below 40 degrees Fahrenheit during the next 72 hours. 2. Requirements: a. Do not lay masonry units whose temperature is below 20 degrees Fahrenheit, or which have frozen moisture, visible ice, or snow on any surface. b. Remove visible ice and snow from the laying surfaces of foundations or masonry that will receive new construction. Where temperature of the laying surface is below freezing, heat surfaces to a temperature above freezing using methods that will not damage the surface. October 2016 04_22_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) c. For ambient air temperatures between 40 degrees Fahrenheit and 32 degrees Fahrenheit: 1) Mortar: Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees Fahrenheit and 120 degrees Fahrenheit at the time of mixing. 2) Grout: Heating sand or mixing water if the temperature of any constituent is below 32 degrees Fahrenheit. 3) Protection and curing: Cover masonry with a weather resistive membrane for at least 24 hours after laying. d. For ambient air temperatures between 32 degrees Fahrenheit and 25 degrees Fahrenheit: 1) Mortar: a) Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees Fahrenheit and 120 degrees Fahrenheit at the time of mixing. b) Maintain mortar temperature above freezing until used in masonry. 2) Grout: a) Heat aggregates and mixing water to produce grout temperature between 70 degrees Fahrenheit and 120 degrees Fahrenheit at the time of mixing. b) Maintain grout temperature above 70 degrees Fahrenheit until and during placement in masonry. 3) Protection and curing: Cover masonry with a weather resistive membrane for at least 24 hours after laying. e. For ambient air temperatures between 25 degrees Fahrenheit and 20 degrees Fahrenheit: 1) Comply with the requirements for air temperatures between 32 degrees Fahrenheit and 25 degrees Fahrenheit and add the following. 2) Construction: a) When wind velocity exceeds 15 mph: Provide wind breaks or enclosures during laying. b) Heat surfaces abutting new masonry units to at least 40 degrees Fahrenheit before units are placed. c) Heat masonry assemblies to at least 40 degrees Fahrenheit before grouting. 3) Protection and curing: a) Cover newly constructed masonry with weather-resistive insulating blankets for at least 24 hours after placement of units and at least 48 hours after grouting. f. For ambient air temperatures below 25 degrees Fahrenheit: 1) Comply with the requirements for air temperatures between 25 degrees Fahrenheit and 20 degrees Fahrenheit and add the following. 2) Construction: a) Surround masonry with an enclosure and provide auxiliary heat to maintain ambient air temperature above 32 degrees Fahrenheit within the enclosure during laying. October 2016 04_22_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) 3) Protection and curing: a) Cover newly constructed masonry with weather-resistive insulating blankets for at least 24 hours after placement of units and at least 48 hours after grouting. b) Maintain temperature of newly constructed masonry above 32 degrees Fahrenheit for at least 24 hours after placement of units and at least 48 hours after grouting. Use heated enclosures, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps, or other methods acceptable to the Contractor’s Engineer. C. Hot weather requirements: 1. Implement hot weather procedures whenever either of the following conditions exists: a. Ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees Fahrenheit, or b. Ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit and wind velocity is greater than 8 miles per hour. c. Begin preparations for hot weather when: 1) Ambient air temperature is 95 degrees Fahrenheit and rising, 2) Ambient air temperature is forecast to rise above 90 degrees Fahrenheit during the next 72 hours. 2. Requirements: a. For ambient air temperatures between 100 degrees Fahrenheit and 115 degrees Fahrenheit or ambient air temperature between 90 degrees Fahrenheit and 105 degrees Fahrenheit with a wind speed exceeding 8 mph: 1) Maintain sand piles in a loose, damp condition. 2) Maintain conditions necessary to ensure production of mortar having temperature below 120 degrees Fahrenheit. 3) Flush mixing equipment, containers for transporting mortar, and mortar boards with cool water before they are brought into contact with mortar or mortar constituents. 4) Fog spray newly constructed masonry until damp. Fog spray shall be re-applied at least 3 times per day until masonry is at least 3 days old. b. For ambient air temperatures above 115 degrees Fahrenheit or ambient air temperature above 105 degrees Fahrenheit with a wind speed exceeding 8 mph, provide the previous requirements as well as the following additional: 1) Provide shading of materials and mixing equipment. 2) Use cooled mixing water for mortar and grout. Ice may be used in the mixing water prior to mixing with other constituents. Ice may not remain in the mixing water at the time of mixing with remaining mortar or grout constituents. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Order concrete masonry units well before start of installation to ensure adequate time for manufacturing and minimum 28 days for curing and drying before start of installation. Protect from weather after curing period to avoid moisture increase. October 2016 04_22_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Concrete masonry units: 1. Furnish units in accordance with ASTM C 90. 2. Maximum unit density: 110 pcf. a. Lightweight aggregate, if used in the units, shall be limited as follows: 1) Pumice content: Not more than 20 percent of solid volume. 3. Minimum net area compressive strength of units: 1,900 pounds per square inch. 4. Nominal size: 8 inches wide by 8 inches high by 16 inches long; 12 inches wide by 8 inches high by 16 inches long, as indicated on the Drawings or other sizes as needed to minimize cutting. 5. Color: Integral, selected from manufacturer’s complete line of color selection. 6. Water repellent: Integral water repellent admixture. 7. Surface texture: Standard - Smooth and fine textured with tight, well compacted concrete. 8. Special sizes and shapes: a. As required for window and door openings, bond beams, piers, lintels, control joints, and other special applications to minimize cutting. b. All exposed, vertical corners shall be bullnosed. 9. Provide Standard Level of Quality. B. Mortar and grout: As specified in Section 04_05_17. C. Anchor bolts: As specified in Section 05_12_00. D. Steel reinforcement: As specified in Section 04_05_23. E. Wire joint reinforcement: As specified in Section 04_05_23. F. Control joint filler: As specified in Section 04_05_23. G. Through-wall flashing: As specified in Section 04_05_23. H. Loose fill insulation: As specified in Section 04_05_23. I. Masonry cleaning agent: Compatible with concrete masonry and as recommended by block manufacturer. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Submit the following test data to confirm properties of the materials to be provided. 1. Concrete masonry units: Sample and test units in accordance with ASTM C 140 for net area compressive strength; absorption and density; average dimensions; minimum and equivalent thickness; and moisture content. October 2016 04_22_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Confirm that reinforcing dowels from foundations or slabs to masonry are positioned and have lap splice projections as required by the Drawings. 1. If dowels are not in conformance with requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, notify Contractor’s Engineer and obtain written directions for required modifications before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protect adjacent construction with appropriate means from mortar droppings and other effects of laying of concrete masonry units. B. Surface preparation: 1. Thoroughly clean foundations of laitance, grease, oil, mud, dirt, mortar droppings, and other matter that will reduce bond. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Forms and shores: 1. Where required, construct forms to the shapes indicated on the Drawings: a. Construct forms sufficiently rigid to prevent deflection which may result in cracking or other damage to supported masonry and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. b. Do not remove supporting forms or shores until the supported masonry has acquired sufficient strength to support safely its weight and any construction loads to which it may be subjected. 1) Wait at least 24 hours after grouting masonry columns or walls before applying uniform loads. 2) Wait at least 72 hours before applying concentrated loads. B. Concrete masonry unit construction: 1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 unless more restrictive requirements are contained herein. 2. Provide Standard Level of Quality unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 3. Lay concrete masonry units dry. Do not wet concrete masonry units before laying. 4. When possible, use full units of the proper size in lieu of cut units. Cut units as required to form chases, openings, for anchorage, and for other appurtenances. a. Cut and fit units with power-driven carborundum or diamond disc blade saw. b. Position cut units so that exposed faces and edges are unaltered manufactured surfaces. 5. Place clean units while mortar is soft and plastic. 6. Lay units in uniform and true courses, level, plumb, and without projections or offset of adjacent units. Keep bond pattern plumb throughout. a. Lay units to preserve unobstructed vertical continuity of cells to be filled with grout or insulation. October 2016 04_22_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) b. Align vertical cells to be filled with grout to maintain clear, unobstructed continuous vertical cell measuring not less than 2 by 3 inches. c. Remove mortar, mortar droppings, debris, and other obstructions and materials from inside of cell walls. 7. When positions of units shift after mortar has stiffened, when bond is broken, or when cracks are formed in mortar, remove units and re-lay in new mortar. 8. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond pattern, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 9. Build in required items, such as anchors, flashings, sleeves, frames, structural steel, lintels, anchor bolts, and metal fabrications, as required for complete installation. 10. Remove mortar tags and smears daily with a non-metallic tool. Mortar tags and smears shall be removed after they initially set, but shall not be permitted to remain on the surface for more than 24 hours. 11. Where practical, protect completed work from mortar splash by placing thin plastic sheeting around the base of walls. Place sand, straw, sawdust or other similar material on the floor around the base of walls to protect floors and walls. 12. Turn scaffold planks over at the end of the workday to avoid mortar splashes from wet weather. Cover tops of walls at the end of the workday and other work stoppages to prevent entry of water into the partially completed work. C. Mortar joints: 1. Provide straight, clean joints of uniform thickness and with smooth finish. Unless otherwise shown or specified, head and bed joints shall be 3/8 inch thick. 2. Bed joints: a. Hollow units: 1) Bed joints: Bed joints of a starting course placed over foundations and slabs shall be not less than 1/4 inch or more than 3/4 inch thick. 2) Solidly fill face shell joints from outside face of units to inside face of cells. 3) Solidly fill web joints at the following locations: in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters; in the starting course over foundations and slabs; where adjacent cavities will be grouted; where necessary to confine grout or loose-fill insulation, and at other locations indicated. b. Open end units with beveled ends: Head joints need not be mortared. Beveled ends shall form a grout key that permits grout within 5/8 inch of the face of the unit. Tightly butt units to prevent grout leakage. 3. Head joints: Form by buttering the specified area on the vertical end of the unit, and shoving mortared end tight against the adjoining masonry unit so that mortar bonds to both units. Double butter joints if necessary to ensure filling of the joint as specified in the following paragraphs. a. Hollow units: Butter vertical head joints for thickness equal to face shell thickness of units (full head joints). b. Solid units: Butter vertical head joints for thickness covering at least 85 percent of the head joint area. 4. At vertical cells receiving grout, remove mortar protrusions that extend more than 1/2 inch into the cell. October 2016 04_22_00-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) 5. Tooled joints: Tool joints when mortar is “thumbprint hard”. a. Exposed joints – exterior application: Tool to form raked profile for horizontal joints. Strike joints flush for vertical joints unless otherwise specified. b. Exposed joints – interior application: Tool with a round jointer to form concave profile. c. Concealed joints: Strike joints flush. 6. After joints are tooled, provide initial cleaning by gently brushing the wall to sweep away crumbles of mortar from the edges of joints. D. Cleanouts: 1. Provide cleanouts at bottom course of each reinforced cell where height of grout pour will exceed 5 feet. 2. In solid grouted masonry, space cleanouts maximum 32 inches on center horizontally. 3. Construct cleanouts so that space to be grouted can be cleaned and inspected, and with an opening of sufficient size to permit removal of debris. Minimum size of opening shall not be less than 3 inches in any direction. 4. After cleaning and inspection, close cleanouts and brace closures to resist grout pressure. E. Bond beams: 1. Install horizontal bond beams and reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Place horizontal reinforcement and solidly grout bond beam units in place. 3. Starter course of masonry at each wall shall be a bond beam as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Provide wire mesh at openings in bottom of bond beams to support grout where walls below are not grouted solid. F. Wire joint reinforcement: 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Lap splice longitudinal wire joint reinforcement minimum 75 wire diameters. 3. Place longitudinal wires in approximate centers of mortar beds with minimum 5/8-inch mortar cover on exposed faces. 4. Provide intersecting masonry walls with prefabricated wire joint reinforcement tees. 5. Rake intersecting joints 1/2 inch and caulk joints. G. Reinforcement and grouting: 1. Hold vertical reinforcing bars in position at top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters. Use steel wire bar positioners to position bars. 2. Tie reinforcing bars to dowels with wire ties. 3. Tolerances on placement of reinforcement: a. Provide clear distances between reinforcing bars in grouted cells and any face of masonry unit as shown on the Drawings, but not less than 1/4 inch for fine grout or 1/2 inch for coarse grout. b. When distance from the centerline of reinforcement to any adjacent outside face of the masonry is 8 inches or less: ± 1 inch. c. For vertical reinforcement: ± 2 inches from the designated locations along the length of the wall. 4. When it is necessary to move bars more than one bar diameter, or a distance exceeding the tolerance stated in order to avoid interference with other October 2016 04_22_00-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) reinforcing steel or embedded items, obtain Contractor’s Engineer’s acceptance of proposed modifications before proceeding with construction. Obtain acceptance of reinforcement placement before grouting. 5. Provide fully grouted or partially grouted masonry walls as indicated on the Drawings. a. Where walls are designated to be fully grouted, fill all spaces and cells solidly with grout. b. Where walls are designated to be partially grouted, fill only spaces and cells containing reinforcing bars solidly with grout. c. Place grout so as to completely fill the grout spaces without segregation of the aggregates. d. Place grout to final position within 90 minutes after mixing water is added using grout pump, concrete hopper or hand bucket. 6. Pumped grout: a. Do not pump grout through aluminum hoses. b. Operate pumps to produce a continuous stream of grout without air pockets. c. Upon completion of each days pumping, eject grout from pipeline without contamination or segregation of the grout. d. Remove waste materials, debris, and all flushing water outside the masonry work. 7. Low-lift grouting: a. Hollow unit masonry to be grouted by the low lift method shall be constructed and grouted in lifts not exceeding 4 feet. 8. High-lift grouting: a. Hollow unit masonry shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before grouting. b. Grout shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 6 feet in depth. c. Each lift shall be allowed to set for 10 minutes after initial consolidation of grout before successive lift is placed. d. The full height of each section of wall shall be grouted in one day. 9. Grout in cells shall have full contact with surface of concrete footings. 10. When grouting stops for one hour or longer, form horizontal construction joints by stopping grout placement 1-1/2 inches below top of uppermost unit containing grout. 11. After placement, consolidate grout using mechanical immersion vibrators designed for consolidating grout. a. Reconsolidate grout after initial absorption of water by masonry units. Do not insert vibrators into lower grout placements that are in a semi- solidified state. b. Maintain at least 1 spare vibrator, at the site at all times. c. Apply vibrators at uniformly spaced points not further apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. d. Limit duration of vibration to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation. 12. Remove grout spills from finished masonry immediately by hand washing with a bucket and brush. H. Control joints: 1. Provide in masonry walls at locations indicated on the Drawings, or within 10 feet of corners and at not more than 24-foot spacing along walls if joint spacing is not indicated. October 2016 04_22_00-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) 2. Make full height and continuous in appearance. a. At exterior walls, run joints from foundation through top of parapet. 3. Run bond beams and bond beam reinforcing bars continuously through control joints. 4. Cut horizontal joint reinforcing at control joints. 5. Insert control joint filler in joints as wall is constructed. 6. Apply sealant as specified in Section 07_90_00. I. Openings and lintels: 1. Place horizontal reinforcement in fully grouted bond beam units. 2. Use lintel block units (solid bottom units) where underside of lintel will be exposed. 3. Provide minimum of 8-inch bearing at each end of lintel. 4. Embed reinforcing bars minimum 24 inches or 48 bar diameters, whichever is longer, into wall past edges of openings or as indicated on the Drawings: a. At corners, provide 90-degree bend with equivalent total embedment. J. Steel door frames: 1. Anchor and fully grout jambs and head of steel door frames connected to concrete unit masonry. 2. Fill frames with grout as each 2 feet of concrete unit masonry is laid. K. Bearing plates: 1. Provide minimum of 12 inches of grouted concrete unit masonry below steel bearing plates and beams bearing on masonry walls. L. Anchor bolts: 1. Hold anchor bolts in place with template during grouting to assure precise alignment. 2. Do not cut, ream, or otherwise oversize holes in members being anchored to masonry. Where misalignment occurs between anchor bolts and attachments, contact Contractor’s Engineer for resolution before proceeding. 3. In partially grouted walls, provide minimum 6-inch wide radius of solid grouted masonry entirely around anchor bolts and other attachment devices. M. Enclosures: 1. Where concrete masonry units enclose conduit, pipes, stacks, ducts, and similar items, construct chases, cavities, and similar spaces as required, whether or not such spaces are indicated on the Drawings. 2. Point openings around flush mounted electrical outlet boxes with mortar, including flush joints above boxes. 3. Do not embed aluminum items in masonry, grout, or mortar unless items have been coated to prevent chemical reaction between aluminum and cement, or electrolytic action between aluminum and steel. a. Coat with alkali-resistant bitumastic as specified in Section 09_96_01. 4. Do not cover enclosures or embeds until inspected and, when appropriate, tested. N. Other embedded items: 1. Build in wall plugs, accessories, flashings, pipe sleeves, and other items required to be built-in as the masonry work progresses. October 2016 04_22_00-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) O. Patching: 1. Patch exposed concrete masonry units at completion of the Work and in such manner that patching will be indistinguishable from similar surroundings and adjoining construction. P. Curing: 1. Cold weather: Place and protect masonry in accordance with Project Conditions, Cold Weather Requirements specified herein. 2. Hot weather: Place and protect masonry in accordance with Project Conditions, Hot Weather Requirements specified herein. Q. Loose fill insulation: 1. Fill concrete masonry unit cells of building exterior walls that are not to be filled with reinforcing and grout, with loose fill insulation. 2. Place in lifts of 4 feet maximum when filling concrete masonry unit cells. 3. Do not lay units more than 4 feet vertically ahead of units filled with loose fill insulation. 4. Fill wall sections under doors and windows before sill blocks are placed. 5. Ensure that no insulation gets into cells that are to be filled with grout. 6. At weep holes in masonry, cover end of weep inside the masonry units with copper or fiberglass screen to prevent plugging. 7. Keep insulation dry. Provide cavity caps or other suitable means to protect insulation from wetting and weather. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION A. Tolerances: Lay masonry plumb, true to line, and with courses level. Keep bond pattern plumb throughout. Lay masonry within the following tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and in the flutes and surfaces of fluted or split faced blocks: a. In adjacent masonry units: 1/8 inch. b. In 10 feet: 1/4 inch. c. In any story or 20 feet maximum: 3/8 inch. d. In 40 feet or more: 1/2 inch. 2. Maximum variations from the plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines: a. In any story or 20 feet maximum: 1/4 inch. b. In 40 feet or more: 1/2 inch. 3. Maximum variations from the level or grades indicated on the Drawings for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines: a. In any bay or 20 feet maximum: 1/4 inch. b. In 40 feet or more: 1/2 inch. 4. Maximum variations of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions: a. In any bay or 20 feet maximum: 1/2 inch. b. In 40 feet or more: 3/4 inch. 5. Maximum variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls: a. Minus: 1/4 inch. b. Plus: 1/2 inch. October 2016 04_22_00-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) 3.05 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary protection for exposed masonry corners subject to damage. B. Bracing: 1. Brace masonry walls as required to prevent overturning and collapse. 2. Keep bracing in place until permanent supporting elements of structure are in place and are capable of safely resisting loads on the walls and the structure. C. Limited access zone: 1. Establish limited access zone prior to start of masonry wall construction. 2. Zone shall be immediately adjacent to wall and equal to height of wall to be constructed plus 4 feet by entire length of wall on unscaffolded side of wall. 3. Limit access to zone to workers actively engaged in constructing wall. Do not permit other persons to enter zone. 4. Keep zone in place until wall is adequately supported or braced by permanent supporting elements to prevent overturning and collapse. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall provide quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_17 Manufacturer’s services: 1. Furnish manufacturer’s representative to conduct jobsite training regarding proper storage, handling, and installation of masonry flashings for personnel who will perform the installation. Contractor’s Engineer and Engineer may attend training sessions. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Contractor quality control as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Field inspections and testing 1. Submit records of inspections and tests to Engineer in electronic format within 24 hours after completion. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Special inspections and tests, and structural observations: 1. Provide as specified in Section 01_45_24. a. Special inspection of concrete masonry construction will be performed at the time and frequency outlined in Schedule 4-1. b. The elements of concrete masonry construction that will be subject to special inspection are as indicated in Attachment 4.1. C. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. October 2016 04_22_00-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) D. Field testing: 1. Owner will have masonry prism tests performed in accordance with ASTM C 1314 by an independent laboratory as follows: a. Not less than one test will be performed for each 10,000 square feet of masonry construction and not less than 1 test for each grout lift. b. Contractor may use Unit Strength Method on 3 masonry units every 5,000 square feet using ASTM C 140. Grout strength tested per ASTM C 1019 (minimum 3 samples at 28 days) for each grout lift.. c. Provide full access for Engineer to observe masonry testing at any time. 2. Engineer may, at any time, request additional testing to confirm that materials being installed conform to the requirements of the Specifications. a. If such additional testing shows that the material do not conform to the specified requirements, the Contractor shall pay the cost of these tests. b. If such additional testing shows that the materials do conform to the specified requirements, the Owner will pay the cost of these tests. 3.09 NON-CONFORMING WORK A. Do not patch, repair, or cover defective work without inspection by the Engineer. B. Provide repairs having and appearance strength equal to that of the surrounding portions of structures. C. Patching: 1. Patch exposed concrete masonry units at completion of the Work and in such manner that patching will be indistinguishable from similar surroundings and adjoining construction. D. Repair of defective masonry: 1. Cracks measured in mortar joints exceeding 0.014 inch in thickness shall be adjusted as follows: a. Remove mortar from joint for full length of crack to a depth of 3/4 inch. b. Repoint with fresh mortar by packing into joint. c. Tool when thumbprint hard to match color and texture of adjacent joints. 3.10 FINAL CLEANING A. General: 1. Final cleaning shall be performed within 7 to 14 days after construction of masonry work. 2. Protect adjacent materials and equipment that may be damaged by cleaning. 3. Clean masonry using cleaning agent recommended by the manufacturer of the concrete masonry units and accepted by the Contractor’s Engineer. a. Cleaning methods may not include the following: 1) Sandblasting. 2) Cleaning with solutions of muriatic acid. 4. Pre-wet masonry before applying cleaning agent, but do not saturate masonry. 5. Remove mortar stains, smears, and splash, efflorescence, and grout stains on exposed surfaces with the accepted cleaning agent. 6. Cleaning agents shall be applied only when the masonry surface and air temperatures are at least 50 degrees Fahrenheit. 7. Dilute cleaning agents in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the masonry. October 2016 04_22_00-17 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) 8. Clean wall from the top to bottom, without overlapping areas being cleaned for consistency. 9. If pressure cleaning equipment is used, the following limitations shall be observed: a. Apply cleaning agent to pre-wetted wall with low pressure (less than 600 psi). b. Use a 25-degree to 50-degree flared-tip nozzle (not a pointed tip). c. Maintain a consistent distance from the spray nozzle to the masonry surface that is no closer than 12 inches. Use a combination of pressure, nozzle, and distance from tip to masonry that does not damage the masonry surfaces. 10. Rinse cleaning agents off the wall. 11. Dispose of debris, refuse, and surplus material offsite legally. END OF SECTION October 2016 04_22_00-18 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) SCHEDULE 4-1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION (Level 1) IBC Table 1704.5.1 Inspection Task Frequency/Timing of Inspection Criteria Reference Prior to beginning masonry construction: 1. Review required inspection provisions and approved submittals Periodic: As required to confirm project requirements ACI 530.1, Article 1.5 2. Verification of f’m prior to construction Periodic: Verify prism construction as required under Quality Assurance ACI 530.1, Article 1.4B As masonry construction begins, the following items will be verified to ensure compliance with design intent: 4.a. Proportions of site prepared mortar. Periodic: Confirm every 4 hours or for every 500 square feet of wall construction, whichever is more frequent. ACI 530.1, Article 2.6A 4.b. Construction of mortar joints. Periodic: Verify construction of mortar joints every 4 hours or every 500 square feet of wall construction, whichever is more frequent. ACI 530.1, Article 3.3B 4.c. Placement of reinforcement and connectors. Periodic: Verify installation every 4 hours or every 500 square feet of wall construction, whichever is more frequent. ACI 530.1, Article 3.4, 3.6A The inspection program will verify: 5.a. Size and location of masonry elements. Periodic: Verify masonry has been constructed within prescribed tolerances every 8 hours or every 1000 square feet of wall construction, whichever is more frequent. ACI 530.1, Article 3.3F 5.b. Type, size and location of anchors, including other details of anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames or other construction. Periodic: Confirm the installation of anchorages of other structural elements that interface with masonry elements. Observe continuously the initial installation of each specific type, and then confirm periodically the remainder of anchorages of each specific type. Periodic inspection of anchorages should include 100% observation of completed work and continuous inspection of a minimum of10% of anchorages at random. ACI 530, Sections October 2016 04_22_00-19 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) SCHEDULE 4-1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION (Level 1) IBC Table 1704.5.1 Inspection Task Frequency/Timing of Inspection Criteria Reference 5.e. Protection of masonry during cold weather (ambient temperature or CMU below 40ºF) Periodic: Prior to beginning the day’s work , verify that the material surfaces have been properly prepared and construction requirements have been satisfied in accordance with the referenced criteria. Verify at 2 hour intervals that the referenced criteria are satisfied. At completion of days work, confirm that protection is in place to comply with the referenced criteria. IBC Section 2104.3, ACI 530.1, Article 1.8C 5.e. Protection of masonry during hot weather (ambient temperature above 90ºF) Periodic: Prior to beginning the day’s work, verify that the site is prepared and the construction requirements have been satisfied in accordance with the referenced criteria. Verify at 2 hour intervals that the referenced criteria are satisfied. Confirm that work is protected to comply with the referenced criteria. IBC Section 2104.4, ACI 530.1, Article 1.8D Prior to grouting, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance: 6.a. Grout space is clean. Periodic: After the masonry work has been prepared for grouting operations and prior to the commencement of grouting, ensure that CMU cells are free of debris, loose aggregate, or deleterious material. ACI 530.1, Article 3.2D 6.b. Placement of reinforcement and connectors. Periodic: After the masonry work has been prepared for grouting operations and prior to the commencement of grouting, ensure that reinforcement has been installed in accordance with the referenced criteria. ACI 530.1, Article 3.4, ACI 530, Section 1.13 6.c. Proportions of site- prepared grout. Periodic: Prior to the commencement of grouting, confirm that site- prepared grout meets the requirements of the specified criteria. ACI 530.1, Article 2.6B 6.d. Construction of mortar joints. October 2016 04_22_00-20 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) SCHEDULE 4-1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION (Level 1) IBC Table 1704.5.1 Inspection Task Frequency/Timing of Inspection Criteria Reference 8. Preparation of any required grout specimens, mortar specimens, and/or prisms will be observed. Periodic: Provide continuous inspection of 100% of prism testing performed as specified in Quality Assurance. Provide periodic inspection of approximately 15% of prism testing performed as specified in Field Quality Control – Owner Furnished. ACI 530, Sections 2105.2.2, 2105.3, ACI 530.1, Article 1.4 October 2016 04_22_00-21 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) (ATTACHMENT 4.1) CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CONSTRUCTION REPORT Permit No.: Structure: Date: Weather: Contractor: Min/Max Temp: Dwg. Ref: Location: ELEMENT DESCRIPTION TABLE 1704.5.1 CONFORMS Masonry Construction and Tolerances General: Article 1.4B: Preparation of prism specimens 8. Yes No Article 2.6A: Mortar mix proportions meet approved design 4.a. Yes No Article 2.6A: Mortar should be discarded after 2 ½ hours or the mix begins to stiffen 4.a. Yes No Article 3.2C: Concrete masonry units are not wetted before laying -- Yes No Article 3.3B: Tooled joints to be formed with a jointer when the mortar is thumbprint hard 4.b., 6.d. Yes No Clean masonry units will be placed while the mortar is plastic and soft. Any units disturbed such that the initial bond is broken should be re-laid in fresh mortar. Yes No Article 3.3B: Exposed faces and edges should be unaltered manufactured surfaces when possible. Exposed cut edges should be smooth. 4.b. Yes No Article 3.3B: Bed joints intruding ½" or more into cells or cavities are to be removed 4.b. Yes No Article 3.3B: Hollow Units: Face shells are to be fully mortared. 4.b. Yes No Webs are to be fully bedded at piers, columns, pilasters and starting bed joint. 4.b. Yes No Vertical cells are to be aligned for grout in unobstructed openings 4.b. Yes No Type, size, location, and details of anchorage of masonry to structural members 5.b. Yes No Mortar Joint Tolerances: Article 3.3B: Starting bed joint: 1/4" - 3/4" (fully mortared) 4.b., 6.d. Yes No Article 3.3B: Bed joints: ±1/8" 4.b., 6.d. Yes No Article 3.3G: Head joints: -1/4", +3/8" 5.a., 6.d. Yes No Article 3.3G: Collar joint: -1/4", +3/8" 5.a., 6.d. Yes No October 2016 04_22_00-22 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) Wall Tolerances (Ref. Article ACI 530.1, Article 3.3G): In cross section or elevation: -1/4”, +1/2” 5.a. Yes No Grout space/Cavity width: -1/4”, +3/8” 5.a. Yes No Variation from level: 5.a. Bed joints: ±1/4” in 10 feet, ±1/2” maximum 5.a. Yes No Top surface of bearing wall: ±1/4” in 10 feet, ±1/2” maximum 5.a. Yes No Variation from plumb: ±1/4” in 10 feet, ±3/8” in 20 feet, ±1/2” maximum 5.a. Yes No True to a line: ±1/4” in 10 feet, ±3/8” in 20 feet, ±1/2” maximum 5.a. Yes No Alignment of columns and walls (bottom vs. top): ±1/2” for bearing walls, ±3/4” for non-bearing walls 5.a. Yes No Location of masonry elements: 5.a. Indicated in plan: ±1/2” in 20 feet, ±3/4” maximum 5.a. Yes No Indicated in elevation: ±1/4” in story height, ±3/4” maximum 5.a. Yes No Reinforcing Placement and Tolerances Reinforcing Materials (Ref. Article ACI 530.1, Article 3.4): Specified bar size and spacing 5.c. Yes No Specified joint reinforcing 5.c. Yes No Specified reinforcing at openings 5.c. Yes No Specified dowels at foundations 5.c. Yes No Reinforcing Placement (Ref. Article ACI 530.1, Article 3.4B): Support and fasten reinforcing together to prevent displacement by grout or mortar 4.c., 6.b. Yes No Maintain clear distance between reinforcing and any masonry unit or formed surface: not less than 1/4" for fine grout or ½" for coarse grout 4.c., 6.b. Yes No Splice reinforcement only where noted on Project Documents 4.c., 6.b. Yes No Reinforcing will not be bent after embedded in mortar or grout 4.c., 6.b. Yes No Minimum joint reinforcing cover: ½" where not exposed to weather, 5/8" where exposed to weather 4.c. Yes No Welding of reinforcing bars completed in accordance with AWS D1.4 5.d. Yes No Reinforcing Tolerances (Ref. Article ACI 530.1, Article 3.4B): +/- ½” for design depth of 8" or less 4.c., 6.b. Yes No +/- 1" for design depth of 8"-24" 4.c., 6.b. Yes No +/-1 1/4" for design depth of >24" 4.c., 6.b. Yes No Vertical reinforcing in wall: 2" or less of required location along length of wall 4.c., 6.b. Yes No October 2016 04_22_00-23 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_00 (FS-100) Masonry Accessories Grout and Grout Placement (Ref. Article ACI 530.1, Article 3.5 unless otherwise noted) Grout cells are to be free and clear of debris, mortar droppings, loose aggregates and deleterious material (Article 3.2D) 6.a. Yes No Grout mixture has a measured slump between 8 and 11 inches. 6.c. Yes No Grout must be placed within 1 ½ hours from the time that water is introduced to the mixture or before the initial set, if sooner. 7. Yes No Grout will be confined to the areas indicated on the Project Documents 7. Yes No Grout pour heights are to be limited to heights indicated in Table 7 of ACI 530.1. Consolidation of grout: Pours 12" or less in height: by mechanical vibration or puddling 7. Yes No Pours > 12" in height: by mechanical vibration and reconsolidate after initial water loss and settlement has occurred 7. Yes No Hot and Cold Weather Construction Cold weather provisions of Article 1.8C of ACI 530.1 followed 5.e. Yes No Hot weather provisions of Article 1.8D of ACI 530.1 followed 5.e. Yes No Remarks: Inspector Date October 2016 04_22_16-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_16 (FS-100) SECTION 04_22_16 ANCHORED CMU VENEER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Anchored CMU veneer. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_31_19 - Project Meetings. 2. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 04_05_17 - Mortar and Masonry Grout. 4. Section 04_05_23 - Masonry Accessories 5. Section 04_22_00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 6. Section 07_19_00 - Water Repellants. 7. Section 07_90_00 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Shop drawings: Include elevations of each wall indicating type and layout of units. C. Samples: Include samples of masonry units in sufficient quantity to illustrate color range. D. Test reports: 1. Test reports for each type of CMU. 2. Testing and reports are to be completed by and independent laboratory. 3. Test reports shall include: a. Compressive strength. E. Letter of certification. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock-up panel: 1. Prior to starting construction of masonry, construct minimum 4-foot square mock-up panel. 2. Use accepted materials containing each different kind and color of masonry units to illustrate wall design. 3. When not accepted, construct another mock-up panel. 4. When accepted, mock-up will be standard of comparison for remainder of masonry work. 5. Do not destroy or move mock-up panel until work is completed and accepted by the Owner. 6. Upon completion of Project, dispose of mock-ups in legal manner at offsite location. October 2016 04_22_16-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_16 (FS-100) B. Pre-installation meeting: Conduct as specified in Section 01_31_19. C. A letter of certification from the supplier of the materials attesting to compliance with the applicable specifications for grades, types, or classes included in these specifications, shall be provided at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the materials to the jobsite. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle masonry units as required to prevent discoloration, chipping, and breakage. B. Locate storage piles, stacks, and bins to protect materials from heavy traffic. C. Store masonry units off ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust, or materials likely to cause staining or other defects. D. Cover materials when necessary to protect from the elements. E. Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise defective units from jobsite upon discovery. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold weather requirements: 1. In accordance with building code as specified in Section 01_41_00. 2. Provide adequate equipment for heating masonry materials when air temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Hot weather requirements: 1. When ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees Fahrenheit, or when ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit and wind velocity is greater than 8 miles per hour, implement hot weather protection procedures. 2. Wet mortarboard before loading and cover mortar to retard drying when not being used. 3. Do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of placing masonry units. 4. Place masonry units within 1 minute of spreading mortar. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Order masonry units well before start of installation (8 weeks minimum) to assure adequate time for manufacturing. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED UNITS A. CMU masonry veneer units: 1. CMU masonry veneer units as specified in Section 04_22_00. 2. Surface texture: As specified in Section 04_22_00. 3. Size: As specified in Section 04_22_00. October 2016 04_22_16-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_16 (FS-100) 4. Special sizes and shapes: As required for window and door soldier coursing and custom sills where indicated on the Drawings, bond beams, piers, lintels, control joints, and other special applications to minimize cutting. 5. Do not exceed variations in color and texture of samples accepted by the Engineer. 6. Mortar and grout: As specified in Section 04_05_17. B. Adjustable wall ties and masonry accessories per Section 04_05_23. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent construction with appropriate means from mortar droppings and other effects of laying of masonry units. B. Thoroughly clean foundations of laitance, grease, oil, mud, dirt, mortar droppings, and other objectionable matter. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. CMU masonry veneer units: 1. Use dry masonry units. 2. Do not use wet or frozen masonry units. 3. Lay units in uniform and true courses, level, plumb, and without projections or offset from adjacent units. 4. Lay units to desired height with joints of uniform thickness. 5. For CMU veneer over concrete wall surfaces, install dovetail anchors and reinforcing wires as specified in Section 03_11_07. 6. For CMU veneer over masonry wall surfaces, install anchors and reinforcing wires in Section 04_05_23. 7. Spot bedding with cement mortar at all anchor locations. 8. Bond shall be plumb throughout. 9. Lay units to avoid formation of cracks when units are placed. 10. Lay masonry plumb, true to line, with courses level. Keep bond pattern plumb throughout. Lay masonry within the following tolerances: a. Maximum variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and in the flutes and surfaces of fluted or split faced blocks: 1) In adjacent masonry units: 1/8 inch. 2) In 10 feet: 1/4 inch. 3) In any story or 20 feet maximum: 3/8 inch. 4) In 40 feet or more: 1/2 inch. b. Maximum variations from the plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines: 1) In any story or 20 feet maximum: 1/4 inch. 2) In 40 feet or more: 1/2 inch. c. Maximum variations from the level or grades indicated on the Drawings for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines: 1) In any bay or 20 feet maximum: 1/4 inch. 2) In 40 feet or more: 1/2 inch. October 2016 04_22_16-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_16 (FS-100) d. Maximum variations of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions: 1) In any bay or 20 feet maximum: 1/2 inch. 2) In 40 feet or more: 3/4 inch. e. Maximum variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls: 1) Minus: 1/4 inch. 2) Plus: 1/2 inch. f. When positions of units shift after mortar has stiffened, bond is broken, or cracks are formed, relay units in new mortar. 11. Prevent mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted: a. Immediately remove mortar in contact with face of such masonry. b. Protect all sills, ledges, and projections from droppings of mortar. Protect doorjambs and corners from damage during construction. 12. Protect masonry not being worked on from rain by completely covering with a weather resistive membrane. B. Mortar joints: 1. Make joints straight, clean, smooth, and uniform in thickness. 2. Pointing: Tool exposed joints, slightly concave. Strike concealed joints flush. 3. Joint thickness: Make vertical and horizontal joints 3/8-inch thick. 4. Where fresh masonry joins totally or partially set masonry, clean and roughen set masonry before laying new units. C. Bond pattern: 1. Lay masonry units in runningbond pattern, except where special patterns are indicated on the Drawings. D. Cutting masonry units: 1. When possible, use full units of the proper size in lieu of cut units. Cut units as required to form chases, openings, for anchorage, and for other appurtenances. 2. Cut and fit units with power-driven carborundum or diamond disc blade saw. E. Control joints: 1. Control joint spacing: a. Provide control joints in masonry walls at locations indicated on the Drawings. b. If the location of control joints is not indicated on the Drawings, provide control joints at 20-foot maximum spacing. Submit proposed control joint spacing to the Engineer for acceptance. 2. Make full height and continuous in appearance. 3. Insert control joint filler in joints as wall is constructed. 4. Apply sealant as specified in Section 07_90_00. F. Steel door frames: 1. Anchor and fully grout jambs and head of steel doorframes connected to masonry. 2. Fill frames with grout as each 2 feet of masonry is laid. October 2016 04_22_16-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_16 (FS-100) G. Enclosures: 1. Where masonry units enclose conduit, pipes, stacks, ducts, and similar items, construct chases, cavities, and similar spaces as required, whether or not such spaces are indicated on the Drawings. 2. Point openings around flush mounted electrical outlet boxes with mortar, including flush joints above boxes. 3. Do not cover enclosures until inspected and when appropriate, tested. H. Other embedded items: 1. Build in wall plugs, accessories, flashings, pipe sleeves, and other items required to be built-in as the masonry work progresses. I. Patching: 1. Patch exposed masonry units in such manner that patching will be indistinguishable from similar surroundings and adjoining construction. J. Water curing: 1. Protect masonry units from drying too rapidly by frequently fogging or sprinkling for minimum of 3 days. K. Miscellaneous: 1. Build in required items, such as anchors, flashings, sleeves, frames, structural steel, lintels, anchor bolts, and metal fabrications, as required for complete installation. L. Water repellent: 1. Apply water repellent as specified in Section 07_19_00. M. Cleaning: 1. Exercise extreme care to prevent mortar splotches. 2. Do not attach construction supports to masonry walls. 3. Wash off brick scum and grout spills before scum and grout set. 4. Remove grout stains from walls. 5. Clean exposed masonry. Remove scaffolding and equipment. Dispose of debris, refuse, and surplus material offsite legally. 6. Correct efflorescence on exposed surfaces with commercially-prepared cleaning solution acceptable to masonry unit manufacturer: a. Apply cleaning solution in accordance with cleaning solution manufacturer's printed instructions. b. Do not use muriatic acid as cleaning solution. c. Do not use sandblast cleaning equipment. N. Forms and shores: 1. Where required, construct forms to the shapes indicated on the Drawings: a. Construct forms sufficiently rigid to prevent deflection which may result in cracking or other damage to supported masonry and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. b. Do not remove supporting forms or shores until the supported masonry has acquired sufficient strength to support safely its weight and any construction loads to which it may be subjected: 1) Wait at least 16 hours after grouting masonry columns or walls before applying uniform loads. 2) Wait at least 72 hours before applying concentrated loads. October 2016 04_22_16-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/04_22_16 (FS-100) 3.03 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary protection for exposed masonry corners subject to damage. B. Bracing: 1. Adequately brace masonry walls over 8 feet in height to prevent overturning and to prevent collapse unless wall is adequately supported by permanent supporting elements so wall will not overturn or collapse. 2. Keep bracing in place until permanent supporting elements of structure are in place. C. Limited access zone: 1. Establish limited access zone prior to start of masonry wall construction. 2. Zone shall be immediately adjacent to wall and equal to height of wall to be constructed plus 4 feet by entire length of wall on unscaffolded side of wall. 3. Limit access to zone to workers actively engaged in constructing wall. Do not permit other persons to enter zone. 4. Keep zone in place until wall is adequately supported or braced by permanent supporting elements to prevent overturning and collapse. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site tests: 1. Efflorescence tests: a. Perform efflorescence tests on mortar that will be exposed to weathering. Tests shall be scheduled far enough in advance of starting masonry work to permit retesting if necessary. END OF SECTION October 2016 05_05_24-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) SECTION 05_05_24 MECHANICAL ANCHORING AND FASTENING TO CONCRETE AND MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Cast-in anchors and fasteners: a. Anchor bolts. b. Anchor rods. c. Welded studs. 2. Post-installed steel anchors and fasteners: a. Concrete anchors. 3. Appurtenances for anchoring and fastening: a. Isolating sleeves and washers. b. Thread coating for threaded stainless steel fasteners. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittals. 2. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 4. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 5. Section 03_21_17 - Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete. 6. Section 04_05_18 - Adhesive Bonding Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Masonry. 7. Section 05_12_05 - Structural Steel. 8. Section 05_50_00 - Metal Fabrications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 355.2 - Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete & Commentary. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. B212.15 - Cutting Tools - Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills. C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 2. D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished. 3. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. October 2016 05_05_24-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) 4. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5. A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 6. A308 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Terne (Lead-Tin Alloy) Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 7. A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 8. A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 9. B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 10. B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 11. E488 - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements. 12. F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 13. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs. 14. F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 15. F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 16. F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners. E. International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): 1. AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Built-in anchor: Headed bolt or assembly installed in position before filling surrounding masonry units with grout. B. Cast-in anchor: Headed bolt or assembly installed in position before placing plastic concrete around. C. Overhead installations: Fasteners installed on overhead surfaces where the longitudinal axis of the fastener is more than 60-degrees above a horizontal line so that the fastener resists sustained tension loads. D. Passivation: Chemical treatment of stainless steel with a mild oxidant for the purpose of enhancing the spontaneous formation of the steel’s protective passive film. E. Post-installed anchor: Fastener or assembly installed in hardened concrete or finished masonry construction, typically by drilling into the structure and inserting a steel anchor assembly. F. Terms relating to structures or building environments as used with reference to anchors and fasteners: 1. Corrosive locations: Describes interior and exterior locations as follows: a. Locations used for delivery, storage, transfer, or containment (including spill containment) of chemicals used for plant treatment processes. October 2016 05_05_24-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) b. Exterior and interior locations at treatment structures. 2. Wet and moist locations: Describes locations, other than “corrosive locations,” that are submerged, are immediately above liquid containment structures, or are subject to frequent wetting, splashing, or wash down. Includes: a. Exterior portions of buildings and structures. b. Liquid-containing structures: 1) Locations at and below the maximum operating liquid surface elevation. 2) Locations above the maximum operating liquid surface elevation and: a) Below the top of the walls containing the liquid. b) At the inside faces and underside surfaces of a structure enclosing or spanning over the liquid (including walls, roofs, slabs, beams or walkways enclosing the open top of the structure). c. Liquid handling equipment: 1) Bases of pumps and other equipment that handles liquids. d. Indoor locations exposed to moisture, splashing or routine wash down during normal operations, including floors with slopes toward drains or gutters. e. Other locations indicated on the Drawings. 3. Other locations: a. Interior dry areas where the surfaces are not exposed to moisture or humidity in excess of typical local environmental conditions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. 2. Submit information listed for each type of anchor or fastener to be used. B. Action submittals: 1. Product data: a. Cast-in anchors. 1) Manufacturer’s data including catalog cuts showing anchor sizes and configuration, materials, and finishes. b. Post-installed anchors: 1) For each anchor type, manufacturer’s data including catalog cuts showing anchor sizes and construction, materials and finishes, and load ratings. 2. Samples: a. Samples of each type of anchor, including representative diameters and lengths, if requested by the Engineer. 3. Certificates: a. Cast-in anchors: 1) Mill certificates for steel anchors that will be supplied to the site. b. Post-installed anchors: 1) Manufacturer’s statement or certified test reports demonstrating that anchors that will be supplied to the site comply with the materials properties specified. 4. Test reports: a. Post-installed anchors: For each anchor type used for the Work: 1) Current ICC-ES Report (ESR) demonstrating: October 2016 05_05_24-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) a) Acceptance of that anchor for use under the building code specified in Section 01_41_00. b) That testing of the concrete anchor included the simulated seismic tension and shear tests of AC193, and that the anchor is accepted for use in Seismic Design Categories C, D, E, or F and with cracked concrete. 5. Manufacturer’s instructions. a. Requirements for storage and handling. b. Recommended installation procedures including details on drilling, hole size (diameter and depth), hole cleaning and preparation procedures, anchor insertion, and anchor tightening. c. Requirements for inspection or observation during installation. 6. Qualification statements. a. Post-installed anchors: Installer qualifications: 1) Submit list of personnel performing installations and include date of manufacturer’s training for each. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Post installed anchors shall be in accordance with building code specified in Section 01_41_00. B. Special inspection: 1. Provide special inspection of post-installed anchors as specified in Section 01_45_24 and this Section. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver post-installed anchors in manufacturer’s standard packaging with labels visible and intact. Include manufacturer’s installation instructions. B. Handle and store anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as required to prevent damage. C. Protect anchors from weather and moisture until installation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Seismic Design Category (SDC) for structures is indicated on the Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Furnish threaded fasteners with flat washers and hex nuts fabricated from materials corresponding to the material used for threaded portion of the anchor. a. Cast-in anchors: Provide flat washers and nuts as listed in the ASTM standard for the anchor materials specified. October 2016 05_05_24-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) b. Post-installed anchors: Provide flat washers and nuts supplied for that product by the manufacturer of each anchor. 2. Size of anchors and fasteners, including diameter and length or minimum effective embedment depth: As indicated on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. In the event of conflicts, contact Engineer for clarification. 3. Where anchors and connections are not specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified, their material, size and form shall be equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified. B. Materials: 1. Provide and install anchors of materials as in this Section. 2.02 CAST-IN ANCHORS AND FASTENERS A. Anchor bolts: 1. Description: a. Straight steel rod having one end with integrally forged head, and one threaded end. Embedded into concrete with the headed end cast into concrete at the effective embedment depth indicated on the Drawings or specified, and with the threaded end left to project clear of concrete face as required for the connection to be made. b. Furnish anchor bolts with heavy hex forged head or equivalent acceptable to Engineer. 1) Rods or bars with angle bend for embedment in concrete (i.e.: “L” or “J” shaped anchor bolts) are not permitted in the Work. 2. Materials: a. Ship anchor bolts with properly fitting nuts attached. b. Type 316 stainless steel: 1) Surfaces descaled, pickled, and passivated in accordance with ASTM A308. 2) Bolts: ASTM F593, Group 2, Condition CW, coarse threads. 3) Nuts: ASTM F594. Match alloy (group and UNS designation) and threads of bolts. 4) Washers: Type 316 stainless steel. c. Galvanized steel: 1) Hot-dip galvanized coating in accordance with ASTM F2329. 2) Bolt: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, heavy hex, coarse thread. 3) Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade A, heavy hex, threads to match bolt. 4) Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1. B. Anchor rods: 1. Description: Straight steel rod having threads on each end[ or continuously threaded from end to end]. One threaded end is fitted with nuts or plates and embedded in concrete to the effective depth indicated on the Drawings, leaving the opposite threaded end to project clear of the concrete face as required for the connection to be made at that location. 2. Materials: a. Stainless steel: Type 316: 1) Surfaces descaled, pickled, and passivated in accordance with ASTM A308. 2) Rod: ASTM F593, Group 2, Condition CW, coarse threads. October 2016 05_05_24-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) 3) Nuts: ASTM F594. Match alloy (group and UNS designation) and threads of rods. 4) Washers: Type 316 stainless steel. 5) Plates (embedded): ASTM A240. b. Galvanized: steel: 1) Hot-dip galvanized with coating in accordance with ASTM F2329. 2) Rod: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, coarse thread. 3) Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade A, threads to match rod. 4) Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1. 5) Plates (embedded): ASTM A36. C. Welded studs: 1. Description: Anchor with forged head for embedment into concrete on one end, and welding ferrule for attachment to steel on the other. Welded to steel members or plates to provide anchorage for steel connections to concrete. 2. Acceptance criteria: a. Welded studs in accordance with AWS D1.1, Type B. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Nelson Stud Welding Company: H4L Concrete Anchors or S3L Shear Connectors as indicated on the Drawings. b. Stud Welding Products: Headed Concrete Anchors (HCA) or Headed Shear Connectors (HSC) as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Materials: a. Stainless steel: Type 316L. b. Galvanized steel: 1) Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication with coating in accordance with ASTM A123. 2) Steel: Carbon steel in accordance with ASTM A108 with 50,000- pounds per square inch minimum yield strength, and 60,000-pounds per square inch minimum tensile strength. 2.03 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS AND FASTENERS – ADHESIVE A. Epoxy bonding of reinforcing bars, all thread rods, and threaded inserts in concrete: As specified in Section 03_21_17. B. Epoxy bonding of reinforcing bars, all thread rods, and threaded inserts in masonry: As specified in Section 04_05_18. 2.04 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS AND FASTENERS – MECHANICAL A. General: 1. Post-installed anchors used for the Work shall hold a current ICC Evaluation Service Report demonstrating acceptance for use under the building code specified in Section 01_41_00. a. Conditions of use: The acceptance report shall indicate acceptance of the product for use under the following conditions: 1) In regions of concrete where cracking has occurred or may occur. 2) To resist short-term loads due to wind forces. 3) To resist short-term loading due to seismic forces for the Seismic Design Category of the structure where the product will be used. October 2016 05_05_24-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) 2. Substitutions: When requesting product substitutions, submit calculations, indicating the diameter, effective embedment depth and spacing of the proposed anchors, and demonstrating that the substituted product will provide load resistance that is equal to or greater than that provided by the anchors listed in this Section. a. Calculations shall be prepared by and shall bear the signature and sealed of a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Colorado. b. Decisions regarding the acceptability of proposed substitutions shall be at the discretion of the Engineer. B. Concrete anchors: 1. Description. Post-installed anchor assembly consisting of a threaded stud and a surrounding wedge expansion sleeve that is forced outward by torquing the center stud to transfer loads from the stud to the concrete through bearing, friction, or both. (Sometimes referred to as “expansion anchors” or “wedge anchors.”) a. Do not use slug-in, lead cinch, and similar systems relying on deformation of lead alloy or similar materials to develop holding power. 2. Concrete anchors for anchorage to concrete: a. Acceptance criteria: 1) Concrete anchors shall have a current ICC-ES Report demonstrating that the anchors have been tested and qualified for performance in both cracked and un-cracked concrete, and for short term loading due to wind and seismic forces for Seismic Design Categories A through F in accordance with ACI 355.2 and with ICC-ES AC193 (including all mandatory tests and optional tests for seismic tension and shear in cracked concrete). 2) Concrete anchor performance in the current ICC-ES Report shall be “Category 1” as defined in ACI 355.2. b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Hilti: Kwik Bolt TZ Expansion Anchor. 2) Powers fasteners: PowerStud+ SD2. 3) Simpson Strong-Tie®: Strong Bolt 2 Wedge Anchor. c. Materials. Integrally threaded stud, wedge, washer and nut: 1) Stainless steel: Type 316. a) Type 304 stainless steel acceptable for use at wet and moist locations when accepted in writing by the Engineer. 2) Galvanized: Carbon steel, zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, minimum 5 microns (Fe/Zn 5). 3. Concrete anchors for anchorage to concrete masonry (fully grouted cells): a. Acceptance criteria: Concrete anchors shall have a current ICC-ES Report demonstrating that the anchors have been tested and qualified in accordance with ICC-ES AC01, including all mandatory tests and optional seismic tests. b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Hilti: Kwik Bolt 3 Expansion Anchor. 2) Powers fasteners: Power-Stud+ SD1. 3) Simpson Strongtie: Wedge-All Anchor. October 2016 05_05_24-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) c. Materials. Integrally threaded stud, wedge, washer and nut: 1) Stainless steel: Type 316. a) Type 304 stainless steel acceptable for use at wet and moist locations when accepted in writing by the Engineer. 2) Galvanized: Carbon steel, zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, minimum 5 microns (Fe/Zn 5) or mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695, Class 55, Type 1. C. Flush shells: 1. Description: Post-installed anchor assembly consisting of an internally threaded mandrel that is forced into a pre-drilled concrete hole with a setting tool until the top of the anchor is flush with the face of the concrete. Once installed, a removable threaded bolt is installed in the mandrel. 2. Flush shell anchors are not permitted in the Work. D. Isolating sleeves and washers: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Central Plastics Company, Shawnee, Oklahoma. b. Corrosion Control Products, PSI Inc., Gardena, CA. 2. Sleeves: Mylar, 1/32 inch thick, 4,000 volts per mil dielectric strength, of proper size to fit bolts and extending half way into both steel washers. 3. One sleeve required for each bolt. 4. Washers: The inside diameter of all washer shall fit over the isolating sleeve and both the steel and isolating washers shall have the same inside diameter and outside diameter. a. Proper size to fit bolts. 2 insulating washers are required for each bolt. b. Two 1/8-inch thick steel washers for each bolt. c. G3 Phenolic: 1) Thickness: 1/8 inch. 2) Base material: Glass. 3) Resin: Phenolic. 4) Water absorption: 2 percent. 5) Hardness (Rockwell): 100. 6) Dielectric strength: 450 volts per mil. 7) Compression strength: 50,000 pounds per square inch. 8) Tensile strength: 20,000 pounds per square inch. 9) Maximum operating temperature: 350 degrees Fahrenheit. E. Coating for repair of galvanized surfaces: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal: a. Galvinox. b. Galvo-Weld. F. Thread coating: For use with threaded stainless steel fasteners: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Never Seez Compound Corporation, Never-Seez. b. Oil Research, Inc., WLR No. 111. October 2016 05_05_24-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine Work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to receive the Work of this Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this Work until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION: GENERAL A. Where anchors and fasteners are not specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified, make attachments with materials specified in this Section. B. Substitution of anchor types: 1. Post-installed anchors may not be used as an alternative to cast-in / built-in anchors at locations where the latter are indicated on the Drawings. 2. Cast-in/built-in anchors may be used as an alternative to post-installed mechanical anchors at locations where the latter are indicated on the Drawings. C. Protect products from damage during installation. Take special care to protect threads and threaded ends. D. Accurately locate and position anchors and fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install anchors perpendicular to the surfaces from which they project. 2. Install anchors so that at least 2 threads, but not more than 1/2 inch of threaded rod, projects past the top nut. E. Interface with other products: 1. Where steel anchors come in contact with dissimilar metals (aluminum, stainless steel, etc.), use stainless steel anchors and separate or isolate dissimilar metals using isolating sleeves and washers. 2. Prior to installing nuts, coat threads of stainless steel fasteners with thread coating to prevent galling of threads. 3.03 INSTALLATION: CAST-IN ANCHORS A. General: 1. Accurately locate cast-in and built-in anchors. a. Provide anchor setting templates to locate anchor bolts and anchor rods. Secure templates to formwork. b. Brace or tie off embedments as necessary to prevent displacement during placement of plastic concrete or of surrounding masonry construction. c. Position and tie cast-in and built-in anchors in place before beginning placement of concrete or grout. Do not “stab” anchors into plastic concrete, mortar, or grout. d. Do not allow cast-in anchors to touch reinforcing steel. Where cast-in anchors are within 1/4 inch of reinforcing steel, isolate the metals by wrapping the anchors with a minimum of 4 wraps of 10-mil polyvinyl chloride tape in area adjacent to reinforcing steel. 2. For anchoring at machinery bases subject to vibration, use 2 nuts, with 1 serving as a locknut. October 2016 05_05_24-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) 3. Where anchor bolts or anchor rods are indicated on the Drawings as being for future use, thoroughly coat exposed surfaces that project from concrete or masonry with non-oxidizing wax. Turn nuts down full length of the threads, and neatly wrap the exposed thread and nut with a minimum of 4 wraps of 10-mil waterproof polyvinyl tape. B. Anchor bolts: 1. Cast-in-place when concrete is placed. 2. Furnish anchor bolts with standard hex bolt head or an equivalent head acceptable to Engineer unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. “L” or “J” anchor bolts are not equivalent to an anchor bolt with a hex bolt head. 3. Minimum anchor bolt embedment: 10-bolt diameters, unless longer embedment is indicated on the Drawings. 4. Where indicated on the Drawings, set anchor bolts in metal sleeves having inside diameter approximately 2 inches greater than bolt diameter and minimum 10-bolt diameters long. Seal top of sleeve to prevent grout from filling sleeve. 5. Anchor bolts may be cast in concrete in lieu of using concrete anchors. C. Anchor rods: 1. Install as specified for anchor bolts. D. Welded studs: 1. Butt weld to steel fabrications with automatic stud welding gun as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Ensure that butt weld develops full strength of the stud. 3.04 INSTALLATION: POST-INSTALLED ADHESIVE ANCHORS A. Epoxy and acrylic adhesive bonding of reinforcing bars, all thread rods, and internally threaded inserts in concrete: As specified in Section 03_21_17. B. Epoxy and acrylic adhesive bonding of reinforcing bars, all thread rods, and internally threaded inserts in masonry: As specified in Section 04_05_18. 3.05 INSTALLATION: POST-INSTALLED MECHANICAL ANCHORS A. General: 1. Install anchors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, ACI 355.2, the anchor’s ICC-ES Report. Where conflict exists between the ICC-ES Report and the requirements in this Section, the requirements of the ICC-ES Report shall control. 2. Where anchor manufacturer recommends the use of special tools and/or specific drill bits for installation, provide and use such tools. 3. After anchors have been positioned and inserted into concrete or masonry, do not: a. Remove and reuse/reinstall anchors. b. Loosen or remove bolts or studs. B. Holes drilled into concrete and masonry: 1. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until the material has achieved its minimum specified compression strength (f’c or f’m). 2. Accurately locate holes: October 2016 05_05_24-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) a. Before drilling holes, use a reinforcing bar locator to identify the position of all reinforcing steel, conduit, and other embedded items within a 6-inch radius of each proposed hole. b. If the hole depth exceeds the range of detection for the rebar locator, the Engineer may require radiographs of the area designated for investigation before drilling commences. 3. Exercise care to avoid damaging existing reinforcement and other items embedded in concrete and masonry. a. If embedments are encountered during drilling, immediately stop work and notify the Engineer. Await Engineer’s instructions before proceeding. 4. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, drill holes perpendicular to the concrete surface into which they are placed. 5. Drill using anchor manufacturer’s recommended equipment and procedures. a. Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, drill in accordance with the following: 1) Drilling equipment: Electric or pneumatic rotary type with light or medium impact. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact equipment to prevent micro-cracking and concrete spalling during drilling process. 2) Drill bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15. Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred. 6. Drill holes at manufacture’s recommended diameter and to depth required to provide the effective embedment indicated. 7. Clean and prepare holes as recommended by the manufacturer and as required by the ICC-ES Report for that anchor. a. Unless otherwise recommended by anchor manufacturer, remove dust and debris using brushes and clean compressed air. b. Repeat cleaning process as required by the manufacturer’s installation instructions. c. When cleaning holes for stainless steel anchors, use only stainless steel or non-metallic brushes. C. Insert and tighten (or torque) anchors in full compliance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. 1. Once anchor is tightened (torque), do not attempt to loosen or remove its bolt or stud. D. Concrete anchors: Minimum effective embedment lengths unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: Concrete Anchors Nominal Diameter Minimum Effective Embedment Length Minimum required In concrete In grouted masonry member thickness 3/8 inch 2 1/2 inch 2 5/8 inch 8 inch 1/2 inch 3 1/2 inch 3 1/2 inch 8 inch 5/8 inch 4 1/2 inch 4 1/2 inch 10 inch 3/4 inch 5 inch 5 1/4 inch 12 inch E. Flush shell anchors: 1. Flush shell anchors are not permitted in the Work. October 2016 05_05_24-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) 2. If equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions recommend the use of flush shell anchors, contact Engineer for instructions before proceeding. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Cast-in and built-in anchors: 1. Confirm that anchors are located and installed at tolerances specified for the Work. C. Post-installed anchors: 1. Review anchor manufacturer’s installation instructions and requirements of the Evaluation Service Report (hereafter referred to as “installation documents”) for each anchor type and material. 2. Observe hole-drilling and cleaning operations for conformance with the installation documents. 3. Certify in writing to the Engineer that the depth and location of anchor holes, and the torque applied for setting the anchors conforms to the requirements of the installation documents. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Engineer will provide on-site observation and field quality assurance for the Work of this Section. C. Field inspections and special inspections: 1. Required inspections: Observe construction for conformance to the approved Contract Documents, the accepted submittals, and manufacturer’s installation instructions for the products used. 2. Record of inspections: a. Maintain record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. 3. Statement of special inspections: At the end of the project, prepare and submit to the Engineer and the authority having jurisdiction inspector’s statement that the Work was constructed in general conformance with the approved Contract Documents, and that deficiencies observed during construction were resolved. D. Special inspections: Anchors cast into concrete and built into masonry. 1. Provide special inspection during positioning of anchors and placement of concrete or masonry (including mortar and grout) around the following anchors: a. Anchor bolts. b. Anchor rods. c. Welded studs. 2. During placement, provide continuous special inspection at each anchor location to verify that the following elements of the installation conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. a. Anchor: 1) Type and dimensions. October 2016 05_05_24-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) 2) Material: Galvanized steel, Type 304 stainless steel, or Type 316 stainless steel as specified in this Section or indicated on the Drawings. 3) Positioning: Spacing, edge distances, effective embedment, and projection beyond the surface of the construction. 4) Reinforcement at anchor: Presence, positioning, and size of additional reinforcement at anchors indicated on the Drawings. 3. Following hardening and curing of the concrete or masonry surrounding the anchors, provide periodic special inspection to observe and confirm the following: a. Base material (concrete or grouted masonry): 1) Solid and dense concrete or grouted masonry material within required distances surrounding anchor. 2) Material encapsulating embedment is dense and well-consolidated. E. Special Inspections: Post-installed mechanical anchors placed in hardened concrete and in grouted masonry. 1. Provide special inspection during installation of the following anchors: a. Concrete anchors. b. Undercut concrete anchors. 2. Unless otherwise noted, provide periodic special inspection during positioning, drilling, placing, and torquing of anchors. a. Provide continuous special inspection for post-installed anchors in “overhead installations” as defined in this Section. 3. Requirements for periodic special inspection: a. Verify items listed in the following paragraphs for conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the Evaluation Report for the anchor being used. Observe the initial installation of each type and size of anchor, and subsequent installation of the same anchor at intervals of not more than 4 hours. 1) Any change in the anchors used, in the personnel performing the installation, or in procedures used to install a given type of anchor, shall require a new “initial inspection.” b. Substrate: Concrete or masonry surfaces receiving the anchor are sound and of a condition that will develop the anchor’s rated strength. c. Anchor: 1) Manufacturer, type, and dimensions (diameter and length). 2) Material (galvanized, Type 304 stainless steel, or Type 316 stainless steel). d. Hole: 1) Positioning: Spacing and edge distances. 2) Drill bit type and diameter. 3) Diameter, and depth. 4) Hole cleaned in accordance with manufacturer’s required procedures. Confirm multiple repetitions of cleaning when recommended by the manufacturer. 5) Anchor’s minimum effective embedment. 6) Anchor tightening/installation torque. 4. Requirements for continuous special inspection: a. The special inspector shall observe all aspects of anchor installation, except that holes may be drilled in his/her absence provided that he/she October 2016 05_05_24-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) confirms the use of acceptable drill bits before drilling, and later confirms the diameter, depth, and cleaning of drilled holes. F. Field tests: 1. Engineer may, at any time, request testing to confirm that materials being delivered and installed conform to the requirements of the Specifications. a. If such additional testing shows that the materials do not conform to the specified requirements, the Contractor shall pay the costs of these tests. b. If such additional testing shows that the materials do conform to the specified requirements, the Owner shall pay the costs of these tests. 2. Field-testing: Cast-in and Built-in Anchors. 3. Field testing: Post-Installed Anchors: a. Proof load testing: 1) In addition to performing special inspections, the Engineer may select up to 10 percent of each type and size of post-installed mechanical anchor for proof-load testing for pullout or shear. Tests shall be non-destructive whenever possible. 2) Perform tension testing in accordance with ASTM E 488. Apply proof loads using a calibrated hydraulic ram. b. Torque load testing: 1) Using a calibrated torque wrench, apply manufacturer’s recommended installation torque. c. Acceptance criteria. 1) Minimum anchor embedment, proof load for pullout and shear, and torque shall be as specified in this Section. 2) Anchors that fail to resist their designated proof load or installation torque requirements shall be regarded as non-performing. 3) If more than 10 percent of the tested anchors fail to achieve their specified torque or proof load, all anchors of the same diameter and type as the failed anchors shall be tested. 4) Remediate non-performing anchors as specified in “non-conforming work.” 3.08 NON-CONFORMING WORK. A. Remove misaligned or non-performing anchors. B. Fill empty anchor holes and repair failed anchor locations as specified in Section 03_60_00 using high-strength, non-shrink, non-metallic grout. C. If more than 10 percent of all tested anchors of a given diameter and type fail to achieve their specified torque or proof load, the Engineer will provide directions for required modifications. Make such modifications, up to and including replacement of all anchors, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. Stainless steel. Provide and install stainless steel anchors at the following locations: 1. “Corrosive locations” as defined in this Section: Type 316 stainless steel 2. “Wet and moist locations” as defined in this Section: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. “Other locations:” a. For connecting stainless steel members to concrete or masonry: Type 304 stainless steel. October 2016 05_05_24-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_05_24 (FS-100) b. For connecting aluminum members to concrete or masonry. c. For connecting fiber-reinforced plastic (FRP) members to concrete or masonry. 4. At locations indicated on the Drawings. B. Galvanized: Provide and install galvanized carbon steel anchors at the following locations: 1. Locations not requiring stainless steel. 2. At locations indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION October 2016 05_12_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) SECTION 05_12_00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Structural steel shapes and plate. 2. Fasteners: a. All thread rods. b. Assembly bolts. c. High strength bolts. d. Powder actuated fasteners. 3. Isolation sleeves and washers. 4. Thread coating. 5. Welding. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 3. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 4. Section 03_21_17 - Epoxy Bonding Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods In Concrete. 5. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. 303-05 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. 360-05 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. Steel and stainless steel alloys (“types”) as indicated. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. B212-15 - Cutting Tools - Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 6 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes and Sheet Piling. 2. A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 3. A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded, and Seamless. 4. A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished. 5. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. October 2016 05_12_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) 6. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 7. A 193 - Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. 8. A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 9. A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 10. A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 11. A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 12. A 380 - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. 13. A 489 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes. 14. A 490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 15. A 496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 16. A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 17. A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 18. A 992 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 19. B 633 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate. 20. E 94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination. 21. E 164 - Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments. 22. E 165 - Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry. 23. E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing. 24. E 1032 - Standard Test Method for Radiographic Examination of Weldments. 25. F 436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 26. F 593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 27. F 959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. 28. F 1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105-ksi Yield Strength. E. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A 5.1 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. 2. A 5.17 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding. 3. A 5.20 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding. 4. D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 5. D 1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel. 6. D 10.4 - Recommended Practices for Welding Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing. October 2016 05_12_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) F. International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): 1. AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements. 2. AC58 - Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Masonry Elements. 3. AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. 4. AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 – Labor, Chapter XVII. a. Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. H. .Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) (c/o American Institute of Steel Construction): 1. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. I. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1. SP1 - Solvent Cleaning. 2. SP7 - Brush-off Blast Cleaning. 3. SP10 - Near White Abrasive Blasting. 4. SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. All thread rod: Straight steel rod continuously threaded from end to end. B. Anchor bolt: Straight steel rod embedded in concrete and having one integrally forged headed end and one threaded end. Installed with headed end cast into concrete with embedment as indicated on the Drawings or specified, leaving threaded end projecting clear of concrete face as required for the connection to be made. C. Anchor rod: Straight steel rod embedded in concrete and having threads on each end. Fit threaded end to be embedded in concrete with nuts or plates as indicated on the Drawings and providing embedment as indicated on the Drawings or specified. Leave threaded end projecting clear of the concrete face as required for the connection to be made. D. Cast-in anchor: Fastener or assembly installed in position before placing plastic concrete or installing masonry units and grout around the anchor. E. Passivation: Removal of exogenous iron or iron compounds from the surface of a stainless steel by means of a chemical dissolution resulting from treatment with an acid solution that removes the surface contamination but does not significantly affect the stainless steel itself. F. Wet and moist locations: When used with reference to anchors and fasteners, locations that are subject to deterioration and corrosion. Includes: 1. Liquid-containing structures: a. Locations at or below the maximum operating liquid surface elevation. b. Locations above the maximum operating liquid surface elevation and: 1) below the top of the walls containing the liquid; and 2) at the underside of a structure (including roofs, slabs, beams or walkways) spanning over the liquid. October 2016 05_12_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) 2. Bases of pumps and equipment that handles liquids. 3. Indoor locations exposed to moisture or splashing during normal operations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01_33_00. B. Quality control submittals: 1. Fabricator shall submit evidence of AISC Quality Certification. 2. Submit shop drawings of members to be fabricated before starting their fabrication. C. Test reports: 1. Certified copies of mill tests and analyses made in accordance with applicable ASTM standards or reports from a recognized commercial laboratory, including chemical and tensile properties of each shipment of structural steel or part thereof having common properties. 2. For each type of post-installed anchor to be included in the Work, current International Code Council ES Report (ICC-ES) demonstrating conformance to the Acceptance Criteria (AC) indicated for that anchor. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. The fabricator shall participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and shall be designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD at the time of bid. 2. Perform welding of structural metals with welders who have current American Welding Society certificate for the type of welding to be performed. 3. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours minimum before starting shop or field welding. 4. Engineer may check materials, equipment, and qualifications of welders. a. Remove welders performing unsatisfactory Work, or require re- qualification. 5. In addition to specified Quality Control testing by the Contractor, Engineer may request that Contractor’s testing laboratory use gamma ray, magnetic particle, dye penetrant, trepanning, or other aids to visual inspection to examine any part of welds or all welds. 6. Contractor shall bear costs of retests on defective welds. 7. Contractor shall also bear costs in connection with qualifying welders. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Conform to OSHA requirements for steel erection. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and shipping: Deliver structural steel free from mill scale, rust, and pitting. B. Storage and protection: Until erection and painting, protect from weather items not galvanized or protected by a shop coat of paint. October 2016 05_12_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, materials shall conform to the following: Table 05_12_00-A: Steel materials Item ASTM Standard Class, Grade, Type, or Alloy Number Steel Plate, bars, rolled shapes, and miscellaneous items (except W and WT shapes) A 36 -- Rolled W and WT shapes A 36 or A 992 Grade 50 Tubing, cold-formed A 500 -- Tubing, hot-formed A 501 -- Round HSS A 500 Grade B Steel pipe A 53 Grade B Stainless steel Plate, sheet, and strip A 240 Type 304* or 316** Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304* or 316** * Use Type 304L if material will be welded. ** Use Type 316L if material will be welded. 2.02 FASTENERS A. General: Furnish threaded fasteners, except high strength bolts, with flat washers, and self-locking nuts, or lock washers and nuts. 1. Bolt heads and nuts: Hex-type. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers: Of domestic manufacture. B. Materials: 1. Provide stainless steel or galvanized steel fasteners based on exposure conditions listed in the following paragraphs: 2. Stainless steel: For use at the following locations, unless otherwise noted: a. At locations indicated on the Drawings. b. At “wet and moist locations” as defined herein, unless otherwise noted. c. For connecting aluminum or stainless steel to concrete or masonry. 3. Galvanized: a. For use at all locations not requiring stainless steel. b. Where bolts, including anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and similar fasteners are specified to be galvanized, galvanize in accordance with ASTM A 153. C. All thread rods (includes all thread rods epoxy bonded into concrete as specified in Section 03_21_17 and as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Description. October 2016 05_12_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) 2. Materials: a. Stainless steel: Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM F 593. b. Galvanized: ASTM A 36 galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. D. Assembly bolts: 1. Description: Bolts, nuts, and washers for connections in wood or fiberglass- reinforced plastic baffles, collectors, and other field-assembled construction. 2. Materials: a. Stainless steel: Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593. Galvanized: ASTM A 307. E. High strength bolts: 1. Description: Steel bolts, nuts and washers for steel-to-steel connections between structural steel framing members. 2. Acceptance criteria: a. Conform to the requirements of ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490, as indicated on the Drawings. b. At pre-tensioned and slip-critical joints, provide: 1) Direct-tension-indicator washers conforming to the requirements of ASTM F 959. 2) Flat washers conforming to ASTM F 436 behind the element being turned for tightening. 3. Materials: a. Hot-dip galvanized. b. Carbon steel. F. Powder actuated fasteners: 1. Do not use unless directed by the Engineer. 2.03 ISOLATING SLEEVES AND WASHERS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Central Plastics Company, Shawnee, Oklahoma. 2. Corrosion Control Products, PSI Inc., Gardena, CA. B. Sleeves: Mylar, 1/32 inch thick, 4,000 volts per mil dielectric strength, of proper size to fit bolts and extending half way into both steel washers. 1. One sleeve required for each bolt. C. Washers: The inside diameter of all washer shall fit over the isolating sleeve and both the steel and isolating washers shall have the same inside diameter and outside diameter. 1. Proper size to fit bolts. Two insulating washers are required for each bolt. 2. Two 1/8-inch thick steel washers for each bolt. 3. G3 phenolic: a. Thickness: 1/8 inch. b. Base material: Glass. c. Resin: Phenolic. d. Water absorption: 2 percent. e. Hardness (Rockwell): 100. f. Dielectric strength: 450 volts per mil. October 2016 05_12_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) g. Compression strength: 50,000 pounds per square inch. h. Tensile strength: 20,000 pounds per square inch. i. Maximum operating temperature: 350 degrees Fahrenheit. 2.04 GALVANIZED SURFACE REPAIR A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Galvinox. 2. Galvo-Weld. 2.05 THREAD COATING A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Never Seez Compound Corporation, Never-Seez. 2. Oil Research, Inc., WLR No. 111. 2.06 SUPPLEMENTARY PARTS A. Furnish as required for complete structural steel erection, whether or not such parts and Work are specified or indicated on the Drawings. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Shop assembly: 1. Fabricate structural steel in conformance with AISC 303 and AISC 360 unless otherwise specified or modified by applicable regulatory requirements. 2. Where anchors, connections, or other details of structural steel are not specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified, their material, size and form shall be equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified. 3. Round off sharp and hazardous projections and grind smooth. 4. Take measurements necessary to properly fit work in the field. Take responsibility for and be governed by the measurements and proper working out of all the details. 5. Take responsibility for correct fitting of all work. B. Stainless steel shapes and assemblies: 1. For structural members such as W shapes, S shapes, channels, angles, and similar rolled shapes not available in quantity, size, and type of stainless steel specified or indicated on the Drawings. a. Make full penetration welds between pieces of plate to attain same or higher section modulus and moment of inertia as members indicated on the Drawings. b. Fabricate shapes using laser-fused full penetration joints. Fabricate shapes from dual grade stainless steel. Fabricate beams and channels to ASTM A 6 tolerances: 1) Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal. a) Stainless Structurals, LLC; Jacksonville FL. 2. Cleaning and passivation: a. Following shop fabrication of stainless steel members, clean and passivate fabrications. b. Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale and other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface. October 2016 05_12_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) c. Provide quality control testing to verify effectiveness of cleaning agents and procedures and to confirm that finished surfaces are clean and passivated. 1) Conduct sample runs using test specimens with proposed cleaning agents and procedures as required to avoid adverse effects on surface finishes and base materials. d. Pre-clean, chemically descale (pickle), and final clean fabrications in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 380 to remove deposited contaminants before shipping. 1) Passivation by citric acid treatment is not allowed. a) If degreasing is required before cleaning to remove scale or iron oxide, cleaning (pickling) treatments with citric acid are permissible; however, these treatments shall be followed by inorganic cleaners such as nitric-hydrofluoric acid. 2) Provide acid descaling (pickling) in accordance with Table A1.1 of Annex A1 of ASTM A 380 3) After pickling, final cleaning of stainless steel shall conform to Part II of Table A2.1 of Annex A2 of ASTM A 380. e. Inspect after cleaning using methods specified for “gross inspection” in ASTM A 380. f. Improperly or poorly cleaned and passivated materials shall not be shipped and will not be accepted at the site. C. Galvanizing: 1. Where galvanizing is required, hot-dip galvanize structural steel after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. a. Do not electro-galvanize or mechanically-galvanize unless specified or accepted by Engineer. b. Re-straighten galvanized items that bend or twist during galvanizing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Examine Work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to receive the Work of this Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this Work until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 ERECTION A. General: 1. Fabricate structural and foundry items to true dimensions without warp or twist. 2. Form welded closures neatly, and grind off smooth where weld material interferes with fit or is unsightly. 3. Install structural items accurately and securely, true to level, plumb, in correct alignment and grade, with all parts bearing or fitting structure or equipment for which intended. 4. Do not re-drill, re-shape, force out of alignment, or force fit fabricated items. 5. Place anchor bolts or other anchoring devices accurately and make surfaces that bear against structural items smooth and level. October 2016 05_12_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) 6. Rigidly support and brace structural items needing special alignment to preserve straight, level, even, and smooth lines. Keep structural items braced until concrete, grout, or dry pack mortar has hardened for 48 hours minimum. 7. Erect structural steel in conformance with AISC 303 and AISC 360 unless otherwise specified or modified by applicable regulatory requirements. 8. Where anchors, connections, and other details of structural steel erection are not specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified, form, locate, and attach with equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified. B. Round off sharp or hazardous projections and grind smooth. Bolting: 1. General: a. Install bolts, to project 2 threads minimum, but 1/2 inch maximum beyond nut. 2. High-strength steel bolting: a. Connections with high strength bolts shall conform to RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. b. Consider connections with high strength bolts to be snug-tightened joints unless pre-tensioned joints or slip-critical joints are indicated on the Drawings. c. Snug-tightened connections: 1) Furnish hardened flat washers at joints with sloping faces or with slotted holes as required by RCSC. d. Pre-tensioned and slip-critical connections: 1) Furnish hardened flat washer: a) Under element (nut or bolt head) being turned during tightening. b) On outer plies for short slotted holes. 2) Furnish direct-tension-indicator washer. Verify adequate tightening of bolts at pre-tensioned and slip critical connections by means of tension indicator washers placed as indicated in ASTM F 959, Figure 1. 3) At slip-critical connections, provide uncoated faying surfaces as specified by RCSC. C. Welding - general: 1. Make welds full penetration type, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Remove backing bars and weld tabs after completion of weld. Repair defective welds observed after removal of backing bars and weld tabs. 3. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of welds in repaired or field-modified work. D. Welding stainless steel: 1. General: Comply with AWS D1.6. a. Perform with electrodes and techniques in accordance with AWS D10.4. 2. Passivation of field-welded surfaces: a. Provide cleaning, pickling, and passivating as specified under Part 2 for fabrications. Clean using Derustit Stainless Steel Cleaner, or equal. October 2016 05_12_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) E. Welding carbon steel: 1. General: Comply with AWS D1.1. a. Weld ASTM A 36 and A 992 structural steel, ASTM A 500 and A 501 structural tubing, and ASTM A 53 pipe with E70XX electrodes conforming to AWS A5.1; F7X-EXXX electrodes conforming to AWS A5.17: E7XT-X electrodes conforming to AWS A5.20. 1) Field repair cut or otherwise damaged galvanized surfaces to equivalent original condition using a galvanized surface repair. F. Interface with other products: 1. Where steel fasteners come in contact with aluminum or other dissimilar metals, bolt with stainless steel bolts and separate or isolate from dissimilar metals with isolating sleeves and washers. a. Prior to installing nuts, coat threads of stainless steel fasteners with thread coating to prevent galling of threads. 3.03 PRIMING AND COATING A. General: 1. Paint or coat steel items as specified in Section 09_96_01. 3.04 FASTENERS: CAST-IN AND POST-INSTALLED A. General: 1. Install bolts, to project 2 threads minimum, but 1/2 inch maximum beyond nut. 2. Tightening requirements. a. Unless otherwise specified, tighten bolts to the "snug-tight" condition, defined as tightness attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. B. All thread rods - epoxy bonded in concrete: 1. Install as specified in Section 03_21_17 and as indicated on the Drawings. C. Powder actuated fasteners: 1. Use powder actuated fasteners only for applications indicated on the Drawings or specified. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Field tests and inspections: 1. High-strength bolting: a. Confirm use of specified bolts and nuts. b. Snug-tightened connections: 1) Confirm use of washers as required by RCSC for sloping surfaces at joints and for slotted holes. 2) Confirm that all plies of the connected elements have been brought into firm contact by the tightened connections. c. For pre-tensioned and slip-critical connections, perform testing in the presence of the Engineer. October 2016 05_12_00-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) d. Pre-tensioned connections: 1) Prior to pre-tensioning, confirm that the appropriate feeler gage is accepted in at least half the spaces between protrusions of the direct-tension indicator, and that the protrusions are properly oriented away from the work. 2) If feeler is accepted in fewer than half the spaces, remove direct- tension indicator and replace before tightening. 3) After pre-tensioning, confirm that the at least half the spaces between protrusions refuse entry of the feeler gage. e. Slip-critical connections: 1) Before assembly, confirm that faying surfaces (planes of contact between any 2 plies within the joint, including those of filler plates and finger shims) are free of mill scale and coatings in areas within 1 inch of the edge of any hole and between all holes in the bolt pattern. 2) Test for entry of feeler gage into protrusions of direct tension indicators before and after tightening, as specified for pre-tensioned connections. f. Test results: 1) Submit records of testing to Engineer within 24 hours after testing. 2. Welding – Field welds: a. Perform testing in the presence of the Engineer. b. Visual observation: 1) Examine all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. Quality of welds and standards for acceptance shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 6.9. c. Radiographic testing: 1) Conform to AWS D1.1, Section 6.12, and ASTM E 94, and ASTM E 1032 as applicable. 2) Provide radiographic testing of welds as specified in the following paragraphs: a) Complete joint penetration groove welds with weld thickness of 3/4 inch or less: 10 percent of welds. b) Complete joint penetration groove welds with weld thickness from 3/4 inch to 1 1/2 inches: 50 percent of welds. c) Complete joint penetration groove welds with weld thickness greater than 1 1/2 inches: All welds. d. Ultrasonic testing: 1) Conform to AWS D1.1, Section 13 and ASTM E 164 as applicable. 2) Provide ultrasonic testing of welds as specified in the following paragraphs: a) Complete joint penetration groove welds not accessible for radiographic testing, when accepted by the Contractor’s Engineer. b) Frequency of testing shall be as specified for radiographic testing. e. Magnetic particle inspection: 1) Conform to ASTM E 709. 2) Provide magnetic particle testing of welds as specified in the following paragraphs: a) Complete joint penetration groove welds of tee and corner joints: 20 percent of welds. October 2016 05_12_00-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) b) Partial joint penetration groove welds: 10 percent of welds. c) Fillet welds: 10 percent of welds f. Liquid penetrant inspection: 1) Conform to ASTM E 165. 2) Provide for detecting discontinuities that are open to the surface. g. Test results: 1) Submit records of testing to Engineer within 24 hours after testing. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Special tests and inspections: As required by Section 01_45_24. C. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted Shop Drawings. b. Make observations of items in the following tables at frequencies not less than that indicated in the tables. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. October 2016 05_12_00-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) Table 05120E – QUALITY ASSURANCE: STRUCTURAL STEEL Items for Inspection: Continuous Periodic 1. Material Verification: a. Structural Steel Members: 1) Markings indicate conformance to ASTM Standards specified. X 2) Manufacturer’s certified mill test reports. X b. High strength bolts, nuts and washers. 1) Markings indicate conformance to ASTM standards specified. X 2) Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance. X c. Weld Filler Materials: 1) Markings indicate conformance to AWS standards specified. X 2) Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance. X 2. Construction Observations: a. Steel Erection, including Joints: X 1) Member locations and sizes. X 2) Presence of braces and stiffeners. X 3) Details of connections. b. High Strength Bolting: 1) Number and locations of bolts. X 2) Bolt tightening – Bearing connections. X 3) Bolt tightening – Pre-tensioned connections. X 4) Bolt tightening – Slip-critical connections. X c. Welding: 1) Complete and partial penetration groove welds. X 2) Multiple pass fillet welds. X 3) Single pass fillet welds > 5/16 inch. X 4) Single pass fillet welds < 5/16” X October 2016 05_12_00-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_12_00 (FS-100) Table 05120E – QUALITY ASSURANCE: ANCHORS TO CONCRETE & MASONRY Continuous Periodic 1. Material Verification: a. Cast-in anchors: 1) Markings indicate conformance to ASTM Standards and manufacturer’s products specified. X b. Post-installed fasteners: 1) Markings indicate conformance to ASTM standards specified. X 2. Construction Observations & Testing: a. Cast-in or Built-in Anchors: 1) Number of anchors, locations, spacing, edge distances. X 2) Embedment into concrete or masonry. X b. Post-installed Anchors: 1) Number of anchors, locations, spacing, edge distances. X 2) Observations and tests required by the ICC-ES report for that anchor. X 3.07 NON-CONFORMING WORK A. Remove and replace damaged and non-conforming work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1. Bolting a. Snug-tightened connections: Provide additional tightening. b. Pre-tensioned and slip-critical connections: Remove bolts. Replace with new bolts and direct-tension indicators, and re-tighten. c. Re-inspect and re-test all repaired or corrected bolts. 2. Welding: a. Repair non-conforming welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 5.26. b. Re-inspect and re-test all repaired or corrected welds. END OF SECTION October 2016 05_14_05-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_14_05 (FS-100) SECTION 05_14_05 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Structural aluminum products, including sheet, pipe, extrusions, and associated accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 3. Section 05_12_00 - Structural Steel. 4. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. Aluminum Design Manual: a. Specification for Aluminum Structures - Allowable Stress Design (Part IA). b. Specification for Aluminum Structures - Building Load and Resistance Factor Design (Part IB). 2. Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 3. TR3 – Guidelines for Minimizing Water Staining of Aluminum. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 3. B 308 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. 4. B 429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 5. B 632 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate. 6. F 467 - Standard Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use. 7. F 468 - Standard Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use. 8. F 593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 9. F 594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS A 5.10 - Specification for Bare Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Welding Electrodes and Rods. 2. AWS D 1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. October 2016 05_14_05-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_14_05 (FS-100) D. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 - Labor, Chapter XVII. a. Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: 1. Manufacturer’s product data for stainless steel fasteners used for aluminum construction. B. Shop drawings: 1. General: a. Provide fabrication drawings and schedules, and erection drawings for all structural aluminum. b. Clearly indicate portions of the work covered by each submittal, and location of each member in the work. c. Mark numbers on shop fabrications shall be the same mark numbers indicated on fabrication and erection drawings. 2. Cover letter or transmittal: a. Indicate any changes to the requirements or information shown in the Contract Documents. Such changes will not be permitted unless Contractor’s Engineer issues written acceptance of them. 3. Fabrication drawings: a. Drawings detailing each piece or assembly to be incorporated into the work, and indicating fasteners appurtenant to each item. b. Indication of coatings for members. 4. Erection drawings: a. Indicate placement of each piece shown on the fabrication drawings or listed in the bill of materials. C. Samples: 1. If requested by the Contractor’s Engineer, submit samples of the following. 2. Fasteners. Samples of bolts, nuts, and washers. 3. Welding electrodes. D. Test reports: 1. Mill test reports for structural members and fasteners provided for the work. a. Indicate lot number with chemical and physical properties of materials. b. Test and report material properties in accordance with ASTM standards. c. Indicate member mark numbers or location of members represented by each test report. E. Certificates: 1. Certification that welders are qualified in accordance with AWS D1.2 for shop and field welding procedures if requested by the Contractor’s Engineer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Perform welding of structural metals with welders who have current American Welding Society certificate for the type of welding to be performed. 2. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours minimum before starting shop or field welding. October 2016 05_14_05-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_14_05 (FS-100) 3. Engineer may check materials, equipment, and qualifications of welders. a. Remove welders performing unsatisfactory work, or require requalifying. 4. In addition to specified Quality Control testing by the Contractor. Engineer may request that Contractor’s testing laboratory use gamma ray, magnetic particle dye penetrant, or other aids to visual inspection to examine any part of welds or all welds. 5. Contractor shall bear costs of retests on defective welds. 6. Contractor shall bear costs in connection with qualifying welders. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Conform to OSHA requirements for construction. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect aluminum from moisture and water staining. B. If materials are received wet, dry them before storage. C. Store materials indoors, protected by waterproof tarps but ventilated to prevent condensation, and on pallets out of contact with the ground. If condensation forms on stored aluminum, remove moisture. D. Take precautions to avoid subjecting aluminum to conditions that encourage the development of condensation. See Aluminum Association Guidelines for Minimizing Water Staining of Aluminum. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aluminum plates and shapes: 1. Finishes and coatings: a. Finish all plates and shapes to Aluminum Association designation AA-M10 (mechanical finish, as fabricated, unspecified) unless otherwise noted. b. Provide anodic shop coating where specifically indicated. 2. Sheet and plate: a. General: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6. b. Tread plate: ASTM B 632, Alloy 6061-T6. 3. I-beams, wide flange beams, channels, angles, tees, and zees: a. ASTM B 308, Alloy 6061-T6. 4. Pipes and tubes - round: a. ASTM B 429, Alloy 6061-T6. 5. Tubes - square and rectangular: a. ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6. B. Fasteners: 1. General: a. Fasteners and hardware shall be of domestic manufacture. b. Bolts and nuts: hex type heads fabricated from materials indicated unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. c. Furnish threaded fasteners with flat washers and self-locking nuts, or lock washers and nuts. October 2016 05_14_05-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_14_05 (FS-100) 2. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers - Stainless steel: a. Bolts: ASTM F 593 alloy 304, condition CW (cold worked). b. Nuts: ASTM F 594 alloy 304, condition CW (cold worked). c. Washers: Of same alloy as bolt. 3. Assembly bolts, nuts and washers - Stainless steel: a. Bolts: ASTM F 593 alloy 304, condition CW (cold worked). b. Nuts: ASTM F 594 alloy 304, condition CW (cold worked). c. Washers: Of same alloy as bolt. 4. Assembly bolts, nuts and washers - Aluminum: a. Bolts: ASTM F 468, alloy 2024-T4. b. Nuts: ASTM F 467, and of same alloy as bolts. c. Washers: 1) Flatwashers: Alclad alloy 2024-T4. 2) Spring lock washers: alloy 7075-T6. d. Coat components fabricated from alloy 2024-T4 with minimum 0.0002-inch thick anodic coating to enhance corrosion resistance. 5. Self-tapping screws - Stainless steel: a. Thread-forming or thread-cutting screws with self-drilling point. b. Type 316 stainless steel, size #12 or greater. C. Miscellaneous materials: 1. Furnish supplementary parts necessary to complete each item even where such work is neither definitely indicated on the Drawings nor specified. 2. Size, form, attachment, and location shall conform to the best of current practice. 3. Conform to applicable ASTM Standards for materials not otherwise specified. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate structural aluminum in accordance with the requirements of AA Design Manual’s Specification for Aluminum Structures. 1. Fabricate shapes and foundry items to true dimensions without warp or twist. B. Aluminum layout: 1. Center punch hole centers, and punch or scribe cutoff lines, except where marks would remain on fabricated material. 2. Apply temperature correction where necessary in layout of critical dimensions. Use a coefficient of expansion of 0.000013 per degree of Fahrenheit. C. Cutting aluminum: 1. Material 1/2 inch thick or less: Shear, saw, or cut with a router. 2. Material more than 1/2 inch thick: Saw or rout. 3. Make cut edges true and smooth, free from excessive burrs or ragged breaks. 4. Avoid reentrant cuts wherever possible. Where used, fillet by drilling prior to cutting. 5. Do not flame cut aluminum alloys. 6. Punch or drill rivet or bolt holes to finished size before assembly. a. Make finished diameter of holes for bolts 1/16 inch maximum larger than nominal bolt diameter. b. Make holes cylindrical and perpendicular to principal surface. c. Do not permit holes to drift in a manner to distort metal. October 2016 05_14_05-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_14_05 (FS-100) D. Aluminum forming and assembly: 1. Do not heat structural aluminum, except as follows: a. Heat aluminum to 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 30 minutes maximum, to facilitate bending or welding. b. Heat only when proper temperature controls and supervision can ensure that limitations on temperature and time are observed. 2. Before assembly: a. Remove chips lodged between contacting surfaces. b. Round off sharp or hazardous projections, and grind smooth. E. Welding aluminum: 1. Perform welding of aluminum in accordance with AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 2. Perform all welding as shop fabrication. Field welding of aluminum will not be permitted. 3. Weld aluminum in accordance with the following: a. Preparation: 1) Remove dirt, grease, forming or machining lubricants, and organic materials from areas to be welded by cleaning with a suitable solvent or by vapor degreasing. 2) Additionally, etch or scratch brush to remove oxide coating just prior to welding when inert gas tungsten arc welding method is used. 3) Oxide coating may not need to be removed if welding is performed by automatic or semi-automatic inert gas shielded metal arc. 4) Suitably prepare edges to assure 100 percent penetration in butt welds by sawing, chipping, machining, or shearing. Do not cut with oxygen. b. Filler Metal: Aluminum alloys conforming to the requirements of AWS A5.10 and AWS classification ER 4043, ER 5654, ER 5554, ER 5183, ER 5356, or ER 5556. c. Perform welding of structures that are to be anodized using filler alloys which will not discolor when anodized, AWS ER 5654, ER 5554, ER 5183, ER 5356, or ER 5556. d. Perform welding by using a non-consumable tungsten electrode with filler metal in an inert gas atmosphere (TIG) or using a consumable filler metal electrode in an inert gas atmosphere (MIG). e. Do not use welding process that requires use of a welding flux. f. Form welded closures neatly, and grind off smooth where weld material interferes with fit or is unsightly. g. Where weld material interferes with fit or is unsightly in appearance, grind it smooth. h. Make welds full penetration welds unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Erect structural aluminum in accordance with the requirements of AA Design Manual’s Specification for Aluminum Structures. October 2016 05_14_05-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_14_05 (FS-100) 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Examine Work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to receive the Work of this Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this Work until such conditions have been corrected. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install structural aluminum products as indicated on the Drawings and specified. B. Install structural aluminum products accurately and securely, true to level, plumb, in correct alignment and grade, with all parts bearing or fitting structure or equipment for which intended. C. Do not re-drill, re-shape, force out of alignment, or force fit fabricated items. D. Place anchor bolts or other anchoring devices accurately and make surfaces that bear against structural items smooth and true to level. E. Rigidly support and brace structural items needing special alignment to preserve straight, level, even, smooth lines. Keep structural items braced until concrete, grout, or dry pack mortar has hardened for a minimum 48-hour period. F. Bolting: 1. Install bolts to project at least 2 threads beyond nuts, but not more than 1/2 inch. G. Welding: Field welding of aluminum shall not be permitted. H. Interface with other products: 1. Where aluminum comes in contact with dissimilar metals, make bolted connections using stainless steel bolts. Separate or isolate the aluminum from other metals as specified in Section 05_12_00. 2. Coat those parts of aluminum which will be cast into concrete or which will be in contact with concrete, grout, masonry, wood, or other materials that will cause the aluminum to corrode, as specified in Section 09_96_01 for aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective plastic films from aluminum sheet stock. B. Clean aluminum of protective oils installed for protection during shipping. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Tolerances: C. Manufacturer’s services: October 2016 05_14_05-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_14_05 (FS-100) D. Field tests and inspections: 1. Bolting: a. Confirm that all plies of the connected elements have been brought into firm contact by the tightened connections. 2. Results: Submit records of inspections to Engineer by electronic copies within 24 hours after completion. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Special tests and inspections: As required by Section 01_45_24. C. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted Shop Drawings. b. Make observations of items in the following tables at frequencies not less than that indicated in the tables. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Contractor’s Engineer upon request. October 2016 05_14_05-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_14_05 (FS-100) Table 05120A – QUALITY ASSURANCE; STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM Items for Inspection: Frequency: Continuous Periodic 1. Material Verification: a. Aluminum members: 1) Markings indicate conformance to ASTM Standards and grades specified. X 2) Manufacturer’s certified mill test reports. X b. Stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers. 1) Markings indicate conformance to ASTM standards and grades specified. X 2) Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance. X 2. Construction Observations: a. Aluminum Erection, including Joints: 1) Member locations and sizes. X 2) Presence of braces and stiffeners. X 3) Details of connections. X b. Bolting: 1) Number and locations of bolts. X 2) Bolt tightening. X c. Welding – Not permitted. X 3.07 NON-CONFORMING WORK A. Remove and replace damaged and non-conforming work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION October 2016 05_21_19-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) SECTION 05_21_19 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Open web steel joists. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 3. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 4. Section 05_05_24 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry. 5. Section 05_12_00 - Structural Steel. 6. Section 05_31_00 - Steel Decking. 7. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A2.4 - Standard symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Non-Destructive Examination. 2. B2.1 - Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification. 3. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 2. A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 3. A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 4. F 436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 1. 29CFR-1926.751(c)2. a. Part 1926.757 - Steel Erection; Open Web Steel Joists. D. Steel Joist Institute (SJI): 1. Code of Standard Practice: a. SJI-COSP-2010 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 2. Standard Specifications: a. ANSI / SJI-K-2010 - Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series. b. ANSI / SJI-LH/DLH-2010 - Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series. c. ANSI / SJI-JG-2010 - Standard Specification for Joist Girders. October 2016 05_21_19-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) 3. Standard Load Tables: a. Standard Load Tables, Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series (LRFD & ASD). b. Standard Load Tables, Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series (LRFD and ASD). 4. Technical Digests: a. SJI TD 8 - Welding of Open-Web Steel Joists and Joist Girders. b. SJI TD 9 - Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders. c. SJI TD 12 - Evaluation and Modification of Open-Web Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Steel joists: As referred to in this Section, includes joists, K series joist substitutes, joist girders, and joist headers. B. SJI Standard Specifications: Refers to one or more of the following documents corresponding to the joist type indicated on the Drawings: 1. ANSI / SJI-K-2010 - Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series. 2. ANSI/SJI-LH/DLH-2010 - Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series. 3. ANSI / SJI-JG-2010 - Standard Specification for Joist Girders. C. SJI Standard Load Tables: Refers to one of the following documents corresponding to the joist type indicated on the Drawings: 1. Standard Load Tables, Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series (LRFD & ASD). 2. Standard Load Tables, Open Web Steel Joists, KCS-Series (LRFD & ASD). Standard Load Tables, Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series (LRFD and ASD). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of joist and accessories. C. Shop drawings: 1. General: a. Provide fabrication drawings/schedules, and erection/layout drawings for all joists, modified joists, and related miscellaneous metal work. b. Clearly indicate portion of the Work covered by each submittal, and location of each member in the work. c. Mark number or tags on joists and fabrications shall be the same mark numbers indicated on fabrication schedules and erection drawings. d. Indicate shop and field welds using symbols in accordance with AWS A2.4. Indicate net weld lengths. 2. Fabrication drawings/schedules: a. Detail each piece or assembly to be incorporated into the work. b. For each joist type and size, and for each accessory, indicate: 1) SJI standard designations including depth and chord size. 2) Identification mark number. 3) Loading criteria and camber. October 2016 05_21_19-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) 4) Configuration and details including joist elevation view; bearing seats; end conditions; chord extensions; and details of internal joints, welds, and splices (if any). 5) Dimensions, both overall and internal. 6) Methods of connecting, anchoring, fastening, bracing, bridging, and attaching. 7) Coatings and surface preparation (or "uncoated"). 3. Erection/layout drawings: a. Indicate placement of each piece shown in the fabrication drawings/schedules or listed in the bill of materials. b. Show layout of joists with mark numbers; methods of framing at openings; locations, types, and connection details for bridging; details of connections between joists and supporting joist girders, joist headers, framing, or structures; and accessories. c. Indicate erection sequence and requirements for temporary bracing. d. Show requirements for field welding and bolting. e. Show profiles and deflection criteria under live and total loads for joist configurations not specifically listed in SJI Standard Load Tables. f. List loads used in the design of steel joists. 1) Show loads and position of loads from all mechanical and electrical equipment supported by the joists and framing. D. Calculations: 1. Submit calculations for each joist type and span, documenting adequacy to resist uniform and concentrated loads indicated on the Drawings; locations, sizes and types of bridging for resisting downward and uplift loads; and adequacy of connections of joists and bridging. 2. Provide calculation cover letter sealed and signed by the joist manufacturer's qualified registered design professional licensed in the state where the Project is located. E. Certificates/certifications: 1. SJI membership. Submit evidence of manufacturer’s current membership in SJI and of manufacturer's qualifications to produce members of the types specified and required for the Work. 2. SJI compliance. At the completion of manufacture, for each joist type and load case provided, submit manufacturer’s certificate of compliance stating that design and fabrication of members was performed in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications and the approved shop drawings. Include manufacturer's statements that: a. Welders performing shop welding for joists hold current qualification for the types of welding and welding positions required for the Work. b. Manufacturer has completed in-plant before shipment to verify compliance of materials and workmanship with the requirements of SJI Standard Specifications for the products produced. 3. Quality control program: Submit evidence of active participation in a nationally recognized program for quality control of steel fabrication. 4. Field welding. Submit welder qualification certificates in compliance with AWS D1.1 for the types of welding and welding positions required for the Work. October 2016 05_21_19-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) F. Test and inspection reports: 1. Mill test reports: Submit manufacturer's certificates, indicating ASTM standards, structural strength, and material properties for steel used in the joists and bridging. 2. Inspections: a. Source quality control. 1) Submit reports of manufacturer's in-plant inspections for compliance with SJI Standard Specifications. b. Field quality control: 1) Report of erection inspection. 2) Report of welding inspection. c. Field quality assurance. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Pre-engineered, pre-fabricated open-web steel joists, joist girders, and accessories designed and fabricated to the requirements of the Steel Joist Institute and details as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. B. Design requirements: 1. Design joists and bridging in accordance with current SJI Specifications and load tables to support loads indicated based on the depth, spacing, and deflections, indicated. a. Maximum deflection under live load: 1) Roof joists: Span divided by 240 (L/240). 2) Joist girders - roof: Span divided by 240 (L/240). b. Minimum design loads as indicated on the Drawings: 1) Dead load. 2) Live load. 3) Rain load (ponding). 4) Snow load. 5) Wind load (net uplift). 6) Axial tension and compression forces applied to the truss at end connections. c. Camber: Provide standard camber based on SJI Standard Specifications unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1) In no case shall joists be manufactured with negative (downward) camber. 2) Where a joist will be installed parallel to and within 6 feet of a wall, decrease camber in that joist nearest the wall to one-half of the standard camber. 2. Bridging: Provide horizontal and diagonal bridging as required by the SJI Standard Specifications, and as required to maintain stability under gravity, uplift, erection, and construction loadings. 3. End anchorage: Provide end anchorage details to secure and/or stabilize joists at supports, and to transfer any loads indicated on the Drawings. 4. Header units: Provide header units to support joists at openings in floor or roof framing not framed with structural steel shapes. 5. Accessories: a. Provide miscellaneous items including splice plates, reinforcing angles, and bolts required to complete the installation. October 2016 05_21_19-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) b. Provide supplemental steel framing to support steel deck where normal deck bearing is precluded by other framing members and minor openings. c. Provide supplementary steel framing around roof openings and at concentrated load points as indicated on the Drawings and in Typical Details. d. Design and provide support members for all roof-mounted equipment and openings through joist and deck system, including supplementary web members required for concentrated loads on joints. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design and fabricate joists in compliance with the following and as specified herein: 1. SJI Standard Specifications. 2. SJI Standard Load Tables. 3. SJI Code of Standard Practice. B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Holding current membership in the Steel Joist Institute and a recognized fabricator of structural steel joists conforming to the SJI Standard Specifications, the SJI Standard Load Tables, and the SJI Code of Practice. 2. Installer/Erector: a. Field Welding: Qualified procedures and welders in accordance with AWS D1.1. Provide welders qualified within the last 12 months preceding the date of joist erection. C. Regulatory requirements: 1. Conform to OSHA requirements for steel erection, including specific requirements for joists and framing. D. Inspection: 1. Inspect joists in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications. 2. Inspect fabrication as specified in Part 2, Source Quality Control. 3. Provide inspections for Field Quality Control and Field Quality Assurance as specified in Part 3, Execution. E. Pre-installation conference: Steel joists and deck. 1. Coordinate with the requirements of Section 05_31_00. 2. Schedule and conduct pre-installation conference at least 2 weeks prior to installation of joists. a. Provide additional conferences if necessary to discuss or coordinate specific conditions of installation. 3. Required attendees: a. Contractor. b. Steel joist manufacturer’s technical representative. c. Steel joist installer’s job superintendent. d. Subcontractor(s) providing and installing coatings under Division 9. 4. Agenda: a. Joist submittals. b. Deck placing and fastening procedures. c. Manufacturer’s recommended inspections and inspection procedures. October 2016 05_21_19-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) d. Requirements and coordination for quality control inspections and quality assurance (including special inspections). e. Other Specification requirements requiring coordination between parties to the work. 5. Prepare and submit minutes of the pre-installation conference as specified in Section 01_33_00. 1.07 DELIVER, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, deliver, store, and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI specifications, and as required to avoid stresses and to prevent damage to materials and coatings. B. Observe delivered materials for damage before and after unloading, and note any permanent bends, deformations, broken welds, or other damage on the receiving documents. C. Store joists off the ground, protected from weather and corrosion, and under watertight covering sloped to drain. 1. Support by means that will protect members from distortion and damage. 2. Store joists with top chord down and with plane of joist vertical. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel joists: 1. Provide joist type, chord configuration, depth, and bearing as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Comply with SJI Standard Specifications for joist series indicated and for joist girders. 3. Details: Provide the following. a. Chord members: Rolled double angle sections only. Rod or bar members are not permitted. B. Bridging: 1. In accordance with SJI Standard Specifications for type of joist, chord size, spacings, spans and uplift loads indicated on the Drawings. 2. Anchored to walls, girders, and roof deck as indicated. C. Coatings: 1. Ship joists uncoated. D. Fasteners: 1. Anchor bolts and anchor rods to concrete and masonry: As specified in Section 05_05_24. 2. Bolts: pre-tensioned bolted connections. a. Provide high-strength bolt assembly with hardened flat washers and nuts. Provide uncoated components unless galvanized coating is indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 05_21_19-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) b. Uncoated: 1) Bolts: Plain, heavy hex structural bolts conforming to ASTM A 325 Type 1. 2) Nuts: Heavy hex nuts conforming to ASTM A 563, Grade C. 3) Washers: Circular flat washers conforming to ASTM F 436. E. Accessories: 1. Bearing plates: As specified in Section 05_12_00. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Open web steel joists: 1. Fabricate steel joist in accordance with SJI specifications to sizes indicated on the Drawings. 2. Furnish ceiling extensions as required. B. Cross bridging: Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for joists in accordance with SJI specifications. C. End anchorage: Provide end anchorage's including bearing plates, to secure joists to adjacent construction in accordance with SJI specifications unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. D. Coatings: 1. After delivery, prepare joists and accessories for priming and finish coating specified in Section 09_96_01. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and inspections: 1. Provide joist manufacturer's inspection as required by SJI Standard Specifications. Submit inspection results. 2. Special Inspection - Fabrication. Requirements of the building code specified in Section 01_45_24 for special inspection of fabricated structural items shall be considered to be satisfied when the manufacturer is registered and approved to perform steel fabrication work in accordance with a quality control program that is certified by the Steel Joist Institute (SJI), or similar program acceptable to building official and the Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Furnish and erect steel joists accordance with the requirements of SJI’s Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field verify dimensions and elevations of structural elements supporting the joists and joist girders. 1. Establish lines and elevations within tolerances before beginning erection. October 2016 05_21_19-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) 2. Make bearing surfaces true and uniform. 3. Do not begin placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. B. Clean bearing surfaces of joists and supporting members before erection and as required during erection to maintain solid contact between members. C. Do not permit erection of steel deck until joists are connected and bridging is in place. D. Modification and/or repair of existing steel joists and joist girders indicated to remain in place. 1. Retain a qualified engineer, licensed in the State of Colorado, to evaluate existing joists, joist girders, bridging, and accessories for repairs and modifications to accommodate increases in loads and/or spans. 2. Provide evaluations and design modifications to comply with SJI TD 12 - Evaluation and Modification of Open-Web Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 3. Prepare and submit calculations and drawings demonstrating evaluation and design, and indicating details of modifications and repairs. a. Submit documents sealed by the engineer providing design and evaluation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Erection: 1. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications, approved erection drawings, and these Specifications. 2. Allow for loads from erection procedures, but do not load joists until all fastening is complete. 3. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain joists and supporting framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing. B. Installation of joists and bridging: 1. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place, adjusted to specified tolerances, and secured. 2. Do not field modify, alter, or repair joists unless specific written instructions have been received from the joist manufacturer and submitted to the Engineer. Such instructions shall bear the seal and signature of the joist manufacturer's registered design professional licensed in the state where the joists are installed. 3. Place joists on supporting surfaces, adjust, and accurately align to required elevation, location, and spacing before permanently fastening. a. Set joists plumb and level (with indicated allowances for camber). b. Set "tag end" of joists at location shown on the erection plans. c. Adjust bearing seat elevations to provide full bearing after joists and supporting members have been plumbed and positioned, but before final tightening of connections and before any loads are imposed. d. Solidly pack areas under bearing plates using materials and procedures shown on the Drawings. 4. Install bridging in accordance with OSHA 29CFR-1926.757d and SJI Standard Specifications to provide lateral stability for the joists before slacking of October 2016 05_21_19-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) hoisting lines. Quantity of bolted diagonal erection bridging shall be in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications. 5. Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or beams. Quantity, size, and sequence for installing bridging shall be in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications. 6. Erection stability and handling shall be in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications. C. Fastening joists: 1. Each joist must be attached at a minimum of one end immediately upon placement in the final erection position and before additional joists are placed. 2. When field welding joists, weld to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications and as indicated on the Drawings. a. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists. b. Conform to AWS D1.1. c. Length of field welds applied to the top and bottom chords of joists shall not exceed one-half of the width of the steel member. 3. When bolting joists, bolt to supporting steel framework in according with SJI Standard Specifications: D. Coating: 1. Deliver joists coated or uncoated as indicated on the Drawings and specified. 2. Where members are painted or coated in place, do not begin preparation or coating until all units are in place; properly, completely, and permanently fastened, and accepted by the Engineer. 3. Prepare, prime, and finish as specified in Section 09_96_01. 4. Perform surface preparation and coating application under environmentally controlled field conditions, or in an off-site paint shop. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. As indicated in SJI Standard Specifications, unless otherwise noted. B. Deviation from straight line between opposite ends of any installed joist: Maximum 3/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.05 REPAIR A. Do not install damaged joists or accessories. Remove such materials from the site and replace with sound materials at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Repair rust spots and coatings damaged by handling, welding, or other erection and fastening processes. C. After erection of coated joists, touch-up rust spots, connections, field welds, and abraded areas of members using specified coatings. Clean and prepare damaged areas. Apply coating at the same thickness as that applied before erection. Feather edges of repairs to provide a uniform appearance after repair. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces using SSPC SP-15 procedures. 2. Apply coating of same product and color as member. Apply primer and finish coat(s). October 2016 05_21_19-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) D. Make repairs and modifications to existing steel joists and joist girders indicated to remain in place based on accepted evaluation and modification drawings prepared by Contractor's engineer. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. B. Field tests and inspections: 1. Results: Submit records of inspections and test to Engineer by electronic copies within 24 hours after completion. 2. High-strength bolting: a. Confirm use of specified bolts and nuts. b. Pre-tensioned connections: 1) Confirm that all plies of the connected elements have been brought into firm contact by the tightened connection. 2) Confirm bolts pretension using turn-of-the nut method, twist-off type tension controlled nut, or direct-tension indicator washer. Do not use calibrated wrench. 3. Welding - Field welds: a. Perform observations and testing in the presence of the Engineer. b. Visual observation. 1) Visually examine all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 2) Quality of welds and standards for acceptance shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 6.9 and Table 6.1 - "Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria." 4. Modifications and repairs to existing joists, joist girders, bridging, and accessories. a. Provide continuous visual observation of modifications and welding to existing members by inspectors qualified to the satisfaction of the Engineer. b. Observation, standards for acceptance, and reporting of observations and testing shall be as specified in the preceding paragraphs. 5. After erection, observe installation for conformance with this specification. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance over the Work of this Section as required by Section 01_45_00. B. Special inspections, special tests and structural observation: 1. Provide as required by Section 01_45_24. C. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted Shop Drawings. 1) Confirm that joist and accessory locations and tags (marks) match those indicated on the erection drawings. 2) Confirm that joists are installed in vertical alignment and without lateral sweep. October 2016 05_21_19-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_21_19 (FS-100) 3) Confirm that joist spacing conforms to erection drawings. 4) Confirm that bridging lines, spacing, and connections/anchoring conform to erection drawings. b. Visually inspect field bolting, including bolt tightness. c. Visually inspect field welding using AWS certified welding inspectors as specified in AWS D1.1. 1) Conform to AWS D1.1, Section 6.9 and Table 6-1. 2) Mark welds observed. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. 3.08 NON-CONFORMING WORK A. Remove and replace damaged and non-conforming work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION October 2016 05_31_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_31_00 (FS-100) SECTION 05_31_00 STEEL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Steel deck for floors and roofs, and associated accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 3. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 4. Section 05_12_00 - Structural Steel. 5. Section 05_21_19 - Open Web Steel Joist Framing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. A 780 - Standard Specification for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. 3. A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 2. A5.1 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. D. Factory Mutual (FM): 1. FM Research Corporation (FMRC). E. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc (ICC-ES): 1. AC43 - Acceptance Criteria for Steel Deck Roof and Floor Systems. F. International Code Council (ICC) 1. International Building Code (IBC). G. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): 1. ANSI/SDI RD-2010 - Standard for Steel Roof Deck. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Evaluation Report: Report prepared by ICC-ES, or other testing agency acceptable to the Engineer and to the Building Official, that documents testing and review of a October 2016 05_31_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_31_00 (FS-100) product to confirm that it complies with the requirements of designated ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria, and its acceptance for use under the Building Code Specified in Section 01_41_0. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01_33_00. 2. Clearly indicate portion of the Work addressed by each submittal or portion of a submittal. B. Product data: 1. Details of each type of deck included in the Work. Indicate steel specification and grade; thickness, section profile, and section properties of fabricated panels; and deck finish. 2. Manufacturer's load tables showing allowable loads and deflections at the spans required for the project. 3. Roof deck: Manufacturer's tables for resistance to horizontal (diaphragm shear) loads for spans and fastener types and fastener spacings indicated on the Drawings. 4. Fasteners: Materials and finishes for each type of fastener included in the Work. 5. Galvanizing repair materials: Data demonstrating conformance to specified requirements. C. Shop drawings: 1. Fabrication drawings: a. Details of accessories. 2. Layout and erection drawings: a. Plan view clearly showing placement of each piece on the fabrication drawings or listed in the bill of materials. b. Show details of deck joints and laps. c. Indicate methods and locations of attachment, including fastener types and spacings. d. Indicate locations and details of deck accessories including filler strips and "make-up pieces" provided to fill spaces between flutes and deck supports. e. Indicate location of openings through deck. f. Indicate type(s) and spacing(s) of fasteners to be used. 1) For areas where Drawings show fastener patterns varying by location, clearly indicate type and spacing of fasteners to be used, and areas where each type and spacing occurs. g. Mark numbers painted on shop fabrications shall be the same mark numbers shown in the layout and erection drawings. D. Test reports: 1. Roof deck: a. Building code evaluation service report: Current research report documenting diaphragm shear capacity of deck and fastening system to be installed. October 2016 05_31_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_31_00 (FS-100) E. Qualifications: 1. Steel deck manufacturer: Documentation of current membership in the Steel Deck Institute. 2. Steel deck installer: Record of qualifications and experience. 3. Welders: Welder qualification records. F. Certificates: 1. Deck manufacturer's certificate of compliance stating that deck materials, details, and fabrication conforms to SJI standards. 2. Mechanical fasteners (other than welds): Certificate of acceptance from FMRC for each type provided. G. Manufacturer's instructions: 1. Deck manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Mechanical fasteners (other than welds): Installation procedures and installation tool operations instructions. H. Closeout documents: 1. Field quality control inspection and testing reports. 2. Field quality assurance special inspection report. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Holding current membership in the Steel Deck Institute. 2. Products: a. Deck 1) Properties for resistance to vertical gravity and uplift loads, and to horizontal diaphragm shear loads calculated in accordance with SDI procedures. 2) Conforming to the requirements of SDI for the product supplied: a) Steel roof deck: Conform to ANSI/SDI RD 1.0. 3) Holding current ICC-ES report demonstrating that diaphragm shear capacity has been reviewed and accepted by ICC b. Mechanical fasteners: In shipping containers showing manufacturer's name, product, and FMRC approval mark. 3. Installer: a. Deck installation contractor: Having at least 5 years' experience in installation of steel deck of the types required for the Work, and at least 10 projects with the deck types and fastening systems specified for the Work. b. Welders: Field welding procedures and welders qualified in accordance with AWS D1.3. B. Pre-installation conference: 1. Coordinate with pre-installation conferences for Structural Steel as specified in Section 05_12_00, and for Open Web Steel Joists as specified in Section 05_21_19. October 2016 05_31_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_31_00 (FS-100) 2. Required attendees: a. Contractor. 1) Subcontractor(s) installing roof deck and fasteners (welded and/or mechanical): Job superintendent(s). 2) Subcontractor(s) providing and installing coatings. b. Technical representatives of: 1) Deck manufacturer. 2) Manufacturer providing mechanical fasteners. 3. Conduct pre-installation conference at least 2 weeks prior to installation of deck. a. Provide additional conferences if necessary to discuss or coordinate specific items of installation. b. Prepare and submit minutes of conference(s) as specified in Section 01_33_00. 4. Agenda. Including at least the following items. a. Deck submittal status and details. b. Deck placing and fastening procedures. c. Requirements for coordination of inspections and special inspections. d. Other coordination between parties to the Work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Storage and protection: 1. Store steel deck at the site stacked on platforms or pallets and covered with tarpaulins or other suitable waterproof and weathertight covering, ventilated to avoid condensation. 2. Elevate one end of stack to provide drainage. C. Do not use steel deck for storage or working platform. D. Do not install damaged or marred materials. Remove damaged, unlabeled, untagged, rusty, and deteriorated steel deck material from the job site. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers 1. Holding current membership in the Steel Deck Institute. 2. One of the following or equal: a. ASC Steel Deck; West Sacramento CA. b. Epic Metals Corporation; Rankin PA. c. Vulcraft Sales Corporation; Norfolk NE. d. Wheeling Corrugating Company, Wheeling WV. B. Materials – General: 1. Deck type, gage, and finish as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Uncoated thickness of deck materials: Not less than 95 percent of the design thickness indicated. October 2016 05_31_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_31_00 (FS-100) 3. Sheet steel for galvanized deck and accessories: a. ASTM A 653, Structural Quality, designation SS, minimum yield strength of 33 ksi or higher. b. Galvanized to conform to ASTM A 924 with minimum G30 (Z090) minimum coating as defined in ASTM A 653. C. Accessories: 1. Furnish accessories indicated on the Drawings and required to provide a complete and finished installation. 2. Finish accessories with finish to match surrounding deck unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Galvanized finish repair materials. Conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 780. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Calculate section properties in accordance with SDI requirements. 2. Form steel deck so every sheet is identical and will register properly with the corrugations of adjacent sheets. 3. Fabricate deck in lengths to minimize the number of splices. Whenever possible, make deck continuous over at least 3 spans. B. Steel roof deck. 1. Wide rib: 1 1/2 inch deep. 2. Gage as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Finish: Galvanized. C. Steel roof deck accessories: 1. Fabricate from same steel sheet material and with same finish as surrounding decking. 2. Ridge plates, valley plates, flat plates at changes of deck direction, and closure plates at sides: Minimum 18 gage (0.474 inch) design thickness. 3. Filler strips: Minimum 18 gage (0.474 inch) design thickness, fabricated to same height as deck corrugations, with projecting flanges at the top for lapping over adjacent deck ribs and with bottom flange for fastening to deck supports. 4. Sump pans: Minimum 14 gage (0.0747 inch) design thickness fabricated to same height as deck corrugations and having minimum 3-inch projecting flange around the top perimeter for lapping over and fastening to surrounding deck ribs. Center sump area minimum 16 inches x 16 inches. 5. Wall / support cell closures (for closing voids above beams, interior walls, and partitions where such elements are perpendicular to the deck flutes. a. At fire-resistant interior walls and partitions: Minimum 20 gage. b. At other locations: Compressible closed cell neoprene or vinyl synthetic rubber. D. Treat exposed roof deck with phosphate. October 2016 05_31_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_31_00 (FS-100) 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. To the extent possible, fabricate and pre-assemble decking and associated fabrications in the factory or shop. B. Materials, fabrications shall be subject of in-shop inspections conducted by the Engineer. 2.04 MATERIALS - FASTENERS A. Welding: 1. Electrodes as indicated in AWS D1.3. a. For material of 22 gage design thickness welded to supporting structural members: E70XX electrode as specified in AWS D5.1. b. For material of 20 gage and heavier design thickness welded to supporting structural members: E6022 electrode as specified in AWS D5.1. c. Welding washers: Minimum 16 gage design thickness (0.0598 inch) with nominal 3/8-inch diameter center hole. B. Self-drilling screws. 1. Self-drilling, self-tapping screws with hexagonal washer head and corrosion- resistant finish. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal. a. ITW Buildex, Itasca IL. 1) ICH Traxx Self-Drilling Fasteners with Climaseal Coating. 2) Autotraxx Standup Insertion Tool. b. Hilti, Tulsa OK. 1) Kwik-Pro HWH Self-Drilling Screws with Kwik-Code Treatment. 2) Kwik-Tapper Screw Driver. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: 1. Examine support framing and field conditions to verify that it is within required tolerances and free of debris, and that conditions are satisfactory to receive the work of this Section. 2. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this work until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide a complete installation including: placing, fastening, shaping, cutting, fitting, drilling, welding, flashings, closure strips and plates, fasteners, and accessories required for a complete and finished installation. B. Conform to OSHA rules and to any state and local regulations for erection of steel deck panels and accessories. October 2016 05_31_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_31_00 (FS-100) C. Place deck in accordance with accepted submittals, manufacturer's instructions, the requirements of the Drawings, and requirements of this Section. D. Install deck without bends, dents, buckles, or other damage or irregularities. E. During installation: 1. Do not damage or overload steel deck or the framing that supports it. 2. After final fastening, deck may provide lateral stability for the top flange of supporting members. Determine weight or loads that may be placed on supporting members during erection considering the top flanges of supporting members to be unbraced. 3. Do not use steel deck for storage or as a working platform until sheets have been welded in position. 4. Do not exceed maximum uniformly distributed load of 20 pounds per square foot on decking, nor SDI construction loading criteria. 5. Prevent damage due to construction operations. a. Use temporary planking or other acceptable means to protect areas subject to heavy or repeated traffic, concentrated loads, impact and wheel loads, and other construction operations. F. Install deck in straight and continuous rows. 1. Span deck over at least 3 spans wherever possible, and over 2 spans as a minimum. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install deck with ribs at right angles to supporting members. 3. Mark supports at regular intervals to maintain alignment and proper spacing of deck panels. 4. Position deck over supports and adjust to final position with sides and ends aligned. 5. Deck panel end joints. a. Locate end joints over supporting framing. b. Stagger joints between adjacent panels by at least one span. c. Provide lapped end joints unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Install with minimum 2-inch lap length centered over support. d. Where panel ends abut or are shown without lapped joint, provide minimum 2-inch long bearing for each panel. Gaps between panels of up to 1 inch are permitted if the minimum specified bearing length is maintained. G. Openings through deck: 1. Neatly and accurately cut and fit deck at openings indicated on the Drawings and around work projecting through decking. 2. Where holes are not surrounded by decking support framing on 4 sides, reinforce decking to provide full load carrying capacity at the opening. 3. Roof deck: a. Holes and openings up to 12 inches x 12 inches: Reinforce deck with 18-gage galvanized steel plate. Extend plate at least 12 inches beyond opening in all directions, and attach to top of deck ribs with 5/8-inch diameter puddle welds at corners and at 6 inches on center along perimeter. October 2016 05_31_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_31_00 (FS-100) b. Holes and openings larger than 12 inches: Reinforce deck with framing indicated on the Drawings. If framing is not shown, obtain details from Engineer. H. Install accessories required to complete the Work. 1. General: a. Filler strips: At locations where bottom of flute at long edge of deck does not rest on structural supports. b. Wall / support closures: At both faces of a wall or partition. 2. Roof deck accessories: a. Ridge and valley plates and flat plates at changes in deck direction or slope. Provide a flat, finished surface for installation of insulation. b. Deck closures. Install at open ends of openings through deck and where deck terminates at exterior walls. c. Sumps. At locations receiving roof drains. 3. Acoustical decking 4. Fasten accessories to deck or supporting members using arc spot welds or self-drilling screws spaced maximum 12 inches on center, unless another fastening pattern is indicated on the Drawings. 3.03 FASTENING / ATTACHMENT A. General: 1. Fasten steel deck panels to supporting structural framing, including perimeter support steel and/or bearing walls, using methods indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. a. Provide type, size, number, and spacing of fasteners indicated on the Drawings. 2. Fasten panels immediately after they are placed and aligned to form a secure working platform. a. Fasten longitudinal joints between adjacent deck panels ("side laps"). b. During fastening of lapped joints longitudinal joints between adjacent deck panels ("side laps") and lapped joints between panel ends ("end laps"), ensure that panels are in tight contact with each other and with underlying supports. 3. "Button punching" fastening is not permitted. B. Welding: 1. Crimped fastening systems may not be substituted where welding is indicated on the Drawings. 2. Electric arc weld deck to bearing plates; to supports at butted or lapped ends; to intermediate supports between panel ends; to side supports; and to end supports as indicated on the Drawings. a. Do not burn through the deck. b. Remove all slag. 3. At point of welding, make provisions to hold deck in firm contact with other deck panels and with deck supports. Provide weighting of top sheet with sand bags or other method acceptable to the Engineer. 4. Provide welds conforming to AWS D1.3 and made by qualified welders. 5. Maintain environmental conditions required to provide fusion, including pre-heating as required. October 2016 05_31_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_31_00 (FS-100) 6. Arc spot welds ("puddle welds"): a. Provide welds of minimum visible outer diameter at spacing indicated on the Drawings. b. Penetrate all layers of deck and laps, and provide fusion to supporting members without holes or burn through. c. Use welding washers on deck with design thickness less than 22 gage (0.028 inches), and where required to provide fusion to supporting members. 7. As welds are completed, clean with a wire brush and coat with galvanizing repair product before they are covered by successive panels. C. Self-drilling screws: 1. Install screws in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions using manufacturer's recommended installation tool. 2. Do not over-torque screws. 3. Remove and re-drive screws at side laps where upper panel is not drawn tightly against lower panel. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Site testing and inspection: 1. Welding: a. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.3 requirements. b. Visually inspect welds for conformance to the acceptance criteria of AWS D1.3 2. Self-drilling screws and powder actuated or pneumatically driven fasteners: a. Visually inspect for conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's recommendations for installation. 3. Repair or replace defective welds or fasteners. C. Field inspections and testing. 1. Results: Submit records of inspections and tests to Engineer by electronic copes within 24 hours after completion. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Special inspections and tests, and structural observation: 1. Provide as specified in Section 01_45_24. C. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections. 2. Records of inspections. a. Provide record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. October 2016 05_31_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_31_00 (FS-100) 3.06 CLEANING, TOUCHUP AND FINISHING A. Immediately after erection, remove deck trimmings; extraneous screws, fasteners, and welding washers; ends of welding rods; and other debris. Remove weld spatter, grease, and oil from deck. B. Confirm that deck panels are properly positioned, properly and completely fastened, and accepted by the Engineer before touch-up work is performed. C. Clean cut edges, field welds, rust spots, and abraded areas, and touch-up damage to coating. 1. Restore coating at cut edges, holes, and welds. 2. Galvanized panels: a. Touch up using zinc-rich primer conforming to ASTM A 780. b. Complete galvanizing repair on concrete side of floor deck before concrete slab is placed. c. Use magnetic gage to confirm that thickness of repair is equal to or greater than thickness of galvanized finish. D. Prepare deck surfaces for finishes indicated on the Drawings. 3.07 CLEANUP A. After erection, remove weld spatter, grease, and oil from decking. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not hang items from deck. END OF SECTION October 2016 05_50_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) SECTION 05_50_00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Aluminum grating stair tread. 2. Aluminum stair nosing. 3. Concrete inserts. 4. Handrails and guardrails. 5. Metal gratings. 6. Metal tread plate. 7. Preformed channel pipe supports. 8. Stairs. 9. Miscellaneous metals. 10. Associated accessories to the above items. B. Related sections: 1. Section 05_05_24 - Mechanical anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry. 2. Section 09_96_01 - High Performance Coatings. 3. Section 40_05_07.01 - Pipe Supports. 4. Section 40_05_07.03 - Preformed Channel Pipe Support System. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. DAF-45: Designations from Start to Finish. a. M12-C22-A41. B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded, and Seamless. 4. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5. A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels for General Applications. 6. A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 7. A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. 8. A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. October 2016 05_50_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) 9. A 380 - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. 10. A 489 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes. 11. A 490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated , 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 12. A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 13. A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 14. A 635 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Alloy, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, General Requirements for. 15. A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 16. A 992 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 17. B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 18. B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 19. B 308 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. 20. B 429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 21. F 593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs. D. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1. Metal Finishes Manual. F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Passivation: Removal of exogenous iron or iron compounds from the surface of a stainless steel by means of chemical dissolution resulting from treatment with an acid solution that removes the surface contamination but does not significantly affect the stainless steel itself. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Aluminum grating stair tread. 2. Aluminum stair nosing. 3. Handrail and guardrail. 4. Metal grating. B. Shop drawings: 1. Handrails and guardrails: October 2016 05_50_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) a. Including details on connection attachments, gates, kick plates, ladders, and angles. b. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. c. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. d. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 2. Metal grating. 3. Metal tread plate. 4. Stairs. 5. Miscellaneous metals. C. Samples: 1. Guardrails with specified finishes. D. Quality control submittals: 1. Design data. 2. Test reports: a. Guardrails: 3 copies of certified tests performed by an independent testing laboratory certifying that guardrails meet current State and OSHA strength requirements. b. Gratings: 1) Grating manufacturers' calculations showing that gratings will meet specified design load, stress, and deflection requirements for each size grating for each span. 2) Reports of tests performed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, structural and miscellaneous metals in accordance with the standards of the ASTM, including the following: Item ASTM Standard No. Class, Grade Type or Alloy No. Cast Iron Cast Iron A 48 Class 40B Steel Galvanized sheet iron or steel A 653 Coating G90 Coil (plate) A 635 -- Structural plate, bars, rolled shapes, and miscellaneous items (except W shapes). A 36 -- Rolled W shapes A 992 Grade 50 Standard bolts, nuts, and washers A 307 -- October 2016 05_50_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) Item ASTM Standard No. Class, Grade Type or Alloy No. High strength bolts, nuts, and hardened flat washers A 325 A 490 -- Eyebolts A 489 Type 1 Tubing, cold-formed A 500 -- Tubing, hot-formed A 501 -- Steel pipe A 53 Grade B Stainless Steel Plate, sheet, and strip A 240 Type 304* or 316** Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304* or 316** Bolts (Type 304) F593 Group 1 Condition CW Bolts (Type 316) F593 Group 2 Condition CW Aluminum Flashing sheet aluminum B 209 Alloy 5005-H14, 0.032 inches minimum thickness Structural sheet aluminum- B 209 Alloy 6061-T6 Structural aluminum B 209 B 308 Alloy 6061-T6 Extruded aluminum B 221 Alloy 6063-T42 * Use Type 304L if material will be welded. ** Use Type 316L if material will be welded. 1. Stainless steels are designated by type or series defined by ASTM. 2. Where stainless steel is welded, use low-carbon stainless steel. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Aluminum grating stair tread: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. IKG Borden Industries, Aluminum Grating Stair Tread with Mebac nosing. b. McNichols Co., Type A-Standard with Corrugated Angle Nosing. 2. Material: Welded aluminum grating tread with non-slip nosing and integral end plates for bolt on attachment to stair stringers. 3. Size: a. Tread width: To equal tread spacing plus 1 inch minimum. b. Tread length: Length to suit stringer-to-stringer dimension indicated on the Drawings. c. Depth: 1-3/4 inches. 4. Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel. B. Aluminum stair nosing: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Wooster Products, Inc., Type 101 Nosing. October 2016 05_50_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) b. American Safety Tread Co., Inc., Style 801 Nosing. 2. Material: Cast aluminum abrasive nosings with aluminum oxide granules integrally cast into metal, forming permanent, nonslip, long-wearing surface. 3. For installation in cast-in-place stairs. 4. Configuration: 4 inches wide, fabricated with integrally cast stainless steel anchors at approximately 12-inch centers. Length to extend within 3 inches of stair edge on each side. C. Concrete inserts: 1. Concrete inserts for supporting pipe and other applications are specified in Section 40_05_07.01. D. Handrails and guardrails: 1. General: a. Design and fabricate assemblies to conform to current local, State, and OSHA standards and requirements. b. Coordinate layout of assemblies and post spacings to avoid conflicts with equipment and equipment operators. 1) Indicate on the shop drawings locations of such equipment. 2) Highlight locations where railings cannot be made continuous, and obtain Engineer’s directions on how to proceed before fabricating or installing railings. 2. Aluminum handrails and guardrails (nonwelded pipe): a. Rails, posts, and fitting-assembly spacers: 1) In accordance with ASTM B 429, 6005, 6063 or 6105, minimum Schedule 40, extruded aluminum pipe of minimum 1.89-inch outside diameter and 0.14-inch wall thickness. b. Kick plates: 6061 or 6105 aluminum alloy. c. Fastenings and fasteners: As recommended or furnished by the manufacturer. d. Other parts: 6063 extruded aluminum, or F214 or F514.0 aluminum castings: 1) Fabrications: In accordance with ASTM B 209 or ASTM B 221 extruded bars: a) Bases: 6061 or 6063 extruded aluminum alloy. 2) Plug screws or blind rivets: Type 305 stainless steel. a) Other parts: Type 300 series stainless steel. e. Finish of aluminum components: 1) Anodized finish, 0.7 mil thick, applied to exposed surfaces after cutting. Aluminum Association Specification M12-C22-A41, mechanical finish non specular as fabricated, chemical finish-medium matte, anodic coating-clear Class I Architectural. 2) Pretreat aluminum for cleaning and removing markings before anodizing. f. Fabrication and assembly: 1) Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length. 2) Perform without welding. 3) Do not epoxy bond the parts. 4) Maximum clear opening between assembled railing components as indicated on the Drawings. g. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Moultrie Manufacturing Company, Wesrail. October 2016 05_50_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) 2) Golden Railings, Golden, CO, Riveted System. 3) Craneveyor Corporation Enerco Metals, C-V Rail. 3. Fastenings and fasteners: As recommended or furnished by guardrail manufacturer for use with this system. E. Metal gratings: 1. General: a. Fabricate grating to cover areas indicated on the Drawings. b. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, grating over an opening shall cover entire opening. c. Make cutouts in grating where required for equipment access or protrusion, including valve operators or stems, and gate frames. d. Band ends of grating and edges of cutouts in grating: 1) End banding: 1/4 inch less than height of grating, with top of grating and top edge of banding flush. 2) Cutout banding: Full-height of grating. 3) Use banding of same material as grating. 4) Panel layout: Enable installation and subsequent removal of grating around protrusions or piping. 5) Openings 6 inches and larger: Lay out grating panels with edges of 2 adjacent panels located on centerline of opening. 6) Openings smaller than 6 inches: Locate opening at edge of single panel. 7) Where an area requires more than 1 grating section to cover area, clamp adjacent grating sections together at 1/4-points with fasteners acceptable to Engineer. 8) Fabricate steel grating sections in units weighing not more than [50] pounds each. 9) Fabricate aluminum grating sections in units of weighing not more than 50 pounds each. 10) Gaps between adjacent grating sections shall not be more than the clear spacing between bearing bars. e. When requested by Engineer, test 1 section of each size grating for each span length involved on the job under full load: 1) Furnish a suitable dial gauge for measuring deflections. f. Grating shall be aluminum, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Aluminum grating: a. Material for gratings, shelf angles, and rebates: 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloy, except crossbars may be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. b. Shelf angle concrete anchors: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. c. Grating rebate rod anchors: 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloy. d. Bar size and spacing: As determined by manufacturer to enable grating to support design load. e. Design live load: A minimum of 100 pounds per square foot uniform live load on entire grating area, but not less than the live load indicated on the Drawings for the area where grating is located. f. Maximum fiber stress for design load: 12,000 pounds per square inch. g. Maximum deflection due to design load: 1/240 of grating clear span. h. Maximum spacing of main grating bars: 1-1/8 inches clear between bars. i. Minimum grating height: 1-1/2 inches. October 2016 05_50_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) j. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) IKG Borden Industries, grooved aluminum I-bar. 2) Brodhead Steel Products, Inc., grooved aluminum I-bar. 3. Stainless steel gratings: a. H Bar size and spacing: As determined by the manufacturer to support design load. b. Design live load: A minimum of 100 pounds per square foot uniform live load on the entire area of the grating area, but not less than the live load indicated on the Drawings for the area where the grating is located. c. Maximum fiber stress for design load: 18,000 pounds per square inch. d. Maximum deflection under design load: 1/240 of grating clear span. e. Bar spacing: Maximum of 1-1/8 inches clear between bars. f. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) IKG Borden Industries, IKG Weldforged. 2) Brodhead Steel Products, Inc., Type 19 W 4. F. Metal tread plate: 1. Plate having a raised figured pattern on 1 surface to provide improved traction. G. Preformed channel pipe supports: 1. Preformed channel pipe supports for pipe supports and other applications are specified in Section 40_05_07.03. H. Stairs: 1. Aluminum stairs: a. Stringers: 6061-T6 aluminum alloy. b. Stair treads: 1) Aluminum of same type specified under Aluminum Grating. 2) Of sizes indicated on the Drawings, and 1-3/4 inch minimum depth with cast abrasive type safety nosings. c. Handrails and guardrails: Aluminum pipe specified under Aluminum Handrails and Guardrails (Nonwelded Pipe). d. Fasteners: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. I. Miscellaneous aluminum: 1. Fabricate aluminum products, not covered separately in this Section, in accordance with the best practices of the trade and field assemble by riveting or bolting. 2. Do not weld or flame cut. J. Miscellaneous cast iron: 1. General: a. Tough, gray iron, free from cracks, holes, swells, and cold shuts. b. Quality such that hammer blow will produce indentation on rectangular edge of casting without flaking metal. c. Before leaving the foundry, clean castings and apply 16-mil dry film thickness coating of coal-tar epoxy, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. K. Miscellaneous stainless steel: 1. Provide miscellaneous stainless steel items not specified in this Section as indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere. October 2016 05_50_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) a. Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of the trade. 2. Cleaning and passivation: a. Following shop fabrication of stainless steel members, clean and passivate fabrications. b. Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale and other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface. c. Provide quality control testing to verify effectiveness of cleaning agents and procedures and to confirm that finished surfaces are clean and passivated. 1) Conduct sample runs using test specimens with proposed cleaning agents and procedures as required to avoid adverse effects on surface finishes and base materials. d. Pre-clean, chemically descale (pickle), and final clean fabrications in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 380 to remove deposited contaminants before shipping. 1) Passivation by citric acid treatment is not allowed. a) If degreasing is required before cleaning to remove scale or iron oxide, cleaning (pickling) treatments with citric acid are permissible; however, these treatments shall be followed by inorganic cleaners such as nitric-hydrofluoric acid. 2) Provide acid descaling (pickling) in accordance with Table A1.1 of Annex A1 of ASTM A 380. 3) After pickling, final cleaning of stainless steel shall conform to Part II of Table A2.1 of Annex A2 of ASTM A 380. e. After cleaning, inspect using methods specified for “gross inspection” in ASTM A 380. f. Improperly or poorly cleaned and passivated materials shall not be shipped and will not be accepted at the job site. L. Miscellaneous structural steel: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel items not specified in this Section as indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere. a. Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of the trade. M. Isolating sleeves and washers: 1. As indicated on the Drawings and as specified in Section 05_05_24. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: 1. Examine work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to receive the work of this Section. 2. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this work until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: October 2016 05_50_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) 1. Install products as indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions, as applicable except where specified otherwise. 2. Interface between materials: a. Dissimilar metals: Where steel comes in contact with dissimilar metals (aluminum, stainless steel, etc.), separate or isolate the dissimilar metals. 1) Make application so that the isolating or protective barrier is not visible in the completed construction. 2) Isolating sleeves and washers: As specified in Section 05_05_24. b. Aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry: Coat aluminum surfaces as specified in Section 09_96_01. c. Aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry. B. Aluminum stair nosing: 1. Install stair nosings on treads of concrete stairs, including top tread on upper concrete slab. 2. Omit stair nosings where concrete is submerged. 3. Cast stair nosings in fresh concrete, flush with tread and riser faces. Install nosing in center of step approximately 3 inches from each stair edge. C. Handrails and guardrails: 1. General: a. Fasten pipe rails to fittings with Series 300 stainless steel pop rivets or flush set screws. b. Make pipe cuts clean and straight, free of burrs and nicks, and square and accurate for minimum joint-gap. c. Drill and countersink holes to proper size, as required for a tight flush fit of screws and other component parts. d. Space attachment brackets as indicated in the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Aluminum pipe handrails and guardrails: a. During construction, keep exterior surfaces of handrails and guardrails covered with 0.4 millimeters, minimum, heat shrink polyethylene film. b. Do not remove protective film before handrails and guardrails have been accepted by Engineer nor before other work in proximity of handrails and guardrails has been completed. c. Discontinue handrails and guardrails at lighting fixtures. d. Provide 1/8-inch diameter weep hole at base of each post. e. Space posts as indicated on the Drawings. f. Anchor posts into concrete by grouting posts into formed holes in concrete, into stainless steel sleeves cast in concrete; or bracket mount to face of concrete surfaces as specified and indicated on the Drawings. g. Space rails as indicated on the Drawings. h. Make adequate provision for expansion and contraction of kick plates and rails. 1) Make provisions for removable sections where indicated on the Drawings. i. Make lower rails a single, unspliced length between posts, or continuous. j. Make top rails continuous whenever possible, and attach single, unspliced lengths to 3 posts minimum. k. Draw up fasteners tight with hand wrench or screw driver. October 2016 05_50_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) l. Space attachment brackets as indicated on shop drawings or in manufacturer's installation instructions. m. Completed installation shall have handrails and railings rigid and free of play at joints and attachments. n. Protect handrail and guardrail finish from scratches, gouges, dents, stains, and other damage. o. Replace damaged or disfigured handrails and guardrails with new. p. Shortly before final acceptance of the work, and after removal of protective polyethylene film, clean handrails and guardrails with mild detergent or with soap and water. 1) After cleaning, thoroughly rinse handrails and guardrails and wipe with soft cloth. q. Erect guardrail straight, level, plumb, and true to the positions as indicated on the Drawings. Correct deviations from true line of grade, which are visible to the eye. 3. Guardrail gates: a. Install gate to be a vertical plane with the guardrail when in the closed position. b. Install hinges so that each gate can swing 180 degrees from the closed position to the fully open position. c. Install so that the gates swing to the walkway side of the guardrail only. 1) Install gate stops on the stationary railing posts to prohibit gates from swinging in the wrong direction. d. Install gate frames, hinges, stops, and latches in conformance with OSHA minimum strength requirements. D. Metal gratings: 1. General: a. Allow 1/8-inch maximum clearance between ends of grating and inside face of vertical leg of shelf angles. b. Horizontal bearing leg of shelf angles shall be 2 inches minimum. c. Install aluminum plate or angles where necessary to fill openings at changes in elevation and at openings between equipment and grating. d. Install angle stops at ends of grating. e. Installed grating shall not slide out of rebate or off support. f. Weld stops in place, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. g. Top surfaces of grating sections adjacent to each other shall lie in same plane. 2. Aluminum grating: a. Aluminum grating: Support on aluminum shelf angles or rebates. 3. Stainless steel grating: a. Support on stainless steel shelf angles or rebates. 4. Heavy-duty steel grating: a. Support on hot-dip galvanized structural steel rebates embedded and anchored in concrete. b. Use for roadways, traffic areas, and where indicated on the Drawings. E. Stairs: 1. General: a. Install guard railings around stair wells as indicated on the Drawings or specified. October 2016 05_50_00-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/05_50_00 (FS-100) F. Stainless Steel: 1. Welding: a. Passivate field-welded surfaces: 1) Provide cleaning, pickling and passivating as specified in this Section. 2) Clean using Derustit Stainless Steel Cleaner, or equal. END OF SECTION October 2016 06_80_17-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/06_80_17 (FS-100) SECTION 06_80_17 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Fiberglass reinforced plastic fabrications including: 1. Parshall flume liners. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_60_00 - Product Requirements. 2. Section 05_05_24 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry. 3. Section 40_72_13 - Level Measurement - Ultrasonic. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. F 102 - Matched-Die-Molded, Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Weir Plates, Scum Baffles, and Mounting Brackets. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 2. D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 3. D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 4. D 2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation of Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor. 5. E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects. D. United States, Department of Agriculture (USDA). E. United States, Department of the Interior: 1. Bureau of Reclamation (USBR): a. ISO 9826 - Water Measurement Manual, Measurement of Liquid Flow in Open Channel. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Parshall flume liner: Provide temporary bracing for liner to assure maintenance of dimensions during shipment. Maintain bracing in place for installation. October 2016 06_80_17-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/06_80_17 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PARSHALL FLUME LINER A. General: 1. Size(s)/Dimensions: As indicated on the Drawings with interior dimensions in accordance with USBR/ISO 9826. 2. Performance requirements: a. Accuracy of flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of rate with plus or minus 0.5 percent of rate repeatability. b. Chemical exposure: c. Suitable for outdoor use in contact with ambient temperatures. B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. BIF Industries. 2. F. B. Leopold Company, Inc. 3. Plasti-Fab. 4. TRACOM, Inc, Alpharetta, Georgia. 5. Warminster Fiberglass. C. Parshall flume (concrete): 1. Composition: Sufficient embedded galvanized steel to produce substantial, self-supporting rigid structure requiring no external supporting structure. 2. Throat with fiberglass reinforced plastic liner installed: 60 inches wide for measuring flows from 1.5 to 50 million gallons per day. 3. Interior dimensions with fiberglass reinforced plastic liner installed: In accordance with USDA Circular 843.a. D. Materials: 1. Glass fiber reinforced plastic, having the following properties: Test Standard Requirement: Tensile strength ASTM D 638 14,000 psi, minimum Flexural strength ASTM D 790 25,000 psi, minimum Flexural modulus ASTM D 790 1,000,000 psi, minimum Indentation hardness (Barcol) ASTM D 2583 40 minimum, average 2. Minimum corrosion liner: a. On interior surface of flume. b. Two "C" or Nexus veils as specified for the service environment. c. Remainder 1-1/2 ounce per square foot mat to a total minimum thickness of 0.106 inches. 3. Ultraviolet stabilizer: Added to the corrosion liner in the type and amount recommended by the resin manufacturer. 4. Minimum 3/8-inch total thickness. 5. Resin: Premium grade vinyl ester: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: As recommended by the resin manufacturer for the specific operating environment: 1) Derakane 411. 2) Hetron 922. October 2016 06_80_17-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/06_80_17 (FS-100) 3) Reichhold Dion VER 9100. 4) Interplastic VE 8300. 6. Color: Manufacturer’s standard. E. Fabrication: 1. Fabricated with integral stiffening ribs. 2. One piece, full-length construction for flumes up to 84 inches. F. Accessories: 1. Ultrasonic level transmitter: a. As specified in Section 40_72_13 for transmitter and mounting requirements. b. Bushing/coupling for mounting bracket. c. Fixed position bracket of Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Staff gage: a. Molded to inside wall of flume and graduated in feet, with 50 divisions per foot. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation of products as specified in Section 01_60_00. 3.02 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install products where indicated on the Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.03 PARSHALL FLUME A. Install by grouting into place. END OF SECTION October 2016 07_11_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_11_00 (FS-100) SECTION 07_11_00 DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Dampproofing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Shop drawings. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. D. Warranty. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in original, unopened containers in compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to volatile organic compound limits of the local authority having jurisdiction. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: Do not apply bituminous dampproofing when temperatures are 40 degrees Fahrenheit or lower or when rain is forecast for the 24 hours following application. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Dampproofing: ASTM D 1227, Asbestos Free, Emulsified Asphalt Coatings. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Karnak Corp., Karnak 220 AF. b. W.R. Meadows, Inc., Sealmastic Type 2 Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing. October 2016 07_11_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_11_00 (FS-100) B. Sealing mastic: Type compatible with dampproofing and free of toxic solvents with thick mastic consistency and smooth and uniform in composition product as recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for application of products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Verify that surfaces to receive dampproofing are clean, dry, reasonably smooth, free of dust, dirt, voids, cracks, or sharp projections. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Completely cover surfaces to receive dampproofing with 2 coats. 1. Applied by brush or spray. 2. Apply dampproofing at manufacturer's recommended rate of application or minimum 2 gallons per square per coat, whichever is greater. B. Extend dampproofing to 6 inches above finish grade. C. Apply each coat evenly so surfaces have uniform black appearance. D. Apply second coat at right angles to first, allowing not less than 24 hours between coats. E. Seal around items and services projecting through dampproofing surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F. Ensure sealed areas are moisture tight. G. Backfill completely against dampproofing application within time recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION October 2016 07_22_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_22_00 (FS-100) SECTION 07_22_00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Roof and deck insulation and associated accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_31_19 - Project Meetings. 2. Section 07_61_13 - Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. D 41- Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. 3. D 312 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. B. FM Global (FM). C. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA). D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Roof insulation system: As follows with UL Class A and FM Class 1A fire classification and meeting FM 1-90 wind up-lift requirements. 1. Where 5-inch rigid foam roof insulation is indicated on the Drawings, insulation shall be as follows: a. First layer: 2-inch thick foam insulation having an R-Value of 12.0. b. Vapor retarder. c. Second layer: 3-inch thick foam insulation having an R-Value of 18.0. d. Total system thickness shall be 5 inches and have a minimum R-Value of 30.0. e. Top Surface shall be 5/8" Fire-treated plywood as shown in the drawings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Samples. Include 6-inch square samples of each type and thickness of insulation required. C. State thickness and R-value of insulation to be provided. October 2016 07_22_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_22_00 (FS-100) D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include the following: 1. Indicate special environmental conditions required for installation. 2. Indicate adhesive recommendations. 3. Indicate fastener recommendations and attachment pattern to meet specified FM 1-90 requirements. 4. Indicate installation techniques. E. Certificates: 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Certify that insulation is approved by manufacturer for use with specified roofing materials. F. Manufacturer's Field Reports. G. Warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer of proposed product for minimum 5 years with satisfactory performance record. B. Installer qualifications: 1. Manufacturer-approved installer of products similar to specified products on minimum 5 projects of similar scope as Project with satisfactory performance record. 2. Committed to complying with manufacturer's specifications and NRCA recommendations. 3. Committed to assuming undivided responsibility for roof insulation, roofing membrane and sheet metal flashing, and trim associated with roofing. C. Product compatibility: Provide roofing manufacturer approved roof insulation. D. Pre-installation conference: Conduct as specified in Section 01_31_19. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Label asphalt containers with certification of full compliance with requirements of ASTM D 312, Table 1, and indicating equiviscous temperature, finished flowing temperature, and flash point. C. Store roof system materials on pallets or dunnage at least 4 inches above ground and suitably covered to protect from weather. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Apply no more insulation than can be completely covered with roofing membrane on the same day. B. When installation of insulation and roof membrane cannot be completed within same day, install temporary water cutoffs at end of day's work and remove cutoffs prior to resumption of work. October 2016 07_22_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_22_00 (FS-100) 1.08 WARRANTY A. Minimum 10 year warranty to correct defective roofing materials, including installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Base felt: ASTM D 4601, Type II; glass mat coated with filled asphalt and surfaced one side with mineral non-blocking agent; minimum 27 pounds per square foot. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. John Manville, Inc., Denver, CO, GlasBase. b. Atlas Roofing Corporation, Atlanta, GA, equivalent product. B. Vapor retarder: ASTM D 2178, Type IV; asphalt impregnated glass fiber sheet with nominal tensile strength 30 percent higher than required by ASTM D 2178 for Type IV felts. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. John Manville, Inc., Denver, CO, GlasPly Premier. b. Atlas Roofing Corporation, Atlanta, GA, equivalent product. C. Rigid foam roof insulation: 1. Closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core bonded to universal fiberglass reinforced facers. 2. Utilizing environmentally compliant blowing agent. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Johns Manville, Inc., Denver, CO, ENRGY 3. b. Atlas Roofing Corporation, Atlanta, GA, ACFoam II. D. Primer: ASTM D 41, asphalt primer. E. Bitumen: ASTM D 312, Type II, III, or IV petroleum asphalt, free from inorganic matter; as recommended by manufacturer for interply moppings to suit particular slope limitations. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Screw fastener system for steel decks: 1. Self-drilling and self-tapping, zinc plated or stainless steel screws, sized for 1/2- to 3/4-inch exposure on exposed to view underside of deck, with minimum 3-inch square or diameter ribbed steel stress plates, hot-dip galvanized with minimum G-60 coating in accordance with ASTM A 123. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Tru Fast, Bryan, OH. b. TW Buildex, Itasca, IL. B. Base felt fasteners: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Berryfast, Tapefast. b. Bostitch, Disc-A-Matic Systems. October 2016 07_22_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_22_00 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that deck surfaces are clean, dry, and where required, coated with primer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OVER STEEL DECK A. Install roof insulation in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. B. Secure wood nailers to roof deck adjoining eaves, at roof curbs for attachment of flashing and counterflashing, and at other locations indicated on the Drawings. 1. Nailers shall be built up of pressure treated wood to match the thickness of the insulation. C. Apply first layer of roof insulation with long joints continuous, either parallel or at right angles to ribs of deck. D. Form joints parallel to ribs over solid bearing. E. Stagger end joints. F. Secure with approved mechanical fasteners in FM I-90 pattern: 1. Space fasteners as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2. Drive fasteners through tin caps or plastic fastener/cap assemblies, unless they are provided with integral flat cap not less than 1 inch across. 3. Install screw fastener system in top rib of steel deck in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Where underside of metal deck is exposed to view, size fasteners to penetrate deck from 1/2- to 3/4-inch, unless otherwise recommended by fastener manufacturer. G. Vapor retarder: 1. Apply one 18 inch wide layer of vapor retarder, then continue with full 36 inch widths, lapping each course 2 inches over preceding one. 2. Install each felt so felt is firmly and uniformly set, without voids, into hot asphalt applied just before felt at nominal uniform 23 pounds per square over entire surface. 3. Turn up edges of felts on, but not connected to, vertical surfaces and extend beyond roof edges for coverage sufficient to permit minimum 4 inch return over top surface of insulation. H. Do not leave insulation exposed to weather. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Roof insulation which becomes wet or damaged shall be removed and replaced with solid, dry insulation, unless installer provides written acceptance of the damaged insulation from the roofing manufacturer, whose warranty shall cover the system. October 2016 07_22_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_22_00 (FS-100) B. Inspections: Roof membrane manufacturer, whose warranty shall cover complete roof assembly, shall provide supervision and inspection necessary to secure warranty. END OF SECTION October 2016 07_26_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_26_00 (FS-100) SECTION 07_26_00 VAPOR RETARDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Vapor retarder. 2. Pressure sensitive tape or mastic. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slab. 2. E 1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data including manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming, and penetration repair. B. ASTM E 1745 test results by third-party testing agency. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VAPOR RETARDER A. Polyethylene film: 1. In accordance with ASTM E 1745, Class A. 2. Vapor permeance in accordance with ASTM E 1745, Section 7.1: 0.01 perms or less. B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Reef Industries, VaporGuard, Houston, TX. 2. Stego Industries, LLC, Stego Wrap, San Clemente, CA. 2.02 PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE OR MASTIC: A. Use manufacturer’s recommended pressure sensitive tape or mastic. October 2016 07_26_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_26_00 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Level and compact base material. B. Remove all sharp and protruding objects from surfaces to receive vapor retarder. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor retarder/barrier in accordance with ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer’s instructions. B. Place vapor retarder in greatest widths and lengths practicable. C. Overlap joints a minimum of 6-inches and seal with manufacturer’s pressure- sensitive tape. D. Lap vapor retarder/barrier over footings and seal to the foundation wall. E. Seal punctures and tears with patch created from vapor barrier material secured with pressure sensitive tape. F. Around pipes: Use manufacturer’s recommended pressure sensitive tape or mastic. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect vapor retarder so that other construction activities do not puncture, damage, or otherwise cause deterioration of vapor retarder. B. Repair damage to vapor retarder with pressure sensitive tape. C. Cut vapor retarder around pipes and conduit piercing vapor retarder with undersized holes and apply manufacturer recommended pressure sensitive tape or mastic to insure maximum vapor retarder effectiveness. END OF SECTION October 2016 07_41_15-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_41_15 (FS-100) SECTION 07_41_15 METAL SOFFITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Preformed metal soffits, and associated accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. 1402 - Standard Specification for Aluminum Siding, Soffit and Fascia. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Shop drawings: Include thicknesses and dimensions of parts, fastening and anchoring methods, details and locations of seams, joints, and other provisions for thermal movement. a. Show plans and elevations at minimum scale of 1/4 inch to 1 foot, and details at minimum scale of 3 inches to 1 foot. 2. Product data: Include standard color and finish options. 3. Samples: Submit as follows: a. 24-inch by 24-inch (305 by 305 millimeters) samples of each roofing soffit and flashing product to show selected colors, finishes, and textures used on project. 4. Samples: Include 8-inch square samples of color and finish on specified substrate. 5. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 6. Certificates: Manufacturer's approval of installer and shop drawings. 7. Warranty. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer-approved installer of products similar to specified products on minimum 5 projects of similar scope as Project with satisfactory performance record. B. Exposed sheet metal material used for soffit panels, flashings, closers, and other trim shall be product of 1 manufacturer. C. Other materials shall be products approved or recommended by soffit system manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. October 2016 07_41_15-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_41_15 (FS-100) 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's nonprorated lifetime warranty on materials and replacement labor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Ensure manufacture has minimum 5 years’ experience in manufacturing components similar to or exceeding requirements of project. 2.02 PREFORMED METAL SOFFITS A. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1. CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Moon Township, PA 15108-2944. B. Metallic-coated steel face sheet: Coil-Coated, ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated (Galvalume) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792 M, Class AZ50 Grade 50 (Class AZM150, Grade 275), structural steel quality. 2. Face sheet: Minimum 0.030 inch/22 gage (0.76 mm) nominal uncoated thickness. 3. Surface: Smooth. C. Concealed fastener metal soffit panels: 1. Metal wall panels, general: Factory-formed, concealed fastener panels with interconnecting side joints, fastened to supports with concealed fasteners, with factory-applied sealant in side laps when required to meet performance requirements. 2. Horizontal joints: Horizontal joints with drip edge and sloped drain shelf to provide positive water shed away from Panel Joinery. 3. Flush-joint profile with raised flat pan: a. Basis of design product: CENTRIA, IW-10A. b. Panel coverage: 12 inches (305 mm). c. Panel height: 1.50 inches (38 mm). D. Soffit trim and flashing: 1. Material: 0.033-inch (0.85 millimeters) hot-dipped galvanized steel. 2. Profiles: To manufacturer’s standard flashing and trim profiles. 3. Color and finish to match roof. E. Metal roof finishes: 1. Fluoropolymer three-coat system: 0.8 mil primer, 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat, and a 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer clear coat, AAMA 620 a. Basis of design: CENTRIA Duraguard Plus. 2. Color as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors, chosen by Engineer and as approved by Owner. October 2016 07_41_15-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_41_15 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify governing dimensions at building. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface preparation: Clean and repair when necessary adjoining surfaces when necessary for proper installation of preformed metal soffit panels. 3.03 SOFFITS A. Install soffit system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install trim at each end of soffit panel. C. Miter corners. D. Exercise care in placing aluminum in contact with metals or materials not compatible with aluminum. 1. Isolate dissimilar metals with neoprene gaskets. E. Install ventilated panel every fourth panel. F. Finished soffit shall be accurately aligned and free of dents, scratches, or other defects. END OF SECTION October 2016 07_51_20-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_51_20 (FS-100) SECTION 07_51_20 ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Self-adhering sheet membrane as a sloped roof underlayment. B. Related sections: 1. Section 07_61_13 - Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 412 - Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension. 2. D 903 - Standard Test Methods for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds. 3. D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. 4. D 3767 - Standard Practice for Rubber Measurement of Dimensions. 5. E 96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's product data sheet and product sample. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Self-adhesive membrane roofing underlayment shall be manufactured and marketed by W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn., Grace Construction Products, Cambridge, MA or a firm with a minimum of 25 years experience in the production and sales of self-adhered membrane roofing underlayments. 2. Underlayment’s shall be warranted for at least 25 years. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The membrane and accessory products must be handled properly. 1. Read all product labels and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for proper handling and disposal. 2. Deliver all materials in manufacturer's unopened packages and store all materials under cover. 3. Do not double stack palletized material. October 2016 07_51_20-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_51_20 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. W. R. Grace & Company, Grace Ice & Water Shield. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Grace Ice & Water Shield: 1. Cold-applied, self-adhering membrane composed of a high density, cross laminated polyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of butyl rubber adhesive. 2. The polyethylene film is embossed with a slip resistant surface. 3. Product is interwound with a disposable silicone-coated release sheet. 4. Membrane shall conform to the following physical properties: Property Value Test Method Color Gray-Black Thickness, Membrane 0.76 mm (30 mil) ASTM D 3767 Method A Tensile Strength, Membrane 1,720 kN/m2 (250 psi) ASTM D 412 (Die C Modified) Elongation, Membrane 250% ASTM D 412 (Die C Modified) Low Temperature Flexibility Unaffected @ -29° C (-20° F) ASTM D 1970 Adhesion to Plywood 525 N/m (3.0 lb/in width) ASTM D 903 Permeance (Max) 2.9 ng/m2s Pa (0.05 Perms) ASTM E 96 Material Weight Installed (Max) 1.1 kg/m2 (0.22 lb/ft2 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Accessory Products: Bituthene Primer WP-3000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install the membrane directly on a clean, dry, continuous structural deck. 1. Some suitable deck materials include plywood, wood composition, wood plank, metal, concrete, or gypsum sheathing. 2. Remove dust, dirt, loose nails, and old roofing materials. 3. Protrusions from the deck area must be removed. 4. Decks shall have no voids, damaged, or unsupported areas. 5. Repair deck areas before installing the membrane. B. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces with Bituthene Primer WP-3000 at a rate of 12-15 m2/L (500-600 ft2/gal). 1. Priming is not required for other suitable surfaces provided that they are clean and dry. October 2016 07_51_20-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_51_20 (FS-100) 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install at all valleys, ridges, transitions, and through-out as recommended by manufacturer. B. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed application procedures, precautions, and limitations. END OF SECTION October 2016 07_60_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_60_00 (FS-100) SECTION 07_60_00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: flashing, sheet metal, and associated accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 04_22_00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 06_10_00 - Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 07_71_00 - Roof Specialties and Accessories. 4. Section 07_90_00 - Joint Sealants. 5. Section 46_05_10 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA). B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip For Pressure Vessels and General Applications. 2. A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 4. B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 5. B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 6. B 224 - Standard Classification of Coppers. 7. B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 8. B 749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 9. D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 10. D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Shop drawings: Show fabrication details, material profiles, connections, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, isolation methods, and installation details. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. October 2016 07_60_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_60_00 (FS-100) 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate sheet metal installation with installation of materials specified in Sections 07_22_00, 07_41_15, and 07_61_13. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack preformed material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 653, G-90 minimum 24 gauge thick, with 1.25 ounce coating. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and metal washers: Types best suited for purpose, of same material as sheet metal being fastened or of composition that will not support electrolysis, such as Type 18-8 stainless steel for fastening aluminum. B. Sealer washers: Rubber type, minimum 0.040 inch thick. C. Underlayment: ASTM D 226; Number 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt. D. Metal primer: Protective backing paint: Bituminous. E. Slip sheet: Rosin sized building paper. F. Bedding compound: Rubber-asphalt type. G. Roof cement: ASTM D 4586, plastic asphaltic cement. H. Solder: ASTM B 32. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sheet metal true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form rises and angles into flashing true and straight, with exposed surfaces free from waves and buckles. C. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, minimum 3 inches wide, interlockable with sheet. October 2016 07_60_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_60_00 (FS-100) D. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. Size and space joints to provide adequate movement for thermal expansion and contraction. E. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. F. Form material with flat lock seams. G. Solder and seal metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. H. Fabricate corners from 1 piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. I. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. J. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend a minimum 2 inches over roofing. Return and break edges. 2.04 FINISH A. Prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces. B. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install flashing and sheet metal in accordance with AA and SMACNA references, and when in connection with roofing, roofing manufacturer's specifications. B. Install sheet metal to even smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry surfaces, free from defects that could affect installation. C. Install flashings where necessary to provide leakproof conditions. D. Isolate dissimilar metals from direct contact with protective backing paint. E. Install starter, edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. F. Perform cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate work of other sections. October 2016 07_60_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_60_00 (FS-100) G. Install sealer washers under metal washers or fastener heads where weathertightness is required. H. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. I. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations acceptable to the Engineer. J. Seam and seal joints. Make connections watertight and weathertight. K. Apply roof cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. 1. Fit flashings tight in place. 2. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and line accurate to profiles. L. Seal metal joints watertight. END OF SECTION October 2016 07_61_13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_61_13 (FS-100) SECTION 07_61_13 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Preformed metal roofing, fascia, and associated accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01_81_04 - Wind Design Criteria. 4. Section 07_51_20 - Roofing Underlayment 5. Section 07_90_00 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 3. D 2626 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing. B. NSF International (NSF). 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: Provide metal roof panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing agency on manufacturer's warrantied assemblies. B. Design and manufacture roof decking in accordance with the Building Code as specified in Section 01_41_00: 1. Live load design: 20 pounds per square foot. 2. Uplift for a wind: As specified in Section 01_81_04. 3. Roofing system shall be suitable for wet reservoir environment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop drawings: Include thicknesses and dimensions of parts, fastening and anchoring methods, details and locations of seams, joints, and other provisions for thermal movement. Show plans and elevations at minimum scale of 1/4 inch to 1 foot, and details at minimum scale of 3 inches to 1 foot. C. Product data: Include standard color and finish options. October 2016 07_61_13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_61_13 (FS-100) D. Samples: Include 8-inch square samples of color and finish on specified substrate. E. Manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Certificates: Manufacturer's approval of installer and shop drawings. G. Maintenance data. H. Warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer-approved installer of products similar to specified products on minimum 5 projects of similar scope as Project with satisfactory performance record. B. Exposed sheet metal material used for roofing including roofing panels, flashings, closures, and other trim shall be product of 1 manufacturer. C. Other materials shall be products approved or recommended by roofing system manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Metal Panel Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty to repair or replace metal panels that rupture or perforate due to corrosion within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Weather-tight Performance Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty to repair or replace components of metal roof panel system that fail to remain weather-tight for a period of 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Panel Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty to repair or replace metal roof panels that where the factory-applied finish has evidence of deterioration with the 20 years from the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Preformed metal roofing: The following or equal: 1. CENTRIA Architectural Systems, Moon Township, PA, SRS3 Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof Panel System. October 2016 07_61_13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_61_13 (FS-100) 2.02 PREFORMED METAL ROOFING A. System: Batten type, sheet steel roofing system including fascia, flashing, and sealants. B. Batten spacing: 16 inches on center. 2.03 EXPOSED COMPONENTS A. Sheet steel: ASTM A 653, G90 minimum coating designation, minimum 22 gauge. B. Finish: 1. Top: Precoated, factory-finished aliphatic polyurethane over epoxy-based primer, minimum total dry film thickness 1.5 mil within 0.20 mil. 2. Bottom: NSF approved 2 coat epoxy coating, minimum total dry film thickness 8.0 mil within 0.2 mil. C. Surfaces must be prepared in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. D. Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Roofing Underlayment: Per Section 07_51_20. B. Underlayment: ASTM D 2626, asphalt-saturated and coated organic felt, minimum 30 pounds. C. Hold-down clips: Stainless steel of type that will allow thermal movement of roof panels. D. Closures: System manufacturer's standard neoprene blocks shaped to fit roof metal profile. E. Solder: ASTM B 32 alloy composition SN 50. F. Fasteners: 1. Nails, screws, rivets, and other fasteners: Stainless steel or alloy appropriate to roofing metal. 2. Nails: Ringed or twisted shank type, of lengths required. 3. Screws: Stainless steel pan head wood or sheet metal screws for use with hold-down clips. G. Sealant: As specified in Section 07_90_00, unless recommended otherwise by panel manufacturer. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Panels: 1. Fabricate with upturned edges to form standing seam joints with minimum 1-1/2-inch high edges. 2. Fabricate to extend from eaves to ridge in a single length, with no end laps. October 2016 07_61_13-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_61_13 (FS-100) B. Battens: Approximately 1-1/2 inches square, and evenly spaced approximately 16 inches on center. C. Ridge, hips, eaves, rakes, fascia, coping, and other exposed flashings: Form of sheet steel matching roofing to provide weathertight roofing system. D. Form sheets, battens, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, gutters, downspouts, and other components to profiles indicated on the Drawings and required for permanent leakproof construction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify governing dimensions at building. B. Verify that substrate is firm, dry, and free of foreign materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and repair adjoining surfaces when necessary for proper installation of preformed metal roofing panels. 3.03 UNDERLAYMENT A. Apply single-ply of underlayment, lapped shingle fashion, with Kraft paper side up, 3-inch head laps and 6-inch side laps, and cover with slip sheet similarly lapped. B. Hold underlayment in place with minimum number of fasteners. C. Install no more underlayment than can be covered by metal roofing in a single day. 3.04 ROOFING A. Install roofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Lay out pattern to place batten seams equidistant from corners and aligned with seams on other side of hip or ridge. C. Start installation from eaves. D. Secure roofing panels in place with concealed clips and fasteners. 1. Exposed fasteners through roof panels, batten covers, and flashings shall not be used. E. Locate clips in joints within 6 inches of panel ends. F. At eaves, cut upturned edges and bend panel down to form fascia. G. At intersections of roof slope with ridge and hips, turn up edges of roof panels 1 inch. October 2016 07_61_13-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_61_13 (FS-100) H. Form cross seams with 3/4-inch fold-under on lower end and 2-inch fold-over on upper end. I. Slit folds in cross seams at each corner 1 inch in from batten to form tab. J. Hook hold-down cleats, fold on lower end of panel into fold on upper end of underlaying panel. K. Exposed batten ends to have neoprene closures or watertight cap. L. Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 10 feet in length. M. Lap joints 6 inches in direction of drainage. N. Extend valley sheet minimum of 6 inches under roofing sheets. O. At valley, double fold valley and roofing sheets and secure with cleats spaced 18 inches on center. P. Install ridge and hip covers securely in place using Z closer clips and fasteners. Q. Seal joints where necessary for watertightness. R. Completed roof shall be watertight. S. Exposed surfaces shall be free of dents, scratches, abrasions, stains, and other visible defects. END OF SECTION October 2016 07_84_14-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_84_14 (FS-100) SECTION 07_84_14 FIBROUS FIRE SAFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Fibrous fire safing to provide fire resistance to building components. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 2. E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Product data. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. Protect materials against exposure to weather and from contact with damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1. U.S. Gypsum Co. B. Mineral fiber fire safing: 1. Type: Thermafiber Safing Insulation. 2. Density: Nominal 4 pounds per cubic foot. 3. Thickness: Minimum 4 inches. 4. Fire rating: 3 hours when tested under simulated field conditions and in accordance with ASTM E 119 time-temperature fire exposure. 5. Burning characteristics: Flame spread of 15 and smoke developed of 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 6. Thermal conductivity: R-value of 16 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. October 2016 07_84_14-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_84_14 (FS-100) C. Clips: Thermafiber Safing Impaling Clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify completion of construction required to be in place before application of fire safing onto clean and dry substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove or cover projections in construction framing that may damage or prevent proper installation of fire safing. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install fire safing when fire safing will not be damaged or become wet because of construction activity or weather. B. Install fire safing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install fire safing in voids to achieve required fire rated separations as indicated on the Drawings or required, including floor-to-floor, room-to-room, roof penetrations, at metal decking flutes, at heads of partitions, and around pipe and conduit penetrations. D. Friction fit 4-inch thick fire safing, which is 1/2-inch wider than opening, in void spaces created at perimeter of building between fire-rated floor assembly and exterior curtain wall spandrel. E. Friction fit 4-inch thick fire safing in maximum 7-1/2-inch wide voids created by penetrations in floor slabs. F. Friction fit 4-inch thick fire safing in maximum 7-1/2-inch wide voids between fire-resistive partitions at structural elements, such as at underside of fluted decking or irregular surfaces. G. Friction fit 5-inch thick fire safing, which is 1/2-inch wider than opening, in voids in fire-rated partitions. H. Support fire safing in positive manner with impaling clips at maximum 24 inches on center or other accepted device. END OF SECTION October 2016 07_90_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_90_00 (FS-100) SECTION 07_90_00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Acrylic-Latex sealant. 2. Polysulfide rubber sealant. 3. Silicone sealant. 4. Synthetic rubber sealing compound. 5. Synthetic sponge rubber filler. 6. Precast concrete joint sealer 7. Related materials. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. M198 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 679 - Standard Test Method for Tack-Free Time fo Elastomeric Sealants. 2. C 719 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle). 3. C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. 4. C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 5. D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. 6. D 624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomer. 7. D 2240 - StandardTest Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness. C. Federal Specification (FS): 1. FS TT-S-00227E - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component. 2. FS TT-S-00230C - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component. D. NSF International (NSF) 1. ANSI/NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: 1. NSF Certification: For materials in contact with process water that is destined to become potable finished water for consumption, documentation that the product is listed under NSF 61, or equivalent standard. 2. Documentation that the sealant and its appurtenant products will not cause staining or discoloration of the substrate materials over which it will be applied when used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. October 2016 07_90_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_90_00 (FS-100) B. Samples, include color selections. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1. Include requirements for the following: surface preparation, cleaning and priming; working time; temperature and humidity limits for application; requirements for control of sealant thickness to span ratio; and requirements for backer rod or bond breaker materials and depth. D. Warranty. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer of proposed product for minimum 5 years with satisfactory performance record. B. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer approved installer of products similar to specified products on minimum 5 projects of similar scope as Project with satisfactory performance record. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: Do not apply sealant on wet or frosty surfaces or when surface temperature is higher than 100 degrees Fahrenheit or lower than recommended by the manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Code date packages. Do not use material older than manufacturer’s published shelf life. Store materials at temperatures lower than 80 degrees Fahrenheit. Condition materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Caulk joints prior to painting. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warrant to correct defective products for minimum 5 years in accordance with manufacturer's standard warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. For each sealant or product listed, provide surface cleaners and primers, and joint backers as indicated on the Drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. In the event of conflicts, contact Contractor’s Engineer for resolution. October 2016 07_90_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_90_00 (FS-100) 2.02 ACRYLIC-LATEX SEALANT A. Description: Permanently flexible, non-staining, and non-bleeding latex modified acrylic sealant compound. B. Properties: 1. Conforming to the following standards: a. ASTM C 834, Grade -18 degrees Celsius (0 degrees Fahrenheit). 2. Colors as selected by Construction Manager from manufacturer's standard options. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:Pecora Corp., Number AC-20. 4. Sonneborn, Sonolac. 5. Tremco, Tremflex 834. 2.03 POLYSULFIDE RUBBER SEALANT A. Description: 2-component elastomeric polysulfide sealant resistant to plant process water with chlorine concentrations of up to 20 parts per million and listed as complying with the requirements of ANSI/NSF for materials in contact with potable water. B. Properties: 1. Conforming to the following standards: a. ANSI/NSF 61, Part 6. b. ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. c. Federal Specification TT-S-00227E, Type II. 2. Composition: 100 percent solids. 3. Color: Gray. 4. Demonstrating the following properties when tested according to the standards listed at 75 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity. a. Application time: 1 hour minimum. b. Tack-free time, ASTM C 679: 24 hours, maximum. c. Full cure time before immersion: 7 days, maximum. d. Joint cyclic movement, ASTM C 719: plus or minus 25 percent, minimum. e. Tensile strength, ASTM D 412: 150 psi, minimum. f. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 500 percent, minimum. g. Hardness, ASTM D 412: 25 – 30, Shore A. h. Service temperature range: Minus 20 degrees to plus 180 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Manufacturer: One of the following, or equal. 1. Euclid Chemical , Cleveland OH: Tammsflex NS. 2. Pecora Corporation, Harleysville PA: Synthacalk GC2+. 3. Polyspec Divison of ITW, Houston TX: Thiokol 2235M. 2.04 PRECAST CONCRETE JOINT SEALANT A. Description: Preformed, flexible joint sealant for use in joints between sections of precast concrete pipe, manholes, and similar box sections. B. Properties and manufacturer: As specified in Section 07_92_21. October 2016 07_90_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_90_00 (FS-100) 2.05 SILICONE SEALANT A. Description: Single component, non-staining, neutral or moisture cured silicone sealant. B. Properties: 1. Conforming to the following standards: a. ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,Class 25 or better, single component silicone sealant. b. Federal Specification: TT-S-00230C, Class A. 2. Color: Selected by Construction Manager from manufacturer’s standard color charts. 3. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:Dow Corning, Number 795. 4. General Electric, Number 1200 Series. 5. Pecora Corp., Number 864 NST. 6. Tremco, Proglaze. 2.06 SYNTHETI RUBBER SEALING COMPOUND (POLYURETHANE) A. Description: 2 part polyurethane; able to cure at room temperature to firm, highly resilient polymer; able to perform satisfactory when continuously submerged in water or sewage and when exposed to direct sunlight in dry conditions. B. Properties: 1. Conforming to the following standards: a. ASTM C 920 Type M, Grade P (pourable/self-leveling)or Grade NS (non- sag) as applicable, Class 25 or better. 2. Composition: Minimum 97% percent solids. 3. Color: a. At concrete: Gray. b. At other materials: Selected by Construction Manager from manufacturer’s standard color charts for other locations. 4. Demonstrating the following properties when tested according to the standards listed at 75 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 percent relative humidity: a. Application time: 2 hours, minimum.Tack free time: 12 hours, maximum. b. Full cure time before immersion: 7 days, maximum. 5. Tensile strength, ASTM D 412: a. Non-sag: 120 pounds per square inch minimum. b. Pourable / self-leveling: minimum 170 pounds per square inch. 6. Ultimate elongation, ASTM D 412: Minimum 350 percent. 7. Hardness, ASTM D 2240, Shore A: a. Non-sag: 25 + 5, minimum. b. Pourable / self-leveling: 40 + 5, minimum. 8. Tear resistance, ASTM D 624: a. Non-sag 45 pounds per inch minimum. b. Pourable / self-leveling minimum 85 pounds per inch. 9. Service temperature range: Minus 40 degrees to plus 160 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1. Pacific Polymers, Garden Grove, CA, Elastothane 227R. 2. Polymeric Systems, Inc., PSI 275. 3. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ, Sikaflex 2c NS or SL. October 2016 07_90_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_90_00 (FS-100) 2.07 SYNTHETIC SPONGE RUBBER FILLER A. Description: Closed-cell expanded sponge rubber manufactured from synthetic polymer neoprene base, or resilient polyethylene foam backer rod.Characteristics: 1. Suitable for application intended. 2. Strength: As necessary for supporting sealing compound during application. 3. Resiliency: Sufficient resiliency to prevent significant load transfer across joint. 4. Resistance to environmental conditions of installation. 5. Bonding: No bonding to the sealing compound. 6. Structure: Cellular, prevents wicking or absorption of water. 7. Compatibility with other materials in joint and acceptance by manufacturer of sealing compound. 8. Size: Minimum 25 percent greater than nominal joint width. B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Presstite, Number 750.3 Ropax Rod Stock. 2. Rubatex Corp., Rubatex-Cord. 2.08 PRECAST CONCRETE JOINT SEALER A. Description: Polymer-based sealing compound formulated to seal below-grade precast concrete joints.Characteristics: 1. Suitable for application intended. 2. Strength: As necessary for supporting sealing compound during application. 3. Resiliency: Sufficient resiliency to prevent significant load transfer across joint. 4. Resistance to environmental conditions of installation. 5. Formulated to not shrink, harden, or oxidize with age. 6. Structure: Cellular, prevents wicking or absorption of water. 7. Compatibility with other materials in joint and acceptance by manufacturer of sealing compound. B. Properties: 1. Compliance: AASHTO M198. 2. Hydrocarbon content: 50 to 70 percent. 3. Inert mineral filler: 30 to 50 percent by weight. 4. Volatile matter: 2.0 to 3.0 percent by weight lost when heated for 5 hours at 325 degrees Fahrenheit. 5. Specific gravity: 1.20 to 1.35 at 77 degrees Fahrenheit. 6. Ductility: 5.0 at 77 degrees Fahrenheit. 7. Softening point: 320 degrees Fahrenheit. 8. Sag or flow: None. 9. Chemical resistance: No reaction when exposed for 30 days by 5 percent sulfuric acid, potassium hydroxide, caustic potash, and hydrochloric acid; and saturated hydrogen sulfide solution. C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Associated Concrete Products Company, Quik-Seal. b. Henry Company, Ram-Nek. c. J-K Polysource, Inc., Polyseal. October 2016 07_90_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_90_00 (FS-100) 2.09 RELATED MATERIALS A. Primer: Nonstaining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint cleaner: Noncorrosive, nonstaining, compatible with joint forming materials and as recommended by sealant manufacturer. C. Bond breaker tape: Pressure-sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify acceptability of joint dimensions, physical, and environmental conditions. B. Verify that surfaces are dry, clean, and free of dirt, grease, curing compound, and other residue which might interfere with adhesion of sealants. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Allow concrete to cure thoroughly before caulking. B. Synthetic sponge rubber filler: 1. Prepare surfaces designated to receive filler in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Do not stretch filler beyond its normal length during installation. C. Caulking: 1. Verify that surfaces are dry, clean, and free of dirt, grease, curing compounds, and other residue that might interfere with adhesion of sealant. 2. Concrete, masonry, wood, and steel surfaces: Clean and prime in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to caulking. D. Synthetic rubber sealing compound: 1. Ensure surfaces to which synthetic rubber must bond are dry and free of dust, dirt, and other foreign residue. 2. Heavy sandblasted caulking groove to sound surface, and prime with manufacturer's recommended primer for particular surface. E. Precast concrete joint sealer: 1. Clean surface of dust, dirt, and other foreign matter including frost, snow, and ice. Proceed when surfaces are clean and dry. 2. Apply primer on joints of horizontally placed concrete pipe and precast box sections. F. For sidewalks, pavements, and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inches deep nor less then 3/8 inches deep. October 2016 07_90_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_90_00 (FS-100) G. For normal moving building joints sealed with elastomeric sealants not subject to traffic, fill joints to depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, but neither more than 1/2 inch deep nor less than 1/4 inch deep. H. For joints sealed with acrylic-latex sealants, fill joints to depth in range of 75 percent to 125 percent of joint width. I. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform properly. J. Prepare surfaces and install synthetic sponge rubber filler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. K. Do not stretch filler beyond normal length during installation. L. Apply bond breaker when recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Synthetic sponge rubber filler: Install filler in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Caulking, joints, and sealing: 1. Construct expansion, contraction, and construction joints as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install pipe and conduit in structures as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Caulk doors, windows, louvers, and other items installed in or over concrete openings inside and out. 4. Use synthetic rubber sealing compound for caulking where indicated on the Drawings or as specified, except for masonry construction and where specified otherwise. 5. Complete caulking prior to painting. 6. Verify that concrete is thoroughly cured prior to caulking. 7. When filler compressible material is used, use untreated type. 8. Apply caulking with pneumatic caulking gun. 9. Use nozzles of proper shape and size for application intended. 10. Maintain continuous bond between caulking and sides of joint to eliminate gaps, bubbles, or voids and fill joint in continuous operation without layering of compound. 11. Employ experienced applicators to caulk joints and seams in neat workmanlike manner. 12. To hasten curing of compound when used on wide joints subject to movement, apply heat with infrared lamps or other convenient means. 13. Apply synthetic rubber sealing compound with pneumatic caulking tool or other acceptable method. C. Precast concrete joint sealer: 1. Place single coils of sealant on shoulder of grooves or recesses. 2. Press against joint surface and remove plastic separator. October 2016 07_90_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_90_00 (FS-100) 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces adjacent to sealant as work progresses. B. Remove excess uncured sealant by soaking and scrubbing with sealant cleaning solvent. C. Remove excess cured sealant by sanding with Number 80 grit sandpaper. D. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Acrylic latex: 1. Use where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Interior joints with movement less than 7.5 percent and not subject to wet conditions. B. Polysulfide rubber sealant: 1. Use where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Expansion and control joints at horizontal, vertical and overhead surfaces in the following water-bearing concrete structures.(Conditon: continuous immersion with chlorine concentration in the water.) a. Area 80: Below grade portions of Finished Water Tank and Pump Station, including the following containment cells: 1) Backwash Volume. 2) CT Chamber. 3) Storage Volume. 4) Pump Wet Well. 5) Inlet Box. 6) Overflow Box. b. (Area 80 note: Expansion and control joints at the following locations may be sealed with synthetic rubber sealing compound as scheduled in the following paragraphs. 1) Exterior (buried) surface of Finished Water Tank roof slab. 2) Grade level floor of Pump Station. 3) Joints above the horizontal planes just described. C. Silicone: 1. Use where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Joints and recesses formed where window, door, louver and vent frames, and sill adjoin masonry, concrete, stucco, or metal surfaces. 3. Door threshold bedding. 4. Moist or wet locations, including joints around plumbing fixtures. 5. Stainless steel doors and frames, including joints between applied stops and frames, and around anchor bolts. 6. Plenum joints. D. Synthetic rubber sealing compound, non-sag: 1. Use where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Water-bearing and earth-bearing concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in this Section. October 2016 07_90_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/07_90_00 (FS-100) 3. Expansion and control joints in masonry vertical surfaces, at concrete vertical surfaces, and at metal-faced panels in vertical surfaces. 4. Joints between sheet metal flashing and trim. 5. Joints between sheet metal flashing and trim, and vertical wall surfaces. 6. Small voids between materials requiring filling for weathertight performance in vertical surfaces. 7. Perimeters of frames of doors, windows, louvers, and other openings where bonding is critical to airtight performance. E. Synthetic rubber sealing compound, pourable / self-leveling: 1. Use where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Water-bearing and earth bearing concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in this Section. 3. Expansion and control joints in masonry, at concrete horizontal surfaces, and at metal panels in horizontal surfaces. 4. Small voids between materials requiring filling for weathertight performance in horizontal surfaces. 5. Pavement joints. 6. Perimeters of frames of doors, windows, louvers, and other openings in horizontal surfaces where bonding is critical to airtight performance. F. Precast concrete joint sealer: 1. Used for sealing joints of below-grade precast concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Water-bearing and earth bearing concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in this Section. 3. Required when precast sewer manholes or similar precast concrete structures requiring joint sealer are used on a project. END OF SECTION October 2016 08_11_13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_11_13 (FS-100) SECTION 08_11_13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Steel Fire Resistive Rated and Non-Fire Resistive Rated: 1. Doors. 2. Door frames. 3. Combination door frames and window frames with mullions, muntins, and transom bars. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 04_22_00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 3. Section 08_71_00 - Door Hardware. 4. Section 08_80_00 - Glazing. 5. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A250.6 - Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement Application). 2. A250.8 - Recommended Specification for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 653/A653M - Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. A 924/A924M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. A 1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 4. A 1011 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra High Strength. 5. E 152 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 6. E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. 7. E 1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems. 8. E 2074 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies. C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)/Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA): 1. HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications For Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. October 2016 08_11_13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_11_13 (FS-100) D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. E. Steel Door Institute (SDI): 1. SDI-111 - A Steel Doors and Frame Details. 2. SDI-117 - Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. F. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., (UL): 1. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Shop drawings: Show the following with references to the Engineer's door marks and hardware groups: 1. Location of door and frame types. 2. Details of fabrication, including core construction, glass lights, louvers, weatherstripping, and factory finish for each door. 3. Cutouts and reinforcements for hardware. 4. Methods of installation and anchorage to adjacent construction. C. Certificates documenting: 1. Fire-rated units have been successfully tested in accordance with paragraph 2.06. D. Manufacturer's instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing agency qualifications: Approved by ultimate enforcing authority for the Project; regularly engaged in inspection of materials and workmanship at factory. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Before delivery, identify type and size of each door and frame in such a way that markings will not damage finish. B. Preassemble doorframes in shop and deliver to Project site with spreader bar at sill or tie them in pairs to form box. C. Protect doors and frames with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. D. Protect doors and frames during shipment and storage to prevent warping, bending, and corrosion. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Ensure timely delivery of reviewed hardware schedule and hardware templates such that no delay occurs in the work of the Contract. October 2016 08_11_13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_11_13 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet steel: ASTM A 1008, commercial quality, level, cold rolled steel, or ASTM A 1011, hot rolled, pickled and oil rolled steel. Galvanize by hot-dip process with zinc-coating conforming to ASTM A 653 and A 924 G 60, with a coating weight of not less than 0.60 ounces per square foot (0.30 ounces per square foot per side). Clips, bolts, screws, and rivets: sized as recommended by manufacturer. B. Primer: Rust- inhibitive metal primer capable of being baked and compatible with finish painting system specified in Section 09_96_01. C. Touch-up materials: Primer as recommended by manufacturer. D. Door hardware: As specified in Section 08_71_00. E. Grout: As specified in Section 04_22_00. F. Glass and glazing materials: As specified in Section 08_80_00. 2.02 DOOR AND FRAME TYPES A. Interior doors: ANSI 250.8, Grade III, Model 3 or NAAMM HMMA 810 Type A and NAAMM HMMA 861, flush steel rib-stiffened, minimum 18 gauge face sheets. B. Exterior doors: ANSI 250.8, Grade III, Model 3, or NAAMM HMMA 810 Type A and NAAMM HMMA 861, flush steel rib-stiffened, minimum 16 gauge face sheets. C. Interior frames: ANSI 250.8 or NAAMM HMMA 861, fully welded frames, minimum 16 gauge, sizes and shapes as indicated on the Drawings. D. Exterior frames: ANSI 250.8 or NAAMM HMMA 861, fully welded frames HMMA 861, except minimum 14 gauge sizes and shapes as indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Door cores: 1. Stiffeners: Vertical steel ribs formed from minimum 22-gauge plain sheet steel, spaced at maximum 6 inches apart and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds at maximum 5 inches on center. 2. Core fillers: Insulation, minimum 0.60 pound density noncombustible type, installed in spaces between stiffeners for full height of door; labeled door core material shall conform to requirements of labeling authority. B. Glazing stops: Minimum 18 gauge sheet steel, mitered, square, or rectangular: 1. Outside of exterior doors: Fixed, integral to doors and frames. 2. Secure side of interior doors: Removable. C. Removable stop fasteners: Flat head, countersunk, tamperproof, self-tapping sheet metal screws. October 2016 08_11_13-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_11_13 (FS-100) D. Louvers: 1. Type: Flush with face, inverted Y blades, with UL approved fusible link type louvers at fire rated doors. 2. Material: Steel sheet, same type sheet as door material. 3. Blade gauge: Minimum 24. 4. Frame gauge: Minimum 20. 5. Construction: Provide louvers that are welded to frame (except at fusible link type). 6. Moldings: Secure and detachable type. Locate detachable moldings on room or non-security side of doors. E. Louver screens: 1. Use: At exterior door louvers. 2. Location: Locate screens on interior face of louver and secured to louvers in rigid manner that permits easy removal. 3. Screens: Stainless steel insect screen mesh. 4. Frames: Stainless steel manufacturer's standard type and gauge. 2.04 FABRICATION OF FRAMES A. Galvanize all frames installed in exterior openings. B. Frames: Sheet steel, integral type, welded continuous to full depth of frames with minimum 5/8-inch deep stops, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Hardware reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge at hinges; 12 gauge at strikes, bolts, closers, and other applied hardware. D. Jamb Anchors: As required for adjacent wall construction, minimum 3 per jamb, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings; E. Floor anchors: Fixed type, except where adjustable anchors are indicated on the Drawings, 1 per jamb, with minimum 2 holes for anchorage. Where floor fill occurs, terminate bottom of frames at indicated finished floor level and support by adjustable extension clips resting on and anchored to structural slabs. F. Anchors at masonry: Adjustable strap and stirrup, minimum 16 gauge corrugated or perforated steel at maximum of 30 inches on center and extending minimum 8 inches into masonry. G. Anchors at previously placed concrete: Countersink machine screws through the frame into expansion devices spaced at maximum 30 inches on center. H. Anchors at structural steel framing: Welded or otherwise securely fastened with stainless steel screws. I. Anchors for fire resistive frames: Conform to requirements of labeling authority having jurisdiction. J. Masonry angle stiffeners: Factory welded into heads of frames for installation in openings more than 48 inches wide. October 2016 08_11_13-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_11_13 (FS-100) K. Mullions, muntins, and transom bars: Minimum 18 gauge, tubular sheet steel matching, and butt-welded to head and jamb members. L. Removable stops: Fasten at approximately 12 to 16 inches on center. 2.05 FABRICATION OF DOORS A. Galvanize all doors installed in exterior openings. B. Reinforce face sheets with steel rib stiffeners, spaced at maximum 6 inches apart, and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds at maximum 5 inches on center. C. Fill voids between face sheets and stiffeners with fiberglass insulation having a minimum density of 0.8 pounds per cubic foot. D. Edges: Full weld without visible joints. Bevel striking edge 1/8 inch in 2 inches. E. Tops and bottoms of doors: Close with continuous recess steel channel of minimum 16 gauge, extending full width of door and spot welded to both faces. F. Tops and bottoms of exterior doors: Flush closing channels welded to make tops and bottoms waterproof with weep holes for escape of moisture. G. Hinge reinforcement: 7 gauge. H. Lock, closer, and flush bolt reinforcement: 12 gauge. I. Astragals: 1. Install on active leaf of double doors in accordance with UL listing requirements for fire resistive ratings as indicated on the Drawings, and for exterior pairs of doors. 2. Do not install on doors swinging in pairs with rating of 90 minutes or less in means of egress where both leaves are required to provide building code required exiting widths. 3. Do not provide astragal cutouts for hardware operations. J. Astragal clearances for fire resistive rated doors: 1. Door bottoms at doors designated to receive non-combustible threshold: Not to exceed 3/8 inch between threshold and door bottom. 2. Door bottoms where there is no threshold: Maximum clearance between door and floor not to exceed 1/2 inch. 3. Door bottoms at doors designated to receive combustible floor coverings: Not to exceed 1/2 inch between floor covering and door bottom. 4. Clearance between door and frame and between meeting edges of pairs of doors: Not to exceed 1/8 inch. K. Astragal clearances for non-fire resistive rated doors: Same as fire resistive rated doors, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. L. Glazing: In accordance with fire labeling. October 2016 08_11_13-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_11_13 (FS-100) 2.06 HARDWARE PREPARATION A. Cutout, drill, and reinforce frames and doors for hardware in accordance with hardware templates. B. Install plaster guards or mortar boxes in back of hardware cutouts in and welded to frames. C. Prepare fire resistive rated doors for hardware in accordance with requirements of labeling authority. D. Do not weld hinges to doorframes. E. Silencers: 1. Drill single leaf doorframe jamb stops for minimum 3 silencers. 2. Drill double-leaf doorframe head stops for minimum 2 silencers. 3. Do not drill doorframes for silencers when weatherstripping is to be installed. 2.07 FINISHING A. Thoroughly clean surfaces of oil, grease, and other impurities; touch-up abraded galvanizing; and chemically etch. B. Fill irregularities and sand smooth finish surface. Apply 1 coat of manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive baked-on primer. C. Finish painting: As specified in Section 09_96_01. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine reviewed hardware schedules and verify proper coordination of hardware and doors and frames. B. Examine opening locations and verify the following: 1. Correctness of dimensions, backing, or support conditions. 2. Absence of defects that would adversely affect frame or door installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. B. Frames: 1. Set accurately in position, plumb, align, and attach securely to structure. 2. Set in place before construction of adjacent masonry or framed walls. 3. Anchor frames to previously placed concrete. 4. Set frames before removing spreader bars. 5. Fully grout frames in masonry as the Work progresses. 6. Grout frames at concrete through keyways provided at head and jambs. October 2016 08_11_13-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_11_13 (FS-100) C. Doors: Install at correct openings, ensure smooth swing and proper closure with frame. D. Door hardware: Install in accordance with Section 08_71_00. E. Separate or isolate dissimilar metals with neoprene gaskets, sleeves, and washers, or with coatings acceptable to the Engineer. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Manufacturing and installation tolerances: As indicated on the Drawings or in conformance to SDI 117 as minimum. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime coat touch-up: Immediately after installation, sand smooth and touch-up rust areas, and other areas where primer has been damaged, with prime touch-up paint. B. Make adjustments as required for correct, proper, and free function and smooth operation without binding of hardware or doors and frames. C. Protect doors and frames from damage to surface or profile. END OF SECTION October 2016 08_71_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_71_00 (FS-100) SECTION 08_71_00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Door hardware. B. Related sections: 1. Section 08_11_13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2. Section 08_14_16 - Flush Wood Doors. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 2. E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. A156.7 - Template Hinge Dimensions. 2. A156.18 - Materials and Finishes. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Hardware schedule: Include references to Engineer's hardware group number, door type designations, locations, other pertinent data, and manufacturer names or suitable abbreviation opposite items scheduled. C. Samples: Include for each different type and manufacturer for review of finish. D. Construction key distribution list: Submit upon Owner's request. E. Templates: 1. Furnish hardware templates to fabricators of doors, frames, and other work to be factory-prepared for hardware. 2. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate hardware backing is available. F. Project record documents: Include corrected hardware schedule. October 2016 08_71_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_71_00 (FS-100) 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide hardware for fire-resistive rated openings that complies with UL and listed by UL. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hardware where directed in unopened packages with items packed separately, complete and ready for installation with necessary fittings, trim, fasteners, and accessories. B. Provide packages bearing the manufacturers' labels with each item or group of items identified according to the accepted hardware schedule. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Require lockset manufacturers to deliver permanent removable cylinder cores and keys and minimum 2 extractor keys to Owner directly. 1.07 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. Upon receipt of accepted hardware schedule, coordinate accepted hardware schedule, templates, reinforcing units, and template instructions to door and frame sections. B. Restrict distribution of construction keys to superintendents and foremen. Maintain record of persons who have received keys on construction distribution list. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FASTENERS A. Types: 1. To concrete, marble, or masonry: Machine screws and flush shells. 2. To wood: Wood screws. 3. On gypsum board or plaster: Screws of sufficient length to provide solid connection to framing or backing behind gypsum board or plaster. 4. To mineral and hollow core doors: Sex bolts. 5. Of exit devices to doors: Thru-bolts, unless otherwise specified. B. Screws, exposed: Phillips-head type, full-threaded screws, not combination type. C. Sizes: Suitable for heavy use. D. Finish: Stainless steel, unless otherwise required to match material and hardware finish. 2.02 HINGES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. McKinney. 2. Ives. October 2016 08_71_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_71_00 (FS-100) B. Material: 1. Interior fire resistive rated doors: Steel. 2. Interior doors in corrosive environments: Stainless steel. 3. Interior office doors: Brass. 4. Interior doors in operation areas: Brass. 5. Exterior doors: Stainless steel. C. Knuckles, number of: Minimum 5. D. Ball bearings: Concealed with interior self-lubricating bushings. E. Type for doors with closers: Ball bearing. F. Material for fire-resistive rated doors: Steel. G. Pins for interior doors: Non-rising. H. Pins for exterior doors: Non-removable. I. Template hinges: BHMA A156.7. J. Tips: Flat button. K. Height: As follows, unless otherwise specified: 1. Doors 1-3/8-inch thick: 3-1/2 inches. 2. Doors 1-3/4-inch thick and up to 41 inches wide: 4-1/2 inches. 3. Doors 1-3/4-inch thick and from 41 to 48 inches wide: 4-1/2 inches, extra heavy. 4. Doors 2 inches thick or over 48 inches wide: 5 inches, extra heavy. L. Widths: Sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180 degrees, unless otherwise specified. M. Number per door leaf: As follows, unless otherwise specified: 1. 3 hinges on door to 7 feet, 6 inches in height. 2. 1 additional hinge for each additional 2 feet, 6 inches of height or fraction thereof. 2.03 LOCKSETS A. Manufacturers typical: One of the following or equal: 1. Sargent, Division of Essex Industries, Inc., Model 10-8200-Line with removable core cylinders, and Model LNL levers and roses. B. Cylinders: 1. Number of pins: Minimum 6. 2. Cases: Steel, cylindrical. 3. Interior parts: Non-corrosive with non-plastic, non-die-cast, non-aluminum mechanisms. 4. Accessibility to key-in-knob type cylinders: Not requiring removal of lockset from door. 5. Plugs: Extruded brass bar material fully round without flattened areas. 6. Cores: Removable. October 2016 08_71_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_71_00 (FS-100) C. Strikes: 1. Material: Same as lock trim. 2. Lock and latch boxes: Wrought. 3. Lips: Extended, able to protect trim from marring by latch bolt. 4. Cutouts at metal frames: In accordance with ANSI, unless otherwise specified. D. Levers: Type that returns to within 1/2 inch of door. E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches. F. Trim materials: As follows, unless otherwise specified: 1. Typical: Stainless steel. 2. Corrosive environments: Stainless steel. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION KEYING A. Type: Removable core system. 2.05 PERMANENT KEYING AND KEYS 2.06 PUSH/PULL PLATES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Rockwood. B. Pulls: 1. Material: As scheduled. 2. Size: Minimum 8 inches center to center, minimum grip diameter of 3/4 inch, minimum projection of 2-1/4 inch. C. Pull plates: 1. Material: As scheduled. 2. Plate size: Minimum 3 by 12 inches by 0.050-inch thick, with beveled edges on 4 sides with pull. 3. Pull size: Minimum 8 inches center to center, minimum grip diameter of 3/4 inch, minimum projection of 2-1/4 inch. D. Push plates: 1. Material: As scheduled. 2. Size: Minimum 3 by 12 inches by 0.050-inch thick, with beveled edges on 4 sides. 2.07 CLOSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Features: a. Heavy-duty. b. Non-handed and non-sized. c. Adjustable spring power from size 1 through 4. d. Hold open feature where specified 2. One of the following or equal: a. Sargent, 351 Series. October 2016 08_71_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_71_00 (FS-100) B. Type: Full rack and pinion type with steel spring and non-gumming, non-freezing hydraulic fluid. C. Controls: Separate set for regulating sweep speed, latch speed, backcheck and backcheck positioning, or where schedules, spring power. D. Sizes: As recommended by accepted manufacturer. E. Covers: Metal, capable of receiving finishes to match adjacent hardware finishes, unless otherwise specified. F. Narrow frame provisions: Drop plates. G. Effort to operate: As follows: 1. Exterior: Maximum 8-1/2 pounds. 2. Interior: Maximum 5 pounds. 3. Fire-resistive rated doors: Maximum 15 pounds. H. Adjust closers in accordance with manufacturer's directions for size of door. 2.08 EXIT DEVICES A. Lever design: 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal: a. Sargent , Lever 80 Series, Model ETL B. Rim device, non-fire resistive rated: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Sargent, Model Series 8800. C. Mortise lock device, non-fire-resistive rated: 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal: a. Sargent, Model Series MD8600. D. Material: As scheduled. E. Corrosive environment provisions: Zinc dichromate coated internal parts. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE A. Wall stops: As scheduled. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Rockwood. B. Floor stops: As scheduled with strike of suitable height to compensate for clearance between door and floor. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Rockwood. C. Mechanical holders with stop function: Concealed mount, heavy dutyslide track, heavy shock absorber spring. 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal: a. Rixson. October 2016 08_71_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_71_00 (FS-100) D. Electromagnetic holders: Electromagnetic hold open device; able to be connected to smoke alarm system; UL BMA listed; consisting of completely flush wall-mounted electro-magnetic holder and door thru-bolted contact plate; depth as required; with minimum holding force of 25 and maximum of 40 pounds; voltage and mounting height as indicated on the Drawings; steel. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Rixson-Firemark Inc., Electromagnetic Door Release Model 990 Series. b. LCN Electromagnetic Door Release Model SEM 7800 Series. c. Dorma Door Controls Inc., Electromagnetic Door Holder Model Series EM. E. Automatic flush bolts: Mortise, bar with stop-mounted coordinator and strikes; materials as scheduled. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Glynn-Johnson. b. Hager Hinge Co. F. Kick plates: As scheduled, 0.050-inch thick, beveled edges, 10 inches high, 1-1/2 inches narrower than single doors, 1 inch narrower than leaf of door pairs. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Rockwood. G. Gasketing systems: As scheduled, self-adhesive silicone seal, continuous at head and jambs, rated for fire and smoke in accordance with ASTM E 283, sound rated in accordance with ASTM E 90. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Pemko Mfg. Co. H. Weatherstripping for exterior doors and smoke, light, and sound seals for interior doors. I. Thresholds: As scheduled, extruded aluminum, maximum 1/2-inch high, maximum slope of 1 foot in 2 feet. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Pemko. J. Dustproof strike: As scheduled. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Ives. b. Trimco. K. Coordinator with filler bar: As scheduled, non-handed, series type length as required for door sizes indicated, complete with filer lengths as required, with mounting brackets and carry bars when required for proper operation; steel with manufacturer's standard prime finish capable of receiving painted finish. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Glynn-Johnson Coordinators, Model COR Series. b. Ives, Door Co-Ordinator, Model 900 Series. L. Door bottoms: As scheduled, extruded aluminum with vinyl insert, surface mounted, length equal to door width minus 2 inches, automatic, recessed in bottom of door. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Pemko. October 2016 08_71_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_71_00 (FS-100) M. Astragals: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Pemko. N. Silencers: As scheduled, pneumatic gray rubber. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Rockwood. 2.10 FINISHES A. Brass and bronze: BHMA A156.18 626 (US26D), satin chrome. B. Steel: BHMA A156.18 652 (US26D), satin chrome. C. Stainless steel: BHMA A156.18 630 (US32D), satin stainless steel. D. Aluminum: BHMA A156.18 628 (US28). E. Plastic closer covers: Spray paint to match typical door hardware finish. F. Metal closer covers: Plate covers to match typical door hardware finish. G. Electromagnetic hold open devices: Manufacturer's standard brushed zinc finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect doors and door frames for damage or defects and examine hardware for compatibility with receiving conditions and suitable to intended use. B. Verify that required wall backing has been installed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install finish hardware in accordance with manufacturer's templates and instructions. B. Accurately and properly fit hardware. C. Securely fasten fixed parts for smooth, trouble-free, non-binding operation. D. Fit faces of mortise parts snug and flush. E. Ensure that operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. F. Protection: 1. Protect door hardware from damage or marring of finish during construction, use strippable coatings, removable tapes, or other acceptable means. 2. Ensure door hardware displays no evidence of finish paint after final building cleanup. October 2016 08_71_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_71_00 (FS-100) G. Latch guard and dead bolts: Install so that bolts automatically engage in keeper, whether activated by closer or by manual pressure. H. Closers: 1. Mount on opposite sides of corridors or vestibules, except at exterior doors. 2. Mount for 180-degree swing wherever possible. 3. Mount with drop plates at narrow top rail doors. 4. Adjust to operate noiselessly and evenly. 5. Have closer manufacturer regulate closers prior to final acceptance of project. I. Kick plates: Screw on push side of doors, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. J. Gasketing: Mount to provide complete contact between door and frame, finished floor, or both; and weathertight enclosure. K. Thresholds: 1. Install immediately before inspection for Substantial Completion or protect from heavy traffic damage during construction. 2. Cope to fit door frame profile and drill to suit required flush bolts and panic bolts. 3. Unless indicated on the Drawings to be set in grout, set in double bead of sealant, tightly fit at jambs, and make waterproof. 4. Fasten to concrete slab with 5/16-inch stainless steel flat head countersunk machine screws and concrete anchors at 8-inch centers. L. Silencers: Insert into predrilled holes in frames. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION KEYING A. Insert construction inserts in cylinder cores of exterior doors, and doors requiring security and access for workman, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Examine hardware in place for complete and proper installation. Lubricate bearing surfaces for proper function. B. Replace, rework or otherwise correct defective door hardware, including incorrect hand or function. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective materials and devices and thoroughly clean exposed surfaces of hardware. B. Check for surface damage prior to final cleaning for acceptance of project. October 2016 08_71_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_71_00 (FS-100) 3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE Hardware Group No. 01 For use on door #(s): D01 EACH TO HAVE: Qty Description Catalog Number FIN Mfr 4 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 8804-ET-L 32D SAR 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED (Verify Keyway) 626 C-R 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 9500  630 HES 1 EA CLOSER 351 P10 EN SAR 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18S BLK IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-BK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A A ZER 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A A ZER 1 EA POWER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR  1 EA HID CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR  October 2016 08_71_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/08_71_00 (FS-100) HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02 For use on door #(s): D03 EACH TO HAVE: Qty Description Catalog Number FIN Mfr 7 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIC HW HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 TW8  630 IVE 1 SET CONST LATCHING BOLT FB51P (Extended top rod) 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA FAIL SECURE ELEC LOCK 8271 LNL  630 SAR 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED (Verify keyway) 626 C-R 1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL X MB 628 IVE 2 EA CLOSER 351 P10 EN SAR 1 EA ASTRAGAL 44STST STST ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A A ZER 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A A ZER 1 EA POWER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR  1 EA HID CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR  Hardware Group No. 03 For use on door #(s): D02 D04 EACH TO HAVE: Qty Description Catalog Number FIN Mfr 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 8813-ET-L 32D SAR 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED (Verify keyway) 626 C-R 1 EA CLOSER 351 P10 EN SAR 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GY IVE END OF SECTION October 2016 09_91_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_91_00 (FS-100) SECTION 09_91_00 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Field applied paints and coatings for normal exposures. 2. Painting Accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_60_00 - Product Requirements. 3. Section 01_77_00 - Closeout Procedures. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Paints: Manufacturer's best ready-mixed coatings, except when field catalyzed, with fully ground pigments having soft paste consistency and capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to complete homogeneous mixture, having good flowing and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC): Content of air polluting hydrocarbons in uncured coating product measured in units of grams per liter or pounds per gallon. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop drawings: Include schedule of where and for what use coating materials are proposed in accordance with requirements for Product Data. C. Product data: Include description of physical properties of coatings including solids content and ingredient analysis, VOC content, temperature resistance, typical exposures and limitations, and manufacturer's standard color chips. D. Samples: Include 8-inch square draw-downs or brush-outs of topcoat finish when requested. Identify each sample as to finish, formula, color name and number and sheen name and gloss units. E. Manufacturer's instructions: Submit in accordance with requirements for Product Data. Include: 1. Special requirements for transportation and storage. 2. Mixing instructions. 3. Shelf life. 4. Pot life of material. 5. Precautions for applications free of defects. 6. Surface preparation. 7. Method of application. October 2016 09_91_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_91_00 (FS-100) 8. Recommended number of coats. 9. Recommended thickness of each coat. 10. Recommended total thickness. 11. Drying time of each coat, including prime coat. 12. Required prime coat. 13. Compatible and non-compatible prime coats. 14. Recommended thinners, when recommended. 15. Limits of ambient conditions during and after application. 16. Time allowed between coats. 17. Required protection from sun, wind and other conditions. 18. Touch-up requirements and limitations. 19. Material Safety Data Sheet. F. Submit notarized certificate that: 1. All paints and coatings to be used on this project comply with the State VOC Regulations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products: First line or best grade. B. Materials for each paint system: By single manufacturer. C. Applicator qualifications: Applicator of products similar to specified products with minimum 3 years experience. D. Regulatory requirements: Comply with by using paints that do not exceed governing agency's VOC limits or do not contain lead. E. Field samples: 1. Paint 1 complete surface of each color scheme to show colors, finish texture, materials, and workmanship. 2. Obtain approval before painting other surfaces. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products as specified in Section 01_60_00. B. Remove unspecified and unapproved paints from Project site immediately. C. Deliver containers with labels identifying: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Brand name. 3. Product type. 4. Batch number. 5. Date of manufacturer. 6. Expiration date or shelf life. 7. Color. 8. Mixing and reducing instructions. October 2016 09_91_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_91_00 (FS-100) D. Store coatings in well-ventilated facility that provides protection from the sun weather, and fire hazards. 1. Maintain ambient storage temperature between 45 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. E. Take precautions to prevent fire and spontaneous combustion. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Surface moisture contents: Do not paint surfaces that exceed manufacturer specified moisture contents, or when not specified by the manufacturer, the following moisture contents: 1. Plaster and gypsum wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, concrete and concrete block: 12 percent. 3. Interior located wood: 15 percent. 4. Concrete floors: 7 percent. B. Do not paint or coat: 1. Under dusty conditions. 2. When light on surfaces measures less than 15 foot-candles. 3. When ambient or surface temperature is less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit or unless manufacturer allow a lower temperature. 4. When relative humidity is higher than 85 percent, unless manufacturer allows a higher relative humidity. 5. When surface temperature is less than 5 degrees Fahrenheit above dew point. 6. When surface temperature exceeds the manufacturer's recommendation. 7. When ambient temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless manufacturer allows a higher temperature. 8. Apply clear finishes at minimum 65 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Provide fans, heating devices, or other means recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent formation of condensate or dew on surface of substrate, coating between coats and within curing time following application of last coat. D. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain minimum 50 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes. 1.07 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage resulting from inadequate or unsuitable protection. B. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area. C. Place cotton waste, cloths, and material that may constitute fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. October 2016 09_91_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_91_00 (FS-100) D. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings, prior to painting operations. 1. Carefully store, clean and replace on completion of painting in each area. 2. Do not use solvent or degreasers to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Extra materials: Deliver as specified in Section 01_77_00. Include minimum 1 gallon of each type and color of coating applied: 1. When manufacturer packages material in gallon cans, deliver unopened labeled cans as comes from factory. 2. When manufacturer does not package material in gallon cans, deliver material in new gallon containers, properly sealed and identified with typed labels indicating brand, type, and color. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paints: One of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carboline, St. Louis, MO. 2. ICI/Devoe: ICI/Devoe/AkzoNobel, Strongsville, OH. 3. Rustoleum: Rustoleum Corp., Sommerset, NJ. 4. S/W: Sherwin-Williams Co., Cleveland, OH. 5. Tnemec: Tnemec Co., Kansas City, MO. B. Submit requests for substitutions as specified in Section 01_60_00: 1. Include certified ingredient analyses. 2. Provide colors that match specified colors. 2.02 PRETREATMENT, PRIMERS, PRIMER-SEALERS, AND WOOD STAIN A. Aluminum primer: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carbocrylic 120. 2. ICI/Devoe: Devflex 4020 DTM. 3. S/W: DTM Wash Primer. B. Concrete masonry filler/primer: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Sanitile 100. 2. ICI/Devoe: Bloxfill 4000. 3. S/W: HD Block Filler, B42W46. 4. Tnemec: a. Series 130, Envirofill. b. Series 180, Tneme-crete. C. Concrete, porous, filler/primer: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Sanitile 100. 2. ICI/Devoe: Bloxfill 4000. 3. S/W: HD Block Filler, B42W46. October 2016 09_91_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_91_00 (FS-100) 4. Tnemec: a. Series 130, Envirofill. b. Series 180, Tneme-crete. D. Concrete, smooth, filler/primer: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Sanitile 100. 2. Carboline: Carbocrylic 120. 3. ICI/Devoe: a. Bloxfill 4000. b. Prep & Prime, Bond Prep 3030. 4. S/W: a. HD Block Filler, B42W46. b. Epoxy Masonry Tilt Primer White B42WW49. 5. Tnemec: Series 180, Tneme-Crete. E. Ferrous metal primer: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carbocrylic 890. 2. ICI/Devoe: Barrust 233. 3. S/W: Macropoxy 646. 4. Tnemec: Series 104. F. Galvanized metal surface pretreatment materials: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Surface Cleaner 3. 2. ICI/Devoe: Devprep 88. G. Galvanized metal surface primer: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carbocrylic 890. 2. ICI/Devoe: Barrust 233. 3. S/W: Macropoxy 646. 4. Tnemec: Series 104. H. Plaster sealer: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline:Sanitile 120. 2. ICI/Devoe: Prep & Prime, Bond Prep 3030. 3. S/W: a. Promar 200 Primer B28W8200. b. Loxon Masonry Primer A24W300. I. Plywood, latex finishes: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Sanitile 120. 2. ICI/Devoe: a. Exterior: Prep & Prime, Hydrosealer 6001. b. Interior: Prep & Prime, Hi Hide Wall 1000. 3. S/W: A100 Latex Primer B42W8041. J. Wood primer for opaque finish paint, interior exposure: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Sanitile 120. 2. ICI/Devoe: Prep & Prime, Gripper 3210. 3. S/W: PrepRite Latex Primer B28W111. October 2016 09_91_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_91_00 (FS-100) K. Wood primer for opaque finish paint, exterior exposure: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Sanitile 120. 2. S/W: A-100 Primer B42W. 3. ICI/Devoe: Prep & Prime, Hydrosealer 6001. 2.03 PAINTS, INTERIOR EXPOSURE A. Latex, flat: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carbocrylic 3359 flat. 2. ICI/Devoe: a. Dulux Ultra 1201. 3. S/W: Promar 200, B30W200. B. Latex, semi-gloss: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carbocrylic 3359. 2. ICI/Devoe: a. Dulux Ultra 1407. 3. S/W: Promar 200, B77W3402D. C. Alkyd, gloss: One of following or equal: 1. ICI/Devoe: Glidden Lifemaster Oil 1508. 2. S/W: a. Industrial Enamel, B54Z b. Water based Industrial Enamel, B53W311. D. Acrylic, semi-gloss: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carbocrylic 3359 2. ICI/Devoe: a. Dulux Ultra 1407. 3. S/W: Promar 200, B77W3402D. 4. Tnemec: Series 1029, Enduratone. E. Urethane varnish, clear: One of following or equal: 1. ICI/Devoe: Woodpride 1802 Clear Interior Water-based Varnish. 2. S/W: Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish Gloss Clear A68V91. F. Oil: The following or equal: 1. Watco Danish Oil. 2.04 PAINTS, EXTERIOR EXPOSURE A. Latex, flat: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carbocrylic 3359flat. 2. ICI/Devoe: a. Dulux Professional 2200V. 3. S/W: A-100, Flat Exterior Latex A6-100. 4. Tnemec: 1028 Enduratone. B. Alkyd, gloss: One of following or equal: 1. ICI/Devoe: Glidden Lifemaster Oil 1508. 2. S/W: a. Industrial Enamel, B54ZWater based Industrial Enamel B53W311. October 2016 09_91_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_91_00 (FS-100) C. Acrylic latex, semi-gloss: One of following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carbocrylic 3359flat. 2. ICI/Devoe: a. Dulux Professional 2406V. 3. S/W: A-100, Flat Exterior Latex A6-100. 4. Tnemec: 1028 Enduratone. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted before starting work. B. Start painting when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions or when none, the following: 1. Aluminum: a. Remove surface contamination by steam, high-pressure water, or degreasers. b. Abrade surface by abrasive blasting, power tool cleaning or hand tool cleaning. c. Apply etching primer. 2. Reinforced concrete panels: a. Remove dirt, powdery residue, and foreign matter. b. Paint immediately; both sides when applicable. 3. Canvas and cotton insulation coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil. 4. Concrete floors: a. Remove contamination, abrasive blast or acid etch and rinse with clear water. b. Ensure required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry thoroughly. 5. Copper for paint finish: a. Remove contamination by steam, high-pressure water, or degreasers. b. Abrade surface by abrasive blasting, power tool cleaning or hand tool cleaning. c. Apply vinyl etch primer. 6. Copper for oxidized finish: a. Remove contamination. b. Apply oxidizing solution of copper acetate and ammonium chloride in acetic acid. c. Rub on repeatedly for correct effect. d. Once attained rinse surfaces well with clear water and allow to dry. 7. Gypsum wallboard: a. Remove contamination and prime to show defects. b. Repair and prime defects. 8. Galvanized surfaces: a. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with degreasers. b. Apply coat of etching type primer. 9. Zinc coated surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and prepare for priming in accordance with metal manufacturer's recommendations. October 2016 09_91_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_91_00 (FS-100) 10. Concrete and concrete masonry: a. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, powder and other foreign matter. b. Remove oil and grease with solution of tri-sodium phosphate. c. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate. d. Rinse well and allow to thoroughly dry. e. Spot prime exposed metal with alkyd primer. 11. Plaster: a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes and imperfections with patching plaster. b. Smooth off to match adjacent surfaces. c. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces where they occur. 12. Unprimed steel and iron: Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust by wire brushing, sandblasting or other necessary method. 13. Shop primed steel: a. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. b. Feather out edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. c. Clean surfaces. d. Prime bare steel surfaces. 14. Wood and millwork: a. Sandpaper to smooth even surface. b. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. c. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. d. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried and sand between coats. 15. Exterior wood siding: a. Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. b. Seal knots, pitch streak, and sappy sections. c. Fill nail holes with exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied. 16. Mildew: a. Remove by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and chlorine bleach. b. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry completely. 17. Glue laminated woods: a. Remove grease and dirt. b. Wash down surfaces with degreasers. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply each coat at proper consistency. B. Tint each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat. C. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. D. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. E. Allow each coat of finish to dry before following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. F. Where clear finishes are required ensure tint fillers match wood. 1. Work fillers well into grain before set. 2. Wipe excess from surface. October 2016 09_91_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_91_00 (FS-100) G. Backprime exterior woodwork, which is to receive paint finish, with exterior primer paint. H. Backprime interior woodwork, which is to receive paint or enamel finish, with enamel undercoat paint. I. Backprime interior and exterior woodwork, which is to receive stain or varnish finish, with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. J. Prime top and bottom edges of wood and metal doors with enamel undercoat when they are to be painted. K. Prime top and bottom edges of wood doors with gloss varnish when they are to receive stain or clear finish. 3.04 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Identify equipment, ducting, piping, and conduit in accordance with Related Sections. B. Remove grilles, covers, and access panels for mechanical and electrical system from location and paint separately. C. Finish paint primed equipment with color selected by the Engineer. D. Prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare ducts, hangers, brackets, collars, and supports, except where items are plated or covered with prefinished coating. E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or spattered. F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, convector, and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with 1 coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. G. Paint dampers exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles, convector, and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. H. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces. I. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them. J. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, exposed ductwork, and apply color banding and identification, such as flow arrows, naming and numbering, in accordance with the Contract Documents. October 2016 09_91_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_91_00 (FS-100) 3.05 SURFACES NOT REQUIRING FINISHING A. Stainless steel, brass, bronze, copper, monel, chromium, anodized aluminum: Specially finished articles such as porcelain enamel, plastic coated fabrics, and baked enamel. B. Finished products such as ceramic tile, windows, glass, brick, resilient flooring, acoustical tiles, board and metal tees; other architectural features, such as finish hardware, furnished in aluminum, bronze or plated ferrous metal, prefinished panels, or other items that are installed prefinished. C. Items completely finished at factory, such as preformed metal roof and wall panels, aluminum frames, toilet compartments, sound control panels, acoustical tiles, shower compartments, folding partition, and flagpole. 3.06 CLEANING A. As work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of work, keep premises free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean. 3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete masonry: 2 coats of following finish paints over block filler: 1. Latex, semi-gloss: a. Masonry walls. END OF SECTION October 2016 09_96_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) SECTION 09_96_01 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Field-applied coatings. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_14_00 - Work Restrictions. 2. Section 01_31_19 - Project Meetings. 3. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 4. Section 01_60_00 - Product Requirements. 5. Section 01_77_00 - Closeout Procedures. 6. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 7. Section 46_05_11 - Equipment Identification. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications. 2. D 4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI): 1. Guideline 310.2R - Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair. C. NACE International (NACE): 1. SP0178 - Design, Fabrication, and Surface Finish Practices for Tanks and Vessels to Be Lined for Immersion Service. 2. SP0188 - Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings. D. National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF): 1. 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings. E. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. F. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SP COM - Surface Preparation Commentary for Steel and Concrete Substrates. 2. SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning. 3. SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. 4. SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 5. SP 5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. 6. SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. October 2016 09_96_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) 7. SP 7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. 8. SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. 9. SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete. G. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): 1. Method 24 - Surface Coatings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Submerged metal: Steel or iron surfaces below tops of channel or structure walls that will contain water even when above expected water level. B. Submerged concrete and masonry surfaces: Surfaces that are or will be: 1. Underwater. 2. In structures that normally contain water. 3. Below tops of walls of water-containing structures. C. Exposed surface: Any metal or concrete surface, indoors or outdoors, that is exposed to view. D. Dry film thickness (DFT): Thickness of fully cured coating, measured in mils. E. Volatile organic compound (VOC): Content of air polluting hydrocarbons in uncured coating product measured in units of grams per liter or pounds per gallon, as determined by EPA Method 24. F. Ferrous: Cast iron, ductile iron, wrought iron, and all steel alloys except stainless steel. G. Where SSPC surface preparation standards are specified or implied for ductile iron pipe or fittings, the equivalent NAPF surface preparation standard shall be substituted for the SSPC standard. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Coating materials shall be especially adapted for use in wastewater treatment plants. B. Coating materials used in contact with potable water supply systems shall be certified to NSF 61. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop drawings: 1. Schedule of proposed coating materials. 2. Schedule of surfaces to be coated with each coating material. October 2016 09_96_01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) C. Product data: Include description of physical properties of coatings including solids content and ingredient analysis, VOC content, temperature resistance, typical exposures and limitations, and manufacturer's standard color chips: 1. Regulatory requirements: Submit data concerning the following: a. VOC limitations. b. Coatings containing lead compounds and polychlorinated biphenyls. c. Abrasives and abrasive blast cleaning techniques, and disposal. d. NSF certification of coatings for use in potable water supply systems. D. Samples: Include 8-inch square drawdowns or brush-outs of topcoat finish when requested. Identify each sample as to finish, formula, color name and number, sheen name, and gloss units. E. Certificates: Submit in accordance with requirements for Product Data. F. Manufacturer's instructions: Include the following: 1. Special requirements for transportation and storage. 2. Mixing instructions. 3. Shelf life. 4. Pot life of material. 5. Precautions for applications free of defects. 6. Surface preparation. 7. Method of application. 8. Recommended number of coats. 9. Recommended DFT of each coat. 10. Recommended total DFT. 11. Drying time of each coat, including prime coat. 12. Required prime coat. 13. Compatible and non-compatible prime coats. 14. Recommended thinners, when recommended. 15. Limits of ambient conditions during and after application. 16. Time allowed between coats (minimum and maximum). 17. Required protection from sun, wind, and other conditions. 18. Touch-up requirements and limitations. 19. Minimum adhesion of each system submitted in accordance with ASTM D 4541. G. Manufacturer's Representative’s Field Reports. H. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit as specified in Section 01_77_00. 1. Reports on visits to project site to view and approve surface preparation of structures to be coated. 2. Reports on visits to project site to observe and approve coating application procedures. 3. Reports on visits to coating plants to observe and approve surface preparation and coating application on items that are “shop coated.” I. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Quality assurance plan. 2. Qualifications of coating applicator including List of Similar Projects. October 2016 09_96_01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) J. Certifications: 1. Submit notarized certificate that: a. All paints and coatings to be used on this project comply with current federal, state, and local VOC regulations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator qualifications: 1. Minimum of 5 years of experience applying specified type or types of coatings under conditions similar to those of the Work: a. Provide qualifications of applicator and references listing 5 similar projects completed in the past 2 years. 2. Manufacturer-approved applicator when manufacturer has approved applicator program. 3. Approved and licensed by polymorphic polyester resin manufacturer to apply polymorphic polyester resin coating system. 4. Approved and licensed by elastomeric polyurethane (100-percent solids) manufacturer to apply 100-percent solids elastomeric polyurethane system. 5. Applicator of off-site application of coal-tar epoxy shall have successfully applied coal-tar epoxy on similar surfaces in material, size, and complexity as on the Project. B. Regulatory requirements: Comply with governing agencies regulations by using coatings that do not exceed permissible VOC limits and do not contain lead: 1. Do not use coal-tar epoxy in contact with drinking water or exposed to ultraviolet radiation. C. Certification: Certify that applicable pigments are resistant to discoloration or deterioration when exposed to hydrogen sulfide and other sewage gases and product data designates coating as suitable for wastewater service. D. Field samples: 1. Prepare and coat a minimum 100-square-foot area between corners or limits such as control or construction joints of each system. 2. Approved field sample may be part of the Work. 3. Obtain approval before painting other surfaces. E. Pre-installation conference: Conduct as specified in Section 01_31_19. F. Compatibility of coatings: Use products by same manufacturer for prime coats, intermediate coats, and finish coats on same surface, unless specified otherwise. G. Services of coating manufacturer’s representative: Arrange for coating manufacturer’s representative to attend pre-installation conferences. Make periodic visits to the project site to provide consultation and inspection services during surface preparation and application of coatings, and to make visits to coating plants to observe and approve surface preparation procedures and coating application of items to be “shop-primed and coated.” October 2016 09_96_01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products as specified in Section 01_60_00. B. Remove unspecified and unapproved paints from Project site immediately. C. Deliver new unopened containers with labels identifying the manufacturer's name, brand name, product type, batch number, date of manufacturer, expiration date or shelf life, color, and mixing and reducing instructions. 1. Do not deliver materials aged more than 12 months from manufacturing date. D. Store coatings in well-ventilated facility that provides protection from the sun weather, and fire hazards. Maintain ambient storage temperature between 45 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. E. Take precautions to prevent fire and spontaneous combustion. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Surface moisture contents: Do not coat surfaces that exceed manufacturer- specified moisture contents, or when not specified by the manufacturer, with the following moisture contents: 1. Plaster and gypsum wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, concrete, and concrete block: 12 percent. 3. Interior located wood: 15 percent. 4. Concrete floors: 7 percent. B. Do not apply coatings: 1. Under dusty conditions or adverse environmental conditions, unless tenting, covers, or other such protection is provided for structures to be coated. 2. When light on surfaces measures less than 15 foot-candles. 3. When ambient or surface temperature is less than 55 degrees Fahrenheit unless manufacturer allows a lower temperature. 4. When relative humidity is higher than 85 percent. 5. When surface temperature is less than 5 degrees Fahrenheit above dew point. 6. When surface temperature exceeds the manufacturer's recommendation. 7. When ambient temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless manufacturer allows a higher temperature. 8. Apply clear finishes at minimum 65 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Provide fans, heating devices, dehumidifiers, or other means recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent formation of condensate or dew on surface of substrate, coating between coats and within curing time following application of last coat. D. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain minimum 55 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence and Schedule: As specified in Section 01_14_00. October 2016 09_96_01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Extra materials: Deliver as specified in Section 01_77_00. Include minimum 1 gallon of each type and color of coating applied: 1. When manufacturer packages material in gallon cans, deliver unopened labeled cans as comes from factory. 2. When manufacturer does not package material in gallon cans, deliver material in new gallon containers, properly sealed and identified with typed labels indicating brand, type, and color. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Special coatings: One of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carboline, St. Louis, MO. 2. Ceilcote: International Protective Coatings, Berea, OH. 3. Dampney: The Dampney Company, Everett, MA. 4. Devoe: International Protective Coatings, Louisville, KY. 5. Dudick: Dudick, Inc., Streetsboro, OH. 6. GET: Global Eco Technologies, Pittsburg, CA. 7. Henkel: Henkel North America, Madison Heights, MI. 8. IET: Integrated Environmental Technologies, Santa Barbara, CA. 9. PPC: Polymorphic Polymers Corp., North Miami, FL. 10. PPG Amercoat: PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, Brea, CA. 11. Rustoleum: Rustoleum Corp., Sommerset, NJ. 12. Sanchem: Sanchem, Chicago, IL. 13. Superior: Superior Environmental Products, Inc., Addison, TX. 14. S-W: Sherwin-Williams Co., Cleveland, OH. 15. Tnemec: Tnemec Co., Kansas City, MO. 16. Wasser: Wasser High Tech Coatings, Kent, WA. 17. ZRC: ZRC Worldwide Innovative Zinc Technologies, Marshfield, MA. 2.02 PREPARATION AND PRETREATMENT MATERIALS A. Metal pretreatment: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Henkel: Galvaprep 5. 2. International: AWLGrip Alumiprep 33. B. Surface cleaner and degreaser: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline Surface Cleaner No. 3. 2. Devoe: Devprep 88. 3. S-W: Clean and Etch. 2.03 COATING MATERIALS A. Alkali-resistant bitumastic: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. As specified for Coal Tar Epoxy Substitute. B. Wax coating: As manufactured by the following or equal: 1. Sanchem: No-Ox-Id A special. October 2016 09_96_01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) C. High solids epoxy (self-priming) not less than 72 percent solids by volume: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carboguard 891. 2. Devoe: Bar Rust 233H. 3. PPG Amercoat: Amerlock 2. 4. S-W: Macropoxy 646. 5. Tnemec: HS Epoxy Series 104. D. Aliphatic or aliphatic-acrylic polyurethane: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carbothane 134 VOC. 2. Devoe: Devthane 379. 3. PPG Amercoat: Amershield VOC. 4. Non-submerged: S-W High Solids Polyurethane. 5. Tnemec: Endura-Shield II Series 1075 (U). E. Polymorphic polyester resin coating system: 2-component, modified styrene based thermoset resin, EPA approved for potable water, with 100 percent solids and maximum 10 grams per liter VOC. As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. IET: IET Prime Coat DS-101, Intermediate Coat DS-301, and Finish Coat DS 401. 2. PPC: PPC Prime Coat, IC-Filler Coat, and FC-Final Coat. F. Asphalt varnish: AWWA C 500. G. Elastomeric polyurethane, 100-percent solids, ASTM D 16, Type V, (Urethane P): As manufactured by the following or equal: 1. GET: Endura-Flex EF-1988. H. Waterborne acrylic emulsion: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. S-W: DTM Acrylic B66W1. 2. Tnemec: Tneme-Cryl Series 6. I. Galvanizing zinc compound: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. ZRC: Cold Galvanizing Compound. 2.04 MIXES A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from coatings and damage. Repair damage resulting from inadequate or unsuitable protection. B. Protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated from spatter and droppings with drop cloths and other coverings: 1. Mask off surfaces of items not to be coated or remove items from area. October 2016 09_96_01-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) C. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being coated and, in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation areas. D. Place cotton waste, cloths, and material that may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. E. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings, and fastenings prior to application of coating operations. Carefully store, clean, and replace on completion of coating in each area. Do not use solvent or degreasers to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish. 3.02 GENERAL PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions, unless more stringent requirements are specified in this Section. B. Protect the following surfaces from abrasive blasting by masking or other means: 1. Threaded portions of valve and gate stems, grease fittings, and identification plates. 2. Machined surfaces for sliding contact. 3. Surfaces to be assembled against gaskets. 4. Surfaces of shafting on which sprockets are to fit. 5. Surfaces of shafting on which bearings are to fit. 6. Machined surfaces of bronze trim, including slide gates. 7. Cadmium-plated items except cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized fasteners used in assembly of equipment requiring abrasive blasting. 8. Galvanized items, unless scheduled to be coated. C. Protect installed equipment, mechanical drives, and adjacent coated equipment from abrasive blasting to prevent damage caused by entering sand or dust. D. Ferrous metal surfaces: 1. Remove grease and oil in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 2. Remove rust, scale, and welding slag and spatter, and prepare surfaces in accordance with appropriate SSPC standard as specified. 3. Abrasive blast surfaces prior to coating. a. When abrasive blasted surfaces rust or discolor before coating, abrasive blast surfaces again to remove rust and discoloration. b. When metal surfaces are exposed because of coating damage, abrasive blast surfaces and feather in to a smooth transition before touching up. c. Ferrous metal surfaces not to be submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP 10, unless blasting may damage adjacent surfaces, prohibited, or specified otherwise. Where not possible to abrasive blast, power tool clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3. d. Ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged: Unless specified otherwise, abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP 5 to clean and provide roughened surface profile of not less than 2 mils and not more than 4 mils in depth when measured with Elcometer 123, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer. 4. All abrasive blast cleaned surfaces shall be blown down with clean dry air and/or vacuumed. October 2016 09_96_01-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) E. Ductile iron pipe and fittings to be lined or coated: Abrasive blast clean in accordance with NAPF 500-03. F. Sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces: Prepare in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. G. Galvanized surface: 1. Degrease or solvent clean (SSPC SP 1) to remove oily residue. 2. Power tool or hand tool clean or whip abrasive blast. 3. Test surface for contaminants using copper sulfate solution. 4. Apply metal pretreatment within 24 hours before coating galvanized surfaces that cannot be thoroughly abraded physically, such as bolts, nuts, or preformed channels. H. Shop-primed metal: 1. Certify that primers applied to metal surfaces in the shop are compatible with coatings to be applied over such primers in the field. 2. Remove shop primer from metal to be submerged by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP 10, unless greater degree of surface preparation is required by coating manufacturer’s representative. 3. Correct abraded, scratched, or otherwise damaged areas of prime coat by sanding or abrasive blasting to bare metal in accordance with SSPC SP 2, SP 3, or SP 6, as directed by the Engineer. When entire shop priming fails or has weathered excessively (more than 25 percent of the item), or when recommended by coating manufacturer’s representative, abrasive blast shop prime coat to remove entire coat and prepare surface in accordance with SSPC SP 10. 4. When incorrect prime coat is applied, remove incorrect prime coat by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP 10. 5. When prime coat not authorized by Engineer is applied, remove unauthorized prime coat by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP 10. 6. Shop applied bituminous paint or asphalt varnish: Abrasive blast clean shop applied bituminous paint or asphalt varnish from surfaces scheduled to receive non-bituminous coatings. I. Cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized fasteners: 1. Abrasive blast in the same manner as unprotected metal when used in assembly of equipment designated for abrasive blasting. J. Abrasive blast components that are to be attached to surfaces that cannot be abrasive blasted before components are attached. K. Grind sharp edges to approximately 1/16-inch radius before abrasive blast cleaning. L. Remove and grind smooth all excessive weld material and weld spatter before blast cleaning in accordance with NACE SP0178. M. Poly vinyl chloride (PVC) and FRP surfaces: 1. Prepare surfaces to be coated by light sanding (de-gloss) and wipe-down with clean cloths, or by solvent cleaning in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. October 2016 09_96_01-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) N. Cleaning of previously coated surfaces: 1. Utilize cleaning agent to remove soluble salts such as chlorides and sulfates from concrete and metal surfaces: a. Cleaning agent: Biodegradable non-flammable and containing no VOC. b. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1) CHLOR*RID International, Inc. 2. Cleaning of surfaces utilizing the decontamination cleaning agent may be accomplished in conjunction with abrasive blast cleaning, steam cleaning, high-pressure washing, or hand washing as approved by the coating manufacturer's representative and the Engineer. 3. Test cleaned surfaces in accordance with the cleaning agent manufacturer's instructions to ensure all soluble salts have been removed. Additional cleaning shall be carried out as necessary. 4. Final surface preparation prior to application of new coating system shall be made in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.03 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PREPARATION A. Identify equipment, ducting, piping, and conduit as specified in Section 26_05_53 and Section 46_05_11. B. Remove grilles, covers, and access panels for mechanical and electrical system from location and coat separately. C. Prepare and finish coat primed equipment with color selected by the Engineer. D. Prepare and prime and coat insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare ducts, hangers, brackets, collars, and supports, except where items are covered with prefinished coating. E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when coated over or spattered. F. Prepare and coat interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with 1 coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. G. Prepare and coat dampers exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets to match face panels. H. Prepare and coat exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces. I. Prepare and coat both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them. J. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork and apply color banding and identification, such as flow arrows, naming, and numbering, in accordance with the Contract Documents. October 2016 09_96_01-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) 3.04 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coat metal unless specified otherwise: 1. Aboveground piping to be coated shall be empty of contents during application of coatings. C. Verify metal surface preparation immediately before applying coating in accordance with SSPC SP COM. D. Allow surfaces to dry, except where coating manufacturer requires surface wetting before coating. E. Wash coat and prime sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces, or prime with manufacturer's recommended special primer. F. Prime shop-primed metal surfaces. Spot prime exposed metal of shop-primed surfaces before applying primer over entire surface. G. Multiple coats: 1. Apply minimum number of specified coats. 2. Apply additional coats when necessary to achieve specified thicknesses. 3. Apply coats to thicknesses specified, especially at edges and corners. 4. When multiple coats of same material are specified, tint prime coat and intermediate coats with suitable pigment to distinguish each coat. 5. Lightly sand and dust surfaces to receive high-gloss finishes, unless instructed otherwise by coating manufacturer. 6. Dust coatings between coats. H. Coat surfaces without drops, overspray, dry spray, runs, ridges, waves, holidays, laps, or brush marks. I. Remove spatter and droppings after completion of coating. J. Apply coating by brush, roller, trowel, or spray, unless particular method of application is required by coating manufacturer's instructions or these Specifications. K. Plural component application: Drums shall be premixed each day. All gauges shall be in working order prior to the start of application. Ratio checks shall be completed prior to each application. A spray sample shall be sprayed on plastic sheeting to ensure set time is complete prior to each application. Hardness testing shall be performed after each application. L. Spray application: 1. Stripe coat edges, welds, nuts, bolts, and difficult-to-reach areas by brush before beginning spray application, as necessary, to ensure specified coating thickness along edges. 2. When using spray application, apply coating to thickness not greater than that recommended in coating manufacturer's instructions for spray application. October 2016 09_96_01-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) 3. Use airless spray method, unless air spray method is required by coating manufacturer's instruction or these Specifications. 4. Conduct spray coating under controlled conditions. Protect adjacent construction and property from coating mist, fumes, or overspray. M. Drying and recoating: 1. Provide fans, heating devices, or other means recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent formation of condensate or dew on surface of substrate, coating between coats and within curing time following application of last coat. 2. For submerged service, the Contractor shall provide a letter to the Engineer that the lining system is fully cured and ready to be placed into service. 3. Limit drying time to that required by these Specifications or coating manufacturer's instructions. 4. Do not allow excessive drying time or exposure, which may impair bond between coats. 5. Recoat epoxies within time limits recommended by coating manufacturer. 6. When time limits are exceeded, abrasive blast clean and de-gloss clean prior to applying another coat. 7. When limitation on time between abrasive blasting and coating cannot be met before attachment of components to surfaces that cannot be abrasive blasted, coat components before attachment. 8. Ensure primer and intermediate coats of coating are unscarred and completely integral at time of application of each succeeding coat. 9. Touch-up suction spots between coats and apply additional coats where required to produce finished surface of solid, even color, free of defects. 10. Leave no holidays. 11. Sand and feather in to a smooth transition and recoat scratched, contaminated, or otherwise damaged coating surfaces so damages are invisible to the naked eye. N. Concrete: 1. Apply first coat (primer) only when surface temperature of concrete is decreasing in order to eliminate effects of off-gassing on coating. 3.05 ALKALI-RESISTANT BITUMASTIC A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements. B. Application: 1. Apply in accordance with general application requirements and as follows: a. Apply at least 2 coats, 8 to 14 mils DFT each. 3.06 WAX COATING A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements. October 2016 09_96_01-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) B. Application: 1. Apply in accordance with general application requirements and as follows: a. Apply at least 1/32-inch thick coat with 2-inch or shorter bristle brush. b. Thoroughly rub coating into metal surface with canvas covered wood block or canvas glove. 3.07 HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY SYSTEM A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as follows: a. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged at jobsite in accordance with SSPC SP 5 prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 10. b. Abrasive blast non-submerged ferrous metal surfaces at jobsite in accordance with SSPC SP 10, prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6. c. Abrasive blast clean ductile iron surfaces at jobsite in accordance with SSPC SP 7. B. Application: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as follows: a. Apply minimum 2-coat system with minimum total DFT of 12 mils. b. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within time limits recommended by manufacturer. Prepare surfaces for recoating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. c. Coat metal to be submerged before installation when necessary, to obtain acceptable finish, and to prevent damage to other surfaces. d. Coat entire surface of support brackets, stem guides, pipe clips, fasteners, and other metal devices bolted to concrete. e. Coat surface of items to be exposed and adjacent 1 inch to be concealed when embedded in concrete or masonry. 3.08 HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY AND POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as follows: a. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements. b. Touch up shop-primed steel and miscellaneous iron. c. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces at jobsite prior to coating. Abrasive blast clean rust and discoloration from surfaces. d. Degrease or solvent clean, whip abrasive blast, power tool, or hand tool clean galvanized metal surfaces. e. Lightly sand (de-gloss) fiberglass and PVC pipe to be coated and wipe clean with dry cloths, or solvent clean in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. f. Abrasive blast clean ductile iron surfaces. October 2016 09_96_01-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) B. Application: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as follows: a. Apply a 3-coat system consisting of: 1) Primer: 4 to 5 mils DFT high solids epoxy. 2) Intermediate coat: 4 to 5 mils DFT high solids epoxy. 3) Topcoat: 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT aliphatic or aliphatic-acrylic polyurethane topcoat. 2. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within 30 days or within time limits recommended by manufacturer, whichever is shorter. Prepare surfaces for recoating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.09 POLYMORPHIC POLYESTER RESIN SYSTEM A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as follows: 2. Prepare concrete to obtain clean, open pore with exposed aggregate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Prepare ferrous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 5, with coating manufacturer's recommended anchor pattern. 4. Complete abrasive blast cleaning within 6 hours of applying prime coat. Dew point shall remain 5 degrees above dew point 8 hours after application of coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 5. 5. When handling steel, wear gloves to prevent hand printing. 6. Adjust pH of concrete to within 5.5 to 8.0 before applying prime coat. B. Application: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as follows: a. Apply minimum DFT system consisting of primer, tie coat and top coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as follows: 1) Steel: 35 mils. 2) Concrete: 45 mils. 3.10 ASPHALT VARNISH A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements. B. Application: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as follows: a. Apply minimum 2 coats. 3.11 ELASTOMERIC POLYURETHANE (100 PERCENT SOLIDS) A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and as directed and approved by coating manufacturer's representative. October 2016 09_96_01-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) B. Application: 1. Apply epoxy primer at DFT of 1 to 2 mils, in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Apply polyurethane coating at minimum total DFT as follows: a. Steel: 60 mils DFT. b. Ductile iron and ductile iron pipe coating and lining: 30 mils DFT. c. Concrete: 120 mils DFT. d. Or as recommended by the coating manufacturer and accepted by the Engineer. 3. For concrete application, provide saw cutting for coating terminations in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Perform high voltage holiday detection test in accordance with NACE SP0188, over 100 percent of coated surface areas to ensure pinhole free finished coating system. 3.12 WATERBORNE ACRYLIC EMULSION A. Preparation: 1. Remove all oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign material by solvent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 2. Lightly sand all surfaces and wipe thoroughly with clean cotton cloths before applying coating. B. Application: 1. Apply 2 or more coats to obtain a minimum DFT of 5.0 mils. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Each coat will be inspected. Strip and remove defective coats, prepare surfaces, and recoat. When approved, apply next coat. B. Control and check DFT and integrity of coatings. C. Measure DFT with calibrated thickness gauge. D. DFT on ferrous-based substrates may be checked with Elcometer Type 1 Magnetic Pull-Off Gauge or PosiTector® 6000. E. Verify coat integrity with low-voltage sponge or high-voltage spark holiday detector, for submerged service, in accordance with NACE SP0188. Allow Engineer to use detector for additional checking. F. Check wet film thickness before coal-tar epoxy coating cures on concrete or non- ferrous metal substrates. G. Arrange for services of coating manufacturer's field representative to provide periodic field consultation and inspection services to ensure proper surface preparation of facilities and items to be coated, and to ensure proper application and curing: 1. Notify Engineer 24 hours in advance of each visit by coating manufacturer's representative. 2. Provide Engineer with a written report by coating manufacturer's representative within 48 hours following each visit. October 2016 09_96_01-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) 3.14 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS NOT REQUIRING COATING A. General: Unless specified otherwise, the following items do not require coating: 1. Items that have received final coat at factory and are not listed to receive coating in field. 2. Aluminum, brass, bronze, copper, plastic (except PVC pipe), rubber, stainless steel, chrome, Everdur, or lead. 3. Buried or encased piping or conduit. 4. Exterior concrete. 5. Galvanized steel wall framing, galvanized roof decking, galvanized electrical conduits, galvanized pipe trays, galvanized cable trays, and other galvanized items: a. Areas on galvanized items or parts where galvanizing has been damaged during handling or construction shall be repaired as follows: 1) Clean damaged areas by SSPC SP 1, SP 2, SP 3, or SP 7 as required. 2) Apply 2 coats of a galvanizing zinc compound in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Grease fittings. 7. Fiberglass ducting or tanks in concealed locations. 8. Steel to be encased in concrete or masonry. 3.15 SCHEDULE OF SURFACES TO BE COATED IN THE FIELD A. In general, apply coatings to steel, iron, galvanized surfaces, and wood surfaces unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Coat concrete surfaces and anodized aluminum only when specified or indicated on the Drawings. Color coat all piping as specified in Section 46_05_11. B. The following schedule is incomplete. Coat unlisted surfaces with same coating system as similar listed surfaces. Verify questionable surfaces. C. Concrete: 1. High solids epoxy: a. Safety markings. 2. Polymorphic polyester resin system. 3. Elastomeric polyurethane (100-percent solids). D. Metals: 1. Alkali-resistant bitumastic: a. Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with wood, concrete, or masonry. 2. Wax coating: a. Sliding faces of sluice and slide gates and threaded portions of gate stems. 3. High solids epoxy and polyurethane system: [Interior and] exterior non immersed ferrous metal surfaces including: a. Doors, doorframes, ventilators, louvers, grilles, exposed sheet metal, and flashing. b. Pipe, valves, pipe hangers, supports and saddles, conduit, cable tray hangers, and supports. c. Motors and motor accessory equipment. October 2016 09_96_01-17 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/09_96_01 (FS-100) d. Drive gear, drive housing, coupling housings, and miscellaneous gear drive equipment. e. Valve and gate operators and stands. f. Structural steel including galvanized structural steel. 1) Exposed metal decking. g. Crane and hoist rails. h. Exterior of tanks and other containment vessels. i. Mechanical equipment supports, drive units, and accessories. j. Pumps not submerged. k. Other miscellaneous metals. 4. High solids epoxy system: a. Field priming of ferrous metal surfaces with defective shop-prime coat where no other prime coat is specified; for non-submerged service. b. Bell rings, underside of manhole covers and frames. c. Sump pumps and grit pumps, including underside of base plates and submerged suction and discharge piping. d. Chlorine diffuser supports. e. Exterior of submerged piping and valves other than stainless steel or PVC piping. f. Submerged pipe supports and hangers. g. Stem guides. h. Vertical shaft mixers and aerators below supports. i. Other submerged iron and steel metal unless specified otherwise. j. Interior surface of suction inlet and volute of submersible influent pumps. Apply coating prior to pump testing. k. Submerged piping. l. Exterior of influent pumps and influent pump submerged discharge piping. 5. Polymorphic polyester resin system: a. Surfaces where indicated on the Drawings following a short cure time. 6. Asphalt varnish: a. Underground valve boxes. E. Fiberglass and PVC pipe surfaces: 1. Waterborne acrylic emulsion. a. Exterior of fiberglass ducting and fan housings. b. Fiberglass expose to sunlight. c. PVC piping exposed to view. d. ABS piping as determined by Engineer. END OF SECTION October 2016 22_42_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/22_42_01 (FS-100) SECTION 22_42_01 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Materials and installation of plumbing system. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 4. Section 40_05_00.01 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 5. Section 40_05_00.09 - Piping Systems Testing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). B. ASTM International (ASTM). C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). D. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): 1. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters Standard. E. American national Standards institute (ANSI). 1. ANSI Z358.1 - American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. NEMA Type 3 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System requirements: 1. Include in plumbing system fixtures; soil, drain, vent, and water piping; connections; cleanouts, fittings, accessories, and testing for complete and functional system. 2. Except in details, piping is indicated on the Drawings in diagrammatic form. Sizes and locations are indicated on the Drawings; however, not every offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that will be encountered in the Work has been indicated. October 2016 22_42_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/22_42_01 (FS-100) 3. As part of the Work, modify piping alignment indicated on the Drawings as necessary to avoid structural or mechanical obstructions and to clear the work of other trades. 4. Furnish such parts and pieces necessary to provide a complete and operational system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data for each type of fixture or equipment: 1. Shop drawings: Details, dimensions, and materials. C. Installation instructions. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. F. Manufacturer's recommendations for sizing and locating each unit. G. Manufacturer's warranties for all water heaters, water softeners, and duplex automatic water filters. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory requirements: Perform work under this Section in accordance with the plumbing code specified in Section 01_41_00, and in accordance with applicable laws and regulations, including requirements for accessibility, energy, water conservation, and health including related requirements for water fountains and coolers. 1. Where provisions specified in these Specifications or the design indicated on the Drawings are in conflict with the plumbing code specified in Section 01_41_00 or laws or regulations, the Code and the laws or regulations take precedence over the specified provisions and design. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Manufactured units: Fixture fittings and piping which are exposed shall be heavy-duty chrome. 2. Accessories: a. Stops: 1) Fixtures, except showers, shall have stops at the fixtures' service. 2) Stops for laboratory equipment, and for other equipment or fixtures for which stops have not been otherwise specified in this Section, shall be chrome-plated straight pattern compression stops or chrome-plated angle pattern compression stops. October 2016 22_42_01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/22_42_01 (FS-100) b. Supply faucets, traps, and waste piping for laboratory equipment with the equipment unless otherwise specified. B. Drain, waste, and vent piping: 1. Piping: a. Piping for drain, waste and vent: As specified in Section 40_05_00.01. 2. Joints: a. Threaded joints: American standard taper screw threads, clean cut, and made up with graphite and oil or other suitable pipe compounds. b. Slip joints permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. 1) Do not use long screws or bushings. c. Other types of joints: As specified in the piping sections. 3. Fittings: a. Fittings for screwed waste and vent piping: Cast iron drainage pattern fittings. b. Additional provisions for fittings specified within piping section. 4. Flashing: a. Roof vent, roof drain, and pipe flashing: Minimum 4-pound lead sheet. C. Plumbing piping accessories: 1. Cleanouts: a. Wall-mounted cleanouts (WCO) for exposed or concealed piping: Provide complete including cast-iron tapped tee, round smooth stainless steel access cover, and securing screw. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Josam Company, 58910-19 (Tee & Plug) and 58600 (Access Cover). b) Zurn Industries, Z1446-BP. b. Floor cleanouts (FCO) in finished floor areas: Provide complete including cast-iron ferrule, countersunk plug, gastight and watertight seal, adjustable cleanout head extension, scoriated nickel-bronze top, and securing screw. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Josam Company, 56070. b) Zurn Industries, Inc., ZN-1400. c. Yard cleanouts (YCO) in asphalt or ground areas: Floor cleanouts in unfinished floor areas specified before, for encasement in a concrete pad as indicated on the Drawings and flush with grade. 2. Traps: a. Furnish traps with the fixtures. 1) Do not provide double trapped fixtures. b. Traps installed on bell-and-spigot pipe: Cast iron. c. Traps installed on threaded pipe: Recessed drainage pattern or as specified with the fixture. 3. Floor drainage: a. Floor drainage piping: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings. b. Equipment and floor drains. 1) Provide with adjustable strainer head, floor level grate, 4-inch diameter funnel extension and provided with no-hub outlet and nickel bronze top. October 2016 22_42_01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/22_42_01 (FS-100) 2) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Floor drain: (1) Josam Company, 30000-A, combination drip drain, less clamping collar. (2) Zurn Industries, Inc., ZN-415 strainer. b) Funnel extension: (1) Josam Company, E-2. (2) Zurn Industries, Inc., ZN-328. c) Other floor drains with no-hub outlet and nickel bronze Type B strainer: (1) Josam Company, 30000-A universal floor drain with adjustable strainer, less clamping collar. (2) Zurn Industries, Inc., ZN-415. 3) Strainer sizing: a) 3-inch drain strainers: 6-inch diameter. b) 4-inch drain strainers: 8-inch diameter. D. Narrow wall hydrants: 1. Provide complete, including bronze body and interior parts, replaceable seat washer, screwdriver-operated stop valve on the supply, key-operated control valve, 3/4-inch female inlet and 3/4-inch male standard hose connection. a. Provide narrow wall hydrant with an encased stainless steel box with hinged cover operating key lock, and the word "WATER" stamped on the cover, 3-5/8-inch face to back dimension, suitable for moderate climate conditions. b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Zurn Industries, Inc., Z-1350. E. Wash fountains and sinks: 1. Single compartment stainless steel sinks complete with 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel single bowl, self rimming. Sink bowls coved with a full 5⁄8-inch radius, and shall have a 14-inch water level. Drainboards, when required, shall be “V” creased for positive drainage. 91⁄2-inch high backsplash with 1-inch upturn and tile edge. Legs to be 15⁄8 inch O.D., stainless steel, with stainless steel gussets, stainless steel cross-bracing and adjustable stainless steel bullet feet. 2. Options: a. Splash mounted pre-rinse spray unit with valve assembly, wall bracket and faucet. Unit shall be extra heavy duty with 8" o.c. service connections to match specified sink. Faucet shall have diverter valve and 12" spout. b. Eye/face wash - faucet mounted eye-pod design. Unit shall be fully factory assembled and hydrostatically tested to meet or exceed ANSI Z358.1 – 2009. c. Stainless steel sink cover. d. Manufacturer/Model: Eagle Group, Model FN2820-1-30-14/3. F. Water heaters: 1. Tankless electric water heaters: a. Provide tankless electric water heater with the following characteristics: 1) Provide with high temperature limit switch with automatic reset. 2) Provide with compression fittings. 3) Maximum operating pressure of 150 pounds per square inch. October 2016 22_42_01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/22_42_01 (FS-100) 4) Flow switch activated: a) Heating coils activate at 0.3 gallons per minute. 5) Heating coils: Ni Chrome. 6) 9.5 kW heating capacity with 240v power supply. b. Manufacturers: For single sink and eyewash, one of the following or equal: 1) Eemax, single point MT series. 2. Temperature limiting device: a. Provide water heater with temperature limiting device meeting ASSE 1070 for all public lavatories. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixtures and accessories in accordance with the dimensions supplied by the manufacturers of the fixtures. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Mount fixtures and accessories without cutting of finish surface. 2. Make cross connections between piping for domestic water supply and piping for contaminated sources only by means of appropriate connection devices that prevent backflow from the contaminated sources to the domestic water supply. a. Provide connection devices approved by the Public Health authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. 3. Conceal plumbing piping unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified in the specifications. 4. Furnish and install vents required in drainage piping as part of the plumbing system, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 5. Insulate hot water piping. B. Drain, waste, and vent piping: 1. Where not specified otherwise, install horizontal piping with a grade of 1/4 inch per foot. 2. Provide vents, roof drains, and pipes flashed and made watertight at the roof with lead sheet flashings. 3. Extend flashing not less than 6 inches up the pipes, and counterflash with standard cast iron or malleable iron recessed roof couplings. 4. Extend flashing for vents up to the top of the vent and turn down into the pipe. 5. Extend flashing shields not less than 8 inches from vent and pipe in all directions. C. Plumbing piping accessories: 1. Provide cleanouts of the same size as the size of the waste and drain piping on which cleanouts are installed, up to 4 inches in diameter. Provide cleanouts 4 inches in diameter on waste and drain piping larger than 4 inches diameter. 2. Provide traps at all fixture and equipment connections to the sanitary drainage system. Install traps as near to the fixtures as possible. October 2016 22_42_01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/22_42_01 (FS-100) 3. Sizes of equipment drains and of floor drains shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 4. When indicated on the Drawings, cut holes in heavy-duty floor drain grate for a drainpipe from equipment or other source. D. Water softeners: 1. Install water-softening equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide piping for drain and overflow connections to the equipment drains. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. Test soil, waste, drain, and vent lines as specified and in accordance with plumbing code as specified in Section 01_41_00. 2. Test water piping with water under a pressure of 100 pounds per square inch. 3. Repair and correct defective work disclosed by testing. Repeat testing until defective work is corrected. 3.04 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer(each) services for each type of fixture or equipment. 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. C. Manufacturer (each) services for the fixture or equipment in the following: 1. Water softeners. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. Manufacturer Rep Onsite Source Testing (Witnessed or Non- witnessed) Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Process Operational Period Maintenance (hrs per session) Operation (hrs per session) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Non-Witnessed 4 2 1 1 1 1 Not Required D. Functional Testing: 1. Pressure testing as specified in Sections 40_05_00.01 and 40_05_00.09. 3.05 CLEANING A. Flush piping and leave clean, as required by public health authorities having October 2016 22_42_01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/22_42_01 (FS-100) 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Tankless Water Heater Schedule: Tankless Water Heater Schedule Equip No. Location Flow (GPM) Temp Rise (F) Element kW Amps Volts/ Phases See Notes at end of Schedule for Requirements TWH-001 UV Building 0.5 41 3 14.4 208/1 END OF SECTION October 2016 23_05_93-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_05_93 (FS-100) SECTION 23_05_93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): 1. National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total System Balance, Air Distribution-Hydronic Systems. B. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): 1. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Environmental Systems. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): 1. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau (TABB): 1. International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance. 1.03 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING WORK REQUIREMENTS A. Procure the services of an independent air balance and testing agency belonging to and in good standing with the AABC, NEBB, or the TABB to perform air balancing, testing, and adjustment of building and process air conditioning, heating, and ventilating air systems. B. The Work includes: Balancing new air systems installed as part of this contract and existing air systems affected by the installation of new equipment. C. Perform testing of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment, balancing of distribution systems, and adjusting of air terminal units and ductwork accessories to ensure compliance with Specifications and Drawings. Perform tests for following: 1. Air conditioning units. 2. Heating units. 3. Fans. 4. Ductwork accessories. 5. Ducting. October 2016 23_05_93-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_05_93 (FS-100) 6. HVAC controls. 7. Other specified HVAC equipment. D. Test each mode of operation of thermostats, electronic controllers, and pneumatic, electric or electronic heating, ventilating, and air conditioning instruments to ensure operation as specified. E. Test and adjust room distribution patterns at air outlets. F. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations; retain possession of instruments; remove instruments from site at completion of services. G. Make instruments available to the Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. H. Provide test holes for pressure and pitot flow measurements; provide plugs for all test holes after testing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test, balance, and adjust environmental systems in accordance with either: 1. AABC: National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total Systems Balance, Air Distribution-Hydronics System. 2. NEBB: Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 3. TABB: International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance. B. Perform services under direction of AABC, NEBB, or TABB certified supervisor. C. Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance with requirements of standards. Make calibration histories of instruments available for examination. D. Make measurements in accordance with accuracy requirements of standards. E. Testing, adjusting, and balancing performance requirements: 1. Comply with procedural standards of certifying association. 2. Execute each step of prescribed testing, balancing, and adjusting procedures without omission. 3. Accurately record required data. 4. Make measurements in accordance with recognized procedures and practices of certifying association. 5. Measure air volume discharged at each outlet and adjust air outlets to design air volumes within 5 percent over. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Resumes of proposed supervisor and personnel showing training and qualifications. B. Interim reports: At least 30 days prior to starting field work, submit the following: 1. Set of report forms filled out as to design flow values and installed equipment pressure drops, and required cubic feet per minute for air terminals. 2. Develop heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system schematic similar to Figure 6-1 in SMACNA Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. October 2016 23_05_93-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_05_93 (FS-100) 3. Complete list of instruments proposed to be used, organized in appropriate categories, with data sheets for each showing: a. Manufacturer and model number. b. Description and use when needed to further identify instrument. c. Size or capacity range. d. Latest calibration date. C. Final report: At least 15 days prior to Contractor's request for final inspection, submit 3 copies of final reports, on applicable reporting forms. Include: 1. Identify instruments which were used and last date of calibration of each. 2. Procedures followed to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. 3. Identification and succinct description of systems included in report. 4. Initial balance test results made with all dampers and air control devices in full open positions. 5. Description of final locations and sizes, including opening area and dimensioned configuration of orifices and other restrictions used to achieve final balanced flows. 6. Description of final location and opening positions of dampers, registers, louvers, and valves. 7. Schematics of systems included in report; use schematics as part of testing, adjusting, and balancing report to summarize design and final balanced flows. 8. Testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms. 9. Final field results established for system balancing including airflow, fan speeds, and fan static pressures at the fan inlet and outlet. 10. Appendices. 11. Include appendices for: a. Raw field data taken during testing. b. Sample calculation sheet for each type of calculation made to convert raw field data to final results. c. Initial air balance results with dampers and registers in full open position; include airflow at all inlets and outlet, initial fan speed and fan suction and discharge pressures. D. Proposed schedule for testing and balancing. E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Prior to start of testing, adjusting, and balancing, verify that: 1. Systems installation is complete and in full operation. 2. Outside conditions are within reasonable range relative to design conditions. 3. Lighting fixtures are energized. 4. Special equipment such as computers, laboratory equipment, and electronic equipment are in full operation. 5. Requirements for preparation for testing and balancing have been met for elements of each system which require testing. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. October 2016 23_05_93-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_05_93 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform Functional Tests as specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing acceptance criteria: Consider testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures successful and complete when heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and components are functioning properly and system air and water flows are within specified tolerances of design flows. 3.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Test, adjust, and balance separate complete heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. B. Include in testing, adjusting, and balancing related existing heating, ventilating, and air conditioning components. C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing cycles until airflows meet acceptance criteria. 1. Ascertain airflow balance between overall requirements and flow in individual supply and exhaust grilles. D. Initial testing, adjusting, and balancing: Perform first test on each system with dampers, grilles, orifices, and other variable airflow devices in their full open position; measure and report initial airflows, fan speed, and fan static pressures at fan inlet and outlet. 1. Adjust total system flow downward or upward by adjusting fan speed until 1 inlet or outlet is at indicated flow and all other flows exceed indicated flows. 2. Adjust fan speed by changing fan drives or sheaves as necessary. E. Subsequent testing, adjusting, and balancing: Perform adjustments in subsequent testing, adjusting, and balancing by adjusting dampers, louvers, or size of orifices or plates. 1. Measure and record air volume discharged at each inlet and outlet and adjust air inlets and outlets to design air volumes within 0 to 5 percent over design rates. 2. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives within drive limitations, for required air volume. 3. Measure cubic feet per minute and static pressures and adjust air supply and exhaust fan units to deliver at least 100 to 105 percent of the design air volume. 4. Measure and record static air pressure conditions on fans, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. 5. Evaluate building and room pressure conditions to determine adequate supply and return air conditions. 6. Evaluate space and zone temperature of conditions to determine adequate performance of the systems to maintain temperatures without draft. 7. Permanently mark final balance positions of balancing dampers. F. Develop heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system schematics similar to Figure 6-1 in SMACNA Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. October 2016 23_05_93-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_05_93 (FS-100) G. Accurately record the required data on AABC, NEBB, or TABB test and balance report forms. H. Measure amperage draw of fan and pump motors for final balance. I. Test primary source equipment in accordance with AABC, NEBB, or TABB procedures. 1. Primary source equipment includes items listed in this Section not previously tested as part of this testing, adjusting, and balancing work. 2. Complete appropriate AABC, NEBB, or TABB equipment test forms for each piece of equipment. 3. Calculate cooling and heating capacities to show conformance with specified capacities. 4. Adjust equipment as needed to deliver specified cooling and heating loads. 5. Record final equipment performing characteristics and adjustment settings in the final design report. END OF SECTION October 2016 23_07_13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_07_13 (FS-100) SECTION 23_07_13 DUCTWORK INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Internal acoustical insulation for metal air ductwork systems. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning and Process Start-Up. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data. C. Provide installation instructions. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with SMACNA ducting construction standards and the specified requirement, whichever is more stringent. October 2016 23_07_13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_07_13 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERNAL DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Owens Corning, QuietR flexible duct liner or Fiberglass rigid duct liner. 2. Johns Manville, Linacoustic RC flexible duct liner. B. Type: Flexible or board type duct liner with 1 coated surface meeting the following: 1. Thickness: As required to achieve the following R-values: a. Provide R6 insulation. Provide additional weatherproof exterior barrier covering on exterior ductwork. 2. Temperature range: 40 to 250 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Density: 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. 4. Thermal conductivity: 0.25 Btu-inch per hour per square foot per degree Fahrenheit at 75 degrees Fahrenheit. 5. Fire hazard classification in accordance with ASTM E84: a. Flame spread: 25. b. Smoke developed: 50. 6. Service conditions: Velocities to 2,500 feet per minute. 7. Acoustical performance: NRC of 0.55 minimum. 8. Bacterial growth: None in accordance with ASTM G21. C. Edge treatment: Provide leading edges with galvanized metal nosing; seal other edges with manufacturer's recommended edge treatment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INTERNAL DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Provide rigid insulation on rectangular ducts carrying conditioned air as indicated on the Drawings. B. Install with coated surface facing inside of duct; attach with adhesive to duct and provide fasteners spaced at not to exceed 12 inches transverse (perpendicular) to flow and 18 inches parallel (longitudinal) to flow; provide fasteners within 3 inches of transverse edges and 4 inches of longitudinal edges. C. Follow manufacturer's published installation instructions. D. Install metal nosing on leading edges and seal other exposed edges with manufacturer's edge treatment. 3.02 COMMISSIONING AND PROCESS START-UP REQUIREMENTS A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. October 2016 23_07_13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_07_13 (FS-100) B. Manufacturer services, 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. END OF SECTION October 2016 23_09_13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_09_13 (FS-100) SECTION 23_09_13 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Controls for Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems: 1. Thermostats. 2. HVAC control descriptions. 3. HVAC control panels. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Section 01_81_00 - Project Site Conditions. 5. Section 23_05_93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 6. Section 23_31_13 - Metal Ducts. 7. Section 23_34_01 - Fans. 8. Section 23_81_14 - Air Conditioning Units. 9. Section 26_05_18 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables. 10. Section 26_05_21 - Low Voltage Wire Connections. 11. Section 26_05_33 - Conduits. 12. Section 26_29_05 - Motor Starters. 13. Section 40_67_01 - Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components. 1.02 REFERENCES A. CSA International (CSA). B. National Electrical Code (NEC). C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. E. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. NEMA: 1. Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. October 2016 23_09_13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_09_13 (FS-100) 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General requirements: 1. All electrical components shall be UL listed and meet the design and installation requirements of the NEC. 2. Complete, functional system: Provide all necessary electrical power and control systems, components, and wiring to make a complete functioning system. 3. Comply with electrical Sections for electrical power and control systems. 4. System control functions to perform as described in Products. 5. Materials: New, free from defects, and of the quality specified. 6. Common manufacturer: Provide components, component accessories, and devices, as much as possible, by the same manufacturer throughout the work. 7. Mounting: Mount control components and devices in accessible locations for maintenance and as recommended by the manufacturer; provide necessary manufacturer approved mounting and configuration hardware for mounting and operation of control components and devices. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop drawings: 1. Manufacturer's information including: a. Catalog information clearly marked to show specific products, models, and sizes being furnished. b. Component cut sheets. C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The control system shall be designed in accordance with UL and CSA standards. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The system control products shall be stored and handled per manufacturer's recommendations. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Elevation and ambient conditions as specified in Section 01_81_00. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special warranties: Warranty period begins at date of Project Acceptance or first date of Beneficial Use by the Owner: 1. 1 year: Parts and on-site labor for components, systems, and programming. October 2016 23_09_13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_09_13 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 THERMOSTATS A. General: 1. Thermostat types: Thermostat types are called out on the drawings by the letter T. Unit heater thermostats are integrated with the equipment. Provide outdoor, weather proof enclosure where outdoor installation is required. 2. Manufacturer: a. Mamac, Series 211Y. 2.02 HVAC CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS A. General: Provide control systems that will maintain room or area comfort under changing ambient conditions and varying use; descriptions in this Section are general in nature and do not cover every mode of operation. B. UV Building UV Room HVAC Control Description: 1. References: a. Process area: UV Facility b. HVAC drawings: H-UVD-01 c. Instrumentation drawings: PI-HVD-01, PI-HVD-02 2. Mechanical equipment: Tag Number Equipment Name EUH441, 442 UV Building Unit Heater 1, 2 AHU441 Air Handling Unit 1 SUL 441, 442 Supply Louver 1, 2 EXF441, 442 Exhaust Fan 1, 2 SWH441, 442, 443 Slab Heater 1, 2, 3 3. Controls at equipment: a. Air handling unit AHU-441: 1) Provide disconnect switch for air handling unit. b. Exhaust fan EXF441, 442: 1) Provide disconnect switch for exhaust fan. 4. Controls at HVAC Panel: a. Air handling unit AHU441: 1) Provide communication between UV Building HVAC systems and Owner PLC to control all HVAC equipment serving the UV Building as indicated on the P&ID drawings. 2) Provide motor starters for all motors. 3) Provide dry contact output signals for “System Running” and “System Failed” indication at plant SCADA. b. Exhaust fan EXF441, 442: 1) Provide dry contact output signals for “System Running” and “System Failed” indication on plant SCADA. 2) Coordinate with Section 23_34_01. 5. Zone controls: a. Air Handling Unit AHU 441: October 2016 23_09_13-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_09_13 (FS-100) 1) AHU 441 operates as needed to maintain the Electrical Room temperature within 2˚F of the cooling/heating temperature setpoint. b. Exhaust fan EXF-441, 442: 1) EXF 441, 442 operate when temperature exceeds the setpoint in the UV Room. 2) SUL 441, 442 open when EXF 441, 442 are operating and close when EXF 441, 442 are not operating. c. EUH 441, 442: 1) Heating to maintain room temperature at 50 degrees Fahrenheit (adjustable at manufacturer supplied thermostat) is accomplished by operation of EUH441, 442. Heater operation shall be in accordance with heater manufacturer’s recommendations. d. SWH 441, 442, 443: 1) Heating to melt snow accumulated on concrete slab (adjustable at manufacturer supplied thermostat) is accomplished by operation of SWH441, 442, 443. Heater operation shall be in accordance with heater manufacturer’s recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and verify that Work is in condition to receive installation specified in this Section. B. Take measurements and verify dimensions to ascertain fit of installation. C. Ascertain structural sufficiency to support installation. D. Ascertain that supports and openings are correctly located; cut new openings where required. 1. Submit details of proposed cutting and patching. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before installation remove dust and debris from equipment and accessories. B. During installation and until equipment is operated, protect equipment and accessories from dust and debris. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with NFPA 90A, and per the manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Coordinate installation of HVAC control systems with other trades. 1. Prior to installation, coordinate wiring and conduit requirements with electrical subcontractor. C. Sensor and control station mounting: 1. Where not otherwise indicated, mount 5 feet above floor or walking level. October 2016 23_09_13-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_09_13 (FS-100) 2. Provide insulating back plates when mounting is on an exterior wall or a wall adjoining an unconditioned space. 3. Shield outside thermostats or sensors from the sun; provide thermostats with remote bulb and compensated capillary. 4. Install locking covers where indicated on the Drawings. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test each control system and provide written, signed, and dated test report. 1. Test individual control components and accessories to comply with the Specifications. 2. Test functions of each control system as a complete system to comply with the Specifications. B. Test each control component and system as part of HVAC system testing, adjusting, and balancing as specified in Section 23_05_93. 3.05 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. END OF SECTION October 2016 23_17_43-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_17_43 (FS-100) SECTION 23_17_43 ELECTRIC SNOW MELT SYSTEM - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Radiant snow melting systems. B. Related sections: 1. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to the extent indicated. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), especially Sec. 424 and 426. C. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 1. UL Standard 508A - Industrial Control Panels. 2. UL Standard 515 - Electric Resistance Heat Tracing for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 3. UL Standard 758 - Appliance Wiring Materials. 4. UL Standard 873 - Temperature-Indicating and Regulating Equipment. 5. UL Standard 1673 - Electric Radiant Heating Cables. 6. UL Standard 1693 - Electric Radiant Heating Panels and Heating Panel Sets. D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Electrical components: UL listed and meeting the design and installation requirements of the NEC. B. Performance requirements: 1. Provide electric snow melting system manufactured, fabricated, and installed to comply with regulatory agencies and authorities with jurisdiction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. System layout, mechanical, electrical power, and control diagrams. 2. Materials. 3. Support details. 4. Cut sheets on primary and ancillary equipment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties. October 2016 23_17_43-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_17_43 (FS-100) 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 01_81_00. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide a warranty to be in force and effect for a period of 1 year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC SNOW MELTING SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Watts Water Technologies, Pro Melt. 2. Emerson Industrial Automation. B. Snow melting mat to have the following construction: 1. Heating Cable Construction: Dual heating elements with reinforcement and insulated, ground system, and outer jacket. 2. Power Lead Construction: Insulated current-carrying conductors, ground system, outer jacket; minimum 20 feet (6.1 meters) long. 3. Mat Construction: Heating cable secured to open mesh system in pre-set spacing. 4. Heating Cable Construction: Dual heating elements with reinforcement and insulated, ground system, and outer jacket. 5. Power Lead Construction: Insulated current-carrying conductors, ground system, outer jacket; minimum 20 feet (6.1 meters) long. C. Use sensors/controls provided by system manufacturer. 1. Detector: a. Automatic moisture and temperature detection. b. Adjustable trigger temperature. c. Wall or Pole-mounted, outdoor-rated. d. Moisture sensor fixed to the detector. 2. Panel: a. ON-OFF-AUTO functions. b. NEMA Type 1 for indoor mounting. October 2016 23_17_43-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_17_43 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site verification of conditions: 1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of the system. Refer to manufacturer’s installation manual for information. 2. Do not proceed with installation of the system until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, installation instructions, and design drawings. B. Electric snow melting mat and cable: 1. Test the resistance and insulation integrity of the mat and record. 2. Verify that the site is ready to receive the mat, including all base substrate preparation. 3. Prepare electrical per drawings and bring electrical conduit to the site for the power leads and sensor. 4. Test-fit the mat and cable in the area specified. Mat heating cable cannot be cut shorter to fit. Ensure spacing meets manufacturer recommendations. 5. Secure the mat to the welded wire fabric shown on the drawings as required. 6. Secure the sensor. 7. Test the resistance and insulation integrity of the mat and record. 8. Pull mat power leads into electrical conduit. 9. Install concrete minimum 1 ½ inch thick covering. 10. Install marker plate identifying snow melting product in the area. 11. Test the resistance and insulation integrity of the mat and record. 12. Make electrical connections to snow melting mat, sensors/controls, and power source. Test system briefly and shut down. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test equipment and installation to verify operation is within manufacturer's standards Perform electrical resistance measurements and record in the mat/cable installation manual as required before, during, and after product installation. B. Test system briefly after installation for function and integrity but do not place system into full operation until mortars or other coverings as applicable are fully cured per manufacturer specifications. October 2016 23_17_43-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_17_43 (FS-100) 3.04 ELECTRIC SNOW MELT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Electric Snow Melt System Schedule. ELECTRIC SNOW MELT SYSTEM SCHEDULE Equip. No. Location Capacity Area Additional Requirements (see Schedule Notes) Input V / Ph / MCA No. of Areas Lengt h Width SWH441 Outdoor Slab 208 / 1 / 22.0 1 30 3 2,4,5,8 SWH442 Outdoor Slab 208 / 1 / 4.0 1 5 3 2,4,5,8 SWH443 Outdoor Slab 208 / 1 / 4.0 1 5 3 2,4,5,8 HEATING UNIT SCHEDULE NOTES 1. Hot water service. 2. Electric service. 3. Sensor provided by Contractor. 4. Sensor provided by manufacturer. 5. Concrete mounting. 6. Asphalt mounting. 7. Paver mounting. 8. 24-volt control voltage. 9. 120-volt control voltage. END OF SECTION October 2016 23_31_13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_31_13 (FS-100) SECTION 23_31_13 METAL DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Aluminum ductwork. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning and Process Start-Up. 3. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 4. Section 23_07_13 - Ductwork Insulation. 5. Section 23_05_93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 6. Section 23_33_00 - Ductwork Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): 1. HVAC Systems-Duct Design. 2. Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 181A – Closure Systems for Use With Rigid Air Ducts. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Custom design and fabricate metal ductwork for the applications indicated on the Drawings and for the conditions specified. 2. In accordance with SMACNA Manual for gauge of sheet metal, joint types, reinforcement, bracing, hangers and supports, fabrication, and installation. a. Sheet metal thicknesses: The greater of that thickness required to in accordance with SMACNA for the design pressure specified and the following minimum thicknesses: Diameter or Largest Dimension of Rectangular Duct (Inches) Minimum Sheet Thickness, Inches (B&S Gauge) Up to 12 0.025 (22) 13 to 30 0.032 (20) Larger than 31 0.040 (18) October 2016 23_31_13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_31_13 (FS-100) b. Spacing of hangers and supports: 1) Provide supports as indicated on the Drawings. 2) When supports are not shown, provide supports as required in accordance with SMACNA but no greater than the following requirements; whichever is less: 3) Ducts 18 inches and smaller in largest dimension: 8 feet on center. 4) Ducts over 18 inches in largest dimension: 4 feet on center. c. Support connections: 1) When not indicated on the Drawings, provide in accordance with SMACNA. 2) As a minimum, all support connections to metal or wood roofs shall be located at roof framing members only. 3) No penetrations through roof deck, roof membrane, or connections to roof membrane are acceptable. 3. Design pressure: 2 inches water column. 4. Seismic design criteria: As specified in Section 01_81_02 and in accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems. 5. Hanger reinforcement: a. Ducts 18 inches and smaller in largest dimension: None. b. Ducts over 18 inches and under 30 inches in largest dimension: 1-1/2 inches by 1-1/2 inches by 1/8-inch angles, 8 feet on center. c. Ducts 30 inches and larger in largest dimension: 1-1/2 inches by 1-1/2 inches by 1/8-inch angles, 4 feet on center. 6. When ducts are specified with insulation on interior walls, size duct to provide clear inside dimensions indicated on the Drawings. B. Miscellaneous design details: 1. Changes in duct size: a. Use uniformly tapering sections. b. Taper not more than 1 inch in 5 inches of run. 2. Bends: With the exception of miter bends, design bends with inside radii equal to duct width or diameter. a. Install turning vanes at miter bends. 3. Duct sleeves: Install duct sleeve when ducts pass through concrete or masonry walls, slabs, or ceilings. 4. Access openings: Install in locations that allow access to dampers, fusible links, controllers, and similar devices. 5. Flexible connections: Install at connections to air handling equipment and at locations indicated on the Drawings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: 1. Duct and component material and details of construction. 2. System layout including floor and wall penetrations. 3. Supports and anchoring details. 4. Components used in the duct system including turning vanes, dampers, flexible connections, and access doors. October 2016 23_31_13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_31_13 (FS-100) C. Design data - seismic design calculations. 1. Design calculations for duct construction as specified in Section 01_81_02 and in accordance with SMACNA. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ducts: Aluminum alloy 3003 H14 in accordance with ASTM B 209. B. Flexible connectors: As specified in Section 23_07_13. C. Turning vanes: Match duct material. D. Reinforcing: Formed or extruded aluminum angles. E. Ductwork insulation: As specified in Section 23_07_13. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Duct sleeves: 1. Sleeve flanges: 4 inches wide. 2. Size: 2 inches larger than the duct or duct with external insulation. B. Access openings: 1. Size: 2 inches less than duct size. 2. Doors: a. Gauge not less than duct sheet. b. Provide continuous hinge and latch on outside. 3. Gasket: Along door periphery. 4. Visual panel: 1/8-inch thick, clear plexiglass. C. Turning vanes: 1. Material: Same as ductwork. 2. Type: a. Single-blade vanes for duct widths less than 36 inches. b. Airfoil type vanes for duct widths of 36 inches and greater. 1) No trailing edge. 3. Mounted in side rails. 4. Provide turning vanes for square-turn elbows and splitters. 5. Size: 2-inch blades for ducts up to 18 inches, 4-1/2 inch blades for larger ducts. D. Splitter dampers: Provide at branch take-offs where necessary for balancing system. E. Extractors: 1. Components: a. Synchronized steel curved blades. October 2016 23_31_13-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_31_13 (FS-100) b. Heavy side rails. c. Screw operator. 2. Provide extractors at take-off from main supply duct adjacent to diffusers, registers, or grilles where splitter is not used. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate ductwork to the configuration and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. B. Dimensions indicate net free area. Increase duct dimensions by thickness of insulation when internal insulation is specified. C. Do not utilize S clips, duct tape, or externally applied mastic on medium pressure duct systems. D. Do not use snap lock seams. E. Provide flexible duct connectors at all connections to fans and other air movement equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and verify that Work is in condition to receive metallic ductwork as specified in this Section. 1. Take measurements and verify dimensions on shop drawings to verify fit of installation. 2. Verify that supports and openings are correctly located. B. Examine and verify structural details and determine conflicts in dimensions and clearances. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cover ductwork openings with tape, plastic, or sheet metal to reduce the amount of dust or debris which may collect in the system at each of the following times: 1. At the time of rough installation. 2. During storage on the construction site. 3. Until final start-up of the heating and cooling equipment. B. Before installation remove dust and debris from ducts. C. Adjust duct alignment where necessary to resolve conflicts with architectural features or to resolve conflicts with the work of other trades. D. Install ductwork to provide a system free of buckling, warping, or vibration. E. Hangers: 1. Install hangers as indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 23_31_13-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_31_13 (FS-100) 2. When hangers are not detailed, conform to SMACNA HVAC System Duct Design and Seismic Restraint Manual standards and the following requirements: a. Rectangular ducts concealed in ceiling spaces: 1) Use metal strap hangers. 2) Fasten to sides of duct with 2 screws. 3) Fasten to bottom of duct with 1 screw. b. Rectangular ducts in exposed areas: 1) Install shelf angle trapeze hangers or Unistrut type hangers. 2) Install sway bracing as required by seismic calculations, minimum 1 brace at right angle to each duct run. c. Round ducts in exposed areas: 1) Install 2 half-round bands with rods bolted to panels. 2) Install sway bracing as required by seismic calculations, minimum 1 brace at right angle to each duct run. 3. Flexible connections: As specified in Section 23_07_13. F. Provide closed-cell neoprene gaskets at flanged joints. G. Tapes and mastics used to seal ductwork shall be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181A and shall be marked. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect ductwork under operating conditions. 1. Correct audible leaks and leaks that can be felt with the hand. B. Test and balance ducting systems as specified in Section 23_05_93. END OF SECTION October 2016 23_33_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_33_00 (FS-100) SECTION 23_33_00 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Dampers and damper operators. 2. Diffusers, grilles, and registers. 3. Screens. 4. Flexible duct connectors. 5. Other ductwork accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 23_05_93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems. 2. 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. Uniform Building Code (UBC). D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Dampers, diffusers, grilles, and registers specified are indicated on the Drawings by the abbreviations listed below. Each abbreviation is followed by a hyphen and a number to designate the required style of unit: 1. R: Return Register or Grille. 2. S: Supply Register, Grille, or Diffuser. B. NEMA Type 1 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. C. Return registers: 1. R designation includes wall, ceiling, and duct mounted air exhaust or return devices including diffusers and grilles with or without control dampers. 2. When no return register style is indicated on the Drawings, provide Style R-4; provide 4 inch flanged drop frame when duct mounting indicated. October 2016 23_33_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_33_00 (FS-100) D. Supply registers: 1. S designation includes wall, ceiling, and duct mounted air supply devices including diffusers and grilles with or without control dampers. 2. When no supply register style is indicated on the Drawings, provide as specified in this section; provide 4 inch flanged drop frame when duct mounting indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: 1. Layout drawings: Indicate location of duct accessories. 2. Manufacturer, model, materials, sizes, pressure drop charts, capacities, and included accessories. C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Provide dampers manufactured by the same manufacturer. 2. Dampers: a. Manufacturer’s: One of the following or equal: 1) One manufacturer's model is listed with each style, similar models from other listed vendors are acceptable: a) Ruskin Manufacturing. b) American Warming and Ventilating. c) Swartwout. B. Materials: 1. Metallic ductwork: Aluminum for aluminum duct work; aluminum or galvanized steel for galvanized steel ductwork unless specified otherwise with styles. 2. Fiberglass reinforced plastic ductwork: Fiberglass reinforced plastic where not otherwise specified. C. Components: Include specified damper type with frame actuators, clips, connectors, and other accessories necessary for mounting; provide locking quadrant manual actuator or electric actuator as indicated on the Drawings. 2.02 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Provide diffusers, grilles, and registers manufactured by the same manufacturer. 2. Diffusers, grilles, and registers: One of the following or equal. One manufacturer's model is listed with each style, similar models from other listed vendors are acceptable: a. Titus Manufacturing Corp. October 2016 23_33_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_33_00 (FS-100) b. Tuttle and Bailey. c. Kees, Inc. d. Metal Industries, Inc. (MetalAire). e. Krueger. B. Materials: 1. For metallic ductwork: Aluminum for aluminum duct work. C. Components: Include specified style with frame, clips, connectors, and other accessories necessary for mounting. D. Appearance: Similar for units in same room or space. E. Finishes - none. F. Supply diffuser, grille, and register styles: 1. S- Supply Register: a. Size and installation: Rectangular grille size as indicated on the Drawings framed for surface mounting on gypsum or directly mounted on exposed ducting; provide 4 inch flanged drop frame when duct mounted. b. Faceplate: Removable grille with double deflection blades spaced at 3/4 inch; front blades parallel to long dimension; provide gasket at frame for sealing. c. Core: Adjustable vanes with rectangular or round neck to match ducting. d. Damper: Provide opposed blade volume control damper suitable for use with ducting type; damper to be adjustable through the face of the unit. e. Materials: Aluminum frame, core, damper, and faceplate. f. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Titus, Model 272FL. 2) Krueger, Model 5880H. G. Return diffuser, grille, and register styles: 1. R- Return Register: a. Size and installation: Size as indicated on the Drawings suitable for ceiling or sidewall surface mounting on gypsum or T-bar ceiling. b. Face: High free area eggcrate with 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch by 1 inch deep grid. c. Core: When connected to ducting, provide suitable rectangular or round neck to match ducting; when filter indicated on the Drawings, provide 1-inch deep filter frame and hinged face. d. Damper: When connected to ducting, provide opposed blade volume control damper suitable for use with ducting type; damper to be adjustable through the face of the unit. e. Materials: Aluminum frame, core, damper, and faceplate. f. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Titus, Model 50F or 50FF. 2.03 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide flexible duct connectors at all connections to fans and other air movement equipment as indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 23_33_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_33_00 (FS-100) B. Duct to Duct Flexible Connection: 1. Fabric shall be fire resistant, waterproof, mildew-resistant, and airtight. At least 4 inches of fabric shall be exposed. Flexible connections shall be in accordance with the requirements of UL and NFPA. 2. Exterior locations: a. Fabric for flexible connections exposed to sunlight or the weather shall be glass fabric coated with chlorosulfurated polyethylene suitable for a temperature range of -10 degrees Fahrenheit to 250 degrees Fahrenheit and shall have a weight of at least 24 ounces per square yard and a thickness of 0.019 inches. b. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Ventfabrics “Ventlon”. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and verify that Work is in condition to receive installation specified in this Section. Take measurements and verify dimensions to ascertain fit of installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before installation, remove dust and debris from ducts and accessories. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Flexible Connections: Install at connections between duct and air handling equipment. 1. Install with collar and metal band to form airtight joints. 2. Install with minimum 4 inches of slack in fabric. 3. Exterior locations: Install sheet metal weather cover over fabric. 4. Duct alignment shall be a maximum of 1/2 inch offset. 5. The minimum/maximum gap shall be 2-inches and 6-inches. 6. Lap longitudinal joints and glue per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Set grilles, dampers, and diffusers to achieve flows and flow patterns indicated on the Drawings and test finished system as specified in Section 23_05_93. B. Mark final balance positions on all manual damper actuators with paint pen in a distinctive color. 3.05 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. END OF SECTION October 2016 23_34_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_34_01 (FS-100) SECTION 23_34_01 FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Fans, including: 1. Sidewall propeller fans. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 3. Section 01_81_04 - Wind Design Criteria. 4. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 5. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 6. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 7. Section 46_05_10 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment. 8. Section 23_37_24 - Louvers. 9. Section 23_09_13 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC. 10. Section 23_05_93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 11. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 12. Section 26_05_26 - Grounding and Bonding. 13. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 14. Section 26_05_18 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables. 15. Section 26_05_33 - Conduits. 16. Section 26_05_34 - Boxes. 17. Section 26_27_26 - Wiring Devices. 18. Section 26_05_09 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower. 19. Section 26_28_17 - Disconnect Switches. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): 1. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): 1. 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating. 2. 211, Certified Rating Program- Product Rating Manual for Fan Air Performance. 3. 300, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fan. 4. 301, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. 2. 68 - Laboratory Methods of Testing to Determine Sound Power in a Duct. October 2016 23_34_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_34_01 (FS-100) D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 2. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. National Electrical Code (NEC). F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 90A - Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). I. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As used in this Section and on the drawings, abbreviations and Fan Schedule headings have the following meaning: 1. EXF: Exhaust Fan. 2. Type: Fan type as specified in this Section. 3. SP or ESP: Fan External Static Pressure in inches water column. 4. Size: Nominal fan blade or wheel diameter in inches. 5. Hp: Fan motor horsepower. 6. V/Ph: Fan motor voltage and power phases. B. NEMA: 1. Type 1 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 2. Type 3R enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Provide fans that have sharply rising pressure characteristics which extend throughout the operating range and continue to rise beyond the efficiency peak. 2. Provide fans that peak as close as possible to the maximum efficiency and whose operating range is within the normal fan selection range. 3. When scheduled, provide guided vibration isolator for fans, so that not more than 10 percent of the vibration amplitude of the fan and motor is transmitted to the supporting structure. 4. Design fan inner scroll and air stream surfaces to maintain smoothness for entire fan service life. 5. Seismic supports: Seismic design criteria as specified in Section 01_81_02. 6. Wind supports for exterior units: Wind design criteria as specified in Section 01_81_04. 7. Electrical components: UL listed and meeting the design and installation requirements of the NEC. 8. Applicable portions as specified in Section 46_05_10. 9. Motors supplied with fans: TEFC, IEEE 841 Compliant, NEMA premium efficiency, Class F insulation, Class B temperature rise, 1.15 service factor; October 2016 23_34_01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_34_01 (FS-100) provide motor voltage phases and speed as scheduled; non-overloading on any point of the fan curve including belt losses. 10. Insulation and adhesives: Meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation. 11. Screens: Provide bird or insect screen as specified with the fan type or as listed on the Fan Schedule: a. Bird screen: Stainless steel; 0.5-inch mesh 18 gauge. b. Insect screen: Stainless steel mesh and frame. 12. Finishes: When not specified with fan type, coat ferrous metals as specified in Section 09_96_01. 13. Accessories: Provide accessories specified and those scheduled. B. Performance requirements: 1. Performance requirements are included in the Fan Schedule located at the end of this Section. 2. Fan performance: Rated and licensed to bear the AMCA label in accordance with AMCA 210 and AMCA 211. 3. Total sound power levels in the 8 octave band range as measured in accordance with ASHRAE 68, AMCA 301, or AMCA 300 as appropriate for each fan: Not to exceed the lesser of the following or the Sones levels on the Fan Schedule. Sound Power Level, decibel levels referenced to 10-12 watts Frequency, Hz 63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000 General 100 98 94 88 84 84 78 75 4. Bearings: Rated per ABMA 9 or 11 for a L10 life rating of not less than 50,000 hours; provide greater life when specified with each fan type. C. Electrical and control system design: 1. Design and supply necessary electrical power and control systems, components, and wiring to make a complete functioning system. Design to perform the system ventilating functions with the control systems as specified in Section 23_09_13 or as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in the following Sections: a. Section 26_05_00. b. Section 26_05_26. c. Section 26_05_53. d. Section 26_05_18. e. Section 26_05_33. f. Section 26_05_34. g. Section 26_27_26. h. Section 26_05_09. i. Section 26_28_17. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: 1. Materials. October 2016 23_34_01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_34_01 (FS-100) 2. Primary and ancillary equipment. 3. Sound Power Level in each of 8 octave bands and overall Sones. 4. Fan system layout, mechanical, electrical power, and control diagrams. 5. Supports, vibration isolators, and seismic bracing calculations and details. 6. Calculated fan vibration levels and field-testing method. 7. Bearing life. 8. Fan performance curves showing specified operating condition. C. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01_78_23. 1. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for each type fan. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide fans: 1. Listed by UL. 2. Rated in accordance with AMCA. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver units in 1 piece, factory assembled, internally wired, and lubricated. B. Protect equipment from dust and atmospheric exposure as recommended by the unit manufacturer. 1. As a minimum provide temporary closures for equipment openings designed for airflow. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide manufacturer recommended spare parts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TYPE 4, SIDEWALL PROPELLER FANS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Greenheck, Model SE. 2. Loren Cook, similar model. 3. Penn Ventilator, similar model. B. Type: Wall-mounted, low noise propeller type, packaged unit. 1. Fan: Statically and dynamically balanced propeller with aluminum blades, unless noted otherwise. 2. Motor: Permanently lubricated; selected to avoid running in the service factor. C. Accessories: 1. Motor and fan side OSHA guards. October 2016 23_34_01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_34_01 (FS-100) 2. Wall mount collar when necessary for installation as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Dampers with damper guards when damper scheduled. 4. Weather hood when scheduled. 5. Bird screen: Provide bird screen. 6. Finish: Coat fan, housing, and accessories with polyester finish. 7. Mounting hardware. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test fans listed on the Fan Schedule for proper operation, performance, and electrical controls. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and verify that Work is in condition to receive installation specified in this Section. B. Take measurements and verify dimensions to ascertain fit of installation. C. Ascertain support and openings are correctly located. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before installation, remove dust and debris from equipment and ducts. B. During installation and until equipment is operated, protect equipment and ducts from dust and debris by covering openings with tape or plastic. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Observe applicable installation requirements as specified in Section 46_05_10. B. Anchoring and support: 1. Provide anchoring and support for fans and appurtenances. 2. Provide anchoring to sustain seismic and wind forces as specified in Sections 01_81_02 and 01_81_04. C. Install and wire unit fans and controls in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test equipment and installation to verify tightness, operation, and unit vibration is within manufacturer's submitted maximum. B. Test equipment performance and balance equipment as specified in Section 23_05_93. October 2016 23_34_01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_34_01 (FS-100) 3.05 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Fan Schedule: October 2016 23_34_01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_34_01 (FS-100) Equip. No. Location Fan Motor Additional Requirements Type Drive (See listed Notes) Min. CFM Min. ESP" Max. RPM Fan Diam. Noise Sones Hp V / Ph. Max. RPM EXF441 UV Room Axial Direct 1050 0.5 1800 18" 25 1/3 115/1 1800 2,3,7,13,16 EXF442 UV Room Axial Direct 1050 0.5 1800 18" 25 1/3 115/1 1800 2,3,7,13,16 Notes: 1. Provide bird screen. 2. Provide insect screen. 3. Provide backdraft damper, counterbalanced for minimum pressure loss. 4. Provide exterior weather hood. 5. Provide adjustable belt sheaves. 6. Provide vibration isolators. 7. Provide manufacturer std. motor enclosure. 8. Provide TEFC motor enclosure and wiring suitable for Class I, Div. 2 locations. 9. Provide explosion proof motor and wiring suitable for Class I, Div. 1 locations. 10. Provide variable frequency drive speed controller as specified in this Section. 11. Provide SCR speed controller as specified in this Section. 12. Provide exterior disconnect switch at fan, NEMA Type 3R. 13. Provide NEMA Type 1 disconnect switch at fan inside housing. 14. Provide 120 volt, line voltage thermostat Type 2 as specified in Section 23_09_13. 15. Provide 24 volt, low voltage thermostat type T-5 as specified in Section 23_09_13. 16. Interlock fan with motorized louver dampers, other fans, or equipment as indicated on the Drawings. 17. Provide replaceable filters. 18. Provide motorized backdraft damper. 19. Provide exterior weather louver, Type L-1 as specified in Section 23_37_24. 20. Provide fiberglass canopy hood, size as indicated on the Drawings. 21. Fan selection based on existing opening; field verify opening size and select maximum sized, slowest rpm fan to fit opening and meet performance conditions. 22. Provide fire/smoke control system for all fans greater than 2,000 cfm. END OF SECTION October 2016 23_37_24-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_37_24 (FS-100) SECTION 23_37_24 LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Motor operated adjustable louvers. B. Related sections: 1. Section 23_05_93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): 1. 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating. 2. 500-D - Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating. 3. 511 - Certified Ratings Program - Product Rating Manual for Air Control Devices. B. ASTM International (ASTM): C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance: In accordance with AMCA 511 when tested in accordance with AMCA 500. B. Designed for 20 pounds per square foot wind load. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Include dimensions, anchorage details, and relationships to adjacent materials. B. Product data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide louvers with the following, unless otherwise specified: 1. AMCA certification and rating in accordance with AMCA 511 for air performance and water penetration. October 2016 23_37_24-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_37_24 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Louver types: Louvers are marked on the drawings with a letters SUL followed by a number referring to a louver type in this Section. Individual louver size and airflow rates are scheduled below. B. Accessories: 1. Provide installation clips and flanged or jamb-mounting styles suitable for the mounting locations as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide extended sills for louvers indicated as installed recessed from the exterior wall surface. 3. Provide stainless steel fasteners unless noted otherwise. 4. Corrosion protection. 5. Provide gravity damper for all outside air intake and exhaust louvers unless noted otherwise. C. Protective coatings for aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 2. Koppers Company, Inc. 3. Tarmastic 100. 4. Porter Coatings. 2.02 MOTOR OPERATED ADJUSTABLE LOUVERS, SAD A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Greenheck, Model EADC-401. 2. Airolite Company, Model T6784E. 3. Ruskin, equivalent product. B. Requirements: 1. Type: Motor operated adjustable louver with motor concealed in the frame. 2. Frame: 4-inch deep, minimum 0.125-inch thick, Type 6063-T5 aluminum. 3. Blades: Minimum 0.0508-inch (16 gauge) thick, Type 6063-T5 aluminum chevron blades, spaced at 4-inch centers, mounted at 45 degrees when open; provide linkage hidden in the frame. 4. Bearings and axles: Stainless steel ball bearings and 0.25-inch pivot pins. 5. Actuator: a. Unless noted otherwise, provide 120 volt, single phase alternating current, Honeywell M436A or larger actuator; UL approved; energize to open, spring closed; motor concealed in louver frame with rear (inside) access panel; provide 1 actuator for each section, sized to match louver size. 6. Screens: Removable 0.75-inch deep aluminum frame with aluminum wire; insect screens on intakes and bird screens on exhausts; 7. Pressure drop (without screen): Maximum 0.06 inches water column for intake service at 540 feet per minute free area velocity. 8. Filters: Aluminum frame for 1-inch removable filters; Maximum 0.2 inches water column for intake service at 540 feet per minute free area velocity.Water penetration: Maximum 0.01-ounce water per square foot at 540 feet per minute free area velocity. 9. Finish: Kynar; color as selected. October 2016 23_37_24-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_37_24 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; caulk all frames to make weathertight. B. Install louvers for machinery, engines, and similar equipment to allow easy louver removal for machinery or engine removal through the louver opening space without louver projections on floors or walls. C. Anchor louvers to concrete or masonry with concrete anchors through jambs. D. Corrosion protection: 1. Aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry: Apply 2 coats bitumastic black solution. 2. Aluminum in contact with dissimilar metal, except stainless steel: Isolate from dissimilar metal with neoprene gaskets, sleeves, or washers. Utilize stainless steel fasteners. 3. Field-testing: As specified in Section 23_05_93. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Louver Schedule: October 2016 23_37_24-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_37_24 (FS-100) Equip. No. Location Louver Motor Additional Requirements (See listed Notes) Type Drive Min. CFM Min Free Area Width Height V Ph MCA SAD441 UV Room Adjustable Motor 1050 2.3 sqft 24" 40" 115 1 0.5 2,7,12,13 SAD442 UV Room Adjustable Motor 1050 2.3 sqft 24" 40" 115 1 0.5 2,7,12,13 Notes: 1. Provide bird screen. 2. Provide insect screen. 3. Provide backdraft damper, counterbalanced for minimum pressure loss. 4. Provide exterior weather hood. 5. Provide adjustable belt sheaves. 6. Provide vibration isolators. 7. Provide manufacturer std. motor enclosure. 8. Provide TEFC motor enclosure and wiring suitable for Class I, Div. 2 locations. 9. Provide explosion proof motor and wiring suitable for Class I, Div. 1 locations. 10. Provide exterior disconnect switch at louver, NEMA Type 3R. 11. Provide NEMA Type 1 disconnect switch at louver. 12. Interlock louver with fans, or other equipment as indicated on the Drawings. 13. Provide replaceable filters. 14. Selection based on existing opening; field verify opening size and select maximum sized, slowest rpm fan to fit opening and meet performance conditions. END OF SECTION October 2016 23_81_14-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_81_14 (FS-100) SECTION 23_81_14 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Packaged, electric-cool, electric heat air conditioning units. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 4. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 5. Section 01_81_01 - Project Design Criteria. 6. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 7. Section 01_81_04 - Wind Design Criteria. 8. Section 23_05_93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 9. Section 23_09_13 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC. 10. Section 23_33_00 - Ductwork Accessories. 11. Section 26_05_09 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower. 12. Section 40_05_06.55 - Piping Insulation. 13. Section 46_05_10 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI): 1. 210-240 - Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 3. 340/360 - Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. Standard 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration System. 2. Standard 52.2 - Methods of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. 3. Standard 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). D. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): 1. 210 - Laboratory Methods for Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating. E. Federal Specification (FS): 1. Standard 141 - Paint, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Materials: Methods of Inspection, Sampling and Testing. October 2016 23_81_14-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_81_14 (FS-100) F. National Electrical Code (NEC). G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 2. 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. I. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA). J. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. NEMA Type 3R enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Seismic supports: Design support to meet criteria as specified in Section 01_81_02. 2. Wind supports: For exterior units, design support that meet the criteria as specified in Section 01_81_04. 3. Electrical components: UL listed and met the design and installation requirements of the NEC. 4. Gas, water piping, drains, and venting: In accordance with building code, mechanical code, and plumbing code a specified in Section 01_41_00 and in accordance with NFPA 90A. 5. Motors: As specified in Section 26_05_09. 6. Fans: Rated in accordance with AMCA 210. 7. Unit air conditioners: Rated in accordance with AHRI Standards 210-240 or 340/360 and AHRI 270. Conform to the latest version of ASHRAE 15. 8. Unit air conditioners with heating options: Certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47. 9. Refrigerant: HFC R-410A. B. Performance requirements: 1. As specified and as listed on the Air Conditioning Unit Schedule at the end of this Section. 2. Outdoor noise levels: Outdoor noise levels in the 8 octave band range as measured in accordance with AHRI Standard 270 for unit air conditioners and split system condensers shall not exceed the following: Unit Nominal Capacity (Tons) OCTAVE BANDS, hertz 63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000 3 to 5 64 70 71 74 74 71 67 61 3. Units shall be capable of starting and running at 125 degrees Fahrenheit ambient outdoor air temperature and exceeding the maximum load criteria of AHRI Standard 210-240 or 340/360. October 2016 23_81_14-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_81_14 (FS-100) 4. Cooling capacities and energy efficiency ratios: Provide units with the following cooling capacities and energy efficiency ratios (EER) as rated in accordance with AHRI 210-240 or 340/360 and 270, unless scheduled otherwise. Equipment Type Net Cooling Cap (Btuh) EER(1) Air Cooled >65,000 and <135,000 11.2 Air Cooled >135,000 and < 240,000 11.0 Air Cooled >240,000 and < 760,000 10.0 Air Cooled > 760,000 9.7 Water Cooled >65,000 and <135,000 12.1 Water Cooled >135,000 and < 240,000 12.5 Water Cooled >240,000 and < 760,000 12.4 Water Cooled > 760,000 12.2 (1) Deduct 0.2 from the required EERs for units with a heating section other than electric resistance heat. 5. Units with heating capabilities: Meet or exceed the following efficiencies: a. Annual fuel utilization efficiency: 80 percent. b. Steady state efficiency: 80 percent. c. For projects located in California, California seasonal efficiency: 76.9 percent. 6. Unit air flows for cooling: A minimum of 300 cubic feet per minute per ton but not exceeding 500 cubic feet per minute per ton of cooling unless scheduled otherwise. 7. Air filters: 25 to 30 percent efficiency when rated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2. C. Electrical and control system design: 1. Design and supply necessary electrical power and control systems, thermostats, components, and wiring to make a complete functioning system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: 1. Shop drawings: a. System layout, mechanical, electrical power, and control diagrams. b. Materials. c. Supports and seismic bracing calculations and details. d. Cut sheets on all primary and ancillary equipment. e. Proposed cutting and patching. f. Noise levels in 8 octave bands showing compliance with specified levels. October 2016 23_81_14-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_81_14 (FS-100) C. Installation instructions. D. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01_78_23. 1. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for each type of unit. E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. F. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. G. Manufacturer's warranties. H. Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver units in 1 piece, factory assembled, piped, internally wired, charged with refrigerant and compressor oil, and tested. B. Protect equipment from dust and atmospheric exposure: 1. Provide temporary closures for equipment openings designed for airflow. C. Protect equipment from dust and atmospheric exposure as recommended by the unit manufacturer. 1. Provide temporary closures for equipment openings designed for airflow. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 01_81_01. B. Units shall be capable of starting and operating in ambient temperatures as specified in this Section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special warranties: From the date of acceptance of the project or date of beneficial use. 1. 1-year warranty: All components. 2. 5 years: For refrigerant compressors and closed or sealed refrigerant systems. 3. 10 years: For evaporator and condensing coils. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Extra materials: 1. Provide 2 extra sets of filters per unit installed. 2. Provide 1 extra set of drive belts for each size belt system provided. October 2016 23_81_14-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_81_14 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PACKAGED, ELECTRIC-COOL, ELECTRIC HEAT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Carrier Series 50HC 2. Trane, equivalent model. B. Compressors: 1. Fully hermetically sealed, high efficiency, reciprocating, or scroll type, with internal and external vibration isolation. 2. Equipped with high-pressure relief. C. Fans: 1. Evaporator fan: a. Direct or belt driven, forward curved, double inlet, centrifugal type, steel with corrosion resistant finish, statically and dynamically balanced. b. Permanently sealed ball bearings and permanently lubricated. c. Adjustable pitch motor pulley. d. Where the condenser fan exceeds 7.49 horsepower, provide variable speed or 2-speed fan with low speed at 2/3 of the high speed. 2. Condenser fan: a. Propeller type, direct drive, aluminum blades, dynamically balanced, and vertical discharge. b. Permanently sealed ball bearings and permanently lubricated. 3. Induced draft blower: a. Direct or belt drive, single inlet, forward curved centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced. b. Made from steel with corrosion resistant finish. D. Coils: 1. Evaporator and condenser coils, seamless copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum plate fins. 2. Evaporator and condenser coils, internal piping, and appurtenances: Factory applied phenol-formaldehyde thermosetting resinous coating. 3. Provide hail gaurds. E. Refrigerant components: Refrigerant circuit including: 1. Accumulator. 2. Filter drier. 3. Expansion device. 4. Gauge ports. 5. Flow control valves. 6. Circuit feed system. 7. Service gauge connections on suction, discharge, and liquid lines to charge, evacuate and contain refrigerant. F. Electric heating section: When electric heat is scheduled: 1. Provide balanced 3 phase heating coils of capacity as scheduled. G. Controls and equipment safety features: 1. Provide system controls for a complete and properly functioning system that operates as described. Provide, as a minimum, the following: October 2016 23_81_14-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_81_14 (FS-100) a. Condenser fan controls. b. Evaporator fan controls. c. All motor contactors. d. 24-volt control circuit and transformer, if 24-volt control is specified in the Air Conditioning Unit Schedule. e. Manual reset circuit breakers. f. Power disconnect switch. g. 5-minute compressor cycle delay. h. Check filter switch suitable for field connection remote alarm. 2. Equipment safety features, include: a. High-pressure switches. b. Compressor overtemperature and overcurrent. c. Loss of charge/low pressure switch. d. Freeze stat on evaporator. e. Lock out protection. f. Heating high temperature limit switch. g. Low ambient temperature cooling kit. 3. Control descriptions: As specified in Section 23_09_13. 4. Interface to building HVAC control system: a. Provide contacts and signals to operate unit with the building control system as specified in Section 23_09_13. 1) Setpoint range of 60 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit with digital temperature and setpoint indication. 2) ON-OFF-AUTO selector switch. 3) Automatic switch over from cooling to heating modes. 4) 7 day programming schedule with at least 1 set back period per day. 5) Indicator lights for unit operating mode and unit failure. 6) Time delay for compressor restarts and for automatic switch over. H. Electrical: 1. Unit power and control wiring entering unit cabinet at 1 location. 2. Provide 15 amp, 120 volt, single phase, ground fault interrupter convenience outlet at condenser unit; provide factory installed transformer, and independent fuse or breaker protection for outlet. 3. Provide power disconnect switch at each piece of unit; mount disconnect in NEMA Type 3R enclosure if exterior to unit. I. Unit casing: 1. Manufactured of minimum 22-gauge galvanized steel, bonderized, corrosion protected, and exterior coated with a baked enamel finish interior primer coated. Coating shall withstand Federal Test Method Standard 141 (Method 6061) 500-hour salt spray test. 2. Weatherproof design, reinforced, and braced for maximum rigidity. 3. Indoor air section compartment: Insulated with minimum 1/2 inch thick, permanent, fireproof, odorless glass fiber material, and coated on the air side. Aluminum foil face fiberglass insulation shall be used in the furnace compartment. 4. Provide gasketed, removable panels or access doors to service equipment components and connections. 5. Provide with: a. Filter rack for 2-inch filters accessible through hinged access door. b. Non-corrosive drain pan in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62.1. October 2016 23_81_14-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_81_14 (FS-100) c. Minimum 3/4-inch horizontal drain connection. d. Knockouts for utility and control connections. e. Minimum 16 gauge steel roll formed base rail with lifting holes. J. Filter section: 1. Low velocity 2-inch thick pleated filters of commercially available sizes. 2. Filter face velocity: Not to exceed 350 feet per minute nominal flow. 3. Filters for any 1 unit shall be the same size. 4. Manufacturer: The following or equal: a. American Air Filter. K. Motors: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_09 except as modified in this Section. a. Compressor motors: Cooled by refrigerant gas passing through windings and provided with line break thermal and current overload protection. b. Evaporator fan motor, condenser fan motor, and induced draft blower motor: Permanently lubricated ball bearings and inherent automatic reset thermal overload protection. L. Accessories. 1. Hail guard to protect against damage from hail and other flying debris. 2. NOx reduction kit to reduce NOx emission levels to no more than 40 nanograms per joule. 3. Check filter switch with contacts for field installed remote light or alarm. 4. Coil guard grill to protect condenser coil from penetration by large objects. 5. Provide condensate drain per mechanical code as specified in Section 01_41_00. 6. Provide flexible duct connectors for supply and return ducts as specified in Section 23_33_00. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Completely factory test each unit in cooling and heating (if unit is supplied with heating option) modes including economizer operation. Coils and cooling system shall then be evacuated for 30 minutes prior to final charging of unit before shipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and verify that Work is in condition to receive installation specified in this Section. 1. Take measurements and verify dimensions to ascertain fit of installation. 2. Ascertain structural sufficiency to support installation. 3. Ascertain that supports and openings are correctly located; otherwise cut new openings where required. a. Submit details of proposed cutting and patching. 4. Confirm specified thermostat or other controls are compatible with specified equipment. October 2016 23_81_14-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_81_14 (FS-100) B. Examine and verify structural details and sections indicated on the Drawings, ascertain adequacy, and determine conflicts in dimensions and clearances. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before installation, remove dust and debris from equipment and ducts. B. During installation and until equipment is operated, protect equipment and ducts from dust and debris by covering openings with tape or plastic. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Observe applicable installation requirements as specified in Section 46_05_10. B. Anchoring and support: 1. Provide anchoring and support designed in accordance with current engineering practice for equipment and appurtenances by attaching or connecting to supporting members or by providing other supports. C. Adjust alignment of ducts where necessary to resolve conflicts with architectural features or to resolve conflicts with the work of other trades. D. Install and wire unit air conditioners, controls, and thermostats as shown on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Provide local disconnect switches. E. Provide flexible duct and flexible piping connections at connections to unit air conditioners. F. Provide venting in accordance with building code, mechanical code, and plumbing code as specified in Section 01_41_00 and in accordance with NFPA 54. G. Upon completion of installation, clean duct, and debris from ductwork, and equipment. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test equipment and installation to verify tightness, operation, and outdoor sound power at levels. B. Test equipment performance and balance equipment as specified in Section 23_05_93. 3.05 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Air Conditioning Unit Schedule. October 2016 23_81_14-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_81_14 (FS-100) Conditioning Unit Schedule Equip. No. Location Evaporator Condenser Heating Unit Power OSA CFM Other Requirements Total/ Sensible (MBH) Air Fan CFM Fan ESP "WC Inlet DB/WB (F) Outlet DB/WB (F) Inlet Air DB (F) Elec. MBH Volts/ Phases/ MCA See Notes at end of Schedule for Requirements AHU441 Outdoors 47 1200 0.75 86/57 58/54 90 12 208/1/5.0 20 2,9,13,17,20, 22 Notes: 1. Roof Mounted Single Unit Package. 2. Base/floor Mounted Single Unit Package. 3. Roof Mounted Condenser Split System. 4. Base/floor Mounted Condenser Split System. 5. Side/Top Supply Discharge Connection. 6. Side Return Connection. 7. Bottom Supply Discharge Connection. 8. Bottom Return Connection. 9. Provide Electric Heating. 10. Provide Natural Gas Heating. 11. Provide LPG Gas Heating. 12. 120 Volt Control Voltage. 13. 24 Volt Control Voltage. 14. Provide Indoor Air Handling Unit with Direct Drive Fan. 15. Provide Indoor Air Handling Unit with Belt Drive Fan and Adjustable Sheaves. 16. Provide duct mounted Fan Coil Unit in accordance with Section 23_36_00 sized for scheduled conditions. 17. Provide Outside Air Manual Damper. 18. Provide Economizer. 19. Provide blank off plate. 20. Thermostat Provided by Contractor. October 2016 23_83_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_83_01 (FS-100) SECTION 23_83_01 HEATING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Electric unit heaters (EUH). 2. Thermostats for unit heater. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 01_81_00 - Project Design Criteria. 3. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 4. Section 01_81_04 - Wind Design Criteria. 5. Section 23_09_13 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC. 6. Section 23_05_93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 7. Section 26_05_09 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower. 8. Section 46_05_10 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): 1. 302 - Application of Sone Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving Devices. B. American Gas Association (AGA). C. National Electrical Code (NEC). D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (100 V Maximum). F. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. NEMA Type 3R enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Provide seismic and wind supports meeting the seismic design criteria as specified in Section 01_81_02 and wind design criteria for exterior units as specified in Section 01_81_04. October 2016 23_83_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_83_01 (FS-100) 2. Electrical components: UL listed and meeting the design and installation requirements of the NEC. 3. Motors supplied with heating units: As specified in Section 26_05_09. B. Performance requirements are included in the Heating Unit Schedules at the end of this Section. C. Design and supply necessary electrical power and control systems, components, and wiring to make a complete functioning system. 1. Comply with referenced electrical Sections and design to perform system heating functions as specified in Section 23_09_13. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. System layout, mechanical, electrical power, and control diagrams. 2. Materials. 3. Supports and seismic bracing calculations and details. 4. Cut sheets on primary and ancillary equipment. 5. Sound ratings of fans in Sones in accordance with AMCA Publication 302. B. Samples: Manufacturer's standard color chips for cabinets finish. C. Certificates: Successful testing of burners used in gas unit heaters. D. Operation and Maintenance Data. E. Warranties. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide heating units and controls that are listed by UL. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect equipment from dust and atmospheric exposure as recommended by the unit manufacturer. 1. Provide temporary closures for equipment openings designed for airflow. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 01_81_00. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide a warranty to be in force and effect for a period of 1 year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. October 2016 23_83_01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_83_01 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS (EUH) A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal. 1. Reznor, EWHB. 2. Trane, Type UHEC. 3. Markel, Series 5100. 4. Chromalox, Type LUH or VUH. B. Fan type: Aluminum axial flow: 1. Provide fan guards. 2. Dynamically balance. 3. Fan designed for quiet operation. 4. Permanently lubricated ball bearings. 5. Automatic reset thermal overload protection. C. Heating element characteristics: 1. Rated capacity at entering air temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Fin type, steel plated heater elements, with elements brazed to common fins, designed for maximum strength and maximum heat transfer. 3. 3-phase designed for balanced phases. 4. Over temperature cutout with automatic reset. D. Features: 1. Built-in magnetic contactors. 2. Required mounting brackets. 3. Individually adjustable outlet louvers. 4. Cabinet formed of minimum thickness 18-gauge steel with steel stiffeners. 5. Controls: a. Provide thermostat as specified in this Section. E. Finishes: 1. Casing finish backed enamel in manufacturer's standard color. 2.02 THERMOSTATS FOR UNIT HEATERS A. Type: Unit mounted. B. Dial or lever temperature setpoint adjustment with 45 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit setpoint range. C. Setpoint and temperature indication. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and verify that Work is in condition to receive installation specified in this Section. 1. Take measurements and verify dimensions to ascertain fit of installation. 2. Verify structural sufficiency to support installation. October 2016 23_83_01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_83_01 (FS-100) 3. Verify that chassis, shafts, and openings are correctly located. a. Otherwise cut new openings where required. 4. Confirm specified thermostat and other controls are compatible with specified equipment. B. Examine and verify structural details and sections indicated on the Drawings, ascertain adequacy, and determine possible conflicts in dimensions and clearances. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before installation, remove dust and debris from equipment and ducts. B. During installation and until equipment is operated, protect equipment and ducts from dust and debris by covering openings with tape or plastic. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Anchoring and support: Install anchoring for seismic and wind forces to meet the design criteria specified in Sections 01_81_02 and 01_81_04. B. Alignment: Adjust ductwork alignment when necessary to resolve conflicts with architectural and structural features or to resolve conflicts with work of other trades. C. Install and wire unit heaters and thermostats in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Provide disconnect switches at the unit heaters wherever indicated on the Drawings, specified in this Section, scheduled and wherever required by code. D. Adjust heater units with louvers for optimum air circulation. E. Provide gas unit heater venting in accordance with mechanical code and plumbing code as specified in Section 01_41_00 and in accordance with NFPA 54. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test equipment and installation to verify operation is within manufacturer's standards and that noise levels do not exceed levels specified. B. Test equipment performance and balance equipment as specified in Section 23_05_93. 3.05 HEATING UNIT SCHEDULES A. Electric Heating Unit Schedule. . October 2016 23_83_01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/23_83_01 (FS-100) ELECTRIC HEATING UNIT SCHEDULE Equip. No. Location Capacity Fan Additional Requirements (see Schedule Notes) Input kW / V / Ph / MCA Output MBH cfm ESP EUH441 UV Room 3 / 208 / 1 / 16.0 10.2 700 0.05" 3,5,8,11,13,15 EUH442 UV Room 3 / 208 / 1 / 16.0 10.2 700 0.05" 3,5,8,11,13,15 HEATING UNIT SCHEDULE NOTES 1. Steam service 2 Hot water service. 3. Electric service. 4. Thermostat provided by Contractor. 5. Thermostat provided by heater manufacturer. 6. Horizontal mounting. 7. Vertical mounting. 8. Wall mounting. 9. Floor mounting. 10. Recessed mounting. 11. 24-volt control voltage. 12. 120-volt control voltage. 13. Fan direct drive. 14. Fan belt drive. 15. Unit located inside building (indoors). 16. Unit located on roof or building exterior. 17. Natural gas fired. 18. Liquefied petroleum gas fired. 19. Unit flange mounted. 20. Unit slip-in mounted. 21. Provide stainless steel UH exchanger. 22. Provide stainless steel UH gas burner. 23. Side air intake to fan. 24. Side air discharge. 25. Down air discharge from unit. 26. Down air inlet. 27. Provide unit suitable for NEC Group D, Class I, Division 1 hazardous location. END OF SECTION Carollo Engineers assumes no responsibility for CAD drawings or other electronic documents that have been modified or reused for any other purpose or project. Electronic documents are not Contract Documents. These electronic documents are being furnished as a convenience for information and background purposes only, without any guarantee as to hardcopy compatibility. DRAKE WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY UV DISINFECTION SYSTEM PROJECT CAROLLO PROJECT NO. 10188A10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 100% SUBMITTAL VOLUME 2 OF 3 DIVISIONS 26-46 OCTOBER 2016 10822 West Toller Drive, Suite 200 Littleton, Colorado 80127 303-980-8260 Digitally signed by Jason C. Garside Contact Info: Carollo Engineers, Inc. Date: 2016.10.20 10:54:33-06'00' October 2016 TOC-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/00_00_02 (FS-100) CITY OF FORT COLLINS DRAKE WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY UV DISINFECTION SYSTEM PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 OF 3 DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION NO. TITLE 01_11_00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01_14_00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01_29_00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01_29_73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01_29_77 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01_31_19 PROJECT MEETINGS 01_32_34 PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01_33_00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01_35_21 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 01_35_22 SAFETY PLAN 01_35_44 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES 01_35_45 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES: BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES 01_41_00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01_42_13 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 01_45_00 QUALITY CONTROL 01_45_24 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 01_60_00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01_75_17 COMMISSIONING 01_75_19 WATER LEAKAGE TEST FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES 01_77_00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01_78_23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01_78_36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01_81_01 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA 01_81_02 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA 01_81_04 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE SECTION NO. TITLE 03_01_01 PREPACKAGED SMALL AGGREGATE REPAIR CONCRETE 03_01_05 CONCRETE MODIFICATION AND REPAIR 03_11_07 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03_15_00 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES Digitally signed by Jason C. Garside Contact Info: Carollo Engineers, Inc. Date: 2016.10.20 10:55:12-06'00' October 2016 TOC-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/00_00_02 (FS-100) 03_15_14 HYDROPHILIC RUBBER WATERSTOP 03_20_00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03_21_17 ADHESIVE-BONDED REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN CONCRETE 03_30_00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03_35_29 CONCRETE FINISHES 03_60_00 GROUTING 03_63_01 EPOXIES 03_63_02 EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT 03_64_24 EPOXY INJECTION SYSTEM 03_64_25 HYDROPHILIC FOAM POLYURETHANE RESIN INJECTION SYSTEM DIVISION 04 – MASONRY SECTION NO. TITLE 04_05_17 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04_05_18 ADHESIVE BONDING REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN MASONRY 04_05_23 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04_22_00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04_22_16 ANCHORED CMU VENEER DIVISION 05 – METALS SECTION NO. TITLE 05_05_24 MECHANICAL ANCHORING AND FASTENING TO CONCRETE AND MASONRY 05_12_00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05_14_05 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM 05_21_19 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05_31_00 STEEL DECKING 05_50_00 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION NO. TITLE 06_80_17 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION NO. TITLE 07_11_00 DAMPPROOFING 07_22_00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07_26_00 VAPOR RETARDERS 07_41_15 METAL SOFFITS 07_51_20 ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT October 2016 TOC-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/00_00_02 (FS-100) 07_60_00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07_61_13 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07_84_14 FIBROUS FIRE SAFING 07_90_00 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS SECTION NO. TITLE 08_11_13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08_71_00 DOOR HARDWARE DIVISION 09 – FINISHES SECTION NO. TITLE 09_91_00 PAINTING 09_96_01 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING SECTION NO. TITLE 22_42_01 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) SECTION NO. TITLE 23_05_93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23_07_13 DUCTWORK INSULATION 23_09_13 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC 23_17_43 ELECTRIC SNOW MELT SYSTEM - GENERAL 23_31_13 METAL DUCTS 23_33_00 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23_34_01 FANS 23_37_24 LOUVERS 23_81_14 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23_83_01 HEATING UNITS VOLUME 2 OF 3 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION NO. TITLE 26_05_00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26_05_09 LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500 HORSEPOWER 26_05_18 600-VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES 26_05_20 FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND APPURTENANCES 26_05_21 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS 26_05_26 GROUNDING AND BONDING 26_05_29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26_05_33 CONDUITS October 2016 TOC-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/00_00_02 (FS-100) 26_05_34 BOXES 26_05_35 WIREWAY 26_05_38 ALUMINUM CABLE TRAYS 26_05_44 DUCT BANKS 26_05_53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26_06_01 CONDUIT SCHEDULE 26_08_50 FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS 26_09_13 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING 26_12_20 LIQUID FILLED PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS 26_22_14 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26_24_14 GROUP-MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHBOARDS 26_24_16 PANELBOARDS 26_27_26 WIRING DEVICES 26_28_01 LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26_28_17 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26_29_05 MOTOR STARTERS 26_36_24 TRANSFER SWITCHES 26_41_01 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26_43_14 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26_50_10 LIGHTING: LED LUMINAIRES DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK SECTION NO. TITLE 31_00_00 EARTHWORK 31_05_15 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK 31_23_17 TRENCHING 31_23_19 DEWATERING 31_23_24 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM) 31_32_18.02 FILTER FABRIC 31_63_30 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS SECTION NO. TITLE 32_12_16 ASPHALT PAVING 32_13_13 CONCRETE PAVING/FLATWORK DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES SECTION NO. TITLE 33_05_01 SANITARY SEWER 33_05_02 WATERLINES 33_05_03 DISINFECTION 33_39_13 MANHOLES AND COVERS 33_71_21 PRECAST ELECTRICAL HANDHOLES AND ELECTRICAL MANHOLES October 2016 TOC-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/00_00_02 (FS-100) DIVISION 10 – PROCESS INTEGRATION SECTION NO. TITLE 40_05_00.01 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR GENERAL PIPING 40_05_00.03 PIPE IDENTIFICATION 40_05_00.09 PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING 40_05_06.03 PIPE COUPLINGS 40_05_06.55 PIPING INSULATION 40_05_07.01 PIPE SUPPORTS 40_05_07.03 PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM 40_05_17.05 COPPER WATER TUBE: SEAMLESS, ASTM B88 40_05_17.07 COPPER TUBE: SEAMLESS, ASTM B280 40_05_17.09 COPPER PIPE: ASTM B302 40_05_19.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE: AWWA C151 40_05_19.06 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE: ASTM A74 40_05_31.01 PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING 40_05_31.16 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 40_05_31.17 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: SCHEDULE TYPE 40_05_51.01 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR VALVES 40_05_52 SPECIALTY VALVES 40_05_57.13 MANUAL ACTUATORS 40_05_57.23 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 40_05_59.34 HEAVY-DUTY FABRICATED STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES 40_05_61 PLUG VALVES 40_05_63 BALL VALVES 40_05_65.24 CHECK VALVES 40_05_67.37 PRESSURE REDUCING AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES 40_61_00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION 40_67_01 CONTROL SYSTEMS: PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS 40_72_13 LEVEL MEASUREMENT: ULTRASONIC 40_75_29 ANALYZERS: AMMONIA 40_75_53 ANALYZERS: TURBIDITY 40_80_01 TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND COMMISSIONING DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT SECTION NO. TITLE 46_05_10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 46_05_11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 46_05_94 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING October 2016 26_05_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General requirements applicable to all Electrical Work. 2. General requirements for electrical submittals. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_14_00 - Work Restrictions. 2. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 3. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 4. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 5. Section 01_60_00 - Product Requirements. 6. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 7. Section 01_77_00 - Closeout Procedures. 8. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data 9. Section 01_81_01 - Project Design Criteria. 10. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 11. Section 01_81_04 - Wind Design Criteria. 12. Section 26_05_33 - Conduits. 13. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 14. Section 26_08_50 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. C. Interfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components: 1. The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary information furnished by various equipment manufacturers which identify a minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to, but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with mechanical systems. 2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished, and include all costs to add any additional conduit, wiring, terminals, or other electrical hardware to the Work, which may be necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished: a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer’s wiring requirements. 3. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure that all items related to the electrical power and control systems are completely accounted for. Include any such items that appear on the Drawings or in the Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work: a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer conflict to the Engineer as soon as possible for resolution. October 2016 26_05_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) D. All electrical equipment and systems for the entire Project must comply with the requirements of the Electrical Specifications, whether referenced in the individual Equipment Specifications or not: 1. The requirements of the Electrical Specifications apply to all Electrical Work specified in other sections. 2. Inform all vendors supplying electrical equipment or systems of the requirements of the Electrical Specifications. 3. The Owner is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of the Contractor to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the Electrical Specifications requirements. E. Contract Documents: 1. General: a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used together in order to fully describe the Work. 2. Specifications: a. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract Documents govern the Work. b. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements. 3. Contract Drawings: a. The Electrical Drawings show desired locations, arrangements, and components of the Electrical Work in a diagrammatic manner. b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc. are approximate only; exercise professional judgment in executing the Work to ensure the best possible installation: 1) The equipment locations and dimensions indicated on the Drawings are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine the proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all electrical equipment is compatible with other equipment and space requirements. Make changes required to accommodate differences in equipment dimensions. 2) The Contractor has the freedom to select any of the named manufacturers identified in the individual specification sections; however, the Engineer has designed the spatial equipment layout based upon a single manufacturer and has not confirmed that every named manufacturer’s equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the equipment being furnished fits within the defined space. c. Installation details: 1) The Contract Drawings include typical installation details the Contractor is to use to complete the Electrical Work. For cases where a typical detail does not apply, develop installation details that may be necessary for completing the Work, and submit these details for review by the Engineer. 2) Not all typical installation details are referenced within the Drawing set. Apply and use typical details where appropriate. October 2016 26_05_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) 1.02 REFERENCES A. Code compliance: 1. As specified in Section 01_41_00. 2. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced publications in effect at the time of the bid governs. 3. The standards listed are hereby incorporated into this Section. a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1) ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. c. ASTM International (ASTM). d. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES). Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). e. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). f. International Code Council (ICC). 1) International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES). a) AC 156 – Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Certification by Shake Table Testing of Non-Structural Components (ICC-ES AC 156). g. International Society of Automation (ISA). h. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1) 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). i. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1) 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). j. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). k. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set forth by: 1. IEEE. 2. NETA. 3. IES. 4. ISA. 5. NEC. 6. NEMA. 7. NFPA. 8. NIST. B. Specific definitions: 1. FAT: Factory acceptance test. 2. LCP: Local control panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an HMI, pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc. and does not contain a PLC or RIO. 3. PLC Cabinet: An enclosure containing any of the following devices: PLC, RTU, or RIO. 4. PCIS: Process control and instrumentation system. 5. Space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device but is capable of accepting a device with no modifications to the equipment, i.e., provide all standoffs, bus, and hardware, as part of the space. October 2016 26_05_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) 6. Spare: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that physically contains a device with no load connections to be made. 7. VCP: Vendor control panel: Control panels that are furnished with particular equipment by a vendor other than the Contractor or Fort Collins. These panels may contain PLCs, RIO, OIT, HMI, etc. 8. Unequipped space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device, standoff, bus, hardware, or other equipment. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General requirements: 1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and completing the Electrical Work indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications and reasonably inferable there from: a. The Electrical Drawings are schematic in nature; use the Structural, Architectural, Mechanical, and Civil Drawings for all dimensions and scaling purposes. 2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power, instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to final utilization equipment, including all connections, testing, calibration of equipment furnished by others as well as equipment furnished by the Contractor, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are necessary for successful operation. 3. Provide all Electrical Work, including conduit, field wiring, and connections by the electrical subcontractor under the provisions of the Electrical Specifications for all aspects of the Work. 4. Coordinate all aspects of the Work with the electrical subcontractor and other subcontractors before bidding in order to ensure that all costs associated with a complete installation are included. The Owner is not responsible for any change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the Contractor, the electrical subcontractor, the other subcontractors, or suppliers. 5. Demolition: a. Where demolition is specified or indicated on the Drawings, disconnect all associated electrical equipment and render the equipment safe. b. Remove and dispose of all conduit, wire, electrical equipment, controls, etc. associated with the items and/or areas to be demolished as indicated on the Drawings unless otherwise indicated. c. Salvage electrical equipment as specified in Section 01_35_21. d. For each piece of equipment to be removed, remove all ancillary components (e.g. instruments, solenoid valves, disconnect switches, etc.). e. Conduit: 1) Where conduit removal, other than associated with equipment to be removed, is indicated on the Drawings: a) Remove exposed conduit to the point of encasement or burial. b) Cut conduit flush and plug or cap encased or buried conduit. 2) Where conduits are to remain in place and removal is not indicated on the Drawings: a) Cap conduit open ends. b) Re-label empty conduits as spare. October 2016 26_05_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) f. Remove all wire back to the source for all conduits to be removed or abandoned in place. g. Provide new nameplates for modified electrical distribution equipment, motor control centers etc. to identify equipment and circuits that are no longer used as spares. h. Provide new typewritten schedules for all modified panelboards. 6. Portions of this Project involve installation in existing facilities and interfaces to existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment: a. Perform and document comprehensive and detailed field investigations of existing conditions (circuits, power systems, controls, equipment, etc.) before starting any Work. Determine all information necessary to document, interface with, modify, upgrade, or replace existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment. b. Provide and document interface with, modifications to, upgrades, or replacement of existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment. 7. Provide all trenching, forming, rebar, concrete, back filling, hard surface removal and replacement, for all items associated with the Electrical Work and installation: a. As specified in the Contract Documents. B. New system: 1. Replace switchboard and step-down transformer SSB1208 and HVT1208. 2. New UV process to include vendor provided equipment, UV isolation transformers, automatic transfer switch, distribution panel, lighting panel, and sample station. a. Analyzers for the sample station shall be relocated from sample building as indication in the drawings. 3. Install electrical infrastructure for security, PA, and phone in the UV Building. Wire and components to be installed by Owner at later date. 4. Coordinate disconnecting/demolition existing equipment at the Sample Building with Owner. C. Operating facility: 1. The Drake Water Reclamation Facility is an operating facility. Portions of this facility must remain fully functional throughout the entire construction period. In consideration of this requirement, comply with the following guidelines: a. All outages must be of minimal duration and fully coordinated and agreed to by the Owner. Adjust the construction schedule to meet the requirements of the Owner. All changes in schedule and any needs to reschedule are included in the Work. b. As weather and water demand conditions dictate, re-adjust the construction schedule to meet the demands placed upon Owner by its users. c. Coordinate the construction and power renovation, bear all costs, so that all existing facilities can continue operation throughout construction. 2. According to individual circumstances and in compliance with the Drawings, extend or replace conduit and cable connections from existing locations. 3. The standards of documentation, instrument tagging, cable and conductor ferruling, terminal identification and labeling that apply to the new installation apply equally to the existing installation which forms part of the modified system. October 2016 26_05_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01_33_00 and this Section. B. General: 1. Instruct all equipment suppliers of submittals and operation and maintenance manuals of the requirements in this Section. 2. Furnish the submittals required by each section in the Electrical Specifications. 3. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme specified in Section 26_05_03 throughout the Project: a. Uniquely number each wire. b. Wire numbers must appear on all Equipment Drawings. 4. Use equipment and instrument tags, as indicated on the Drawings, for all submittals. C. Seismic requirements: 1. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads based on the seismic design criteria in Section 01_81_02. D. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. As specified in Section 01_78_23. 2. Furnish the Engineer with a complete set of written operation and maintenance manuals 8 weeks before Functional Acceptance Testing. E. Roof penetrations: 1. Submit details of all portions of the electrical installation that penetrate the roof. Include details showing support of the penetrating component, and the sealing means to be utilized. F. Record Documents: 1. Furnish as specified in Section 01_77_00. 2. Provide Record Documents of all Electrical Drawings. 3. Record Drawing requirements: a. Update Record Drawings weekly. b. Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly progress payments. c. Submit Record Drawings upon completion of the Work for final review. d. Clearly and neatly show all changes including the following: 1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures encountered or uncovered during construction. 4. Shop drawings: a. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the final as-built configuration of the systems: 1) Provide as-built shop drawings for all electrical equipment on 11-inch by 17-inch paper. a) Size all drawings to be readable and legible on 11x17-inch media. G. Test reports: 1. As specified in Section 01_33_00. 2. Additional requirements for field acceptance test reports are specified in Sections 01_75_17 and 26_08_50. October 2016 26_05_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) H. Calculations: 1. Where required by specific Electrical Specifications: a. Because these calculations are being provided by a registered professional engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 01_60_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Site conditions: 1. Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all equipment, raceways, and any other components required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for the Site as specified in the General Requirements and below. 2. Seismic load resistance: a. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01_81_02. 3. Wind load resistance: a. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site wind loads as specified in Section 01_81_04. 4. Altitude, temperature and humidity: a. As specified in Section 01_81_01. b. Provide all electrical components and equipment fully rated for continuous operation at this altitude, with no additional derating factors applied. c. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all equipment in non-conditioned spaces subject to these ambient temperatures, with a band of 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature, as determined by the equipment manufacturer’s guidelines: 1) Provide all power conduits wiring for these devices (e.g. heaters, fans, etc.) whether indicated on the Drawings or not. 5. Outdoor installations: a. Provide electrical, instrumentation and control equipment suitable for operation in the ambient conditions where the equipment is located. b. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices incorporated into and included with electrical equipment, instrumentation and control panels to maintain the enclosures within the rated environmental operating ranges as specified in this Section for the equipment: 1) Provide all wiring necessary to power these devices. October 2016 26_05_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) B. Provide enclosures for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment, regardless of supplier or subcontractor furnishing the equipment, that meet the requirements outlined in NEMA Standard 250 for the following types of enclosures: 1. NEMA Type 1: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection from accidental contact with energized parts or equipment. 2. NEMA Type 4: Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation, and freezing. 3. NEMA Type 4X: Made from corrosion resistant materials (fiberglass reinforced plastic, 316 stainless steel or equal) and are intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing, and corrosion. 4. NEMA Type 12: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection from dust, falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids. 5. NEMA Type 6: Rated for submergence. 6. NEMA Type 6P: Rated for prolonged submergence. C. Plant area Electrical Work requirements: 1. Provide all Electrical Work in accordance with the following table, unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings: PLANT AREA NEMA ENCLOSURE TYPE EXPOSED CONDUIT TYPE ENVIRONMENT W = WET D = DAMP C = CLEAN/DRY X = CORROSIVE H = HAZARDOUS SUPPORT MATERIALS Outdoors NEMA 4X SS RAC W SS UV Building Process Area NEMA 4 GRC D Galv. Steel UV Building Electrical Room NEMA 1 GRC C Galv. Steel NPT Tunnel NEMA 4 GRC D Galv. Steel 2. Modify exposed conduit runs as specified in Section 26_05_33. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING A. General: 1. As specified in Sections 01_31_19 and 01_75_17. 2. Testing requirements are specified in Section 01_75_17, 26_08_50 and other sections. 3. Commissioning and Process Start-up requirements as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.11 WARRANTY 1. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Electrical Specifications. October 2016 26_05_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design requirements: 1. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain compliance acceptance from the Engineer. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE A. Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by any sections of the Specifications including any calibrations, final adjustments, component replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment or systems in service. B. Furnish all spare parts as required by other sections of the Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide similar items of same manufacturer throughout the electrical and instrumentation portion of the Project. B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual Electrical Specifications. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications. B. Stainless steel: 1. Where stainless steel is indicated or used for any portion of the Electrical Work, provide a non-magnetic, corrosion-resistant alloy, ANSI Type 316, satin finish. 2. Provide exposed screws of the same alloys. 3. Provide finished material free of any burrs or sharp edges. 4. Use only stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas that are or could be in contact with corrosive chemicals. 5. Use stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all chemical areas or areas requiring NEMA Type 4X construction. 6. Do not use stainless steel in any area containing chlorine, gas or solution, chlorine products or ferric chloride. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. It is the electrical subcontractor's responsibility to be fully familiar with the existing conditions and local requirements and regulations. B. Review the site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all wiring and cables. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Equipment locations shown on Electrical Drawings may change due to variations in equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction: 1. Verify all dimensions indicated on the Drawings: a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and levels. 2. Review all Contract Documents and approved equipment shop drawings and coordinate Work as necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes. 3. Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by the Owner or Engineer. 4. Provide a complete electrical system: a. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to provide a complete and operating electrical system. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. October 2016 26_05_00-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) C. Cutting and patching: 1. Perform all cutting, patching, channeling, core drilling, and fitting required for the Electrical Work, except as otherwise directed: a. Secure the permission of the Engineer before performing any operation likely to affect the strength of a structural member such as drilling, cutting or piercing: 1) Before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface, ensure that no penetration of any other systems will be made: a) Verify that area is clear and free of conduits, cables, piping, ductwork, post-tensioning cables, etc. b) Use tone-locate system or X-ray to ensure that area is clear of obstructions. b. Review the complete Drawing set to ensure that there are no conflicts or coordination problems before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface. 2. Perform all patching to the same quality and appearance as the original work. Employ the proper tradesmen to secure the desired results. Seal around all conduits, wires, and cables penetrating walls, ceilings, and floors in all locations with a fire stop material, typically: a. 3M CP 25WB+ Caulk. b. 3M Fire Barrier Putty. 3. Use the installation details indicated on the Drawings as a guide for acceptable sealing methods. D. Install all conduits and equipment in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and to preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear: 1. Install all conduits and equipment in accordance with working space requirements in accordance with the NEC. a. This includes any panel, disconnect switch or other equipment that can be energized while open exposing live parts regardless of whether it is likely to require examination or has serviceable parts. 2. Where the Drawings do not show dimensions for locating equipment, install equipment in the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. a. Adjust equipment locations as necessary to avoid any obstruction or interferences. 3. Where an obstruction interferes with equipment operation or safe access, relocate the equipment. 4. Where the Drawings do not indicate the exact mounting and/or supporting method to be used, use materials and methods similar to the mounting details indicated on the Drawings. E. Roof penetrations: 1. Seal conduit penetrations in accordance with roofing manufacturer’s instructions. F. Terminations: 1. Provide and terminate all conductors required to interconnect power, controls, instruments, panels, and all other equipment. G. Miscellaneous installation requirements: 1. In case of interference between electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings and the other equipment, notify the Engineer. October 2016 26_05_00-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) 2. Location of manholes and pullboxes indicated on the Drawings are approximate. Coordinate exact location of manholes and pullboxes with Mechanical and Civil Work. 3. Provide additional manholes or pullboxes to those shown where they are required to make a workable installation. 4. Circuits of different service voltage: a. Voltage and service levels: 1) Medium voltage: greater than 1.0 kV. 2) Low voltage: 120 V to 480 V. 3) Instrumentation: Less than 50 VDC. H. Labeling: 1. Provide all nameplates and labels as specified in Sections 26_05_03 and 26_05_74. I. Equipment tie-downs: 1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply with seismic and wind bracing criteria, which apply to the Site. 2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PLCs, etc., must be permanently mounted and tied down to structures in accordance with the Project seismic criteria. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Owner training: 1. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and in this Section. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Allow for inspection of electrical system installation as specified in Section 01_45_00. 2. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities. 3. Engineer inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage. b. Inspect installation for compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around equipment. d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage, and assembly. e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design requirements. f. Inspect raceway installation for quality workmanship and adequate support. g. Inspect cable terminations. October 2016 26_05_00-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_00 (FS-100) 4. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection or testing requirements specified in Section 26_08_50. B. Field acceptance testing (Functional Testing): 1. Notify the Engineer when the Electrical Work is ready for field acceptance testing. 2. Perform the field acceptance tests as specified in Section 26_08_50. 3. Record results of the required tests along with the date of test: a. Use conduit identification numbers to indicate portion of circuit tested. C. Workmanship: 1. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations neat, clean, and organized: a. Neatly coil and label spare wiring lengths. b. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive used as well as spare wire and cable lengths, as determined by the Engineer. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 01_77_00. B. Remove all foreign material and restore all damaged finishes to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner. C. Clean and vacuum all enclosures to remove all metal filings, surplus insulation and any visible dirt, dust or other matter before energization of the equipment or system start-up: 1. Use of compressors or air blowers for cleaning is not acceptable. D. Clean and re-lamp all new and existing luminaries that were used in the areas affected by the construction, and return all used lamps to the Owner. E. As specified in other sections of the Contract Documents. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect all Work from damage or degradation until Substantial Completion. B. Maintain all surfaces to be painted in a clean and smooth condition. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_09-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_09 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_09 LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500 HORSEPOWER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Low voltage motors up to 500 horsepower. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_08_50 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): 1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. 670 - Vibration, Axial Position, and Bearing Temperature Monitoring Systems. D. ASTM International (ASTM). 1. B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. E. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. 43 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery. 2. 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 3. 114 - Standard Test Procedure for Single-Phase Induction Motors. 4. 303 - Recommended Practice for Auxiliary Devices for Rotating Electrical Machines in Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2 Locations. 5. 841 - Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry-Premium-Efficiency, Severe Duty, Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - Up to and Including 370 kW (500 hp). 6. 1349 - Guide for Application of Electric Motors in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. F. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): 1. MG-1 - Motors and Generators. 2. MG-2 - Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Use of Electric Motors and Generators. October 2016 26_05_09-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_09 (FS-100) G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 674 - Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install electric motors and accessories as specified in this Section and the Sections specifying driven equipment to provide a complete and operable installation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Submit completed motor data sheets for each motor supplied: 1. Conform to data sheet in the appendix of this Section. 2. Manufacturer’s or other data sheets are not acceptable. C. Product data: 1. Descriptive bulletins. 2. Machine tag and loop number as indicated on the Drawings and in the specification section number of the driven machine. 3. Complete electrical data. 4. Torque, current, and power factor vs. speed curves: a. At 100 percent rated voltage for all full voltage started and VFD driven motors. 5. Accessories data: a. Power factor correction capacitors: 1) Size in KVAR, for all motors not connected to variable frequency drives. b. Motor winding heaters: 1) Voltage. 2) Watts. c. Winding temperature detectors: 1) Type. 2) Rating. d. Moisture detectors. 6. Mechanical data: a. Bearing design and bearing life calculations. b. Resonant frequencies for all VFD-driven motors 50 horsepower or greater. D. Shop drawings: 1. Motor weight. 2. Frame size. 3. Conduit box(es), size(s), and location(s). 4. Outline drawings with dimensions. 5. Installation details for the project seismic criteria. October 2016 26_05_09-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_09 (FS-100) E. Test reports: 1. Factory test reports with test reference standard identified. F. Certification: 1. When motors are driven by variable speed drive systems, submit certification that selected motor: a. Is capable of satisfactory performance under the intended load. b. Meets the requirements of the latest edition of NEMA MG-1 Part 31. G. Calculations: 1. Where site conditions specified in Section 26_05_00 exceed manufacturer’s ratings, provide derating calculations for each motor. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. US Motors. 2. General Electric. 3. Reliance. 4. Toshiba. 5. Baldor. October 2016 26_05_09-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_09 (FS-100) 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. 3-phase induction motors - general: 1. Voltage: a. All motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be rated 460 V, 3 phase unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Dual voltage motors rated 230/460 V, 3 phase are acceptable provided all leads are brought to the conduit box. 2. Motors driving identical machines shall be identical. 3. All motors greater than 1 hp and up to 500 hp shall meet the “NEMA Premium Efficiency” percent listed in NEMA MG-1. 4. Horsepower as indicated on the Drawings: a. Horsepower ratings indicated on the Drawings are based on vendor’s estimates. Provide motors sized for the load of the actual equipment furnished without operating in the service factor. 5. Service factor: a. 1.15 service factor on sine wave power. b. 1.0 when driven by VFD. 6. Torque: a. Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed at voltage 10 percent less than motor nameplate rating. b. When started using reduced voltage starters: 1) Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed. c. NEMA Design B except where driven load characteristics require other than normal starting torque: 1) In no case shall starting torque or breakdown torque be less than the values specified in NEMA MG-1. 7. Enclosures: a. As specified in the individual equipment Specifications or in this Section. b. Totally enclosed fan cooled: 1) Cast iron conduit box. 2) Tapped drain holes with Type 316 stainless steel plugs for frames 286 and smaller, and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324 and larger. c. Explosion-proof: 1) Tapped drain holes with corrosion resistant plugs for frames 286 and smaller and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324 and larger. d. Lifting devices: All motors weighing 265 pounds (120 kilograms) or more shall have suitable lifting devices for installation and removal. 8. Manufactured with cast iron frames in accordance with NEMA MG-1 or manufacturer’s standard material for the specified rating. October 2016 26_05_09-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_09 (FS-100) 9. Nameplates: a. Provide all motors with a permanent, stainless steel nameplate indelibly stamped or engraved with: 1) NEMA standard motor data. a) Indicate compliance with NEMA MG-1 Part 31 for inverter duty motors. 2) AFBMA bearing numbers and lubrication instructions. 10. Hardware: a. Type 316 stainless steel. 11. Conduit boxes: a. Cast iron or stamped steel. b. Split from top to bottom. c. Provide gaskets at the following interfaces: 1) Frames and conduit boxes. 2) Conduit boxes and box covers. d. Rotatable through 360 degrees in 90-degree increments. 1) Where available based on the size of the conduit box. e. Exceeding the dimensions defined in NEMA MG-1. f. Provide grounding lugs inside conduit boxes for motor frame grounding. 12. Motor bearings: a. Antifriction. b. Regreasable and initially filled with grease for horizontal motors, vertical motors per manufacturer’s standard design. c. Bearings and lubrication suitable for ambient temperature and temperature rise. d. Suitable for intended application and have ABMA L-10 rating life of 60,000 hours or more. e. Fit bearings with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings using extension tubes where necessary. f. Where specified in the equipment Specifications, provide split-sleeve type hydrodynamic radial bearings. Provide a bearing isolator to protect bearings from contaminants. 13. Insulation systems: a. Motors installed in ambient temperatures 40 degrees Celsius or less: 1) Provide Class F insulation. 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motor will be installed. b. Motors installed in ambient temperatures between 40 degrees Celsius and 50 degrees Celsius: 1) Provide Class F insulation. 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 50 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motor will be installed. c. Motors installed in ambient temperatures between 50 degrees Celsius and 65 degrees Celsius: 1) Provide Class H insulation. 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class F insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 65 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motors will be installed. October 2016 26_05_09-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_09 (FS-100) 14. Motor leads: a. Insulated leads with non-wicking, non-hydroscopic material. Class F insulation. 15. Noise: a. Maximum operating noise level in accordance with NEMA MG-1. B. Submersible motors: 1. Enclosures: a. Totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) watertight casing. b. Inner and outer shaft seals separated by an oil chamber. 2. Cooling: a. Suitable for continuous operation in totally, partially or nonsubmerged condition without overheating. b. Convection cooling by the surrounding environment or pump cooling by circulating a portion of the pumped media through a cooling water jacket as recommended by the manufacturer based on horsepower and application. 3. Electrical cables: a. Wire unit without splices. Coordinate with Contractor to ensure cables of adequate length. b. Epoxy encapsulated cable entry into terminal box. 4. Insulation: a. Sealed moisture resistant windings. b. Class H. 5. Motor protection: a. Provide temperature detection in motor windings. b. Provide moisture detection in motor housing. c. Other detection and protection functions specified in the in the driven equipment Section. C. Motors driven by variable frequency drives: 1. Compatible with the variable frequency drives specified. 2. Inverter duty rated and labeled. 3. Meet the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31. 4. Winding insulation meets the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31.4.4.2. 5. Capable of running continuously at 1/10th of full speed, with no harmful effects or overheating. 6. Shaft grounding ring: a. Provide a shaft grounding ring for each VFD driven motor. b. Aluminum frame and internal components. c. Conductive microfiber brushes. d. Maintenance free design. e. Aegis Bearing Protection ring as manufactured by Electro Static Technology or equal. 7. On motors over 100 HP, provide insulated bearings on bearings on both ends of the motor or on the end opposite of the shaft ground ring as recommended by the motor manufacturer. D. Single phase motors: 1. Capacitor start type rated for operation at 115 volts, 60 hertz, unless otherwise specified or as indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 26_05_09-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_09 (FS-100) 2. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors manufactured in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 3. Ball bearings: Sealed. 4. 1/2 horsepower or less fan motors: a. Split-phase or shaded pole type when standard for the equipment. b. Open type when suitably protected from moisture, dripping water, and lint accumulation. 5. Wound rotor or commutator type single-phase motors only when their specific characteristics are necessary for application and their use is acceptable to the Engineer. 6. Integral overload protection. 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Motor winding heaters: 1. Provide all 3 phase motors with belted or cartridge space heaters mounted within the motor enclosure. 2. Space heater rating shall be 120 volts, single-phase, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Power leads for heaters wired into conduit box. 4. Installed within motor enclosure adjacent to core iron. B. Winding temperature detectors: 1. Temperature switches with normally closed contacts as indicated on the Drawings. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install shaft grounding ring on VFD driven motors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_09-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_09 (FS-100) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING AND PROCESS START-UP A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Factory testing: 1. Motors less than 250 horsepower: a. Perform manufacturer’s standard production tests including but not limited to: 1) No load current. 2) High potential test. 3) Winding resistance. b. Furnish copies of standard test reports on prototype or identical units. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Before start-up, perform insulation resistance test on each motor furnished or installed on this project: 1. Windings energized to 1,000 volts DC for 1 minute. 2. Resistance measured at the end of the test, recorded, and submitted to the Engineer for review. 3. Inform the Engineer of any unusual or unacceptable test results. 4. This test is in addition to the acceptance tests in Section 26_08_50. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_09-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_09 (FS-100) MOTOR DATA SHEET MOTOR/ EQUIPMENT TAG MOTOR NUMBER SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA MANUFACTURER MODEL/SERIES MODEL NO. FRAME ENCLOSURE NEMA DESIGN HP SERVICE FACTOR RPM INSULATION CLASS VOLTS FULL LOAD AMPS AMBIENT TEMP PHASE NO LOAD AMPS DESIGN TEMP HERTZ LOCK ROTOR AMPS INRUSH CODE LETTER 100% LOAD 75% LOAD 50% LOAD GUARANTEED MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES: GUARANTEED MINIMUM POWER FACTOR: MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR: KVAR ACCESSORIES MOTOR WINDING HEATER VOLTS WATTS WINDING THERMAL PROTECTION WINDING TEMP SWITCHES (YES/NO) RTD: TYPE QUANTITY PER PHASE # OF WIRES NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL TEMP COEFFICIENT RECOMMENDED ALARM DEGREES CELSIUS RECOMMENDED TRIP DEGREES CELSIUS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS INVERTER DUTY* (YES/NO) PART WINDING (YES/NO) WYE - DELTA (YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 1 WINDING (YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 2 WINDING (YES/NO) AREA CLASSIFICATION: CLASS DIVISION GROUP TEMP CODE * Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31. October 2016 26_05_18-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_18 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_18 600-VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 600 volt class or less wire and cable. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_26 - Grounding and Bonding. 5. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay–Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. C. CSA International (CSA). D. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658-1999 - Standard for Nonshielded Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy. 2. NEMA WC 57/ICEA S-73-532 - Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and Instrumentation Cables. E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. 3. 101 - Life Safety Code. F. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Association (TIA/EIA): 1. 568-C.2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard. G. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., (UL): 1. 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. 1277 - Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members. 3. 1424 - Standard for Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits. 4. 1569 - Standard for Metal-Clad Cables. October 2016 26_05_18-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_18 (FS-100) 5. 2196 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistive Cables. 6. 2225 - Standard for Cables and Cable-Fittings For Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. ASTM. 2. ICEA. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install the complete wire and cable system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer of wire and cable. 2. Insulation: a. Type. b. Voltage class. 3. American wire gauge (AWG) size. 4. Conductor material. 5. Pulling compounds. C. Shop drawings: 1. Show splice locations. a. For each proposed splice location provide written justification describing why the splice is necessary. D. Test reports: 1. Submit test reports for meg-ohm tests. E. Calculations: 1. Submit cable pulling calculations to the Engineer for review and comment for all cables that will be installed using mechanical pulling equipment. Show that the maximum cable tension and sidewall pressure will not exceed manufacturer recommended values: a. Provide a table showing the manufacturer’s recommended maximum cable tension and sidewall pressure for each cable type and size included in the calculations. b. Submit the calculations to the Engineer a minimum of 2 weeks before conduit installation. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled. October 2016 26_05_18-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_18 (FS-100) 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS (NOT USED) 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER`S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. 600 volt class wire and cable: a. General Cable. b. Okonite Company. c. Southwire Company. 2. Instrumentation class wire and cable: a. Alpha Wire Company. b. Belden CDT. c. General Cable BICC Brand. d. Okonite Company. e. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation. 3. Network cables: a. Belden CDT. b. General Cable. c. CommScope. 4. Tray cables: a. General Cable, BICC Brand. b. Southwire Company. c. Okonite. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Conductors: 1. Copper in accordance with ASTM B3. October 2016 26_05_18-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_18 (FS-100) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of delivery to the Site. 2. Permanently mark each wire and cable with the following at 24-inch intervals: a. AWG size. b. Voltage rating. c. Insulation type. d. UL symbol. e. Month and year of manufacture. f. Manufacturer's name. 3. Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 26_05_53: a. Use integral color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller wire. b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG. B. 600 volt class wire and cable: 1. Provide AWG or kcmil sizes as indicated on the Drawings or in the Conduit Schedules: a. When not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows: 1) In accordance with the NEC: a) Use 75 degree Celsius ampacity ratings. b) Ampacity rating after all derating factors, equal to or greater than rating of the overcurrent device. 2) Provide Number 12 AWG minimum for power conductors. 3) Provide Number 14 AWG minimum for control conductors. 2. Provide Class B stranding in accordance with ASTM B8: a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required. 3. Insulation: a. THWN-2 for 14 AWG though 1 AWG when installed in above ground installations. b. XHHW-2 for 1/0 and larger, and for all cables routing below grade, in floor slabs, or where water is likely to enter into conduit system. c. 90 degrees Celsius rating. 4. Multiconductor cables: a. Number and size of conductors as indicated on the Drawings or in the Conduit Schedules. b. Individual conductors with XHHW-2 insulation. c. Overall PVC jacket. d. Tray cable rated. e. Color-coding for control wire in accordance with ICEA Method 1, E-2 in accordance with NEMA WC 57/ICEA S-73-532. f. Ground conductor: Insulated, green: 1) Sized in accordance with NEC. C. Instrumentation class cable: 1. Type TC. 2. Suitable for use in wet locations. 3. Voltage rating: 600 volts. 4. Temperature rating: a. 90 degrees Celsius rating in dry locations. b. 75 degrees Celsius rating in wet locations. October 2016 26_05_18-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_18 (FS-100) 5. Conductors: a. Insulation: 1) Flame-retardant PVC, 15 mils nominal thickness, with nylon jacket 4 mils nominal thickness. b. Number 16 AWG stranded and tinned. c. Color code: 1) Pair: Black and white. 2) Triad: Black, white and red. 3) Multiple pairs or triads: a) Color-coded and numbered. 6. Drain wire: a. 18 AWG. b. Stranded, tinned. 7. Jacket: a. Flame retardant, moisture and sunlight resistant PVC. b. Ripcord laid longitudinally under jacket to facilitate removal. 8. Shielding: a. Individual pair/triad: 1) Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil/polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. b. Multiple pair or triad shielding: 1) Group shield: Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil/polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 2) Completely isolate group shields from each other. 3) Cable shield: 2.35 mils double-faced aluminum and synthetic polymer backed tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. c. All shielding to be in contact with the drain wire. D. Network cables: 1. Category 6: a. General: 1) Provide all Cat 6 cables meeting the standards set by TIA/EIA-568- C.2. b. Conductors: 1) 24 AWG solid bare copper conductors. c. Insulation: 1) Polyolefin. 2) 4 non-bonded twisted pair cables formed into a cable core. d. Color code: 1) Pair 1: White/blue stripe and blue. 2) Pair 2: White/orange stripe and orange. 3) Pair 3: White/green stripe and green. 4) Pair 4: White/brown stripe and brown. e. Outer jacket: 1) PVC with ripcord. f. Electrical characteristics: 1) Frequency range: 0.772-100 MHz. 2) Attenuation: 32.1 dB/100 m. 3) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT): 39.3 dB. 4) Power sum NEXT: 37.3 dB. 5) Attenuation to crosstalk ratio (ACR): 7.2 dB. 6) Power sum attenuation to crosstalk ratio (PSACR): 5.3 dB/100 m. October 2016 26_05_18-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_18 (FS-100) 7) Equal level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT): 22.8 dB. 8) Power sum ELFEXT: 19.8 dB/100 m. 9) Return loss: 17.3 dB. 10) Propagation delay: 537 ns/100 m. 11) Delay skew: 45 ns/100 m. 12) Propagation delay (skew), max: 2.5 ns/100 m. 2. Profibus cable: a. Provide Profibus cables in the following cable types as indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications: 1) Profibus DP. b. Profibus DP 1 pair: 1) Tinned, copper conductors with 7 by 30 stranding (minimum). 2) Polyolefin insulation. 3) Aluminum foil-polyester shield. 4) 100 percent coverage of outer shield. 5) One pair AWG #22. 6) Tinned copper drain wire. 7) CPE outer jacket. 8) 300-volt insulation level. 9) Nominal OD 0.335 inch. c. Meet NEC/UL specification for direct burial or wet locations. d. Meet all Profibus specifications. e. Be certified by Profibus when applicable. E. Tray cable: 1. Provide minimum size Number 1/0 AWG for single wires: a. Listed and identified on its surface as suitable for cable tray use, Type TC cable in accordance with the NEC. 2. Provide multi-conductor cable listed and identified on its surface as suitable for cable tray use, Type TC cable in accordance with the NEC. a. Provide with an integral white insulated conductor where a neutral is required. 3. Ambient temperature adjustment in accordance with the NEC. 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Wire ties: 1. One of the following or equal: a. T&B "Ty-Rap" cable ties. b. Panduit cable ties. B. Wire markers: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_53. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_18-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_18 (FS-100) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirements of ICEA S-95-658-1999. B. Test Type XHHW-2 in accordance with the requirements of UL 44. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Color-coding: 1. Color-coding shall be consistent throughout the facility. 2. The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120 volt and 208/120 volt systems: a. Phase A - Black. b. Phase B - Red. c. Phase C - Blue. d. Single phase system - Black for one hot leg, red for the other. e. Neutral - White. f. High phase or wild leg - Orange. g. Equipment ground - Green. 3. The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277 volt systems: a. Phase A - Brown. b. Phase B - Orange. c. Phase C - Yellow. d. Neutral - Gray. e. Equipment ground - Green. 4. The following color code shall be followed for all 120 VAC control wiring: a. Power - Red. b. Neutral - White. 5. The following color code shall be followed for all general purpose DC control circuits: a. Grounded conductors - Blue. b. Ungrounded conductors - Yellow. 6. Switch legs shall be violet. Three-way switch runners shall be pink. 7. Wires in intrinsically safe circuits shall be light blue. 8. Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods: a. Wires manufactured of the desired color. b. Continuously spiral wrap the first 6 inches of the wire from the termination point with colored tape: 1) Colored tape shall be wrapped to overlap 1/2 of the width of the tape. October 2016 26_05_18-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_18 (FS-100) C. Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, and all enclosures have been vacuumed clean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean and dry: 1. Install wires only in approved raceways. 2. Do not install wire: a. In incomplete conduit runs. b. Until after the concrete work and plastering is completed. D. Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits: 1. For all Number 4 AWG and larger, use an approved wire-pulling lubricant while cable is being installed in conduit: a. Ideal Products. b. Polywater Products. c. 3M Products. d. Greenlee Products. e. Or equal as recommended by cable manufacturer. f. Do not use oil, grease, or similar substances. E. Cable pulling: 1. Prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation. 2. For cables Number 1 AWG and smaller, install cables by hand. 3. For cables larger than Number 1 AWG, power pulling winches may be used if they have cable tension monitoring equipment. 4. Provide documentation that maximum cable pulling tension was no more than 75 percent of the maximum recommended level as published by the cable manufacturer. If exceeded, the Engineer may, at his discretion, require replacement of the cable. 5. Ensure cable pulling crews have all calculations and cable pulling limitations while pulling cable. 6. Make splices or add a junction box or pullbox where required to prevent cable pulling tension or sidewall pressure from exceeding 75 percent of manufacturer’s recommendation for the specified cable size: a. Make splices in manholes or pull boxes only. b. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections. F. Use smooth-rolling sheaves and rollers when pulling cable into cable tray to keep pulling tension and bending radius within manufacturer’s recommendations. G. Install and terminate all wire in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. H. Neatly arrange and lace conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, pull boxes, and terminal cabinets by means of wire ties: 1. Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel. 2. Install all wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool: a. Use a tool with an adjustable tension setting. 3. Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties. I. Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that all conductor strands are confined within the lug: 1. Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment. J. Lighting circuits: 1. Each circuit shall have a dedicated neutral. October 2016 26_05_18-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_18 (FS-100) K. Splices: 1. Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination whenever possible: a. Obtain Engineer’s approval prior to making any splices. 2. Lighting and receptacle circuit conductors may be spliced without prior approval from the Engineer. 3. Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths that exceed standard manufactured lengths: a. Splice box NEMA rating requirements as specified in Section 26_05_00. b. Make splices in labeled junction boxes for power conductors. c. Make splices for control and instrument conductors in terminal boxes: 1) Provide terminal boards with setscrew pressure connectors, with spade or ring lug connectors. 4. Power and control conductors routed in common raceways may be spliced in common junction boxes. 5. Clearly label junction and terminal boxes containing splices with the word "SPLICE LOCATED WITHIN”. 6. Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper splices and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits. 7. Install splices with compression type butt splices and insulate using a heat-shrink sleeve: a. In NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves that are listed for submersible applications. 8. Splices in below grade pull boxes, in any box subject to flooding, and in wet areas shall be made waterproof using: a. A heat shrink insulating system listed for submersible applications. b. Or an epoxy resin splicing kit. L. Apply wire markers to all wires at each end after being installed in the conduit and before meg-ohm testing and termination. M. Instrumentation class cable: 1. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power cables: a. Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non-dedicated manholes or pull boxes. b. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices and instrument enclosures or panels. 2. Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Shield grounding requirements as specified in Section 26_05_26. N. Multi-conductor cable: 1. Where cable is not routed in conduit with a separate ground conductor, use one conductor in the cable as a ground conductor: a) Use an internal ground conductor, if it is no smaller than as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with NEC requirements for equipment ground conductor size. b) Where 2 parallel cables are used, and the internal ground conductor in each cable does not meet NEC requirements for the combined circuit, use 4-conductor cable, with one of the full-sized conductors serving as ground. October 2016 26_05_18-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_18 (FS-100) O. Signal cable: 1. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise and power cables by minimum 12 inches. P. Submersible cable in wet wells: 1. Provide Kellem’s grip or stainless steel wire mesh to support cable weight and avoid stress on insulation. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Grounding: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_26. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_20-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_20 FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Fiber optic cable. 2. Fiber splices and terminations. 3. Accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 5. Section 26_05_33 - Conduits. 6. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 7. Section 26_08_50 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 8. Section 40_61_00 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. C. Furnish a complete fiber optic network as indicated on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Bellcore Standards: 1. GR-409, “Generic Requirements for Intrabuilding Fiber.” C. Electronic Industry Association (EIA) 455B "Standard Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices, and Other Fiber Optic Components": 1. FOTP-25 - Repeated Impact testing of Fiber Optic Cables and Cable Assemblies. 2. FOTP-33 - Fiber Optic Cable Tensile Loading and Bending Test. 3. FOTP-41 - Compressive Loading Resistance of Fiber Optic Cables. 4. FOTP-81 - Compound Flow (Drip) Test for Filled Fiber Optic Cable. 5. FOTP-104 - Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic Flexing Test. 6. FOTP-181 - Lightning Damage Susceptibility Test for Fiber Optic Cables with Metallic Components. D. Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association (ICEA): 1. S-83-596, “Optic Fiber Premises Distribution Cables.” 2. S-87-640, “Optic Fiber Outside Plant Communications Cable.” 3. S-104-696, “Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cables.” October 2016 26_05_20-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) E. TIA/EIA Standards: 1. 598, “Color Coding of Fiber Optic Cables.” F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 1666 - Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts. 2. 1685 - Vertical-Tray Fire-Propagation and Smoke-Release Test for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Sections 26_05_00 and 40_61_00. B. Specific definition: 1. N/Cm: Newtons per centimeter. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Complete manufacturer’s brochures that identify materials and options. 2. Completed data sheets, including catalog number and source for determining catalog number. 3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 4. Include the following: a. Manufacturer’s data on testing equipment used on this project. b. Manufacturer’s specifications and data sheets for all fiber types. c. Manufacturer’s specifications and data sheets for all connectors, bulkheads, splicing kits, breakout devices, and appurtenances used connecting and terminating the fiber spans. 5. Catalog data on all testing devices proposed for use plus certifications of accuracy, calibration, and traceability to standards of the NIST. 6. Manufacturer’s test procedures and quality assurance procedures: a. After review, the Engineer may require that additional tests be performed before installation. C. Installation instructions: 1. Submit a cable pulling and splicing work plan a minimum of 45 days before the planned initiation of cable pulling. The cable pulling and splicing work plan must be approved a minimum of 15 days before pulling cable. Include the following: a. Pull tension calculations. b. Detailed description of pull operation methods for all conduit runs. c. Tools and equipment to be used for cable installation and testing. d. Physical location of equipment setup and type. e. Exact locations of splice points. f. Safety and manual assist cable-pulling operations. g. Detailed schedule for pulling and testing cables. h. The name and qualifications of the supervisory personnel directly responsible for the installation of the conduit system. October 2016 26_05_20-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) i. Sample fiber optic cable test sheets. j. All signed test sheet results. D. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Compile completed test reports, instruction manuals, and manufacturer’s information into the operating manuals and submitted in accordance with Section 01_78_23. E. Test reports: 1. Submit the results of all specified tests to the Engineer. 2. Submit 3 copies of all test reports showing the results of all tests specified herein or in Section 26_08_50: a. Test forms shall include the following information at a minimum: 1) Test type. 2) Test location. 3) Test date. 4) Wavelength. 5) Index of refraction. 6) Cable identification. 7) Fiber type. 8) Fiber number. 9) Fiber color. 10) Result of the value of the tested parameter. 3. Furnish hard copy and electronic copy for all OTDR traces. 4. Submit certification that the fiber optic cable has passed each testing stage: a. Submit separate documentation for each testing stage result. F. Record documents: 1. Furnish updated electrical drawings, network diagrams, and fiber cable block diagrams at the end of construction and submit as Record Drawings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Furnish all cable and appurtenances manufactured within 1 year of installation. C. Proof test all optical fibers by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum load of 50 kpsi. D. Provide 100 percent attenuation testing for all optical fibers: 1. Include with each cable reel the attenuation of each fiber. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Package the cable for shipment on wooden reels: 1. Seal both ends of the cable to prevent the ingress of moisture. 2. Place fiber cable assemblies on reels such that both cable ends are available for testing. 3. Weatherproof cable reel markings shall include the following: a. Manufacturer. b. Date of manufacture. October 2016 26_05_20-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) c. Shipping date. d. Cable identification. e. Cable configuration/fiber count. f. Cable length. g. Gross weight. h. Cable test date. i. Handling instructions. j. Direction to unreel. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. Notify the Engineer and Owner a minimum of 15 days before post-installation testing. 1.10 SCHEDULING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP (NOT USED) 1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are indicated with each component type as listed in the remainder of this specification. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General fiber cable requirements: 1. Suitable for the installed environment. 2. Color-coded fibers according to EIA/TIA-598. 3. Color-coded buffer tubes according to EIA/TIA-598. 4. Furnish buffer tubes of a single layer nylon construction or of a material with similar mechanical performance. October 2016 26_05_20-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) 5. Fillers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable cross-section where needed. 6. Utilize a glass reinforced plastic rod as the central anti-buckling member. 7. Apply binders with sufficient tension to secure the buffer tubes to the central member without crushing the buffer tubes: a. Provide binders that are: 1) Non-hygroscopic. 2) Non-wicking (or rendered so by the flooding compound). 3) Dielectric with low shrinkage. 8. Provide a minimum of 1 ripcord under the cable sheath. 9. Provide the high tensile strength Aramid yarns, Kevlar, and/or fiberglass helically stranded evenly around the cable core: a. No metallic elements whatsoever are allowed in non-armored cable. 10. The jacket or sheath shall be free of holes, splits, and blisters. 11. Mark the jacket or sheath with: a. Manufacturer's name. b. The words "Optical Cable”. c. Year of manufacture. d. Sequential meter marks. e. Repeat markings every 1-meter. f. The actual length of the cable to be within 1 percent of the length marking. g. The marking must be in a contrasting color to the cable jacket. h. The height of the marking: 1) Approximately 2.5 millimeters. 12. The shipping, storage, and operating temperature range of the cable shall be -40 degrees Celsius to +70 degrees Celsius. 13. General performance characteristics: a. The rated tensile load of the cables: 1) 2,670 N (600 lbf) for armored cables, 1,334 N (300 lbf) for non-armored cables. 2) Maximum fiber strain within a cable no greater than 60 percent of the fiber proof test level. b. Non-armored fiber optic cables: Compressive load withstand of 220 N/cm applied uniformly over the length of the cable. c. Armored fiber optic cables: Compressive load withstand of 440 N/cm applied uniformly over the length of the cable. d. The average increase in attenuation for the fibers: Less than or equal to 0.10 dB at 1,550 nm for a cable subjected to this load: 1) With no measurable increase in attenuation after load removal. e. Test in accordance with FOTP-41, "Compressive Loading Resistance of Fiber Optic Cable,” except that the load must be applied at the rate of 3 millimeters to 20 millimeters per minute and maintained for 10 minutes. f. Capable of withstanding 25 cycles of mechanical flexing at a rate of 30 within 1 cycles/minute. g. The average increase in attenuation for the fibers: Less than or equal to 0.10 dB at 1,550 nm at the completion of the test. h. For armored cables, any visible cracks causing separation of the armor and propagating more than 5 millimeters constitutes failure. i. Outer cable jacket cracking or splitting observed under 10X times magnification, constitutes failure. October 2016 26_05_20-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) B. Indoor/outdoor cable: 1. General: a. Application: Interior and exterior of buildings. 2. Cable construction: a. General: 1) Cable type: Indoor/Outdoor - Flame retardant, low smoke, zero halogen, UV resistant. 2) Fiber count: 12 strand. 3) Fiber type: Single mode. 4) Buffer tube: Loose tube. 5) Armoring: None. 6) Waterproofing: Water blocking layer. 7) Strength member: Central nonmetallic strength member with a coefficient of thermal expansion similar to the fibers. 8) Approvals and listings: UL 1666 and UL 1685. 9) Design and test criteria: In accordance with ICEA S-104-696. b. Testing: 1) All fibers in the cable: a) Proof test of 100 kpsi. b) Each optical fiber: Bellcore GR-409 strip force testing. c) No gaps are allowed between the coating material and the buffer material visible under a 50-power microscope. c. Outer jacket material: 1) Linear low-density polyethylene. 2) Color: black. 3) Meet all requirements of the NEC for use in all indoor/outdoor areas (excluding plenums) without being enclosed in conduit. 4) Flame retardant OFNR riser rated conforming to UL 1666. 5) Printed with all necessary UL marks and manufacturer identification. 6) Sequential printing of footage in 2-foot increments. 7) With a ripcord incorporated under the cable jacket. d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Corning Cable Systems Freedm® LST (OFNR Loose-Tube). C. Single mode fibers: 1. All fibers in the cable must be usable fibers and meet required specifications. 2. Each optical fiber shall consist of a doped silica core surrounded by a concentric silica cladding. 3. Single mode fiber characteristics: a. Fiber type: Single mode: b. Core diameter: 8.2 within 2.5 µm. c. Clad diameter: 125 within 0.7µm. d. Cladding non-circularity: Less than .7 percent. e. Numerical aperture: 14 within 0.015. f. Maximum attenuation: .4 dB/km at 1,310 nm,.3 dB/km at 1,550 nm. g. Gigabit Ethernet distance: 5,000 m at 1,310 nm. h. Coating diameter: 245 within 5 µm. i. Cabled cutoff wavelength: Less than 1,260. j. Mode-field diameter: 9.2 within 0.4 µm at 1,310 nm,10.4 within 0.5 µm at 1,550 nm. k. Zero dispersion wavelength: 1,313 nm. l. Dispersion slope: .086 ps/(nm2*km). October 2016 26_05_20-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) 4. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. ADC/KRONE Group. b. Berk-Tek. c. Corning Cable Systems. 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Patch cords: 1. General: a. Connector types to match supplied equipment and the patch panel terminations. b. Maximum length of patch cords: 25 feet. c. Provide 2 spare patch cords (or 1 duplex patch cord) of each type used at each PLC or network cabinet. d. Factory assembled and optically tested. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Krone. b. Corning Cable Systems. B. Fiber connectors: 1. Per FC IT standards.. C. Fiber optic identification/warning tags: 1. Black letters on orange or yellow background. 2. UV resistant polyethylene or other suitable material. a. Manufacturers: The following or equal. 1) Almetek. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify the condition of the conduit system before installation of the fiber optic cable or inner duct. B. Pass a test mandrel through all fiber optic conduits prior to pulling fiber or installing inner duct. 1. Run the mandrel in both directions. October 2016 26_05_20-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) C. Examine all materials and equipment before installation and verify they are free from physical damage and defects. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Pre-installation test: 1. Conduct pre-installation tests on all fiber optic cable. 2. Upon arrival at the site: a. Inspect the cable and reel for damage. b. Test all fibers with an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) for fiber integrity. c. Verify that the fiber lengths are consistent with the cable manufacture. d. Verify that all traces yield no point discontinuities. 3. Complete test sequence and obtain approval from the Engineer of submitted test results before cable installation: a. Replace any cable failing to meet the requirements of the required tests and test before installation. 4. Submit copies of the test results to the Engineer within 5 days after the delivery to the site. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install all fiber optic system components in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. C. Install fiber optic cable in continuous lengths without intermediate splices, except where approved by the Engineer. D. Installation: 1. Utilize personnel certified by the manufacturer with specific knowledge of the cable manufacturer's recommended procedures: a. Schedule Engineer, 5 days before installation, to witness all cable installations. 2. Properly attach the fiber optic cable’s strength elements to a 600-pound breakaway swivel containing tension or shear pins using Kellums pulling grips that are a minimum of 18 inches long. 3. Certify that cable tensile limits do not exceed cable pull tension and bend limits using tension monitoring devices. 4. Leave an extra loop of fiber optic cable in each pull box. 5. Conform with the cable manufacturer's specifications, practices, and the following requirements: a. When power equipment is used to install fiber optic cables, use low speeds and do not exceed a rate of 30 meters per minute. b. Do not exceed the tensile and bending limitation for fiber optic cables under any circumstances. c. Use large diameter wheels, pulling sheaves, and cable guides to maintain the specified bending radius. d. Use commercial dynamometers or load cells to monitor pulling tension. e. A nonfreezing type of swivel inserted between the pulling line and cable pulling grip to prevent twisting under strain. f. All cable to be installed using a breakaway swivel. October 2016 26_05_20-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) 6. Apply to all conduits a lubricant at each conduit ingress and egress location during the pull operation: a. Pour or pump lubricant into the end of the conduit at the feed location at a nominal application rate of 3 gallons per 1,000 feet of cable. b. If the conduit is open at intermediate locations, then apply the appropriate proportion of lubricant at each opening. c. Continuously lubricate the cable as it is being pulled by pouring or pumping the lubricant into the conduit at the feed location and at each intermediate location. d. Station workers at each intermediate location as required. e. Remove all excess lubricant that has collected. f. Remove and clean the surrounding area after cable installation. 7. Install using a hydraulic capstan or winch equipped with a recording running line dynamometer graph which measures and records pulling tensions: a. Use pulling equipment with “slip-load” capability to allow the winch to maintain a constant pulling force without taking up the winch line. b. Use pulling equipment equipped with a hydraulic bypass set so that a maximum tension of 600 pounds is not exceeded. c. Use only equipment designed to prevent a preset pulling tension from being exceeded. d. Fiber optic cable manufacturer to provide the pulling tension setpoint. e. If during the pulling operation excessive tension is detected, cease all operations and notify the Engineer. 8. Position the cable reel at the feed point in alignment with the raceway and in such a position that the cable can be passed from the top of the reel in a long, smooth bend into the raceway system: a. The use of a cable feeder is required, unless the cable is hand-pulled. 9. Supply all bull wheels, blocks, split wheels, cable feeders, and necessary equipment required to provide a clean and safe operation: a. The cable shall not be allowed to travel over any wheel or block that has a radius less than the minimum radius allowed by the cable manufacturer. 10. Minimize the use of snatch blocks and rollers to guide the cable into the conduit at the feed point: a. Slack feed by hand the cable into the feed point and raceway without the use of rollers. 11. Tend the cable reel at all times and turn by hand to provide the required cable slack: a. Under no circumstances shall the cable tension be allowed to turn the cable reel. 12. Use a rim roller, with a wheel radius greater than the minimum cable bending radius placed at the manhole or vault opening to prevent the cable from dragging on the manhole rim or steps. 13. Perform a continuous thorough visual inspection for flaws, breaks, and abrasions in the cable sheath as the cable leaves the reel, and maintain a slow pulling speed to permit this inspection. 14. Damage to the sheath or finish of the cable is cause for rejecting the cable: a. Replace any cable damaged in any way during installation. 15. If the cable becomes damaged during installation, stop operations and notify the Engineer immediately: a. Engineer to determine whether to replace the entire reel of cable or to install a termination panel to eliminate the damaged section. October 2016 26_05_20-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) 16. Document all pulls by a graph which is annotated with the following information: a. Reel number. b. Pull point ID. c. Date and time. d. Explanations for abnormalities in readings or interruptions. e. Sign-off by Contractor and Engineer. 17. Under no conditions shall the fiber optic cable be left exposed or unattended. E. After the cables are installed and spliced: 1. Rack the cables. a. Loosely secure in racked position with wire ties. b. Attach imprinted plastic coated cloth identification/warning tags to each cable in at least 2 locations in each handhole/manhole. F. Splices: 1. Not anticipated for this project. G. Terminations: 1. To be completed by Fort Collins IT (H&H). 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Factory test: 1. Before shipment and while on the shipping reel, test 100 percent of all fibers for attenuation: a. Copies of the results shall be: 1) Maintained on file. 2) Attached to the cable reel in a waterproof pouch. 3) Submitted before the delivery of the cable to the job site to Engineer for approval. 2. Conduct the flex test in accordance with FOTP-104 test condition I and III with a maximum sheave diameter of 20 times the cable OD. 3. Verify that the cable withstands 25 impact cycles with: a. The average increase in attenuation for the fibers less than 0.20 dB at 1,550 nm. b. No evidence of cracking or splitting. c. Conduct the test in accordance with FOTP-25. 4. Certify that the cable withstands a tensile load of 2,700 N (600 pounds): a. Without exhibiting an average increase in attenuation of greater than 0.10 dB. b. Test in accordance with FOTP-33 using a maximum mandrel and sheave diameter of 560 millimeters. c. Apply the load for 1 hour in Test Condition II. October 2016 26_05_20-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_20 (FS-100) 5. Certify that the cable withstands a simulated lightning strike: a. Peak value of the current pulse greater than 105kA. b. Use a test current with a damped oscillatory maximum time-to-peak value of 15 µs (which corresponds to a minimum frequency of 16.7 kHz) and a maximum frequency of 30 kHz. c. The time to half-value of the waveform envelope 40 to 70 µs. d. Conduct the test in accordance with the FOTP-181. e. In addition to the analysis criterion set forth in FOTP-181, the integrity of the buffer tubes (or analogous loose tube, i.e. core tube) and strength members must be intact after removal of the cable specimens from the test box. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. General: 1. All test results shall meet or exceed manufacturer specifications: a. Test each fiber of each cable for breaks, abnormalities, and overall attenuation characteristics. b. Replace any fiber that does not meet or exceed manufacturer specifications. 2. Conduct post-installation tests of the fiber optic system in accordance with Section 26_08_50. 3. Pre-installation tests and post-installation tests to be witnessed and signed off by Engineer and Owner. 4. Perform attenuation tests with an optical loss test set capable and calibrated to show anomalies of 0.1 dB as a minimum: a. Test multimode fibers at 850 nm and 1,300 nm. b. Test single mode fibers at 1,310 and 1,550 nm. 5. Perform OTDR tests on fiber cables less than 100 meters with the aid of a launch cable: a. Adjust OTDR pulse width settings to a maximum setting of 1/1000th of the cable length or 10 nanoseconds. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. At the completion of construction, touch up the finish on all fiber patch panels and enclosures. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Protect the fiber system from physical damage and the encroachment of dust, before, during, and after installation. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_21-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_21 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_21 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Wire connecting devices. 2. Terminations. 3. Splices. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_18 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D3005 – Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape. C. CSA International (CSA): 1. C22.2 - No.197-M1983 (R2208) - PVC Insulating Tape. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 510 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete system of wiring connectors, terminators, fittings, etc. for a complete wiring system suitable for the cables and conductors used. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. 2. Installation instructions. October 2016 26_05_21-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_21 (FS-100) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. All materials shall be UL listed. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers for each type of technology are specified with the equipment in this Section. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. Control connections: 1. Use insulated ring type wire terminators for connections to all screw terminals: a. With chamfered/funneled terminal barrel entry. b. Deep internal serrations. c. Long barrel design to reduce electrical resistance and increased insulator-barrel surface area to ensure that the insulator remains in contact with the barrel. October 2016 26_05_21-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_21 (FS-100) d. Electroplated-tin copper conductor. e. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1) Thomas and Betts, Stakon. 2. For process equipment connections work from manufacturer's drawings. B. Joints, splices, taps, and connections: 1. 600-volt conductors: a. Use solderless connectors. b. Use only plated copper alloy connectors or lugs: 1) Aluminum connectors or lugs are not acceptable for copper conductors. c. Under those specific conditions where aluminum conductors have been allowed or are specified then the connectors for aluminum conductors shall be specifically designed for that purpose. d. For wire Number 10 AWG and smaller use compression splice caps, with insulating caps: 1) Manufacturer: The following or equal: a) Buchanan 2006S or 2011S, with 2007 or 2014 insulating caps. e. For wire Number 8 AWG and larger, use heavy duty copper compression connectors: 1) Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a) Burndy. b) Thomas and Betts. f. Heat shrink tubing: 1) Suitable for indoors, outdoors, overhead, direct burial or submerged applications. 2) Minimum shrink ratio: 4 to 1. 3) Continuous operating temperature: -55 degrees Celsius to 110 degrees Celsius. 4) Internally applied adhesive sealant. 5) Cross-linked polyolefin: a) Manufacturers, one of the following or equal: (1) 3M ITCSN. (2) Thomas & Betts Shrink-Kon. 2. Instrumentation class cable splices: a. Suitable for indoor, outdoors, weather exposed, direct buried, or submersed applications. b. Utilizing an epoxy, polyurethane, and re-enterable compounds. c. For use with shielded or unshielded plastic- and rubber-jacketed, signal, control, and power cables rated up to 1 kilovolt. d. Two-part mold body with tongue and groove seams and built in spacer webbing. e. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1) 3M - Scotchcast 72-N. C. Insulating tape: 1. General purpose insulating tape: a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape. b. Suitable for application in an ambient of -18 degrees Celsius (0 degrees Fahrenheit). c. Operating range up to 105 degrees Celsius (220 degrees Fahrenheit). d. Flame retardant, hot- and cold- weather resistant, UV resistant. October 2016 26_05_21-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_21 (FS-100) e. For use as a primary insulation for wire cable splices up to 600 VAC. f. Meeting and complying with: 1) ASTM D3005 Type I. 2) UL 510. 3) CSA C22.2. g. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1) 3M - Scotch Number Super 33+. 2. General-purpose color-coding tape: a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape. b. Suitable for application on PVC and polyethylene jacketed cables. c. For use indoors and outdoors in weather protected enclosures. d. Available with the following colors: 1) Red. 2) Yellow. 3) Blue. 4) Brown. 5) Gray. 6) White. 7) Green. 8) Orange. 9) Violet. e. For use as phase identification, marking, insulating, and harnessing. f. Meeting and complying with: 1) UL 510. 2) CSA C22.2. g. Manufacturer the following or equal: 1) 3M - Scotch Number 35. 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Load connections: October 2016 26_05_21-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_21 (FS-100) 1. Connect loads to the circuits as indicated. Color-code all branch circuits as specified in Section 26_05_18. C. Zero to 600-volt systems: 1. Make all connections with the proper tool and die as specified by the device manufacturer. 2. Use only tooling and dies manufactured by the device manufacturer. 3. Insulate all connections and splices with Scotch 33+ tape and Scotchfill, or pre-molded plastic covers, or heat shrink tubing and caps. 4. Number all power and control wires before termination. D. Motor connections (600 volts and below): 1. For 8 AWG and smaller: a. Utilize wirenuts. 2. For 6 AWG and larger: a. Terminate wires with compression type ring lugs at motors. b. Connection at both the motor leads and the machine wires shall have ring type compression lugs. c. Cover bolted connectors with a heat shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin material formed as a single opening boot: 1) In damp and wet locations, use a complete kit containing mastic that shall seal out moisture and contamination. 2) Shrink cap with low heat as recommended by manufacturer. d. Wire markers shall be readable after boot installation. e. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1) Raychem MCK. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_26-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_26 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_26 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Grounding materials and requirements. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_08_50 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 467 - Ground and Bonding Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ground equipment and raceway systems so that the completed installation conforms to all applicable code requirements. B. Provide a complete electrical grounding system as indicated on the Drawings and as specified including but not limited to: 1. Grounding electrodes. 2. Bonding jumpers. 3. Ground connections. C. Provide bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps and appurtenances required for complete grounding system to bond equipment and raceways to equipment grounding conductors. October 2016 26_05_26-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_26 (FS-100) D. The ground system resistance (electrode to ground) of the completed installation, as determined by tests specified in Section 26_08_50, shall be: 1. 5 ohms or less for industrial systems. 2. 1 ohm or less for outdoor substations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. All grounding components and materials shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS (NOT USED) 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Compression connectors: One of the following or equal: 1. FCI Burndy. 2. Thomas & Betts. B. Ground rods: One of the following or equal: 1. Erico. 2. Harger. 3. Conex. October 2016 26_05_26-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_26 (FS-100) C. Ground cable: One of the following or equal: 1. Nehring. 2. Harger. 3. Southwire. D. Precast ground well boxes: One of the following or equal: 1. Brooks Products, 3-RT Valve Box. 2. Christy Concrete Products, G12 Valve Box. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Ground rod: 1. Minimum: 3/4-inch diameter, 10 feet long. 2. Uniform 10 mil covering of electrolytic copper metallically bonded to a rigid steel core: a. The copper-to-steel bond shall be corrosion resistant. 3. In accordance with UL 467. 4. Sectional type joined by threaded copper alloy couplings. 5. Fit the top of the rod with a threaded coupling and steel-driving stud. B. Ground cable: 1. Requirements: a. Soft drawn (annealed). b. Concentric lay, coarse stranded in accordance with ASTM B8. c. Bare copper in accordance with ASTM B3. 2. Size is as indicated on the Drawings, but not less than required by the NEC. C. Compression connectors: 1. Manufactured of high copper alloy specifically for the particular grounding application. 2. Suitable for direct burial in earth and concrete. 3. Identifying compression die number inscription to be impressed on compression fitting. D. Equipment grounding conductors: 1. Conductors shall be the same type and insulation as the load circuit conductors: a. Use 600-volt insulation for the equipment grounding conductors for medium voltage systems. 2. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC. E. Grounding electrode conductors: 1. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC. F. Main bonding jumpers and bonding jumpers: 1. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_26-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_26 (FS-100) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Precast ground well boxes: 1. Minimum 10 inch interior diameter. 2. Traffic-rated cast iron cover. 3. Permanent “GROUND” marking on cover. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Provide a separate, green insulated, grounding conductor in each raceway independent of raceway material: 1. Multi-conductor power and control cables shall include an integral green insulated grounding conductor. 2. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for parallel feeders. C. Provide a separate grounding conductor for each motor and connect at motor terminal box. Do not use bolts securing motor box to frame or cover for grounding connectors: 1. When grounding motors driven by variable frequency drives (VFD) comply with the requirements of the VFD manufacturer. D. Provide a grounding type bushing with lug for connection of grounding conductor for conduits that originate from each motor control center section, switchboard, or panelboard: 1. Individually bond these raceways to the ground bus in the equipment. E. Provide grounding type bushings with lugs for connection of grounding conductor at both ends of metallic conduit runs. Bond ground bushings to the grounding system. F. Provide a green insulated wire-grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box grounding screw and, for grounding type devices, to equipment grounding conductor. October 2016 26_05_26-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_26 (FS-100) G. Interconnect the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard neutral bus to the ground bus in the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard compartment, only at service entrance point or after a transformer. H. Duct bank ground system: 1. Provide a bare copper grounding conductor the entire length of each duct bank, embedded in the concrete of the duct bank as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications. 2. Bond duct bank ground conductors together where duct banks join, merge, intersect, or split. I. Ground connections: 1. All connections to the ground grid system, the duct bank grounding system, equipment, ground rods, etc., shall be made using compression type grounding connectors as indicated on the Drawings, UL listed, and labeled for the application. 2. Make ground connections in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3. Do not conceal or cover any ground connections until the Engineer or authorized representative has established and provided written confirmation that every grounding connection is as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications. J. Grounding electrode system: 1. Ground ring: a. Provide all trenching and materials necessary to install the ground ring as indicated on the Drawings. b. Ground ring conductor shall be in direct contact with the earth, or where embedded, concrete, of the size as indicated on the Drawings. c. Minimum burial depth 36 inches or as indicated on the Drawings. d. Re-compact disturbed soils to original density in 6-inch lifts. 2. Ground rods: a. Locations as indicated on the Drawings. b. Length of rods forming an individual ground array shall be equal in length. c. Drive ground rods and install grounding conductors before construction of concrete slabs and duct banks. d. Pre-crimp all ground rods, as recommended by the manufacturer, before crimping connector to ground rod. 3. Metal underground water pipe: a. Bond metal underground domestic water pipe to grounding electrode system. 4. Metal frame of building or structure: a. Bond metal frame of building or structure to grounding electrode system. 5. Extend grounding conductors through concrete to accessible points for grounding equipment and electrical enclosures. 6. Where grounding conductors are not concrete-encased or direct buried, install in Schedule 40 PVC conduit for protection. 7. Install grounding system at each structure where switchgear, motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards, panels, or other electrical equipment are installed. October 2016 26_05_26-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_26 (FS-100) K. Shield grounding: 1. Shielded instrumentation cable shall have its shield grounded at one end only unless shop drawings indicate otherwise: a. The grounding point shall be at the control panel or at the power source end of the signal carried by the cable. 2. Terminate the shield drain wire on a dedicated terminal block. 3. Use manufacturer’s terminal block jumpers to interconnect ground terminals. 4. Connection to the panel main ground bus shall be via a green No. 12 conductor to the main ground bus for the panel. L. Where indicated on the Drawings, install ground rods in precast ground wells. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Measure grounding electrode system resistance to ground in accordance with IEEE 81. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Under the direction of the Engineer, add additional parallel connected ground rods and/or deeper driven rods until the ground resistance measurement meets the specified resistance requirements: 1. Use of salts, water, or compounds to attain the specified ground resistance is not acceptable. 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_29-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_29 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mounting and supporting electrical equipment and components. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 4. Section 05_05_24 - Mechanical Anchoring And Fastening To Concrete And Masonry. 5. Section 09_91_00 - Painting. 6. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. A240 – Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Conform to the requirements of the Building Code as specified in Section 01_41_00. 2. Demonstrate the following using generally accepted engineering methods: a. That the anchors to the structure are adequate to resist the loads generated in accordance with the Building Code and equipment requirements. b. That the required load capacity of the anchors can be fully developed in the structural materials to which they are attached. 3. Design loading and anchoring requirements: a. As indicated in the Building Code unless otherwise specified. October 2016 26_05_29-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_29 (FS-100) b. Seismic loading requirements: 1) Freestanding, suspended or wall-hung equipment shall be anchored in place by methods that will satisfy the requirements for the seismic design specified in Section 26_05_00. c. Wind loading requirements: 1) All exterior equipment shall be anchored in place by methods that will satisfy the requirements for wind design specified in Section 26_05_00. d. Minimum safety factor against overturning: 1.5. e. The foundation and structures to which hangers and supports are attached shall be capable of withstanding all anchor loads. B. Performance requirements: 1. Hangers and supports individually and as a system shall resist all weights and code-required forces without deflections and deformations that would damage the supporting elements, the equipment supported, or the surrounding construction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Supports: a. Materials. b. Geometry. c. Manufacturer. 2. Hardware: a. Materials. b. Manufacturer. C. Shop drawings: 1. Complete dimensioned and scalable shop drawings of all supporting structures, trapezes, wall supports, etc. 2. Complete anchoring details for equipment, lighting and raceway, supporting structures, trapezes, wall supports for all equipment in excess of 200 pounds, and all freestanding supports: a. Stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the Project is being constructed. b. Said submittals, by virtue of the fact that they bear the stamp of a registered engineer, will be reviewed for general consistency with the requirements specified in the Contract Documents, but not for context, accuracy, or method of calculation. 3. Include data on attachment hardware and construction methods that will satisfy the design loading and anchoring criteria. D. Installation instructions: 1. Furnish anchorage instructions and requirements based on the seismic and wind conditions of the Site: a. Stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the Project is being constructed. October 2016 26_05_29-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_29 (FS-100) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM STARTUP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Thomas & Betts. 2. Power-Strut. 3. Unistrut. 4. Cooper B-Line. 5. Robroy. 6. Aickinstrut. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Use materials appropriate for the area as specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Hot dip galvanized steel: 1. Supports: a. In accordance with ASTM A123 or A153. b. Minimum zinc coating thickness of 2.5 mils. October 2016 26_05_29-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_29 (FS-100) 2. Hardware: a. Electro-galvanized. b. In accordance with ASTM A153. C. Stainless steel: 1. Supports: a. In accordance with ASTM A240. b. ANSI Type 316 material. 2. Hardware: a. ANSI Type 316 material. D. PVC coated galvanized steel: 1. Supports: a. Hot dip galvanized steel as specified in this Section. b. PVC coating thickness of 10 to 20 mils. 2. Hardware: a. ANSI Type 316 material. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Anchor bolts: 1. As specified in Section 05_05_24. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES A. Paint and finish all supporting structures as specified in Section 09_91_00. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_05_29-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_29 (FS-100) B. Mount all raceways, cabinets, boxes, fixtures, instruments, and devices on Contractor-fabricated racks unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Provide the necessary sway bracing to keep trapeze type structures from swaying under seismic events or wind loading. C. Brace and anchor freestanding equipment supports using methods that provide structural support based on the seismic loads and wind loads: 1. Lateral deflection at top of supports not to exceed support height divided by 240 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. D. Provide fabricated steel support pedestals for wall mounted panels that weigh more than 200 pounds: 1. Fabricate pedestals out of welded angle, tube sections, or preformed channel. 2. If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet, match the supported equipment in physical appearance and dimensions. 3. Provide auxiliary floor supports for transformers hung from stud walls and weighing more than 200 pounds. 4. Mount all equipment, cabinets, boxes, instruments, and devices in damp or wet locations on minimum of 7/8-inch preformed mounting channel. a. Mount channel vertically along the length of the device so that water or moisture may run freely behind the device. E. Corrosion protection: 1. Isolate dissimilar metals, except where required for electrical continuity. a. Use neoprene washers, 9-mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets for isolation. F. Raceway: 1. Furnish all racks and trapeze structures needed to support the raceway from the structure. a. Group raceway and position on racks to minimize crossovers. b. Provide the necessary bracing to keep trapeze type structures from swaying under loads from cable installation, seismic forces, or wind forces. G. Anchoring methods: 1. Solid concrete: Anchor bolts, anchor rods or post-installed anchors as specified in Section 05_05_24. 2. Metal surfaces: Machine screws or bolts. 3. Hollow masonry units: Post-installed anchors as specified in Section 05_05_24. H. Recoat or seal all drilled holes, cut or scratched surfaces or with products recommended by the manufacturer. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. October 2016 26_05_29-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_29 (FS-100) 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_33-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_33 CONDUITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Metallic conduits. 2. Nonmetallic conduits. 3. Conduit bodies. 4. Conduit fittings and accessories. 5. Conduit installation. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_29 - Hangers and Supports. 5. Section 26_05_44 - Duct Banks. 6. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C80.1 - Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit. 2. C80.3 - Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing. 3. C80.5 - Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit. 4. C80.6 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit. C. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 1. RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit. 2. TC2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. 3. TC3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 4. TC7 - Smooth-Wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit. 5. TC13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing. 6. TC14 - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 1 - Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit. 2. 6 - Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel. 3. 6A - Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel. 4. 360 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 5. 651 - Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. 6. 651B - Standard for Continuous Length HDPE Conduit. October 2016 26_05_33-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) 7. 797 - Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel. 8. 1242 - Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel. 9. 1653 - Standard for Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing. 10. 1660 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. 11. 1684 - Standard for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: 1. Conduit bodies: A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of 2 or more conduit sections. Includes, but not limited to, Shapes C, E, LB, T, X, etc. 2. Conduit fitting: An accessory that primarily serves a mechanical purpose. Includes, but not limited to, bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc. 3. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 4. PCS: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated rigid steel conduit. 5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride rigid nonmetallic conduit. 6. SLT: Sealtight-liquid-tight flexible conduit. 7. RAC: Rigid aluminum conduit. 8. NPT: National pipe thread. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes, and all necessary components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a complete electrical raceway system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Furnish complete manufacturer’s catalog sheets for every type and size of conduit, fitting, conduit body, and accessories to be used on the Project. 2. Furnish complete manufacturer’s recommended special tools to be used for installation if required. C. Certifications: 1. Furnish PVC-coated conduit manufacturer’s certification for each installer. D. Record Documents: 1. Incorporate all changes in conduit routing on electrical plan drawings. 2. Dimension underground and concealed conduits from building lines. 3. Furnish hard copy drawings.. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. All conduits, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled. October 2016 26_05_33-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Do not expose Type PVC, FRD, NFC, and ENT to direct sunlight. C. Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground. D. Do not store aluminum conduit in contact with concrete. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. Before installing any conduit or locating any device box: 1. Examine the complete set of Drawings and Specifications, and all applicable shop drawings. 2. Verify all dimensions and space requirements and make any minor adjustments to the conduit system as required to avoid conflicts with the building structure, other equipment, or the work of other trades. 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Western Tube and Conduit. b. Allied Tube and Conduit. c. Wheatland Tube Co. B. PVC-coated rigid steel conduit: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Robroy Industries. b. Ocal, Inc. c. Calbond. October 2016 26_05_33-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) C. Rigid aluminum conduit: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Allied Tube and Conduit. b. Patriot Aluminium Products. c. Republic Conduit. d. Wheatland Tube Co. D. Sealtight-liquid-tight flexible conduit: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Southwire. b. AFC Cable Systems. c. Electri-Flex Company. d. Anaconda. E. Rigid nonmetallic PVC conduit: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Carlon. b. Cantex. c. Triangle Conduit and Cable. F. Conduit bodies: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton. c. O-Z/Gedney. d. Ocal, Inc.. e. Robroy Industries. f. Calbond. g. Carlon. G. Joint compound: 1. Thomas and Betts. H. Galvanized rigid steel conduit expansion fittings: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton. c. O-Z/Gedney. I. Conduit hangers and supports: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_29. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_33-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) 2.06 COMPONENTS A. GRC: 1. All threads: NPT standard conduit threads with a 3/4-inch taper per foot: a. Running conduit threads are not acceptable. 2. Hot-dip galvanized inside and out: a. Ensures complete coverage and heats the zinc and steel to a temperature that ensures the zinc alloys with the steel over the entire surface. b. Electro-galvanizing is not acceptable. 3. Manufactured in accordance with: a. UL-6. b. ANSI C80.1. B. PCS: 1. The steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot-dip galvanized material, conforming to the requirements for Type GRC. 2. Coated conduit NEMA Standard RN-1: a. The galvanized coating may not be disturbed or reduced in thickness during the cleaning and preparatory process. 3. Factory-bonded PVC jacket: a. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC coating to ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC coating. b. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inch except where part configuration or application of the piece dictates otherwise. c. PVC coating on conduits and associated fittings shall have no sags, blisters, lumps, or other surface defects and shall be free of holes and holidays. d. The PVC adhesive bond on conduits and fittings shall be greater than the tensile strength of the PVC plastic coating: 1) Confirm bond with certified test results. 4. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all conduits and fittings: a. Nominal thickness of 0.002 inch. b. Conduits having areas with thin or no coating are not acceptable. c. All threads shall be coated with urethane. 5. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduits shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit (-1 degree Celsius). 6. PCS conduit bodies and fittings: a. Malleable iron. b. The conduit body, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused material and shall conform to appropriate UL standards. c. The PVC coating on the outside of conduit bodies shall be 0.040-inch thick and have a series of longitudinal ribs to protect the coating from tool damage during installation. d. 0.002-inch interior urethane coating. e. Utilize the PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design. f. Stainless steel cover screw heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to ensure corrosion protection. October 2016 26_05_33-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) g. A PVC sleeve extending 1 conduit diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at each female conduit opening. 1) The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used. 2) The sleeve shall provide a vapor- and moisture-tight seal at every connection. C. RAC: 1. Material: a. Extruded from 6063 Alloy in Temper Designation T-1. b. Maximum 1/10-percent copper content. c. Containing lubricating inside liners. 2. NPT standard threads with a 3/4-inch taper per foot: a. Running conduit threads are not acceptable. 3. Provide aluminum fittings and conduit bodies. D. SLT: 1. Temperature rated for use in the ambient temperature at the installed location but not less than the following: a. General purpose: 1) Temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius. b. Oil-resistant: 1) Temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +60 degrees Celsius. 2. Sunlight-resistant, weatherproof, and watertight. 3. Manufactured from single strip steel, hot-dip galvanized on all 4 sides before conduit fabrication. 4. Strip steel spiral wound resulting in an interior that is smooth and clean for easy wire pulling. 5. Overall PVC jacket. 6. With integral copper ground wire, built in the core, in conduit trade sizes 1/2 inch through 1-1/4 inch. E. PVC: 1. Extruded from virgin PVC compound: a. Schedule 40 unless otherwise specified. b. Schedule 80 extra-heavy wall where specified. 2. Rated for 90 degrees Celsius conductors or cable. 3. Rated for use in direct sunlight. F. Conduit bodies: 1. Material consistent with conduit type: a. Malleable iron bodies and covers when used with Type GRC. b. Cast aluminum bodies and covers when used with Type RAC. c. PVC bodies and covers when used with Type PVC. d. PVC-coated malleable iron bodies and covers when used with Type PCS. 2. Conduit bodies to conform to Form 8, Mark 9, or Mogul design: a. Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for large conductors for conduit trade sizes of 1 inch and larger with conductors #4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire-bending space. 3. Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to threaded holes in conduit body. October 2016 26_05_33-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Connectors and fittings: 1. Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit. B. Insulated throat metallic bushings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron or zinc-plated steel when used with steel conduit. b. Aluminum when used with aluminum conduit. c. Positive metallic conduit end stop. d. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic-insulated surfaces rated at 150 degrees Celsius. e. Use fully insulated bushings on nonmetallic conduit system made of high-impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non-combustible thermosetting phenolic. C. Insulated grounding bushings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc-plated, with a positive metallic end stop. b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic-insulated surfaces rated at 150 degrees Celsius. c. Tin-plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum conductors. D. Electrical unions (Erickson Couplings): 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron for use with steel conduit. b. Aluminum for use with aluminum conduit. c. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction. d. Rated for Class I Division 1 Group D in hazardous areas. E. SLT fittings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron. b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring. c. Liquid-tight, rain-tight, oil-tight. d. Insulated throat. e. Furnish as straight, 45-degree elbows, and 90-degree elbows. f. Designed to prevent sleeving: 1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket seal. g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective of raceway core construction. Grounding device, if inserted into raceway and directly in contact with conductors, shall have rolled-over edges for sizes under 5 inches. h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a suitable moisture-resistant/oil-resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting shoulder. Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently bonded to a metallic retainer. October 2016 26_05_33-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) 2. Corrosion-resistant and outdoor SLT fittings: a. Construction: 1) PVC-coated liquid-tight fittings with a bonded 0.040-inch thick PVC coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT conduit. 2) Insulated throat and an integral sealing ring. F. Hubs for threaded attachment of steel conduit to sheet metal enclosures: 1. Construction: a. Insulated throat. b. PVC-coated when used in corrosive areas. c. Bonding locknut. d. Recessed neoprene O-ring to ensure watertight and dust-tight connector. e. One half (1/2)-inch through 1-1/4-inch steel zinc electroplated. f. One and one half (1-1/2)-inch through 6-inch malleable iron zinc plated. g. Aluminum with aluminum conduit. 2. Usage: a. All conduits in damp, wet, outdoor, and corrosive areas shall use threaded hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures. G. PVC fittings: 1. Shall include the following: a. Couplings. b. Terminal adapters. c. Female adapters. d. Caps. e. Reducer bushings. f. Duct couplings. g. End bells. h. Expansion couplings. i. Duct couplings: 5 degree. j. C-Type pull fittings. k. E-Type pull fittings. l. LB-Type pull fittings. m. LL-Type pull fittings. n. LR-Type pull fittings. o. T-Type pull fittings. p. X-Type pull fittings. q. Service entrance caps. 2. Materials: a. All devices shall be made of PVC, using the same materials as used for Type PVC conduit. b. All metal hardware shall be stainless steel. H. Through wall and floor seals: 1. Materials: a. Body: Casting of malleable or ductile iron with a hot-dip galvanized finish. b. Grommet: Neoprene. c. Pressure rings: PVC-coated steel. d. Disc material: PVC-coated steel. e. Aluminum when used with Type RAC. October 2016 26_05_33-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) I. Expansion/deflection couplings: 1. Use to compensate for movement in any directions between 2 conduit ends where they connect. 2. Shall allow movement of 3/4 inch from the normal in all directions. 3. Shall allow angular movement for a deflection of 30 degrees from normal in any direction. 4. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system. 5. Materials: a. End couplings: Bronze or galvanized ductile iron. b. Sleeve: Neoprene. c. Bands: Stainless steel. d. Bonding jumper: Tinned copper braid. J. Expansion couplings: 1. Shall allow for expansion and contraction of conduit: a. Permitting 8-inch movement, 4 inches in either direction. 2. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system. 3. Materials: a. Head: Malleable or ductile iron. b. Sleeve: Steel. c. Insulating bushing: Phenolic. d. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized. e. Aluminum when used with Type RAC. K. Conduit markers: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_53. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. General: 1. Conduit routing: a. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic in nature: 1) Install conduit runs as specified with schematic representation indicated on the Drawings and as specified. October 2016 26_05_33-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) 2) Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted by the Engineer: a) Make changes in conduit locations that are consistent with the design intent but are dimensionally different, or routing to bypass obstructions. b) Make changes in conduit routing due to the relocation of equipment. 3) The electrical drawings do not indicate all required junction boxes and pull boxes: a) Provide junction boxes and pull boxes to facilitate wire pulling as required: (1) To meet cable manufacturer’s pulling tension requirements. (2) To limit total conduit bends between pull locations. b) Install junction boxes and pull boxes at locations acceptable to the Engineer. b. The Contractor is responsible for any deviations in general location, conduit size, routing, or changes to the conduit schedule without the express written approval or direction by the Engineer: 1) The Engineer is the sole source in determining whether the change is constituted as a deviation: 2) Perform any changes resulting in additional conduits, or extra work from such deviations. 3) Incorporate any deviations on the Record Documents. 2. Use only tools recommended by the conduit manufacturer for assembling the conduit system. 3. Provide adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces for all conduit runs. Provide minimum clearances as follows: a. Clearance of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to 149 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Clearance of 12 inches from surfaces greater than 149 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Keep conduits at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings, and 12 inches from fuel lines and gas lines. d. Where it is necessary to route conduits close to high-temperature surfaces, provide a high-reflectance thermal barrier between the conduit and the surface. 4. Support conduit runs on water-bearing walls a minimum of 7/8-inch away from wall on an accepted preformed channel: a. Do not run conduits within water-bearing walls unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 5. Do not install 1-inch or larger conduits in or through structural members unless approved by the Engineer. 6. Run conduits exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural members, walls, or lines of the building: a. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows, offsets, and bends. b. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with conduit bodies. 7. Install conduits with total conduit bends between pull locations less than or equal to 270 degrees. 8. Route all exposed conduits to preserve headroom, access space and work space, and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems: October 2016 26_05_33-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) a. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe operation of equipment and do not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment-removal hatches. b. Route conduits to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur, relocate the conduit as required. 9. Conduits may be run in concrete members or slabs with permission of the Engineer. 10. When installing conduits through existing slabs or walls, make provisions for locating any possible conflicting items where the conduit is to penetrate. Use tone signal or X-ray methods to make certain that no penetrations will be made into the existing conduits, piping, cables, post-tensioning cables, etc. 11. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture. 12. Install conduits through wall and floor seals where indicated on the Drawings. 13. For existing and new 2-inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with a conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of nominal diameter of the conduit: a. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel will not pass. 14. Provide all sleeves and openings required for the passage of electrical raceways or cables even when these openings or sleeves are not specifically indicated on the Drawings. 15. Install complete conduit systems before conductors are installed. 16. Provide metallic conduits terminating in transformer, switchgear, motor control center, or other equipment conduit windows with grounding bushings and ground with a minimum No. 6 AWG ground wire. 17. Underground conduits: a. Install underground conduits, including conduit runs below slabs-on-grade in concrete-reinforced duct bank construction: 1) As specified in Section 26_05_44. b. Make underground conduit size transitions at handholes and manholes. c. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of runs to allow for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter underground manholes and handholes. d. Seal around conduit penetrations of below grade walls with a mechanical seal. C. Lighting and receptacle conduits: 1. Provide conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits, whether or not indicated on the Drawings: 2. Install conduits in accordance with the requirements of this Section unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum conduit size: a. 3/4-inch for exposed conduits. b. 1-inch for underground or in-slab conduits. 4. Provide conduit materials for the installed location as specified in Section 26_05_00. D. Conduit usage: 1. Exposed conduits: a. Rigid conduit: 1) Install the rigid conduit type for each location as specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_05_33-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) 2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch. b. Flexible conduit: 1) Use flexible conduit for final connections between rigid conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment, or where required for equipment servicing: a) Use Type SLT with rigid metallic conduit. 2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch: a) 1/2 when required for connection to instruments. 3) Maximum length: a) Fixed equipment: Conduit Trade Size Flexible Conduit Length (inch) 3/4 18 1 18 1-1/4 18 1-1/2 18 2 36 2-1/2 36 3 36 3-1/2 38 4 40 b) Removable instruments or hinged equipment: (1) As required to allow complete removal or full movement without disconnecting or stressing the conduit. 2. Concrete-encased and embedded conduits: a. Type PVC Schedule 40 and PVC-coated rigid metallic conduit as specified below: 1) Use Type PCS in underground and embedded installation as follows: a) Stub-up and risers to grade floor or equipment from nonmetallic conduits. b) Entering and exiting underground or embedded conduit runs a minimum 12 inches above and below grade of finished floor. c) For any and all bends where the total deflection is greater than 45 degrees. b. Minimum size: 1) 2-inch in duct banks unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2) 1-inch for in-slab conduits unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Direct-buried and sand-bedded duct bank conduits: a. Type PCS. b. Minimum size: 1-inch. 4. Concrete capped, pea gravel-bedded duct bank conduits: a. Type PVC40. b. Minimum size: 1-inch. 5. PVC-coated rigid metallic conduit: a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to manufacturer’s specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket. October 2016 26_05_33-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) b. 6. GRC: a. Conduit shall be cut square and reamed before threading. 7. PVC: a. Conduit terminations shall be via threaded adapters into threaded hubs on the junction boxes or conduit bodies. b. Conduit terminations into boxes without threaded hubs shall utilize a threaded adapter and a flat neoprene washer on the outside of the box. 1) Use a locknut on the inside of the box to tighten the adapter to the box. c. Route conduit to afford it the maximum physical protection. 1) If necessary, cover conduit to afford additional protection when it cannot be shielded by the structure or machinery frames. a) Use Schedule 80 where exposed runs may be subject to physical damage. 8. RAC: a. Do not use aluminum conduit below grade, cast in concrete, or on concrete or masonry in contact with earth. b. When installing RAC on concrete surfaces, mount the RAC on the channel so that only the channel is in contact with the concrete. c. When penetrating concrete walls and/or floors, use O-Z/Gedney rubber- gasketed through wall and floor seals so that the aluminum conduit is completely isolated from the concrete by the rubber seal material. E. Conduit joints and bends: 1. General: a. Where conduit is underground, under slabs on grade, exposed to the weather, or in NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X locations, make joints liquid-tight. b. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. c. All bends shall be symmetrical. d. The following conduit systems shall use large-radius sweep elbows: 1) Underground conduits. 2) Conduits containing medium-voltage cables. 3) Conduits containing shielded cables. 4) Conduits containing fiber optic cables. e. Provide large-radius factory-made bends for 1-1/4-inch trade size or larger. f. Make field bends with a radius of not less than the requirements found in the NEC: 1) The minimum bending radius of the cable must be less than the radius of the conduit bend. 2) Make all field bends with power bending equipment or manual benders specifically intended for the purpose: a) Make bends so that the conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter is not effectively reduced. b) For the serving utilities, make bends to meet their requirements. g. Replace all deformed, flattened, or kinked conduit. 2. Threaded conduit: a. Cut threads on rigid metallic conduit with a standard conduit-cutting die that provides a 3/4-inch per foot taper and to a length such that all bare metal exposed by the threading operation is completely covered by the October 2016 26_05_33-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such that all joints become secure and wrench-tight just preceding the point where the conduit ends would butt together in couplings or where conduit ends would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings. b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs. c. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations. d. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing “Galvabar,” or CRC “Zinc It.” e. Coat conduit threads with an approved electrically conductive sealant and corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the conductor insulation: 1) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely. 2) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly. f. Securely tighten all threaded connections. g. Any exposed threaded surfaces must be cleaned and coated with a galvanizing solution so that all exposed surfaces have a galvanized protective coating. 3. PVC: a. Use approved solvent-weld cement specifically manufactured for the purpose. Spray-type cement is not allowed. b. Apply heat for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a spring mandrel as required to ensure full inside diameter at all bends: 1) Utilize a heater specifically for PVC conduit as recommended by the conduit manufacturer. F. Conduit sealing and drainage: 1. Install seals with drains at any location along conduit runs where moisture may condense or accumulate. This requirement includes, but is not limited to, the following locations: control panels, junction boxes, pullboxes, or low points of the conduit. G. Conduit supports: 1. General: a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints to suit applications: 1) As specified in Section 26_05_29. 2) Provide support materials consistent with the type of conduit being installed as specified in Section 26_05_00. b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the NEC. c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit supports. 2. Conduit on concrete or masonry: a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with metallic or plastic expansion anchors and screws or support from preset inserts. b. Use preset inserts in concrete when possible. c. Use pipe spacers (clamp backs) in wet locations. d. On plaster or stucco, use 1-hole malleable iron straps with toggle bolts. 3. Conduit on metal decking: a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with 1-inch long cadmium-plated Type A panhead sheet-metal screws. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are not acceptable. October 2016 26_05_33-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) 4. Suspended conduit: a. Use malleable-iron factory-made split-hinged pipe rings with threaded suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch diameter), Kindorf, or equal. b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered angle iron or preformed channel cross members. Clamp each conduit individually to a cross member. Where rods are more than 2-feet long, provide rigid sway bracing. 5. Supports at structural steel members: a. Use beam clamps. b. Drilling or welding may be used only as specified or with approval of the Engineer. 6. PVC-coated rigid metal systems: a. Provide right-angle beam clamps and “U” bolts specially formed and sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. Provide "U" bolts with PVC-encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the threads. b. Securely fasten exposed conduits with Type 316 stainless steel clamps or straps. H. Expansion or expansion/deflection fittings: 1. General: a. Align expansion coupling with the conduit run to prevent binding. b. Follow manufacturer’s instructions to set the piston opening. c. Install expansion fittings across concrete expansion joints and at other locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical expansion and contraction. d. Furnish fittings of the same material as the conduit system. 2. For metallic conduit, provide expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where: a. Install expansion fittings a minimum of every 200 feet in straight conduit runs. 3. For PVC, provide expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where length change due to temperature variation exceeds 2 inches: a. Rigidly fix the outer barrel of the expansion coupling so it cannot move. b. Mount the conduit connected to the piston loosely enough to allow the conduit to move as the temperature changes. I. Empty conduits: 1. Provide a polyethylene rope rated at 250 pounds tensile strength in each empty conduit more than 10 feet in length. 2. Seal ends of all conduits with approved, manufactured conduit seals, caps, or plugs immediately after installation: a. Keep ends sealed until immediately before pulling conductors. J. Miscellaneous: 1. Seal roof penetrations for raceways and other items that penetrate the roof in accordance with roofing manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide electrical unions at all points of union between ends of rigid conduit systems that cannot otherwise be coupled: a. Running threads and threadless couplings are not allowed. October 2016 26_05_33-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_33 (FS-100) 3. Replace any conduits installed that the Engineer determines do not meet the requirements of this Specification. 4. Provide conduit housekeeping curb around all embedded or below-grade conduits exiting or entering the slab, per the Typical Details. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATIONS, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_34-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_34 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_34 BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Device boxes. 2. Raceway system boxes. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2. D149 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies. 3. D495 - Standard Test Method for High-Voltage, Low-Current, Dry Arc Resistance of Solid Electrical Insulation. 4. D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 5. D648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. 6. D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 7. D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement. C. Joint Industry Conference (JIC). D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 94 - Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions: 1. Arcing parts: Circuit breakers, motor controllers, switches, fuses, or any device intended to interrupt current during its operation. 2. Raceway system boxes: Boxes that are used for wire and cable pullboxes, conduit junction boxes, or terminal boxes. October 2016 26_05_34-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_34 (FS-100) 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide outlet boxes for devices such as switches, receptacles, telephone and computer jacks, security systems, junction, and pullboxes for use in the raceway systems, etc. B. Provide boxes as indicated on the Drawings or as needed to complete the raceway installation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer. 2. Materials. 3. Dimensions: a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. d. Weight. e. NEMA rating. 4. Conduit entry locations. 5. Catalog cut sheets. 6. Installation instructions. C. Shop drawings: 1. Include identification and sizes of pull boxes. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Outlet boxes shall comply with all applicable standards of: a. JIC. b. NEC. c. NEMA. d. UL. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_05_34-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_34 (FS-100) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Cast device boxes: a. Appleton. b. Crouse - Hinds. c. OZ/Gedney. 2. Formed steel enclosures: a. Hoffman. b. Thomas and Betts. c. Stahlin. d. Rittal. 3. Stainless steel enclosures: a. Hoffman. b. Stahlin. c. Rittal. 4. Pressed steel boxes and concrete boxes: a. Appleton. b. Steel City. c. Cooper/Crouse Hinds. d. OZ Gedney. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Concrete boxes: 1. For outlets and pull boxes in concrete construction. 2. Pressed steel or cast construction, concrete tight. 3. Knockout sizes range from 1/2 inch to 1 inch. 4. Depth as needed. 5. Types: a. Four-inch octagon. b. Four-inch octagon ceiling boxes with hanging bars. October 2016 26_05_34-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_34 (FS-100) c. Gangable masonry boxes: 1) 3-1/2-inch deep, 3-3/4-inch high, length as required: a) 2-1/2-inch deep boxes may be used where wall thickness precludes the use of the deeper boxes. 2) With partitions as needed. B. Cast device boxes: 1. Construction: a. With internal green ground screw. b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover. c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted. d. Conduit sizes range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch. e. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing. 2. Aluminum (copper free) boxes: a. High strength copper free 4/10 of 1 percent maximum alloy for use with aluminum rigid conduit. 3. Malleable iron boxes: a. Conforming to ASTM A47 Grade 32510. C. Formed steel enclosures: 1. Steel: a. NEMA Type 12. b. Fabricated from 14-gauge steel, minimum. c. All seams continuously welded ground smooth. d. Door: 1) Rolled lip around 3 sides. 2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge and pin. e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight, dusttight, oiltight seal: 1) Attached with an adhesive. 2) Retained by a retaining strip. f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the enclosure body from zinc-plated heavy gauge steel: 1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking. g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity. h. No holes or knockouts. i. Finish: 1) ANSI-61 gray electrostatically applied polyester powder inside and out over cleaned and primed surfaces. 2) White electrostatically applied polyester powder mounting plate. j. Heavy gauge steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted. 2. Stainless steel: a. NEMA Type 4X: 1) Boxes in locations subject to flooding or temporary submersion: a) NEMA Type 6. b. Fabricated from 14-gauge Type 316 stainless steel. c. All seams continuously welded. d. Door: 1) Rolled lip around 3 sides. 2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge and pin. October 2016 26_05_34-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_34 (FS-100) e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal: 1) Attached with an adhesive. 2) Retained by a retaining strip. f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the enclosure body from heavy gauge stainless steel: 1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking. g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity. h. No holes or knockouts. i. Finish: 1) Brushed. j. Stainless steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted. D. Cast iron junction boxes: 1. NEMA Type 4. 2. Recessed cover boxes. 3. Suitable for use outdoors where subject to rain, dripping, or splashing water. 4. Designed for flush mounting in walls or floors: a. Can be surface mounted using mounting lugs. 5. Construction: a. Cast iron box. b. Covers: 1) Checkered plate covers suitable for foot traffic. 2) When used in areas subject to vehicular traffic H-20 loading. c. Hot dip galvanized. d. Neoprene gasket. e. Stainless steel screw covers. 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Electroplated or stainless steel in boxes with wiring devices. 2. Screws, nuts, bolts, and other threaded fasteners: a. Stainless steel. B. Provide breather and drain fittings where appropriate. C. Internal panels: 1. Provide internal panels where required for mounting of terminal strips or other equipment. 2. With plated steel shoulder studs. 3. Steel with white polyester powder finish. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_34-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_34 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. General: 1. Provide materials and construction suitable for environmental conditions at the location of the box as specified in Section 26_05_00. 2. Provide outlet box materials to match the conduit system: a. GRC - Cast ferrous boxes. b. RAC - Aluminum (copper free) boxes. c. PCS - PVC coated cast ferrous boxes. d. PVC - PVC boxes. 3. Solid type gang boxes: a. For more than 2 devices. b. For barriered outlets. 4. Support all wall mounted NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X boxes to maintain a minimum of 7/8-inch free air space between the back of the enclosure and the wall: a. Use machined spacers to maintain air space; built-up washers are not acceptable. b. Use stainless steel or nylon materials for spacers. 5. Use cast malleable iron boxes when box must support other devices. 6. Boxes serving luminaires or devices: a. Use as pull boxes wherever possible. 7. Fit all cast boxes and pressed steel boxes for flush mounting in concrete with cast, malleable box covers and gaskets. 8. In terminal boxes, furnish terminals as indicated on the Drawings, with a minimum of 50 percent spare terminals: a. Furnish wireways for discrete and analog/DC wiring. b. Separate analog wiring from 120 V discrete or power wiring. 9. Size boxes in accordance with NEC requirements and to provide sufficient room for the future components and cables indicated on the Drawings. 10. For fire-rated construction, provide materials and installation for use in accordance with the listing requirements of the classified construction. C. Outlet boxes: 1. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on the Drawings: a. Adjust locations so as not to conflict with structural requirements or other trades. 2. Use deep threaded-hub malleable iron or aluminum boxes: a. In hazardous areas. b. Where exposed to the weather. c. In unheated areas. d. Where subject to mechanical damage: 1) Defined as exposed boxes less than 10 feet above the floor. October 2016 26_05_34-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_34 (FS-100) e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system. f. Accommodate wiring devices. 3. Use deep threaded-hub plastic coated malleable iron boxes in corrosive and NEMA Type 4X area and when the conduit system is PVC coated steel. 4. Outlet boxes may be used as junction boxes wherever possible. D. Pull boxes and junction boxes: 1. Size pull boxes in accordance with NEC requirements and to provide sufficient room for any future conduits and cables as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install pull boxes such that access to them is not restricted. E. For boxes not indicated: 1. Provide types and mountings as required to suit the equipment and that will be consistent with the conduit system and environmental conditions as indicated in Section 26_05_00. 2. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes for flush-mounting in general purpose locations: a. One-piece, galvanized, pressed steel. 3. Ceiling boxes for flush mounting in concrete: a. Deep, galvanized, pressed steel. 4. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed locations: a. Cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc or cadmium plating finish. 5. Outlet, control station, and junction boxes for installation in corrosive locations: a. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, stainless steel, or plastic coated steel to match the conduit system. b. Furnished with mounting lugs. 6. Boxes for concealed conduit system: a. Non-fire rated construction: 1) Depth: To suit job conditions and comply with the NEC. 2) For luminaries: Use outlet boxes designed for the purpose: a) 50 pounds or less: Box marked “For Fixture Support.” b) More than 50 pounds: Box listed and marked with the weight of the fixture to be supported (or support luminaire independent of the box.) 3) For junction and pull boxes: Use galvanized steel boxes with flush covers. 4) For switches, receptacles, etc: a) Plaster or cast-in-place concrete walls: Use 4-inch or 4-11/16-inch galvanized steel boxes with device covers. b) Walls other than plaster or cast-in-place concrete: Use type of galvanized steel box which will allow wall plate to cover the opening made for the installation of the box. 7. Fire rated construction: Use materials and methods to comply with the listing requirements for the classified construction. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 REINSTALLATION (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_34-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_34 (FS-100) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_35-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_35 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_35 WIREWAY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Wireway systems as indicated on the Drawings. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL): 1. Article 870 – Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. ICS-6 – Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System includes horizontal and/or vertical straight runs of wireway, fittings, covers, splices, barriers, and related accessory and supports: 1. Connected to form a complete system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Technical information: a. Catalog cut sheets. b. Wireway construction and materials. c. Maximum loading and span. d. NEMA enclosure type. 2. Dimensions: a. Width. b. Depth. 3. Weight of wireway sections and fittings. October 2016 26_05_35-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_35 (FS-100) 4. Complete bill of materials. 5. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Shop drawings: 1. Provide complete details and scaled drawings for the layout of the installed wireway system showing all components and proposed mounting details. D. Calculations: 1. Provide cross sectional area and fill calculations. a. Cross sectional area and fill shall be in accordance with the NEC. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Member of NEMA for the manufacturer of wireway systems and fittings of types and capacities required. C. Wireway shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. The Drawings indicate the general route of the wireway systems. Data presented on those drawings are as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is made. B. Specifications and Drawings are for assistance and guidance but exact routing, locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Make field surveys as part of the work before ordering material. 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_35-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_35 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metallic wireway: 1. One of the following or equal: a. B-Line. b. Hoffman. c. Hammond. d. Rittal Electromate. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. Provide wireways as indicated on the Drawings with respect to: 1. Type (lay-in or feed-through or trough). 2. Dimensions. 3. NEMA enclosure rating. 4. Wireway material. 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Fittings: 1. Elbows, tees, and crossings: a. Of the same materials and construction as the straight runs. 2. Expansion fittings: a. Provide flexible or sliding fittings. B. Covers: 1. Hinged on one side. 2. Held closed with latches or bolts. C. Gaskets: 1. As required to meet NEMA enclosure requirements: a. Provide gaskets at each flange and door opening to assure complete seal between wireway components. b. Held in place with adhesive or formed in place. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Barriers: 1. To separate power, control and instrument wiring running within the same wireway as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard metallic barrier with metallic wireway and manufacturer's standard non-metallic barrier with non-metallic wireway. B. Mounting hardware: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_05_35-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_35 (FS-100) 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATIONS (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufactured in accordance with NEMA ICS-6. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify all dimensions and route before ordering wireway: 1. Make all necessary field measurements. 2. Coordinate with all subcontractors and suppliers to determine structural dimensions and equipment dimensions to avoid all potential conflicts with other systems. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install the wireway per the manufacturer’s guidelines and submitted installation instructions to meet the seismic and wind requirements at the project site. C. General: 1. Install in straight runs as much as possible, minimizing the number of turns. 2. Expansion fittings: a. Install as recommended by the manufacturer to accommodate thermal expansion. b. Install where wireway crosses structural expansion joints. 3. Fittings: a. Not all fittings are indicated on the Drawings: 1) Provide all fittings required to suit the installation. 4. Wireway supports: a. Support wireway in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as required by the seismic conditions. b. Support bracket spacing shall meet the requirements of the wireway manufacturer, and NEC. c. Provide wireway supports with channels under the entire width of wireway. d. Secure wireway to supports with manufacturer-approved fittings. 5. Mounting: a. Oriented to allow hinged doors to be opened minimum 90 degrees. b. Oriented to allow safe access to doors for maintenance and future installations. 6. Wiring installation: a. In accordance the NEC. October 2016 26_05_35-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_35 (FS-100) b. Begin wiring installation only after the complete raceway system is installed. c. Verify that all wireway surfaces and accessories are smooth, free from burrs or sharp edges. d. Only install wiring that is UL listed for wireway use. 7. Wall penetrations: a. Terminate wireway on both sides of penetration, and penetrate wall via conduits: 1) Seal all open spaces inside and around conduits where they penetrate building exterior walls or fire-rated walls. 2) Fill spare conduits with sealing compound. 3) Provide sealing material in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, AND CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 PRE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Inspect entire wireway system for the following: 1. Secure anchoring. 2. Proper supports. 3. Burrs or sharp edges. 4. Sufficient clearance from ducts and piping, especially hot pipes. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_38-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_38 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_38 ALUMINUM CABLE TRAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Aluminum cable tray systems as indicated on the Drawings. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. Standard VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems. 2. Standard VE 2 - Cable Tray Installation Guidelines. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System includes horizontal and/or vertical straight trays, fittings, covers, splices, barriers, and related accessory and support. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Technical information: a. Tray types. b. Material specifications. c. NEMA load/span class designation. 2. Dimensions: a. Section width. b. Outside depth. c. Loading depth. d. Curve radii. 3. Weight of cable tray sections and fittings. 4. Complete bill of materials. 5. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 6. Verification that the product meets the Quality Assurance requirements. October 2016 26_05_38-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_38 (FS-100) C. Shop drawings: 1. Provide complete details and scaled drawings for the layout of the installed cable tray system showing all components and proposed mounting details. 2. Rigging plans and details for cable installation in cable trays: a. Indicate location and anchoring methods for sheaves supports and all pulling accessories. 1) Indicate reaction forces (magnitude and direction) on the rigging plan. b. It is strongly recommended that the cable pulling reaction points be determined before the concrete at those points is placed in order to allow for embedment of anchors or additional reinforcement that may be recommended to address rigging loads. c. Reactions imposed on the structure at any location shall not exceed 2,000 pounds: 1) This requirement does not warrant that the structure can resist such loads at the Contractor’s desired points of application. The Engineer may require submittal of additional analysis to confirm adequacy of the structure at those locations for the loads to be imposed. d. The Engineer’s review of rigging plan and supporting calculations shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the safety and adequacy of the system and for the responsibility to protect the structure and its appurtenances from damage due to pulling operations. D. Calculations: 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Member of NEMA for the manufacturer of cable tray system and fittings of types and capacities required. C. Cable trays shall be UL classified for use as an equipment grounding conductor. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. The Drawings indicate the general route of the cable tray systems. Data presented on these Drawings are as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is made. B. Specifications and Drawings are for assistance and guidance, but exact routing, locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Make field surveys as part of the Work before ordering material. October 2016 26_05_38-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_38 (FS-100) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cable trays: 1. One of the following or equal: a. B Line Systems, Inc. b. Chalfant. c. PW Industries Inc. d. Thomas & Betts. e. T. J. Cope. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Primarily of alloy 6063 T6 with natural finish. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. Power and control cable trays: 1. Ladder type: a. Rungs: Double or box type rungs, free of sharp edges and corners. b. Rungs located at 9 inches on center and provide adequate cable bearing surface. c. No portion of the rung shall protrude below the bottom plane of the side rails. d. Sides: Minimum 5-inch interior cable loading depth. e. Minimum width: As indicated on the Drawings. f. B. Cable tray load capacity: 1. Capable of supporting the following weight without exceeding the NEMA load/span class or manufacturer’s recommendations based on 150 percent factor of safety, and without deflection exceeding 1/100 of the support span. October 2016 26_05_38-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_38 (FS-100) Calculations for capacity and deflection shall be based on tray supported as a simple beam: a. For ladder trays, each rung must be capable of supporting the maximum cable load, and a 200-pound concentrated load when tested in accordance with NEMA VE 1. b. The tray system must be capable of supporting the maximum cable load, and a 200-pound concentrated load at mid-point of span when tested in accordance with NEMA VE 1. 2. The load and sizing calculations shall include cables to be installed in the tray plus 25 percent capacity for future expansion. 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Elbows, tees, and crossings: 1. Of the same materials and construction as the tray. 2. Wide radius, not to be less than twice the bending radius for the largest cable to be installed. B. Connectors: 1. Same manufacturer and materials as the tray. 2. Straight connectors: a. Provide ground continuity across the joint. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Dividers: 1. Manufactured by the cable tray manufacturer of the same material as the tray. B. Mounting hardware: 1. Tray bolts, nuts, washers, and fasteners: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. C. Ground wire and bonding jumpers: Number 2/0 bare copper. D. Cable ties: UV resistant cable ties. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATIONS (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacture cable tray in compliance with NEMA VE 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify all dimensions and route before ordering cable tray: 1. Make all necessary field measurements. October 2016 26_05_38-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_38 (FS-100) 2. Coordinate with all subcontractors and suppliers to determine structural dimensions and equipment dimensions, and to avoid all potential conflicts with other systems. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify all cable tray surfaces and accessories are smooth, free from burrs or sharp edges before cable installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00: 1. In accordance with NEMA VE 2 and NEC for cable tray installation. B. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of attachment points before installing anchors and before pulling cables. C. Grounding: 1. Bond metallic cable tray to the facility ground system. 2. Bonding jumpers: a. Provide manufacturer-approved bonding jumpers on each side rail to maintain ground continuity across all: 1) Expansion joints. 2) Discontinuities. 3) Other connections that do not provide path continuity. 3. Use only plated lugs specifically designated for bonding cable and tray materials. 4. Provide all multi-conductor cables and all circuit groups of single conductor cables with an equipment-grounding conductor, size in accordance with Article 250 of NEC. D. Fittings: 1. Not all fittings are indicated on the Drawings: a. Provide all fittings and supports required to suit the conditions. E. Cable tray supports: 1. Support cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2, manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Support bracket spacing to meet the requirements of NEMA VE 2 and the tray manufacturer: a. Maximum bracket spacing: 12 feet on center. 3. Length of individual tray sections shall be longer than the support span. 4. Trays may be suspended from the ceiling or cantilevered from walls. 5. Provide tray supports with channels under the entire width of tray. 6. Secure tray to supports with manufacturer-approved fittings. Do not weld tray to support. 7. Where aluminum trays are supported on steel supports, separate and isolate aluminum and steel with a 1/4-inch neoprene or other nonmetallic gasket. F. Other equipment supported from tray: 1. Use approved mounting accessories. 2. Support junction boxes and conduit systems for continuation of tray cables from cable tray: October 2016 26_05_38-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_38 (FS-100) a. Provide insulated bushings. b. Provide conduit seals in exterior locations and where indicated on the Drawings. 3. Do not support other conduits or equipment from cable tray unless specifically indicated on the Drawings. G. Cable installation: 1. In accordance with the NEC. 2. Begin cable installation only after the complete cable tray system is installed. 3. Only install cables that are UL listed for cable tray use. 4. Tie cable to tray on vertical sections or where otherwise required: a. Use UV resistant nylon cable ties. b. Tie cables at intervals required by the NEC or recommended by cable manufacturer or as specified by this Specification. c. Put sharp ends of ties under cable tray rungs or where ties will not damage cable insulation. d. Group cables in tray by circuit type. e. Tie grouped cables with cable ties at approximately 3-foot intervals for vertical runs and at approximately 6-foot intervals for horizontal runs. f. Label cable groups to identify the circuit or control group by plan designation. 5. Single conductor power cables: a. 1/0 AWG and larger, listed for tray use and installed in a single layer as required by the NEC. b. Tie the phase conductors, neutral conductor (where required), and equipment ground conductor for each parallel run of each circuit into a bundle at 3-foot intervals. c. Install bundles in a single layer and tie to tray at intervals not exceeding 6 feet for horizontal runs or 3 feet for vertical runs. 6. Multi-conductor power cables: a. Install cables with 4/0 and larger conductors in a single layer and tie to tray at intervals not exceeding 6 feet for horizontal runs or 3 feet for vertical runs. b. Smaller cables may be stacked, provided all requirements of the NEC are met: 1) Do not stack smaller cables on top of larger cables that are required to be installed in a single layer. Provide dividers, if necessary to keep them separate. H. Seal all open spaces inside and around cable tray where it penetrates building exterior walls or any fire-rated walls: 1. Provide sealing material in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation and all applicable codes and regulations. 2. As an alternative, terminate tray on both sides of penetration, and provide sleeves for cable to penetrate: a. Seal around cables in each sleeve. b. Provide at least 25 percent spare sleeves: 1) Fill spare sleeves with sealing compound. c. Provide manufacturer-approved bonding jumpers on each side of wall, bonding the tray side rails through the penetration. October 2016 26_05_38-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_38 (FS-100) 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, AND CONSTRUCTION A. Special technique: 1. Install cable tray in a straight run as much as possible, minimizing the number of bends. 2. Maintain adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces for all cable tray runs to prevent exceeding the ambient rating of the cables. Provide minimum clearances as follows: a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to 149 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than 149 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Keep cable tray at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings, and 12 inches from fuel lines and gas lines. d. Where it is necessary to route cable tray close to high-temperature surfaces, install a high-reflectance thermal barrier between the cable tray and the surface. B. Interface with other Work: 1. Coordinate routing of cable tray with piping, HVAC and structural trades to avoid interferences. 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Inspect entire cable tray system for the following: 1. Secured anchoring. 2. Smooth surfaces and joints. 3. Burrs or sharp edges. 4. Proper supports. 5. Sufficient clearance from ducts, and piping, especially hot pipes. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_05_38-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_38 (FS-100) 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_44-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_44 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_44 DUCT BANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Electrical underground duct banks. 2. Duct bank installation requirements. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 03_20_00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 4. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 5. Section 26_05_33 - Conduits. 6. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 7. Section 31_23_17 - Trenching. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide trenching, forming, rebar, spacers, conduit, concrete, backfill, and compaction necessary for the complete installation of the duct banks. B. Provide reinforced concrete duct banks for all conduits installed below grade, on the site, below structures, or in contact with the earth, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. PVC conduit spacers. 2. Detectable underground marking tape. 3. Pull line. C. Provide applicable submittal documents as specified in: 1. Section 03_20_00. 2. Section 03_30_00. 3. Section 31_23_17. October 2016 26_05_44-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_44 (FS-100) D. Shop drawings: 1. Submit site plan drawings of duct banks including underground profiles indicating all underground utilities. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Conduit spacers: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Carlon Snap-Loc. b. Cantex. c. Osburn Associates, Inc. B. Detectable underground marking tape: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Blackburn Manufacturing Company. b. Pro-Line Safety Products. c. Panduit. October 2016 26_05_44-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_44 (FS-100) C. Pull line: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Arnco. b. Greenlee. c. Osburn Associates, Inc. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Provide conduit as specified in Section 26_05_33: 1. Use duct suitable for use with 90-degree Celsius rated conductors. B. Provide reinforcing steel as specified in Section 03_20_00: 1. Provide minimum Number 4 reinforcing steel. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Conduit spacers: 1. Provide conduit spacers recommended by the conduit manufacturer or specified above. 2. Saddle type. 3. Non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-conductive. 4. Interlocking type: a. Vertical interlocking. b. Horizontal interlocking. 5. Suitable for concrete encasement. 6. Molded-in rebar holder. 7. Accommodates 2-inch through 6-inch conduit sizes. 8. Relieves the conduit from both horizontal and vertical stresses. B. Pull line: 1. Minimum 1/4-inch wide, flat design. 2. Polyester. 3. Minimum pulling strength 1,200 pounds. 4. Sequential footage markings. C. Detectable marking tape: 1. Provide a detectable tape, locatable by a cable or metal detector from above the undisturbed grade. 2. Aluminum core laminated between polyethylene film. 3. Six-inch wide red tape imprinted with black lettering "CAUTION - BURIED ELECTRIC UTILITIES." 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 2.08 MIXES A. Concrete mix requirements as specified in Section 03_30_00. October 2016 26_05_44-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_44 (FS-100) B. Provide a red-oxide conduit encasement coloring agent as specified in Section 03_30_00. 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Duct banks: 1. Install duct banks encased in concrete at least 24 inches below finish grade, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Damage minimization: a. Conduit should not be left exposed in an open trench longer than is necessary. b. Protect all underground duct banks against damage during pouring of concrete or backfilling. 3. All plastic conduit fittings to be joined should be exposed to the same temperature conditions for a reasonable length of time before assembly. 4. Provide No. 4/0 American Wire Gauge bare copper ground wire the entire length of duct bank and bond to the grounding system as indicated on the Drawings. 5. Install underground ducts to be self-draining: a. Slope duct banks away from buildings to manholes. b. Slope a minimum of 1/4 inch per 10 feet. 6. Where new duct banks join to existing manholes make the proper fittings and fabricate the concrete envelopes to ensure smooth durable transitions, as indicated on the Drawings. 7. Install pull line in spare conduits: a. Provide adequate pull line at both ends of conduits to facilitate conductor pulling. b. Cap above ground spare conduit risers at each end with screw-on conduit caps. C. Trenching: 1. Perform trenching as specified in Section 31_23_17. 2. Trench must be uniformly graded with the bottom, rock free and covered with select material. 3. Whenever possible, use the walls of the trench as forms for concrete encasement: a. Forms are required where the soil is not self-supporting. 4. Avoid damaging existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities. October 2016 26_05_44-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_44 (FS-100) D. Duct spacing: 1. Separate conduits with manufactured plastic spacers using a minimum space between the outside surfaces of adjacent conduits of 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a. Separate medium voltage ducts a minimum of 7.5 inches on center. 2. Install spacers to maintain uniform spacing of duct assembly a minimum of 4 inches above the bottom of the trench during concrete pour. Install spacers on 8-foot maximum intervals: a. Due to some distortion of conduit from heat, and other means, it may be necessary to install extra spacers within the duct bank: 1) Install the intermediate set of spacers within normal required spacing to maintain the proper horizontal clearance: a) Clearance is required to allow the proper amount of concrete to infiltrate vertically among the duct to ensure proper protection. 3. Spacers shall not be located at the center of a bend: a. Locate spacer in the tangent, free of the coupling on fabricated bends. b. Locate spacers midway between the tangent and the center bend on trench formed sweeps. E. Terminating: 1. Use bell ends in duct at entrances into cable vaults. 2. Make conduit entrances into cable vaults tangential to walls of cable vault. 3. Form trapezoidal transitions between duct bank and cable vaults as needed in order to ensure adequate cable bending radius for the duct bank-to-vault transition. 4. New manhole or handhole applications, provide a single opening or “window” per duct bank, sized to accommodate the duct bank envelope. F. Concrete: 1. Install concrete as specified in Section 03_30_00. 2. Provide nonferrous tie wires to prevent displacement of the conduits during pouring of concrete: a. Tie wire shall not act as a substitute for spacers. 3. Install minimum 3-inch cover around conduit and rebar. 4. Consolidation of encasement concrete around duct banks shall be by hand pudding, with no mechanical vibration. 5. Conduit is subject to temperature rise. As concrete cures, allow the free end to expand by pouring the concrete from the center of the run or from one tie in point. G. Marking tape: 1. Install a detectable marking tape 12 inches above the duct bank the entire length of the duct bank. H. Restore all surfaces to their original condition unless noted otherwise. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_44-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_44 (FS-100) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean conduits of dirt and debris by use of an appropriately sized steel mandrel no less than 1/2 inch smaller than the inside diameter of the conduit. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Provide shoring and pumping to protect the excavation and safety of workers. C. Protect excavations with barricades as required by applicable safety regulations. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_05_53-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_53 (FS-100) SECTION 26_05_53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Identification of electrical equipment, devices and components. 2. Material, manufacturing and installation requirements for identification devices. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_33 - Conduits. 5. Section 26_06_01 - Conduit Schedule. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Nameplates: 1. Provide a nameplate for each piece of electrical equipment and devices, control panel and control panel components. 2. Provide all nameplates of identical style, color, and material throughout the facility. 3. Device nameplates information: a. Designations as indicated on the Drawings and identified on the Process and Instrumentation Drawings. b. All nameplates shall be reviewed and approved by Owner. B. Wire numbers: 1. Coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that every field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system: a. Wire numbers shall correspond to the wire numbers on the control drawings or the panel and circuit numbers for receptacles and lighting. b. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they are attached in the control panel. c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire number. October 2016 26_05_53-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_53 (FS-100) d. Multi-conductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub-up locations beneath freestanding equipment. All multi-conductor and instrumentation cables shall be identified at pull points as described above: 1) Label armored multi-conductor cable using the conduit number as indicated on the Drawings, following the requirements for conduit markers in Section 26_05_33. 2. Provide the following wiring numbering schemes throughout the project for field wires between process control module, (PLC), vendor control panels, (VCP), motor control centers, (MCC), field starters, field instruments, etc. OR Where: ORIGIN LOC. = Designation for originating panel or device ORIGIN TERM. = Terminal designation at originating panel or device DEST. LOC. = Designation for destination panel or device DEST. TERM. = Terminal designation at destination panel or device or PLC I/O address at destination panel: a. Identify equipment and field instruments as the origin. b. PLCs are always identified as the destination. c. Location is the panel designation for VCP, LCP, or PLC. For connections to MCCs, location is the specific starter tag and loop number. Location is the tag and loop number for motor starters, field instruments and equipment. Any hyphen in the panel designation or tag and loop number shall be omitted. d. Terminal designation is the actual number on the terminal block where the conductor terminates at field devices and vendor control panels. For multi- conductor cables, all terminal numbers shall be shown, separated by commas. e. Terminal designations at motor leads shall be the motor manufacturer’s standard terminal designation (e.g. T1, T2, T3, etc.). f. Terminal designations at PLCs where the field conductor connects to field terminal blocks for a PLC input or output shall be the PLC address (Note: the following PLC I/O numbering scheme is typical for Allen-Bradley, the numbering scheme should be modified to match that of the actual PLC manufacturer used for the project): 1) Discrete Point: W:X:Y/Z Analog Point: W:X:Y.Z Where: W = I for input, O for output X = PLC number (1, 2, 3…) Y = Slot number (01, 02, 03…) October 2016 26_05_53-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_53 (FS-100) Z = Terminal number (00, 01, 02…) for a discrete point or a word number for an analog point (1, 2, 3…) g. Terminal designations at PLCs where the conductor does not connect to a PLC I/O point shall be the terminal number with a “C” prefix (e.g. C0010). For common power after a fuse or neutrals after a switch, the subsequent points shall have and capital letter suffix starting with “A” (e.g. C0010A). 3. Case 1: Vendor control panel (VCP) to PLC cabinet: Field wire number/label: A-B/C-D A = Vendor control panel number without hyphen (VCP#) B = Terminal number within VCP (manufacturer’s or vendor’s standard terminal number) C = Process control module number without hyphen (PLC#) D = Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC input or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if not connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010) Examples: VCP#-10/PLC#-I:1:01/01 VCP#-10/PLC#-O:1:10/07 VCP#-10/PLC#-C0100 4. Case 2: Field instrument to process control module (PLC): Field wire number/label: E-F/C-D C = Process control module number without hyphen (PLC#) D = Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC input or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if not connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010) E = Field mounted instrument tag and loop numbers without hyphen (EDV#) F = Manufacturer’s standard terminal number within instrument. Use both terminal numbers for analog points separated by a comma Examples: TIT#-2,3/PLC#-I:1:01.1 TSH#-1/PLC#-I:2:01/00 5. Case 3: Remote or separately mounted starter or variable frequency drive (VFD) to process control module (PLC): Field wire number/label: J-B/C-D B = Terminal number within starter or variable frequency drive (manufacturer’s standard terminal number) C = Process control module number without hyphen (VCP#) D = Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC input or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if not connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010) J = Starter or variable frequency drive tag and loop number without hyphen (MMS#) Examples: MMS#-10/PLC#-I:1:01/01 MMS#-10/PLC#-O:2:10/07 MMS#-10/PLC#-C0010 6. Identify all spare conductors as required for other field wires with an “S” prefix: Example: S MMS#-10/PLC#-C011 October 2016 26_05_53-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_53 (FS-100) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Nameplates: a. Color. b. Size: 1) Outside dimensions. 2) Lettering. c. Material. d. Mounting means. 2. Nameplate schedule: a. Show exact wording for each nameplate. b. Include nameplate and letter sizes. 3. Wire numbers: a. Manufacturer’s catalog data for wire labels and label printer. C. Record documents: 1. Update the conduit schedule to reflect the exact quantity of wire numbers including spares and destination points for all wires. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS (NOT USED) 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_53-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_53 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Nameplates and signs: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Brady. b. Seton. B. Conductor and cable markers: 1. Heat-shrinkable tubing: a. One of the following or equal: 1) Raychem. 2) Brady. 3) Thomas & Betts. 4) Kroy. 2. Marker printer: a. The following or equal: 1) Brady. 3. Pre-printed slip-on sleeve markers: a. The following or equal: 1) Grafoplast. 2) Engineer knows of no equal. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: 1. Fabricated from white-center and red face or black-center, white face laminated plastic engraving stock: a. 3/32-inch thick material. b. Two-ply. c. With chamfered edges. d. Block style engraved characters of adequate size to be read easily from a distance of 6 feet: 1) No characters smaller than 1/8-inch in height. B. Signs: 1. Automatic equipment and high voltage signs: a. Suitable for exterior use. b. In accordance with OSHA regulations. C. Conduit and raceway markers: 1. Stainless Steel. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) October 2016 26_05_53-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_53 (FS-100) 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Nameplates: 1. Provide all nameplates for control panel operator devices (e.g. pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc.): a. Same material and same color and appearance as the device nameplates, in order to achieve an aesthetically consistent and coordinated system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Nameplates: 1. Attach nameplates to equipment with rivets, bolts or sheet metal screws, approved waterproof epoxy-based cement or install in metal holders welded to the equipment. 2. On NEMA Type 4, NEMA Type 4X, or NEMA Type 7 enclosures, use epoxy- based cement to attach nameplates. 3. Nameplates shall be aligned and level or plumb to within 1/64 inch over the entire length: a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted, or provide new enclosures at the discretion of the Engineer. C. Conductor and cable markers: 1. Apply all conductor and cable markers before termination. 2. Heat-shrinkable tubing: a. Tubing shall be shrunk using a heat gun that produces low temperature heated air. b. Tubing shall be tight on the wire after it has been heated. c. Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left to right or top to bottom. d. Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation point. D. Conduit markers: 1. Furnish and install conduit markers for every conduit in the electrical system that is identified in the conduit schedule or part of the process system: a. Conduit markings shall match the conduit schedule. October 2016 26_05_53-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_05_53 (FS-100) 2. Mark conduits at the following locations: a. All conduits routing below grade. b. All conduits that cannot be traced visually. 3. Mark conduits after the conduits have been fully painted. 4. Position conduit markers so that they are easily read from the floor. 5. Attach tags with Type 316 stainless steel wires. 6. Mark conduits before construction review by Engineer for punch list purposes. 7. Label intrinsically safe conduits in accordance with the requirements of the NEC. E. Signs and labeling: 1. Furnish and install permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be started automatically or from remote locations: a. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. b. Locate and mount in a manner to be clearly legible to operations personnel. 2. Furnish and install permanent and conspicuous warning signs on equipment (front and back), doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, manholes, etc where the voltage exceeds 600 volts. 3. Furnish and install warning signs on equipment that has more than one source of power. a. Warning signs to identify every panel and circuit number of the disconnecting means of all external power sources. 4. Place warning signs on equipment that has 120 VAC control voltage source used for interlocking. a. Identify panel and circuit number or conductor tag for control voltage source disconnecting means. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers or raceway labels that in the sole opinion of the Engineer do not meet the Engineer’s aesthetic requirements. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION (NOT USED) 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Conduit requirements: 1. As defined in Section 26_05_00 and Section 26_05_33. B. Cable requirements and definitions: 1. As defined in Section 26_05_00 and Section 26_05_19. 2. 2/CS#16: 2 conductor, 16 gauge, twisted shielded pair. 3. */C#Y: Multiconductor cable (* indicates number of conductors, Y indicates conductor size and insulation). 4. */FO: Fiber optic cable (* indicates number of fibers). 5. CAT6: Category 6 Ethernet cable. 6. MFR: Manufacturer or vendor furnished cable. 7. PULL: Pull Rope. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT SCHEDULE A. Conduit Schedule is presented on the following pages. SECTION 26_06_01 CONDUIT SCHEDULE October 2016 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_06_01.pdf (FS-100) 26_06_01-1 10188A10 CONDUIT SCHEDULE ENGINEER CAH DRAKE WRF UV PROJECT REVISION 0 UV BUILDING DATE 10/18/16 CONDUIT CONDUCTORS GROUND NUMBER DWG SIZE # SIZE TYPE # SIZE TYPE DESCRIPTION CONNECTING SEGMENTS UC100 E-UVD-02 0.75" 4 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: SAD441 TO: WIREWAY 4 #12 >> SAD441 CONTROL UC101 E-UVD-02 1" 6 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: EXF448 STARTER UC201 8 #14 XHHW-2 TO: WIREWAY 8 #14 >> EXF448 CONTROL 4 #12 >> SAD441 CONTROL 2 #12 >> EXF448 POWER UC105 E-UVD-02 0.75" 4 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: SAD442 UC106 TO: WIREWAY 4 #12 >> SAD442 CONTROL UC106 E-UVD-02 1" 6 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: EXF449 STARTER UC201 8 #14 XHHW-2 TO: WIREWAY 8 #14 >> EXF449 CONTROL 4 #12 >> SAD442 CONTROL UC105 2 #12 >> EXF449 POWER UC111 E-UVD-01 1.5" 4 4/C-#14 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: MLC4411 TO: UV MODULES VIA CABLE TRAY 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4411D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4412D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4413D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4414D/E UC112 E-UVD-02 1" 12 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: MLC4411 TO: EBE4411 VIA WIREWAY 8 #14 >> MLC4411 CONTROL 4 #14 >> SPARE UC113 E-UVD-02 0.75" 10 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: EWC4411 TO: EBE4411 VIA WIREWAY 6 #14 >> EWC4411 CONTROL 4 #14 >> SPARE UC115 E-UVD-01 1.5" 4 4/C-#14 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: MLC4415 TO: UV MODULES VIA CABLE TRAY 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4415D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4416D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4417D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4418D/E UC116 E-UVD-02 1" 12 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: MLC4415 TO: EBE4415 VIA WIREWAY 8 #14 >> MLC4415 CONTROL 4 #14 >> SPARE UC117 E-UVD-02 0.75" 10 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: EWC4415 TO: EBE4415 VIA WIREWAY 6 #14 >> EWC4415 CONTROL 4 #14 >> SPARE UC121 E-UVD-01 1.5" 4 4/C-#14 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: MLC4421 TO: UV MODULES VIA CABLE TRAY 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4421D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4412D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4413D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4414D/E UC122 E-UVD-02 1" 12 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: MLC4421 TO: EBE4421 VIA WIREWAY 8 #14 >> MLC4421 CONTROL 4 #14 >> SPARE CONDUIT SCHEDULE ENGINEER CAH DRAKE WRF UV PROJECT REVISION 0 UV BUILDING DATE 10/18/16 CONDUIT CONDUCTORS GROUND NUMBER DWG SIZE # SIZE TYPE # SIZE TYPE DESCRIPTION CONNECTING SEGMENTS UC127 E-UVD-02 0.75" 10 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: EWC4425 TO: EBE4425 VIA WIREWAY 6 #14 >> EWC4425 CONTROL 4 #14 >> SPARE UC141 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: N441 UC200 TO: WIREWAY 2 #14 >> N441 POWER UC142 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: B442 UC200 TO: WIREWAY 2 #14 >> B442 POWER UC143 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: O442 UC200 TO: WIREWAY 2 #14 >> O442 POWER UC144 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: H442 UC200 TO: WIREWAY 2 #14 >> H442 POWER UC145 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: R445 UC200 TO: WIREWAY 2 #14 >> R445 POWER UC146 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: R446 UC200 TO: WIREWAY 2 #14 >> R446 POWER UC150 E-UVD-02 1" 12 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY UC202 TO: UVG441 12 #14 >> UVG441 CONTROL UC151 E-UVD-02 0.75" 4 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: SPP441 UC201 TO: WIREWAY 4 #14 >> SPP441 CONTROL UC152 E-UVD-02 0.75" 8 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: CSU442 UC201 TO: WIREWAY 4 #14 >> CSU442 CONTROL 4 #14 >> SPARE UC154 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: R444 UC200 TO: WIREWAY 2 #14 >> R444 POWER UC155 E-UVD-02 1" 12 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY UC202 TO: UVG442 12 #14 >> UVG442 CONTROL UC160 E-UVD-02 1" 12 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY UC202 TO: UVG443 12 #14 >> UVG443 CONTROL UC162 E-UVD-02 0.75" 4 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: SPP442 UC200 TO: WIREWAY 4 #14 >> SPP442 (CALIBRATION BUTTON) UC165 E-UVD-02 1" 12 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY UC202 TO: UVG444 12 #14 >> UVG444 CONTROL UC170 E-UVD-02 1" 18 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: AHU441 UC201 TO: WIREWAY 18 #14 >> AHU441 CONTROL UC172 E-UVD-02 1" 1 MFR CABLE 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: F442 TO: F442 TRANSMITTER 1 MFR >> F442 SENSOR UC172A E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: F442 TRANSMITTER UC201 CONDUIT SCHEDULE ENGINEER CAH DRAKE WRF UV PROJECT REVISION 0 UV BUILDING DATE 10/18/16 CONDUIT CONDUCTORS GROUND NUMBER DWG SIZE # SIZE TYPE # SIZE TYPE DESCRIPTION CONNECTING SEGMENTS UC200 E-UVD-02 1.5" 18 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: MCP440 2 #14 >> N441 POWER UC141 2 #14 >> B442 POWER UC142 2 #14 >> O442 POWER UC143 2 #14 >> H442 POWER UC144 2 #14 >> R445 POWER UC145 2 #14 >> R444 POWER UC154 2 #14 >> R446 POWER UC146 4 #14 >> SPP442 (CALIBRATION BUTTON) UC162 UC201 E-UVD-02 1.5" 48 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: MCP440 4 #14 >> SPP441 CONTROL UC151 4 #14 >> CSU442 CONTROL UC152 4 #14 >> SPARE UC152 2 #14 >> F442 POWER UC172A 8 #14 >> EXF448 CONTROL UC101 18 #14 >> AHU441 CONTROL UC170 8 #14 >> EXF449 CONTROL UC106 UC202 E-UVD-02 1.5" 48 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: MCP440 12 #14 >> UVG442 CONTROL UC155 12 #14 >> UVG441 CONTROL UC150 12 #14 >> UVG444 CONTROL UC165 12 #14 >> UVG443 CONTROL UC160 UL101 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: EXF448 TO: EXF448 STARTER 2 #12 >> EXF448 POWER UL106 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: EXF449 TO: EXF449 STARTER 2 #12 >> EXF449 POWER UL110 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 MFR CABLE 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: SWH442 TO: J-BOX 1 MFR >> SWH442 POWER UL112 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 MFR CABLE 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: SWH441 TO: J-BOX 1 MFR >> SWH442 POWER UL114 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 MFR CABLE 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: SWH443 TO: J-BOX 1 MFR >> SWH442 POWER UL116 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 MFR CABLE 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: SWH CONTROLLER TO: J-BOX 1 MFR >> SWH CONTROL CABLE UL120 E-UVD-02 1" 4 #8 XHHW-2 1 #10 XHHW-2 FR: J-BOX UL200 TO: WIREWAY 2 #8 >> SWH441 POWER FEED 2 #8 >> SWH442 & SWH443 POWER FEED UL145 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: EUH445 UL202 TO: WIREWAY 2 #12 >> EUH445 POWER UL146 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: EUH446 UL202 TO: WIREWAY 2 #12 >> EUH446 POWER UL170 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: AHU441 UL202 CONDUIT SCHEDULE ENGINEER CAH DRAKE WRF UV PROJECT REVISION 0 UV BUILDING DATE 10/18/16 CONDUIT CONDUCTORS GROUND NUMBER DWG SIZE # SIZE TYPE # SIZE TYPE DESCRIPTION CONNECTING SEGMENTS UL202 E-UVD-02 1" 6 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: 1232LP1 2 #12 >> EUH445 POWER UL145 2 #12 >> EUH446 POWER UL146 2 #12 >> AHU441 POWER UL170 UL205 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: NETWORK RACK TO: MCP440 2 #12 >> MCP440 POWER UP203 E-UVD-02 1" 3 #6 XHHW-2 1 #10 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: 1232PP1 3 #6 >> HUH441 POWER UP170 UN111 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 CAT6 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: EBE4411 UN215 TO: WIREWAY 1 CAT6 >> EBE4411 NETWORK UN115 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 CAT6 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: EBE4415 UN215 TO: WIREWAY 1 CAT6 >> EBE4415 NETWORK UN121 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 CAT6 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: EBE4421 UN215 TO: WIREWAY 1 CAT6 >> EBE4421 NETWORK UN125 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 CAT6 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: EBE4425 UN215 TO: WIREWAY 1 CAT6 >> EBE4425 NETWORK UN180 E-UVD-02 1" 1 PULL ROPE FR: SCADA WORKSTATION TO: WIREWAY 1 PULL >> NETWORK UN185 E-UVD-02 1" 1 PULL ROPE FR: SCADA WORKSTATION TO: WIREWAY 1 PULL >> NETWORK UN205 E-UVD-02 2" 6 CAT6 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: MCP440 TO: NETWORK RACK 2 CAT6 >> MCP440 NETWORK 4 CAT6 >> SPARE UN210 E-SED-2A 2" 1 12/FO-SM 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: NETWORK RACK TO: NPT TUNNEL NETWORK RACK 1 12/FO-SM >> UV NETWORK UN215 E-UVD-02 1" 4 CAT6 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: MCP440 1 CAT6 >> EBE4411 NETWORK UN111 1 CAT6 >> EBE4415 NETWORK UN115 1 CAT6 >> EBE4421 NETWORK UN121 1 CAT6 >> EBE4425 NETWORK UN125 UP100 E-SED-2A 4" 3 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #1/0 XHHW-2 FR: SSB1208 TO: ATS1232 3 #4/0 >> ATS1232 POWER FEED UP101 E-SED-2A 4" 3 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #1/0 XHHW-2 FR: SSB1208 TO: ATS1232 3 #4/0 >> ATS1232 POWER FEED UP110 E-SED-2A 4" 3 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #1/0 XHHW-2 FR: SSB1211 TO: ATS1232 3 #4/0 >> ATS1232 POWER FEED UP111 E-SED-2A 4" 3 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #1/0 XHHW-2 FR: SSB1211 TO: ATS1232 3 #4/0 >> ATS1232 POWER FEED CONDUIT SCHEDULE ENGINEER CAH DRAKE WRF UV PROJECT REVISION 0 UV BUILDING DATE 10/18/16 CONDUIT CONDUCTORS GROUND NUMBER DWG SIZE # SIZE TYPE # SIZE TYPE DESCRIPTION CONNECTING SEGMENTS UP121 E-UVD-01 2" 4 #1/0 XHHW-2 1 #6 XHHW-2 FR: XFMR-1232LP1 TO: 1232LP1 4 #1/0 >> 1211 LP1 POWER FEED UP130 E-UVD-01 2" 3 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #4 XHHW-2 FR: 1232PP1 TO: XFMR-UV1 3 #4/0 >> XFMR-UV1 POWER FEED UP131 E-UVD-01 2.5" 4 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #2 XHHW-2 FR: XFMR-UV1 TO: EBE4421 4 #4/0 >> EBE4421 POWER FEED UP132 E-UVD-01 2.5" 4 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #2 XHHW-2 FR: XFMR-UV1 TO: EBE4425 4 #4/0 >> EBE4425 POWER FEED UP140 E-UVD-01 2" 3 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #4 XHHW-2 FR: 1232PP1 TO: XFMR-UV2 3 #4/0 >> XFMR-UV2 POWER FEED UP141 E-UVD-01 2.5" 4 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #2 XHHW-2 FR: XFMR-UV2 TO: EBE4411 4 #4/0 >> EBE4411 POWER FEED UP142 E-UVD-01 2.5" 4 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #2 XHHW-2 FR: XFMR-UV2 TO: EBE4415 4 #4/0 >> EBE4415 POWER FEED UP150 E-UVD-02 0.75" 3 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: 1232PP1 UP201 TO: UVG441 3 #12 >> UVG441 POWER FEED VIA DISCONNEC UP155 E-UVD-02 0.75" 3 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: 1232PP1 UP201 TO: UVG442 3 #12 >> UVG442 POWER FEED VIA DISCONNEC UP160 E-UVD-02 0.75" 3 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: 1232PP1 UP200 TO: UVG443 3 #12 >> UVG443 POWER FEED VIA DISCONNEC UP165 E-UVD-02 0.75" 3 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: 1232PP1 UP200 TO: UVG444 3 #12 >> UVG444 POWER FEED VIA DISCONNEC UP200 E-UVD-02 1" 6 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: 1232PP1 3 #12 >> UVG444 POWER FEED VIA DISCONNEC UP165 3 #12 >> UVG443 POWER FEED VIA DISCONNEC UP160 UP201 E-UVD-02 1" 6 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: 1232PP1 3 #12 >> UVG441 POWER FEED VIA DISCONNEC UP150 3 #12 >> UVG442 POWER FEED VIA DISCONNEC UP155 US100 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: T445 US201 TO: WIREWAY 1 2/CS-#16 >> T445 SIGNAL US105 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: T446 US201 TO: WIREWAY 1 2/CS-#16 >> T446 SIGNAL US141 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: N441 US202 TO: WIREWAY 1 2/CS-#16 >> N441 SIGNAL US142 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: B442 US202 TO: WIREWAY 1 2/CS-#16 >> B442 SIGNAL US143 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: O442 US202 CONDUIT SCHEDULE ENGINEER CAH DRAKE WRF UV PROJECT REVISION 0 UV BUILDING DATE 10/18/16 CONDUIT CONDUCTORS GROUND NUMBER DWG SIZE # SIZE TYPE # SIZE TYPE DESCRIPTION CONNECTING SEGMENTS US146 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: R446 US201 TO: WIREWAY 1 2/CS-#16 >> R446 SIGNAL US154 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: R444 US201 TO: WIREWAY 1 2/CS-#16 >> R444 SIGNAL US170 E-UVD-02 1" 3 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: AHU441 US202 TO: WIREWAY 2 2/CS-#16 >> AHU441 SIGNAL 1 2/CS-#16 >> SPARE US172 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: F442 US201 TO: WIREWAY 1 2/CS-#16 >> F442 SIGNAL US175 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: T442 US201 TO: WIREWAY (VIA JUNCTION BOX) 1 2/CS-#16 >> T442 SIGNAL US201 E-UVD-02 2" 6 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: MCP440 1 2/CS-#16 >> T445 SIGNAL US100 1 2/CS-#16 >> T446 SIGNAL US105 1 2/CS-#16 >> R444 SIGNAL US154 1 2/CS-#16 >> R446 SIGNAL US146 1 2/CS-#16 >> T442 SIGNAL US175 1 2/CS-#16 >> F442 SIGNAL US172 US202 E-UVD-02 2" 8 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: MCP440 1 2/CS-#16 >> N441 SIGNAL US141 1 2/CS-#16 >> B442 SIGNAL US142 1 2/CS-#16 >> O442 SIGNAL US143 1 2/CS-#16 >> H442 SIGNAL US144 1 2/CS-#16 >> R445 SIGNAL US145 2 2/CS-#16 >> AHU441 SIGNAL US170 1 2/CS-#16 >> SPARE US170 UX100 E-SED-2A 4" 1 PULL ROPE FR: SSB1208 TO: ATS1232 1 PULL >> SPARE UX101 E-SED-2A 4" 1 PULL ROPE FR: SSB1208 TO: ATS1232 1 PULL >> SPARE UX110 E-SED-2A 4" 1 PULL ROPE FR: SSB1211 TO: ATS1232 1 PULL >> SPARE UX111 E-SED-2A 4" 1 PULL ROPE FR: SSB1211 TO: ATS1232 1 PULL >> SPARE UX210 E-SED-2A 2" 1 PULL ROPE FR: UV BUILDING TO: MANHOLE 1 PULL >> SPARE UX211 E-SED-2A 2" 1 PULL ROPE FR: UV BUILDING TO: MANHOLE 1 PULL >> SPARE UX212 E-SED-2A 2" 1 PULL ROPE FR: UV BUILDING TO: MANHOLE 1 PULL >> SPARE October 2016 26_08_50-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) SECTION 26_08_50 FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Responsibilities for testing the electrical installation. 2. Adjusting and calibration. 3. Acceptance tests. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_26 - Grounding and Bonding. C. Copyright information: 1. Some portions of this Section are copyrighted by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association, Inc (NETA). See NETA publication ATS for details. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D877 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes. 2. D923 - Standard Practices for Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids. 3. D971 - Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Oil Against Water by the Ring Method. 4. D974 - Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by Color-Indicator Titration. 5. D1298 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density, or API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method. 6. D1500 - Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products (ASTM Color Scale). 7. D1524 - Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field. 8. D1816 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using VDE Electrodes. 9. D2285 - Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin Against Water by the Drop Weight Method. 10. D3612 - Standard Test Method for Analysis of Gases Dissolved in Electrical Insulating Oil by Gas Chromatography. October 2016 26_08_50-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. 43 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery. 2. 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System. 3. 95 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of AC Electric Machinery (2300 V and Above) With High Direct Voltage. 4. 421.3 - IEEE Standard for High-Potential Test Requirement for Excitation Systems for Synchronous Machines. 5. 450 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications. 6. 1106 - IEEE Recommended Prictice for Installation, Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for Stationary Applications. 7. 1188 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid (VRLA) Batteries for Stationary Applications. 8. C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers. 9. C57.13.1 – IEEE Guide for Field Testing of Relaying Current Transformers. 10. C57.13.3 - IEEE Guide for Grounding of Instrument Transformer Secondary Circuits and Cases. 11. C57.104 - IEEE Guide for the Interpretation of Gases Generated in Oil- Immersed Transformers. E. Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association (ICEA). F. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 1. ATS-2009 Standard for Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems. G. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). H. Manufacturer’s testing recommendations and instruction manuals. I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. J. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). K. Specification sections for the electrical equipment being tested. L. Shop drawings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Sections 01_75_17 and 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions: 1. Testing laboratory: The organization performing acceptance tests. October 2016 26_08_50-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Testing of all electrical equipment installed under this Contract in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and as specified in this Section. B. Conduct all tests in the presence of the Engineer or the Engineer’s representative: 1. The Engineer will witness all visual, mechanical, and electrical tests and inspections. C. The testing and inspections shall verify that the equipment is operational within the tolerances required and expected by the manufacturer, and these Specifications. D. Responsibilities: 1. Contractor responsibilities: a. Ensure that all resources are made available for testing, and that all testing requirements are met. 2. Electrical subcontractor responsibilities: a. Perform routine tests during installation. b. Demonstrate operation of electrical equipment. c. Commission the electrical installation. d. Provide the necessary services during testing, and provide these services to the testing laboratory, Contractor, and other subcontractors, including but not limited to: 1) Providing electrical power as required. 2) Operating of electrical equipment in conjunction with testing of other equipment. 3) Activating and shutting down electrical circuits. 4) Making and recording electrical measurements. 5) Replacing blown fuses. 6) Installing temporary jumpers. 3. Testing laboratory responsibilities: a. Perform all acceptance tests specified in this Section. b. Provide all required equipment, materials, labor, and technical support during acceptance tests. E. Upon completion of testing or calibration, attach a label to all serviced devices: 1. The label shall indicate the date serviced and the company that performed the service. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. LAN cable test form: 1. LAN cable test reports: a. Submit 3 copies of test reports showing the results of all tests specified in this Section: 1) Test type. 2) Test location. 3) Test date. 4) Cable number. October 2016 26_08_50-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) 5) Cable length. 6) Certification that the cable meets or exceeds the specified standard. b. Furnish hard copy and electronic copy for all traces. C. Manufacturers’ testing procedures: 1. Submit manufacturers’ recommended testing procedures and acceptable test results for review by the Engineer. D. Test report: 1. Include the following: a. Summary of Project. b. Description of equipment tested. c. Description of tests performed. d. Test results. e. Conclusions and recommendations. f. Completed test forms. g. List of test equipment used and calibration dates. h. LAN cable test reports. E. Testing laboratory qualifications: 1. Submit a complete resume and statement of qualifications from the proposed testing laboratory detailing their experiences in performing the tests specified: a. This statement will be used to determine whether the laboratory is acceptable, and shall include: 1) Corporate history and references. 2) Resume of individual performing test. 3) Equipment list and test calibration data. F. Division of responsibilities: 1. Submit a list identifying who is responsible for performing each portion of the testing. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Testing laboratory qualifications: 1. The testing laboratory may be qualified testing personnel from the electrical subcontractor’s staff or an independent testing company. 2. Selection of the testing laboratory and testing personnel is subject to approval by the Engineer based on testing experience and certifications of the individuals and testing capabilities of the organization. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION (NOT USED) 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. At least 30 days before commencement of the acceptance tests, submit the manufacturer’s complete field testing procedures to the Engineer and to the testing October 2016 26_08_50-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) laboratory, complete with expected test results and tolerances for all equipment to be tested. B. Perform testing in the following sequence: 1. Perform routine tests as the equipment is installed including: a. Insulation-resistance tests. b. Continuity tests. c. Rotational tests. 2. Adjusting and preliminary calibration. 3. Acceptance tests. 4. Demonstration. 5. Commissioning and plant start-up. 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP (NOT USED) 1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION A. Test instrument calibration: 1. Utilize a testing laboratory with a calibration program which maintains all applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy. 2. The accuracy shall be traceable to the NIST in an unbroken chain. 3. Calibrate instruments in accordance with the following frequency schedule: a. Field instruments: 6 months maximum. b. Laboratory instruments: 12 months maximum. c. Leased specialty equipment where the accuracy is guaranteed by the lessor (such as Doble): 12 months maximum. 4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment. 5. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration record for each test instrument: a. The records shall show the date and results of each calibration or test. 6. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure for each test instrument. B. Do not begin testing until the following conditions have been met: 1. All instruments required are available and in proper operating condition. October 2016 26_08_50-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) 2. All required dispensable materials such as solvents, rags, and brushes are available. 3. All equipment handling devices such as cranes, vehicles, chain falls and other lifting equipment are available or scheduled. 4. All instruction books, calibration curves, or other printed material to cover the electrical devices are available. 5. Data sheets to record all test results are available. 3.03 INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Switchboard: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding and required area clearances. d. Inspect equipment for cleanliness. e. Verify that circuit breaker/fuse sizes and types correspond to the approved submittals and the coordination study as well as to the circuit breaker’s address for microprocessor-communication packages. f. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to that indicated on the Drawings. g. Verify that wiring connections are tight and that wiring is secure to prevent damage during routine operation of moving parts. h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. i. Mechanical and electrical interlocks: 1) Attempt closure on locked-open devices. 2) Attempt to open locked-closed devices. 3) Make/attempt key-exchanges in all positions. j. Lubrication requirements: 1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts. 2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces. k. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces. l. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation. m. Exercise all active components. October 2016 26_08_50-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) n. Inspect all indicating devices for correct operation. o. Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear. p. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers as specified in this Section. q. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of surge arresters as specified in this Section. r. Inspect control power transformers: 1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition. 2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse/circuit breaker ratings match the submittal drawings. 3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and grounding contacts and interlocks. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute. 1) Perform test in accordance with NETA ATS tables. c. Perform a dielectric withstand voltage test on each bus section, each phase to ground with phases not under test grounded, in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. 2) The test voltage shall be applied for 1 minute. d. Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers as specified in this Section. e. Perform ground-resistance tests: 1) Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral and derived neutral points. f. Determine the accuracy of all meters and calibrate watthour as specified in this Section. Verify multipliers. g. Control power transformers: 1) Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground: a) Test voltages shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables or as specified by the manufacturer. b) Perform a turns-ratio test on all tap positions. 2) Perform secondary wiring integrity test: a) Disconnect transformer at secondary terminals and connect secondary wiring to a rated secondary voltage source: (1) Verify correct potential at all devices. 3) Verify correct secondary voltage by energizing primary winding with system voltage: a) Measure secondary voltage with the secondary wiring disconnected. October 2016 26_08_50-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) h. Voltage transformers: 1) Perform secondary wiring integrity test: a) Verify correct potential at all devices. 2) Verify correct secondary voltage by energizing primary winding with system voltage. i. Perform current injection tests on the entire current circuit of each switchgear or switchboard: 1) Perform current tests by secondary injection with magnitudes such that a minimum current of 1.0 ampere flows in the secondary circuit: a) Verify the correct magnitude of current at each device in the circuit. j. Perform system function tests. k. Verify operation of space heaters. l. Perform electrical tests of surge arresters as specified in this Section. 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. c. Insulation-resistance values of bus insulation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. 2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. 3) Do not proceed with dielectric withstand voltage tests until insulation- resistance values are above minimum values. d. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the test specimen is considered to have passed the test. e. Instrument transformer test values as specified in this Section. f. Investigate grounding system point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm. g. Meter accuracy shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. h. Voltage transformers: 1) Secondary wiring shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications. 2) Secondary voltage shall be as indicated on the Drawings. i. Current-injection tests shall prove current wiring is as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications. j. Results of system function tests shall match the drawings and Specifications. k. Heaters shall be operational. l. Results of electrical tests on surge arresters shall be as specified in this Section. October 2016 26_08_50-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) B. Dry type transformers: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. d. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been removed. e. Inspect equipment for cleanliness. f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. g. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding- to-ground: 1) Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. a) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. c. Calculate dielectric absorption ration or polarization index. d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral after energization and before loading. 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. c. Tap connections are left as found unless otherwise specified. d. Minimum insulation-resistance values of transformer insulation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. 2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. e. The dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index shall not be less than 1.0. f. Turns-ratio results should not deviate more than 1/2 percent from either the adjacent coils or calculated ratio. g. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral secondary voltages shall be in agreement with nameplate data. C. Liquid-filled transformers: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. October 2016 26_08_50-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect impact recorder before unloading. d. Test dew point of tank gases if applicable. e. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding and required clearances. f. Verify the presence of PCB content labeling. g. Verify removal of any shipping bracing after placement. h. Verify the bushings are clean. i. Verify that alarm, control and trip settings on temperature and level indicators are as specified. j. Verify operation of alarm, control, and trip circuits from temperature and level indicators, pressure relief device, gas accumulator, and fault pressure relay, if applicable. k. Verify that cooling fans operate correctly and that fan motors have correct overcurrent protection. l. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. m. Verify correct liquid level in tanks and bushings. n. Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas-blanketed transformers. o. Perform inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by the manufacturer. p. Test load tap-changer in accordance with NETA ATS requirements. q. Verify presence of transformer surge arresters. r. Verify de-energized tap-changer position is left as specified. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding- to-ground: 1) Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: a) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. 2) Calculate polarization index. c. Perform turns ratio tests at all tap positions. d. Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all windings in accordance with test equipment manufacturer’s published data. e. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on each bushing equipped with a power-factor/capacitance tap: 1) In the absence of a power-factor/capacitance tap perform hot-collar tests. 2) Perform tests in accordance with test equipment manufacturer’s published data. f. Perform excitation-current tests in accordance with test equipment manufacturer’s published data. g. Measure the resistance of each primary winding in each no-load tap changer position. Measure the resistance of each secondary winding in each no-load tap changer position. October 2016 26_08_50-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) h. Remove a sample of insulating liquid in accordance with ASTM D923 and test per the following standards: 1) Dielectric breakdown voltage: ASTM D877 or ASTM D1816. 2) Acid neutralization number: ASTM D974. 3) Specific gravity: ASTM D1298. 4) Interfacial tension: ASTM D971 or ASTM D2285 5) Color: ASTM D1500. 6) Visual condition: ASTM D1524. i. Remove a sample of insulating liquid in accordance with applicable standards. Sample shall be tested for the following: 1) Dissolved-gas analysis: IEEE C57.104 or ASTM D3612. j. Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers as specified in this Section: k. Test surge arresters as specified in this Section. l. Test transformer neutral grounding impedance device if applicable. m. Verify operation of cubicle or air terminal compartment space heaters. 3. Test values: a. Alarm control, and trip circuits from temperature and level indicators as well as pressure relief device and fault pressure relay shall operate within manufacturer’s recommendations for their specified settings. b. Cooling fans and pumps shall operate. c. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. d. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. e. Liquid levels in the transformer tanks and bushings shall be within indicated tolerances. f. Positive pressure shall be indicated on pressure gauge for gas-blanketed transformers. g. Minimum insulation-resistance values of transformer insulation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. 2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. h. The polarization index shall be greater than 1.0: 1) Compare to any previous values. i. Turns-ratio test result shall not deviate by more than 1/2-percent from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio. j. Maximum winding insulation power-factor/dissipation-factor values shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. k. Investigate bushing power factors and capacitances that vary from nameplate values by more than 10 percent. Hot collar tests are evaluated on a milliampere/milliwatt loss basis and the results shall be compared to values of similar bushings. l. Typical excitation-current test data pattern for a 3-legged core transformer is 2 similar current readings and 1 lower current reading. October 2016 26_08_50-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) m. Temperature corrected winding-resistance values shall compare within 1 percent of previously obtained results. n. Core insulation values shall be comparable to previously obtained results but not be less than 1.0 megohm at 500 VDC. o. Investigate the presence of oxygen in the nitrogen gas blanket. p. Insulating liquid values shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables. q. Evaluate results of dissolved-gas analysis in accordance with IEEE C57.104. r. Results of electrical tests on instrument transformers shall be as specified in this Section. s. Results of surge arrester tests shall be as specified in this Section. t. Compare grounding impedance device results to the manufacturer’s published data. u. Heaters shall be operational. D. Low voltage cables, 600 volt maximum: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare cable data with the Drawings and Specifications. b. Inspect exposed sections of cable for physical damage and correct connection as indicated on the Drawings. c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by 1 of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. d. Inspect compression applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. e. Inspect for correct identification and arrangement. f. Inspect cable jacket insulation and condition. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors: 1) Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. 2) Test duration shall be 1 minute. c. Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection. d. Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors. 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. 2) Investigate values of insulation-resistance less than the allowable minimum. October 2016 26_08_50-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) c. Cable shall exhibit continuity. d. Investigate deviations in resistance between parallel conductors. E. Low voltage molded case and insulated case circuit breakers: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage and alignment. d. Verify that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and operating the breaker. e. Verify the unit is clean. f. Verify the arc chutes are intact. g. Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition and alignment. h. Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions vital to satisfactory operation of the breaker are correct. i. Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both the breaker and its operating mechanism in accordance with manufacturers published data. j. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. k. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. l. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and arc chutes in unsealed units. m. Verify cell fit and element alignment. n. Verify racking mechanism operation. o. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. p. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with the coordination study. q. Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform electrical tests on all circuit breaker equal to or greater than 400 amps. b. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-to- phase and phase-to-ground with the circuit breaker closed and across each open pole: 1) Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. 2) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. d. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. e. Determine long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. f. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. g. Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection. h. Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection. i. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. October 2016 26_08_50-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. c. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. 2) Investigate values of insulation-resistance less than the allowable minimum. d. Microhm or dc millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data: 1) If manufacturer’s data is not available, investigate any values which deviate from adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. e. Long-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed manufacturer’s published time-current characteristic tolerance band including adjustment factors: 1) If manufacturer’s curves are not available, trip times shall not exceed the value shown in NETA ATS tables. f. Short-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed manufacturer’s published time-current tolerance band. g. Ground fault pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed manufacturer’s published time-current tolerance band. h. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as specified and within manufacturer’s published tolerances: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. i. Pickup values and trip characteristics shall be within manufacturer’s published tolerances. j. The charging mechanism shall operate in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. F. Metering devices: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. d. Record model number, serial number, firmware revision, software revision, and rated control voltage. e. Verify operation of display and indicating devices. October 2016 26_08_50-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) f. Record passwords. g. Verify unit is grounded in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. h. Set all required parameters including instrument transformer ratios, system type, frequency, power demand methods/intervals, and communications requirements. i. Inspect cover gasket, cover glass, condition of spiral spring, disk clearance, contacts, and case shorting contacts as applicable. j. Verify the unit is clean. 2. Electrical tests: a. Apply voltage or current as appropriate to each analog input and verify correct measurement and indication. b. Confirm correct operation and setting of each auxiliary input/output feature including mechanical relay, digital, and analog. c. After initial system energization, confirm measurements and indications are consistent with loads present. d. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. e. Verify accuracy of meter at all cardinal points. f. Calibrate meters in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. g. Verify that current transformer, and voltage transformer secondary circuits are intact. 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. c. Meter accuracy shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. d. Calibration results shall be within manufacturer’s published tolerances. e. Instrument multipliers shall be in accordance with system design specifications. f. Test results shall confirm the integrity of the secondary circuits of current and voltage transformers. G. Grounding systems: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Inspect ground system for compliance with that indicated on the Drawings, specified in Specifications, and in the NEC. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. d. Inspect anchorage. October 2016 26_08_50-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform fall of potential test or alternative test in accordance with IEEE 81 on the main grounding electrode or system. c. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, the system neutral and any derived neutral points. 3. Test values: a. Grounding system electrical and mechanical connections shall be free of corrosion. b. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. d. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall be as specified in Section 26_05_26. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm. H. Rotating machinery: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. d. Inspect air baffles, filter media, cooling fans, slip rings, brushes, brush rigging and shaft current discharge devices. e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. f. Perform special tests such as gap spacing and machine alignment if applicable. g. Manually rotate the rotor and check for problems with the bearings or shaft. h. Rotate the shaft and measure and record the shaft extension runout. i. Verify correct application of appropriate lubrication and lubrication systems. j. Verify that resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits conform to that indicated on the Drawings. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. October 2016 26_08_50-17 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) b. Perform insulation-resistance test in accordance with IEEE 43: 1) On motors 200 horsepower and smaller, test duration shall be 1 minute. Calculate dielectric absorption ratio. 2) On motors larger than 200 horsepower, test duration shall be 10 minutes. Calculate polarization index. c. Perform dc dielectric withstand voltage tests on machines rated at 2,300 volts and greater in accordance with IEEE 95. 1) IEEE 95 for dc dielectric withstand voltage tests. 2) NEMA MG1 for ac dielectric withstand voltage tests. d. Perform phase-to-phase stator resistance test on machines rated at 2,300 volts and greater. e. Perform insulation-resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. f. Test surge protection devices as specified in this Section. g. Test motor starter as specified in this Section. h. Perform resistance tests on resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits. i. Verify operation of motor space heater. j. Perform a rotation test to ensure correct shaft rotation. k. Measure running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full-load amperes. 3. Test values: a. Inspection: 1) Air baffles shall be clean and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data. 2) Filter media shall be clean and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data. 3) Cooling fans shall operate. 4) Slip ring alignment shall be within manufacturer’s published tolerances. 5) Brush alignment shall be within manufacturer’s published tolerances. 6) Brush rigging shall be within manufacturer’s published tolerances. b. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. d. Air-gap spacing and machine alignment shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. e. The recommended minimum insulation-resistance (IR1 min) test results in megohms shall be as specified in this Section. 1) The polarization index value shall not be less than 2.0. 2) The dielectric absorption ratio shall not be less than 1.4. f. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the test specimen is considered to have passed the test. g. Investigate phase-to-phase stator resistance values that deviate by more than 10 percent. October 2016 26_08_50-18 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) h. Power factor or dissipation factor values shall be compared to manufacturer’s published data: 1) In the absence of manufacturer’s published data compare values of similar machines. i. Tip-up values shall indicate no significant increase in power factor. j. If no evidence of distress, insulation failure or waveform nesting is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the surge comparison test, the test specimen is considered to have passed the test. k. Bearing insulation-resistance measurements shall be within manufacturer’s published tolerances: 1) In the absence of manufacturer’s published data compare values of similar machines. l. Test results of surge protection devices shall be as specified in this Section. m. Test results of motor starter equipment shall be as specified in this Section. n. RTD circuits shall conform to the design intent and machine protection device manufacturer’s published data. o. Heaters shall be operational. p. Vibration amplitudes shall not exceed values in NETA ATS tables: 1) If values exceed those in the NETA ATS tables, perform a complete vibration analysis. q. Machine rotation should match required rotation of connected load. r. Running phase-to-phase voltages should be within 1.0 percent. Running currents shall be balanced and proportional to load condition and nameplate data. I. Motor starters, low voltage: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Inspect contactors: 1) Verify mechanical operation. 2) Verify contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. f. Motor-running protection: 1) Verify overload element rating is correct for its application. 2) If motor running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating. g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. h. Lubrication requirements: 1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts. 2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces. October 2016 26_08_50-19 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) J. Surge arresters, low-voltage: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. d. Verify the arresters are clean. e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. f. Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to a ground bus or ground electrode. g. Verify that stroke counter is correctly mounted and electrically connected, if applicable. h. Record stroke counter reading. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase terminal- to- ground: 1) Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturers published data. 2) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. c. Test grounding connection as specified in this Section. 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. c. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. 2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. d. Resistance between the arrester ground terminal and the ground system shall be less than 0.5 ohm. K. Automatic transfer switches: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances. d. Verify the unit is clean. October 2016 26_08_50-20 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) e. Lubrication requirements: 1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts. 2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces. f. Verify that manual transfer warnings are attached and visible. g. Verify tightness of all control connections. h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. i. Perform manual transfer operation. j. Verify positive mechanical interlocking between normal and alternate sources. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. c. Verify settings and operation of control devices. d. Calibrate and set all relays and timers as specified in this Section. e. Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation as required by the application. f. Perform automatic transfer tests: 1) Simulate loss of normal power. 2) Return to normal power. 3) Simulate loss of emergency power. 4) Simulate all forms of single-phase conditions. g. Verify correct operation and timing of the following functions: 1) Normal source voltage-sensing relays. 2) Time delay upon transfer. 3) Alternate source voltage-sensing relays. 4) Automatic transfer operation. 5) Interlocks and limit switch function. 6) Time delay and retransfer upon normal power restoration. 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. c. Microhm or dc millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data: 1) If manufacturer’s published data is not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. d. Control devices shall operate in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. e. Relay test results shall be as specified in this Section. October 2016 26_08_50-21 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) f. Phase rotation, phasing, and synchronization shall be as specified in the system design specifications. g. Automatic transfers shall operate in accordance with manufacturer’s design. h. Operation and timing shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s and system design requirements. L. Switches, air, low-voltage: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Document. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Verify correct blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. f. Verify that fuse sizes and types as indicated on the Drawings, short-circuit studies, and coordination study. g. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity. h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of a low resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. i. Verify operation and sequencing of interlocking systems. j. Verify correct phase barrier installation. k. Verify correct operation of all indicating and control devices. l. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade and fuseholder. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-to- phase and phase-to ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) In the absence of manufacturer’s published data, use NETA ATS requirements. d. Measure fuse resistance. e. Verify cubicle space heater operation. f. Perform ground fault test as specified in this Section, if applicable. g. Perform tests on other protective devices as specified in this Section, if applicable. 3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connection by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. October 2016 26_08_50-22 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. 4. Test values – electrical: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Microhm or dc millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data: 1) If manufacturer’s published data is not available, investigate values which deviate from those of similar bus connections and sections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data. 2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. d. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent. e. Heaters shall be operational. f. Ground fault tests shall be as specified in this Section. g. Results of protective device tests shall be as specified in this Section. M. Fiber-optic cables: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare cable, connector, and splice data with the Contract Documents: b. Inspect cable and connections for physical and mechanical damage. c. Verify that all connectors and splices are correctly installed. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform cable length measurement, fiber fracture inspection, and construction defect inspection using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR): 1) OTDR test performed on fiber cables less than 100 meters shall be performed with the aid of a launch cable. 2) Adjust OTDR pulse width settings to a maximum setting of 1/1,000th of the cable length or 10 nanoseconds. b. Perform connector and splice integrity test using an optical time domain reflectometer. c. Perform cable attenuation loss measurement with an optical power loss test set: 1) Perform attenuation tests with an Optical Loss Test Set capable and calibrated to show anomalies of 0.1 dB as a minimum. 2) Test multimode fibers at 850 nanometer and 1,300 nanometer. 3) Test single mode fibers at 1,310 nanometer and 1,550 nanometer. d. Perform connector and splice attenuation loss measurement from both ends of the optical cable with an optical power loss test set: 1) At the conclusion of all outdoor splices at 1 location, and before they are enclosed and sealed, all splices shall be tested with OTDR at the optimal wavelengths (850 and 1,300 for multimode, 1,310 and 1,550 October 2016 26_08_50-23 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) for single mode), in both directions. The splices shall be tested for integrity as well as attenuation. e. Perform fiber links integrity and attenuation tests using each link shall be an OTDR and an Optical Loss Test Set: 1) OTDR traces shall be from both directions on each fiber at the 2 optimal wavelengths, 850 nanometer and 1,300 nanometer for multimode fibers. 2) Optical loss testing shall be done with handheld test sets in 1 direction at the 2 optimal wavelengths for the appropriate fiber type. Test equipment shall equal or exceed the accuracy and resolution of Agilent/HP 8147 high performance OTDR. 3. Test values: a. Cable and connections shall not have been subjected to physical or mechanical damage. b. Connectors and splices shall be installed in accordance with industry standards. c. The optical time domain reflectometer signal should be analyzed for excessive connection, splice, or cable backscatter by viewing the reflected power/distance graph. d. Attenuation loss measurement shall be expressed in dB/km. Losses shall be within the manufacturer’s recommendations when no local site specifications are available. e. Individual fusion splice losses shall not exceed 0.1 dB. Measurement results shall be recorded, validated by trace, and filed with the records of the respective cable runs. N. LAN cable testing: 1. Visual and mechanical inspections: a. Compare cable type and connections with that indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications. b. Inspect cable and connectors for physical and mechanical damage. c. Verify that all connectors are correctly installed. 2. Pre-testing: a. Test individual cables before installation: 1) Before physical placement of the cable, test each cable while on the spool with a LAN certification test device. 2) Before the cable is installed, verify that the cable conforms to the manufacturer’s attenuation specification and that no damage has been done to the cable during shipping or handling. 3) The test shall be fully documented and the results submitted to the Engineer, including a hard copy of all traces, before placement of the cable. 4) The Engineer shall be notified if a cable fails to meet specification and the cable shall not be installed unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 3. Electrical tests: a. Perform cable end-to-end testing on all installed cables after installation of connectors from both ends of the cable. b. Test shall include cable system performance tests and confirm the absence of wiring errors. 4. Test results: a. Cables shall meet or exceed TIA standards for a Category 6 installation. October 2016 26_08_50-24 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_08_50 (FS-100) 5. Test equipment: a. LAN certification equipment used for the testing shall be capable of testing Category 6 cable installation to TIA proposed Level III accuracy. Tests performed shall include: 1) Near end cross talk. 2) Attenuation. 3) Equal level far end cross talk. 4) Return loss. 5) Ambient noise. 6) Effective cable length. 7) Propagation delay. 8) Continuity/loop resistance. b. LAN certification test equipment shall be able to store and produce plots of the test results. c. Acceptable manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Agilent Technologies, WireScope 350. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. After the acceptance tests have been completed, dispose of all testing expendables, vacuum all cabinets, and sweep clean all surrounding areas. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_09_13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_09_13 (FS-100) SECTION 26_09_13 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Power meters. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_74 - Electrical System Studies 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 1. C12.20 - Electricity Meters - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes. C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C57.13.6 - Standard for High Accuracy Instrument Transformers. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions: 1. FS - Full Scale. 2. RDG - Of Reading. 3. SSM - Solid State Multifunction Power Meter. 4. THD - Total Harmonic Distortion. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Power meter data including but not limited to: a. Power requirements. b. Communications protocols. c. Input/outputs. d. Dimensions. e. Measurement functions. October 2016 26_09_13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_09_13 (FS-100) f. Front panel controls. g. Display characteristics. C. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Descriptive and technical bulletins and sales aids edited to reflect only the equipment to be provided and covering each of the components in the system. 2. A maintenance section including all instruction leaflets and technical data necessary to setup, change setup and maintain the power meters. 3. Original licensed copies of all software and software manuals. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Allen-Bradley. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 3. General Electric. 4. Schneider Electric/Square D. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) October 2016 26_09_13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_09_13 (FS-100) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Power meters: 1. Power meter type 2 (SSM2) device which shall include at a minimum: a. Individual phase currents, plus or minus 0.3 percent FS. b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral voltages, plus or minus 3 percent FS. c. Watts, VARs, VA, plus or minus 6 percent FS. d. Watt-hours 0.6 percent FS; VAR-hours 0.6 percent FS; VA-hours 0.6 percent FS. e. PF apparent 1 percent FS; PF displacement 1 percent FS. f. Frequency 0.17 percent FS. g. THD: 1) Voltage - 31st harmonic. 2) Current - 31st harmonic. h. Demand: 1) Ampere, plus or minus 0.3 percent FS. 2) Watt, VAR, VA, plus or minus 0.6 percent FS. i. Minimum and maximum values: 1) Volts (L-L), volts (L-N), current (L), watts, VARs, VA. 2) PF (apparent and displacement). 3) Frequency. 4) THD-amps, THD-volts. 5) Demand: a) Ampere, watt, VAR, VA. j. Trend analysis: 1) Two selectable parameters. k. Other features: 1) 3 form C relays, rated 10 amps. l. Synch-input kilowatt utility. m. Graphic LCD with LED backlight: 1) Seven lines, 147 characters. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Current transformers: 1. Ring type current transformers: a. Suitable for service within low or medium voltage equipment as indicated on the Drawings. b. Designed to have a mechanical and thermal rating to withstand short- circuit current, stresses, and heating effects equal to the rating of the equipment of the application. 2. Current ratio: As indicated on the Drawings, for use as a guideline: a. It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to size the current transformers to ensure that they will not saturate under the maximum available fault current at the installed location based upon the fault current study as specified in Section 26_05_74. October 2016 26_09_13-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_09_13 (FS-100) 3. Rated in accordance with IEEE C57.13.6 with accuracy of the current transformers suitable for relay accuracy class and rated for 200 percent burden for the required connected devices. 4. Identify polarity with standard marking or symbols. 5. Capable of carrying rated primary current continuously without damage. 6. Install secondary wiring from current transformers in a suitable wiring trough, or conduit to proper short-circuiting type terminal blocks for connection to relays, instruments, and other devices. B. Potential transformers: 1. Indoor dry type, single-phase, 60 hertz, with a minimum thermal capacity of not less than 400 volt-amperes at 55 Celsius rise above 40 Celsius ambient. 2. Accuracy classification determined in accordance with IEEE C57.13.6, suitable for relay accuracy class, and 200 percent burden, for the required connected devices, with the secondary voltage 120 volts. 3. Insulation levels as required for the equipment system voltage but not less then: a. 600 VAC, 10 kV BIL for 480 VAC systems. b. 5.6 KV, 60 kV BIL for 2300 and 4160 VAC systems. c. 15.5 KV, 110 kV BIL for 12.47 kV and 13.2 kV systems. 4. Identify polarity with standard markings or symbols. 5. Connect transformer secondary to potential buses as required. 6. Protect medium voltage potential transformers on the primary side with medium voltage current-limiting fuses. 7. Protect low voltage potential transformers on the primary side and secondary side with current-limiting fuses. 8. Mount medium voltage potential transformers in a separate compartment on a drawout device which, when in the FULLY WITHDRAWN position, disconnects both primary and secondary terminals of the transformer and grounds the primary potential fuses. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install power meters in the electrical equipment as indicated on the Drawings. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) October 2016 26_09_13-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_09_13 (FS-100) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_12_20-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) SECTION 26_12_20 LIQUID FILLED PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Medium voltage, outdoor, liquid-filled pad mounted transformers. A. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26_08_50 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 1.02 REFERENCES A. General: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. C57.12.00 - Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power and Regulating Transformers. 2. C57.12.26 - Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers. 3. C57.12.28 - Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment-Enclosure Integrity. 4. C57.12.70 - Standard Terminal Markings and Connections for Distribution and Power Transformers. 5. C57.12.80 - Terminology for Power and Distribution Transformers. 6. C57.12.90 - Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power and Regulating Transformers. 7. C57.91 - Guide for Loading Mineral-Oil-Immersed Power Transformers up to and including 100 MVA with 65 degrees or 55 degrees Average Winding Rise. 8. C57.93 - Guide for Installation of Liquid-immersed Power Transformers. 9. C57.98 - Guide for Transformer Impulse Tests. 10. C57.106 - Guide for Acceptance and Maintenance of Insulating Oil in Equipment. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. TR-1 - Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors. E. U.S. Department of Energy (DOE): 1. 10 CFR Part 431 - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment. October 2016 26_12_20-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Outdoor oil-filled, pad mounted transformers for operation on a 60 Hertz system with voltage and kilovolt-ampere ratings as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Suitable for continuous operation at full load at the Project location and elevation after applying any derating factors. 2. Pad mounted transformers shall be compartmental type, designed for outdoor installation on a concrete pad. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Complete installation instructions. 2. Complete storage and handling instructions. 3. Kilovolt-ampere rating, including derating calculations. 4. Primary/secondary connections. 5. Primary voltage and available taps. 6. Secondary voltage. 7. BIL rating. 8. Temperature rise. 9. Lightning arrester data. 10. %Z, %X, %R, X/R. 11. Efficiency. 12. Gross weight. 13. Torque values for all bolted connections for secondary cable connections. 14. Manufacturer’s suggested hi-potential test procedures and test levels for field- testing: a. Initial field test. b. Subsequent maintenance tests. 15. Certification from the manufacturer stating the transformer design complies with ANSI C57. 16. Type of oil. 17. Gallons of oil. 18. Weight of oil. 19. Complete MSDS sheets. C. Shop drawings: 1. Complete detailed, dimensioned drawings showing the equipment being furnished, with all pertinent information, including the following: a. Dimensions and locations of conduit entrance windows. 2. Complete nameplate schedule, except impedance. D. Installation instructions: 1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. October 2016 26_12_20-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: a. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Complete as-built dimensioned and scaled drawings for transformer. 2. Recommended periodic maintenance requirements. 3. Maintenance instructions including schedules, parts identification, troubleshooting, assembly instructions, parts list, and predicted life of parts subject to wear and deterioration. 4. Recommended field test levels and procedures before installation and for maintenance purposes after being placed in service. 5. Periodic and preventative maintenance torque values for all bolts. 6. Copies of factory test reports. F. Test reports: 1. Certified copies of test reports from factory tests. G. Record documents. H. Calculations: 1. Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the transformers to prove the transformers are suitable for the seismic requirements at the Project Site. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall be in the business of regularly manufacturing the specified transformers for minimum 10 years with satisfactory performance record. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Ship transformers to the job site on a dedicated air ride vehicle that will allow the Contractor to utilize onsite off-loading equipment: 1. Each transformer shall be shipped with a global positioning system (GPS) unit to record the shipping route. 2. Provide monitoring of the acceleration the transformer experiences during shipment: a. The GPS unit can record the acceleration. b. Utilize a G-force gauge that indicates that the acceleration has exceeded allowed values. 3. Transformers that experience vertical accelerations greater than 3 G or horizontal accelerations greater than 5 G shall not be accepted. C. Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the transformer to prevent condensation from forming. October 2016 26_12_20-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. Make all necessary field measurements to verify the equipment will fit in the allocated space in full compliance with the minimum clearances required by the NEC and local codes. B. Conduct factory acceptance test and submit certified test results for Engineer’s review. C. Ship equipment to Project Site afer successful completsion of factory acceptance test. D. Assemble equipment in the field. E. Conduct field acceptance test and submit certified test results for Engineer’s review. F. Submit manufacturer’s certification that equipment has been proplerly installed and is fully functional for Engineer’s review. G. Set taps. H. Commissioning as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized representative: 1. Inspect installation before start-up. 2. Witness energization. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Asea Brown Boveri – ABB. 2. General Electric GE. October 2016 26_12_20-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) 3. Cooper Power Systems. 4. Schneider Electric/Square D Company. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Windings: 1. Primary and secondary windings shall be high conductivity copper. B. Insulating fluid: 1. Envirotemp FR3. 2. Insulating fluid shall meet or exceed the requirements of the appropriate ANSI and ASTM fluid standards. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. The transformer and associated terminal compartments designed and constructed to be tamper-resistant: 1. No externally removable screws, bolts, or other devices. B. Ratings: 1. 3-phase, 60 Hertz. 2. Self-cooled. 3. 65-degree Celsius rise. 4. Primary voltage as indicated on the Drawings. 5. Primary connection as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Secondary voltage as indicated on the Drawings. 7. Secondary connection as indicated on the Drawings. 8. Kilovolt-ampere rating as indicated on the Drawings. 9. Basic impulse insulation level (BIL): a. 1.2 kV Class: 30 kV. b. 2.5 kV Class: 45 kV. c. 5.0 kV Class: 75 kV. d. 8.7 kV Class: 75 kV. e. 15 kV Class: 95 kV. 10. Sound levels: a. In accordance with NEMA TR1. b. Measurement procedure in accordance with ANSI C57.12.90. 11. Efficiency: a. Transformers 2,500 kVA and less shall have an efficiency rating in accordance with DOE 10 CFR Part 431. 12. Short-circuit capacity: a. Mechanical short-circuit capability in accordance with ANSI C57.12.90. 13. Thermal short-circuit capability in accordance with ANSI C57.12.00. 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Core and coil: 1. Manufactured from burr-free, grain-oriented silicon steel laminations and stacked to eliminate gaps in the corner joints. October 2016 26_12_20-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) 2. Insulated with B-stage, epoxy coated, diamond pattern, insulating paper, thermally cured under pressure to ensure proper bonding of conductor and paper. 3. Clamped and braced to resist distortion caused by short-circuit stresses within ratings or by shipping and handling and to prevent the shifting of core laminations. 4. Vacuum processed to ensure maximum penetration of insulating fluid into the coil insulation system: a. Energize the windings under vacuum to heat the coils and drive out moisture. b. While under a vacuum and the coils are heated, fill the tank with preheated, filtered and degassed insulating fluid. B. Tank: 1. Conforming to the enclosure integrity requirements of ANSI C57.12.28. 2. Equipped with extra-heavy duty, welded-in-place lifting lugs and jacking pads. a. Provide adequate cross-bracing of the base to allow skidding or rolling in any direction. 3. Capable of withstanding a pressure of 7 pounds per square inch gauge without permanent distortion, and 15 pounds per square inch gauge without rupturing. 4. Provide a pressure relief valve as a means to relieve pressure in excess of pressure resulting from normal operation: a. Cracking pressure: 10 pounds per square inch gauge within 2 psig. b. Resealing pressure: 6 pounds per square inch gauge minimum. c. Zero leakage from reseal pressure to 8 pounds per square inch gauge. d. Flow at 15 pounds per square inch gauge: 35 scfm minimum. C. Terminal compartments: 1. Conforming to the enclosure integrity requirements of ANSI C57.12.28. 2. Full-height, air filled primary and secondary terminal compartments with hinged doors shall be located side-by-side separated by a steel barrier, with the primary compartment on the left, complete with tamper resistant hardware. 3. Hinges and pins to be passivated Type 304 stainless steel or equivalent corrosion-resistant metal. 4. Doors and compartment hood shall be removable: a. Removable doorsill on compartments shall be provided to permit rolling or skidding of unit into place over conduit stubs in foundations. 5. The doors in both the high voltage section and the low voltage section shall be able to be latched in the open position. 6. The entire terminal compartment for the transformer shall be bolted to the transformer so that the terminal compartment may be unbolted from the transformer and the transformer removed without disturbing conduits that enter the compartment from the side or top. 7. Minimum of 30 inches deep. 8. Secondary compartment: a. The secondary compartment shall enclose the low voltage bushings and provide for incoming cable from below the compartment. b. This compartment shall also house: 1) Liquid level indicator. 2) Drain valve with sampling device. 3) Dial type thermometer. 4) Pressure relief valve. October 2016 26_12_20-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) 5) Vacuum pressure gauge. c. Door to low voltage section shall have a 3-point latching mechanism with pad-locking provision. 9. Primary compartment: a. The primary line compartment shall enclose the high voltage bushings and provide for incoming cables from below the compartment. 1) Coordinate primary bushing size with incoming cables size as indicated on the Drawings. b. This compartment shall also house: 1) Dead front lightning arresters. 2) No-load tap changer. 3) Parking stands for 6 elbows. c. The primary compartment shall be accessible only after the door for the secondary compartment has been opened. The door shall be held closed by a captive bolt; access to this bolt shall be provided only when the door to the low voltage section is opened. 10. Primary terminals: a. Dead front construction, in accordance with ANSI C57.12.26, utilizing high voltage elbows for connections to primary cable and lightning arresters. b. Terminal arrangement with 6-bushing wells: 1) 3 for terminating primary power cables. 2) 3 for connecting lightning arresters. c. Supporting structure within cabinet to support cables and eliminate mechanical stress on insulators. d. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide the option for bayonet fuses on the primary. 11. Secondary terminals: a. Four low voltage spade bushings with 2 holes for each cable, in accordance with ANSI C57.12.26. b. Extend low voltage bushings as necessary to accommodate the cable arrangement indicated on the Drawings or indicated on the conduit schedule: 1) Extension via a fully rated, tin-plated, copper bus system braced to withstand the available fault current. c. Neutral brought out through an insulated bushing and externally grounded to the tank with a removable ground strap. d. Supporting structure within cabinet to support cables and eliminate mechanical stress on insulators. D. De-energized tap changer: 1. Furnish with full capacity high-voltage taps: a. Two 2-1/2 percent taps above and below rated voltage. 2. Labeled to indicate that the transformer must be de-energized before operating the tap changer as required by IEEE C57.12.10. 3. Externally operated no-load tap changer switch with snap action switch and lever handle. 4. Padlocking provision in each tap position. 5. Position indication. October 2016 26_12_20-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Lightning arresters: 1. High voltage dead front design for elbow connection. 2. Metal oxide varistor arresters. 3. Distribution class arresters. 4. Rating as indicated on the Drawings and/or consistent with the distribution voltage. B. Tank ground pads: 1. Two stainless steel pads, welded to the tank wall, with unpainted surfaces: a. One pad in primary compartment. b. One pad in secondary compartment: 1) If additional load ground connections are required, a tin-plated, copper equipment ground bus shall be bolted to the pad. C. Dial-type thermometer: 1. Direct stem mounted in a closed well so that the thermometer can be removed without breaking the tank seal: a. The well shall be threaded into a fitting that is welded to the transformer tank wall. 2. The thermometer shall have a slave hand which is moved by the indicating hand to indicate maximum oil temperature. The slave hand shall be externally resettable. D. Sampling device: 1. Allow for sampling of the transformer insulating fluid. 2. Threaded into a fitting that is welded to the transformer tank wall. E. Liquid level gauge: 1. Dial-type liquid level gauge. F. Vacuum pressure gauge: 1. 10 pounds per square inch gauge vacuum to plus 10 pounds per square inch gauge scale: G. Pressure relief device: 1. Located in the air space in the transformer tank to provide a method of relieving internal tank pressure. 2. Self-relieving. 3. Indicating. 4. Operating pressure: 10 within 2 pounds per square inch gauge. H. Nameplates: 1. Provide nameplate as specified in Section 26_05_53 and the following: a. Provide complete nameplates identifying equipment, caution, voltage, etc. b. Provide complete nameplates for both inside and outside of the transformer terminal compartments. c. Provide diagrammatic nameplate. I. Bolted 8-inch (minimum) diameter round handhold on cover. J. Lifting lugs at each corner of tank for lifting complete transformer. October 2016 26_12_20-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) K. Jacking facilities at each corner of base for jacking the complete transformer. L. Base designed for rolling or skidding in any direction. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION A. Tanks: 1. Construction: Sealed tank construction with welded cover. Permanently locate an inorganic gasket between the cover and the tank flange during the welding of the transformer cover to prevent the entrance of weld spatter into the tank. 2. Large handhole with bolted cover and protected with a weather cover. 3. 4 lifting hooks. 4. Jacking pads. 5. Fluid sample valve. 6. Designed for 7 pounds per square inch gauge without permanent distortion; 12 pounds per square inch gauge when silicone oil insulating fluid is specified. 2.10 FINISHES A. In accordance with ANSI C57.12.28 including the following performance requirements: 1. Salt spray test. 2. Crosshatch adhesion test. 3. Humidity test. 4. Impact test. 5. Oil resistance test. 6. Ultraviolet accelerated weathering test. 7. Abrasion resistance - taber abraser. B. Procedure: 1. Clean with an alkaline cleaning agent to remove grease and oil. 2. Chemically bond iron phosphate coating to metal surface to assure coating adhesion and retard corrosion. 3. Prime metal surface with an electrodeposited powder epoxy to provide a barrier against moisture, salt, and corrosives. 4. Coat with an electrostatically applied, oven-cured polyester powder coat to enhance abrasion and impact resistance. 5. Topcoat: Liquid polyurethane coating to seal and add ultraviolet protection. a. Color: Munsell Green 7GY. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) October 2016 26_12_20-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. C. General: 1. Furnish concrete pad and all lugs, bolts, anchors, sealants, and other accessories needed to complete the installation of the transformer. 2. Assemble and install the transformer in the location and layout indicated on the Drawings. 3. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawings. 4. Raise the tank above the pad to protect the bottom finish during installation and to minimize corrosion due to moisture accumulation. 5. Furnish components and equipment as required to complete the installation. 6. Replace any hardware lost or damaged during installation or handling. 7. Position the transformer so all required working space and clearance requirements of the National Electrical Code and the local building authorities are met. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Perform the following factory tests as required by IEEE C57.12.00 and in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90: 1. No-load (85 degrees Celsius) losses at rated current. (Maximum allowable no load losses: 10 percent.) 2. Total (85 degrees Celsius) losses at rated current. (Maximum allowable total losses: 6 percent.) 3. Percent impedance (85 degrees Celsius) at rated current. 4. Excitation current (100 percent voltage) test. 5. Winding resistance measurement tests. 6. Turns ratio tests using all tap settings. 7. Polarity and phase relation tests. 8. Temperature test. C. Verification of performance: 1. Submit manufacturer's certified test results before shipping the transformer. October 2016 26_12_20-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_12_20 (FS-100) 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_08_50. B. Any and all other Work required to make the transformer ready for testing and energization. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Set the transformer taps as required to obtain nominal output voltage on the secondary terminals. 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_22_14-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_22_14 (FS-100) SECTION 26_22_14 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Enclosed dry-type transformers: a. Rated 1 to 1,000 kilovolt-amperes, single and 3-phase. b. Primary voltage 600 volts and below. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 – Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C57.96 – Distribution and Power Transformers, Guide for Loading Dry-Type. 2. 389 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Electronics Transformers and Inductors. C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C57.12.01 - Standard General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers Including Those with Solid Cast and/or Resin Encapsulated Windings. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. TP-1 - 2002 - Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers. 2. TP-2 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Distribution Transformers. E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 1. 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers. F. U.S. Department of Energy (DOE): 1. 10 CFR Part 431 - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_22_14-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_22_14 (FS-100) 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Provide 3-phase or 1-phase, 60 hertz dry-type with voltage ratings, kilovolt-ampere capacities, and connections as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Transformers shall provide full capacity at the Project elevation and environmental conditions as specified in Section 26_05_00 after all derating factors have been applied. 2. Suitable for continuous operation at full rating with normal life expectancy in accordance with ANSI C57.96. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. 2. Nameplate data. 3. Dimensions: a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. 4. Inrush current. 5. Insulation system and temperature constraints. 6. Number and rating of taps. 7. Sound levels. 8. Connection diagrams: a. Primary. b. Secondary. 9. BIL rating. 10. Required clearances. 11. Percent impedance. 12. Efficiency. 13. Certification of full capacity capability at the Project elevation and ambient conditions. 14. K-rating. 15. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F submit the following as specified in Section 26_05_00: a. Manufacturer’s statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data. b. Manufacturer’s special seismic certification with substantiating test data. C. Installation instructions: 1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: a. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. October 2016 26_22_14-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_22_14 (FS-100) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. General Electric. 2. Jefferson. 3. Schneider Electric/Square D. 4. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 5. ABB. B. Drive isolation transformers: One of the following or equal: 1. General Electric. 2. Schneider Electric/Square D. 3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Cores: 1. Non-aging, grain-oriented silicon steel. 2. Magnetic flux densities below the saturation point. October 2016 26_22_14-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_22_14 (FS-100) B. Windings: 1. High-grade magnet wire. 2. Impregnated assembly with non-hydroscopic, thermo-setting varnish: a. Cured to reduce hot-spots and seal out moisture. 3. Material electrical grade: a. Copper. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. 10 kilovolts BIL for 600-volt class windings. 2. Sound levels, in accordance with ANSI 389 test conditions, not to exceed: Kilovolt-Amperes Range Audible Sound Level (db) 1-9 40 10-50 45 51-150 50 151-300 55 301-500 60 501-700 62 701-1000 64 3. Taps: a. 15 kilovolt-amperes and less: 1) Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. b. 25 kilovolt-amperes and larger: 1) Four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. 2) Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above rated voltage. c. Operated by a tap changer handle or tap jumpers accessible through a panel. 4. Terminals: a. UL listed for either copper or aluminum conductors. b. Rated for 75 degrees Celsius. 5. Daily overload capacities, at rated voltage and without reduction in life, in accordance with ANSI C57.96. B. Energy efficient transformers 15 kilovolt-amperes and larger: 1. Insulation class: 220 degrees Celsius. 2. Temperature rise: 80 degrees Celsius, except as noted below: a. 150-degree Celsius rise for dry-type transformers located in motor control centers. 3. Efficiency: a. In accordance with DOE 10 CFR Part 431. C. Drive isolation transformers: 1. Specifically designed to power adjustable speed drives: a. Direct current drives with silicon-controlled rectifiers. b. Variable frequency drives with IGBTs. 2. Provide line isolation. October 2016 26_22_14-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_22_14 (FS-100) 3. With added coil bracing and symmetrically placed taps to minimize mechanical forces caused by the severe and high frequency firing of solid-state devices on the input stages of the variable frequency drives. 4. Mechanically designed to protect the transformer from the regenerative duty and frequent short circuits associated with drives. 5. Delta-Wye connection: a. Designed to trap the triplen harmonics generated by the drives from reaching the power lines. b. Provide a grounded connection from the secondary to the drives that isolate the secondary neutral from the primary neutral. 6. UL listed and recognized: a. UL 1561. D. Enclosures: 1. Heavy gauge steel: a. Outdoor: Moisture and water resistant with rodent screens over all openings and in a weather-protected enclosure, NEMA Type 3R. b. Indoor: NEMA Type 2. 2. Louvers to limit coil temperature rise to the value stated above, and case temperature rise to 50 degrees Celsius. 3. Built-in vibration dampeners to isolate the core and coils from the enclosure: a. Neoprene vibration pads and sleeves. 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Nameplates: 1. Non-corrosive metal or UL listed non-metallic: a. Stamped, engraved or printed with the following information: 1) Phases. 2) Frequency. 3) Kilovolt-ampere rating. 4) Voltage ratings. 5) Temperature rise. 6) Impedance. 7) Insulation class. 8) BIL rating. 9) Connection diagram. 10) Weight. 11) Manufacturer. 12) The identification “transformer”. 13) Classes of cooling. 14) Tap voltage(s). 15) Vector diagram. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) October 2016 26_22_14-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_22_14 (FS-100) 2.10 FINISHES A. Finish to consist of de-greasing, phosphate cleaning, and an electrodeposited manufacturer’s standard gray enamel rust-inhibiting paint. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. C. General: 1. Floor, wall, platform, motor control center, packaged power supply, or roof mounted, as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install where not in direct contact with building structure. 3. Install on single layer vibration pad under the entire mounting surface. a. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Korfund. 4. Make any necessary connections to the enclosure with liquidtight flexible conduit having neoprene gaskets and insulated ground bushings. 5. Ground the enclosure: a. To an equipment ground conductor in the conduit. b. To the facility grounding electrode system. 6. Floor mounted transformers: a. Install transformers on 3-1/2-inch housekeeping pads. b. Install transformers with adequate space from walls or other enclosures for proper ventilation in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATIONS, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Factory tests: 1. Applied voltage test to each winding and from each winding to the core: a. 600-volt class winding 4.5 kilovolt. October 2016 26_22_14-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_22_14 (FS-100) 2. Induced voltage test at 2 times normal voltage and 400 hertz for 1,080 cycles. 3. Voltage ratio and polarity. 4. Sound level, performed in a test room with ambient sound level not exceeding 24 db. 5. Perform all tests in accordance with UL 1561. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Set the transformer taps as required to obtain nominal output voltage on the secondary terminals. 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_24_14-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_14 (FS-100) SECTION 26_24_14 GROUP-MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Free standing, dead-front type metal-enclosed distribution, low voltage switchboards, utilizing group mounted circuit protective devices. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26_28_01 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 6. Section 26_43_14 - Surge Protective Devices. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): 1. PB-2 - Dead-front Distribution Switchboards. C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 50 - Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 2. 891 - Switchboards. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Factory assembled, wired, and tested switchboards, with major components being products of a single manufacturer, including but not limited to, circuit breakers, bus and enclosure with accessories and features specified in this Section and indicated on the Drawings. B. Description of sections: 1. Space for future devices: a. Where indicated on the Drawings, space for future devices shall include: 1) All necessary bus. 2) Device supports. 3) Device mounting equipment. 4) Device connections to bus work. October 2016 26_24_14-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_14 (FS-100) 5) Wire troughs or raceway space. 6) Unused device space shall be covered with blank code gauge steel covers or doors. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer of switchboard. 2. Manufacturer of all component parts of switchboard. 3. Weight of switchboard. 4. Dimensions: a. Height. b. Length. c. Width. 5. Nameplate schedule. 6. Bill of material. 7. Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Phase. c. Current. d. Interrupting rating (circuit breakers and fuses). e. Momentary current rating. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Name and telephone number of manufacturer’s authorized parts and repair provider. 10. Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in: a. Section 26_28_01. C. Shop drawings: 1. Layout drawings: a. Complete, detailed, and scaled switchboard layout: 1) Front panel. 2) Sub-panels. 3) Interior panels. 4) Top and bottom conduit windows. D. Installation instructions: 1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: a. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. E. Operating and maintenance manuals: 1. Submit operating instructions and a maintenance manual for the switchboard(s) furnished and/or installed under this Contract. October 2016 26_24_14-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_14 (FS-100) 2. Maintenance manual: a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions covering all details pertaining to care and maintenance of all equipment as well as data identifying all parts. b. Manuals to include but are not limited to the following: 1) Adjustment and test instructions covering the steps involved in the initial test, adjustment, and start-up procedures. F. Test forms and reports: 1. Manufacturer to furnish a certified report after the start-up: a. Report must state that the installation is complete and satisfactory, or list items requiring additional and a proposal for the corrective actions. G. Certification letters: 1. Provide a letter from the switchboard manufacturer that lists every paragraph, subparagraph etc. of this Section and states compliance or non-compliance with said paragraph. If non-compliance is indicated, provide an explanation for the deviation and alternative method to address the non-compliance. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Sections and devices shall be UL listed and labeled. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of 5 years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.07 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Ship the switchboard to the job site on a dedicated air ride vehicle that will allow the Contractor to utilize onsite off-loading equipment: 1. Energize space heaters in NEMA 3R switchboards. C. Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the switchboard to prevent condensation from forming. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. Conduct the initial fault current study as specified in Section 26_05_74 and submit results for Engineer’s review. B. Ship equipment to Project Site after successful completion of factory acceptance test. October 2016 26_24_14-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_14 (FS-100) C. Assemble equipment in the field. D. Submit manufacturer’s certification that equipment has been properly installed and is fully functional for Engineer’s review. E. Conduct Owner’s training sessions. F. Commissioning as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.10 SCHEDULING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, "Pow-R-Line C.” 2. General Electric Company, "Spectra Series.” 3. Schneider Electric/Square D. “Power-Style QED.” B. Circuit breakers: Same manufacturer as the switchboard. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. Switchboard: 1. Furnish low voltage Class 1 switchboards as specified and indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide complete and functional switchboards with required controls. 3. Furnish and install devices or accessories not described in this Section but necessary for the proper installation and operation of the equipment. October 2016 26_24_14-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_14 (FS-100) B. Voltage ratings: 1. Voltage level and configuration: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Frequency: 60 hertz. 3. Solidly grounded system insulation level: a. Twice the rated voltage plus 1,000 volts. C. Bus: 1. General: a. Tin-plated copper. b. Bus cross-section in accordance with UL heat rise requirements. c. Current density of 1,000 amperes per square inch. d. Mounted on supports of high-impact, non-tracking insulators. e. Phase A-B-C bus arrangement: 1) Top-to-bottom, left-to-right, front-to-back throughout the switchboard. f. Symmetrical short circuit current bracing of as indicated on the Drawings. g. Continuous current rating as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Horizontal bus: a. Provisions for future connections to additional switchboard sections. 3. Ground bus: a. Sized per UL 891. D. Enclosure: 1. General: a. Self-supporting structures bolted together to form the required line-up. b. All sections rear aligned. c. Dead-front. d. Conduit entry: 1) Open-bottom. 2) Removable top cover. 2. Frame: a. Die-formed 12 gauge steel. 3. Covers: a. Bolt-on. b. Code gauge steel. c. Removable front covers. 1) Held in place by captive screws. 4. Rating: a. NEMA Type 3R: 1) Sloped roof. 2) Filtered roof vents. 3) Space heaters to prevent condensation. 4) Doors: a) Front and rear. b) Wind stop on each door. c) 3-point catch with provision for padlock. d) Front to rear full depth lifting beams. 5) Gasketed. 6) Non walk-in construction. October 2016 26_24_14-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_14 (FS-100) 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Circuit breakers: 1. General: a. Molded case circuit breakers as specified in Section 26_28_01. b. Frame, trip and short circuit ratings as indicated on the Drawings. B. Wiring: 1. Provide all necessary internal wiring, fuse blocks, and terminal blocks as required. 2. Number all wires at each end and indicate wire numbers on shop drawings. 3. Type SIS switchboard wire with at least 26 strands. 4. Minimum wire size: a. No. 14 for control circuits. b. No. 12 for potential and current transformer circuits. 5. Numbered and labeled in accordance with Section 26_05_53. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Surge protective devices: 1. Provide surge protective devices as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in Section 26_43_14. B. Nameplates: 1. Provide engraved plastic nameplates to identify: a. Switchboard units. b. Door mounted components. c. Interior mounted devices. 2. As specified in Section 26_05_53. 3. Engraved with the circuit number and circuit name as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Manufacturers labels: a. Each vertical section shall have a label identifying: 1) Serial number. 2) Shop order number. 3) Bus rating. 4) Vertical section reference number. 5) Date of manufacture. C. Warning signs: 1. Voltage: a. Provide a minimum of 2 warning signs on the front of the switchboard lineup and 2 on the back. b. Red laminated plastic engraved with white letters approximately 1/2 inch high. c. Signs shall read: 1) "WARNING-HIGH VOLTAGE-KEEP OUT". 2. Arc flash: a. Provide one warning sign for each switchboard compartment. October 2016 26_24_14-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_14 (FS-100) b. Signs shall have read a minimum of: 1) “DANGER ELECTRIC ARC FLASH HAZARD.” 2) Signs shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70E and NEC Article 110.16. D. Lugs: 1. For all external connections of No. 6 AWG or larger. 2. UL listed for copper or aluminum conductors. 3. Rated for 75-degree Celsius conductors. 4. Lugs shall be of the compression type in design requiring a hydraulic press and die for installation. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES A. Chemically clean all steel surfaces before painting. B. Exterior color manufacturer’s standard gray over phosphate-type rust inhibitor. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. C. General: 1. Furnish all cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, and other accessories needed to complete the installation of the switchboard. 2. Assemble and install the switchboard in the location and layout indicated on the Drawings. 3. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawings. 4. Furnish components and equipment as required to complete the installation. 5. Replace any hardware lost or damaged during the installation or handling to provide a complete installation. 6. Install the switchboard on a 3-1/2-inch raised concrete housekeeping pad: a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units. b. Weld and/or bolt the switchboard frame to be to the leveling channels. October 2016 26_24_14-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_14 (FS-100) 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 REINSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Factory testing: 1. Perform standard factory tests on the panelboards: 2. Test in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm. 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_24_16-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_16 (FS-100) SECTION 26_24_16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Panelboards serving feeder circuits and branch circuits. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26_28_01 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 6. Section 26_43_14 - Surge Protective Devices. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 67 - Standard for Panelboards. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Circuit breaker panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedules, one-lines, and where indicated on the Drawings: 1. Service voltage and configuration as indicated on the panel schedules. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer of panelboard. 2. Bill of material. 3. Assembly ratings including: a. Voltage. b. Phase. c. Continuous current. d. Short circuit interrupting rating. 4. NEMA enclosure type. October 2016 26_24_16-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_16 (FS-100) 5. Cable terminal sizes based upon actual feeder and sub-feeder conductors used. 6. Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in Section 26_28_01. C. Shop drawings: 1. Drawings to contain: a. Overall panelboard dimensions, interior panel dimensions, and wiring gutter dimensions: 1) Height. 2) Length. 3) Width. b. Weight. c. Anchoring locations. d. Breaker layout drawing with dimensions: 1) Location of the main, branches, solid neutral, and ground. e. Conduit entry/exit locations. 1) Identify all conduit entry/exit locations and restrictions. f. Individual panel schedules identifying breaker locations, ratings, and nameplate designations within the panelboard, for every panelboard. D. Installation instructions: 1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: a. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. E. Operations and maintenance manual: 1. Provide a complete manual for the operation and maintenance of the panelboard, circuit breakers, devices, and accessories: a. Including but not limited to: 1) Instruction narratives and bulletins. 2) Renewal parts lists. 3) Time-current curves for all devices. F. Calculations: 1. Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the panelboard to prove the panelboard is suitable for the seismic requirements at the Project Site. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Panelboards shall be UL listed and labeled. 1. Where indicated as service entrance equipment, panelboards shall be UL labeled and listed “Suitable for Service Entrance.” 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_24_16-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_16 (FS-100) 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Schneider Electric/Square D Company. B. Circuit breakers: 1. Same manufacturer as the panelboard. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. Provide panelboards with: 1. Molded-case circuit breakers with trip ratings as shown on the panel schedules. 2. Spares and spaces for future circuit breakers in panels as shown on the panel schedules. B. Short circuit rating: 1. Provide panelboards with short-circuit ratings as indicated on the Drawings: 2. Testing method in accordance with UL 67. 3. Mark each panelboard with its maximum short circuit rating at the supply voltage. 4. Panelboards shall be fully rated. October 2016 26_24_16-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_16 (FS-100) 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Enclosure: 1. NEMA enclosure type as indicated on the Drawings. a. Where not indicated on the Drawings, as specified in Section 26_05_00 for the installed location. 2. Minimum width: 20 inches. 3. Gutter space in accordance with the NEC: a. Minimum of 4 inches of gutter space. 4. Dead-front, no live parts when the panelboard is in service. 5. Enclose entire panelboard bus assembly in a corrosion resistant galvanized steel cabinet. 6. 4-piece front to provide ease of wiring access. 7. Lockable, hinged door over the protective devices with a flush, cylinder tumbler-type lock with catch and door pull. a. Minimum 2 keys per panelboard. b. Key all panelboard locks alike. 1) Match locks on existing panelboards to the extent possible. 8. Circuit directory frame and card on the inside of the door. 9. Interior design such that replacement of circuit breakers does not require disturbing adjacent units or removal of the main bus connectors. 10. Outdoor locations: Provide NEMA Type 4X enclosures with a NEMA Type 4X stainless steel outer enclosure (with a hinged door) and a NEMA Type 1 interior panelboard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Bus: 1. General: a. Tin-plated copper. 2. Phase bus: a. Full size and height without reduction. b. Sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees Celsius: c. Insulate all current carrying parts from ground and phase-to-phase with a high dielectric strength insulator. 3. Ground bus: a. Copper, solidly bonded. 4. Neutral bus: a. Provide where indicated on the Drawings. b. 100 percent rated. c. Provide lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 5. Provide insulation barriers over the vertical bus behind the dead front shield to provide increased safety during field service. C. Lugs: 1. UL listed for copper and aluminum wire: a. Provide lugs rated for 75-degree Celsius terminations. b. Provide bolted or compression main lug terminations as required for the incoming cable size. October 2016 26_24_16-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_16 (FS-100) D. Circuit breakers: As specified in Section 26_28_01 and as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Provide all circuit breakers with bolt-on connections: a. Plug-in circuit breakers are not allowed. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Surge protective devices: 1. Furnish panelboards with surge protective devices as indicated on the Drawings. 2. As specified in Section 26_43_14. B. Nameplates: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_53. 2. Install on outside of door. 3. Indicating: a. Panel designation. b. Voltage. c. Number of phases and configuration. C. Circuit identification labels: 1. Provide index cards behind heavy clear plastic in cardholders on the inside of the doors. 2. Type all information on the cards using designations in the panel schedules. 3. Laminated on both sides. D. Pad locking mechanism: 1. Provide a pad locking attachment to allow circuit breakers to be locked in the off position. 2. At a minimum, provide 1 mechanism per panelboard: a. Provide multiple mechanisms if required to accommodate all circuit breaker frame sizes in the panelboard. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES A. Finish stand-alone panelboards with a primer, rust-resistant phosphate undercoat, and 2 coats of oven-baked enamel with manufacturer’s standard gray. B. Finish panelboards mounted in motor control centers to match the motor control center finish and color. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) October 2016 26_24_16-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_16 (FS-100) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. C. General: 1. Surface, flush or MCC mounted as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Mount rigidly to structural members with exposed surfaces plumb and level to within 1/32 inch. 3. Perform work in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawings. 4. Provide all brackets, hangers, supports, and hardware for mounting as required. 5. In all NEMA Type 4 and NEMA Type 4X locations, mount panelboards on 7/8-inch deep stainless steel preformed channel, with channel running vertically from top to bottom of panelboard: a. Use only stainless steel mounting hardware. 6. Mount panelboard so that top operating handle is not more than 6 feet- 7 inches above the operating floor. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Factory testing: 1. Perform standard factory tests on the panelboards: 2. Test in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_24_16-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_24_16 (FS-100) 3.12 SCHEDULES A. Circuiting within the panelboard shall match the panel schedules as indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide typewritten schedule in each panelboard. END OF SECTION October 2016 26_27_26-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_27_26 (FS-100) SECTION 26_27_26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Plates. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. W-C 596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for. 2. W-S 896/2 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification). C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. WD1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems, Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 3. OS1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. 4. WD6 - Wiring Devices Dimensional Specifications. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 20 - General Use Snap Switches. 2. 498 - Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. 3. 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices. 4. 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. 5. 1472 - Solid State Dimming Controls. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions: 1. GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupter. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Switches, receptacles, and plates as indicated on the Drawings wired and operable to form a complete system. October 2016 26_27_26-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_27_26 (FS-100) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. C. Shop drawings: 1. Engraving schedule: a. Furnish complete engraving schedule for engraved nameplates. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Wiring devices shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Switches: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Hubbell. b. Leviton. c. Cooper Wiring Devices. October 2016 26_27_26-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_27_26 (FS-100) B. Receptacles: 1. General purpose receptacles: One of the following or equal: a. Hubbell. b. Leviton. c. Cooper Wiring Devices. C. Plates: 1. General location: The following or equal: a. Pass and Seymour. b. Cooper Wiring Devices. 2. Wet or corrosive areas: One of the following or equal: a. Hubbell. b. Cooper Wiring Devices. c. Thomas and Betts. d. Pass and Seymour. 3. In-use covers: One of the following or equal: a. TayMac. b. Cooper Wiring Devices. c. Pass and Seymour. d. Thomas and Betts. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Switches: 1. General: a. 120-277 VAC. b. 20 ampere. c. Listed in accordance with UL 20. d. Designed and constructed in accordance with FS W-S-896/2. e. Back and side wired unless otherwise indicated. f. Integral grounding terminal. g. Totally enclosed: 1) Color-coded body with color corresponding to ampere rating. h. Provide switches with the operator style and contact arrangement as indicated on the Drawings and as required for proper operation. i. Color: 1) Ivory in finished areas. 2) Brown in all other areas. 2. General purpose switches: a. Toggle type. 3. Switches for use with photocell: a. Maintained contact. b. Two circuit. c. Three position: 1) Center off. October 2016 26_27_26-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_27_26 (FS-100) B. Receptacles: 1. General purpose receptacles: a. Single or duplex as indicated on the Drawings. b. 125 VAC. c. 20 ampere or as indicated on the Drawings. d. NEMA Type 5-20R configuration for 20 ampere receptacles. e. Other NEMA configurations as indicated on the Drawings. f. Listed in accordance with UL 498. g. Designed and constructed in accordance with FS W-C-596. h. Back and side wired. i. One-piece, rivet-less mounting strap. j. Color: 1) Brown in all other areas. 2) Orange when powered by a UPS. 2. Ground fault interrupter receptacles (GFCI): a. 125 VAC. b. 20 ampere. c. Trip level 4-6 milliampere. d. Individual and feed through protection. e. UL 943 and UL 498 listed. f. NEMA Type 5-20R configuration. g. For damp or wet locations: 1) Weather resistant, in accordance with UL 498. C. Plates: 1. General location: a. Type 302 or 304 stainless steel. b. Brushed satin finish. c. Minimum thickness: 0.032 inches. d. Rectangular or square shape. e. Engraving: 1) Engrave each switch plate with the following: a) Area served. b) Panelboard and Circuit. 2) Engrave each receptacle plate with the following: a) Panelboard and Circuit. 3) Treat engraving to improve visibility. 4) Characters shall be block letter pantograph engraved with a minimum character height of 1/8-inch. f. Coordinate the number of gangs, number, and type of openings with the specific location. 2. Outdoor and wet areas requiring NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X enclosures: a. General: 1) UL listed for wet locations. 2) Gasketed. 3) Die cast metal: a) Match material to box material. b. Switches: 1) Lever operated: a) Provide toggle switch. October 2016 26_27_26-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_27_26 (FS-100) c. Receptacles: 1) Weather proof in-use cover: a) Die cast metal construction with electrostatic powder coating for corrosion resistance. b) Gasketed. c) Lockable. d) UL listed and in accordance with NEC. 3. Corrosive areas: a. Neoprene. b. Gasketed. c. Weatherproof. D. Data and communications jacks: 1. Process network jacks - panel/enclosure mounted: a. Network jacks located in process areas shall have a NEMA Type 4 rating (with closure cap). b. Mounting of network jacks in control panels shall be accomplished using bulkhead connectors and environmental enclosure caps, which are permanently attached to the bulkhead fitting. c. Network jacks shall have RJ-45 connections on both sides of connector (bulkhead pass through) allowing for direct connection to the network switch and computer with standard patch cords. No punch down PC board connections shall be allowed. d. Manufactured by Woodhead Connectivity. 2. Process network jacks - conduit body mounted: a. Network jacks located in process areas shall have a NEMA Type 4 rating (with closure cap). b. Mounting of network jacks in conduit bodies adapter (with minifast connector) shall be accomplished using conduit body insert and environmental enclosure caps. c. PC board connections are not to be allowed. d. Furnish 10 RJ-45 to minifast connector patch cable 3 feet in length. e. Manufactured by InterlinkBT. 3. Network/phone jacks: a. Network jacks located in computer rooms shall be installed per the installation details indicated on the Drawings. b. Standard Decora wall plates shall be used with QuickPort modules and inserts. c. Plugs shall be color coded as indicated in the installation details indicated on the Drawings. d. Manufactured by Leviton Quickport series. 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) October 2016 26_27_26-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_27_26 (FS-100) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Mounting heights: 1. Process and production areas: a. Switches and receptacles 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate. 2. Offices and finished areas: a. Switches: 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate. b. Receptacles: 18 inches from finished floor to center of plate. C. Receptacles: 1. Provide GFCI receptacles as indicated on the Drawings. a. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles in all wet or damp areas. 1) As specified in Section 26_05_00, or in accordance with the NEC. 2. Mount non-weatherproof receptacles vertically: a. Ground slot down. 3. Mount weatherproof receptacles horizontally: a. Neutral slot up. 4. 3-phase receptacles shall be consistent with respect to phase connection at the receptacle terminals. Correct errors in phasing at the source and not the receptacle. D. Ensure all plates make a firm seal with wall for recessed mounted devices: 1. Outside edges of plates parallel with building lines. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 REINSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) October 2016 26_27_26-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_27_26 (FS-100) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_28_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_28_01 (FS-100) SECTION 26_28_01 LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_74 - Electrical System Studies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. AB 3. - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application. C. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL): 1. 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit- Breaker Enclosures. 2. 943 - Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. In accordance with UL 489. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Molded case thermal magnetic or motor circuit protector type circuit breakers as indicated on the Drawings and connected to form a completed system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. 2. Manufacturer’s time-current curves for all molded case circuit breakers furnished. October 2016 26_28_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_28_01 (FS-100) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Schneider Electric/Square D Company. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Conforming to UL 489. 2. Operating mechanism: a. Quick-make, quick-break, non-welding silver alloy contacts. b. Common Trip, Open and Close for multi-pole breakers such that all poles open and close simultaneously. c. Mechanically trip free from the handle. October 2016 26_28_01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_28_01 (FS-100) d. Trip indicating handle - automatically assumes a position midway between the manual ON and OFF positions to clearly indicate the circuit breaker has tripped. e. Lockable in the "OFF" position. 3. Arc extinction: a. In arc chutes. 4. Voltage and current ratings: a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings. b. Minimum frame size 100A. 5. Interrupting ratings: a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings. b. Modify as required to meet requirements of the short circuit fault analysis - as specified in Section 26_05_74. c. Not less than the rating of the assembly (panelboard, switchboard, motor control center, etc.) B. Motor circuit protectors: 1. Instantaneous only circuit breaker as part of a listed combination motor controller. 2. Each pole continuously adjustable in a linear scale with ‘LO’ and ‘HI’ settings factory calibrated. 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Terminals: 1. Line and load terminals suitable for the conductor type, size, and number of conductors in accordance with UL 489. B. Case: 1. Molded polyester glass reinforced. 2. Ratings clearly marked. C. Trip units: 1. Provide thermal magnetic or solid-state trip units as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Thermal magnetic: a. Instantaneous short circuit protection. b. Inverse time delay overload. c. Ambient or enclosure compensated by means of a bimetallic element. 3. Solid state: a. With the following settings as indicated on the Drawings. 1) Adjustable long time current setting. 2) Adjustable long time delay. 3) Adjustable short time pickup. 4) Adjustable short time delay. 5) Adjustable instantaneous pickup. 6) Adjustable ground fault pickup as indicated on the Drawings. 7) Adjustable ground fault delay as indicated on the Drawings. D. Provide ground fault trip devices as indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 26_28_01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_28_01 (FS-100) E. Molded case circuit breakers for use in panelboards: 1. Bolt-on type. a. Plug-in type breakers are not acceptable. 2. Ground fault trip devices as indicated on the Drawings. 2.07 ACCESSORIES 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test breakers in accordance with: 1. UL 489. 2. Manufacturer’s standard testing procedures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install breakers to correspond to the accepted shop drawings. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Adjust trip settings in accordance with Protective Device Coordination Study as accepted by the Engineer and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Adjust motor circuit protectors in accordance with NEC and the manufacturer’s recommendation based on the nameplate values of the installed motor. October 2016 26_28_01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_28_01 (FS-100) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_28_17-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_28_17 (FS-100) SECTION 26_28_17 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Fusible and non-fusible disconnect switches. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 20 - General-Use Snap Switches. 2. 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. 3. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. C. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 2. KS 1-2001- Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions: 1. Safety switches and disconnect switches are to be considered synonymous. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide heavy-duty type disconnect switches as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Contract Documents. B. Provide disconnect switches with the number of poles, voltage, current, short circuit, and horsepower ratings as required by the load and the power system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. October 2016 26_28_17-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_28_17 (FS-100) B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and description. 3. Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Current. c. Horsepower. d. Short circuit rating. 4. Fused or non fused. 5. NEMA enclosure type. 6. Dimensions: a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. 7. Weight. 8. Cross-referenced to the disconnect schedule indicated on the Drawings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. NEMA KS1- Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches (600 V Maximum). 2. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. C. Disconnect switches shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) October 2016 26_28_17-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_28_17 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Schneider Electric/Square D Company. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 3. General Electric. 4. Siemens. 5. Appleton. 6. Crouse-Hinds. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. Switch mechanism: 1. Quick-make, quick-break heavy-duty operating mechanisms: a. Provisions for padlocking the switch in the Off position. b. A minimum of 90-degree handle travel position between Off and On positions: 1) Provide handle position indicators to identify the handle position. c. Full cover interlock to prevent opening of the switch door in the On position and to prevent closing the switch mechanism with the door open: 1) With an externally operated override. B. Switch interior: 1. Switch blades visible when the switch is Off and the cover is open. 2. Lugs: a. Front accessible. b. Removable. c. UL listed for 60/75-degree Celsius copper conductors. 3. Current carrying parts completely plated to resist corrosion. 4. Removable arc suppressors to facilitate easy access to line side lugs. 5. Furnish equipment ground kits for every switch. C. Ratings: 1. UL horsepower rated for AC or DC with the rating not less than the load served. 2. Current: a. 30 to 1,200 amperes. 3. Voltage: a. 250 volts AC, DC. b. 600 volts (30 A to 200 A, 600 volts DC). 4. Poles: a. 2, 3, 4, and 6 poles. 5. UL listed short circuit ratings: a. 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30-600 amperes). October 2016 26_28_17-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_28_17 (FS-100) 6. Where not indicated on the Drawings, provide switches with the NEMA ratings specified in Section 26_05_00 for the installed location. D. Size, fusing and number poles as indicated on the Drawings or as required: 1. Provide solid neutral where indicated on the Drawings. 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Disconnect switches to have provisions for a field installable “B” type electrical interlock for position indication as indicated on the Drawings. B. Disconnect switches to have provisions for a field installed insulated groundable neutral kit as indicated on the Drawings. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. C. General: 1. Use Myers hubs or bolt-on hubs for all conduit penetrations on NEMA Type 12, Type 4, and Type 4X enclosures. 2. Provide all mounting brackets, stands, supports and hardware as required: a. Match finish and materials for all brackets, stands, and hardware with the switch installed. b. Provide adequate supporting pillar(s) for disconnect switches in accordance with the approved seismic calculations, and locate aboveground or above decks, where there is no structural wall or surface for box. 3. When possible, mount switches rigidly to exposed building structure or equipment structural members: a. For NEMA Type 4 and Type 4X locations, maintain a minimum of 7/8 inch air space between the enclosure and supporting surface. October 2016 26_28_17-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_28_17 (FS-100) b. When mounting on preformed channel, position channel vertically so that water may freely run behind the enclosure. 4. Provide a nameplate for each disconnect switch: a. Provide per requirements specified in Section 26_05_53. b. Identify voltage, circuit, fuse size, and equipment served on the nameplate. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_29_05-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_29_05 (FS-100) SECTION 26_29_05 MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Motor starters and contactors. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_35_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_18 - 600-Volt or Less Wires and Cables. 5. Section 26_05_29 - Hangers and Supports. 6. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 7. Section 26_28_01 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 8. Section 40_67_01 - Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): 1. 60 947-4 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear. 2. 801-1 - Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial-Process Measurement and Control Equipment - Part 1: General Information. C. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 V. D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 2. 508A - Standard for Industrial Control Panels. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: 1. FVNR: Full voltage non-reversing. 2. Overload relay class: A classification of an overload relay time current characteristic by means of a number which designates the maximum time in seconds at which it will operate when carrying a current equal to 600 percent of its current rating. October 2016 26_29_05-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_29_05 (FS-100) 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General requirements: 1. Starters for motor control centers, individual enclosed starters, or control panels. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_35_00 and 26_05_00: 1. Submit motor starter data with equipment submittal. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer. 2. Catalog cut sheets. 3. Technical information. 4. Complete nameplate schedule. 5. Complete bill of material. 6. List of recommended spare parts. 7. Confirmation that the overload relay class for each starter meets the requirements of the equipment and motor supplier. 8. Electrical ratings: a. Phase. b. Wire. c. Voltage. d. Ampacity. e. Horsepower. 9. Individually enclosed starters: a. Dimensions: 1) Height. 2) Width. 3) Depth. 4) Weight. b. Enclosure information: 1) NEMA rating. 2) Materials. 10. Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in Section 26_28_01. C. Shop drawings: 1. Elementary and schematic diagrams: a. Provide 1 diagram for every starter and contactor. b. Indicate wire numbers for all control wires on the diagrams: 1) Wire numbering as specified in Section 26_05_53. c. Indicate interfaces with other equipment on the drawings. 2. Individually enclosed starters: a. Layout drawings: 1) Complete dimensioned component and starter unit layout drawings. 2) Allowable top and bottom conduit windows. D. Installation instructions: 1. Detail the complete installation of the individually enclosed starters including rigging, moving, and setting into place. October 2016 26_29_05-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_29_05 (FS-100) 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: a. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Submit complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for care and maintenance of equipment furnished or installed under this Section. Including but not limited to: a. Electrical ratings: 1) Phase. 2) Wire. 3) Voltage. 4) Ampacity. b. Complete bill of material. c. Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions starter and/or contactor component parts, including: 1) Protective devices (fuses, breakers, overload relays, heater elements, etc.). 2) Pilot devices. d. Complete renewal parts list. e. As-built drawings: 1) Furnish as-built drawings for each starter and contactor indicating final: a) Wire numbers. b) Interfaces with other equipment. 2) 11-inch by 17-inch format. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. All starters and components shall be UL listed and labeled: a. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment. b. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels. 2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and System Controllers; Contactors and Overload Relays Rated: 600 Volts. 3. Combination starters shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) October 2016 26_29_05-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_29_05 (FS-100) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. NEMA starters and contactors: a. Allen-Bradley. b. Schneider Electric/Square D. c. General Electric. d. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Provide combination type starters with motor circuit protector or thermal- magnetic circuit breaker and control power transformer with ratings as indicated on the Drawings. 2. NEMA size, design, and rated: a. NEMA Size 1 minimum. 3. Coordinate motor circuit protector, thermal magnetic circuit breaker, or fusible disconnect, and overload trip ratings with nameplate horsepower and current ratings of the installed motor: a. If motors provided are different in horsepower rating than those specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide starters coordinated to the actual motors furnished. 4. Provide starters NEMA Size 2 and larger with arc quenchers on load breaking contacts. 5. Mount extended overload reset buttons to be accessible for operation without opening starter enclosure door. B. Full voltage starters (FVNR): 1. Across-the-line full voltage magnetic starters. 2. Rated for 600 volts. 3. Electrical characteristics as indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 26_29_05-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_29_05 (FS-100) 4. Provide positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms, pad lockable enclosure doors. 5. Furnish starter with solid state electronic overload relays. 6. Double-break silver alloy contacts. 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Molded case circuit breakers: 1. Circuit breaker type and ratings as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide as specified in Section 26_28_01. B. Contactors: 1. NEMA size as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Electrically held: a. For lighting loads designed to withstand the initial inrush currents of ballast and lamp loads. 3. Factory adjusted and chatter free. 4. Auxiliary contacts: a. Contact ratings as per NEMA A 600 rating: 1) Auxiliary contacts rated 10 amps at 600 volts. b. Provide all contacts indicated on the Drawings, and any additional contacts required for proper operation. c. Provide at least 1 normally open and 1 normally closed spare auxiliary contact. 5. Constructed in accordance with the following standards: a. UL 508. b. IEC 947-4. 1) Type 1 coordination when protected by a circuit breaker. 2) Type 2 coordination when protected by a suitable UL listed fuse. c. IEC 801-1 parts 2 through 6. C. Overloads: 1. Solid state electronic: a. Selectable Class 10, 20, 30 protection. b. Ambient insensitive: 1) Operating temperature: -20 to 70 degrees Celsius. c. Thermal memory. d. Protective functions: 1) Motor overcurrent. 2) Phase unbalance (adjustable.) 3) Phase loss. 4) Ground fault protection. e. Self-powered. f. Provide current transformers for metering of motor current. g. Visible trip indicator. h. Push-to-trip test. i. Isolated normally open alarm contact. j. Normally closed trip contact. k. Manual reset. October 2016 26_29_05-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_29_05 (FS-100) D. Control power transformer: 1. Furnish integral control power transformer capacity to power: a. All motor controls; Motor and starter accessories indicated on the Drawings or specified. 2. Primary and secondary fusing as indicated on the Drawings: a. Fusing sized by the manufacturer for the rating of the transformer furnished. 3. Control power transformer secondary voltage: a. As indicated on the Drawings. E. Enclosures for individually enclosed starters: 1. NEMA type specified for the location as specified in Section 26_05_00. 2. Flange-mounted handle mechanism to operate disconnect switch or circuit breaker: a. Door mounted operators or operator handles are not acceptable. b. Handle mechanism features: 1) Engaged with the disconnect device at all times as an integral part of the unit independent of the door position. 2) Lockable in the Off position. 3) Mechanically interlocked so that the disconnect cannot be switched to the On position with the door open: a) Provide a means for qualified personnel to defeat this interlock during maintenance and testing. 4) Lockable in the On position: a) This feature shall not prevent the circuit breaker from operating during a fault condition. 3. Provide a thermostatically controlled space heater for equipment located outdoors or in unheated areas: a. Powered from the control power transformer. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Lugs and terminals: 1. For all external connections of No. 6 AWG and larger. 2. UL listed for either copper or aluminum conductors. B. Surge protective devices: 1. Furnish surge protection devices across the coil of each starter, contactor, and relay. C. Pilot devices: 1. Provide pilot lights, switches, elapsed time meters, and other devices as specified or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. As specified in Section 40_67_01. D. Nameplates and wire markers: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_53. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) October 2016 26_29_05-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_29_05 (FS-100) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. C. Individually enclosed starters: 1. Furnish all cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, mounting structures and other accessories needed to completely install the starters. 2. Assemble and install the starters in the locations and with the layouts indicated on the Drawings. 3. Install floor-standing starters on a 3-1/2 inch raised concrete housekeeping pad: a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units. b. Weld and/or bolt the starter frame to the leveling channels. 4. Install wall mounted starters as specified in Section 26_05_29. 5. Provide openings in top or bottom of the enclosure for conduit only, no additional openings will be allowed: a. Mis-cut holes will require that the entire enclosure or removable panel be replaced. No hole closers or patches will be allowed. 6. Bundle circuits together and terminate in each unit: a. Tie with nylon wire ties as specified in Section 26_05_18. b. Label all wires at each end with wire numbers shown on the approved control drawings. c. Make all connections to and from the motor starter via terminal blocks. 7. Furnish all mounting brackets, stands, etc. that may be required to physically mount the motor starter. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. October 2016 26_29_05-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_29_05 (FS-100) 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm. B. Set all overloads and motor circuit protectors based on the nameplate values of the installed motor. 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_36_24-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_36_24 (FS-100) SECTION 26_36_24 TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Transfer switches. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 1008 Transfer Switch Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions: 1. ATS: Automatic transfer switch. 2. MTS: Manually initiated, electrically operated transfer switch. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide transfer switches capable of transferring load circuits from utility power to standby power and back. B. ATS sequence of operation: 1. When the voltage of any normal source phase drops below 80 percent and after an adjustable time delay (0 to 6 seconds minimum), the transfer switch shall start the transfer sequence. 2. When standby voltage reaches 90 percent of nominal, and frequency is within 2 Hertz of nominal, following an adjustable time delay (0 to 10 seconds), the switch shall transfer to the alternate source. 3. When normal power has been restored to 90 percent of nominal on all phases, following an adjustable time delay (0 to 30 minutes), the switch shall retransfer to normal power. a. If the standby source fails during this time delay, the switch shall automatically retransfer to normal power. October 2016 26_36_24-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_36_24 (FS-100) b. The switch shall have an adjustable delay transition timer (0 to 5 minutes) for the load disconnect position. 1) An alarm shall be initiated if the switch fails to retransfer in a pre-set period of time. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer of transfer switch. 2. Manufacturer of all component parts of the ATS. 3. Dimensions: a. Width. b. Length. c. Height. d. Weight. 4. Bill of material. 5. Description of operation. 6. Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Phase. c. Current. d. Number of poles. 7. List of recommended spare parts. C. Shop drawings: 1. Layout drawings: a. Furnish full-dimension and to-scale equipment layout drawings which include: 1) Plan, front, and side views. 2) Sub-panels. 3) Interior panels. 4) Top and bottom conduit windows. 2. Complete electrical wiring diagrams: a. Point-to-point connections. b. Indicate wire numbers. 3. Complete interface and connection diagrams. D. Installation instructions: 1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as Seismic Design Category A or B: a. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Operating instructions: a. Printed and framed instruction chart suitable for wall hanging. b. Detail the operational functions of all transfer switch controls. October 2016 26_36_24-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_36_24 (FS-100) 2. Maintenance manual: a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions covering maintenance of all equipment and data identifying all parts. b. Furnish all information needed to maintain the transfer switch including, but not limited to, the following: 1) Instructions for testing, adjustment, and start-up. 2) Detailed control instructions that outline the purpose and operation of every control device used in normal operation. 3) Description of the sequence of operation that outlines the steps that follow normal power failure, transfer to standby power, return to normal power, and fault conditions. 4) Schematics and wiring: a) Furnished in a reduced 11-inch-by-17-inch fully legible format. 5) Report listing the installed setting of all adjustable parameters for the automatic transfer system. F. Test forms and reports: 1. Submit complete factory acceptance test procedures and all forms used during the test. 2. Manufacturer to furnish certified report after the factory tests. 3. Manufacturer to furnish written report after start-up: a. Report must state that the installation is complete and satisfactory, or list items requiring additional attention and a proposal for the corrective actions. b. If the items require attention after the initial start-up, a final report is required stating that the installation is complete and satisfactory. G. Calculations: 1. Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the transfer switch to prove the transfer switch is suitable for the seismic requirements at the Project Site. H. Warranty. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Ship the transfer switch to the job site on a dedicated air-ride vehicle that will allow the Contractor to utilize on-site off-loading equipment. C. Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the transfer switch to prevent condensation from forming. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_36_24-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_36_24 (FS-100) 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Transfer switch: One of the following or equal: 1. GE Zenith Controls, Inc. 2. Russelectric Inc. 3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 4. ASCO. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Capable of switching all classes of load. 2. Rated for continuous duty when installed in a non-ventilated enclosure. 3. Provide circuit breakers or contactors rated for continuous duty. 4. Minimum transfer time for delayed transition ATS: 1 second. 5. Capable of transferring successfully in either direction with 70 percent of rated voltage applied to the terminals. 6. Provide automatic transfer switches with provisions for manual operation under no load. B. Electrical ratings: 1. Voltage, configuration, and amp ratings as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Withstand and close into fault ratings in accordance with UL 1008. October 2016 26_36_24-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_36_24 (FS-100) C. Contacts: 1. Mechanically held. 2. Mechanically interlocked to prevent normal and standby sources from being closed at the same time. 3. Silver alloy construction. D. Controls: 1. ATS shall have 3-phase over-voltage, under-voltage, over-frequency, and under-frequency on both normal and standby sources. 2. Control panel: a. Microprocessor based. b. 4-line, 20-character LCD display. Displayed data shall include: 1) Normal and standby source parameters. 2) Diagnostic information. 3) Switch and timer status. c. Keypad for making all ATS settings and operating parameters. 1) All settings shall be password protected. d. LED display of the following: 1) Preferred source available. 2) Connected to preferred source. 3) Alternate source available. 4) Connected to alternate source. e. Communications:Modbus TCP. f. Provisions for testing ATS operation by simulating a normal source failure. 3. Status and control contacts: a. Status contacts: 1) Single-pole, double-throw. 2) Rated for 10 amps at 250 VAC. 3) Provide contacts for the following: a) Normal source available. b) Normal source failure. c) Connected to normal source. d) Standby source available. e) Standby source failure. f) Connected to standby source. E. Enclosure: 1. NEMA 1. 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 1. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) October 2016 26_36_24-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_36_24 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, AND CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Factory testing: 1. Complete factory test to verify proper operation of all timers, settings, and operation. 2. In accordance with UL-1008. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_41_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_41_01 (FS-100) SECTION 26_41_01 LIGHTNING PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Design and installation of a complete lightning protection system. 2. Materials and components for the lightning protection system. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_31_19 - Project Meetings. 2. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 3. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 4. Section 01_77_00 - Closeout Procedures. 5. Section 01_81_04 - Wind Design Criteria. 6. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 7. Section 26_05_26 - Grounding and Bonding. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI). C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 96 - Standard for Lightning Protection Components. 2. 96A - Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions: 1. LPI: Lightning Protection Institute. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Retain the services of a lightning protection contractor to design, furnish, and install a complete lightning protection system, connected to the facility grounding system. B. Lightning protection system: NFPA 780; Class II UL 96A; master labeled system(s) protecting, consisting of: 1. Air terminals on roof(s). 2. Bonding of other metal objects. October 2016 26_41_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_41_01 (FS-100) 3. Grounding electrodes. 4. Interconnecting conductors. C. Connect the lightning protection system to the facility grounding electrode. D. The installing contractor is responsible for all costs associated with UL inspection of the lightning protection system, including any costs associated with re-inspection necessary to obtain the UL 96A Master Label. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data for: 1. Air terminals. 2. Conductors. 3. Connectors. 4. Accessories. 5. Include dimensions and materials of each component, and include indication of listing in accordance with UL 96. C. Shop drawings: 1. Including but not limited to: a. Layout of air terminals with the respective configuration of the zone of protection. b. Grounding electrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other metal objects. c. Type, size and locations for: 1) Terminal. 2) Electrode. 3) Conductor. d. Conductor routing details. e. Connection details. f. Termination details. g. Applicable air terminal and other calculations. 2. Details showing installation of air terminals, conductors, and connectors. D. Certificates: 1. Submit 2 notarized photocopies of the completed Application for UL Master Label for each lightning protection system. 2. Submit written confirmation of having obtained UL Master Label for each lightning protection system. 3. Photocopy of UL Installers' Certificate(s) for installation of lightning protection systems. E. Record Documents: 1. Provide Record Documents as specified in Sections 01_77_00 and 26_05_00. 2. Accurately record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes, bonding connections, and routing of system conductors. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. October 2016 26_41_01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_41_01 (FS-100) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Conform to the requirements of the UL and NFPA standards for lightning protection systems: 1. Components shall be listed in accordance with UL 96. C. Manufacturer’s qualifications: 1. Company specializing in lightning protection equipment with minimum 5 years experience. D. Installers qualifications: Authorized installer for manufacturer with minimum 5 years experience. E. The lightning protection system shall meet the applicable requirements of NFPA 780. F. Upon completion of installation the lightning protection contractor to have the building lightning system physically inspected by UL and furnish a UL Master Label for the building: 1. Application for the UL Master Label without a physical inspection by UL is unacceptable. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS (NOT USED) 1.09 SEQUENCING A. Pre-installation conference: 1. Convene a pre-installation conference 1 week before commencing the Work of this Section, as specified in Sections 01_31_19 and 26_05_00. B. Coordinate Work with other trades to ensure neat, correct, and unobtrusive installation. C. Coordinate the Work of this Section with roofing and exterior and interior finish installations. 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_41_01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_41_01 (FS-100) 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Erico. 2. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 3. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 4. VFC, Inc. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Air terminals: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Size: 3/8-inch by 18-inch minimum extending a minimum of 12 inches above the object to be protected. 3. On flat or walkable roofs, provide air terminals with: a. Mushroom type blunt tip incapable of impalement if fallen upon. b. Spring mounted and capable of being pushed flush to the roof. 4. Air terminal bases: a. Cast bronze with bolt pressure cable connections securely mounted with stainless steel screws and bolts. B. Ground rods: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_26. C. Ground plate: Copper. D. Conductors: 1. Perimeters: a. Aluminum. 2. Down conductors: a. Copper. 3. At least 32 strands of 17 gauge or larger copper wire weighing not less than 215 pounds per 1000 feet. 4. UL listed for the application. E. Connectors and splicers: 1. Make connections between dissimilar metals with approved bimetallic connectors. F. Miscellaneous materials: 1. Copper of type and size recommended by the manufacturer of the lightning protection system. 2. Stainless steel bolts, screws, and other threaded fasteners. October 2016 26_41_01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_41_01 (FS-100) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. It is the responsibility of the lightning protection subcontractor to review the electrical system design, and provide any and all additional equipment and materials needed in order to construct a master labeled UL lightning protection system. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. C. Protect elements surrounding Work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise specified in this Section. C. Conductor installations: 1. Install the lightning protection roof system(s) grounding and bending conductors exposed on flat roof areas and concealed at ridge roof areas. 2. Install main downleads completely concealed and sleeved. 3. Other than for the purpose of protecting downlead conductors from damage up to 6 feet above grade level, do not use exposed conduits to conceal the downleads on the exterior of the building outside walls. 4. Use minimum 1-inch PVC conduits to protect lightning system conductors from damage. October 2016 26_41_01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_41_01 (FS-100) D. Clearances: Assure 6-foot minimum distance required by NEC: 1. From lightning rod conductors to non-current-carrying metal parts of electrical equipment unless they are bonded to the rods. 2. From lightning system conductors to open conductors of communication systems. 3. From lightning protection grounding electrodes to electrodes of other grounding systems. E. Extend air terminals a minimum of 12 inches above object to be protected. F. Maintain horizontal or downward coursing of main conductor and ensure that bends have at least an 8-inch radius and that no bend of a conductor forms an included angle of less than 90 degrees. G. Install ground electrodes not less than 1 foot below grade and not less than 2 feet from foundation walls. H. Interconnection of metals: 1. Bond all metal bodies within 6 feet of the conductor to the system with approved fittings and conductor. 2. Connections between dissimilar metals shall be made with approved bimetallic connections. 3. Bond metal bodies of inductance located within 6 feet of a conductor or object with secondary bonds. I. Bond all isolated metallic bodies at or below the roof subject to inductance and within 6 feet of lightning protection system conductors. J. Provide necessary common grounds between the lightning protections system and the electric and telephone service entrance wires, TV and radio antenna grounds. K. Ensure that air terminals are installed to withstand calculated wind force due to 100 miles per hour winds or as specified in Section 01_81_04, whichever is greater with a 1.3 gust factor without structural damage and without damage to integrity of the lightning protection system. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 REINSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00: October 2016 26_41_01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_41_01 (FS-100) B. Provide the services of UL to physically inspect the entire lightning protection system and issue the UL Master Label: 1. Furnish UL Master Label as evidence that the installation has met with UL 96A code requirements. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_43_14-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_43_14 (FS-100) SECTION 26_43_14 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. High-energy surge protective devices. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_08_50 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.41 – Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits. 2. C62.45 –Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits. 3. C62.62- Standard Test Specifications for Surge Protective Devices for Low Voltage AC Power Circuits. C. Underwriters Laboratory: 1. 1449, 3rd Edition, Standard for Surge Protective Devices. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions: 1. SPD: Surge protective device. 2. SAD: Silicon avalanche diode. 3. MOV: Metal oxide varistor. 4. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage. 5. In: Nominal discharge current. 6. VPR: Voltage protection rating. 7. SCCR: Short circuit current rating. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Surge protective devices as an integral component of the electrical equipment or externally mounted as indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 26_43_14-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_43_14 (FS-100) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. Furnish complete product data confirming detailed compliance or exception statements to all provisions of this Section. 2. Manufacturer’s catalog cut sheets indicating: a. Manufacturer and model numbers. b. Ratings of each SPD including but not limited to: 1) Short circuit current rating. 2) Nominal discharge current. 3) Maximum continuous operating voltage. 4) Voltage protection rating. 5) System voltage. 6) System frequency. 7) Surge current capacity. 3. Submit independent test data from a nationally recognized testing laboratory verifying the following: a. Overcurrent protection. b. UL 1449. C. Shop drawings: 1. Provide electrical and mechanical drawings by the manufacturer that detail: a. Unit dimensions. b. Weights. c. Components. d. Field connection locations. e. Mounting provisions. f. Connection details. g. Wiring diagram. D. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Provide the manufacturer’s manual with installation, start-up, spare parts lists, and operating instructions for the specified system. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Provide SPD units that are designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following codes and standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE C62.41, C62.45, C62.62). 2. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIBS PUB 94). 3. National Electrical Manufacturer Association. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 20, 75 and 780). 5. National Electric Code (NFPA 70). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 3rd Edition and UL 1283). 7. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC 801). 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_43_14-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_43_14 (FS-100) 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate with and provide SPD equipment to the electrical equipment manufacturer before final assembly and factory testing. 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Extended warranty: 1. Furnish a manufacturer’s full 5-year parts and labor warranty from date of shipment against any part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, UL listing requirements, and any applicable national, state, or local electrical codes. 2. Warranty shall include: a. Direct, factory trained employees must be available within 48 hours for assessment of the problem. b. A 24-hour toll-free 800-number for warranty support. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Liebert. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 3. Schneider Electric/Square D. 4. General Electric. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Provide Type 1 or Type 2 SPD units as required for the locations indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 26_43_14-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_43_14 (FS-100) B. Electrical requirements: 1. SPD ratings are to be consistent with the nominal system operating voltage, phase, and configuration as indicated on the Drawings. 2. MCOV: a. For the SPD and all components in the suppression path (including all MOVs, SADs, and selenium cells): Greater than 115 percent of the nominal system operating voltage. 3. Operating frequency: a. 47 to 63 hertz. 4. SCCR: a. 65 kAIC minimum, but not less than the equipment it is connected to as indicated on the Drawings. b. The SCCR shall be marked on the SPD in accordance with UL 1449 and the NEC. 5. Nominal discharge current In: a. 20 kA. 6. Maximum VPR: Modes 240/120 208Y/120 480Y/277 L-N, L-G, N-G 900 900 1,500 L-L 1,200 1,200 2000 7. Peak surge current: a. Service entrance locations: 1) 240 kA per phase minimum. 2) 120 kA per mode minimum. b. Branch locations: 1) 120 kA per phase, minimum. 2) 60 kA per mode minimum. C. Protection modes: 1. Provide SPD protection modes as follows: a. Line to Neutral (L-N) where applicable. b. Line to Ground (L-G). c. Neutral to Ground (N-G), where applicable. D. Environmental requirements: 1. Storage temperature: a. -40 degrees to +50 degrees Celsius. 2. Operating temperature: a. -0 degrees to +60 Celsius. 3. Relative humidity: a. 5 percent to 95 percent. 4. Audible noise: a. Less than 45 dBa at 5 feet (1.5 m). 5. Operating altitude: a. Zero to 12,000 feet above sea level. E. Provide surge protective devices that are suitable for application in IEEE C62.41 Category A, B and C3 environments, as tested to IEEE C62.45. 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) October 2016 26_43_14-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_43_14 (FS-100) 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Enclosure: 1. Located in electrical equipment as indicated on the Drawings. B. Internal connections: 1. Provide low impedance copper plates for intra-unit connections: a. Attach surge modules using bolted connections to the plates for low impedance connections. 2. Size all connections, conductors, and terminals for the specified surge current capacity. C. Surge diversion modules: 1. MOV: a. Where multiple MOVs are used in parallel, utilize computer matched MOVs to within 1 volt variance and tested for manufacturer's defects. D. Overcurrent protection: 1. Individually fuse all components, including suppression, filtering, and monitoring components: a. Rated to allow maximum specified nominal discharge current capacity. b. Overcurrent protection that limits specified surge currents is not acceptable. E. Connections: 1. Provide terminals to accommodate wire sizes up to #2 AWG. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Unit status indicators: 1. Provide red and green solid-state indicators, with printed labels, on the front cover to redundantly indicate on-line unit status: a. The absence of the green light and the presence of the red light indicate that surge protection is reduced and service is needed to restore full operation. b. Indicates the status of protection on each mode or phase. B. Dry contacts for remote monitoring: 1. Electrically isolated Form C dry contacts (1 A/125 VAC) for remote monitoring of system integrity, and indication of under voltage, phase and/or power loss. C. Provide an audible alarm which activates under any fault condition. 1. Provide an alarm On/Off switch to silence the alarm. 2. A visible LED will confirm whether alarm is On or Disabled. 3. Locate both switches and the audible alarm on the unit’s front cover. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) October 2016 26_43_14-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_43_14 (FS-100) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Permanently affix surge rating to the SPD. B. Perform manufacturer’s standard factory test. 1. Perform testing in accordance with UL 1449. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Follow the manufacturer's recommended installation practices and comply with all applicable codes. C. Special techniques: 1. Do not subject SPD to insulation resistance testing. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_08_50. 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 26_50_10-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_50_10 (FS-100) SECTION 26_50_10 LIGHTING: LED LUMINAIRES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: LED luminaires, drivers, poles, and accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.41 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. C. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA): 1. LM-79 - IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products. 2. LM-80 - IES Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. 3. TM-21 - Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts. E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 1598 - Luminaires. 2. 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment For Use In Lighting Products. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: 1. CCT: Correlated color temperature - Scientific scale to describe how “warm” or how “cool” the light source is, measured in Kelvin. The lower the Kelvin temperature, the warmer the light feels, or appears. 2. CRI: Color Rendering Index - A quantitative measure of the ability of a light source to reveal the colors of various objects faithfully in comparison with an ideal or natural light source. 3. Driver - Device that manages power and controls the current flow from AC to DC for an LED lighting product. October 2016 26_50_10-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_50_10 (FS-100) 4. Efficacy - Lumen output of a light source per unit of power supplied to that source (lumens per watt). 5. EMI: Electromagnetic Interference - Electrical interference (noise) generated by electrical and electronic devices. 6. FC: Foot Candles - Measure of light level on a surface being illuminated. 7. L70 - The extrapolated life in hours of the luminaire when the luminous output depreciates 30 percent from initial values. 8. LED: Light emitting diode - A solid-state semiconductor device that produces light when electrical current flows through it. 9. LED light source - See LED luminaire. 10. LED luminaire - A complete lighting unit consisting of LED-based light emitting elements and a matched driver together with parts to distribute light, to position and protect the light emitting elements, and to connect the unit to a branch circuit. 11. Lumen - The international (SI) unit of luminous flux or quantity of light. The amount of light that is spread over a square foot of surface by one candle power when all parts of the surface are exactly one foot from the light source. 12. Lumen ambient temperature multiplier - LED light source relative lumen output when compared to a standard ambient temperature. 13. Lumen maintenance factor - How well an LED light source is able to retain its intensity when compared to new. 14. Luminaire - Lighting unit. 15. THD: Total harmonic distortion - The combined effect of harmonic Distortion on the AC waveform produced by a driver or other device. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide luminaires, and accessories for all lighting systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Individual luminaire types are indicated on the Drawings and on the Luminaire Schedule. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 26_05_00. B. Product data: 1. LED Luminaires: a. Catalog literature for each luminaire specified, cross-referenced to the luminaire type on the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings. b. Provide for each luminaire type: 1) Materials. 2) Type of diffuser. 3) Hardware. 4) Gasketing. 5) Reflector. 6) Chassis. 7) Finish and color. 8) Driver type and protection. 9) LED luminaire: a) Initial lumen output at 40 degrees Celsius ambient. October 2016 26_50_10-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_50_10 (FS-100) b) Correlated color temperature. c) Lumen maintenance factors. d) Lumen ambient temperature multipliers. e) Drive current. f) Efficacy. 10) Picture of luminaire. 11) Dimensioned drawings: a) Effective projected area rating for pole mounted luminaires. 12) Weight. 13) Photometric data: a) Coefficient of utilization tables based on the IES zonal cavity system by an approved testing laboratory. b) Luminaire dirt depreciation factor. c) Candlepower distribution curves. d) Average luminaire brightness. e) Lumen output charts. 14) Furnish support method for interior luminaires weighing more than 30 pounds and all wall-mounted luminaires: a) Support methods shall be based on seismic requirements at the project site as specified in Section 26_05_00. c. Luminaire substitutions: 1) Provide complete literature for each luminaire substitution: 2) Submittals for substituted luminaires shall be sufficient for competent comparison of the proposed luminaire to the originally specified luminaire: a) Photometric data: (1) IES file in standard IES format. (2) Coefficient of utilization tables based on the IES zonal cavity system by an approved testing laboratory. (3) Candlepower distribution curves. (4) Average luminaire brightness. (5) Lumen output charts. (6) Power requirements in watts and volt-amperes. b) Calculations: (1) Provide software generated calculations showing illuminance levels in footcandles and power usage in watts per square foot for each of the areas in which substitutions are proposed: (a) Use surface reflectance values and luminaire light loss factors approved by the Engineer to perform all calculations. c) Specification sheets: (1) If lacking sufficient detail to indicate compliance with contract documents, standard specification sheets will not be accepted. This includes, but is not limited to, luminaire type designation, manufacturer's complete catalog number, voltage, LED type, CCT, CRI, specific driver information, system efficacy, L70 life rating, and any modifications necessary to meet the requirements of the contract documents October 2016 26_50_10-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_50_10 (FS-100) 3) Substitutions for specified luminaires will be evaluated upon quality of construction, light distribution, energy use, appearance, and maintenance. 4) Substitutions shall comply with all applicable building and energy codes. 2. Driver: Provide for each driver type: a. Catalog number. b. Type of driver. c. Output wattage. d. Input voltage. e. Operating voltage range. f. Maximum input power. g. Efficiency. h. Operating line current. i. Power factor. j. Operating temperature range. k. Current output range in ambient temperatures of 30 degrees Celsius – 55 degrees Celsius. l. Surge suppression data. 3. Photocell: a. Provide for each photocell type: 1) Switching capacity. 2) Life expectancy when used on LED sources. 3) The means of adjusting the lighting pickup level. 4) Enclosure type. 5) Mounting method. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING A. Exterior and outdoor lighting system operation shall be demonstrated during the hours of darkness. B. Lighting demonstration shall occur within 2 weeks before substantial completion. 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_50_10-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_50_10 (FS-100) B. LED luminaire: 1. 5 year warranty from the date of installation including material, workmanship, photometrics, driver, and LED modules. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish 1 complete spare LED luminaire, with driver, of each type used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Luminaires: One of the following or equal: 1. As noted on the Luminaire Schedule. B. Drivers: One of the following or equal: 1. Philips Advance. 2. Thomas Research. 3. eldoLED. C. Photo-electric cells: One of the following or equal: 1. Cooper. 2. Tork. 3. Intermatic. D. Substitutions: 1. The lighting design and luminaire selection has been based upon the photometric data of the identified luminaire. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure and prove to the Engineer at time of submittal the substitutions meet the quality and photometric requirements of the original design. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. LED Luminaires: 1. General: a. Pre-wired with leads of 18-AWG, minimum, for connection to building circuits. October 2016 26_50_10-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_50_10 (FS-100) b. Provide the luminaires furnished per the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings: 1) The Specifications noted herein are an addition or supplement to the Luminaire Schedule. c. Individual LEDs connected such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of 1 LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire. 2. Minimum ambient temperature range of 0 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius. 3. Minimum rated life: a. Process Areas: 60,000 hours when operated at 40 degrees Celsius. 4. Minimum efficacy of 70 lumens/watt. 5. Minimum Color Rendering Index of 70. 6. Tested according to IESNA LM-79 and LM-80. 7. Lumen maintenance projection in accordance with IESNA TM-21. 8. RoHS compliant. 9. Integral driver. 10. Suitable for dry, damp, or wet locations as indicated on the Drawings or on the Luminaire Schedule. a. Wet or damp locations: UL 1598 listed. 11. Designed as a complete LED assembly. Retrofit LED lamps in luminaires not designed specifically for LED light sources shall not be used. 12. Exterior/outdoor luminaires: a. Luminaires in combination with their mounting pole and bracket shall be capable of withstanding: 1) Wind levels at the project site without damage. 2) Seismic levels at the project site. b. Corrosion-resistant hardware and hinged doors or lens retainer. c. Luminaires furnished with integral photoelectrical control shall be of the luminaire manufacturer's standard design. B. Photo-electric cells: 1. Photoelectric cells for control of multiple luminaires: a. Self-contained. b. Weatherproof. c. Provided with time-delay features. d. Sized to meet switching capacity of the circuit: 1) Based on luminaire VA as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Photoelectric cell for control of a single luminaire: a. Integral to the luminaire. C. Drivers: 1. Dimmable, with dimming signal protocol of 0-10 VDC or DALI. 2. Input power source: a. As indicated on the Drawings. 3. Drive current: a. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. 4. Power factor: greater than 0.90. 5. Efficiency: greater than 80 percent. 6. Total harmonic distortion (THD) of the input current less than 20 percent. 7. Rated life of 60,000 hours in an LED luminaire operated at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. 8. Sound rating: Class A+ or quieter. October 2016 26_50_10-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_50_10 (FS-100) 9. UL listed Class 2 Outdoor in accordance with UL 8750. 10. In accordance with IEEE C62.41 Category A for transient protection. 11. Driver must limit inrush current: a. Meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard: 1) 230 Amps per 10 Amp load with a maximum of 106 Amps squared- seconds at 120V. 2) 430 Amps per 10 Amp load with a maximum of 370 Amps squared- seconds at 277V. 2.06 COMPONENTS 2.07 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Install luminaires per the manufacturer’s guidelines and submitted installation calculations to meet seismic and wind requirements at the project site. C. Special techniques: 1. Support luminaires from structural elements capable of carrying the total weight. 2. Install luminaires plumb and square with building and wall intersections: a. Suspend pendant-mounted luminaries that are mounted from sloping ceilings with ball hangers, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Install luminaires in machinery rooms after machines have been installed, so as to ensure no conflict with machinery, piping, or ductwork. 3. In all cases, coordinate luminaire locations with work of other trades to prevent obstruction of light from the fixtures: a. Locate bottom of luminaire approximately at the bottom of ductwork, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. 4. Support luminaires weighing more than [25] pounds independently of the outlet box and the conduit. 5. Provide ceiling or pendent mounted luminaires with a safety chain connecting the lens, driver, and other components to the building structure. October 2016 26_50_10-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_50_10 (FS-100) 6. Provide recessed luminaires with auxiliary safety supports attached directly to the building structure: a. The safety supports shall consist of number 12 AWG soft drawn galvanized wires. 7. Install luminaires in accordance with the architectural reflected ceiling Drawings: a. Center luminaires on ceiling tiles unless otherwise indicated. 8. Support luminaires installed in suspended grid ceilings, independently of the grid: a. Provide seismic restraint clips for all luminaires installed in suspended grid ceilings. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Aim and verify all exterior and outdoor luminaires alignment, during dark evening hours, as directed by Owner or the Engineer. 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. B. Clean all lenses, diffusers, and reflectors. C. Refinish all luminaires’ trim, poles and support brackets, where finish has been damaged. D. Clean all LED luminaires (new and old), used during construction for construction lighting, before substantial completion. E. Clean and re-lamp all existing fluorescent and HID luminaires used during construction for construction lighting, before substantial completion. 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. October 2016 26_50_10-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_50_10 (FS-100) 3.12 SCHEDULES A. Refer to the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings. END OF SECTION October 2016 31_00_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) SECTION 31_00_00 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Loosening, excavating, filling, grading, borrow, hauling, preparing subgrade, compacting in final location, wetting and drying, and operations pertaining to site grading for buildings, basins, reservoirs, boxes, roads, and other facilities. 2. Backfilling and compacting under and around structures. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_35_45 - Stormwater Pollution Prevention Construction Activities: Best Management Practices. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 3. Section 01_45_24 - Special Test and Inspections. 4. Section 31_05_15 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork. 5. Section 31_23_19 - Dewatering. 6. Section 31_23_24 - Controlled Low Strength Materials (CLSM). 7. Section 31_32_18.02 - Filter Fabric. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method. 2. D 1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)). 3. D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 4. D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 5. D 6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill adjacent to structure: Backfill within volume bounded by the exterior surfaces of structure, the surface of undisturbed soil in the excavation around structure, and finished grade around structure. B. Backfill above concrete structure: Backfill within volume bounded by the top surface of the structure, the surfaces of undisturbed soil in the excavation at the structure, and finished grade around the structure. C. Embankments: Dikes, levees, berms, and similar facilities. October 2016 31_00_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) D. Excavation: Consists of loosening, removing, loading, transporting, depositing, and compacting in final location, wet and dry materials, necessary to be removed for purposes of construction of structures, ditches, grading, roads, and such other purposes as are indicated on the Drawings. E. Fill: Consists of material required to achieve subgrade elevations underneath new structures, access roads, and paved areas. F. Maximum density: Maximum dry density for the material being compacted, as determined by ASTM D 1557. G. Optimum moisture content: Defined as plus or minus 2 percent of moisture content (percentage) corresponding to maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. The intent of this Section, along with other Sections of Division 2, is to provide for the following: a. Safe and stable excavations that prevent movement of or damage to surrounding construction and improvements at the site. b. Excavations with dry and stable surfaces for placement and compaction of fills and for construction. c. Excavations that minimize migration of groundwater on the site. d. Excavations that minimize the volume of surface water and of groundwater that will be introduced into the process flow stream of the plant. 2. Select excavation and backfilling procedures that give preference to systems and approaches that satisfy a greater number of these objectives. 3. Discussion and resolution of issues during construction will give preference to systems and approaches that satisfy the greater number of these objectives. B. Performance requirements: 1. Where mud or other soft or unstable material is encountered, remove such material and refill space with materials suitable to the Engineer.. 2. Obtain acceptable import material from other sources if surplus materials obtained within Project site does not conform to specified requirements or are not sufficient in quantity. 3. No extra compensation will be made for hauling of fill materials nor for water required for compaction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: 1. Copy of Property Owner’s Agreement allowing placement of surplus soil material on their property. B. Excavation plan. 1. Plan shall include but not be limited to limits of disturbance, side slopes, excavation support and protection, entrance and exit locations, stockpile areas, and hauling paths. 2. Excavation plan, including layout drawing showing proposed excavation limits and layback areas and locations of excavation supports. October 2016 31_00_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Initial compaction demonstration: 1. Adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures: Demonstrate adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding any of following amounts of earthwork quantities: a. 50 cubic yards of backfill adjacent to structures. b. 100 cubic yards of embankment work. c. 100 cubic yards of fill. d. 50 cubic yards of roadway base material. e. 100 cubic yards of road fill. 2. Compaction sequence requirements: Until specified degree of compaction on previously specified amounts of earthwork is achieved, do not perform additional earthwork of the same kind. 3. After satisfactory conclusion of initial compaction demonstration and at any time during construction, provide confirmation tests as specified under "FIELD QUALITY CONTROL." B. Contractor shall perform all work related to this Section in accordance with the approved Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and as specified in Section 01_35_45. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule earthwork operations to meet requirements specified in this Section for excavation and uses of excavated material. B. If necessary, stockpile excavated material in order to use it at specified locations. C. Excavation, backfilling, and filling: Perform excavation, backfilling, and filling during construction in manner and sequence that provides drainage at all times. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Water for compacting: Use water from source acceptable to Engineer. B. Soil and rock materials: 1. General: a. Provide aggregate base course, controlled low-strength material, drain rock, gravel, native material, sand, select material, and stabilization material where specified or indicated on the Drawings. b. If suitable surplus materials are available, obtain native material and select material from cut sections or excavations or imported materials. 2. Aggregate base course materials: As specified in Section 31_05_15. 3. Drain rock: As specified in Section 31_05_15. 4. Gravel: As specified in Section 31_05_15. 5. Native material: As specified in Section 31_05_15. 6. Sand: As specified in Section 31_05_15. 7. Select material: As specified in Section 31_05_15. 8. Stabilization material: As specified in Section 31_05_15. October 2016 31_00_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) C. Controlled low-strength material: As specified in Section 31_23_24. D. Geotextile fabrics: 1. Filter fabric: As specified in Section 31_32_18.02. 2. Stabilization fabric: Use Filter Fabric. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. No extra compensation will be made for hauling of fill materials nor for water required for compaction. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: 1. Character and quantity of material: a. Verify character and quantity of rock, gravel, sand, silt, water, and other inorganic or organic materials to be encountered in work to be performed. b. Determine gradation, shrinkage, and swelling of soil, and suitability of material for use intended in work to be performed. c. Determine quantity of material, and cost thereof, required for construction of backfills, cuts, embankments, excavations, fills, and roadway fills, whether from onsite excavations or imported materials. Include in cost of work to be performed. d. Include wasting of excess material, if required, in cost of work to be performed. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Backfills: 1. After clearing and excavation are completed, scarify entire areas that underlie backfills or structures to a depth of 6 inches and until surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other features that would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used. 2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified before placing backfill material or concrete. 3. Do not place backfill against walls until: a. Walls have been cast full height of structure and concrete has reached the specified strength. b. Connecting slabs and beams have been cast, and concrete has reached the specified strength. 4. Prior to backfilling: a. Remove all forms. b. Clean all trash and debris from the excavation site. 5. After inspection of foundation, walls, and pipes, place backfill symmetrically around structures to prevent eccentric loading of structures. October 2016 31_00_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) B. Embankments: 1. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas that underlie embankments to a depth of 6 inches and until surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other features that would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used. 2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified for embankments before placing of embankment material. C. Fills: 1. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas that underlie fill sections or structures to a depth of 6 inches and until surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other features that would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used. 2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified for compacted fills before placing of fill material or concrete. D. Roadway fills: 1. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas that underlie roadway fills to a depth of 6 inches and until surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other features that would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used. 2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified for roadway fills before placing of roadway fill material. E. Sloped surfaces for fill or foundations: 1. Foundations for fill having slopes in excess of 1 vertical to 4 horizontal: a. Bench or terrace to adequately key existing ground and fill built thereon. 2. Slopes of original hillsides and old fills: Bench minimum of 10 feet horizontally as fill is placed. 3. Provision of new benches: a. Start new bench wherever vertical cut of next lower bench intersects existing grade. b. Recompact material thus cut out along with new embankment material at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Dispose of excavated materials that are not required or are unsuitable for fill and backfill in lawful manner. 2. Dispose of surplus material on private property only when written permission agreement is furnished by owner of property. Submit copies of such agreements. 3. Rocks, broken concrete, or other solid materials larger than 4 inches in greatest dimension: Remove from project site at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Stabilization of subgrade: Provide materials used, or perform work required, to stabilize subgrade so it can withstand loads that may be placed upon it by Contractor's equipment. B. Borrow area: There is no borrow area on Project site. 1. Where material is required, import material from source located off Project site selected by the Contractor and subject to acceptance by the Engineer. 2. There will be no additional cost to the Owner for use of imported material. October 2016 31_00_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) C. Compaction: 1. Provide specified compaction for backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, roadway fills, and other earthwork. 2. Perform confirmation tests to verify and confirm that work has complied, and is complying at all times, with compaction requirements specified in this Section for initial compaction demonstration and field quality control testing. 3. In-place density of compacted backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, and roadway fills determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556, or with ASTM D 6938. 4. Maximum density obtained in laboratory when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1557. 5. To prevent damage to structures due to backfilling operations, place backfill with equipment that does not exceed H-20 loading, within a distance from the face of the structure of not less than 1/2 the depth of backfill. The depth of backfill is the distance between the level being compacted and the bottom of the excavation. Outside this distance, heavier compaction equipment may be used. 6. Compact to percentage of maximum density as follows: a. Backfill adjacent to structures: 95 percent. b. Backfilling voids: 95 percent. c. Other areas: 85 percent. d. Under present and future structures: 95 percent. e. Under roadways, parking and storage areas, curbs, and sidewalks: 95 percent. f. Upper 6 inches of cuts: 95 percent. g. Fills: 95 percent. D. Dewatering: As specified in Section 31_23_19. E. Excavation: 1. Blasting: Not permitted. 2. Excavations for structures: a. Provide excavations conforming to dimensions and elevations indicated on the Drawings for each structure, including trenching for piping and all work incidental thereto. b. After clearing is complete, excavate for the structure, down to the elevation indicated on the Drawings. Unless directed by Engineer, do not carry excavations below elevation indicated on the Drawings. c. Where soil is encountered having unsuitable bearing value, Engineer may direct in writing that excavation be carried to elevations below those indicated on the Drawings. d. Where excavations are made below elevations indicated on the Drawings, adjust elevations of excavations in accordance with the following requirements: 1) Under slabs: Restore to proper elevation in accordance with procedure specified for backfill in this Section. 2) Under footings: Restore to the proper elevation using one of the following: a) Native material. October 2016 31_00_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) e. Excavation width: 1) Extend excavations at least 2 feet clear from walls and foundations of structures to allow for placing and removal of forms, installation of services, and inspection. 2) Do not undercut slopes. f. Difficulty of excavation: No extra compensation will be made for removal of rock or any other material due to difficulty of excavation. 3. Excavation of ditches and gutters: a. Cut ditches and gutters accurately to cross sections and grades indicated on the Drawings. b. Take care not to excavate ditches and gutters below grades indicated on the Drawings. c. Backfill excessive ditch and gutter excavations to grade with suitable material acceptable to the Engineer. d. Do not deposit any material within 3 feet of edge of ditch unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 4. Necessary over excavation: a. Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond normal lines of excavation in order to remove boulders or other interfering objects, backfill voids remaining after removal as specified in backfilling of voids below, or as acceptable to the Engineer. b. Backfill voids with material acceptable to the Engineer: 1) With acceptance of the Engineer, backfill with one of the following: a) Native material. F. Surface preparation: 1. After excavations reach required depths, proof-roll surfaces to identify areas that are soft, loose, or yielding; and to induce settlement of looser materials in the subsurface materials. 2. Surfaces below fills and embankments: a. Proof-roll using a minimum 10-ton vibratory roller operating at a vibration frequency of 1,100 to 1,500 vibrations per minute. 3. Surfaces below roadway fills and paving: a. Proof-roll using a fully-loaded, tandem-axle dump truck or equivalent. G. Materials for backfills, embankments, fills, and roadway fills: 1. General: a. Obtain import material from other sources if surplus materials from cuts and excavations obtained from within Project site do not conform to specified requirements or are not sufficient in quantity for construction of Project. 2. Compaction: a. Provide compaction for backfills, fills, coarse fill, embankments, roadway fills, and other earthwork as specified for each in the following paragraphs. b. Perform confirmation tests to verify and confirm that work has complied, and is complying at all times, with compaction requirements in this Section for initial compaction demonstration and field quality control testing. c. For each material used, determine maximum density in the laboratory in accordance with ASTM D 1557. d. Determine in-place density of compacted backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, and roadway fills determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2922, or ASTM D 3017. October 2016 31_00_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) e. To prevent damage to adjacent and underlying structures due to backfilling operations, place and compact backfill with equipment as follows: 1) Work within a horizontal distance from the structure less than or equal to 1/2 of the height of the adjacent wall, and all locations within 3 feet of walls: a) Fill placement: Equipment with gross vehicle weight not exceeding 10,000 pounds. b) Fill compaction: Hand-operated equipment. 2) Work outside those limits: Heavier placement and compaction equipment. 3. Backfills: a. Backfill adjacent to structures, slabs, or walls: Native material or imported material meeting the requirements of select material, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. b. Backfill material under concrete structures: : Native material or imported material meeting the requirements of select material, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. c. Extend backfill in any area under concrete structures from undisturbed soil or rock to the bottom aggregate base course material layer or as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Embankments: a. Native material or imported material meeting the requirements of select material, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. 5. Fills: a. Native material or imported material meeting the requirements of select material, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. b. Extend fill in any area under concrete structures from undisturbed soil or rock to the bottom aggregate base course material layer. 6. Roadway fills: One of the following, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings: a. Native material or imported material meeting the requirements of select material, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. b. For fill under South Broadway or Wildcat Reserve Parkway, fill shall be controlled low strength material. H. Placement: 1. General: a. Lines and grades: 1) Construct backfills, embankments, fills, and road fills, at locations and to lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. 2) Overbuild all permanent fill slopes by at least 1 foot and then cut to final grade to provide adequate compaction of the remaining fill. 2. Backfills: a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction. b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between 1 percent below optimum moisture content and 3 percent above optimum moisture content before compacting. October 2016 31_00_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) c. Defective compacted backfills: Remove and recompact. d. The elevation of backfill around structures must be brought up evenly on all sides. It is not acceptable to backfill part of the structure higher than another. 3. Fills: a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction. b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between 1 percent below optimum moisture content and 3 percent above optimum moisture content before compacting. c. Defective compacted fills: Remove and recompact. 4. Embankments: a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction. b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between 1 percent below optimum moisture content and 3 percent above optimum moisture content before compacting. c. Defective compacted embankments: Remove and recompact. 5. Roadway fills: a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction. b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between 1 percent below optimum moisture content and 3 percent above optimum moisture content before compacting. c. Defective compacted roadway fills: Remove and recompact. I. Tolerances: 1. Finished grading of backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, and roadway fills: a. Perform fine grading under concrete structures such that finished surfaces are never above the grade or cross section indicated on the Drawings and are never more than 0.10 feet below. b. Provide finished surface for areas outside of structures that are within 0.10 feet of grade or cross section indicated on the Drawings. 2. Unlined channels and basins: a. In both cut and fill, and levee and access road side slopes in cut: Vertical tolerance of none above and 3 inches below grade indicated on the Drawings on bottom and side slopes. b. On top surface of levee and access road in both cut and fill, and levee and access road side slopes in fill: Vertical tolerance of none below and 3 inches above grade indicated on the Drawings. 3. Areas which are not under structures, concrete, asphalt, roads, pavements, sidewalks, dikes, and similar facilities: a. Provide finish graded surfaces of either undisturbed soil, or cohesive material not less than 6 inches deep. b. Intent of proceeding is to avoid sandy or gravelly areas. 4. Finished grading of surfaces: a. Reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. b. Provide degree of finish that is ordinarily obtainable from blade grader operations, except as otherwise specified. c. Uniformly grade areas that are not under concrete. d. Finish ditches and gutters so that they drain readily. October 2016 31_00_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) J. Restoration of disturbed native or open areas: 1. Re-seed native and open areas disturbed by construction activities as directed by the Owner. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control for the Work of this Section as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Field inspections and tests: 1. Submit records of inspections and testing to Engineer within 24 hours after completion. 2. Confirmation tests: a. Provide and use results from confirmation tests to control operations so that compaction work complies, and is complying at all times, with requirements specified in this Section. b. Frequency of confirmation testing: Provide testing at the rates specified in the following paragraphs. c. In-place density testing. 1) Backfill: Minimum of 1 test per 900 square feet (or fraction thereof) per lift. 2) Cuts and exposed/re-compacted bottoms of excavations: Minimum of 1 test per 400 square feet (or fraction thereof) per lift. 3) Fills: Minimum of 1 test per 400 square feet (or fraction thereof) per lift. 4) Roadway fills: Minimum of 1 test per 2,000 square feet per lift. d. Fill material maximum dry density versus moisture relationship testing: 1) For each fill material, minimum of 1 test at intervals not greater than the least of the following: a) Every 90 days; b) Every 5000 cubic yard placed; or c) Whenever the type or characteristics of the material change. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Special inspections and tests, and structural observations. 1. Provide as specified in Section 01_45_24. C. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted submittals. 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. D. Field testing: 1. Compliance tests: a. Periodic compliance tests will be made by the Engineer to verify that compaction is meeting requirements previously specified. October 2016 31_00_00-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_00_00 (FS-100) b. Remove overburden above level at which the Engineer wishes to test. Backfill and re-compact excavation after testing is completed. c. If compaction fails to meet specified requirements, perform remedial work by one of the following methods: 1) Remove and replace materials at proper density. 2) Bring density up to specified level by other means acceptable to the Engineer. d. Retesting: 1) Contractor bears the costs of retesting required to confirm and verify that remedial work has brought compaction within specified requirements. 2) Owner's confirmation tests during performance of remedial work: a) Performance: Perform tests in manner acceptable to the Engineer. b) Frequency: Double the rate specified under Field Quality Control. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. Finish grades of excavations, backfills, and fills: 1. Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes due to any settlement or erosion that may occur from action of the elements or any other cause prior to final acceptance. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Finish grades of backfills, cuts, excavations, and fills: 1. Protect newly graded areas from erosion and deterioration by action of the elements. B. Ditches and gutters: 1. Maintain ditches and gutters free from detrimental quantities of debris that might inhibit drainage until final acceptance. END OF SECTION October 2016 31_05_15-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_05_15 (FS-100) SECTION 31_05_15 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Aggregate base course. 2. Drain rock. 3. Gravel. 4. Native material. 5. Sand. 6. Squeegee. 7. Stabilization material. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C117 - Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. 2. C131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 3. C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 4. D422 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. 5. D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 6. D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. 7. D 4829 - Standard Test Method for Expansion Index for Soils. A. Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT): 1. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2011. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: 1. Material source. 2. Gradation. 3. Testing data. B. Quality control for aggregate base course: 1. Test reports: Reports for tests required by CDOT Standard Specifications. 2. Certificates of Compliance: Certificates as required by CDOT Standard Specifications. October 2016 31_05_15-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_05_15 (FS-100) 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and protection: Protect from segregation and excessive moisture during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Provide material having maximum particle size not exceeding 4 inches and that is free of trash, lumber, debris, leaves, grass, roots, stumps, and other organic matter. 2. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt concrete are not acceptable. 3. Soil classifications listed in the following paragraphs are based on the classifications of ASTM D 2487. B. Aggregate Base Course: 1. Consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel, screened or crushed to required size and grading and free from vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay, alkali, adobe, or other deleterious matter. 2. Materials derived from crushed reclaimed concrete or asphalt: a. Shall not be used for aggregate base course under structures or around pipes. b. May be used as base course under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving when accepted by the Contractor’s Engineer. 3. Conform to CDOT Standard Specifications, “Class 6 Aggregate Base Course” (CDOT Section 703.03). Gradation as shown in the following table, and liquid limit of 30 or less. Sieve Size (Square Openings) Percent By Weight Passing Sieve 3/4” 100 No. 4 30 - 65 No. 8 25 - 55 No. 200 3 - 12 C. Drain rock: 1. Durability: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 2. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or crushed to specified size and gradation, and washed. 3. Free from organic matter, lumps or balls of clay, or other deleterious matter. 4. Crush or waste coarse material and waste fine material as required to meet gradation requirements. 5. Conform to size and gradation limits specified in ASTM C 33 for size number 4 or number 467. October 2016 31_05_15-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_05_15 (FS-100) D. Gravel: 1. Consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel, screened or crushed to specified sizes and gradations. 2. Free from organic matter, lumps or balls of clay, alkali, adobe, or other deleterious matter. 3. When sampled and tested in accordance with specified test methods, material shall comply with following requirements: a. Plasticity Index: Not greater than 5 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. b. Liquid Limit: Not greater than 25 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. c. Conform to CDOT Standard Specifications “Class B Filter Material” (CDOT section 703.09), except with gradation modified as shown in the following table. Sieve Size (Square Openings) Percent By Weight Passing Sieve 1-1/2 inch 100 3/4 inch 60 - 90 No. 4 0 - 20 No. 200 0 - 3 E. Native material: 1. Sound, earthen material. Material larger than 3 inches shall not be plced within 3 feet of foundation walls or underneath structures. 2. Excavated claystone material shall not be used as native material for backfill. F. Sand: 1. Clean, coarse, natural sand. 2. Nonplastic when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. 3. One hundred percent shall pass a 1/2-inch screen. 4. No more than 20 percent shall pass a Number 200 sieve. G. Squeegee: Course aggregate conforming to ASTM C 33, size number 8. H. Stabilization material: Use Aggregate Base Course. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION October 2016 31_23_17-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_17 (FS-100) SECTION 31_27_17 TRENCHING PART 1 GENERAL A. Description: 1. Clearing, grubbing and site preparation. 2. Removal and disposal of debris. 3. Handling, storage, transportation, and disposal of excavated material. 4. Sheeting, shoring, bracing and protection work. 5. Pumping and dewatering as required or necessary. 6. Backfilling. 7. Pipe bedding. 8. Construction of fills and embankments. 9. Trench stabilization. 10. Final grading. 11. Appurtenant work. B. Related sections: 1. Section 33_05_01 - Sanitary Sewer. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 2. C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 3. D1241 - Material for Soil Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses. 4. D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 lb Rammer and 12-Inch Drop. 5. D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb Rammer and 18 inch drop. 6. D4253 - Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. 7. D4254 - Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculations of Relative Density. 8. D2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 9. D3017 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01_33_00. B. Product Data: Submit on all products or materials supplied herein. October 2016 31_23_17-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_17 (FS-100) C. Test Reports: Indicate sieve analysis, optimum moisture content, and density in accordance with ASTM D698 for cohesive soils including onsite native material. Indicate supplier, sieve analysis, and maximum relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253 and D4254 for crushed rock or gravel, pipe bedding and other cohesionless material for fills and embankment. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all requirements of State Construction Dewatering Permit. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Protect adjacent structures and surrounding areas from damage during excavation, filling, and backfilling. B. Protect work from erosion or other similar types of damage until the project has been completed. C. Do not backfill or construct fills during freezing weather. Backfill or construct fills only when temperature is 35ºF and rising. D. Do not use frozen materials, snow, or ice in any backfill or fill area. E. Do not backfill or construct fill on frozen surfaces. F. Protect excavated material from becoming frozen. G. Protect trees from permanent damage by construction activities. H. Provide temporary bridges for roadways, walkways, driveways, etc. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Classification of Excavated Materials: 1. None. 2. Remove and handle excavated materials regardless of type, character, composition, condition, or depth of material at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Remove and handle excavated materials regardless of means, methods and techniques required, at no additional cost to Owner. B. Handling of Excavated Materials: 1. Remove all excavated soils from project Work areas and store at site(s) designated by Contractor. 2. Separate topsoil from trench excavated soils. 3. Import off-site job excavated soils only as necessary to accommodate current Work. C. Backfill below non-paved areas: 1. Use excess earth from excavation for fill between bedding zone and bottom of topsoil. October 2016 31_23_17-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_17 (FS-100) 2. Free from rocks or stones larger than 6 inch in greatest dimension and free from brush, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and organic and other deleterious materials. 3. No rocks or stones in upper 18 inch of fill. D. Backfill below paved areas: 1. Flow-fill from bedding zone to top of subgrade. E. Topsoil: 1. Native material removed and stockpiled before excavation. 2. Free from trash and debris. F. Pipe Bedding: Reference project details – CDOT No. 8 or CDOT No. 67: 1. Washed rock CDOT No. 8: Sieve Size (Inch) Percent Passing by Weight 1/2 100 3/8 85-100 #4 10-30 #8 0-10 #16 0-5 2. Provide squeegee bedding for all sanitary sewer piping installation. Bedding shall fully surround pipe and shall be placed 6 inch thick beneath the pipe, and shall be 12 inch thick above the pipe. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Field verify the location of all underground utilities, pipelines and structures prior to excavation. 3.02 PERFORMANCE A. Perform work in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions against hazard. B. Provide adequate working space and clearances for work performed within excavations and for installation and removal of concrete forms. C. Do not undercut excavation faces for extended footings. D. Clean subgrades of loose material before concrete is placed thereon. E. Except as otherwise authorized, indicated, or specified, replace all material excavated below the bottom of concrete walls, footings, slabs on grade and foundations with concrete placed at the same time and monolithic with the concrete above. October 2016 31_23_17-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_17 (FS-100) 3.03 PREPARATION A. Clear sites to be occupied by permanent construction of roots, brush, and other objectionable material and debris. B. Clean and strip subgrade for fills and embankments of surface vegetation, sod, tree stumps and organic topsoil. C. Remove waste materials from site and dispose. D. Remove debris from site daily and dispose of off-site; on-site burning is not permitted. 3.04 PRESERVATION OF TREES A. Do not remove trees under any circumstances. B. Protect trees from permanent damage by construction operation. C. Hand excavate inside of, and within 10 foot outside diameter, of root zone. 3.05 TOPSOIL A. Remove and stockpile sufficient topsoil from surface to a minimum depth of 4- inches where the original topsoil will be covered or damaged. B. Import additional clean material to surface fill embankments, berms, and other areas where original topsoil will be covered or damaged. C. At the completion of other work in each area, place and grade topsoil to maintain gradient as indicated. 3.06 DEWATERING A. Provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of surface and groundwater entering excavations, trenches, and other parts of the work. B. Keep each excavation dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the structure to be built or the pipe to be installed is completed to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result. C. Dewater excavations which extend to or below groundwater by lowering and keeping the groundwater level beneath such excavation at least 12 inches below the bottom of the excavation. D. Divert surface water or otherwise prevent it from entering excavated areas or trenches to the extent practical without damaging adjacent property. E. Maintain all drainage pipes, keep clean and free of sediment during construction and final cleanup. F. Obtain and comply with conditions of CDPHE construction dewatering permit. October 2016 31_23_17-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_17 (FS-100) 3.07 SHEETING, SHORING AND BRACING A. Provide proper and substantial sheeting, shoring, and bracing, as required, to prevent caving or sliding, to protect workmen and the Work, and to protect existing structures and facilities. B. Design and build sheeting, shoring, and bracing to withstand all loads that might be caused by earth movement or pressure, and to be rigid, maintaining shape and position under all circumstances. C. Do not pull trench sheeting before backfilling unless pipe strength is sufficient, to carry trench loads based on trench width to the back of sheeting. D. Do not brace sheeting left in place against the pipe, but support it in a manner that precludes concentrated loads or horizontal thrusts on pipe. E. Cross braces installed above the pipe to support sheeting may be removed after pipe bedding is completed. 3.08 TRENCH STABILIZATION A. Thoroughly compact and consolidate subgrades for concrete structures, precast structures, and utility trench bottoms so they remain firm, dense and intact during required construction activities. B. Remove all mud and muck during excavation. C. Reinforce subgrades with crushed rock or gravel if they become mucky and unstable during construction activities. D. Finished elevation of stabilized subgrades are to be at or below subgrade elevations indicated on drawings. E. Allow no more than 2 inch depth of mud or muck to remain on trench bottoms when pipe bedding material is placed thereon. 3.09 CRUSHED ROCK OR GRAVEL FILLS A. Place on suitably prepared subgrade and compacted. B. Compacted by vibration. 3.10 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Excavate for roadways, drives and parking area to match existing on-site conditions. B. Excavate unsuitable material from the subgrade. C. After shaping, roll subgrade compacted to 98 percent of max density within 2 percent (+/-) optimum moisture content, ASTM D1557, to a minimum depth of 6 inches. October 2016 31_23_17-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_17 (FS-100) D. Reshape and wet as required. E. Remove soft or otherwise unsuitable material, and replace with suitable material. 3.11 FILLS AND EMBANKMENTS A. Level and roll subgrade so surface materials will be compact and bond with the first layer of fill or embankment. B. Place in horizontal layers 8 inch max uncompacted depth. C. Spread and level material deposited in piles and windrows before compacting. D. Thoroughly compact each layer by rolling or other means acceptable to Engineer to 98 percent of max density within 2 percent (+/-) optimum moisture content. E. Alter compaction methods if material fails to meet specified density. F. Where a trench passes through a fill or embankment, place and compact fill or embankment to 12 inch above the top of the pipe before excavating the trench. G. Add water and harrow, disc, blade, or otherwise work each layer to obtain the uniform moisture content and adequate compaction. 3.12 BLASTING A. Blasting or other use of explosives is not permitted. 3.13 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Establish alignment and grade or elevation from offset stakes B. Excavate trenches so pipes can be laid straight at uniform grade without dips or bumps, between the terminal elevations indicated on the drawings. C. Comply with pipe specification sections regarding vertical and horizontal alignment and max joint deflection. D. Measure pipe cover depth vertically from top of pipe to finished ground or surface elevation. E. Do not open more trench in advance of pipe laying than is necessary to expedite the work. F. Except where tunneling is indicated on the drawings, specified, or permitted by Engineer, excavate trenches by open cut from the surface. G. Mechanical excavation: 1. Do not use where its operation would damage buildings, culverts, or other existing property, structures, or utilities above or below ground; hand excavate only in such areas. October 2016 31_23_17-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_17 (FS-100) 2. Use mechanical equipment of a type, design, and construction and operated so that: a. Rough trench bottom elevation can be controlled. b. Uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained from 1 foot above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom of the trench. c. Trench alignment is such that pipe is accurately laid to specified alignment and is centered in the trench with adequate clearance between pipe and trench sidewalls. 3. Do not undercut trench sidewalls. 4. Re-compact trench bottom disturbed by bucket teeth prior to placement of bedding material. H. Except as otherwise required, excavate trenches below the underside of pipes as indicated in the drawings to provide for installation of granular bedding pipe foundation material. I. Whenever so directed by Engineer, excavate to such depth below grade as Engineer directs and bring the trench bottom to grade with such material as Engineer may direct. J. Provide concrete, or other foundations made necessary by unstable soil as directed by Engineer. K. Excavate to provide adequate clearance for tools and methods of pipe installation. L. Do not allow any parts of bells or couplings to contact the trench bottom, or walls when pipe is joined. M. Cuts in surface construction: 1. No larger than necessary to provide adequate working space. 2. Cut a clean groove not less than 12-inch deep along each side of trench or around perimeter of excavation area. 3. Remove pavement and base pavement to provide shoulder not less than 3 feet wide between cut edge and top edge of trench. 4. Do not undercut trenches, resulting in bottom trench width greater than top widths. 5. Make pavement cuts to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines parallel to trench centerline or limits of excavation. 6. Remove pavement for connections to existing lines or structures only to the extent required for the installation, as determined by Engineer. 7. Where the trench parallels the length of a concrete walk which is all or partially over the trench, remove and replace the entire walk. 8. Where the trench crosses the drives, walks, curbs, or other surface construction, remove and replace the surface construction between saw cuts as specified for pavement. 3.14 PIPE BEDDING A. Embed pipes above and below the bottom of pipe as indicated in the drawings and as specified. B. Spread and surface grade granular bedding to provide continuous and uniform support beneath pipe at all points between pipe joints. October 2016 31_23_17-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_17 (FS-100) C. After grading, aligning, and placing pipe in final position, and shoring home, deposit and compact sufficient bedding under and around each side of the pipe and to hold the pipe in proper position and alignment during subsequent operations. D. Place and compact bedding material uniformly and simultaneously on both sides of pipe to prevent lateral displacement. E. Granular bedding: 1. Compact by slicing with shovel or vibrating. 2. Maximum uncompacted thickness of layers: 6 inch. F. Compacted bedding: 1. Maximum uncompacted thickness of layers: 8 inch. 2. Compact to 95 percent max density as determined by ASTM D698. 3. Compact to 70 percent relative density ASTM D4253/D4254. 3.15 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Compacted backfill: 1. For full depth of trench above bedding. 2. Beneath pavements, surfacing, driveways, curbs, gutters, walks or other surface construction or structures. 3. In street or highway shoulders. 4. In established sodded areas. 5. Beneath fills and embankments. B. Where the trench for one pipe passes beneath the trench of another pipe, compact the backfill for the lower trench to the bottom of the upper trench. C. Place job excavated materials in 8 inch max uncompacted thickness, uniform layers. D. Increased layer thickness may be permitted for uncohesive material if Contractor demonstrates to Engineer's satisfaction that specified compacted density will be achieved. E. Use methods and equipment appropriate to the material to be compacted to prevent transmission of damaging shocks to pipe. F. Compact to 98 percent of max density within 2 percent (+/-) optimum moisture content per ASTM D698 or to an equivalent percent relative density per ASTM D4253/D4254 when appropriate. G. Graded gravel: 1. Deposit in uniform layers of 8 inch max uncompacted thickness. 2. Compact with suitable vibrating roller or platform vibrator to not less than 70 percent relative density per ASTM D4253/D4254. H. Uncompacted backfill: 1. Compaction of backfill above pipe bedding in locations other than those specified, is required only to prevent future settlement. October 2016 31_23_17-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_17 (FS-100) 2. May be placed by any method acceptable to Engineer which will not impose excessive concentrated or unbalanced loads, shock, or impact on, and will not result in displacement of installed pipe. 3. Do not drop compact masses of stiff clay or other consolidated material more than 5 feet into trench unless cushioned by 2 feet minimum of loose backfill above pipe bedding. I. Finish the top portion of backfill with a thickness of topsoil corresponding to, or better than, that underlying adjoining sodded areas. 3.16 DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE A. Do not backfill trenches across roadways, drives, walks or other trafficways adjacent to drainage ditches or water courses prior to backfilling the trench on the upstream side of the trafficway to prevent impounding water after pipe is laid. B. Backfill so that water does not accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches. C. Remove materials deposited in roadway ditches or other water courses crossed by the trench line immediately after backfilling is completed and restore ditches and water courses to original section, grade, and contours. D. Do not obstruct surface drainage any longer than necessary. E. Provide and maintain temporary bridges and other structures across unfilled trenches as required to maintain traffic. 3.17 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Use excess excavated materials in fills and embankments as indicated on the drawings to the extent needed. B. Dispose of suitable excess excavated materials at locations directed by Engineer. Excess excavated materials shall be hauled off site. Excess excavated materials shall not be left on site. C. Remove unused suitable material from the site and dispose of it. D. Remove debris, junk, broken concrete, broken asphalt, rock, stones, stumps, logs, roots, and other unsuitable material from the site and dispose of it. E. Except as otherwise permitted, dispose of excess excavated materials away from the site of the Work or as directed by Owner. F. Haul excess earth from excavations off-site. 3.18 FINAL GRADING A. After completion of all other outside work and after backfilling is completed and settled, bring all areas of the site to pre-construction grades. B. Graders and other power equipment may be used for final grading and slope dressing if the result is uniform and equivalent to hand work. October 2016 31_23_17-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_17 (FS-100) 3.19 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Submit General Permit Application to CDPHE for stormwater discharges associated with construction activity and comply with all conditions of the permit. 3.20 SETTLEMENT A. Warranty for settlement of all fills, embankments, and backfills is stipulated in the General Conditions from final completion of Contract under which Work is performed. B. Repair or replace within 30 days after notice by Engineer or Owner. 3.21 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide under provisions of Section 01_45_00. B. Coordinate and all tests to determine compliance of in-place and backfill materials and compaction in accordance with the specifications. C. Fills and Embankment: 1. Two moisture-density relationship tests, ASTM D698 on each type of fill material. 2. One in-place compaction test for every 1.5 feet of vertical lift of material placed. D. Pipe Bedding and Backfill: 1. Two initial gradation tests for each type of material plus 1 additional test for 500 cubic yards of each material. 2. Two moisture-density relationship tests, ASTM D698, or 2 relative density tests, ASTM D4253/D4254, as appropriate for each type of bedding on backfill material proposed, except granular bedding material. 3. One in-place compaction test every 100 lineal feet of trench in the compacted bedding zone and at every 1.5 feet of vertical lift of backfill materials, ASTM D2922/D3017. 4. One in-place compaction test near top of trench for trench depth of 2 feet or less, ASTM D2922/D3017. 5. Five (5) additional in-place compaction tests at the discretion of the Engineer, ASTM D2922/D3017. END OF SECTION October 2016 31_23_19-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_19 (FS-100) SECTION 31_23_19 DEWATERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Installation and maintenance of dewatering systems. 2. Disposal of water entering excavation or other parts of the work. B. Related sections: 1. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Section 03_60_00 - Grouting. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Keep excavations reasonably free from water. Draw down static groundwater level to minimum of 3 feet below anticipated bottom of excavations before the excavation reaches bottom elevation. 2. Dewatering design analysis. Include following: a. Evaluation of anticipated subsurface conditions. b. Required well spacing. c. Diameter of wells. d. Depth to screen, screen height, and mesh size. e. Backfill and filter pack. f. Pump size. g. Drawdown duration. h. Drawdown and steady state flow rates. i. Expected settlements. 3. Include water drawdown curves in dewatering calculations. 4. Coordinate dewatering design with excavation and shoring design. Excavation and shoring design shall consider changes in groundwater conditions and associated earth pressures. 5. Do not place concrete or masonry foundations or concrete slabs in water. Do not allow water to rise over these elements until concrete or mortar has set for at least 24 hours. 6. Maintain operation of dewatering system until complete structure -- including walls, slabs, beams, struts, and other structural elements -- has been constructed; concrete has attained its specified compressive strength; and backfill has been completed to finished grade. 7. Provide standby power to ensure continuous dewatering in case of power failure. B. Dewatering shored excavations: 1. Dewater from within shoring. 2. Use impermeable shoring system to minimize lowering of groundwater outside shoring. October 2016 31_23_19-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_19 (FS-100) 3. Extend impermeable shoring below bottom of excavation sufficient amount to: a. Minimize lowering of groundwater outside shoring. b. Prevent unstable excavation due to piping and heave. 4. To minimize settlement outside shoring due to dewatering, do not lower groundwater outside shoring more than 1foot. Provide groundwater recharge if required to maintain this groundwater elevation outside of shoring. 5. Provide monitoring wells located outside shoring for monitoring groundwater elevation. C. Obtain written permission from Engineer before locating wells, well points, or drain lines for dewatering within the limits of a structure’s foundation. D. Locate dewatering facilities where they will not interfere with utilities and construction work to be performed by others. E. Discharge. 1. Discharge water to location agreed upon by Owner and in compliance with all regulatory requirements. 2. Discharge to manholes or storm drain inlets will not be permitted. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Dewatering plan: 1. Dewatering design analysis. 2. Required permits. 3. Arrangement, location, and depths of dewatering system components. 4. Type and sizes of filters. 5. Identify proposed alignment, support, and protection for discharge pipe. Identify location of discharge and provide details for that location. B. Well construction logs. Include: 1. Descriptions of actual materials encountered, categorized in accordance with Unified Soil Classification System. 2. Construction details. 3. Well development procedures and results. 4. Deviations from original design. C. Qualifications: 1. Dewatering contractor. 2. Dewatering design engineer. 3. Testing laboratory. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Dewatering plan and dewatering system analysis: 1. Prepared by a qualified Civil Engineer, licensed in the state where the Project is located. a. The dewatering design engineer shall have at least 8 years of experience in designing similar systems. October 2016 31_23_19-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_19 (FS-100) B. Submit qualifications of Dewatering Contractor, the Dewatering Design Engineer, sampling service, and testing laboratory. C. Regulatory requirements: 1. Obtain required water discharge permits. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. During construction, provide and maintain ample means and devices to promptly remove and properly dispose of water entering excavation or other parts of the work, whether water is surface water or underground water. B. Keep excavations reasonably free of water. C. Make provisions to maintain continuous dewatering. 1. Provide standby power to maintain dewatering during power outages and interruptions. 2. Provide 24-hour monitoring by personnel skilled in operation and maintenance of the system, and capable of providing or obtaining work required to maintain system operation. D. Monitoring wells: 1. Provide at least 1 groundwater level monitoring well. If more than 4 dewatering wells or well points are installed, provide 1 additional monitoring well for every 4 dewatering wells or well points. 2. Locate monitoring wells within 6 feet of excavation and mid way between dewatering wells or well points. 3. Provide temporary threaded cap, not less than 2 inches in diameter at the top of wells. 4. Protect dewatering wells in place during excavation. E. Intercept and divert precipitation and surface water away from excavations. Use dikes, curb walls, ditches, pipes, sumps, or other means acceptable to Engineer. F. Disposal of water: 1. Dispose of water from the work in suitable manner without damage to adjacent property. 2. Do not drain water into work built or under construction. 3. Dispose of water in such manner that it will not be a menace to public health or safety. G. Wells, well points, and drain lines for dewatering: 1. Provide after receiving Engineer's written acceptance. 2. Fill dewatering wells, pipes, and french drains to be left in place within structure foundation limits with Class “C” concrete as specified in Section 03_30_00 or grout as specified in Section 03_60_00. October 2016 31_23_19-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_19 (FS-100) 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Prior to release of groundwater to its static level: Confirm that: 1. All groundwater pressure relief devices for structure are fully operational. 2. Construction of structure is complete and concrete has reached its specified compressive strength. 3. Backfill of structure is complete. B. Control release of groundwater to its static level to prevent disturbance of natural foundation soils or compacted backfills and fills and to prevent flotation or movement of structures, pipelines, or other facilities. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Monitoring wells: 1. Record groundwater levels at least once a week. Submit readings to Engineer within 1 week. END OF SECTION October 2016 31_23_24-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_24 (FS-100) SECTION 31_23_24 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Controlled low strength material (CLSM), also known as “flowable fill.” B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 3. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. 229R - Report on Controlled Low-Strength Materials. 2. 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready Mix Concrete. 2. C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 3. C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 4. C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 5. C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 6. D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3(2,700 kN-m/m3)). 7. D 4832 - Standard Test Method of Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders. 8. D 5971 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Controlled Low Strength Material. 9. D 6023 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, Cement Content, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Controlled Low-Strength Material. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Mixture of portland cement, water, pozzolan, fine aggregate and admixtures, proportioned in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 229 to produce a homogeneous mixture that is flowable, that will readily work into corners and angles; that will not segregate in the plastic state; and that is self-compacting at the time of placement without the use of mechanical vibration. B. Performance requirements: 1. Air content, total calculated in accordance with ASTM D 6023: Not less than 8.0 percent, nor greater than 12.0 percent. October 2016 31_23_24-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_24 (FS-100) 2. Compressive strength, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4832 at 28 days: Not less than 50 pounds per square inch, nor greater than 150 pounds per square inch. 3. Wet density: Not less than 125 pounds per cubic foot and not greater than 132 pounds per cubic foot. 4. Slump, measured in accordance with ASTM C 143 at the point of placement: Greater than 9 inches and that allows CLSM to flow freely and to be self- compacting during placement. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Submit data completely describing materials in the mix and demonstrating compliance with the requirements of this Section. 1. Cement: Mill tests. Indicate alkali content representative of each shipment. 2. Fly ash: Identify source and type of fly ash. 3. Water: Identify source and quality if not from a municipal treatment source. 4. Admixtures: Manufacturer’s product data indicating suitability for use in CLSM mixes and recommended dosage rates. 5. Aggregate: a. Submit source, type, and sieve analyses. b. Resubmit at any time there is a significant change in grading of materials. B. Mix design: 1. Submit full details, including mix design calculations for mix proposed for use. 2. Trial batch test data: a. Submit data for each test cylinder. b. Submit data that identifies mix and slump for each test cylinder. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store or stockpile cement, fly ash, and aggregate in accordance with ACI 301. B. Store admixtures in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Portland cement in accordance with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 2. Having total alkali content not more than 0.60 percent. B. Fly ash: Class C or Class F fly ash in accordance with ASTM C 618. C. Water: 1. Potable water. Clean and free from oil and deleterious amounts of alkali, acid, organic matter, or other substances. D. Admixtures: Products of a single manufacturer, specifically manufactured or recommended by that manufacturer for use in CLSM. 1. Air entraining admixture: In accordance with ASTM C 260. October 2016 31_23_24-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_24 (FS-100) E. Aggregate: 1. Non-expansive, non-reactive, inert natural sand conforming to the following requirements: a. Not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. b. No plastic fines present. c. Including pea gravel no larger than 3/8 inch. 2. Non-expansive, non-reactive, inert natural sand in accordance with ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. 2.02 MIXES A. See System Description for performance requirements of the plastic and hardened mix. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Trial batch: 1. After mix design has been accepted by Engineer, have trial batch of the accepted mix design prepared by testing laboratory acceptable to Engineer. 2. Prepare trial batches using the specific cement, fly ash, admixtures, aggregates, and water proposed for the Work. 3. Prepare trial batch with quantity sufficient to determine slump, workability, and consistency; and to provide test cylinders as indicated in the following paragraphs. B. Trial batch testing: 1. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C 143, with the following modifications: a. Do not rod the concrete material. b. Place material in slump cone in one semi-continuous filling operation, slightly overfill, tap lightly, strike off, and then measure and record slump. 2. Prepare and test trial batch specimens in accordance with ASTM D 4832, with the following modifications: a. Provide cylindrical test specimens, each 6-inches in diameter by 12-inch high. b. Provide a minimum of 8 cylinders for testing of each trial batch. c. Fill the molds to overflowing and tap sides lightly to settle the mix. d. Do not rod the mix for consolidation in the cylinder. e. Strike off the excess material. 3. Place test cylinders in a moist curing room. Exercise caution in moving and transporting the cylinders since they are fragile and will withstand only minimal bumping, banging, or jolting without damage. 4. Do not remove the test cylinder from mold until that cylinder is to be capped and tested. a. Perform the capping carefully to prevent premature fractures. b. Do not perform initial compression test until the cylinders reach a minimum age of 3 days. 5. Provide compressive strength tests. a. Test 4 test cylinders at 7 days after casting, and another 4 cylinders at 28 days after casting. October 2016 31_23_24-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_24 (FS-100) b. The compression strength of the 4 test cylinders tested at 28 days shall be equal to or greater than the minimum required compression strength, but shall not exceed maximum compression strength. C. If the trial batch tests do not meet the Specifications for strength or density, revise and re-submit the mix design, prepare additional trial batch(es), and complete additional trial batch tests. Repeat until an acceptable trial batch is that conforms to the Specifications is produced. 1. All the trial batches and acceptability of materials shall be paid by the Contractor. 2. After acceptance, do not change the mix design without submitting a new mix design, trail batches, and test information. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Do not place CLSM until preparation and condition of surfaces receiving the fill have been observed and accepted by the Engineer. B. Remove debris foreign matter, and standing or running water from excavations and areas receiving CLSM before placement. C. Pipes and trenches. 1. Where CLSM is placed around and over pipes, secure pipes in place, or place CLSM in lifts to prevent pipe flotation. 2. Where CLSM is placed in long, open trenches, confine material using bulkheads of sandbags, earth dams, or stiffer concrete at open ends of placement. 3.02 MEASURING, BATCHING, MIXING AND TRANSPORTING A. Measure, batch, mix and transport CLSM in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 94 and this Section. B. Mix until there is uniform distribution of materials. C. Discharge mixer completely prior to recharging. D. After trial batch testing and mix acceptance, maintain slump during construction within plus or minus 1 inch of the design slump. 3.03 PLACING A. Place controlled low strength material by method that preserves the quality of the material in terms of compressive strength and density. B. Maintain fluid properties of the mix during placement. 1. At point of placement, provide material that flows easily around, beneath, or through walls, pipes, conduits, or other structures. 2. Do not place CLSM that has partially hardened or that has been contaminated by foreign materials. October 2016 31_23_24-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_24 (FS-100) 3. Handle and place CLSM using methods that minimize segregation of the mix. 4. Deposit mix as near its final position as possible to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. 5. Contain and confine mix while it is fluid. Design containment structures and bracing at walls and forms to withstand lateral pressures of wet mix. C. Lifts: 1. Limit lift heights of CLSM placed against structures and other facilities that could be damaged due to the pressure from the CLSM, to the lesser of 3 feet or the lift height indicated on the Drawings. 2. Do not place another lift of CLSM until the last lift of CLSM has set and gained sufficient strength to prevent additional lateral load against the forms or structure due to the weight of the next lift of CLSM. D. Water conditions: 1. Do not place CLSM in standing or flowing water. 2. Do not permit water to flow over the surface of freshly placed or un-hardened CLSM. 3. Do not submerge CLSM in water within 24 hours after placement. E. Manage CLSM bleed water. 1. Grade top surface of CLSM to drain away from the fill. 2. Provide side containment that permits bleed water to drain to a contained management area away from the fill. 3.04 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Curing; 1. Prior to and during curing, install barriers to prevent equipment or personnel from falling into or becoming entrapped in CLSM. B. Protect CLSM from: 1. Damage from the elements. 2. Damage of any nature during surrounding construction operations. 3. Freezing: Do not use salt, manure, or other chemicals to provide cold protection. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Contractor quality control for the Work of this Section as specified in Section 01_45_00. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Owner quality assurance as specified in Section 01_45_00. B. Special inspections and tests, and structural observations. 1. Provide as specified in Section 01_45_24. C. Field inspections: 1. Required inspections: a. Observe construction for conformance to the Contract Documents and the accepted submittals. October 2016 31_23_24-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_24 (FS-100) 2. Records of inspections: a. Provide record of each inspection. Submit copies to Engineer upon request. D. Sample CLSM for testing in accordance with ASTM D 5971. 1. Required tests: a. Air content: Prepare sample and test in accordance with ASTM D 6023 b. Compressive strength: Prepare and test cylinder specimens in accordance with ASTM D 4832. 1) Prepare 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high specimens for testing. a) Provide one set of specimens for each 150 cubic yards of CLSM placed, but not less than 1 set for each half day's placement. b) Prepare and test not less than 3 cylinders for each set. c) Place CLSM in the molds in accordance with ASTM D 4832. Do not rod or otherwise consolidate the material in the mold. d) In accordance with ASTM D 4832 recommendations for displacing bleed water at the top of the molds and refilling the molds before covering with a lid. Do not use air-tight lids. 2) Place the cylinders in a safe location away from construction activities. a) Protect cylinders from bumping and impact. b) Maintain temperature surrounding cylinders between 60 and 80 degrees Fahrenheit until delivery to the laboratory for testing. c) After the first day, surround molds with a high humidity environment by covering with wet burlap, or equivalent highly absorptive material. Maintain saturation of the cover. Do not sprinkle water directly on the cylinders. 3) After 4 days, place the cylinders in a protective container for transport to the laboratory for testing. a) Exercise caution in moving and transporting the cylinders since they are fragile and will withstand only minimal bumping, banging, or jolting without damage. b) Transport container may be a box with a Styrofoam or similar lining that will limit jarring and bumping of the cylinders. 4) Upon receipt at the testing laboratory, place test cylinders in a moist curing room until dates for testing. 5) Do not remove test cylinders from molds until the day that cylinders is to be capped and tested. 6) Cap and test for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D 4832. a) Do not perform initial compression test until the cylinders reach an age of at least 4 days. b) Test 1 cylinder at 7 days and 2 at 28 days. E. Compressive strength of the cylinders tested at 28 days shall be equal to or greater than the minimum required compression strength, but shall not exceed maximum compression strength specified. October 2016 31_23_24-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_23_24 (FS-100) 3.07 NON-CONFORMING WORK A. When testing or observation indicates CLSM with properties outside the specified and accepted range, Engineer will issue instructions regarding disposition of nonconforming materials. B. Engineer may: 1. Reject CLSM represented by those test specimens and require its removal and replacement. 2. Require modification of the mix design to provide CLSM with the properties specified. C. Make such modifications at no additional expense to the Owner and with no adjustment to the schedule. END OF SECTION October 2016 31_32_18.02-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_32_18.02 (FS-100) SECTION 31_32_18.02 FILTER FABRIC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Nonwoven filter fabric. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus. 2. D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. 3. D 4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles. 4. D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. 5. D 4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile. 6. D 5261 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of Geotextiles. 7. D 6241 - Standard Test Method for the Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles and Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50-mm Probe. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Filter fabric: Nonwoven geotextile fabric manufactured from polypropylene fibers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Samples. C. Quality control submittals: 1. Certificates of Compliance. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and protection: 1. Furnish filter fabric in protective covers capable of protecting the fabric from ultraviolet rays, abrasion, and water. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Take field measurements to determine the lengths and dimensions of the surfaces to receive the fabric. October 2016 31_32_18.02-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_32_18.02 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Propex, Geotex 401. 2. Ten Cate Geosynthetics, Mirafi 140N. 2.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Physical properties: Meet the following minimum requirements: Property(1) Test Method Unit Requirements(1) Minimum Weight ASTM D 5261 oz 4.0 Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 lbs 100 Grab Elongation ASTM D 4632 % 50 Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 lbs 50 CBR Puncture Resistance ASTM D 6241 lbs 300 UV Resistance (strength retained at 500 hrs) ASTM D 4355 % 70 Apparent Opening Size (AOS) ASTM D 4751 US sieve 70 Permittivity ASTM D 4491 sec-1 1.7 Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 gpm/ft2 130 Notes: (1) Minimum average roll values. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of filter fabric. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface preparation: 1. During grading operations, take care not to disturb the subgrade. 2. This may require use of lightweight dozers for low strength soils such as saturated, cohesionless, or low cohesion soils. B. Prior to placement of fabric: Prepare surface to smooth condition free of debris, depressions, or obstructions that may damage the fabric. October 2016 31_32_18.02-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_32_18.02 (FS-100) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions and as complimented herein. B. Place the filter fabric smoothly without folds or wrinkles. C. Use special care when placing the filter in contact with the soil so that no void spaces occur between the filter and the prepared surface. D. Overlap the parallel rolls and ends of rolls a minimum of 24 inches and not less than manufacturer's instructions. E. Do not drag filter fabric across subgrade. F. Make overlaps at ends of rolls in the direction of the aggregate placement with the previous roll on top. G. Use lightweight dozers if necessary. Do not allow equipment directly on filter fabric. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Before covering, the condition of the fabric will be observed by the Engineer to determine that no holes or rips exist in the fabric. 2. Repair all holes and rips by placing a new layer of fabric extending beyond the defect in all directions a distance equal to the minimum overlap required for adjacent rolls. END OF SECTION October 2016 31_63_30-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_63_30 (FS-100) SECTION 31_63_30 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Drilled concrete piers. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01_45_24 - Special Tests and Inspections. 3. Section 03_20_00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 4. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Payment procedures: 1. Basis of payment: a. Payment for pier work: 1) Base lump sum bid price for pier work on the number and lengths of piers indicated on the Drawings: a) This price shall include all costs in connection with the Work, including pier material, installation, reinforcing, concrete, pier cutoff, and other related items for a complete installation. 2) In addition, quote a unit price per foot for additional pier length or reduction in pier length for changes in pier length based on actual elevation of bedrock on site. The unit price for addition or reduction of length shall be the same amount. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete. 2. 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. 3. 306 - Cold Weather Concreting. 4. 336.1 - Specification for the construction of Drilled Piers. 5. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 6. 350 - Code Requirement for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 3. C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 4. C 172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 5. C 192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. October 2016 31_63_30-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_63_30 (FS-100) 6. D 1143 - Standard Test Method for Piles Under Static Axial Compressive Load. 7. D 3689 - Standard Test Method for Individual Piles Under Static Axial Tensile Load. 8. D 3966 - Standard Test Method for Piles Under Lateral Loads. C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. 20 Standard Guidelines for the Design and Installation of Pile Foundations. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious materials: Defined as portland cement and pozzolan admixture. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. Reinforcing bar bending and placement drawings as specified in Section 03_20_00. 2. Concrete mix design for drilled piers as specified in Section 03_30_00. B. Test reports: 1. Certified copy of mill test on concrete reinforcement as specified in Section 03_20_00. 2. Compression strength test results for concrete mix as specified in Section 03_30_00. 3. Records of field measurements of concrete slump and concrete cylinder compression test results. C. Qualifications: 1. Drilled pier contractor: Name, address, and qualifications. Submit written description of equipment and techniques proposed for use. Submit names and references for 5 projects of similar size completed within 3 years of the bid date when requested by the Engineer. 2. Geotechnical Engineer: Name, address, and qualifications. D. Construction records: 1. Record of drilling data for each pier placed and key plan of drilling record. 2. Pier location survey. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Drilled Pier Installer: Minimum of 10 years experience in drilled pier construction, including experience with similar subsurface materials, groundwater conditions, pier sizes, and construction techniques. The job supervisor directly responsible for pier installation shall have continuous experience of drilled pier installation throughout the last 10 years. Crane and drilling rig operators shall have at least 2 years of experience. 2. Geotechnical Engineer. Registered engineer, licensed in the state where the work is located, and engaged primarily in the practice of geotechnical engineering. Minimum of 10 years experience in the Denver area with projects including similar subsurface materials, groundwater conditions, pier sizes, and construction techniques. October 2016 31_63_30-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_63_30 (FS-100) A. Pre-installation conference: 1. Schedule and conduct pre-installation conference at least 10 days prior to drilling. a. Provide additional conferences if necessary to discuss specific drilling and subgrade conditions. b. Notify Engineer of location and time of each conference. 2. Required attendees: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Engineer. d. Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer. e. Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer. f. Drilled Pier Contractor. g. Ready-mix concrete supplier. h. Owner independent testing laboratory. i. Subcontractor providing load testing of drilled piers. 3. Agenda: a. Determination of the top of bedrock and when the minimum required embedment has been achieved. b. Observation of the bedrock to determine if it is adequate to provide the load capacity stated in the geotechnical investigation report by Brierley Associates. Procedures for changes in subgrade conditions. c. Procedures and protection of the hole, use of casing, and cleaning out of loose material. d. Roughened surface installation. e. Placement of reinforcing steel. f. Placement of concrete. g. Load testing. h. Boring Records form. i. Requirements and coordination for inspections and special inspections. j. Other Specification requirements requiring coordination between parties to the work. 4. Prepare and submit minutes of the pre-installation conference as specified in Section 01_30_00. B. Drilling observations: 1. Contractor shall employ a registered geotechnical engineer, licensed in the State of Colorado, to provide continuous on-site observation of the pier drilling operation. Piers shall not be installed unless the Engineer and Geotechnical Engineer are present. 2. Responsibilities of the Geotechnical Engineer include, but are not limited to observation of material excavated from pier shafts in order to determine the depth at which the designated pier bearing material has been reached, determination of whether or not this bearing material is of sufficient quality to sustain the pier design loads recommended in the soils investigation report for this project, and provision of geotechnical design recommendations if foundation design or construction modifications are required due to variations in actual site conditions. October 2016 31_63_30-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_63_30 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing steel: Use reinforcing steel as specified in Section 03_20_00. B. Tie wire: Use Number 18 double annealed iron wire, tie wire. C. Concrete: Use concrete materials as specified in Section 03_30_00. D. Steel casing: Steel casing for drilled piers shall conform to ASTM A 252, Grade 2. The cutting edge of steel casing shall be tempered, and the casing smooth. The use of steel casings is anticipated on this site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install piers only in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Piers that fail to meet the requirements of these Specifications for alignment and piers which for other reasons are unacceptable will be rejected. 3. Correct damaged or rejected piers by methods acceptable to the Engineer. B. Drilling: 1. Drill holes by means of a power driven, rotary bucket, rotary auger type, or core barrel foundation drilling machine designed to excavate a cylindrical shaft: a. Have sufficient power and cutting capacity to excavate the pier holes to the required depths into the soil or rock at the site. 2. Use drilling method which prevents the shaft sidewalls from caving in or sloughing into the excavated hole, except that dewatering will not be permitted. 3. Proceed with the work in the “wet” if the groundwater level is found above pier tip elevation. 4. Do not drill holes within 4 pier diameters (center-to-center) of a previously drilled hole until after the concrete in the previous hole has set up, but in no case until the concrete has been placed for at least 15 hours. 5. Do not drill holes until the excavation or fill in the area in which the shafts are to be located has been completed to the elevations indicated on the Drawings. 6. Clean out the hole until no more than 1/4 inch of loose or soft material is left in the bottom of the hole. 7. Clean and protect top of holes to prevent soil from falling into hole. 8. Drill piers from the ground surface to tip elevations as indicated on the Drawings. a. The Geotechnical Engineer will determine the final bottom of hole elevation and will keep a record of each drilled hole during installation. 9. Drill piers from the ground surface through the overlying soils and provide the minimum embedment into bedrock that is indicated on the Drawings. 10. Pier drilling operations shall be continuously observed by a registered Geotechnical Engineer employed by the Contractor. October 2016 31_63_30-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_63_30 (FS-100) 11. If observations by the Geotechnical Engineer during drilling indicate that subgrade material or bedrock characteristics vary or are not adequate to provide the load capacities indicated in the geotechnical investigation report, or the depth from the top of the drilled pier to the top of bedrock varies by more than 15 percent from the depth indicated on the Drawings, immediately notify the Engineer. Do not proceed with drilling or construction until Engineer has determined what modifications, if any, are required to bring the design of the piers and structure into conformance with actual subgrade conditions. 12. Roughen the sidewalls of the drilled piers that extend into competent bedrock. Roughening shall be accomplished with a side-tooth cutter tool whether casing is used or not. C. Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer shall make a complete record of drilling for each pier, and submit to Engineer upon completion of day’s work. D. Reinforcing steel: 1. Upon completion of drilling, position the reinforcing steel cage in the pier shaft as indicated on the Drawings and suspend it above the bottom of excavation before any concrete is placed in the shaft. a. If site conditions require that the pier shaft is lengthened from that indicated on the Drawings, maintain the full number of vertical bars required throughout the full height of the shaft, and add horizontal ties to provide a continuous cage or reinforcement. Vertical bars may be lap spliced. b. Welding of reinforcement will not be permitted without prior written authorization by the Engineer. 2. Support the reinforcing steel cage so that it rotates freely just prior to final suspension. 3. If soil caving occurs after reinforcing steel is placed and before placement of concrete, remove the reinforcing steel and ream the hole to permit repositioning of the cage. 4. Support the cage in a manner that will assure that it remains centered in the pier shaft during placement of concrete. a. Use plastic roller type centering devices attached to spiral reinforcing bars. b. The centering devise shall position reinforcing cages in center of hole and provide proper cover for reinforcing bars. 5. Install dowels from piers to walls, columns, or slabs by tying to main reinforcement cage, not by “stabbing” into plastic concrete. E. Concrete placement: 1. Placement of concrete shall be as specified for dry or wet conditions as may be applicable for the conditions found at the time of the work. 2. During concrete placement, take care to prevent concrete from hitting the sides of the steel reinforcing bar cage which will cause segregation. 3. To prevent segregation, do not allow concrete to fall more than 5 feet without the use of a tremie. 4. Provide for a supply of concrete that is adequate to complete placement on any given drilled pier in one continuous uninterrupted operation without cold joints. 5. Construct concrete work in a manner that dense, monolithic concrete is provided throughout the full length and diameter of the drilled pier. October 2016 31_63_30-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_63_30 (FS-100) 6. Immediately after acceptance of the excavation, place the concrete. If concrete is not placed the same day, additional bedrock penetration may be required. 7. Water in excavation: a. Excavations containing more than 3 inches of water shall be pumped dry prior to concrete placement. 1) Except for the bottom 3 inches, do not drop concrete through water: b. In a dry excavation, place concrete with a concrete chute or pumping method acceptable to the Engineer. c. Direct the flow of concrete down the center of the pier shaft in order to minimize sloughing of the sides of the hole and segregation of the concrete on the reinforcing steel. 8. Water seepage: a. If seepage occurs at such a rate that the concrete cannot be properly placed, even if the pier hole is cased, place concrete using the tremie method: 1) Proceed with concrete placement that starts under water, using underwater placement requirements until the hole is completely filled. Do not dewater the shaft after partial concrete placement. 2) Use a tremie pipe having a disposable plug that keeps the tremie free of fluid until the plug is blown out by the concrete pressure. 3) Use a tremie pipe not less than 8 inches in diameter. 4) Alternatively, use pumped concrete discharging through a pipe at least 5 inches in diameter. 5) Use a tremie or pump pipe having watertight joints. 6) Provide for no more than 3 inches of height between the bottom of the tremie pipe and the bottom of excavation during initial concrete placement. 7) Provide positive control to make certain that the bottom of the tremie or pump pipe is at all times submerged below the concrete surface. 8) At least a 1 foot head of concrete shall be maintained above the top of the water. F. Temporary casing: 1. Use temporary casing if necessary. a. Withdraw casing as the concrete is placed: 2. Provide steel casing onsite in various appropriate lengths. 3. Case the drilled pier holes through any fill and native soil or rock as required to maintain a stable excavation. 4. Withdrawn casing as concrete placement proceeds while maintaining at least 3 feet of concrete depth over the bottom of the casing pipe. 5. Use steel casing with an outside diameter at least as large as the design pier diameter. 6. Use a casing wall thickness such that it is not damaged by water or ground pressures or by the stresses of installation. a. Casing shall be watertight and of sufficient strength to withstand handling stress as well as pressures from plastic concrete and surrounding earth. b. Casings shall be smooth and well oiled, and shall extend to the top of the pier shaft. October 2016 31_63_30-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_63_30 (FS-100) c. Inside diameter of the casing shall be sized to provide the specified pier diameter. Casings of larger or smaller diameter shall not be used without prior written acceptance by the Engineer. d. Provide steel casing onsite in various appropriate lengths. Use casing length so that at the end of drilling, the top of the casing projects above the ground surface and any adjacent mound of drill cuttings. 7. Attach cutting teeth to the casing, if required to penetrate to the planned depth. 8. Use casing length so that at the end of drilling, the top of the casing projects above the ground surface and any adjacent mound of drill cuttings. 9. Provide positive control to make certain that the bottom of the casing is at least 3 feet below the top of the concrete being placed to prevent a reduction in the diameter of the pier shaft due to earth pressure and to prevent insitu materials from falling into and mixing with the concrete. 10. Carefully check elevation of the top of reinforcing steel cage before and after casing extraction. Upward movement of the steel not exceeding 1 inch, or downward movements not exceeding 1 inch for every 10 feet of pier length will be considered acceptable. Upward or downward movements beyond these limits will be cause for rejection of the pier. G. Cave-ins: 1. Remove soil which sloughs into the excavated pier shaft prior to concrete placement: 2. During concrete placement, if the Engineer has reasons to suspect that concrete was breached by the soil or that the pier, for any other reason, may contain extraneous material, or otherwise is not in conformance with Drawings and Specifications, the Engineer may order testing of the pier by coring or other methods: a. Contractor will be responsible for paying for testing and additional construction as required by the Engineer, if the work is found defective. b. If work is found to be not defective, testing cost will be paid by the Owner. H. Site tolerances: 1. Pier installation tolerances: a. Deviation of center of pier butts: Not deviate from locations indicated on the Drawings more than 1.5 inches in any direction. b. Deviation of elevation of pier butts: Not more than 1 inch higher nor more than 3 inches lower than elevation indicated on the Drawings. c. Deviation of piers from vertical: Not more than 1 percent of total pier length. I. Costs associated with Engineer’s structural review of any piers constructed outside the specified tolerances, or Engineer’s structural review of evaluations conducted by others, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.02 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions for Contractor’s supervision and superintendence, provide the following: 1. Pier installation logs: a. For each pier installed, create and submit log of installation including, as a minimum, information noted in the following paragraphs. October 2016 31_63_30-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_63_30 (FS-100) b. Data form shall include: location of pier, specified pier diameter, specified penetration into bearing material, preliminary estimated length, top and bottom elevations of pier, actual penetration into bearing material, and actual length placed. Note increases or decreases in total length from original estimate. Include a continuous description (in boring log form) of subgrade materials encountered during drilling, noting their respective depths, and depth at which water (if any) was encountered. Note condition of pier hole prior to concrete placement, whether the pier was cased, water level in the casing, concrete slump, and identification of any concrete test cylinders associated with that pier. 2. Pier location survey: a. After piers are installed and prior to placing reinforcing steel, formwork, or concrete for the structure above them, prepare pier location survey showing coordinates of final location of butts of piers and elevations of butts of piers to an accuracy of plus or minus 0.01 feet. 1) Pier location survey shall be performed by Surveyor licensed in the state where the Project is located. 2) Show each plan of each pier for each structure. b. Provide survey that includes, as minimum, the following information: 1) Indicate location on each pier that was used for horizontal and vertical measurements. 2) Location of pier butts: a) Coordinates of pier butts as indicated on the Drawings. Indicate location on pier used for measurements. b) Coordinates of pier butts as installed. c) Calculated distance between design coordinates of pier butts as indicated on the Drawings and actual location coordinates of pier butts as installed. 3) Elevation of pier butts: a) Elevation of pier butts as indicated on the Drawings. b) Elevation of pier butts as installed. c) Calculate difference in elevations of pier butts as indicated on the Drawings and actual elevation of pier butts as installed. 4) Highlight piers that are not constructed within specified tolerances for location in plan and butt elevation. 5) Provide location and elevation information in tabular form that is keyed to a pier plan by pier number. 6) Engineer will use pier location survey information to evaluate acceptability of pier locations and elevations. B. If the Contractor requests, the Engineer may direct that additional testing be performed at a pier. If subsequent testing at a pier indicates the presence of defect(s) in the pier, the testing costs and the delay costs resulting from the additional testing shall be borne by the Contractor. If this additional testing indicates that the shaft has no defect, the testing costs and delay costs resulting from additional testing will be paid by the Owner. C. For all piers determined to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall submit a plan for further investigation or remedial action to the Engineer for acceptance. All modifications to the dimensions of the piers, as shown in the Plans, required by the investigation and remedial action plan shall be supported by calculations and working drawings. All investigation and remedial corrective procedures and designs October 2016 31_63_30-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/31_63_30 (FS-100) shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance. The Contractor shall not begin repair operations until receiving the Engineer’s acceptance of the investigation and remedial action plan. 3.03 OWNER-FURNISHED FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural tests and special inspections required by the building code: 1. During construction the Owner will provide additional activities to conform to requirements for structural tests and special inspections required by the building code listed in Section 01_41_00. See Section 01_45_24 for additional details. B. Periodic observation of drilling and installation by Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer. C. Concrete testing, as specified in 03_30_00, shall be provided by Owner’s testing laboratory. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Correction of defective pier work: 1. Pier work not in accordance with the requirements indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications is considered defective. 2. Take corrective measures acceptable to the Engineer, if piers are damaged, out of tolerance, mislocated, or otherwise defective: a. Cost of redesign of foundation elements by the Engineer required by reason of defective pier work shall be paid by Contractor. b. Allow 15 working days from submittal of pier location survey, for design of corrections for defective pier work. 3. Measures to be used to correct defective pier work will be selected by the Engineer. Corrective measures that may be acceptable to the Engineer include: a. Installing additional piers at locations selected by the Engineer. b. Pier caps will be redesigned by the Engineer and required details of modifications to pier caps will be given to the Contractor to accommodate piers that were installed out of tolerance. 4. Leave piers which are not accepted in the ground. Cut off such piers at least 2 feet below bottom of pier cap and fill such holes with compacted aggregate base course material. 5. Fill holes drilled for piers that are not used with controlled low-strength material. END OF SECTION October 2016 32_12_16-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_12_16 (FS-100) SECTION 32_12_16 ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Asphaltic concrete paving over prepared subgrade and/or base course 2. Repair of existing roads, driveways and parking lots which are removed or damaged during construction B. Related sections: 1. Section 31_23_13 - Earthwork AND Trenching. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C29 - Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate. 2. ASTM C88 - Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. 3. ASTM C117 - Materials Finer than No. 200 Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. 4. ASTM C128 - Specific Gravity Test and Absorption of Fine Aggregate. 5. ASTM C131 - Resistance to Degradation of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 6. ASTM C136 - Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 7. ASTM D4 - Bitumen Content. 8. ASTM D5 - Penetration of Bituminous Materials. 9. ASTM D70 - Specific Gravity of Semi-Solid Bituminous Materials. 10. ASTM D93 - Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Tester. 11. ASTM D113 - Ductility of Bituminous Materials. 12. ASTM D1188 - Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures. 13. ASTM D1559 - Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus. 14. ASTM D2041 - Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 15. ASTM D2170 - Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts (Bitumens). 16. ASTM D2172 - Quantities Extraction of Bitumens from Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 17. ASTM D2419 - Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate. 18. ASTM D290 - Bituminous Mixing Plant Inspection. 19. ASTM D946 - Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. 20. ASTM D692 - Course Aggregate for Bituminous Paving. 21. ASTM D1073 - Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 22. MS-2 - Mix Design Method for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types - The Asphalt Institute (AI). October 2016 32_12_16-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_12_16 (FS-100) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01_33_00. B. Samples: Provide samples of materials for laboratory testing and job-mix design for asphaltic concrete paving section. C. Test Reports: Submit laboratory reports for the following materials tests: 1. Coarse and fine aggregate from each material source and each required grading: a. Sieve analysis: ASTM C136 (AASHTO T19). b. Unit weight of slag: ASTM C29 (AASHTO T19). c. Soundness: ASTM C88 (AASHTO T104). d. Sand equivalent: ASTM D2419 (AASHTO T176). e. Abrasion of coarse aggregate: ASTM C131 (AASHTO T96). 2. Asphalt cement for each penetration grade: a. Penetration: ASTM D5 (AASHTO T49). b. Viscosity (Kinematic): ASTM D2170 (AASHTO T201). c. Flash Point: ASTM D93 (AASHTO T48). d. Ductility: ASTM D113 (AASHTO T51). e. Solubility: ASTM D4 (AASHTO T44). f. Specific gravity: ASTM D70 (AASHTO T43). 3. Job-mix design mixtures for each material or grade: a. Bulk specific gravity for fine aggregate: ASTM C128 (AASHTO T84). 4. Uncompacted asphalt concrete mix: Maximum specific gravity ASTM D2041 (AASHTO T209). 5. Compacted asphalt concrete mix: a. Bulk density: ASTM D1188 (AASHTO T166). b. Marshall stability and flow: ASTM D1559. 6. Density and void analysis: a. Provide each series of asphalt concrete mixture test specimens, in accordance with MS-2. b. Use Marshall method of mix design unless otherwise directed or acceptable to Engineer. 7. Sampling and testing of asphalt concrete mixtures for quality control during paving operations: a. Uncompacted asphalt concrete mix: 1) Asphalt cement content: ASTM D2172 (AASHTO T164). 2) Penetration of recovered asphalt cement: ASTM D5 (AASHTO T49). 3) Ductibility of recovered asphalt cement: ASTM D113 (AASHTO T51). b. Compacted asphalt concrete mix: 1) Bulk density: ASTM D1188 (AASHTO T166). 2) Marshall stability and flow: ASTM D1559. c. Perform at least one test for each day's paving. 8. Asphalt plant inspection: ASTM D290. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle materials under provisions of Larimer County Urban Area Street Standards (LCUASS). October 2016 32_12_16-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_12_16 (FS-100) B. Transport mixture from mix plant in trucks with tight, clean, non-sticking compartments. Coat hauling compartments with lime-water mixture to prevent sticking. Elevate and drain compartment of excess solution before loading mix. C. Cover to protect from weather and prevent loss of heat when temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit. D. Provide insulated truck beds during temperature below 50 degrees Fahrenheit on long distance deliveries. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply when underlying surface is muddy, frozen, or wet. B. Do not place by spreading and finishing machine tack coat or asphaltic cement when temperature is below 45 degrees Fahrenheit and falling. Place when above 40 degrees Fahrenheit and rising. C. Do not apply pavement marking paint within 8 hours of fog or rain or when below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. D. Provide flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights for movement of traffic and safety and to cause the least interruption of work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all applicable requirements of Larimer County Urban Area Street Standards (LCUASS). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphaltic Cement: ASTM D946, AC10 or AC20 grade determined by design mix, homogeneous, free from water, no tendency to foam when heated to 347 degrees Fahrenheit, and per CDOT Standard Section 702. B. Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete: 1. Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag: ASTM D692. 2. Sand, stone, or slag screening: ASTM D1073. 3. Provide aggregate in gradations for courses to comply with Class S, Colorado Department of Transportation, ASTM C136. 4. Percent wear: ASTM C131, less than 45 for aggregates retained in #10 sieve. C. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt: SS-1 or CSS-1h, ASTM D977. 2.02 MIXES A. Determine design mix based upon aggregates furnished: 1. Test mix by independent laboratory at Contractor's expense. 2. Grade dependent on temperature during placement. October 2016 32_12_16-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_12_16 (FS-100) 3. Submit mix designs under provisions of Section 01_33_00 for review and acceptance by Engineer. B. Submit mix design consistent with LCUASS Standards. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pavement Marking - Replace all pre-construction pavement marking materials as identified below: 1. FS TT-P-115, Type I Alkyd, yellow color meeting requirements of CDOT Standard Specification 708. 2. Preformed plastic marking material or reflectorized paint shall be used for all pavement marking. 3. Furnish paint with a no-pick-up maximum drying time of 20 minutes, when tested according to ASTM D711 using a wet film thickness of 0.015 inch when tested and applied at 77 degrees Fahrenheit. 4. Provide two coats. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare subgrade under provisions of Section 31_23_13. B. Loose and foreign material: 1. Remove loose and foreign material from compacted subgrade surface immediately before application of paving. Clean surface with mechanical sweeper, blowers, or hand brooms, until surfaces are free from dust C. Tack coat: 1. Dilute material with equal parts of water and apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphaltic concrete or portland cement concrete and surfaces. 2. Apply at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gallons per square yard of surface. 3. Apply tack coat by brush to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters, manholes, and other structures projecting into or abutting asphaltic concrete pavement. 4. Allow surfaces to dry until material is at condition of tackiness to receive pavement. 5. Where asphaltic concrete will adhere to surface, tack coat may be eliminated by Engineer. 3.02 RING/FRAME ADJUSTMENTS A. Ring/Frames shall be cast in a concrete collar when set in paved areas. Asphalt shall surround ring/frames flush with surface of adjacent pavement. Maximum ring grade below pavement shall be ¼ inch. 3.03 PREPARING THE MIXTURE A. Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, control, and mixing and for plant equipment and operation. October 2016 32_12_16-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_12_16 (FS-100) B. Stockpile: 1. Keep each component of the various sized combined aggregates in separate stockpiles. 2. Maintain stockpiles so that separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent segregation. C. Heating: 1. Heat the asphalt cement at the mixing plant to viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture. 2. Use lowest possible temperature to suite temperature viscosity characteristics of asphalt. 3. Do not exceed 350 degrees Fahrenheit. D. Aggregate: 1. Heat-dry aggregates to acceptable moisture content. 2. Deliver to mixer at recommended temperature to suite penetration grade and viscosity characteristics of asphalt cement, ambient temperature, and workability of mixture. 3. Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphalt cement to comply with job-mix formula requirements. E. Mix aggregate and asphalt cement to achieve 90-95 percent coated particles. 3.04 EQUIPMENT A. Bituminous Pavers: Self-propelled, spreads without tearing surfaces, and controls pavement edges to true lines without use of stationary forms. B. Rolling Equipment: 1. Steel-wheel roller: Self-propelled, contact pressure of 250 to 350 psi per inch of width of roller wheel, equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent mix from sticking. 2. Pneumatic-tired rollers: Self-propelled, contact pressure under each tire of 85 to 110 psi, wheels spaced so that one pass will accomplish one complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine, oscillating wheels. Remove and replace immediately tires picking up fines. C. Hand Tools: Provide rakes, lutes, shovels, tampers, smoothing irons, pavement cutters, portable heaters, and other miscellaneous small tools. 3.05 PLACING THE MIX A. Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface, spread, and strike-off using paving machine. B. Maximum thickness per laying course: 2 inches. C. Minimum temperature of 225 degrees Fahrenheit at time of placement. D. Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand. E. Conform to the grade, cross section, finish thickness, and density indicated. October 2016 32_12_16-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_12_16 (FS-100) F. Paver Placing: 1. Unless otherwise directed, begin placing at high side on one-way slope and in direction of traffic flow. 2. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. 3. Place mixture in continuous operation as practicable. G. Hand Placing: 1. Spread, tamp, and finish mixing using hand tools in areas where machine spreading is not possible as acceptable to Engineer. 2. Place mixture at a rate that will insure handling and compaction before mixture becomes cooler than acceptable working temperature. H. Joints: 1. Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as adjacent sections of asphalt concrete course. 2. Clean contact surfaces free of sand, dirt, or other objectionable material and apply tack coat. 3. Offset transverse joints in succeeding courses not less than 24 inches. 4. Cut back edge of existing pavement or previously placed course to expose an even, vertical surface for full course thickness. 5. Offset longitudinal joints in succeeding courses not less than 6 inches. 6. When the edges of longitudinal joints are irregular, honeycombed or inadequately compacted, cut back unsatisfactory sections to expose an even, vertical surface for full course thickness. 3.06 COMPACTING THE MIX A. Provide pneumatic and steel-wheel type rollers to obtain the required pavement density, surface texture, and ride-ability. B. Begin rolling operations when the mixture will bear weight of roller without excessive displacement. C. Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers to stand on finished surface before it has thoroughly cooled or set. D. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. E. Breakdown Rolling: 1. Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of transverse and longitudinal joints and outside edge. 2. Operate rollers as close as possible to paver without causing pavement displacement 3. Check grade and smoothness after breakdown rolling. 4. Repair displaced areas by loosening at once with lutes or rakes and filling, if required, with hot loose material before continuing rolling. F. Second Rolling: 1. Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot and in condition for compaction. 2. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted. October 2016 32_12_16-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_12_16 (FS-100) G. Finish Rolling: 1. Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks by combination of steel and pneumatic rollers. 2. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained specified density, and required surface texture and surface tolerances. H. Patching: 1. Remove and replace defective areas. 2. Cut-out and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete. 3. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course. 4. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges vertical. 5. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new asphaltic concrete mixture. 6. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. 3.07 REPAIRING EXISTING ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACES A. Cut sides of pavement area to be replaced perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic. B. Subbase preparation: 1. Scarify below existing subbase to 8-inch depth or greater. 2. Grade subbase to match existing subbase depth and required elevation. 3. Obtain optimum moisture content. 4. Compact subbase to 98 percent maximum density, ASTM 698. C. Paving: 1. Apply tack coat against all abutting vertical concrete or bituminous surfaces as specified herein. 2. Place and compact asphalt concrete mixture in two equal layers to match the existing elevation and the total compacted thickness. 3. Apply asphalt emulsion tack coat between pavement layers as specified. D. Compact mix as specified. 3.08 MARKING ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. Remove dirt, sand, gravel, and oil. B. Cure asphaltic concrete before painting. C. Apply paint with pressurized, self-contained paint machine. D. Apply in straight line 2 to 6 inches wide. E. Lay out markings with guide lines, templates and forms. F. Apply at 1 gallon per 105 square foot. G. Provide qualified technician for supervision. October 2016 32_12_16-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_12_16 (FS-100) 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide field testing to determine compliance of in-place asphaltic concrete paving materials and compaction in accordance with Section 01_45_00. B. Final surfaces of uniform texture, conforming to required grades and cross sections. C. Test in-place for density, thickness, and surface smoothness. D. Take not less than 4-inch diameter pavement specimens for each completed course from locations as directed by Engineer if required to confirm total thickness or for additional testing purposes. E. Repair holes from test specimens as specified for patching defective work. F. Minimum acceptable density of in-place course materials is 97 percent of the recorded laboratory specimen density. For each laying course: perform two tests for under 400 SY of material in place. Immediately re-compact asphaltic concrete not conforming to acceptable density. Remove and replace all sections not in conformance density requirements. G. Thickness: Variations from Drawings: 1. Total depth: 1/4 inch. 2. Remove and replace paving less than minimum thickness. H. Surface Smoothness: 1. Test using a 10 foot straight edge applied parallel to any direction. 2. Advance straight edge five feet, maximum 1/4 inch per foot from nearest point of contact. 3. Do not permit pockets or depressions where water may pool. 4. Remove and replace areas, deficient in smoothness. Overlay corrections may be permitted only if acceptable to Engineer. 3.10 CLEANING A. After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphalt materials to the satisfaction of Engineer. 3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphalt concrete pavement until it has cooled and hardened and in no case sooner than 6 hours B. Provide barricades and warning devices as required to protect pavement and general public END OF SECTION October 2016 32_13_13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_13_13 (FS-100) SECTION 32_13_13 CONCRETE PAVING/FLATWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes forming, jointing, placing, and curing of concrete pavements, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, valley gutters, cross-pans and stair steps, for parking areas, access roads, and pedestrian traffic. B. Related sections: 1. Section 31_23_13 - Earthwork and Trenching. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 214 - Recommended Practice for Evaluating Compression Test Results of Field Concrete. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 3. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 4. ACI 305/305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 306/306R - Cold Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 6. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 7. ASTM C39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 8. ASTM C94 - Ready Mix Concrete. 9. ASTM C143 - Test Method of Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 10. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. 11. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 12. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 13. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 14. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 15. ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). 16. ASTM D1190 - Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type. October 2016 32_13_13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_13_13 (FS-100) 17. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 18. ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer in obtaining and providing samples of all specified materials. The Contractor shall submit certified laboratory test certificates for all items required in this section under Section 01_33_00. B. Product Data: Provide sufficient information on mix design and products specified to verify compliance with specifications. Provide data on joint filler admixtures and curing compounds under provisions of this section. 1. Existing data on proposed design mixes, certified and complete 2. Submit reports of field quality control testing 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Obtain cementitious materials and aggregate from same source for all work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle materials in accordance with ACI recommendations. B. Reinforcing steel: Store on supports which will keep it from contact with the ground and cover. C. Rubber and plastic materials: Store in a cool place, do not expose to direct sunlight. D. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load of ready-mixed concrete. Owner reserves the right to request batch weight tickets for each load. E. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Engineer at the time of delivery with ticket to show: 1. Quantity delivered. 2. Actual quantity of each material in batch. 3. Outdoor temp in the shade. 4. Time at which cement was added. 5. Numerical sequence of the delivery. 6. Quantity of water that can be added in the field based on mix design. 7. Free moisture in fine and coarse aggregate in percent by weight. 8. Temperature of batch. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable Larimer County Urban Area Street Standards for concrete work. October 2016 32_13_13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_13_13 (FS-100) 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit, or surface is wet or frozen. B. Protect concrete from rapid loss of moisture during hot water placement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Form materials: Capable of supporting loads imposed by construction equipment, straight and free from warp. Clean and strong enough to resist pressure of concrete when placed. B. Joint filler: ASTM D1751 or D1752 type; 3/4 inch thick unless indicated otherwise. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel and Wire Fabric: In accordance with ACI 301. B. Dowels: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield grade, plain steel, unfinished finish. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Provide concrete materials under applicable Larimer County Urban Area Street Standards for concrete work. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, AASHTO M-148, white pigmented liquid membrane. B. Joint Sealers: Sikaflex self leveling or approved equal. C. Sheet Materials: AASHTO M171, 4 mil. D. Fibrous reinforcing for all exterior sidewalks and walkways subjected to pedestrian traffic. 1. 100 percent virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers 3/4 inch maximum length, specifically manufactured for use in concrete, containing no reprocessed olefin materials as manufactured by Fibermesh Company or accepted equal. 2. Physical Characteristics: a. Specific gravity: 0.91. b. Tensile strength: 70 to 110 ksi. October 2016 32_13_13-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_13_13 (FS-100) 2.05 MIX A. Comply with ASTM C94. B. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. C. Cement: 564 pounds minimum per cubic yard of concrete. D. Water/Cementitious Material (Cement and Fly Ash) Ratio Less than or equal to 0.45. E. Slump: 4-inch maximum: 1. May be increased to 5 inches for hand work, acceptable to Engineer. 2. As low as possible consistent with proper handling and thorough compaction. F. Volumetric Air Content: 4 percent (+/- 1percent). 1. Vary air content with maximum size aggregate, ASTM C94, Table 3. G. Strength: Compressive strength as determined by ASTM C39, 3500 psi minimum at 28 days. H. Consistency: Uniform slump, suitable for the placement conditions with aggregate floating uniformly throughout the concrete mass, flowing sluggishly when vibrated or spaded. I. Adjust mix as required to meet specifications. J. Contractor may substitute fly ash for up to 15 percent of cement at a ratio of the specific gravity of cement divided by specific gravity of fly ash. K. Calcium chlorides are not permitted 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Submit proposed mix design to Engineer for review prior to commencement of work. B. Tests on cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. C. Test samples in accordance with ACI 301. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. October 2016 32_13_13-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_13_13 (FS-100) 3.02 SUBGRADE A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 31 23 13. B. Check for soft spots by proof-rolling or other means prior to setting forms. Remove soft yielding material and replace. Compact to specifications under provisions of Section 31_23_13. C. Check crown and/or elevation of subgrade to assure specified thickness. Compact to specification additional material used to bring to correct elevation. Remove excess material where subgrade is too high. D. Clean subgrade of all loose materials before placement of concrete. Do not disturb area inside forms after fine grading is complete. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Moisten subgrade to depth of 6 inches at optimal moisture not more than 12 hours prior to placement to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. B. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement for concrete collars. C. Notify Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.04 FRAME ADJUSTMENT A. Set frames of structures in full grout bed to provide proper bearing. Set to final grade. B. Form construction joints and blockouts as indicated on drawings. 3.05 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Join neatly and mechanically tamp to assure firm placement. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Oil forms prior to concrete placement. D. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. E. Set dowels, expansion joints, preformed construction joints and header boards as specified or indicated on the drawings. F. Backfill behind forms as required to prevent water from entering subgrade. October 2016 32_13_13-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_13_13 (FS-100) 3.06 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement at mid-height of slabs-on-grade or as shown in standard specifications. B. Hold all tie and marginal dowels in proper position by sufficient supports or pins. C. Mechanically install dowels or place on supports if center longitudinal joint is sawed in lieu of placing plastic strip. D. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints. E. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. F. Provide doweled joints inch at interruptions of concrete with one end of dowel set in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement. G. Grease dowels on one side of joints with caps on greased end. 3.07 TRANSPORTING MIXED CONCRETE A. Transporting of mixed concrete shall conform to ACI 305R. B. Do not exceed manufacturer's guaranteed capacity of truck agitators. Maintain the mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass during hauling. C. Do not incorporate additional mixing water into the concrete during hauling or after arrival at the delivery point, unless ordered by the Engineer. If additional water is to be incorporated into the concrete, revolve the drum not less than 30 revolutions at mixing speed after the water is added and before placing concrete. D. Furnish a water measuring device in good working condition, mounted on each transit mix truck, for measuring the water added to the mix on the site by the Engineer. E. Provide delivery ticket and comply with delivery requirements of this section. 3.08 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. B. Lightly moisten subgrade or base course immediately before placing concrete. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Deposit concrete near final position. Minimize segregation and damage to subgrade. E. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation of materials. October 2016 32_13_13-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_13_13 (FS-100) F. Consolidate concrete with vibrators and spade next to forms to remove air spaces or honeycombs. G. Do not place concrete in forms that has begun to set. H. Do not place more concrete in one day than can be finished before dark the same day. 3.09 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Conform to ACI 306/306R, except as modified herein B. Minimum concrete temp at the time of mixing: Outdoor Temp at Placement (in shade) Concrete Temp at Mixing Below 30 degrees F 70 degrees F Between 30 degrees F and 45 degrees F 60 degrees F Above 45 degrees F 50 degrees F C. Do not place heated concrete which is warmer than 80 degrees Fahrenheit. D. If freezing temp are expected during curing, maintain the concrete temp at or above 50 degrees Fahrenheit for 5 days or 70 degrees Fahrenheit for 3 days with forms in place. E. Do not allow concrete to cool suddenly. 3.10 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Conform to ACI 305/305R, except as modified herein. B. At air temp of 90 degrees Fahrenheit and above keep concrete as cool as possible during placement and curing. Fog sprayers or special wetting agents may be required for protection. C. Do not allow concrete temperature to exceed 70 degrees Fahrenheit at placement. D. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking due to rapid evaporation of moisture. E. Do not place concrete when the actual or anticipated evaporation rate equals or exceeds 0.2 lbs. per sq ft per hr as determined from ACI 305, Fig 2.1.4. 3.11 JOINTS A. Paving: 1. Contraction joints: At intervals not to exceed 10 feet. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints where applicable. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab 2. Expansion joints: At intervals not to exceed 50 feet. October 2016 32_13_13-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_13_13 (FS-100) B. Sidewalk: 1. Contraction joints: At intervals not to exceed 5 feet and 1 1/2 inches deep. 2. Expansion joints: 1/2 inch premolded joints where sidewalks end at curb returns, against fixed objects, at points of sharp radius, and between sidewalk and driveway slabs. Place expansion joint a maximum of every fifty feet. C. Curb and Gutter: 1. Contraction joints: At intervals not to exceed 10 feet made by insertion of 1/8 inch template at right angles to curb and 1 1/2 inch deep. 2. Expansion joints: At curb returns, against fixed objects, at points of sharp radius, between adjacent sidewalk and curb at all curb returns, between sidewalk and all driveway slabs. D. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances at temperatures above 50 degrees Fahrenheit. Clean all dust, debris and water from joint. Recess top of filler 1/4 inch for sealant placement. E. Provide keyed joints as indicated. 3.12 FINISHING A. Run straight-edge over forms with sawing motion to fill all holes and depressions. B. Wood float surface immediately after using a straight-edge. C. Brush with soft bristle brush to remove trowel marks and leave a uniform appearance just before concrete takes initial set. D. Direction of Texturing: 1. Paving: Transverse to pavement direction. 2. Curb and Gutter: At right angles to the curb line. 3. Sidewalk: At right angles to centerline of sidewalk. 4. Valley Gutters: Parallel to curb line. E. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broomed perpendicular to slope. F. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply under pressure at the rate of one gallon to not more than 135 square feet by mechanical sprayers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions acceptable to Engineer. 3.13 JOINT SEALING A. Seal joints and clean pavement prior to opening to traffic. B. Seal all expansion joints. C. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with 3/4 inch thick joint filler. D. Place joint filler in pavement pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. E. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 inch of finished surface. October 2016 32_13_13-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/32_13_13 (FS-100) 3.14 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Have plastic sheeting, straw, burlap and/or canvas materials available at all times to protect fresh uncured surfaces from adverse weather conditions. C. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over sidewalks for 7 days minimum after finishing. Do not permit vehicular traffic over pavement for 14 days minimum after finishing or until 80 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved. 3.15 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Grade: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum Variation from True Alignment: 3/8 inch in 10 ft. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with ACI 301. Unit weight and mix temperature will also be taken. B. The first three loads will be tested for slump and air content. If any one test fails to meet requirements, that load will be rejected and tests will continue on each load until three consecutive loads meet requirements. Thereafter, five concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 cubic yds. or less cubic yds. of concrete placed each day. C. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents. D. One slump and air entrainment test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. E. Cylinders will be tested as follows: 2 at 7 days, 2 at 28 days and 1 at a later date, if necessary, as directed by the Engineer. F. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. G. Thickness of fresh concrete may be checked by Owner at random. Coring will be conducted in accordance with Colorado Department of Transportation requirements. Any deficiencies greater than ¼ inch will be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. H. Failure of Test Cylinders or Coring Results: Engineer may order removal and replacement of concrete as required upon failure of 28-day tests or if thickness of pavement is less than 95 percent of specified thickness. END OF SECTION October 2016 33_05_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_01 (FS-100) SECTION 33_05_01 SANITARY SEWER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Sanitary sewage piping, fittings, accessories and bedding. 2. Connection of building sanitary system. 3. Cleanout access, and accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 31_23_13 - Earthwork and Trenching. 3. Section 33_39_13 - Manholes and Covers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM D1784 - Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds. 2. ASTM D2321 - Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe. 3. ASTM D3034 - TYPE PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 4. ASTM D3212 - Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 5. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 6. ASTM F679 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Large Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside, and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill operations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01_33_00. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe, pipe accessories, and standard dimensions. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. October 2016 33_05_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_01 (FS-100) 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01_33_00. B. Accurately record location of pipe, pipe fittings, connections, cleanouts, invert elevations and coordinates at each pipe run (0.1’ vertically and horizontally) entrance and exit including all manholes. Record the elevation of the invert into the manhole, elevation of the drop invert, and elevation of the pipeline exiting the manhole. Horizontal and vertical as-built elevations are required for all pipe joints. C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements and elevations are as indicated. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate any Work requiring temporary disruption of sanitary sewer connection with the Owner and Engineer a minimum of seven working days in advance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Johns-Manville. B. Certainteed Corporation. C. Or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sanitary sewer pipe and fittings: 1. 4-inch or 6-inch, ASTM D3034, Yellow Mine pipe; fittings SCH40. 2. Cell classification: ASTM D1784, 12454-B. 3. Pipe length: 12 to 20 feet standard manufactured length for construction. B. Site drainage pipe and fittings: 1. 4 inch or 6 inch, ASTM D3034, Yellow Mine pipe; fittings SCH40. 2. Cell classification: ASTM D1784, 12454-B. 3. Pipe length: 12 to 20 feet standard manufactured length for construction. C. Joints: 1. Integral bell, ball-and-spigot rubber gasketed joint, ASTM D3212 and F477. 2. Internally cast bell with one sealing ring. 3. Designed to hold pipe in alignment, provide flexibility, separate the ends of pipe lengths, resist applied earth pressures, and provide fluid tightness. 4. Rubber rings: ASTM D3212 and F477. October 2016 33_05_01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_01 (FS-100) 2.03 CLEANOUTS A. Lid and Frame - Cast iron construction. B. Bedding: Provide bedding as specified in Section 31_23_13 and as shown on Drawings. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Identification Marks: Clearly and permanently marked at not greater than 5 foot intervals with pipe diameter, PVC cell classification, manufacturer, plant, shift, ASTM, SDR (SCHD). B. Testing per ASTM D3034: 1. Test products not manufactured in the U.S. at an acceptable laboratory in the U.S. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine pipe and fittings and do not use individual sections containing cracks, dents, abrasions, and other defects. Remove defective material from the site. B. Mark rejected pipe and remove from the site. C. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive .work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on Drawings 3.02 PREPARATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with coarse aggregate. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. C. Cutting: 1. Cut and bevel ends in accordance with manufacturer's standard instructions. 2. Machine cut ends smooth and square to proper dimensions. 3. Do not cut with a cold chisel, iron pipe cutter, or any other method that may fracture the pipe or leave ragged, uneven edges. 4. Remove burrs and wipe off all dust and dirt from jointing surfaces. 3.03 BEDDING A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31_23_13 for work of this Section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. B. Place minimum of 6 inches of bedding material at trench bottom, level and consolidate materials in accordance with Section 31_23_13. October 2016 33_05_01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_01 (FS-100) C. Place a minimum of 12 inches of bedding material over the top of the pipe, level and consolidate materials in accordance with Section 31_23_13. 3.04 INSTALLATION – PIPE A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D2321 and manufacturer's instructions. Seal joints watertight. B. Inspect pipe and accessories for defects before lowering into trench. Replace all defective, damaged, or unsound pipe. C. Remove all dirt and foreign material from the inside of pipe before laying. D. Check bedding for firmness and uniformity of surface immediately before laying each section of pipe. E. Carefully lower pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories into the trench with derricks, ropes, and other suitable equipment to prevent damage. F. Do not dump or drop pipe or accessories into trench. G. Lay pipe to grades noted on Drawings: 1. Closely joint to form a smooth flow line. H. Provide full support of pipe barrel over its entire length. I. Place and tamp bedding under haunches of pipe up to spring line in previously dug bell holes. J. Install bedding at sides and over top of pipe to minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches compacted to 70 percent of relative density. K. Utilize implements, tools, and facilities per manufacturer instructions. L. Keep pipe clean during and after laying. M. Close all open ends with watertight expandable type sewer plugs or test plugs. N. Remove and relay any pipe which has floated. O. Do not lay pipe when: 1. There is water in the trench. 2. Trench conditions are unsuitable. 3. Weather conditions are unsuitable. P. Use acceptable adaptors at manhole and structure connections to provide a watertight seal and flexibility; provide a short length of pipe (between 3 feet and 5 feet long) outside each connection. 1. Concrete or grout “patching” shall not be considered an acceptable adaptor. October 2016 33_05_01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_01 (FS-100) Q. Refer to Section 31_23_13 for trenching requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. R. Refer to Section 33_39_13 for manhole and cover requirements. 3.05 JOINTING A. Assemble in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Wipe clean pipe ends, gasket and gasket groove before inserting gasket. C. Apply lubricant furnished by the pipe manufacturer to the gasket and the outside of the spigot end. D. Utilize assembly tool per manufacturer instructions to center the sleeve over the spigot end. E. Insert the spigot end to the reference mark. F. Check gasket location after assembly with a suitable gage: 1. Gasket locations to be the distance from the sleeve and recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the full circumference. 2. If not within the required limits, disassemble and reassemble the joint. 3.06 FITTINGS A. Install utilizing standard methods. B. Lower into trench with rope, cable, chain, or other means to prevent damage. C. Attach rope, cable or chain around the exterior. D. Do not attach rope, cable, or chain through the interior. E. Carefully connect to pipe or other facility. F. Check joint to insure a sound and proper joint. 3.07 INSTALLATION – CLEANOUTS A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections. C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets, drops, and outlets as indicated. D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top section to elevation indicated. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01_45_00. October 2016 33_05_01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_01 (FS-100) B. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing bedding. C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698, ASTM D2922, ASTM D3017. D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to the Owner. E. Air test: 1. Perform an air test on each reach of sewer pipe between manholes: a. Test the first reach prior to installing any of the remaining pipe. b. Provide all necessary piping between the reach to be tested together with all required materials and equipment. c. Methods used, scheduling, and duration of tests shall be acceptable to Engineer. d. Low pressure air testing 100 percent of system: 1) Submit complete information to Engineer for review describing the proposed test method of water exfiltration testing manholes before beginning air testing. 2) Preparation for tests: Flush and clean the sewer line prior to testing in order to wet the pipe surfaces and produce more consistent results. Plug and brace all openings in the main sewer line and the upper connections. Check all pipe plugs with a soap solution to detect any air leakage. If leaks are found, release the air pressure, eliminate the leaks and start the test procedure over again. 3) Procedure of test: Add air until the internal pressure of the sewer line is raised to approximately 4.0 psi gage at which time the flow of air shall be reduced and the pressure maintained between 3.5 and 4.5 psi gage for a sufficient time to allow the air temperature to come to equilibrium with the temperature of the pipe. 4) After the temperature has stabilized, permit the pressure to drop to 3.5 psi gage in excess of the ground water pressure above the top of the sewer, at which time a stop watch or a sweep second hand watch shall be used to determine the time lapse required for the air pressure to drop to 3.0 psi gage. 5) The time elapsed shall not be less than the following: Pipe Size (inches) Time (sec) 6 through 15 2.67 by length of pipe in feet 18 through 24 6.84 by length of pipe in feet 6) Brace all plugs sufficiently to prevent blowouts and vent the pipeline completely before attempting to remove the plugs. 7) Provide pressurizing equipment with a relief valve set at 5 psi to avoid over pressurizing and damaging an otherwise acceptable line. 8) Conduct exfiltration tests on each manhole, leakage as per exfiltration allowable leakage for manhole. e. Conduct smoke tests to detect leaks if exfiltration or air tests fail to meet specified limits. October 2016 33_05_01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_01 (FS-100) f. Manholes and pipe lines shall not have any visible leaks or damp spots. g. Repair and retest lines that fail tests until satisfactory results are obtained. F. Lamp Test: 1. Each section between manholes will be lamped by the Engineer. 2. Contractor shall furnish suitable assistants to help the Engineer. 3. A minimum of 95 percent of a true circle will be required in the lamp tests to indicate a properly constructed sewer line. 4. Repair any sections not passing the lamp test. G. Infiltration Test: 1. At any time prior to expiration of the correction period, infiltration exceeds 50 gallons per inch of nominal diameter per mile per day, locate the leaks, and make repairs. 2. If results of infiltration test are not acceptable, perform TV inspection of the reach in question at the discretion of the Owner. H. Pipe Deflection test: 1. No sooner than 30 days after placement and compaction of backfill, but prior to placement of permanent surface materials, perform pipe deflection tests in presence of Engineer or Owner. 2. Use a rigid mandrel with diameter of at least 95 percent of the pipe's specified average inside diameter and a length of the mandrel circular portion at least equal to the nominal pipe diameter. 3. Maximum allowable deflection is 5 percent of the base internal diameter. 4. Pull the mandrel through the pipe by hand. 5. Relay or replace all pipe exceeding the 5 percent deflection at no additional cost to Owner. 6. Retest repaired sections. 7. Maximum allowable deflection at end of one year correction period shall not exceed 7-1/2 percent of the base internal diameter tested in the same manner. Uncover and repair sections exceeding the allowable deflection. I. CCTV Acceptance: 1. All sanitary sewer installation including CIPP shall be subject to a final CCTV inspection performed by the Contractor prior to substantial completion and acceptance. The Contractor shall CCTV all improved lines and provide video footage to Owner and Engineer for evaluation. END OF SECTION October 2016 33_05_02-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_02 (FS-100) SECTION 33_05_02 WATERLINES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Pipe and fittings for project water line. 2. Valves, fittings, and specials. B. Related sections: 1. Section 31_23_13 - Earthwork and Trenching. 2. Section 33_05_03 - Disinfection of Water Distribution Systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. AWWA C104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other liquids. 3. AWWA C110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 Inch through 48 Inch, for Water and Other Liquids. 4. AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Grey-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 5. AWWA C150 - Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. 6. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand- Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. 7. AWWA C153 - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 Inch through 12 Inch, for Water and Other Liquids. 8. AWWA C500 - Gate Valves, 3 through 48 in NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. 9. AWWA C504 - Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves. 10. AWWA C509 - Resilient Seated Gate Valves 3 in through 12 in NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. 11. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances. 12. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints. 13. AWWA C905 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe “Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 14-inch through 48-inch, for Water Transmission and Distribution”. B. NSF Intenational (NSF): 1. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide piping complete with all fittings, jointing materials, supports, anchors, and necessary appurtenances. October 2016 33_05_02-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_02 (FS-100) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01_33_00. B. Shop Drawings: Provide piping layout fabrication and assembly drawings with fitting dimensions. Provide sufficient information to verify compliance with specifications. C. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturer's catalog information with dimensions, material and assembled weight. Indicate pressure ratings for pipe, valves and hydrants. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Test Reports: Submit reports of field pressure tests under provisions of Section 01_33_00. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01_33_00. B. Accurately record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, and top of pipe elevations. C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to all municipal codes and ordinances, laws and regulations of the state. B. In case of apparent conflict, state and local requirements govern over these specifications. C. In absence of state and local regulations, International Plumbing Code applies. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Deliver and store valves and accessories in shipping containers with labeling in place in accordance with AWWA C500. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Seal valve ends to prevent entry of foreign materials into valve body. E. During loading, transporting and unloading, exercise care to prevent damage to material: 1. Use slings, hooks, pipe tongs, or skids. 2. Do not drop pipe or fittings. October 2016 33_05_02-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_02 (FS-100) 3. Do not roll or skid against pipe already on ground. 4. Repair any damage done to coating or lining. 5. Handle per manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Store rubber gaskets in cool dark location. 7. Store all material on wood pallets or timbers. F. Adequately tag or otherwise mark all piping and fittings as to size. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. ANSI A21.51/AWWA C151: As listed below except as otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings. 1. Where fitted with push-on joints, mechanical joints or mechanical joints with joint restraint device or restrained joints: less than or equal to 12 inch Pressure Class 350, greater than 12 inch Pressure Class 250. B. Fittings: 1. Ductile iron: ANSI A21.10/AWWA C110. a. 12 inches and below: 350 psi rating. b. Greater than: 250 psi rating. C. Joints: 1. Mechanical joints: ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111. a. Bolts and nuts: High strength, low alloy steel, "Cor-Ten" or approved equal. 2. Mechanical joints with tie rods: a. Tie rods: ASTM A307. b. Steel pipe spacers: ASTM A120, standard weight. c. Washers: ANSI A27.2 plain steel. d. Plastic plugs: As recommended by pipe manufacturer. 2.02 PVC PIPE A. AWWA C900: 1. Plastic pressure pipe class 235, DR 18. 2. Fittings: AWWA C111, cast iron. 3. Joints: ASTM D3139 compression gasket ring. a. Mechanical joint restraint (bell type) EBAA Iron, Uniflange Series 1390. 4. Tracer wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Water Service" in large letters; 12 gauge wire per construction details. 2.03 COPPER TUBING A. Water tubing: Buried, ASTM B88; FS WW-T-799, Type K annealed; or FS WW-T-775. B. Water tubing: Exposed or above grade, ASTM B88; Type L, hard drawn. October 2016 33_05_02-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_02 (FS-100) C. Fittings: 1. Flared Joints: ANSI B16.26, cast bronze. 2. Solder Joints: ANSI B16.18, cast bronze or B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 3. Compression Joints: Crawford "Swagelok," Hoke "Gryolok," Imperial "Hi-Seal," Parker-Hannifin "CPI," Weatherhead "Self Align," or equal. 4. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded-end, copper solder end, water imperious isolation barrier. a. Threaded: PSI "Delrin Insulating Couplings, "Vallet" V-Line Insulating Couplings," or equal. b. Flanged: Epco "Dielectric Flange Unions," PSI Type E Flange Insulation," or equal. 2.04 GATE VALVES - THROUGH 12 INCHES A. All gate valves shall be a resilient seat type and manufactured in accordance with AWWA C50. B. All gate valves shall have an epoxy coated interior and wrapped in 8-mil plastic and sealed with duct tape. C. Acceptable manufacturers: Mueller, Clow, Waterous, M&H, US Pipe. D. All gate valves shall be provided with two o-ring stem seals, in accordance with Section 4.8 of AWWA C509. E. The operating nut on all gate valves shall be between 4 and 5 feet below finished grade. F. All gate valves, whether on ductile iron water lines or PVC, must be restrained. 1. If, in order to achieve the operating nut depth noted above it is necessary to use a riser stem, the riser stem shall be pinned. The riser stem shall be coated or galvanized to prevent corrosion. 2.05 AIR AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES - 3 INCHES AND SMALLER A. Combination, integral type, air release and vacuum relief valves. B. Manufacturers: 1. Val-Matic Model 203C.2. 2. Or Approved Equal. 2.06 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Bedding: As specified in Section 31_23_13. 2.07 HYDRANT A. Manufacturers: 1. Mueller Company - Super Centurion 423. 2. Waterous Company - Pacer Model WB-67. 3. Or equal. October 2016 33_05_02-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_02 (FS-100) B. Hydrant: Type as required by CSU Facilities 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Valve boxes for all buried valves, depth as required for valve: 1. Cast iron extension sleeve type with boxes and covers. 2. Minimum diameter: 5 inch. 3. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch. 4. Box, cover, and base coated by dipping in asphalt varnish. 5. An appropriate word designating the valve service on the cover. B. Concrete for Thrust Blocks: 3000 psi minimum ready mix. Sack-crete is not allowed. C. Joint Restraint: Megalugs, EBAA Iron. D. Meter: 2” by 2” manufactured by BADGER or approved equal: 1. Remote Readout Units: Compatible with meter. E. Corporation Stops: Ford #F-600, Mueller #H-15000 or approved equal. F. Curb Stop: Tee head type, bronze construction, manufactured by Ford Ball Type B-22, Mueller #H-15204, extension type curb box, Minneapolis Pattern Base, with curb box sleeve for use in concrete or approved equal. G. Tapping Saddles: Full brass, 250 psi pressure rating, Mueller #H-16100, Supeior Style 36, or approved equal. 2.09 CORROSION CONTROL A. Paint all ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories (including joint restraint all-threads) for corrosion protection with rust inhibitive primer: Tnemec "Series 77 Chem-Prime," Sherwin Williams "Ken Kromick Universal Metal Primer," or equal. B. Polyethylene encasement: AWWA C105: seamless tube, ASTM D1248, Type I, Class C, Grade E-1, 8 mils thick: 1. Joint tape: Self-sticking, PVC or polyethylene, 2-inch wide, 10 mils thick, Chase "Cahsekote 750," Kendall "Polyken 900," 3M "Scotchrap 50," or equal. 2. Strapping: Nonmetallic, water resistant, FS PPP-S-760, Type II. 3. Harness rods shall be covered by 4-inch flat width polyethylene tubing. The entire joint shall be covered by a complete wrap of 48-inch wide polyethylene sheet material cover over each set of lugs. C. Cathodic protection: as shown on plans. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Carefully examine pipe and fittings for cracks, damage to linings, and other defects prior to installation. B. Remove all defective pipe from site and replace. October 2016 33_05_02-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_02 (FS-100) C. Examine areas for weak or structural defects or deviations beyond allowable tolerances for piping clearances that adversely affect excavation and quality of Work. D. Start installation only when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Thoroughly inspect and clean interior of fire hydrants. Open and close hydrant to insure parts are in working order, the valves seat properly and the drain valve operates. E. Check packing gland and gland nut of fire hydrant for proper installation. 3.03 BEDDING A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31_23_13. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. 3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Install as specified or in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Protect from lateral displacement by placing embedment evenly on both sides of pipe. C. Do not lay pipe in water. Do not lay pipe under unsuitable weather or trench conditions. D. Lay pipe with bell ends facing the direction of laying except when Engineer authorizes reverse laying. E. Form and place concrete for thrust blocks at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main as indicated on the drawings. F. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 5 feet of cover. G. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 31_23_13. H. Install tracer wire continuous along pipeline; reference details. I. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. October 2016 33_05_02-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_02 (FS-100) 3.05 INSTALLATION - VALVES A. Install valves, hydrants, and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Set valves on solid bearing. C. Center and plumb valve box over valve. D. Extend stem within 6 inches of final grade. Provide spacers to center stem in valve box. E. Pipe exhaust of air release valves to suitable disposal point. 3.06 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT A. Provide as indicated on the drawings. B. Suitably support and block pipe and anchor against flotation. 3.07 CONNECTION TO EXISTING PIPELINES A. Make connections between new and existing piping with suitable fittings. B. Schedule connection to minimize inconvenience to the Owner and customers and as authorized by Owner. Maximum allowable outage for tie-ins is 6 hours. C. Provide facilities for adequate dewatering and disposal of water from dewatered line and excavations without damage to adjacent property. D. Potable water lines: 1. Take special care to prevent contamination. 2. Do not permit trench water, mud, or other contaminating substances in lines. 3.08 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Flush and disinfect system in accordance with Section 33_05_03. 3.09 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot, 2 percent minimum, but never less than 1/8 per inch per foot. Maintain gradients. B. Slope exposed water piping and arrange to drain at low points 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Sections 01_45_00 and 01_46_00. B. Test each line at the Contractor's expense in the presence and to the satisfaction of Engineer. October 2016 33_05_02-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_02 (FS-100) C. Provide all necessary pumping equipment, piping connections, pressure gauges, and other required equipment, facilities, and materials. D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, and retest at no cost to Owner. E. Test Conditions. Service Test Pressure Test Medium Duration Water Supply 150 psi Water 2 hours Notes: (1) Allowable loss per AWWA standards. [L=S*D*P^1/2/133,200]. (2) Chlorination and bacterial testing per Section 33_05_03. END OF SECTION October 2016 33_05_03-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_03 (FS-100) SECTION 33_05_03 DISINFECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Disinfection of potable water distribution system. 2. Testing and reporting results. B. Related sections: 1. Section 33_05_01 - Waterlines. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards (ANSI)/American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. ANSI/AWWA B300 - Standard for Hypochlorites. 2. ANSI/AWWA B301 - Standard for Liquid Chlorine. 3. ANSI/AWWA B302 - Standard for Ammonium Sulfate. 4. ANSI/AWWA B303 - Standard for Sodium Chlorite. 5. ANSI/AWWA C651 - Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains. 6. ANSI/AWWA C652 - Standards for Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities. B. NSF International (NSF): 1. NSF 60 - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements. B. Certificate: Certify that cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds Colorado Department of Health Standards. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01_33_00. B. Disinfection report; record: 1. Type and form of disinfectant used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Initial and 24-hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. 5. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 6. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. C. Bacteriological report; record: 1. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. October 2016 33_05_03-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_03 (FS-100) 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 7. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards of the Colorado Department of Health. 8. Bacteriologist's signature and authority. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651 and C652. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Water Treatment Firm: Company specializing in disinfecting potable water systems specified in this Section with minimum 3 years experience. B. Testing Firm: Company specializing in testing examining potable water systems, certified by the State of Colorado. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS A. Chemicals: ANSI/AWWA B300, Hypochlorite, ANSI/AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine, and ANSI/AWWA B303, Sodium Chlorite. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping system has been cleaned and inspected. B. Perform scheduling and disinfection activity with start-up, testing, adjusting and balancing, demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems. C. Complete disinfection before passing pressure tests. 3.02 PRESSURE TESTING AND DISINFECTION A. Provide and attach required equipment to perform the work of this Section. B. Pressure test system to 150 psi for 2 hours. Repair leaks and re-test. C. Inject treatment disinfectant into piping system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/l residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. October 2016 33_05_03-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_05_03 (FS-100) F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 20 mg/L, repeat disinfection process. G. Flush, circulate and clean until residual is 1.0 mg/L is achieved; use domestic water. H. Take bacterial samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing and analyze. I. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection. J. Pressure test system according to specifications contained herein and in Section 33_05_02. K. Repeat disinfection and pressure testing procedure until acceptable results are obtained. 3.03 QUALITY CONTROL A. Test samples in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651. END OF SECTION October 2016 33_39_13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_39_13 (FS-100) SECTION 33_39_13 MANHOLES AND COVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue-and-groove joints, transition, frame, cover, and accessories. B. Related sections: 1. Section 31_23_13 - Earthwork and Trenching. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings. 2. ASTM A185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregate. 5. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. 6. ASTM C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. 7. ASTM C913 - Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures. 8. ASTM C923 - Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes. 9. ASTM D3753 - Glass Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01_33_00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate manhole locations, elevations, and sizes, locations and elevations of penetrations. C. Product Data: Provide manhole covers, steps, component construction, features, configuration, and dimensions. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Product suitable for use with raw wastewater. B. Water temperature: Range 5 degrees Celsius to 25 degrees Celsius. October 2016 33_39_13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_39_13 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcement for cast in place bases: No. 5 Rebar. 1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 Grade 60. 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. B. Concrete: 1. Minimum compressive strength: 3500 psi at 28 days. 2. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Cement, Type II. 3. Aggregates: ASTM C33, free of deleterious substances. C. Precast sections: 1. Specifications: ASTM C478. 2. Minimum wall thickness: 6-inch. 3. Reinforcement: Welded wire fabric, ASTM A185. 4. Grade rings as required. 5. Precast base and first barrel section cast monolithically: a. Provide with neoprene rubber pipe penetration gaskets, #40 durometer A, ASTM D2240 and stainless steel adjustable pipe clamps. D. Manhole Sections: Fiber reinforced plastic ASTM D3753. E. Preformed Mastec Gaskets: 1. Conformance: Fed. Spec. SS-S-00210 (GSA-FSS), Type 1, Rope Form. Primer Required. 2. Diameter: 12-inch for 48-inch manhole; 2-inch for 60-inch manholes and larger. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. "Rub'r-Nek," K.T. Snyder Co. b. "Kent Seal No. 2," Hamilton-Kent Manufacturing Co. c. GS #44, or #79, General Sealants, Inc. d. Or approved equal. F. Castings: ASTM A48 with asphalt varnish coating hot dip applied at foundry, 6 mils thick. G. Pipe and Fittings for Drop Manholes: ASTM C14, Class 2 concrete. H. Manhole Steps: Steel bar, 2 inch Grade 60, drop-front type with polypropylene coating applied by manufacturer, Type MA Industries, Inc., "PS2-PFS" or accepted substitution. I. Manhole rings and covers: 1. Cast iron, heavy duty traffic type, ASTM A48, Class 30B. Grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat, true surfaces. 2. Covers to seat at all points on ring. 3. Word "SEWER" in flushed boss letters. 4. Gasket Ring and cover models shall be used – no exceptions. Ring and cover models shall be Neenah Foundry R-1916-F or approved equal. October 2016 33_39_13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_39_13 (FS-100) J. Cleanout rings and covers: 1. Cast iron ASTM A48, Class 30B. Grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat, true surfaces. 2. Covers to seat at all points on ring. K. Manhole height adjustment: Use precast concrete grade rings. L. Rock subbase: 3/4 inch minus, well-graded gravel. M. Water: Clean and free of deleterious substances. N. Grout: Provide under provisions of Section 03_60_00. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Manhole section: 1. Precast concrete. 2. Minimum manhole inside diameter: 48-inch. 3. Provide eccentric cones for all manholes or as specified on Contract Drawings. 4. Cones: Same or greater reinforcement and wall thickness as manhole section. 5. Manhole steps: 12 inch on center, vertical alignment above largest bench. 6. Joints: Keylock type with double mastic gaskets, each joint to set equally and tightly. 7. Manhole opening: Minimum 24-inch clear. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify items provided by other section of Work are properly sized and located. B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, ready for roughing into Work. C. Verify excavation for manholes is correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Excavation and backfill: Refer to Section 31_23_13 for requirements. B. Rock subbase: Remove water, excavate, and place 3/4-inch rock 6-inch minimum depth, vibrate for compaction. 3.03 PLACING MANHOLE SECTIONS A. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations. B. Fill inside and outside of joint completely with non-shrink grout and trowel smooth. C. Cure non-shrink grout using approved methods outlined in Section 03_60_00. D. Set cover rings and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations. October 2016 33_39_13-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_39_13 (FS-100) E. Wrap manhole joints using mastic joint wrap. F. Spray waterproofing membrane on exterior surface of manhole to ensure watertight. G. Completed manholes shall be rigid and watertight. H. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. 3.04 PREFORMED GASKETS A. Remove and replace manhole sections which have chipped or cracked joints. B. Thoroughly clean section joints. C. Install gasket in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Only use primer furnished by gasket manufacturer. 3.05 MANHOLE INVERT A. Place concrete in bottom of manhole and form smooth transition. Trowel smooth and brush for non-skid finish. Slope bench 1-inch per foot for drainage to invert. B. Invert shape to conform to radius of pipe it connects. C. Remove all rough sections or sharp edges which tend to obstruct flow or cause material to snag. D. Construct in conformance with standard drawings. E. Remove all grout droplets from invert. 3.06 FLEXIBLE JOINTS A. Provide joint in rigid sewer pipe less than 2 feet from manhole. B. Where last joint to manhole is more than 2 feet away, place concrete cradle under pipe to within 2 feet. C. Pipe material: All non-reinforced concrete pipe to have this requirement. 3.07 MANHOLE RINGS AND COVERS A. Place rings in bed of non-shrink grout on top of manholes. B. Ensure no infiltration will enter manhole at this location. C. Carry non-shrink grout over flange of ring. D. Set top of ring flush with existing ground. E. Use precast grade rings for height adjustment. October 2016 33_39_13-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_39_13 (FS-100) 3.08 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLES A. Maintain flow at all times. B. Prior approval of proposed method for maintaining flow must be obtained from Engineer. C. Concrete core into existing manhole and reform invert to provide smooth flow transition. D. Cover area around new pipe with non-shrink grout and waterstop gasket to ensure a watertight structure. E. Make connection during low flow periods. 3.09 EXTERIOR DAMPPROOFING A. Dampproof all exterior surfaces of manholes after installation. 3.10 FIELD TESTING A. Test all manholes: 1. Hydrostatic test: a. Plug all inlets and outlets. b. Fill manhole to 3/4 height. c. Allow water to stand for 24 hours. d. Leakage tested during following 24-hour period. e. Leakage: Less than 0.2 gph/ft above invert. f. Repair all manholes that do not meet leakage test. 2. Vacuum test: a. Manholes shall be tested before the ring and cover and grade adjustment rings are installed. b. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged and braced. c. A vacuum of 10 inches of mercury shall be drawn. d. The vacuum pump shall be turned off and the time monitored. 1) Vacuum must not drop more than 1 inch for the duration of the time indicated in the following table: Specified Test Duration for Diameter of Manhole (duration in minutes:seconds) Manhole Diameter (in) 48 60 72 Time (hr:min) 1:00 1:15 1:30 B. Manholes which fail the vacuum test shall have the defects located and repaired from the outside of the manhole, and the test shall be repeated. 1. Repair and repeat testing of the failed manhole shall be repeated until the testing requirements are met. 2. No chemical injection on the manhole interior is allowed. October 2016 33_39_13-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_39_13 (FS-100) 3. One attempt at removing and re-grouting of pipe connections is allowed. All other required repair of defects shall be done on the outside of the manhole. 4. A manhole that passes the vacuum test, and leaks or shows signs of a moisture/damp area, shall be considered unacceptable. END OF SECTION October 2016 33_71_21-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_71_21 (FS-100) SECTION 33_71_21 PRECAST ELECTRICAL HANDHOLES AND ELECTRICAL MANHOLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Design, fabricate, and install precast electrical handholes and precast electrical manholes of the size and type indicated on the Drawings and specified. 1. Construction of cast-in-place concrete electrical structures, including handholes and manholes, are specified in other Sections. B. Section includes: 1. Precast portland cement concrete manholes and accessories. C. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 01_81_01 - Project Design Criteria. 3. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 4. Section 31_00_00 - Earthwork. 5. Section 03_15_00 - Concrete Accessories. 6. Section 03_30_00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 7. Section 05_50_00 - Metal Fabrications. 8. Section 06_80_17 - Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Fabrications. 9. Section 07_11_00 - Dampproofing. 10. Section 07_90_00 - Joint Sealants. 11. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 12. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 13. Section 26_05_29 - Hangers and Supports. 14. Section 26_05_44 - Duct Banks. D. Alternates: 1. Contractor may propose to construct cast-in-place structures in lieu of the precast structures specified. a. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of this alternative before submitting, providing, or installing. b. Submit full information on design and detailing of proposed alternatives including design details and drawings of the same types required by this Section for precast structures. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. October 2016 33_71_21-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_71_21 (FS-100) C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. C 857 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. 3. C 858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. 4. C 891 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. 5. C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. 6. C 1037 - Standard Practice for Inspection of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. National Electrical Safety Code (NEC). E. National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA). F. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE): 1. 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity. G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Handhole: An enclosure for use in underground systems that has been sized and detailed to allow personnel to reach into, but not enter, the enclosure to install, operate, or maintain equipment or wiring or both. (Reference: NEC, Article 100) 1. As used in this Section, “handhole” will refer to a precast electrical handhole. B. Manhole: An enclosure for use in underground systems that has been sized and detailed to allow personnel to enter the enclosure to install, operate, or maintain equipment or wiring or both. 1. As used in this Section, “manhole” will refer to a precast electrical manhole. C. Precast concrete: A concrete fabrication designed by a qualified engineer and subsequently fabricated at a qualified fabrication site, which is usually located some distance from the site where the fabrication will be installed. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General requirements for handholes and manholes: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_00 for general requirements for electrical work. 2. Provide structures of the sizes and shapes indicated on the Drawings, with layouts, dimensions, and details as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. 3. Conform to the requirements of: a. NEC. b. Project regulatory requirements as specified in Section 01_41_00. October 2016 33_71_21-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_71_21 (FS-100) B. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: 1. Load resistance of boxes and covers. 2. Design requirements: Loads on structures: a. In accordance with ASTM C 857, except as modified in this Section. b. Loads at the ground surface: 1) See “Electrical Handhole and Manhole Schedule” indicated on the Drawings for minimum surface loading requirements at each structure. Loads are designated as “sidewalk,” or ”roadway.” 2) The vehicle and pedestrian loadings in the following paragraphs need not be additive; however, structures designated for “roadway” loading shall also support “sidewalk” loads. 3) “Sidewalk”: Load from regular pedestrian traffic with considerations for occasional non-deliberate vehicular traffic: a) Designation A-0.3 in ASTM C 857 Table 1; (300-psf uniform load). 4) ”Roadway”: Load from heavy, frequently repeated vehicle traffic: a) Designation A-16 in ASTM C 857 Table 1 (AASHTO HS20-44). c. Lateral earth pressure loads: 1) Determine in accordance with ASTM C 857 using criteria found in the geotechnical engineering report titled "UV BUILDING AT THE DRAKE WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY", dated July 8, 2016, by Lithos Engineering. d. Groundwater and flood loads, and buoyancy effects: 1) Groundwater: Design for site groundwater at elevation 4876.0. 2) Lateral pressure effects: Determine based on groundwater and flood elevations specified. 3) Buoyancy: For groundwater and flood conditions, provide factor of safety against flotation of at least 1.20. a) If the weight of soil overlying footing projections on the structure is considered to resist flotation, use a buoyant unit weight of soil equal to not more than 30 pounds per cubic foot. b) Concrete fill may be provided in the bottom section of precast portland cement concrete structures to add weight. Submit proposed details. e. Soil-bearing pressure at base: 1) Maximum 2500 pounds per square foot total pressure on prepared subgrade soils. f. Lifting and handling loads: 1) Make provision in the design for the effects of loads or stresses that may be imposed on structures during fabrication, transportation, or erection. g. Load combinations: 1) Design structures to sustain the specified loads individually or in combination. 3. Structural analysis, design, and detailing: a. General: 1) Analyze and design structures including the effects of 2-way action (“plate action”) and of load transfer around current and future openings. 2) Where structures include panels designed for future removal (“knockout panels”), design structures for loads and stresses with any combination of any or all such panels in place or removed. October 2016 33_71_21-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_71_21 (FS-100) b. Precast portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: 1) Design structures in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 and this Section. 2) Provide reinforcement at all areas subject to tensile stress when loaded with the specified loads and combinations thereof. 3) Provide temperature and shrinkage reinforcement to equal or exceed ACI 318 requirements in all concrete sections. 4) Provide minimum clear concrete cover over reinforcement at both interior and exterior faces of all members in accordance with the following: a) Handholes: 1.25 inches. b) Manholes: 2 inches. 5) Reinforcement details: a) Walls: For structures with wall thickness of 8 inches or less, locate a single mat of reinforcement at the center of the wall. b) Slabs: For structures with slab thickness of 7 inches or less, locate a single mat of reinforcement at the center of the slab. c) Structures with wall or slab thicknesses exceeding these limits shall have a reinforcement at each face of the member. 6) Joints: a) Provide structures with watertight joints between sections, and detailed to minimize water infiltration at duct bank and conduit penetrations. b) Provide structures with non-skid, shiplap or tongue and groove joints between sections. 4. Design requirements: Materials: a. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: 1) In accordance with ASTM C 858 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Manufacturer’s catalog data, details, and warranties for the following items. 1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: a. Joint details and joint-sealing materials. b. Data for hatches or covers and rings. c. Preformed channels and accessories for cable racking. d. Drain and sump details, including removable covers. e. Pulling iron details. B. Shop drawings: 1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: a. Shop drawings for each structure shall bear the seal and signature of a professional engineer licensed in the state where the structures will be installed. b. Dimensioned and “to-scale” plans, sections, and details for each structure including: 1) Layout plan for that structure. 2) Sizes, locations, and vertical positions of duct bank windows and knockout panels. 3) Locations and details for access openings, pulling irons, embedded cable supports and racks, and sumps. October 2016 33_71_21-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_71_21 (FS-100) 4) Details of structural reinforcement showing bar size and spacing; true position of reinforcement in structural members with clear concrete cover at both inside and outside faces; location, bar size, and spacing of added reinforcement around openings; and other details relevant to design and fabrication of the structure. 5) Details of joints between adjacent precast sections, including provisions for overlap and for placement of sealants. C. Design data: 1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: a. Structural calculations: 1) Submit complete structural calculations for each structure. 2) Provide calculations bearing the seal and signature of a professional engineer licensed in the state where the structures will be installed. b. Manufacturer’s statement of materials used for fabrication and construction, in accordance with ASTM C 858, for record. Include the following: 1) Concrete mix design: For each concrete mix design to be used for the structures, include data describing: a) Source and type of cement. b) Sources, grading, and specific gravities of aggregates. c) Aggregate reactivity data. d) Concrete mix proportions and design strength. e) Type, name, and dosage of all admixtures included in the concrete mix. 2) Reinforcing steel: Mill certificates. D. Test reports: 1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: a. Fabricator’s tests for compressive strength of concrete used in structures, made in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C 858. E. Certificates: 1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: a. Manufacturer’s current plant certification under NPCA for the structures to be supplied. 1) Certification shall be current and in-effect at the time structures are manufactured. b. Manufacturer’s certification that handholes and manholes are in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 858. F. Manufacturer’s instructions: 1. Instructions for handling and setting structures in place. G. Manufacturer’s field reports: 1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: a. Manufacturer’s inspection reports in accordance with ASTM C 1037. October 2016 33_71_21-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_71_21 (FS-100) H. Closeout documents: 1. Project record documents: a. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: 1) Final, revised plans and details of as-constructed precast handholes and manholes if requested for record by the Engineer. 2. Warranties: a. Manufacturer’s standard warranty for: 1) Portland concrete handholes and manholes and accessories. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Designer: a. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: 1) Professional engineerqualified in the design of concrete structures and holding a current license in the state where the structures will be installed. 2. Manufacturer: a. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: 1) Holding current NPCA plant certification for the products produced. 2) Demonstrating at least 5 years of experience in the design, production, and installation of products of the type required for this Work. 3) Capable of providing structural designs prepared by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the structures will be installed. 4) Providing inspection during fabrication and handling in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 1037. 3. Installer: a. Capable of providing equipment of adequate capacity and mobility to handle and set units with proper bearing on the subgrade and without damage to the unit. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing, shipping, handling, and unloading: 1. Package and brace structures to avoid damage during shipping and handling. 2. Furnish crane or forklift for unloading and setting of portland cement concrete handholes and manholes. B. Acceptance at site: 1. Structures delivered to the site with cracks, damage, and damaged or missing accessories shall be removed from the site and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Storage and protection: 1. Store handholes and manholes and their appurtenances in areas protected from damage due to weather and site operations. 1.08 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate installation of precast electrical handholes and manholes with duct banks specified in Section 26_05_44. October 2016 33_71_21-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_71_21 (FS-100) 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty for precast handhole and manhole structures and accessories. 1.10 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 26_05_00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND MANHOLES A. General: 1. Provide portland cement concrete handholes and manholes configured and designed as indicated on the Drawings and specified. 2. In accordance with ASTM C 858 unless otherwise noted. B. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal: 1. Oldcastle Precast. 2. Jensen Precast. C. Components: 1. Floor: a. Construct floors as a monolith. b. Where sump or low-point drain is included, slope floor to that point. 2. Roof, walls, and base: a. Designed and rated to support vehicle and pedestrian loads at the spans indicated. b. See the Electrical Handhole and Manhole Schedule indicated on the Drawings for required load rating by structure location. 3. Access covers: a. Aluminum plate hinged floor access door (hatch) as shown in the drawings. 1) Load rating: a) “Heavy Duty” for covers at locations designated for “Roadway” loads. b) “Medium Duty” or stronger for covers at locations designated for “Sidewalk” loads. 2) Minimum access door size not less than 36 inches square, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3) Provide bearing surface with pre-installed continuous elastomeric gasket to minimize water infiltration at lid. 4) Provide skid-resistant lid with cast-in or machined-in grid pattern and the word “ELECTRICAL” in block letters at least 1.5 inches high. D. Accessories: 1. Provide accessories as indicated on the Drawings and specified. 2. Materials at duct bank penetrations: a. Joint filler as specified in Section 03_15_00. b. Backer rod and sealant as specified in Section 07_90_00. October 2016 33_71_21-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_71_21 (FS-100) 3. Pulling irons: a. Provide non-corroding cable pulling irons located for use with each current duct bank location and additional irons for use with duct banks that may be installed through future knockout panels. b. Pulling irons may not be located on the floor. c. Where pulling irons are installed on the wall, any pockets surrounding the irons shall have bottom surfaces sloped to drain. d. Secure pulling eyes to structure reinforcement. 4. Cable racks and racking hardware: a. Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel as specified in Section 26_05_29. b. Embedded slots: Maximum depth of 1.5 inches. 5. Sumps and drains: a. Fiberglass or HDPE fabrications including removable lids to prevent tripping hazards. 6. Exterior dampproofing: a. As specified in Section 07_11_00. b. Field applied to all wall and roof surfaces exposed to soil. E. Fabrication: 1. Embeds: a. Install embedded items with provisions for drainage to remove dripping or standing water, and to minimize corrosion. 1) Pulling irons may not be placed on the floor or in pockets that will collect water. 2) Detail bottom of cable rack channels to provide a downward sloping “sill” at the bottom of each vertical channel, so that the channel slot drains toward the floor. b. Concrete cover: 1) Provide minimum 0.75-inch clear concrete cover between embeds and surrounding reinforcement. 2) Provide minimum 1.25-inch clear concrete cover between embed and exterior face of wall. F. Tests and inspections: 1. Test and inspect structures in accordance with ASTM C 858 and ASTM C 1037. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Furnish and install precast electrical handholes and manholes as indicated on the Drawings and specified. B. Install additional handholes and manholes required so installation procedures will conform to cable manufacturer’s pulling tension requirements. 1. Include proposed locations and details of such additional handholes and manholes with the submittals under Part 1. October 2016 33_71_21-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_71_21 (FS-100) 3.02 PREPARATION A. Design: 1. Prepare detailed and scalable layouts for each manhole structure showing locations of conduit or duct bank penetrations, clearances, locations, and sizes of access openings and major accessories. B. Protection: 1. Where handhole and manhole structures are installed adjacent to existing site structures or utilities, provide excavation support or other protection as required to maintain those facilities in service and to prevent damage to both existing and new facilities. C. Site preparation: 1. Excavate and prepare exposed subgrade as specified in Section 31_00_00. 2. Install and compact foundation layer as specified in Section 31_00_00. 3. Level foundation materials so that structures will be set plumb, and duct banks will be at proper grade and alignment. a. Install with uniform bearing on foundation materials. b. Wedging or blocking of base sections for leveling over the foundation materials will not be permitted. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Protect handholes and manholes from displacement, flooding, or flotation. B. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes: 1. Install structures in accordance with ASTM C 891 and the provisions of this Section. a. In the event of conflicts, the more restrictive provisions shall apply. 2. Clean and prime joints between adjacent precast sections. a. Install sealing compound between sections and provide watertight joints. 3. Set covers and hatches at elevations indicated on the Drawings. a. Securely attach frames to top of precast structures and grade adjustment rings. 4. Penetrations: a. Holes for duct banks and other penetrations may not be cut into precast handholes and manholes unless they are located at designated locations shown on the shop drawings or at knockout panels cast into the structure during manufacturing. b. Carefully remove concrete from knockout panel areas with saws. 1) Ensure that break-back does not extend beyond the designated limits of the knockout panel. c. Coat any reinforcement cut or exposed during removal of knockout panel sections with minimum 2 coats of high solids epoxy as specified in Section 09_96_01. 1) Apply epoxy coating applied over and at least 1-inch past the perimeter of the reinforcement. October 2016 33_71_21-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/33_71_21 (FS-100) 5. Install duct banks and conduit penetrations in accordance with the penetration details indicated on the Drawings. a. Place all joint fillers, caulks, and sealants before coating exterior concrete surface with bituminous dampproofing. 6. Fill holes that were provided for handling or other temporary purposes with non-shrink cement grout using procedures as specified in Section 03_30_00 unless otherwise detailed by the manufacturer. 7. After structures are set and before backfilling, coat exterior below-grade surfaces (around the sidewalls, over the top slab, and around any vertical risers to grade) with 2 heavy coats of bituminous dampproofing as specified in Section 07_11_00. a. Apply dampproofing in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s instructions and at a rate of 40 to 60 square feet per gallon per coat. b. Mask over at least 1 inch back from joint caulks or sealants, and prevent dampproofing from coming in contact with those materials. 8. Backfill handholes and manholes as specified in Section 31_00_00. C. Site tolerances: 1. Set electrical handholes and manholes plumb and true at locations indicated on the Drawings. 2. Tolerances on placing: a. Horizontal location: Plus or minus 1 inch. b. Vertical elevation: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. c. Plumb: Plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Repair cracks or blemishes in concrete by methods acceptable to the Engineer. Submit proposed repairs for acceptance before commencing work. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. After final grading is complete, adjust access covers to grade. 3.06 CLEANING A. Before installation of cables in any duct banks and handholes or manholes, remove all concrete spoil, forms, debris, silt, dust, and other foreign material. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. See Drawings for Electrical Handhole and Electrical Manhole Schedule. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_00.01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_00.01 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR GENERAL PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Basic piping materials and methods. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 01_75_18 - Disinfection. 4. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 5. Section 40_05_00.09 - Piping Systems Testing. 6. Section 40_05_07.01 - Pipe Supports. 7. Section 40_05_17.05 - Copper Water Tube-Seamless, ASTM B88. 8. Section 40_05_19.01 - Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. 9. Section 40_05_31.01 - Plastic Piping and Tubing. 10. Section 40_05_33.02 - Polyethylene (PE) Pipe: ASTM D2513. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through 24. 2. B16.47 - Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 Through NPS 60 Metric/Inch Standard. B. American Water Work Association (AWWA): 1. C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 2. C207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services-Size 4 In. Through 144 In. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. 2. A194 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. 3. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. 4. A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 5. F37 - Standard Test Methods for Sealability of Gasket Materials. D. California Health and Safety Code. E. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 2. 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. October 2016 40_05_00.01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Buried pipe: Pipe that is buried in the soil, or cast in a concrete pipe encasement that is buried in the soil. B. Exposed pipe: Pipe that is located above ground, or pipe that is located inside a structure, supported by a structure, or cast into a concrete structure. C. Underground piping: Piping actually buried in soil or cast in concrete that is buried in soil. D. Underwater piping: Piping below tops of walls in basins or tanks containing water. E. Wet wall: Wall with water on at least 1 side. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: 1. For each piping product in this Section as applicable: a. Design features. b. Load capacities. c. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and Grade. d. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications. e. Catalog data. f. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and accessories or options being furnished. C. Calculations: 1. Provide calculations in accordance with NSF 372 for materials in contact with drinking water. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01_78_36. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. As specified in Section 01_60_00. B. Materials in contact with drinking waters: In accordance with NSF 61 and NSF 372. 2.02 ESCUTCHEONS A. Material: Chrome-plated steel plate. October 2016 40_05_00.01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Dearborn Brass Company, Model Number 5358. 2. Keeney Manufacturing Company, Model Number 102 or Number 105. 2.03 LINK TYPE SEALS A. Characteristics: 1. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking neoprene or synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening. 2. Assemble links solely with stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe. 3. Provide a nylon polymer pressure plate with Type 316 stainless steel hardware. Isolate pressure plate from contact with wall sleeve. B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Calpico, Incorporated. 2. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., Link-Seal. 2.04 FLANGE BOLTS A. Ductile iron pipe: 1. Bolts and nuts for ductile iron pipe flanges located indoors, outdoors above ground, or in dry vaults and structures and where pressures do not exceed 150 pounds per square inch shall be hot-dip galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade B A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 2. Bolts and nuts for ductile iron pipe flanges located indoors, outdoors above ground, or in dry vaults and structures where the pressures exceed 150 pounds per square inch shall be alloy steel, ASTM A193, Grade B7 for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A194, Grade 2H for nuts. 3. Bolts and nuts for ductile iron pipe flanges submerged in water or wastewater, buried, in wet vaults or structures, adjacent to wet walls, or above open water- containing structures shall be Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A193, Grade B8M for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A194, Grade 8M for nuts. 4. Provide a washer for each nut. Washer shall be of the same material as the nut. 5. Nuts shall be Heavy hex-head. 6. Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond outside face of nut after assembly. 7. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used. B. Plastic pipe: 1. Bolts and nuts for flanges on plastic pipe located indoors, outdoors above ground, or in dry vaults and structures shall be hot-dip galvanized carbon steel, in accordance with ASTM A307, Grade B for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A563, Grade A for nuts. 2. Bolts and nuts for flanges on plastic pipe submerged in water or wastewater, buried, in wet vaults or structures, adjacent to wet walls, or above open water- containing structures and plastic pipe carrying corrosive chemicals shall be October 2016 40_05_00.01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A193, Grade B8M for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A194, Grade 8M for nuts. 3. Provide a washer for each nut. Washer shall be of the same material as the nut. 4. Nuts shall be Heavy hex-head. 5. Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond outside face of nut after assembly. 6. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used. C. Steel pipe: 1. Bolts and nuts for ASME B16.5 Class 150 flanges and AWWA C207 Class D flanges located indoors, outdoors above ground, or in dry vaults and structures shall be hot-dip galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade B for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A563, Grade A for nuts. 2. Bolts and nuts for ASME B16.5 and B16.47 Class 300 flanges and AWWA C207 Class E and F flanges located indoors, outdoors above ground, or in dry vaults and structures in accordance with ASTM A193, Grade B7 for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A194, Grade 2H for nuts. 3. Bolts and nuts for flanges submerged in water or wastewater, buried, in wet vaults or structures, adjacent to wet walls, or above open water-containing structures shall be Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A193, Grade B8M for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A194, Grade 8M for nuts. 4. Provide a washer for each nut. Washer shall be of the same material as the nut. 5. Nuts shall be Heavy hex-head. 6. Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond outside face of nut after assembly. 7. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used. D. Lubricant for stainless steel bolts and nuts: 1. Chloride-free. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Huskey FG-1800. 2.05 GASKETS A. Gaskets for non-steam cleaned ductile iron and steel piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal and less than 250 degrees Fahrenheit, and raw sewage service. 2. Gasket material: a. Neoprene elastomer with minimum Shore A hardness value of 70. b. Reinforcement: Inserted 13-ounce nylon fabric cloth for pipes 20 inch or larger. c. Thickness: Minimum 3/32-inch thick for less than 10-inch pipe; minimum 1/8 inch thick for 10-inch and larger pipe. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Pipe less than 20 inches in diameter: 1) Garlock, Style 7797. 2) John Crane, similar product. October 2016 40_05_00.01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) b. Pipe 20 inches in diameter and larger: 1) Garlock, Style 8798. 2) John Crane, similar product. B. Gaskets for non-steam cleaned grooved end ductile iron and steel piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal to the encapsulating coupling or flange adapter. 2. Material: Pressure responsive elastomer. a. Ductile iron piping: FlushSeal® type. 1) Halogenated Butyl: Grade M; for temperatures to 200 degrees Fahrenheit. 2) Nitrile: Grade S; for temperatures to 180 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Steel piping: 1) EPDM: Grade E; for temperatures to 230 degrees Fahrenheit. 2) EPDM-HP: Grade EHP, for temperatures to 250 degrees Fahrenheit. 3) Nitrile: Grade T, for temperatures to 180 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Gaskets shall be verified as suitable for the intended service. a. Temperature ratings may vary depending on the fluid/media. 4. Manufacturers: Gaskets shall be of the same manufacturer as the encapsulating couplings/flange adapters. a. Victaulic Company. C. Gaskets for steam cleaned non glass-lined ductile iron and steel piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal and less than 360 degrees Fahrenheit, and raw sewage service. 2. Material: a. Neoprene elastomer, compressed, non-asbestos fiber reinforcement. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, Bluegard 3300. b. John Crane, similar product. D. Gaskets for steam cleaned glass lined ductile iron piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal and less than 360 degrees Fahrenheit, and sludge service. 2. Material: a. Teflon gasketing with 1/16-inch sheet thickness each side (1/8 inch total sheet thickness), filled with corrugated or perforated Type 316 stainless steel ring and non-asbestos filler material with minimum 5/16-inch overall thickness. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, Style HP3561. b. John Crane, similar product. E. Gaskets for flanged joints in polyvinyl chloride and polyethylene piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, with low flange bolt loadings, temperatures equal and less than 120 degrees Fahrenheit, and polymer, chlorine, caustic solutions, and other chemicals, except chemicals which liberate free fluorine including fluorochemicals and gaseous fluorine. 2. Material: 0.125-inch thick Viton rubber. October 2016 40_05_00.01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock. b. John Crane, similar product. F. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron or steel water piping: 1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, and temperatures equal and less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Material: a. Neoprene elastomer, compressed, with non-asbestos fiber reinforcement. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, Bluegard 3300. b. John Crane, similar product. G. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron or steel drinking water piping meeting NSF requirements: 1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, and temperatures equal to or less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Material: a. PTFE material with glass microsphere filler. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, GYLON ® Style 3505. b. John Crane, similar product. H. Provide gaskets suitable for the specific fluids and pressure and temperature conditions. 2.06 LEAD LIMITS A. Comply with NSF 61. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Piping drawings: a. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Not every offset and fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered has been indicated on the Drawings. Sizes and locations are indicated on the Drawings. b. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessary to avoid structural, mechanical, or other type of obstructions that cannot be removed or changed. 1) Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a change to the design concept or a change to the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2. Piping alternatives: a. Provide piping as specified in this Section, unless indicated on the Drawings or specified otherwise. October 2016 40_05_00.01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) b. Alternative pipe ratings: 1) Piping with greater pressure rating than specified may be substituted in lieu of specified piping without changes to the Contract Price. 2) Piping of different material may not be substituted in lieu of specified piping. c. Valves in piping sections: Capable of withstanding specified test pressures for piping sections and fabricated with ends to fit piping. d. For grooved joints, use couplings, flange adapters, and fittings of the same manufacturer. 1) The grooved joint manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for Contractor’s field personnel. 2) The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review Contractor is following best recommended practices in grooved product installation. 3) A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s). e. For flanged joints, where 1 of the joining flanges is raised face type, provide a matching raised face type flange for the other joining flange. 3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, piping at pipe joints, fittings, couplings, and equipment shall be installed without rotation, angular deflection, vertical offset, or horizontal offset. B. Wall and slab penetrations: 1. Provide sleeves for piping penetrations through aboveground masonry and concrete walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. For piping 1 inch in nominal diameter and larger, provide sleeves with minimum inside diameters of 1 inch plus outside diameter of piping. For piping smaller than 1 inch in nominal diameter, provide sleeve of minimum twice the outside diameter of piping. a. Arrange sleeves and adjacent joints so piping can be pulled out of sleeves and replaced without disturbing the structure. b. Cut ends of sleeves flush with surfaces of concrete, masonry, or plaster. c. Conceal ends of sleeves with escutcheons where piping runs through floors, walls, or ceilings of finished spaces within buildings. d. Seal spaces between pipes and sleeves with link-type seals when not otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. e. Seal openings around piping running through interior walls and floors of chlorine rooms and chlorine storage rooms gastight with synthetic rubber sealing compound. 3. Provide flexibility in piping connecting to structures to accommodate movement due to soil settlement and earthquakes. Provide flexibility using details indicated on the Drawings. 4. Core drilled openings: a. Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or other items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by Engineer. b. Determine location of reinforcing bars or other obstructions with a non-destructive indicator device. c. Remove dust and debris from hole using compressed air. October 2016 40_05_00.01-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) C. Exposed piping: 1. Install exposed piping in straight runs parallel to the axes of structures, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a. Install piping runs plumb and level, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1) Slope plumbing drain piping with a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot downward in the direction of flow. 2) Slope digester gas piping to drip traps or low-point drains at a minimum of 1/2 inch per foot where condensate flows against the gas, or at a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot where condensate flows with gas. 2. Install exposed piping after installing equipment and after piping and fitting locations have been determined. 3. Support piping: As specified in Sections 40_05_07.01, 40_05_07.03, and 40_05_07.05: a. Do not transfer pipe loads and strain to equipment. 4. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible couplings, flanged joints, flanged coupling adapters, and other types of joints or means which are compatible with and suitable for the piping system, and necessary to allow ready assembly and disassembly of the piping. 5. Assemble piping without distortion or stresses caused by misalignment: a. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other connections. b. Do not subject piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting piping. c. Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting flanged joints or subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue stresses. d. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection elements shall slip freely into place. e. Alter piping assembly to fit, when proper fit is not obtained. f. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump suction piping. D. Buried piping: 1. Bury piping with minimum 3-foot cover without air traps, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Where 2 similar services run parallel to each other, piping for such services may be laid in the same trench. a. Lay piping with sufficient room for assembly and disassembly of joints, for thrust blocks, for other structures, and to meet separation requirements of public health authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Laying piping: a. Lay piping in finished trenches free from water or debris. Begin at the lowest point with bell ends up slope. b. Place piping with top or bottom markings with markings in proper position. c. Lay piping on an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the full length of barrels. d. Where joints require external grouting, banding, or pointing, provide space under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid with sufficient shape and size for grouting, banding, or pointing of joints. e. At the end of each day's construction, plug open ends of piping temporarily to prevent entrance of debris or animals. October 2016 40_05_00.01-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) 4. Concrete encase all buried pipe installed under concrete slabs or structures. E. Venting piping under pressure: 1. Lay piping under pressure flat or at a continuous slope without air traps, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install plug valves as air bleeder cocks at high points in piping. a. Provide 1-inch plug valves for water lines, and 2-inch plug valves for sewage and sludge lines, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Provide additional pipe taps with plug cocks and riser pipes along piping as required for venting during initial filling, disinfecting, and sampling. 4. Before piping is placed into service, close plug valves and install plugs. Protect plugs and plug valves from corrosion in as specified in Section 09_96_01. F. Restraining piping: 1. Restrain piping at valves and at fittings where piping changes direction, changes sizes, and at ends: a. When piping is underground, use concrete thrust blocks, mechanical restraints, or push-on restraints. b. When piping is aboveground or underwater, use mechanical or structural restraints. c. Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross sectional area of the piping by design test pressure of the piping. 2. Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting from test pressures: a. During testing, provide suitable temporary restraints where piping does not require permanent restraints. 3. Place concrete thrust blocks against undisturbed soil. 4. Place concrete so piping joints, fittings, and other appurtenances are accessible for assembly and disassembly. 5. Provide underground mechanical restraints where specified in the Piping Schedule. G. Connections to existing piping: 1. Expose existing piping to which connections are to be made with sufficient time to permit, where necessary, field adjustments in line, grade, or fittings: a. Protect domestic water/potable water supplies from contamination: 1) Make connections between domestic water supply and other water systems in accordance with requirements of public health authorities. 2) Provide devices approved by Owner of domestic water supply system to prevent flow from other sources into the domestic supply system. 2. Make connections to existing piping and valves after sections of new piping to be connected have been tested and found satisfactory. 3. Provide sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, adapters, and other fittings needed to install or attach new fittings to existing piping and to make connections to existing piping. 4. For flanged connections, provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers, and full-face flange gaskets. October 2016 40_05_00.01-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) H. Connections between ferrous and nonferrous metals: 1. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with dielectric couplings especially designed for the prevention of chemical reactions between dissimilar metals. 2. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys. I. Flanged connections between dissimilar metals such as ductile iron pipe and steel pipe: 1. Provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers, and full-face flange gaskets. 3.02 CLEANING A. Piping cleaning: 1. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and debris. 2. Perform special cleaning when required by the Contract Documents. B. Cleaning potable water piping: 1. Flush and disinfect potable water piping as specified in Section 01_75_18. C. Cleaning air piping: 1. Perform special cleaning of filtered air piping from the intake clean air plenums to the discharge points and high-pressure air piping. a. Protect surfaces from contamination. 2. Special cleaning shall include wire brushing, power tool cleaning, wiping down with lint-free cloths, brooming, and vacuuming to remove rust, scale, weld spatter, dust, dirt, oil, and other matter deleterious to operation of the air system: a. Do not sandblast installed piping. 3. To the greatest extent possible, clean piping immediately prior to final closure of piping systems: a. Enter piping, clean and wipe down surfaces, and vacuum out residue. b. Clean surfaces not accessible to this cleaning operation after installation within 6 hours preceding installation. 4. Subsequent to cleaning, protect surfaces from contamination by dust, dirt, construction debris, and moisture, including atmospheric moisture: a. Whether or not pipe upstream has been cleaned, temporarily seal openings in partially completed work except when installation is actively in progress. b. When installation is actively in progress, seal openings at the end of each day's construction or when construction is temporarily stopped. 5. Suspend cleaning and seal openings when inclement weather, including dust storms, is imminent. 6. Use clean, dry air for testing the piping and other elements of the system. 7. Prior to introduction of air to the system, blow piping clean. a. Blow with maximum discharge rate possible for minimum 4 hours, using new blowers or compressors and filters. 8. Clean surfaces that become contaminated prior to acceptance. October 2016 40_05_00.01-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Functional testing: 1. Piping system: a. Witnessed. b. Conduct pressure and leak test, as specified. 3.04 PIPING SCHEDULE October 2016 40_05_00.01-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) PIPING SCHEDULE Process Abbrev. Service Nominal Diameter (inches) Material Pressure Class Special Thickness Class Schedule Wall Thickness Pipe Spec. Section Joints/ Fittings Test Pressure/ Method Lining Coating Service Conditions Comments CD Chemical Drain Underground 1-6 PVC SCH 80 40_05_31.01 SW 50 psig/HH None None Aboveground 1-6 PVC SCH 80 40_05_31.01 SW 50 psig/HH None EPP CW Cold Water All Copper 40_05_17.05 Soldered 100 psig /HH None None D Drain Underground 2-12 DIP 40_05_19.01 B&SP 15 feet/GR CM CM Aboveground 4-6 DIP 40_05_19.01 B&SP 15 feet/GR CM CM Aboveground < 4 PVC SCH 40 40_05_31.01 SW 15 feet/GR None None DW Deionized Water or 1/4 - 1 PVC SCH 40 40_05_31.01 SW 100 psig/HH None None Groundwater Dewatering 6-8 PVC SCH 40 40_05_31.01 SW 20 feet/GR None None FE Final Effluent Underground 16-20 Steel WLD 125 psig /HH CM PTW 36-54 RCP B&SP 20 feet/LH None 2 layers PEE Aboveground 16-20 Steel WLD 125 psig /HH CM EPP HPA High Pressure Air 0.50-2 BSP SCH 40 SCRD or FL or GE 45 psig/HH None EPP HW Hot Water All Copper Soldered 100 psig /HH None None OF Overflow 4-10 DIP CL 53 40_05_19.01 FL 15 feet/GR GL EPP October 2016 40_05_00.01-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) PIPING SCHEDULE Process Abbrev. Service Nominal Diameter (inches) Material Pressure Class Special Thickness Class Schedule Wall Thickness Pipe Spec. Section Joints/ Fittings Test Pressure/ Method Lining Coating Service Conditions Comments PD Pumped Drainage Underground 2 and less GSP SCH 40 SCRD 100 psig /HH None PTW 3-10 DIP 150 40_05_19.01 Mech Rest. MJ 50 psig/HH CM 2 layers PEE 2W Non-Potable Water Underground 1-3 PVC SCH 80 40_05_31.01 SW 125 psig /HH None None 4-10 DIP 150 40_05_19.01 Mech Rest. MJ 125 psig/HH CM 2 layers PEE Aboveground 0.5-3 PVC SCH 80 40_05_31.01 SW 125 psig /HH None EPP 3W Reclaimed Water Underground 1-3 PVC SCH 80 40_05_31.01 SW 200 v/HH None None 4-12 DIP 150 40_05_19.01 Mech Rest. MJ 200 psig/HH CM 2 layers PEE Aboveground 0.5-3 PVC SCH 80 40_05_31.01 SW 200 psig /HH None EPP 4-12 DIP CL 53 40_05_19.01 FL 200 psig /HH CM EPP October 2016 40_05_00.01-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.01 (FS-100) PIPING SCHEDULE Process Abbrev. Service Nominal Diameter (inches) Material Pressure Class Special Thickness Class Schedule Wall Thickness Pipe Spec. Section Joints/ Fittings Test Pressure/ Method Lining Coating Service Conditions Comments Abbreviations: 1. The following abbreviations used in the column of test method refer to the respective methods as specified in Section 40_05_00.09. AM Air method GR Gravity method HH High head method LH Low head method SC Special case 2. Abbreviations to designate piping include the following: B&SP Bell and spigot CI Cast iron CISP Cast iron soil pipe CL Class, followed by the designation CM Cement mortar CTP Coal tar pitch DIP Ductile iron piping EPP Epoxy polyurethane coating FLFlange GA Gauge, preceded by the designation GE Grooved end joint GL Glass lined GSP Galvanized steel pipe MJ Mechanical joint NPS Nominal pipe size, followed by the number in inches psi pounds per square inch psig pounds per square inch gauge PE Polyethylene PEE Polyethylene encasement PTW Polyethylene tape wrap PVC Polyvinyl Chloride SCH Schedule, followed by the designation SCRD Screwed-On SST Stainless steel SW Solvent welded VCP Vitrified clay piping WLD Weld END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_00.03-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.03 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_00.03 PIPE IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Pipe identification including the following: 1. Pipe identification by color and legend. 2. Underground warning tape. 3. Witness markers. 4. Valve identification. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_60_00 - Product Requirements. 3. Section 01_77_00 - Closeout Procedures. 4. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Submit following: 1. Product data. 2. Samples. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Submit following as specified in Section 01_77_00: a. Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ABOVE GROUND AND IN-CHASE PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Manufacturers: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Seton, Opti Code Pipe Markers. b. Lab Safety Supply. c. Marking Services, Inc. October 2016 40_05_00.03-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.03 (FS-100) B. Materials: 1. Pipe markers: Self-adhesive vinyl, suitable for outdoor application from -40 degrees to 180 degrees Fahrenheit; in accordance with ASME A13.1 requirements. a. Lettering: Nominal Pipe Diameter Lettering Size Less than 1.5 1/2 inch 1.5 inches to 2 inches 3/4 inch 2.5 inches to 6 inches 1-1/4 inches 8 inches to 10 inches 2-1/2 inches Over 10 inches 3-1/2 inches b. Marker colors: Service Lettering Background Flammables, chemicals, toxics Black Yellow Water, nontoxic solutions or low hazard liquids White Green Nonflammable or nontoxic gases White Blue Fire quenching fluids (foam, fire water, CO2 Halon) White Red 2. Coating: As specified in Section 09_96_01. 3. Pipe identification tags: Aluminum or stainless steel with stamped-in 1/4 inch high identifying lettering. 4. Pipe identification tag chains: Aluminum or stainless steel. 5. Snap-on markers: Markers with 3/4 inch high letters for 3/4 to 4 inch pipe or covering, or 5 inch high letters for 5 inch or larger pipe or cover, as manufactured by one of following: a. Brady Bradysnap-On B-915. b. Seton Setmark. 2.02 BURIED PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION A. Underground warning tape: 1. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a. Seton Name Plate Company, Branford, CT. b. T. Christy Enterprises, Inc. 2. Material: a. Polyethylene tape for prolonged underground use. b. Minimum tape thickness: 4 mils. c. Overall tape width: 6 inches. October 2016 40_05_00.03-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.03 (FS-100) d. Message: “CAUTION” with the name of the service followed by “LINE BURIED BELOW.” in black lettering on colored background in accordance with approved APWA colors. 1) Water: Blue. 2) Sewer: Green. 3) Telephone: Orange. 4) Gas and other services: Yellow. 2.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall furnish and install tags for all valves and gates required for the Work. 1. Tags shall be 2-in diameter round, stainless steel or PVC for buried applications. 2. Tags shall be furnished with a non-corrosive metal wire suitable for attaching the tag to the operator base. 3. Tags shall be stamped in 1/4-inch high letter a. Tags shall not be attached in such a way as to inhibit the operation of the valve or gate. 4. Buried valve tags shall be secured to concrete s with the specified valve or gate number. 5. Submit 2 samples of the type of tag proposed and the manufacturer’s standard color chart and letter styles to the Engineer for review. 6. Manufacturer: The following or equal: a. Seton Name Plate Company, Branford, CT. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify satisfactory conditions of substrate for applying identification. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation and application of products as specified in Section 01_60_00. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare and coat surfaces as specified in Section 09_96_01. B. Prepare surface in accordance with product manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ABOVE GROUND AND IN-CHASE PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed piping, valves, and accessories in accessible chases with lettering or tags designating service of each piping system with flow directional arrows and color code. B. Color code: 1. Only if painting is required by Owner, paint piping with colors as selected by Owner. October 2016 40_05_00.03-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.03 (FS-100) C. Lettering and flow direction arrows: 1. Stencil lettering on painted bands or use snap-on markers on pipe to identify pipe. When stenciling, stencil 3/4 inch high letters on 3/4 through 4-inch pipe or coverings, or 5-inch high letters on 5-inch and larger pipe or coverings. 2. Provide lettering and flow direction arrows near equipment served, adjacent to valves, both sides of walls and floors where pipe passes through, at each branch or tee, and at intervals of not more than 50 feet in straight runs of pipe. D. Where scheduled, space 6-inch wide bands along stainless steel pipe at 10-foot intervals and other pipe at 5-foot intervals. E. Label chemical tank fill pipelines at locations which are visible from chemical fill stations. F. Metal tags: 1. Where outside diameter of pipe or pipe covering is 5/8 inch or smaller, provide metal pipe identification tags instead of lettering. 2. Fasten pipe identification tags to pipe with chain. 3. Where tags are used, color code pipe as scheduled. 3.04 BURIED PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Underground warning tape: 1. Place continuous run of warning tape in pipe trench, 12 inches above the pipe. B. Tracer wire: 1. Install on all non-metallic pipe. 2. Install an electrically continuous run of tracer wire along the entire length of the pipe with wire terminations in valve boxes, vaults, or structures. 3. Install tracer wire on top of the pipe and secure to pipe with tape a minimum of every 10 feet. 4. Where approved by the Engineer, splice sections of wire together using approved direct bury wire nuts. a. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable. C. Witness markers: 1. Install over pipe in unpaved open-space areas at intervals not greater than 200 feet. 2. Place markers at appurtenances located in unpaved areas. 3. Embed markers at least 18 inches into the soil. 3.05 APPLICATION A. Identify piping with legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers; use self-adhesive arrow roll tape to secure ends of piping markers and indicate flow direction. B. Provide legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers where piping passes through walls or floors, at piping intersections and at maximum 15-foot spacing on piping runs. October 2016 40_05_00.03-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.03 (FS-100) C. Provide piping marker letters and colors as scheduled. D. Place markers on piping so they are visible from operator's position in walkway or working platform near piping. Locate markers along horizontal centerline of pipe, unless better visibility is achieved elsewhere. 3.06 PIPING COLOR CODE AND MARKER SCHEDULE Service Fluid Pipe Color (if required by Owner) Marker Legend Chemical Drain TBD CHEMICAL DRAIN Domestic Cold Water TBD DOMESTIC COLD WATER Domestic Hot Water TBD DOMESTIC HOT WATER Drain TBD DRAIN Process Water TBD PROCESS WATER Raw Wastewater TBD NONE USED Sample TBD FLUID BEING SAMPLED Sanitary Drain TBD SANITARY DRAIN Sodium Hypochlorite TBD CHLORIDE SOLUTION Tank Drain TBD TANK DRAIN Vent Pipe TBD VENT PIPE END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_00.09-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.09 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_00.09 PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Test requirements for piping systems. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Fuel Gas Code (NFGC). B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. B31.3 - Process Piping. 3. B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 1.03 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. General requirements: 1. Testing requirements are stipulated in Laws and Regulations; are included in the Piping Schedule in Section 40_05_00.01; are specified in the specifications covering the various types of piping; and are specified in this Section. 2. Requirements in Laws and Regulations supersede other requirements of Contract Documents, except where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent, including higher test pressures, longer test times, and lower leakage allowances. 3. Test plumbing piping in accordance with Laws and Regulations, the plumbing code, as specified in Section 01_41_00, and UL requirements. 4. When testing with water, the specified test pressure is considered to be the pressure at the lowest point of the piping section under test. a. Lower test pressure as necessary (based on elevation) if testing is performed at higher point of the pipe section. B. Furnish necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, including bulkheads, restraints, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, water, pressure gauges, and other means and facilities required to perform tests. C. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting: 1. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting will be provided by Owner. October 2016 40_05_00.09-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.09 (FS-100) D. Pipes to be tested: Test only those portions of pipes that have been installed as part of this Contract. Test new pipe sections prior to making final connections to existing piping. Furnish and install test plugs, bulkheads, and restraints required to isolate new pipe sections. Do not use existing valves as test plug or bulkhead. E. Unsuccessful tests: 1. Where tests are not successful, correct defects or remove defective piping and appurtenances and install piping and appurtenances that comply with the specified requirements. 2. Repeat testing until tests are successful. F. Test completion: Drain and leave piping clean after successful testing. G. Test water disposal: Dispose of testing water in accordance with requirements of federal, state, county, and city regulations governing disposal of wastes in the location of the Project and disposal site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Schedule and notification of tests: 1. Submit a list of scheduled piping tests by noon of the working day preceding the date of the scheduled tests. 2. Notification of readiness to test: Immediately before testing, notify Engineer in writing of readiness, not just intention, to test piping. 3. Have personnel, materials, and equipment specified in place before submitting notification of readiness. 1.05 SEQUENCE A. Clean piping before pressure or leak tests. B. Test gravity piping underground, including sanitary sewers, for visible leaks before backfilling and compacting. C. Underground pressure piping may be tested before or after backfilling when not indicated or specified otherwise. D. Backfill and compact trench, or provide blocking that prevents pipe movement before testing underground piping with a maximum leakage allowance. E. Test underground piping before encasing piping in concrete or covering piping with slab, structure, or permanent improvement. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. October 2016 40_05_00.09-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.09 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING ALIGNMENT, GRADE, AND DEFLECTION A. Alignment and grade: 1. Visually inspect the interior of gravity piping with artificial light, reflected light, or laser beam. 2. Consider inspection complete when no broken or collapsed piping, no open or poorly made joints, no grade changes that affect the piping capacity, or no other defects are observed. 3.02 AIR TESTING METHOD FOR PRESSURE PIPING A. Air test piping, indicated with "AM" in the Piping Schedule, with air or another nonflammable or inert gas. B. Test gas, air, liquefied petroleum gas, liquid chlorine, and chlorine gas piping by the air test method: 1. Test chlorine piping with dry air or nitrogen having a dew point of minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit or less. Supply temporary air dryers as necessary. C. Test at pressure as specified in Piping Schedule in Section 40_05_00.01: 1. Provide temporary pressure relief valve for piping under test: a. Set at the lesser of 110 percent of the test pressure or 50 pounds per square inch gauge over the test pressure. 2. Air method test pressures shall not exceed 110 percent of the piping maximum allowable working pressure calculated in accordance with the most stringent of ASME B31.1, ASME B31.3, ASE B31.8, or the pipe manufacturer's stated maximum working pressure. 3. Gradually increase test pressure to an initial test pressure equal to the lesser of 1/2 the test pressure or 25 pounds per square inch gauge. 4. Perform initial check of joints and fittings for leakage. 5. Gradually increase test pressure in steps no larger than the initial pressure. Check for leakage at each step increase until test pressure reached. 6. At each step in the pressure, examine and test piping being air tested for leaks with soap solution. 7. Consider examination complete when piping section under test holds the test pressure for 15 minutes without losses. 3.03 TESTING GRAVITY FLOW PIPING A. Test gravity flow piping indicated with "GR" in the Piping Schedule, as follows: 1. Unless specified otherwise, subject gravity flow piping to the following tests: a. Alignment and grade. b. For plastic piping test for deflection. c. Visible leaks and pressure with maximum leakage allowance, except for storm drains and culverts. 2. Inspect piping for visible leaks before backfilling. 3. Provide temporary restraints when needed to prevent movement of piping. 4. Pressure test piping with maximum leakage allowance after backfilling. October 2016 40_05_00.09-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.09 (FS-100) 5. With the lower end plugged, fill piping slowly with water while allowing air to escape from high points. Keep piping full under a slight head for the water at least 24 hours: a. Examine piping for visible leaks. Consider examination complete when no visible leaks are observed. b. Maintain piping with water, or allow a new water absorption period of 24 hours for the performance of the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance. c. After successful completion of the test for visible leaks and after the piping has been restrained and backfilled, subject piping to the test pressure for minimum of 4 hours while accurately measuring the volume of water added to maintain the test pressure: 1) For polyvinyl chloride (PVC) gravity sewer pipe: 25 gallons per day per inch diameter per mile of piping under test: a) Consider the test complete when leakage is equal to or less than the following maximum leakage allowances: (1) For concrete piping with rubber gasket joints: 80 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test: (a) Advise manufacturer of concrete piping with rubber gasket joints of more stringent than normal maximum leakage allowance. (2) For vitrified claypiping: 500 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test. (3) For other piping: 80 gallons per day per inch diameter per mile of piping under test. 3.04 TESTING HIGH-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure in the Piping Schedule is 20 pounds per square inch gauge or greater, by the high head pressure test method, indicated "HH" in the Piping Schedule. B. General: 1. Test connections, hydrants, valves, blowoffs, and closure pieces with the piping. 2. Do not use installed valves for shutoff when the specified test pressure exceeds the valve's maximum allowable seat differential pressure. Provide blinds or other means to isolate test sections. 3. Do not include valves, equipment, or piping specialties in test sections if test pressure exceeds the valve, equipment, or piping specialty safe test pressure allowed by the item's manufacturer. 4. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus or minus 5 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test pressure. 5. Select the limits of testing to sections of piping. Select sections that have the same piping material and test pressure. 6. When test results indicate failure of selected sections, limit tests to piping: a. Between valves. b. Between a valve and the end of the piping. c. Less than 500 feet long. 7. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance. October 2016 40_05_00.09-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.09 (FS-100) C. Testing procedures: 1. Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air: a. Use potable water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the Piping Schedule. 2. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for a water absorption period of minimum 24 hours. 3. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for leaks: a. Consider visible leakage testing complete when no visible leaks are observed. D. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance: 1. Leakage allowance is zero for piping systems using flanged, National Pipe Thread threaded and welded joints. 2. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test. 3. For piping systems using joint designs other than flanged, threaded, or welded joints, accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period: a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred. b. Successful completion of the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance shall have been achieved when the observed leakage during the test period is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred. c. When leakage is allowed, calculate the allowable leakage by the following formula: L = S x D x P1/2 x 133,200-1 wherein the terms shall mean: L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour. S = Length of the test section in feet. D = Nominal diameter of the piping in inches. P = Average observed test pressure in pounds per square inches gauge, at the lowest point of the test section, corrected for elevation of the pressure gauge. x = The multiplication symbol. 3.05 TESTING LOW-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure is less than 20 pounds per square inch gauge, by the low head pressure test method, indicated "LH" in the Piping Schedule. October 2016 40_05_00.09-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_00.09 (FS-100) B. General: 1. Test pressures shall be as scheduled in Section 40_05_00.01. 2. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus or minus 2 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test pressure. 3. Test connections, blowoffs, vents, closure pieces, and joints into structures, including existing bell rings and other appurtenances, with the piping. 4. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance. C. Visible leaks test: 1. Subject piping under test to the specified pressure measured at the lowest end. 2. Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air: a. Use potable water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the Piping Schedule. 3. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for the water absorption period of minimum 24 hours. 4. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for leaks. Consider testing complete when no visible leaks are observed. D. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance: 1. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test. 2. Accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period: a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage of 80 gallons per inch of nominal diameter, per mile of piping section under test after 24 hours, and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred. b. Successful completion of the leakage test shall have been achieved when the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_06.03-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.03 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_06.03 PIPE COUPLINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Pipe couplings for ductile iron piping. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 5. Section 40_05_00.09 - Piping Systems Testing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. B31.9 - Building Services Piping. C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C111 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2. C207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. 3. C606 – Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. 4. A351 - Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts. 5. A449 - Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/9 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use. 6. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 7. A576 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality. 8. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. October 2016 40_05_06.03-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.03 (FS-100) E. NSF International (NSF). 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: 1. Shop drawings, detailing dimensions, and materials. 2. Piping layout drawings: Coordinate preparation of required piping layout drawings to show coupling sizes. C. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01_78_23. 1. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for each type of manual valve 4 inch in nominal size and larger, and all non-manual valves. Include information on valve operators. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Known acceptable manufacturers are listed by specific products. B. Provide references as specified in this Section by specific product. C. Manufacturer’s representatives requirements as specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section by specific product. D. Gaskets for flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapters: 1. Provide gasket materials for piping applications as follows: a. Low-pressure and high-pressure air, steam, hot water: EPDM. b. All other piping applications: Neoprene rubber or Buna-N. E. Exterior coatings for underground and submerged applications: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Tapecoat Company, Inc., T.C. Mastic. b. Kop-Coat Company, Inc., Bitumastic Number 50. 2. Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch. 2.02 PIPE COUPLINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPING A. Dismantling joints: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Romac Industries, Inc., Style DJ400. b. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 975. October 2016 40_05_06.03-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.03 (FS-100) 2. Materials: a. Flanged spool: AWWA C207 steel pipe: a) ASTM A53 for sizes 3 inches to 12 inches. b) ASTM A36 for sizes 14 inches to 72 inches. b. End ring and body: 1) For sizes 3 inches to 12 inches, ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. 2) For sizes 14 inches to 72 inches, steel in accordance with ASTM A36 or A53. c. Follower ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. d. Bolts and hex nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F593. e. Tie rods: High tensile steel in accordance with ASTM A193 Grade B7. 3. Flange design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207, compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and lining: Manufacturer’s standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. B. Flanged coupling adapters: 12-inch size and smaller: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Dresser, Inc., Style 227. b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FCA501. c. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 912. 2. Materials: a. Flanged body: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. b. Follower ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. c. Bolts and hex nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F593. 3. Flange design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207 compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and lining: Manufacturer’s standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. C. Flanged coupling adapters: Greater than 12-inch size: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Dresser, Inc., Style 128-W. b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FC400. c. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 913. 2. Materials: a. Flange and flanged body: Ductile iron or low carbon steel having a minimum yield strength of 30,000 pounds per square inch. b. Follower ring: Low carbon steel having a minimum yield strength of 30,000 pounds per square inch. October 2016 40_05_06.03-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.03 (FS-100) c. Bolts and hex nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F593. 3. Flange design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207 compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and lining: Manufacturer’s standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. D. Flexible couplings: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Dresser, Inc., Style 253. b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style 501. c. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 441. 2. Materials: a. Center rings: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. b. Follower rings: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. c. Bolts and hex nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and underwater: Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593. 3. Coating and lining: Manufacturer’s standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. 4. Center sleeve dimensions: Provide center sleeves with lengths in accordance with following table: Nominal Pipe Size Sleeve Length 3 inch and smaller Manufacturer’s standard 4 inch through 8 inch 7 inches 10 inch through 14 inch 12 inches Greater than 16 inch Use steel flexible coupling per Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping E. Restrained flange coupling adapter: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Romac Industries, Inc., Style RFCA. b. Star Pipe Products, 3200 StarFlange. 2. Materials: a. Flange and flanged body: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. b. Follower ring: Lug type restraint system. 1) Follower ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. 2) Restraining lugs: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. a) Designed to contact the pipe and apply forces evenly. 3) Restraining bolts: a) Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. b) Bolt heads shall be designed to twist off when the proper torque has been applied. October 2016 40_05_06.03-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.03 (FS-100) c. Bolts and hex nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F593. 3. Flange design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207 compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and lining: Manufacturer’s standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. 5. Angular deflection: Restrained flange coupling adapter must allow angular deflection after assembly. F. Grooved joint couplings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Victaulic Company, Series 31 or equal. 2. Materials: a. Housings: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. b. Gasket: 1) FlushSeal® type, or equal. Elastomer in accordance with ASTM D2000. 2) Neoprene or BUNA-N. c. Bolts and nuts: Electroplated steel in accordance with ASTM A449. d. Coating: As specified in Section 09_96_01. 3. For use with rigid or flexible radius grooved components in accordance with AWWA C606. 4. For connection to IPS steel pipe sizes, Victaulic Style 307. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In underground and underwater installations, coat the exterior of coupling with a protective coating in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Joints and flexible connections shall be installed centered with no angular deflection unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Flexible couplings and flange coupling adapters: Install with gap between pipe ends in accordance with the following table unless a greater gap is indicated on the Drawings. Maximum gap tolerance shall be within 1/8 inch. 1. Install flexible coupling with pipe gap located in middle of center sleeve. 2. Install flanged coupling adapter with end of plain end pipe in middle of flanged coupling body. Center Ring Length Gap Dimension and Tolerance 4 inch through 6 inch 3/8 inch 7 inch 5/8 inch 10 inch and greater 7/8 inch October 2016 40_05_06.03-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.03 (FS-100) D. Provide harnesses (tie-downs) for flexible couplings unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings with a written note. 1. Design harnesses (tie-downs) for the test pressures as specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 40_05_00.01. E. Grooved joint couplings: 1. Grooved ends: Clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. 2. Gaskets: Elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer. 3. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. F. Bolted, split-sleeve couplings: 1. Inspect each coupling to insure that there are no damaged portions of the coupling. a. Pay particular attention to the sealing pad/sealing plate area. b. Before installation, thoroughly clean each coupling of any foreign substance which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all time. 2. Wrenches: a. Conform to manufacturer instructions. b. Bolts and studs shall be tightened so as to secure a uniform gasket compression between the coupling and the body of the pipe with all bolts or studs tightened approximately the same amount. c. Final tightening shall be done by hand (no air impact wrenches) and is complete when the coupling is in uniform contact with the outside surface of the pipe all around the circumference of the pipe. 3. No joint shall be misfit in any plane. 4. On the fixed ends of bolted, split-sleeve couplings, the shoulders shall bear on the restraint rings all around with no visible gap. 5. Ends of piping where coupler are installed shall be smooth and free of defects. a. Remove weld splatter and grind smooth. b. Grind pipe seam welds flush with pipe wall and smooth. 3.02 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer(each) services for each type of pipe coupling: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. October 2016 40_05_06.03-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.03 (FS-100) Manufacturer Rep Onsite Source Testing (Witnessed or Non-witnessed) Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Process Operational Period Maintenance (hrs per session) Operation (hrs per session) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Non-Witnessed 4 2 1 2 1 1 Not Required C. Functional Testing: 1. Pressure testing as specified in Sections 40_05_00.01 and 40_05_00.09. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_06.55-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.55 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_06.55 PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Insulation for piping and related systems. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 2. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 3. Section 40_05_00.01 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 4. Section 40_05_00.03 - Pipe Identification. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded, and Seamless. 2. C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 3. C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 4. C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 5. C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 6. C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 7. C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel. 8. C929 - Standard Practice for Handling, Transporting, Shipping, Storage, Receiving, and Application of Thermal Insulation Materials for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel. 9. C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 10. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 11. D2310 - Standard Classification of Machine-Made "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced-Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe. 12. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 13. E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Buried: Piping that is installed below buildings, foundations, or finish grade, either in soil or encased in concrete in soil. October 2016 40_05_06.55-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.55 (FS-100) B. Concealed: Piping above suspended ceilings and within walls, partitions, shafts, or service spaces and spaces not normally exposed to view but not buried. C. Exterior: Piping that is installed outside a building, or within a pipe trench or tunnel. D. Flame spread and smoke density: Burning characteristics determined in accordance with ASTM E84. No units apply to value. E. Interior: Piping that is installed inside a building. F. K factor: Thermal conductivity determined in accordance with ASTM C177 or C518 and expressed in units of BTU-inch/hour-square feet -degrees Fahrenheit. G. Mineral fiber: Fibers manufactured of glass, rock, or slag processed from a molten state, with or without a binder. H. Water vapor permeance: Water vapor transmission determined in accordance with ASTM E96 and expressed in units of perm-inch. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: 1. Insulation properties: Include K factor, thickness, density, operating temperature limits, tensile strength, compressive strength, moisture absorption, flame spread, and smoke developed in accordance with ASTM E84 and corrosivity to stainless steel piping in accordance with ASTM C795. 2. Jacket properties: Include covering material, cover thickness, tensile strength, tear strength, permeability in accordance with ASTM E96, flame spread, and smoke developed in accordance with ASTM E84, closure type or devices, and accessories. B. Manufacturer's application instructions: Include assembly and application drawings and detailed instructions. C. Laboratory report: Provide certified laboratory report stating that insulation is not manufactured using chlorinated polymers and does not contain chlorides, bromides, sulfates, or fire-rated materials. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store insulation materials and accessories under cover and protected from moisture. B. Handle and store insulation for use on stainless steel in accordance with ASTM C929. October 2016 40_05_06.55-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.55 (FS-100) 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Pressure test piping and complete application of coating system before applying insulation. B. When piping is to be heat traced, install and functionally test heat tracing before installation of insulation. C. Before beginning installation of piping insulation, verify that the Engineer has accepted piping tests, pipe coating applications, and heat tracing tests. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE INSULATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Insulation thicknesses: Provide insulation thickness in inches in accordance with the following table. Insulation thickness shown is nominal. Manufacturing tolerance of 15 percent variation is permissible. Required Insulation Thicknesses (inches) Service Temperature Range as Designated in Insulation Schedule at End of this Section Nominal Pipe Diameters 1-inch and Less 1.25 to 2-inch 2.5 to 4-inch 5 to 10-inch Over 10-inch Above 200 degrees Fahrenheit 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 3.5 100 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.5 40 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 Below 40 degrees Fahrenheit 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 Heat Traced Pipes 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 Aeration Air Pipes 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.02 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulation types: Provide in accordance with the insulation types listed and scheduled. B. Insulation, Type 1: 1. Insulation material: Closed cell elastomeric insulation. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Armstrong World Industries, AP Armaflex. b. Apache Products Company, ISO-25. 3. Minimum temperature range: Minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit to plus 220 degrees Fahrenheit. 4. K factor at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Not more than 0.27 BTU-inch/hour-square feet-degrees Fahrenheit. October 2016 40_05_06.55-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.55 (FS-100) 5. Fire ratings: a. Flame spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke density: 50 or less for insulation thicknesses up to 1.5 inches. 6. Joints: Seal with manufacturer’s recommended contact adhesive to form continuous water barrier. C. Insulation, Type 2: 1. Insulation material: Preformed mineral fiberglass insulation made from glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. a. In accordance with ASTM C547, Class 1. b. Provide with factory installed vapor barrier. 1) Material: White kraft paper bound to aluminum foil in accordance with ASTM C1136, Type I. 2) Longitudinal lap seals: Pressure-sensitive, self-sealing longitudinal lap strip with factory applied adhesive. 3) Circumferential butt seals: 4-inch wide tape or similar properties or 4-inch wide overlap with adhesive seal. 4) Vapor barrier permeability: 0.02 perms or lower. 5) Vapor barrier flame spread rating: 25 or less. 2. Minimum temperature range: Minus 0 degrees Fahrenheit to plus 850 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. K factor at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Not more than 0.23 BTU-inch/hour-square feet degrees Fahrenheit. 4. Maximum moisture absorption, volume percent: 5. 5. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Fiber Glass. D. Insulation, Type 3: 1. Insulation material: Rigid cellular glass in accordance with ASTM C552, Type II. 2. Temperature range: Minus 450 degrees Fahrenheit to plus 900 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. K factor at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Not more than 0.32 BTU-inch/hour-square feet-degrees Fahrenheit. 4. Minimum average density: 7.5 pounds per cubic foot. 5. Maximum moisture absorption, volume percent: 5. 6. Minimum compressive strength: 87 pounds per square inch. 7. Moisture permeability: 0.00 perm-inch. 8. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, Foamglas. b. Cell-U-Foam Corporation, Ultra-CUF. E. Insulation, Type 4: 1. Insulation material: Asbestos-free, rigid calcium silicate in accordance with ASTM C533; Type I for process temperatures up to 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. K factor at 500 degrees Fahrenheit: 0.55 for Type I. 3. Maximum average (dry) density: 14.5 pounds per cubic foot. 4. Compressive strength: 100 pounds per square inch, to produce a 5-percent compression. October 2016 40_05_06.55-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.55 (FS-100) 5. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: In accordance with ASTM C533 Type I: a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC, Thermo-12 Gold. 2.03 INSULATION JACKETS A. Jacket, Type 1: 1. Material: 28 ounces per square yard polyvinyl chloride on polyester fabric; total thickness 0.028 inches minimum. 2. Fire rating: 25 maximum flame spread, smoke developed 50 or less. 3. Color: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Overlap: 1-inch minimum at joints and fittings. 5. Joint seal: Self-sealing lap tape. 6. Fittings: Factory made with full thickness insulation. 7. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Accessible Products, Techlite Insulation, 379 SSL Series. B. Jacket, Type 2: 1. Material: Ultraviolet-resistant polyvinyl chloride jacketing, 20 mil minimum thickness. 2. Fire rating: 25 maximum flame spread, smoke developed 50 or less. 3. Color: White. 4. Overlap: 1-inch minimum at joints and fittings. 5. Joint seal: PVC solvent welded or adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Fittings: Factory made with full thickness insulation. 7. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Johns Manville, Zeston 2000 PVC. b. Proto Corp., LoSMOKE PVC. c. Speedline Smoke Safe PVC Jacketing System. d. Knauf Covering System. C. Jacket, Type 3: 1. Material: Aluminum, Alloy 5005; 0.016-inch (26 gauge) minimum thickness. 2. Overlap: Overlap circumferential joints 4 inches minimum; overlap longitudinal joints 1-inch minimum; longitudinal joints oriented to minimize water entry. 3. Bands: 0.5 inch wide, 0.0508 inch (16 gauge) thick aluminum, same alloy as jacket or 0.0179 inch thick Type 304 stainless steel; install on 18-inch centers, uniformly spaced and at all fitting joints. 4. Joint seal: Apply waterproof adhesive at joints and overlaps. 5. Fittings: Custom fit of same materials. 6. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Childers Products. b. Premetco International. 2.04 VAPOR BARRIERS A. Vapor barrier, Type 1: 1. Material: White kraft paper bound to aluminum foil in accordance with ASTM C1136, Type 1. 2. Permeability: 0.02 perms or lower. 3. Maximum flame spread rating: 25. October 2016 40_05_06.55-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.55 (FS-100) 4. Edge seal: Pressure-sensitive tape lap seal. 5. Circumferential joints: 4-inch wide tape or 4-inch overlap with adhesive seal. B. Vapor barrier, Type 2: 1. Material: Mastic. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Benjamin Foster, No. 30-76. b. Insul-Coustic, No. I.C.-580. c. Foster Products, 36-10/46-10 Weatherite. d. Childers Products CP10/11 Vi-Acryl. 2.05 RELATED MATERIALS A. Cover adhesive: Premium adhesive as recommended by the insulation cover supplier for heavy-duty service in corrosive, wet environments. Standard-duty adhesives are not permitted. 2.06 REMOVABLE INSULATING BLANKETS A. In piping systems specified to be insulated, use removable insulating blankets for valves, meters, strainers, filters, catalytic converters, engine exhaust silencers, and other in-line piping appurtenances and equipment requiring periodic servicing. B. Size limits: Use removable insulating blankets for equipment and piping appurtenances 3-inch in nominal size and larger. Insulate equipment and piping appurtenances less than 3-inch with molded sections of insulation or by field cutting insulation to conform to the shape of the component and to fit tightly around the component. C. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal: 1. Pittsburgh Corning, Temp-Mat. 2. Accessible Products, Thermazip 2000 Jacket. 3. Thermal Energy Products, Inc., Energy Wrap. D. Low temperature insulating blankets rated up to 800 degrees Fahrenheit: 1. Use: For service temperatures up to 800 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Insulation: Fiberglass fiber, K factor 0.27 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Cover: 17-ounce fabric with both sides covered with silicone-impregnated glass cloth suitable for temperatures up to 800 degrees Fahrenheit. 4. Cover fasteners: Use one of the following systems: a. Grommets in the blanket and stainless steel wire. b. 1-inch wide straps with stainless steel rectangular ring buckles and Velcro on strap tail. E. High temperature insulating blankets rated up to 1,400 degrees Fahrenheit: 1. Rated for sustained service temperatures up to 1,400 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Insulation: Ceramic fiber, K factor 0.50 at 600 degrees Fahrenheit, insulation material suitable for up to 2,300 degrees Fahrenheit, thickness to match adjacent piping insulation specified thickness. 3. Cover: 17-ounce silicone impregnated fiberglass cloth suitable for temperatures up to 1,400 degrees Fahrenheit. October 2016 40_05_06.55-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.55 (FS-100) 4. Cover fasteners: Use one of the following systems: a. Grommets in the blanket and stainless steel wire. b. 1-inch wide straps with stainless steel rectangular ring buckles and Velcro on strap tail. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Before installing insulation, verify satisfactory completion of pressure tests of piping systems and functional tests of heat tracing equipment. B. Examine piping surfaces and verify that surfaces are dry and free of loose scale, rust, dirt, oil, or water before applying insulation. When specified, paint or coat pipe surfaces as specified in Section 09_96_01 before installing insulation. C. Examine insulation materials and accessories before installation. Do not install insulation and jackets that have been damaged or insulation that has become wet. 3.02 INSULATION SCHEDULE Service Designation(1) Location(2) Insulation Type(3) Jacket Type(3) Service Temp. °F(4) Vapor Barrier Hot Water (1W) Interior or Exterior 1 or 2 Type 2 on Exterior installations, none required on Interior installations 100-200 Install on Type 2 insulation Steam (ST), Condensate (C) Interior or Exterior 3 or 4 3 Above 200 Required HVAC Refrigerant Interior or Exterior 1 2 Below 40 Required Cold Water (CW) Interior or Exterior 1 2 Below 40 Required Heat Traced Pipes(7) Exterior 1 or 2 2 Use thickness established in table in Article 2.01 Install on Type 2 insulation Notes: (1) Refer to Piping Schedule in Section 40_05_00.01 for service designations. (2) Insulation jackets are not required for interior installations that are concealed. See definitions for description of concealed locations. (3) Contractor may select from options listed. (4) Unless noted otherwise, use service temperature range provided in this table to establish insulation thickness as required by Table in Article 2.01, Paragraph A. (5) Service temperature based on engine rating. Use Type I calcium silicate for exhaust temperatures up to October 2016 40_05_06.55-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.55 (FS-100) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and jacket materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply insulation in smooth, clean manner with tight and finished smooth joints. Fit insulation tightly against surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of pipe with full-length sections of insulation with a single piece cut to length to complete the run of pipe. Do not use cut pieces or scraps to complete the installation. C. Butt longitudinal and circumferential insulation joints firmly together. D. Maintain the integrity of vapor barrier jacketing. Do not use staples to hold vapor barrier overlaps in place. E. Apply sealant or cement when previous applications of adhesives and cement have thoroughly dried. F. Apply insulation to permit expansion or contraction of pipelines without damage to insulation or jacketing. G. Fittings: 1. Insulate fittings by covering with mitered sections of insulation or utilize factory-made prefabricated fitting shapes. 2. Terminate preformed pipe jackets or covering at sufficient distance from flanges to permit removal of bolts. 3. Overlap flange and flanged fitting insulation on adjacent pipe covering by at least 2 inches. H. Valves: 1. Insulate valves 3-inch in nominal size and larger with removable insulating blankets. 2. Size blanket to extend up to packing gland only so that replacement of packing does not require removal of insulating blanket. I. Provide continuous insulation through and over pipe supports and provide protection saddles at supports. J. Extend insulation against insulation end protection shields or covers so that insulation voids do not exist and provide watertight end seals and covers where insulation terminates. K. Insulate pipeline strainers to permit removal of strainer basket without disturbing insulation on strainer body. L. Provide continuous pipe insulation and covering through sleeves or openings in walls and floors. When buried pipe enters a building through a below grade wall or slab penetration, begin insulation system on interior side of penetration. M. Apply premolded pipe insulation with extended legs when used on pipe traced with either tubing or electric cable type. October 2016 40_05_06.55-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_06.55 (FS-100) N. Thermally isolate all insulation closure locations (end caps, transitions, etc.) Type 1 or 2 jacket installation on piping with potential reach temperatures greater than 150 degrees Fahrenheit. O. Apply piping identification on jackets as specified in Section 40_05_00.03. 3.04 COMMISSIONING AND PROCESS START-UP REQUIREMENTS A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services for each type of piping insulation: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_07.01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.01 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_07.01 PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Supports for pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 3. Section 01_60_00 - Product Requirements. 4. Section 01_78_36 - Warranties and Bonds. 5. Section 05_12_00 - Structural Steel. 6. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 7. Section 46_05_10 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. A380 - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. 3. A967 - Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts. B. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS): 1. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data. 1. Design features. 2. Load capacities. 3. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and Grade. 4. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications. 5. Catalog data. 6. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and accessories or options being furnished. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01_78_36. October 2016 40_05_07.01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.01 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. As specified in Section 01_60_00. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Hot dip galvanized: a. Fabricate as specified in Section 05_12_00. b. Hot dip after fabrication of support in accordance with ASTM A123. c. Repair galvanized surface as specified in Section 05_12_00. 2. Stainless steel. a. Fabricate as specified in Section 05_12_00. b. Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale, and other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface. c. At the shop, perform pickling and passivation on all surfaces inside and out in accordance with ASTM A380 or A967. 1) Passivation treatments using citric acid are not allowed. d. Field welding is prohibited unless specifically allowed by the Owner. All field welds shall be passivated. B. Outdoor areas: Areas exposed to the natural outdoor environment: 1. Hot Dip Galvanized. C. Indoor areas: Areas exposed to an indoor environment including galleries and tunnels: 1. Hot Dip Galvanized. D. Submerged, 3 feet or less above water level in a structure, or inside a water bearing structure: 1. Type 304L Stainless Steel. E. Stainless steel piping system: 1. Type 316 Stainless Steel. F. Chemical containment areas and chemical piping: 1. Type 316 Stainless Steel. G. Fasteners: 1. As specified in Section 05_12_00. 2.03 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Hanger rods: Sized to match suspended pipe hanger, or as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Manufacturers: One of following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Bergen-Power, Figure 133. 2) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 103. October 2016 40_05_07.01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.01 (FS-100) b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 140. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 133. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3205. B. Hanger rods, continuously threaded: Sized to match suspended pipe hanger, or as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Bergen-Power, Figure 94. 2) FM Stainless Fasteners. b. For steel and ductile iron piping: 1) Anvil International, Figure 146. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 94. C. Eye bolts: 1. For stainless steel piping: a. Type 316 stainless steel, welded and rated equal to full load capacity of rod. 2. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: a. Welded and rated equal to full load capacity of rod. D. Welded eyebolt rod: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 101. 2) FM Stainless Fasteners. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 278. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 93. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3210. E. Adjustable ring hangers: MSS SP-58, Type 7 or Type 9 (system dependent): 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 1C.I. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 100SS. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 97. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3172. F. Adjustable clevis hangers: MSS SP-58, Type 1: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc, Figure B3100 or B3102. 2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 60. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 260 or Figure 590. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 100. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3100 or B3102. October 2016 40_05_07.01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.01 (FS-100) G. Adjustable clevis hangers for insulated pipe: Oversize: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 1A. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 300. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 100EL. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. Figure B3108. H. Brackets: MSS SP-58, Type 32 with back plate; rated for 1,500 pounds: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 30M. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3066. 3) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 98. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 195. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3066. I. Standard U-bolt: MSS SP-58, Type 24: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 110. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3188. 3) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 37. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 137. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 283. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3188. J. Riser clamps: MSS SP-58, Type 8: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3373. 2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 61. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 261. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 126. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3373. K. Pipe clamps: MSS SP-58, Type 4: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 3140. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 212. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 175. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3140. October 2016 40_05_07.01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.01 (FS-100) L. Adjustable offset pipe clamp: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3149. 3) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 63. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 100. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3149. M. Offset pipe clamp: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 8. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 3148. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 103. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3148. N. Floor stand or stanchion saddles: MSS SP-58, Type 37. Provided with U-bolt hold down yokes: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 318. 2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 59. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 259. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 125. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3090. c. Threaded pipe stand support stanchion. Match pipe support material. 1) Anvil International, Figure 63T. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 138. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems Inc., Figure B3088ST. O. Spring hangers: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Bergen-Power, Figure 920. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure B-268, Type G. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 920. P. One hole pipe clamps: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Not used. b. For all other piping: 1) Anvil International, Figure 126. 2) Carpenter & Paterson, Figure 237S. October 2016 40_05_07.01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.01 (FS-100) Q. Welded beam attachment: MSS SP-58, Type 22: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 304. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 3083. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 66. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 113A or 113B. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3083. R. Heavy pipe clamp: MSS SP-58, Type 4: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4H. b. For all other piping, unless called out otherwise on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 216. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 298. S. PTFE pipe slide assembly: MSS SP-58, Type 35 with lateral and vertical restraint: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 426. b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 257, Type 3. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3893. T. Anchor bolts, concrete anchors, concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, and sleeve anchors: As specified in Section 05_12_00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Support, suspend, or anchor exposed pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing, or movement of piping; and to prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, blowers, and other equipment. B. Field verify support location, orientation, and configuration to eliminate interferences prior to fabrication of supports. C. Carefully determine locations of inserts. Anchor to formwork prior to placing concrete. D. Use flush shells only where indicated on the Drawings. E. Do not use anchors relying on deformation of lead alloy. F. Do not use powder-actuated fasteners for securing metallic conduit or steel pipe larger than 1 inch to concrete, masonry, or wood. G. Suspend pipe hangers from hanger rods and secure with double nuts. October 2016 40_05_07.01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.01 (FS-100) H. Install continuously threaded hanger rods only where indicated on the Drawings. I. Use adjustable ring hangers or adjustable clevis hangers, for 4 inch and smaller diameter pipe. J. Use adjustable clevis hangers for pipe larger than 4 inches in diameter. K. Secure pipes with double nutted U-bolts or suspend pipes from hanger rods and hangers. 1. For stainless steel piping, use stainless steel U-bolts. 2. For all other piping, use galvanized U-bolts. L. Support spacing: 1. Support 2-inch and smaller piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum 5 feet on center, unless otherwise specified. 2. Support larger than 2-inch piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum 10 feet on center, unless otherwise specified. 3. Support exposed polyvinyl chloride and other plastic pipes at maximum 5 feet on center, regardless of size. 4. Support tubing, PVC pipe 1-inch and smaller, copper pipe and tubing, fiber- reinforced plastic pipe or duct, and rubber hose and tubing at intervals close enough to prevent sagging greater than 1/4 inch between supports. 5. Do not suspend or support valves, pipe, and fittings from another pipe or conduit. M. Install supports at: 1. Any change in direction. 2. Both sides of flexible pipe connections. 3. Base of risers. 4. Floor penetrations. 5. Connections to pumps, blowers, and other equipment. 6. Valves and appurtenances. N. Securely anchor plastic pipe, valves, and headers to prevent movement during operation of valves. O. Anchor plastic pipe between expansion loops and direction changes to prevent axial movement through anchors. P. Provide elbows or tees supported from floors with base fittings where indicated on the Drawings. Q. Support base fittings with metal supports or when indicated on the Drawings support on concrete piers. R. Do not use chains, plumbers' straps, wire, or similar devices for permanently suspending, supporting, or restraining pipes. S. Support plumbing drainage and vents in accordance with plumbing code as specified in Section 01_14_00. October 2016 40_05_07.01-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.01 (FS-100) T. Supports, clamps, brackets, and portions of support system bearing against copper pipe: Copper plated, copper throughout, or isolated with neoprene or polyvinyl chloride tape. U. Where pipe is insulated, install over-sized supports and hangers. V. Install insulation shield in accordance with MSS SP-58, Type 40. Shield shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. W. Install riser clamps at floor penetrations and where indicated on the Drawings. X. Coat support system components as specified in Section 09_96_01. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_07.03-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.03 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_07.03 PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Preformed channel pipe support system consisting of preformed channels, fittings, straps, and fasteners engineered to support piping. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). C. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS): 1. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture. 2. SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design responsibility: 1. The manufacturer of the preformed channel pipe support system is responsible for the design of the support system. 2. Prepare design calculations utilizing the design criteria included in these Specifications. 3. Prepare detailed shop drawings illustrating the layout of the support system and identifying the components of the support system. B. Design criteria: 1. Include live, dead, and seismic loads associated with piping, valves, and appurtenances. Consider the content of the pipes in load calculations. 2. Minimum gauge thickness: 12-gauge. 3. Allowable stress of channels: a. Steel channels: The lesser of 25,000 pounds per square inch, or 0.66 times yield stress of steel. b. Stainless steel channels: 0.66 times the yield stress of the stainless steel alloy. 4. Maximum deflection: 1/240 of span. 5. Allowable column loads: As recommended by manufacturer in published instruction for column's unsupported height and "K" value for calculating effective column length of not less than 1.0. 6. Future loads: a. Support systems indicated on the Drawings may include spaces intended to accommodate future pipes. October 2016 40_05_07.03-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.03 (FS-100) b. Assume such spaces are occupied by 6-inch diameter ductile iron pipes. Only the number of pipes that would physically fit into the space need be considered. c. Include the weight of the pipe contents in determining future loads. Assume pipe contents are water. 7. Seismic design criteria: As specified in Section 01_81_02 as specified for mechanical equipment. 8. Spacing of supports: As required to comply with design requirements but not more than 5 feet. C. Supports below the top of walls of water bearing structures: Use Type 316 stainless steel for support system components. 1. Supports in other locations: Use hot-dipped galvanized components unless other materials are specifically indicated on the Drawings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design preformed channel pipe support system for loads in accordance with applicable provisions of: 1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction. 2. AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual. B. Product standards: 1. Pipe support components: In accordance with MSS SP-69. 2. Pipe support materials: In accordance with MSS SP-58. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fabricate preformed channel pipe support system using, as a minimum, parts specified below and meeting the requirements specified under Design Criteria. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Unistrut, Series P1000 or P1001; P5500 or P5501. b. Allied Support Systems, Power Strut, Figure PS-200 or PS-200 2TS; PS-150 or PS-150 2TS. c. Cooper Industries, B-Line, Channel Type B22 or B22A; B12 or B12A. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed channel concrete inserts: Minimum 12 inches long: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Unistrut, Series P-3200. b. Allied Support Systems, Figure 282. c. Cooper Industries, B-Line Series B32I. October 2016 40_05_07.03-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.03 (FS-100) B. 90-degree angle fittings: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Unistrut, P1026. b. Allied Support Systems, Power Strut, P603. C. Pipe straps: 1. For pipes 8 inches in diameter and smaller: Use 2-piece universal strap with slotted hex head screw and nut. a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Unistrut, Series P1109 through P1126. 2) Allied Support Systems, PS1100. 3) Cooper Industries, B-Line Series B2000. 2. For pipes greater than 8 inches in diameter: Unless different material is otherwise indicated on the Drawings use 1-piece 1 inch wide by 1/8 inch thick steel strap, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 3. For stainless steel pipes: Use type of strap required for the pipe sizes specified above, but use Type 316 stainless steel materials. D. Prefabricated double channel bracket: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Unistrut, P2542-P2546. b. Cooper Industries, B-Line Series B297. E. Touch-up paint for galvanized surfaces: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Galvinox, Galvo-Weld. F. Touch-up paint for painted surfaces: Same formulation as factory paint. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Hot-dip galvanize support system components after fabrication to required length and shape. B. Do not galvanize or paint stainless steel components. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install preformed channel concrete inserts for vertical support, quantity based on manufacturer's structural design calculations. B. Fasten preformed channel pipe supports to existing walls using Z-fittings and concrete anchors as indicated on the Drawings. C. Fasten preformed channel pipe supports to preformed channel concrete inserts embedded in ceiling using U-shaped fittings. D. Suspend threaded rods from concrete inserts embedded in ceiling. Support preformed channel pipe supports with threaded rods. October 2016 40_05_07.03-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_07.03 (FS-100) E. Touchup cut or damaged galvanized surfaces. F. Prevent contact between pipes and support components of dissimilar metals. Utilize rubber coated, plastic coated, or vinyl coated components, stainless steel components, or wrap pipe with PVC or polyethylene tape. G. Install support as near as possible to concentrated loads. H. Install support within 2 feet of horizontal and vertical changes in pipe alignment. I. Adjust supports or install shims to obtain specified slope or elevation. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_17.05-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_17.05 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_17.05 COPPER WATER TUBE: SEAMLESS, ASTM B88 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Copper water tube-seamless, ASTM B 88. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 40_05_07.01 - Pipe Supports. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 2. B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 3. B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube. 4. B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fitting. B. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO): 1. IS 3 - Installation Standard for Copper Plumbing Tube, Pipe and Fittings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop drawings. C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Seamless copper water tube: 1. Type: ASTM B88: a. Exposed copper piping or tubing: Type L hard-drawn, rigid. b. Copper tubing buried in the ground or in plastic conduit: Type K soft-annealed. October 2016 40_05_17.05-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_17.05 (FS-100) 2. Fittings: Manufacturers: Solder type forged, or wrought copper. One of the following or equal: a. Hoke, Gyrolok. b. Crawford Fitting Company, Swagelok. c. Parker. 3. Solder: ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sb5. 4. Flux: ASTM B813. 5. Dielectric insulating unions or fittings: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Mueller Company. b. Watts Series 3001A. 6. Special thread to tube adapters: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Crawford Fitting Company, Swagelok. b. Hoke, Gyrolok. c. Parker. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Support copper piping and tubing as specified in Section 40_05_07.01. 2. Clean copper lines with high-pressure air after first disconnecting piping at instruments, filters, pressure reducers, valve operators, and other special devices. 3. Install copper pipe in accordance with IAPMO IS 3. B. Installation of copper piping: 1. Connect copper pipe connected to ferrous pipe or valves, or other non-copper items, by means of dielectric insulating unions or fittings. 2. Where connections are made to meters or other devices having iron pipe size threaded fittings, provide special thread to tube adapters. C. Installation of copper tubing: 1. Install copper tubing in accordance with ASTM B828 and IAPMO IS 3. 2. Install copper tubing in straight runs, supported at intervals close enough to avoid sagging. 3. Make cuts square with a tubing cutter or with a 32-tooth hacksaw. a. Provide a sizing tool to correct distortions. 4. Ream the inside of the tubing and remove burrs from the outside, holding the end of the tubing downward and preventing chips and fillings from entering the tubing. 5. Perform flaring with a flare block and yoke type screw feed flaring tool: a. After removing the tubing from the flare block, inspect both surfaces of the flare for splits, cracks, or other imperfections. b. Where there are imperfections, cut off the imperfect flare, and prepare a new flare. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test copper lines in the same manner as the piping system to which they connect. October 2016 40_05_17.05-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_17.05 (FS-100) 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. Manufacturer Rep Onsite Source Testing (Witnessed or Non-witnessed) Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Process Operational Period Maintenance (hrs per session) Operation (hrs per session) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Non-witnessed Not required Not required Not required Not required END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_17.07-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_17.07 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_17.07 COPPER TUBE: SEAMLESS, ASTM B280 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Copper tube-seamless, ASTM B 280. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 40_05_07.01 - Pipe Supports. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 2. B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 3. B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fitting. B. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO): 1. IS 3 - Installation Standard for Copper Plumbing Tube, Pipe, and Fittings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop drawings. C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Seamless copper tubing for air conditioning and refrigeration field service: 1. Type: ASTM B280, USN Alloy C12200, outside diameter sized, minimum wall thickness in accordance with ASTM B280. 2. Fittings: Solder fittings or brass flared fittings. 3. ASTM B280 copper tubing may be bundled into groups of parallel or spirally cabled tubes with a plastic sheath. 4. Solder: In accordance with ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sb5. October 2016 40_05_17.07-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_17.07 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Support copper tubing as specified in Section 40_05_07.01. 2. Clean copper lines with high-pressure air after first disconnecting piping at instruments, filters, pressure reducers, valve operators, and other special devices. 3. Install copper pipe in accordance with IAPMO IS 3. B. Installation of copper tubing: 1. Install copper tubing in accordance with ASTM B828 and IAPMO IS 3. 2. Install copper tubing in straight runs, supported at intervals close enough to avoid sagging. 3. Make cuts square with a tubing cutter or with a 32-tooth hacksaw. a. Provide a sizing tool to correct distortions. 4. Ream the inside of the tubing and remove burrs from the outside, holding the end of the tubing downward and preventing chips and fillings from entering the tubing. 5. Perform flaring with a flare block and yoke type screw feed flaring tool: a. After removing the tubing from the flare block, inspect both surfaces of the flare for splits, cracks, or other imperfections. b. Where there are imperfections, cut off the imperfect flare and prepare a new flare. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test copper lines in the same manner as the piping system to which they connect. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. Manufacturer Rep Onsite Source Testing (Witnessed or Non-witnessed) Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Process Operational Period Maintenance (hrs per session) Operation (hrs per session) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each October 2016 40_05_17.09-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_17.09 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_17.09 COPPER PIPE: ASTM B302 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Copper pipe, ASTM B 302. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 40_05_07.01 - Pipe Supports. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B302 - Standard Specification for Threadless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. B. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO): 1. IS 3 - Installation Standard for Copper Plumbing Tube, Pipe, and Fittings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop drawings. C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Copper pipe: 1. Type: ASTM B302. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Support copper piping as specified in Section 40_05_07.01. October 2016 40_05_17.09-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_17.09 (FS-100) 2. Clean copper lines with high-pressure air after first disconnecting piping at instruments, filters, pressure reducers, valve operators, and other special devices. 3. Install copper pipe in accordance with IAPMO IS 3. B. Installation of copper piping: 1. Connect copper pipe connected to ferrous pipe or valves, or other non-copper items, by means of dielectric insulating unions or fittings. 2. Where connections are made to meters or other devices having iron pipe size threaded fittings, provide special thread to tube adapters. C. Provide air relief valves at high points in the lines. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test copper lines in the same manner as the piping system to which they connect. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. Manufacturer Rep Onsite Source Testing (Witnessed or Non-witnessed) Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Process Operational Period Maintenance (hrs per session) Operation (hrs per session) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Non-witnessed Not required Not required Not required Not required END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_19.01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_19.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE: AWWA C151 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Ductile iron pipe, joints, fittings, gaskets, and pipe linings and coatings. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 4. Section 40_05_00.01 - Common Work Results for General Process Piping. 5. Section 40_05_06.03 - Pipe Couplings and External Joint Restraints. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C104 - Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2. C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 3. C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. 4. C111 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 5. C115 - Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. 6. C150 - Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. 7. C151 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. 8. C600 - Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 9. C606 - Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints. C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. D11.2 - Guide for Welding Iron Castings. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A47 - Standard Specifications for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2. A183 - Standard Specifications for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts. 3. A536 - Standard Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings. 4. C283 - Standard Test Methods for Resistance of Porcelain Enameled Utensils to Boiling Acid. 5. D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement. E. Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (DIPRA): 1. Thrust Restraint Design Manual. October 2016 40_05_19.01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) F. NACE International (NACE): 1. SP0188 - Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. G. National Association of Pipe Fabricators, Inc. (NAPF): 1. 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings. H. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. PA-2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness With Magnetic Gages. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Thrust restraint system design: 1. Design restrained joint thrust restraint system. 2. Determine the length of pipe that must be restrained on each side of the focus of a thrust load in accordance with the procedures and criteria established by the DIPRA Thrust Restraint Design Manual as specified in Piping Schedule in Section 40_05_00.01 and the following additional criteria: a. Design pressure: Test pressure. b. Laying condition: Type 5 in accordance with AWWA C150. c. Soil designation: Silt 1 as defined by DIPRA. d. Unit friction resistance: Based upon polyethylene encasement of pipe. e. Safety factor: 1.5 (for thrust restraint calculations only). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detailed layout drawings showing alignment of pipes, location of valves, fittings, and appurtenances, types of joints, connections to structures, and thrust restraint system layouts. 2. Thrust restraint systems: Calculations and layout for restrained joint thrust restraint systems. 3. Photographs, drawings, and descriptions of fittings, gaskets, couplings, grooving of pipe and fittings, pipe linings, and coatings. C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1. Manufacturer's test reports for polyurethane lining certifying successful performance of holiday detection tests. a. This documentation shall identify each piece by mark designation, and show the actual test results during the final inspection by the manufacturer prior to shipment. b. Acceptance criteria for glass lining shall be as specified under Field Quality Control. 2. Manufacturer’s test results for glass lined pipe-certifying compliance with specified material requirements for glass lining. 3. Include Coating Manufacturer’s Technical Representative’s reports. October 2016 40_05_19.01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Lining manufacturers: For piping specified to receive glass or epoxy lining, use only a lining manufacturer having a minimum of 5 years experience supplying this type of product to the wastewater and water industry. 2. Welded on outlets: The pipe manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the fabrication and testing of outlets of similar size and configuration similar to those used on the Project. B. Pre-installation meeting: 1. Arrange for Coating Manufacturer’s Technical Representative to attend preconstruction conferences, and to make periodic visits to factory or shop to inspect surface preparation of pipe, fittings, and accessories; and to inspect application of linings to interior and coatings to exterior of pipe, fittings, and accessories. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Block piping and associated fittings for shipment to prevent damage to coatings and linings. B. Carefully handle piping and associated fittings during loading, unloading, and installation. 1. Do not drop piping material from cars or trucks. 2. Lower piping by mechanical means. 3. Do not drop or pound pipe to fit grade. C. Polyurethane lined pipe and fittings must be handled only from the outside. 1. No forks, chains, straps, hooks, or other lifting device shall be placed inside the pipe or fittings for lifting, positioning, or laying. D. Protect gaskets and polyethylene encasement from long-term exposure to sunlight. E. Store piping, fittings, and other accessories such that they do not accumulate and hold rainwater, dirt, and debris. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Ductile iron piping: 1. Typical type: a. In accordance with AWWA C150 and AWWA C151. b. Pressure class or special thickness class as indicated in the Piping Schedule provided in Section 40_05_00.01. c. Manufactured from greater than 90 percent recycled material. October 2016 40_05_19.01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) 2. Type with screw-on flanges: a. In accordance with AWWA C115 with minimum special thickness Class 53 wall thickness as required for screw-on flanges. b. Special thickness class as indicated in the Piping Schedule as specified in Section 40_05_00.01. c. Manufactured from greater than 90 percent recycled material. 3. Type with grooved couplings: a. Special thickness class as indicated in the Piping Schedule as specified in Section 40_05_00.01. b. Manufactured from greater than 90 percent recycled material. B. Joints: 1. Flanged joints: a. Screw-on flanges: Comply with the diameter, thickness, drilling, and other characteristics in accordance with ASME B16.1. In addition, comply with the following requirements: 1) Ductile iron. 2) Long hub, threaded, and specially designed for ductile iron pipe. 3) After attaching to pipe, machine flange face to make pipe end and flange even and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. b. Bolt holes on flanges: 2-holed and aligned at both ends of pipe. c. Cap screw or stud bolt holes: Tapped. d. Bolts and nuts: As specified in Section 40_05_00.01. e. Gaskets: Standard styrene butadiene copolymer (SBR) unless specified otherwise in Section 40_05_00.01. 2. Grooved joints: In accordance with AWWA C606, as complemented and modified below, radius-cut type, with following components: a. Couplings: Rigid type, cast from ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, or malleable iron in accordance with ASTM A47, Grade 32510. b. Bolts and nuts: In accordance with ASTM A183, Grade 2. c. Gaskets: Capable of being applied on surface of piping with cavities to provide for an improved seal with the internal piping pressure. Material to be used for following services: 1) For liquid service: NBR. 2) For air service: Fluoroelastomer. 3) For hot water service: EPDM. d. Fittings: In accordance with AWWA C606, rigid radius-cut groove: 1) Center-to-center dimensions: In accordance with AWWA C110. 2) Wall thickness and other characteristics: In accordance with AWWA C606. e. Flanged unit connections: Flanged to grooved joint adapters or a long enough spool with one end flanged and the other end grooved to prevent interference with the operation of adjacent valves, pumps, or other items. 3. Mechanical joints: In accordance with AWWA C111. 4. Push-on rubber gasket joints: In accordance with AWWA C111. 5. Integrally restrained mechanical joints: a. Application: 1) Where designation Mech Rest. 2) MJ is specified in the Piping Schedule provided in Section 40_05_00.01, supply a restrained mechanical joint piping October 2016 40_05_19.01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) system, which includes restrained mechanical joints where necessary based upon thrust calculations. 3) Standard mechanical joints as specified above can be used where thrust calculations demonstrate restraint is not required. b. Design: 1) Integral retainer weldment type or lugged type joint with Type 304 stainless steel rods and nuts. 2) Restrained mechanical joints of the configuration which utilizes a gripping or friction force for restraint will not be acceptable. c. Manufacturers: Where restrained mechanical joints are required, use one of the following or equal: 1) American Cast Iron Pipe Company, MJ Coupled Joint. 2) Pacific States Cast Iron Pipe Company, Lock Mechanical Joint. 3) U.S. Pipe, Bolt-Lok. 4) U.S. Pipe, Mech-Lok. 6. Integrally restrained push-on joints: a. Application: 1) Where designation restrained push-on is specified in the Piping Schedule provided in Section 40_05_00.01, supply a restrained push-on joint piping system, which includes restrained push-on joints where necessary based upon thrust calculations. 2) Standard push-on rubber gasket joints as specified above can be used where thrust calculations demonstrate restraint is not required. b. Design: 1) Restrained push-on joints of the configuration which utilizes a gripping or friction force for restraint will not be acceptable. 2) Suitable for the following working pressures: a) For 4- through 24-inch pipe: 350 pounds per square inch gauge. b) For 30- through 54-inch pipe: 250 pounds per square inch gauge. c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) U.S. Pipe, TR Flex. 2) McWane Ductile, TR Flex. 3) American Cast Iron Pipe Company, Flex Ring or Lok-Ring. d. Limit buried joints to half the manufacturer’s published allowable angular joint deflection for purposes of pipeline alignment and elimination of fittings. 7. Push-on joint restraint harnesses: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) EBAA Iron, Inc., Megalug Series 1700. 2) Star Pipe Products, Split Stargrip Series 3100S. b. Materials: 1) Restraint and backup ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. 2) Wedges and wedge actuating components: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. a) Wedges shall be heat treated to a minimum of 370 BHN. 3) Actuating bolts and nuts: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. a) Provide torque-limiting twist off components to ensure proper installation. 4) Tie rods: Low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. October 2016 40_05_19.01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) c. Coatings: 1) Provide manufacturer applied coating system. 2) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) EBAA Iron Inc., Mega-Bond. b) Star Pipe Products, Star-Bond. d. Working pressure: 1) Shall include a minimum safety factor of 2:1. 2) For sizes 3- through 16-inch: 350 pounds per square inch. 3) For sizes 18- through 48-inch: 250 pounds per square inch. e. Restraint shall consist of a backup ring behind the ductile iron bell and a restraint ring consisting of multiple gripping wedges connected with number and type of tie rods as recommended by the manufacturer. f. Restraint shall allow post assembly deflection of a minimum of 50 percent of the deflection capability of the push-on joint. C. Fittings: 1. Ductile iron in accordance with AWWA C110. 2. Joint type: Same as that of the associated piping as specified in Section 40_05_00.01. 3. Plain end-to-flanged joint connectors using setscrews are not acceptable. D. Pipe linings: 1. Cement-mortar lining: a. In accordance with AWWA C104, apply cement-mortar on clean bare metal surfaces. Extend to faces of flanges, ends of spigots, and shoulders of hubs. b. Minimum lining thickness: Standard in accordance with AWWA C104. c. Type of cement: Type II. 2. Asphaltic seal coat: a. Apply over cement mortar linings and to outside surface of pipes that will not receive another coating. Apply in accordance with AWWA C151. 3. Elastomeric polyurethane (100 percent solids) lining: a. As specified in Section 09_96_01. 4. Ceramic epoxy lining: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) PROTECTO 401. 2) SP-2000W. b. Material: Amine cured Novolac epoxy containing at least 20 percent by volume of ceramic quartz pigment. c. Minimum dry film thickness (DFT): 40 mills. d. Application: 1) The lining shall only be applied by a manufacturer-authorized representative with no less than 5 years of experience in applying the specified material. 2) The application of the lining shall be preformed in accordance with manufacturer’s published specifications. 3) Pipe and fittings shall be delivered to application facility with no interior lining. 4) Interior of pipe shall be abrasive blasted per manufacturer’s specifications. October 2016 40_05_19.01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) e. Coverage: 1) Gasket and spigot ends-on joints: Provide 6 mils minimum and 10 mils maximum coverage using joint compound as specified by the manufacturer for the gasket area and spigot ends. 2) Mechanical joints: Extend lining from spigot end to edge of gauging ring. 3) Number of coats: As recommended by the lining manufacturer. f. Source quality control: 1) Test pipe and fitting lining with a magnetic film thickness gauge. Perform testing in accordance with the method outlined in SSPC PA-2 Film Thickness Rating. 2) Test lining integrity of pipes using a holiday detection testing instrument set at the voltage as specified by the coating manufacturer: a) Repair all holidays with joint compound in accordance with the recommendations of the coating manufacturer, and re-test. 3) Discard piping or reline piping when pinholes or discontinuities are found. 5. Glass lining: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Water Works Manufacturing, Ferrock MEH-32 Lining. 2) Vitco Corporation, SG-14 Lining. b. Material: Special glasses and inorganic materials suited for lining of sewage, sludge, and scum piping with the following characteristics: 1) Thickness: 0.008 to 0.012 inch. 2) Hardness: 5 to 6 on the Mohs Scale. 3) Density: 2.5 to 3.0 grams per cubic centimeter, measured in accordance with ASTM D792. 4) Thermal shock resistance: Capable of withstanding 350 degrees Fahrenheit change from 430 degrees Fahrenheit to 80 degrees Fahrenheit without crazing, blistering, or spalling. 5) Gloss retention: Capable of retaining gloss after immersion in an 8 percent sulfuric acid solution at 148 degrees Fahrenheit for 10 minutes. 6) Weight loss: Maximum 3 milligrams per square inch when tested in accordance with ASTM C283. c. Fabrication: 1) Use piping that is suitable for glass lining with minimum Class 53 wall thickness after application of glass lining. 2) Machine interior of pipe. Bore or grit blast in accordance with NAPF 500-03 prior to application of glass lining. 3) Screw factory assembled flanges on pipe, align boltholes, and flange faces, unless otherwise specified. 4) Apply lining to surfaces free of chemicals. 5) Place piping in furnaces specially designed for heating piping until glass melts and fuses with an integral molecular bond to the base metal. October 2016 40_05_19.01-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) E. Coatings: 1. Asphalt varnish: Factory applied. 2. Primer: a. Factory applied for field coating. b. Compatible with materials as specified in Section 09_96_01. 2.02 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT A. General: 1. Polyethylene encasement shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer. B. Materials: Supply one of the following polyethylene encasements: 1. 2 layers of linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) film, minimum thickness of 8 mils in accordance with AWWA C105; or 2. Single layer of high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene (HDCLPE) film, minimum thickness of 4 mils in accordance with AWWA C105. 3. Single layer of V-Bio® enhanced polyethylene encasement (3 layers of co- extruded LLDPE film with anti-microbial additive and volatile corrosion inhibitor infused on the inside surface), meeting all requirements of AWWA C105. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install ductile iron piping in accordance with AWWA C600, modified as specified in Section 40_05_00.01. 2. For underground piping, the trenching, backfill, and compaction: As specified in Section 31_23_17. B. Polyethylene encasement: 1. Wrap all buried ductile iron pipe and fittings in 2 layers of loose low density polyethylene wrap or a single layer of high-density polyethylene wrap in accordance with AWWA C105. 2. Polyethylene encasement shall be continuous and terminated neatly at connections to below grade equipment or structures. 3. At wall penetrations, extend encasement to the wall and neatly terminate. 4. At slab penetrations, extend encasement to 2 inches below the top of slab and neatly terminate. 5. When rising vertically in unimproved areas, extend encasement 6 inches above existing grade and neatly terminate. 6. Repair tears and make joints with 2 layers of plastic tape. 7. All work shall be inspected prior to backfilling of pipe and associated items. C. Joints: 1. Install types of joints as specified in the piping schedule provided in Section 40_05_00.01. 2. Mechanical joints are not acceptable in above ground applications. 3. Field closure for restrained push-on pipe: a. Locate field closures in areas where thrust calculations demonstrate restraint is not required. October 2016 40_05_19.01-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) 4. Grooved joints: a. Install piping with grooved joints where specified in the piping schedule as specified in Section 40_05_00.01 or indicated on the Drawings. b. Assemble grooved joints in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. c. Support grooved-end pipe in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 1) Install at least 1 support between consecutive couplings. D. Tapping ductile iron pipe: 1. Direct tapping of ductile iron pipe may be performed but is limited to the following conditions: a. Maximum allowable tap diameter by pipe diameter and pressure class: Pipe Size (inches) Pressure Class 150 200 250 300 350 Maximum Allowable Direct Tap Size (inches) 3 - - - - 3/4 4 - - - - 3/4 6 - - - - 1 8 - - - - 1 10 - - - - 1 12 - - - - 1-1/4 14 - - 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 16 - - 1-1/2 2 2 18 - - 2 2 2 20 - - 2 2 2 24 - 2 2 2 2 b. The maximum allowable tap diameter for pipelines greater than 24 inches is 2 inches. c. Two layers of 3-mil thread sealant are required to minimize the torque required to effect a watertight connection. 2. Direct tapping of glass lined ductile iron pipe may be performed only when approved in writing by the Engineer. Direct tapping of glass lined pipe shall be performed in accordance with the above conditions for tapping ductile iron pipe in addition to the following conditions: a. Drilling and tapping shall be performed using a hole saw. 1) Use of a large drill bit is not acceptable. b. As the hole saw approaches the glass lining, lessen the inward pressure to avoid excess chipping or cracking of the lining. October 2016 40_05_19.01-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) c. Minor chipping or spalling of the glass lining shall be repaired using an epoxy resin “glass repair kit” provided by the fabricator. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Devoe - Devran 224 HS. b) Sherwin-Williams Co. – Sher-Tile High Solids Epoxy. 2) Repair kit use is only allowed for areas of damage less than 1/2 inch in diameter. a) Larger areas of damage will require replacement. 3) Surface shall be prepared and repair kit shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer and/or fabricator’s instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing ductile iron piping: 1. Test as specified in Section 40_05_00.01. 2. Do not test sections longer than 1/2 mile in total pipe length. B. Repair damaged cement mortar lining to match quality, thickness, and bonding of original lining in accordance with AWWA C104. 1. When lining cannot be repaired or repairs are defective, replace defective piping with undamaged piping. C. Verify that interior surfaces of glass lined pipe and fittings have continuous coverage: 1. Verify with low voltage wet sponge holiday detector in accordance with NACE SP0188. 2. Discard glass lined ductile iron piping and fittings with voids or casting anomalies. that exceed the maximum non-visible pinholes allowances below: Diameter Maximum Pinholes Fittings Pipe (per 20-foot length of pipe) 4- to 8-inch 3-5 10-12 10- to 18-inch 5-8 18-20 20-inch and Larger 8-10 25-28 3. Discard lined piping and fittings found to have pinholes, crazing, or fish scales, which expose the metal substrate. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. October 2016 40_05_19.01-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.01 (FS-100) Manufacturer Rep Onsite Source Testing (Witnessed or Non- witnessed) Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Process Operational Period Maintenance (hrs per session) Operation (hrs per session) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Non-witnessed Not required Not required Not required Not required END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_19.06-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.06 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_19.06 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE: ASTM A74 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Cast iron soil piping and acid resistant cast iron soil piping. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 09_96_01 - High Performance Coatings. 3. Section 40_05_00.01 - Common Work Results for General Process Piping. 4. Section 40_05_00.09 - Piping Systems Testing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 2. A888 - Standard Specifications for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe Applications. 3. C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: As specified in Section 40_05_00.01. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cast iron soil piping, underground: 1. Cast iron soil pipe underground: Bell-and-spigot service weight cast iron soil pipe in accordance with ASTM A74. 2. Make joints by using positive double seal compression type gaskets in accordance with ASTM C564. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. B. Cast iron soil piping, aboveground: 1. Piping: As specified for cast iron soil piping underground, or "No Hub" cast iron soil pipe and fittings: a. Couplings for no hub cast iron soil piping: Consisting of a stainless steel corrugated shield and clamp assembly over a molded 1-piece neoprene sealing sleeve, in accordance with ASTM A888. October 2016 40_05_19.06-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.06 (FS-100) 2. Threaded joints: American standard taper screw threads, cut clean and made up with Teflon tape or an acceptable paste thread compound applied to the male threads only. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. C. Acid resistant cast iron piping: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. The Duriron Company, Inc., Dayton, Ohio. b. Provide substitutes from other manufacturers with same chemical properties and weight equal or heavier than the weight of Duriron piping. 2. Make joints of stainless steel mechanical connectors with Teflon and neoprene liner, or with rope packing recommended by manufacturer. 3. Joints and fittings used for digester gas piping: Split flange type. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Lining and coating: 1. Line cast iron soil pipe and fittings inside and coat outside with bituminous coating except as follows: a. Outside of piping, provide aboveground piping with uncoated outside where piping is specified to be painted as specified in Section 09_96_01. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Cast iron soil piping: 1. Encase in concrete underground cast iron soil piping under structures. a. Encase pipe as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Support aboveground horizontal cast iron soil piping at not more than 5-foot spacing. 3. Aboveground vertical cast iron soil piping: a. Install vertical piping in chases in the wall where the wall is plastered; where the wall is not plastered, vertical piping may be installed in chases in the wall or may be run exposed. b. Support vertical pipes at the base and at each floor. 4. Fittings: a. Make junctions with sanitary tees or with wyes, with brass screw plug cleanouts at accessible locations at changes in direction. b. Make changes in pipe size with reducing fittings. c. Make changes in direction by use of 45 degree wyes, half wyes, long sweep 1/4 bends, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, except that sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks; short 1/4 bends or elbows 3 inches in size or larger may be used on soil or waste lines where the change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical, and on the discharge from water closets. d. Cleanouts: Same size as the pipe, except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. October 2016 40_05_19.06-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_19.06 (FS-100) B. Acid-resistant cast iron piping: 1. Where rope packing is used, caulk packing into half the depth of the hub. a. Ram packing well in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. b. After ramming, fill the joints with lead and caulk in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. c. Preheat hubs before pouring lead. 2. Do not use hemp packing and jute packing for joints of acid resistant piping. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test as specified in Sections 40_05_00.01 and 40_05_00.09. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_31.01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.01 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_31.01 PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 40_05_00.01 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 4. Section 40_05_00.09 - Piping Systems Testing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.12 - Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials For Wire and Cable. 2. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 3. D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 4. D1869 - Standard Specification for Rubber Rings for Asbestos-Cement Pipe. 5. D2412 - Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading. 6. D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 7. D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 8. D2513 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings. 9. D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 10. D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 11. D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 12. D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 13. D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 14. D3261 - Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing. 15. D3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipes and Fittings Materials. October 2016 40_05_31.01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.01 (FS-100) 16. D4101 - Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. 17. F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 18. F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 19. F441 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. 20. F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 21. F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 22. F645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of Thermoplastic Water-Pressure Piping Systems. 23. F679 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 24. F714 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter. C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 Inches to 12 Inches (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Transmission Distribution. D. NSF International (NSF). E. Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI): 1. TR 31 - Underground Installation of Polyolefin Piping. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene. B. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride. C. DR: Dimension ratio. D. DWV: Drain, waste, and vent. E. ID: Inside diameter of piping or tubing. F. NPS: Nominal pipe size followed by the size designation. G. NS: Nominal SIZE of piping or tubing. H. PE: Polyethylene. I. PP: Polypropylene. J. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. K. SDR: Standard dimension ratio; the outside diameter divided by the pipe wall thickness. October 2016 40_05_31.01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.01 (FS-100) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Describe materials, pipe, fittings, gaskets, and solvent cement. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Polyethylene pipe submittals: Include: a. Installation equipment including details on fusion machine used to join polyethylene pipe sections. b. Qualifications of installation crew for use of the fusion machine used for joining polyethylene pipe. C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. Include as applicable: 1. Date of manufacture of plastic pipe and tubing for each lot delivered. 2. Solvent cement manufacturer's report and certification. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fusion machine technician qualifications: 1-year experience in the installation of similar PE piping systems from the same manufacturer. B. Plastic pipe in potable water applications: Provide pipe and tubing bearing NSF seal. C. Mark plastic pipe with nominal size, type, class, schedule, or pressure rating, manufacturer and all markings required in accordance with ASTM and AWWA standards. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect piping materials from sunlight, scoring, and distortion. B. Do not allow surface temperatures on pipe and fittings to exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Store and handle PE pipe and fittings as recommended by manufacturer in published instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Extruding and molding material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards. October 2016 40_05_31.01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.01 (FS-100) B. Fittings: Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating, except that fittings used in drain, waste, and vent piping systems need not be pressure rated. C. Unions 2-1/2 inches and smaller: Socket end screwed unions. Make unions 3 inches and larger of socket flanges with 1/8-inch full-face soft EPDM gasket. 2.02 PVC PIPING, SCHEDULE TYPE A. Materials: 1. PVC Pipe: Designation PVC 1120 in accordance with ASTM D1785 and appendices: a. Pipe and fittings: Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454-B material in accordance with ASTM D1784. b. PVC Pipe: Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Fittings: a. Supplied by pipe manufacturer. b. Pressure fittings: In accordance with ASTM D2466 or ASTM D2467. c. DWV fittings: In accordance with ASTM D2665. 3. Solvent cement: In accordance with ASTM D2564: a. Chemical service: For CPVC or PVC pipe in chemical service, provide the following primer and cement, or equal: 1) Primer: IPS Corp Type P70. 2) Cement: IPS Corp Type 724 cement or another cement certified by the manufacturer for chemical service. 2.03 PVC GRAVITY SEWER PIPING A. Materials: 1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) gravity sewer pipe and fittings: In accordance with ASTM D3034 for piping NPS 15 and smaller diameter, and to ASTM F679 for piping NPS 18 and larger diameter: a. Referenced standards apply as complemented and modified in this Section. b. Fittings: Supplied by the pipe manufacturer. 2. PVC compounds: Class Number 12454-C, in accordance with ASTM D1784: a. Stabilizers, antioxidants, lubricants, colorants, and other additives and fillers: Not to exceed 10 parts by weight per 100 of PVC resin in the compound. 3. Pipe NPS 15 and smaller diameter: Wall thickness SDR 26: a. Joints: Push-on joints in accordance with ASTM D3212. 4. Fittings, including wyes, tees, elbow caps, plug adapters, and manhole waterstops: Same wall thickness as the pipe: a. Fittings: Factory molded with joints and gaskets equal to those of the pipe. 5. Gasket: Neoprene in accordance with ASTM D3212 or ASTM F477: a. Keep rubber gasket in place during pipe joining. 6. Gasket for connection to manhole: Stainless steel clamp with gasket or similar device to seal the penetration. October 2016 40_05_31.01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.01 (FS-100) 2.04 CPVC PIPING A. Materials: 1. CPVC pipe: Schedule 40 or Schedule 80, as specified, in accordance with ASTM F441 and Appendix, CPVC 4120: a. Pipe: Extruded from Type IV, Grade 1, Class 23447 material in accordance with ASTM D1784. b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. 2) Eslon Thermoplastics, Inc. 3) GF Harvel. 2. Fittings: In accordance with ASTM F438 or ASTM F439 for pressure fittings, as appropriate to the service and pressure requirement: a. Fittings: Supplied by the pipe manufacturer. b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Colonial Engineering. 2) Eslon Thermoplastics, Inc. 3) Chemtrol. 4) Spears Manufacturing Company; or equal. 3. Solvent cement: In accordance with ASTM F493: a. For CPVC pipe in chemical service, utilize IPS Corp Type 724 cement or another cement certified by the manufacturer for high strength hypochlorite service. 2.05 PP PIPING A. Materials: 1. Pipe: Schedule 40 dimensions, extruded from Type I-19509 material in accordance with ASTM D4101. 2. Fittings: Molded from the same material and same laying length in accordance with ASME B 16.12: a. Fittings: Manufactured by pipe manufacturer. 2.06 PE TUBING AND FITTINGS A. Materials: 1. Small bore PE tubing: Black flexible virgin PE tubing, OD copper tubing size. a. Plastic tubing ID as follows: 1) For NS 1/4 inch, ID of 0.170 inch. 2) For NS 5/16 inch, ID of 0.187 inch. 3) For NS 3/8 inch, ID of 0.251 inch. 4) For NS of 1/2 inch, an ID of 0.375 inch. 2. Fittings: Compression fittings, Dekoron E-Z; or equal. 3. Protective sheath: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Dekoron, "Poly-Cor." 2) Parker Hannifin Corp./Fluidconnector Products, Parflex Division, Multitube. 4. Plug-in fittings for connection to instruments: Brass quick-connect fittings. October 2016 40_05_31.01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.01 (FS-100) 2.07 POLYETHYLENE PIPING FOR DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS A. General: 1. Pipe and fittings: High-density polyethylene. 2. Dimensions of pipe and fittings: Based on controlled outside diameter in accordance with ASTM F714: a. SDR: Maximum of 11. B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. DuPont, Sclairpipe. 2. Polaris, Duratuff; or equal. C. Pipe, fittings, and adapters: Furnished by the same manufacturer, and compatible with components in the same system and with components of other systems to which connected. D. Materials: 1. Polyethylene: In accordance with ASTM D1248, Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34; listed by the Plastic Pipe Institute under the designation PE 3408; and have a minimum cell classification, in accordance with ASTM D3350. 2. Pipe and fittings: Manufactured from material with the same cell classification. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. PVC piping, Schedule Type: 1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D1785. B. PVC gravity sewer piping: 1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D3034. Also mark the production control code on pipe and fittings. C. CPVC piping: 1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM F441. D. PP piping: 1. Test samples and testing: Cut test samples of pipe, 6 inches long, from full length sections and test by the method outlined in accordance with ASTM D2412: a. Deflect pipe at least 35 percent without failure. Stiffness at 5 percent deflection equals or exceeds 55 pounds per square inch after the test samples have been immersed in a 5 percent solution by weight of sulfuric acid and n-Heptain for a period of 24 hours prior to testing. b. Failure is defined as rupture of the pipe wall. c. Stiffness factor may be computed by the method outlined in accordance with ASTM D2412 or by dividing the load in pounds per linear inch by the deflection in inches and 5 percent deflection. October 2016 40_05_31.01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.01 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Where not otherwise specified, install piping in accordance with ASTM F645, or manufacturer's published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable to the particular type of piping. 2. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from plastic to metal or IPS pipe. Do not thread plastic pipe. 3. Locate unions where indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere where required for adequate access and assembly of the piping system. 4. Provide serrated nipples for transition from plastic pipe to rubber hose. B. Installation of PVC piping, Schedule Type: 1. Solvent weld joints in accordance with ASTM D2855: a. For PVC pipe in chemical service use IPS Corp. Type 724 cement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. C. Installation of PVC gravity sewer piping: 1. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, as modified and complemented in this Section. 2. Install pipe and fittings not later than 4 months after their manufacture. 3. Provide for contraction and expansion at joints with a gasket ring. 4. Provide plugs or caps for stubs and branch pipes left unconnected to laterals. 5. Lubricate and assemble joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's published instructions. 6. Make connections to manholes with a manhole gasket that prevents infiltration and exfiltration through the penetrations: a. Provide opening for connection large enough to allow subsequent grouting around the manhole gasket. b. Grout around the manhole gasket and seal the opening. D. Installation of CPVC piping: 1. Clean dirt and moisture from pipe and fittings. 2. Bevel pipe ends in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with chamfering tool or file. Remove burrs. 3. Use solvent cement and primer formulated for CPVC: a. For CPVC pipe in chemical service use IPS Corp. Type 724 cement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Use primer on pressure and non-pressure joints. 5. Do not solvent weld joints when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees Fahrenheit or above 90 degrees Fahrenheit unless solvent cements specially formulated for these conditions are utilized. E. Installation of PP piping: 1. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. F. Installation of polyethylene (PE) tubing and fittings: 1. Install small bore PE tubing in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, in neat straight lines, supported at close enough intervals to avoid sagging, and in continuous runs wherever possible. October 2016 40_05_31.01-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.01 (FS-100) 2. Bundle tubing in groups of parallel tubes within protective sheath. 3. Tubes within protective sheath may be color coded, but protect tubing other than black outside the sheath by wrapping with black plastic electrician's tape. 4. Grade tubing connected to meters in one direction. G. Installation of PE piping for underground gas distribution: 1. Socket fuse joints for piping equal or less than NPS 2. 2. Butt fuse joints for piping larger than NPS 2. 3. Install piping in accordance with requirements of the gas utility company and with manufacturer's published instructions. H. Installation of PE piping for drain, waste, and vent: 1. Install piping as recommended in manufacturer's published instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Leakage test for HDPE piping: 1. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance: Perform test prior to backfilling (cover pipe at intervals and/or curves if necessary to hold pipe in place during testing): a. Pressure: As specified in Section 40_05_00.01 or 125 pounds per square inch, gauge. b. Test with water as test medium. c. Remove all free air from test section and raise pressure at steady rate to test pressure. d. Apply and allow initial test pressure to stand without makeup pressure for 3 hours to allow for diametric expansion or pipe stretching to stabilize. e. After stabilization period, return to test pressure and hold for 3 hours. f. Amount of make up water allowable for expansion during pressure test in accordance with PPI Technical Report TR 31-88. g. No visual leaks or pressure drops allowed during final test period. B. Mandrel tests for PVC gravity sewer and HDPE piping: 1. Perform initial mandrel test: a. After cleaning and completion of other tests. b. After placement and compaction of backfill. c. Before construction of pavement or surfacing. d. Not sooner than 30 days after pipe installation. e. Not later than 60 days after installation. 2. Utilize a 9 rod mandrel with minimum length equal to NPS and diameter as follows: Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) Mandrel Diameter, inches 6 5.50 8 7.37 10 9.21 12 10.96 15 13.56 October 2016 40_05_31.01-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.01 (FS-100) 3. Test procedure: Pull the mandrel through the line under test by 1 person, by hand, with reasonable effort, without the aid of mechanical equipment. 4. Failing test: Where the mandrel test is not successful, remove and replace the section of piping with the obstruction; test the piping again, including visible leaks test, pressure test with maximum leakage allowance, mandrel tests, and other specified tests: a. Correction of excessive deflection or obstructions by methods other than removal of the affected piping and replacement of the removed piping with new piping will not be accepted. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. Manufacturer Rep Onsite Source Testing (Witnessed or Non- witnessed) Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Process Operational Period Maintenance (hrs per session) Operation (hrs per session) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Non-witnessed Not required Not required Not required Not required END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_31.16-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.16 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_31.16 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SEWER PIPE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Gravity sewer pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D3034 and ASTM F679 standards. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 40_05_00.01 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 4. Section 40_05_00.09 - Piping Systems Testing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals. 2. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 3. D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications. 4. D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 5. D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 6. F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 7. F679 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. B. SDR: Standard dimension ratio; the outside diameter divided by the pipe wall thickness. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Describe materials, pipe, fittings, and gaskets. 2. Installation instructions. October 2016 40_05_31.16-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.16 (FS-100) C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. Include: 1. Date of manufacture of tubing for each lot delivered. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mark plastic pipe with nominal size, type, class, schedule, or pressure rating, manufacturer and all markings required in accordance with ASTM standards. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect from sunlight, scoring, and distortion. B. Do not allow surface temperatures to exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Store and handle as recommended by manufacturer in published instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE A. Extruding and molding material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards. B. PVC compound: Cell classification 12454-C in accordance with ASTM D1784. C. Stabilizers, antioxidants, lubricants, colorants, and other additives and fillers not to exceed 10 parts by weight per 100 of PVC resin in the compound. D. Pipe less than or equal to 15-inch diameter: 1. In accordance with ASTM D3034. 2. Wall thickness SDR 35 or as specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 40_05_00.01. 3. Joints: Push-on in accordance with ASTM D3212. a. Integral bell. b. Factory installed gaskets meeting the requirements in accordance with ASTM F477. 2.02 FITTINGS A. Same material as the pipe. B. Minimum wall thickness: Same as the minimum wall thickness of the equivalent size pipe as specified in Table 1 of ASTM F679. C. Supplied by the pipe manufacturer. D. Factory molded with joints and gaskets equal to those of the pipe. October 2016 40_05_31.16-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.16 (FS-100) E. Gasket: 1. In accordance with ASTM F477. 2. Manhole adapter gasket: Stainless steel clamp with gasket or similar device to seal the penetration. F. Flexible gaskets for precast bases with a flexible pipe connection: a. In accordance with ASTM C923. b. Manufacturer: The following or approved equal: 1) Press-Seal Gasket Corporation: PSX. 2) A-Lok Premium. G. Waterstop grouting rings: 1. Manufacturer: The following or approved equal: a. NPC. b. Press-Seal Gasket Corporation. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D3034 and ASTM F679 as appropriate. B. Mark the production control code on pipe and fittings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install piping in accordance with ASTM D2321 and manufacturer's published installation instructions. 2. Provide plugs or caps for stubs and branch pipes left unconnected to laterals. 3. Lubricate and assemble joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's published instructions. B. Connections to manholes: 1. Make connections to manholes with a manhole gasket that prevents infiltration and exfiltration through the penetrations using 1 of the following methods: a. Precast bases with a flexible pipe connection: 1) Pipe connectors shall be cast into the base. a) Pipe openings shall contain flexible gaskets. 2) Follow manufacturer’s recommendation for lubrication to prevent damage to the gasket during pipe insertion. 3) When PSX gaskets are used, the take-up screws for the gasket clamps shall be positioned a minimum of 90 degrees apart. 4) Install and grout in place per manufacturers instructions. b. Cast in place or precast bases using grouting rings: 1) Provide opening for connection large enough to allow subsequent grouting around the grouting ring. 2) Grout around the pipe penetration manhole gasket and seal the opening. October 2016 40_05_31.16-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.16 (FS-100) 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test pipe as specified in Section 40_05_00.01 and Section 40_05_00.09. B. Mandrel tests: 1. Perform initial mandrel test: a. After cleaning and completion of other tests. b. After placement and compaction of backfill. c. Before construction of pavement or surfacing. d. Not sooner than 30 days after pipe installation. e. Not later than 60 days after installation. 2. Utilize a 9 rod mandrel with minimum length equal to NPS and diameter as follows: Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) Mandrel Dia (in) (SDR 35/PS46) Mandrel Dia (in) (SDR 26/PS 115) 6 5.45 5.33 8 7.28 7.11 10 9.08 8.87 12 10.79 10.55 15 13.20 12.90 18 16.13 15.76 21 19.00 18.57 24 21.36 20.87 27 24.06 23.51 30 27.68 27.04 3. Test procedure: Pull the mandrel through the line under test by 1 person, by hand, with reasonable effort, without the aid of mechanical equipment. 4. Failing test: Where the mandrel test is not successful, remove and replace the section of piping with the obstruction; test the piping again, including visible leaks test, pressure test with maximum leakage allowance, mandrel tests, and other specified tests: a. Correction of excessive deflection or obstructions by methods other than removal of the affected piping and replacement of the removed piping with new piping will not be accepted. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. October 2016 40_05_31.16-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.16 (FS-100) Manufacturer Rep Onsite Source Testing (Witnessed or Non- witnessed) Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Process Operational Period Maintenance (hrs per session) Operation (hrs per session) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Non-witnessed Not required Not required Not required Not required END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_31.17-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.17 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_31.17 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: SCHEDULE TYPE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Schedule type PVC pipe and fittings. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 40_05_00.01 - Common Work Results for General Process Piping. 4. Section 40_05_00.09 - Piping Systems Testing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 2. D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 3. D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 4. D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 5. D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 6. D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 7. F645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of Thermoplastic Water-Pressure Piping Systems. B. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Describe materials, pipe, fittings, gaskets, and solvent cement. 2. Installation instructions. C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. Include as applicable: 1. Date of manufacture of tubing for each lot delivered. 2. Solvent cement manufacturer's report and certification. October 2016 40_05_31.17-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.17 (FS-100) D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe in potable water applications: Provide pipe bearing NSF 61 seal. B. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D1785. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect from sunlight, scoring, and distortion. B. Do not allow surface temperatures to exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Store and handle as recommended by manufacturer in published instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Extruding and molding material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards. 1. Pipe: Designation PVC 1120 in accordance with ASTM D1785 and appendices: a. Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454-B material in accordance with ASTM D1784. b. Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 40_05_00.01. 2. Fittings: In accordance with ASTM D2467. a. Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating. b. Supplied by pipe manufacturer. c. Unions 2-1/2 inches and smaller: 1) Use socket end screwed unions. d. Unions 3 inches and larger: 1) Use socket flanges with 1/8-inch full-face soft Viton gasket. 3. Solvent cement: a. In accordance with ASTM D2564. b. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) IPS Corporation. c. Certified by the manufacturer for the service of the pipe. d. In potable water applications: Provide solvent cement listed by NSF for potable water applications. e. Primer: As recommended by the solvent cement manufacturer. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Meets or exceeds all quality assurance test requirements stated in ASTM D1785. October 2016 40_05_31.17-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_31.17 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install piping in accordance with ASTM F645, or manufacturer's published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable. B. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from plastic to metal pipe. 1. Do not thread pipe. C. Locate unions where indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere where required for adequate access and assembly of the piping system. D. Provide serrated nipples for transition from pipe to rubber hose. E. Solvent weld joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test pipe as specified in Section 40_05_00.01 and Section 40_05_00.09. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. Manufacturer Rep Onsite Source Testing (Witnessed or Non- witnessed) Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Process Operational Period Maintenance (hrs per session) Operation (hrs per session) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Non-witnessed Not required Not required Not required Not required END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_51.01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_51.01 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_51.01 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Basic requirements for valves. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 5. Section 40_05_19.01 - Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C111/A21.11 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe Fittings. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 2. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 3. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. C. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SP 7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. 2. SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Pressure rating: 1. Suitable for service under minimum working pressures of 150 pounds per square inch gauge. 2. When a piping system is specified in the Piping Schedule to be tested at a pressure greater than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, provide valves for that piping system with design working pressure which is sufficient to withstand the test pressure. B. Valve to piping connections: 1. Valves 3 inch nominal size and larger: Flanged ends. 2. Valves less than 3 inch nominal size: Screwed ends. October 2016 40_05_51.01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_51.01 (FS-100) 3. Plastic valves in plastic piping: a. Up to 2.5 inches: Provide solvent or heat welded unions. b. 3 inches and above: Provide solvent or heat welded flanges. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: 1. Submit the following information for each valve: a. Valve type, size, pressure rating, Cv factor. b. Coatings. c. Manual valve actuators: 1) Information on valve actuator including size, manufacturer, model number. d. Certified drawings with description of component parts, dimensions, weights, and materials of construction. e. Certifications of reference standard compliance: 1) Submit certification that the valves and coatings are suitable in potable water applications in accordance with NSF 61. f. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and accessories or options being furnished. C. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01_78_23. 1. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for each type of manual valve 4 inch in nominal size and larger, and all non-manual valves. Include information on valve operators. D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Valves manufactured by manufacturers whose valves have had successful operational experience in comparable service. 1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect valves and protective coatings from damage during handling and installation; repair coating where damaged. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Stainless steel: In accordance with ASTM A167, Type 316, or Type 304, UNS Alloy S31600 or S30400. October 2016 40_05_51.01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_51.01 (FS-100) B. Valve and operator bolts and nuts: 1. Fabricated of stainless steel for the following installation conditions: a. Submerged in sewage or water. b. In an enclosed space above sewage or water. c. In structures containing sewage or water, below top of walls. d. At openings in concrete or metal decks. 2. Where dissimilar metals are being bolted, use stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers. 3. Underground bolts: Low-alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111/A21.11. C. Bronze and brass alloys: Use bronze and brass alloys with not more than 6 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum in the manufacture of valve parts; UNS Alloy C83600 or C92200 unless specified otherwise. D. Valve bodies: Cast iron in accordance with ASTM A126, Class 30 minimum or ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 minimum unless specified otherwise. 2.02 INTERIOR PROTECTIVE LINING A. When specified in the particular valve specification, provide valves with type of protective lining specified in the particular valve Specification. B. Apply protective lining to interior, non-working surfaces, except stainless steel surfaces. C. Lining types: 1. Fusion bonded epoxy: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) 3-M Company, ScotchKote 134; certified to NSF 61 for drinking water use. b. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 7 or SP 10, as recommended by epoxy manufacturer. c. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. d. Lining thickness: 0.010 to 0.012 inches except that: 1) Lining thickness in grooves for gaskets: 0.005 inches. 2) Do not coat seat grooves in valves with bonded seat. e. Quality control: 1) Lining thickness: Measured with a non-destructive magnetic type thickness gauge. 2) Verify lining integrity with a wet sponge-testing unit operating at approximately 60 volts, or as recommended by the lining manufacturer. 3) Consider tests successful when lining thickness meets specified requirements and when no pinholes are found. 4) Correct defective lining disclosed by unsuccessful tests, and repeat test. 5) Repair pinholes with liquid epoxy recommended by manufacturer of the epoxy used for lining. 2. High solids epoxy: a. Product equivalent to high solids epoxy specified in Section 09_96_01. 1) Certified in accordance with NSF 61 for drinking water use. October 2016 40_05_51.01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_51.01 (FS-100) 2) Interior: Coat valve interior with manufacturer's equivalent high performance high solids epoxy coating system with a certifiable performance history for the service conditions and as approved by the Engineer. Manufacturer shall provide for approval, coating information sufficient to allow Engineer to assess equivalence to the specified high solids epoxy coating specified in Section 09_96_01. b. Clean surfaces to meet SP-7 or SP-10, or as recommended by coating manufacturer. c. Quality control: After coating is cured, check coated surface for porosity with a holiday detector set at 1,800 volts, or as recommended by coating manufacturer. 1) Repair holidays and other irregularities and retest coating. 2) Repeat procedure until holidays and other irregularities are corrected. 2.03 UNDERGROUND VALVES A. Provide underground valves with flanged, mechanical, or other type of joint required for the type of pipe to which the valve is to be connected. B. Coating and wrapping: 1. After installation, encase valves in 2 layers of polyethylene wrap as specified for ductile iron piping in Section 40_05_19.01. a. Ascertain that polyethylene wrapping does not affect operation of valve. 2.04 FIELD APPLIED COATING OF VALVE EXTERIOR A. Match color and be compatible with manufacturer’s coating system and as specified in Section 09_96_01. 1. When shop applied finish coating matches field applied coating on adjacent piping, touch up shop coating in damaged areas in accordance with instructions recommended by the paint manufacturer. 2. When shop applied coating does not match field coating on adjacent piping, or when damage has occurred to the shop applied coating that requires more than touchup, blast clean valve surfaces or utilize other surface preparation recommended by the manufacturer of the coating material and apply the coating system used for coating adjacent piping. 2.05 VALVE BOXES A. Provide cast-iron valve boxes at each buried valve to access valve and valve operators. B. Do not support boxes on valve, valve operator, or pipe. C. Boxes: 1. 2-piece, fabricated of cast iron; provide cover, with asphalt varnish or enamel protective coating. 2. Adjustable to grade, install centered around the upper portions of the valve and valve operator. October 2016 40_05_51.01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_51.01 (FS-100) D. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Tyler Pipe Industries, Inc. 2. Neenah Foundry Company. 2.06 VALVE OPERATORS A. Valve operator "Open" direction: Open counterclockwise. B. Provide valves located below operating level or deck with extensions for key operation or floor stands and handwheels. C. Provide manually operated valves located not more than 6 feet above the operating level with tee handles, wrenches, or handwheels. 1. Make the valve operator more conveniently accessible by rolling valves, located more than 5 feet but less than 6 feet above the operating level, toward the operating side. 2. Secure tee handles and wrenches to the valve head or stem, except where a handle or wrench so secured constitutes a hazard to personnel; in which case, stow handle or wrench immediately adjacent to the valve on or in a suitable hanger, bracket, or receptacle. D. Fit valves located more than 6 feet above operating level with chain operated handles or valve wheels. 1. Chains: Sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet above the operating level. 2. Where chains constitute a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel, provide holdbacks or other means for keeping the chains out of the way. E. Provide an operator shaft extension from valve or valve operator to finished grade or deck level when buried valves, and other valves located below the operating deck or level, are specified or indicated on the Drawings to be key operated; provide 2 inch square AWWA operating nut, and box and cover as specified, or a cover where a box is not required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Preparation prior to installation: 1. Install valves after the required submittal on installation has been accepted. 2. Determine after flanged valves and flanged check valves are selected, the face-to-face dimensions of flanged valves and flanged check valves. B. Fabricate piping to lengths taking into account the dimensions of flanged valves and flanged check valves. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide incidental work and materials necessary for installation of valves including flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, valve boxes and covers, concrete bases, blocking, and protective coating. October 2016 40_05_51.01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_51.01 (FS-100) B. Where needed, furnish and install additional valves for proper operation and maintenance of equipment and plant facilities under the following circumstances: 1. Where such additional valves are required for operation and maintenance of the particular equipment furnished by Contractor. 2. Where such additional valves are required as a result of a substitution or change initiated by Contractor. C. Install valves with their stems in vertical position above the pipe, except as follows: 1. Butterfly valves, gate valves aboveground, globe valves, ball valves, and angle valves may be installed with their stems in the horizontal position. 2. Install buried plug valves with geared operators with their stems in a horizontal position. D. Install valves so that handles clear obstructions when the valves are operated from fully open to fully closed. E. Place top of valve boxes flush with finished grade or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. F. Valves with threaded connections: 1. Install valves by applying wrench on end of valve nearest the joint to prevent distortion of the valve body. 2. Apply pipe joint compound or Teflon tape on external (male) threads to prevent forcing compound into valve seat area. G. Valves with flanged connections: 1. Align flanges and gasket carefully before tightening flange bolts. 2. When flanges are aligned, install bolts and hand tighten. 3. Tighten nuts opposite each other with equal tension before moving to next pair of nuts. H. Valves with soldered connections: 1. Do not overheat connection to prevent damage to resilient seats and metal seat rings. 2. Position valves in full open position before starting soldering procedure. 3. Apply heat to piping rather than to valve body. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services from each manufacturer for all valves supplied: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance (if required within individual specification sections). C. As specified elsewhere for specific valve types, sizes or actuators. 1. Source testing. 2. Manufacturers on site services for Owner Training, Installation Testing, Functional Testing, and during the Process Operational Period. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_52-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_52 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_52 SPECIALTY VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Backflow preventers. 2. Solenoid valves. 3. Plastic body diaphragm valves. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 2. Section 40_05_06.55 - Piping Insulation. 3. Section 40_05_51.01 - Common Work Results for Valves. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. 25 - Earthquake-Actuated Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150 and 300. C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C511 - Standard for Reduced Pressure-Principle Backflow-Prevention Assembly. 2. C800 - Underground Service Line Valves & Fittings (Also Included: Collected Standards For Service Line Materials). D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 3. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 4. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 5. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Application. E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. NEMA Type 4 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 40_05_51.01. October 2016 40_05_52-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_52 (FS-100) 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufactured by manufacturers whose valves have had successful operational experience in comparable service. 1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect valves from damage during handling and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIELD APPLIED COATING OF VALVE EXTERIOR A. Match color and be compatible with manufacturer’s coating system and as specified in Section 09_96_01. 1. When shop applied finish coating matches field applied coating on adjacent piping, touch up shop coating in damaged areas in accordance with instructions recommended by the paint manufacturer. 2. When shop applied coating does not match field coating on adjacent piping, or when damage has occurred to the shop applied coating that requires more than touchup, blast clean valve surfaces or utilize other surface preparation recommended by the manufacturer of the coating material and apply the coating system used for coating adjacent piping. 2.02 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Febco backflow prevention: a. Model 860 all sizes. 2. Zurn/Wilkins: a. Model 975XL for 1/2-inch through 2-inch. b. Model 375AST for sizes 2 1/2 inch, 3 inch, 8 inch, and 10 inch. c. Model 375 and 375DA for sizes 4 inch and 6 inch. 3. Watts regulator: Series LF909. B. Design: Reduced pressure chamber type in accordance with AWWA C511. C. Lead-Free: For potable water installations not more than a weighted average of 0.25 percent lead, when used with respect to the wetted surfaces. D. Include shutoff valves at each end of backflow preventer with properly located test cocks. E. Shutoff valves: 1. Backflow preventers 2-inch and smaller: Provide with full-port, quarter turn, resilient seated ball valves. 2. Backflow preventers larger than 2-inch: Provide with resilient seated, outside stem and yoke gate valves. 3. October 2016 40_05_52-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_52 (FS-100) 2.03 PLASTIC BODY DIAPHRAGM VALVES A. Type of service: Use plastic body diaphragm valves in the following services: 1. Sodium hypochlorite. 2. Sodium bisulfite. 3. Polymer solutions. 4. Neat polymer. B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Simtech. 2. Chemtrol. 3. Asahi-America (2-1/2 inch and less only for sodium hypochlorite service). 4. Georg Fischer Piping Systems. C. Materials: 1. Body: PVC with reinforcing ribs at body and end connections. 2. Diaphragm: Unless otherwise specified below, provide 2 diaphragm layers - Teflon® diaphragm with EPDM backing or other material suitable for the intended use. a. For sodium hypochlorite service: 3 diaphragm layers, Teflon® (PTFE), PVDF, and ethylene-propylenediene (EPDM) or Viton backing cushion. 3. Handwheel: Polypropylene. 4. Sleeve: Bronze or cast iron. 5. Stem: Stainless steel. 6. Bolt, nut, and washer: Stainless steel. 7. Thrust bearing: Teflon® disc or carbon steel. 8. End connector: PVC. 9. End connector seal (flange gasket): Suitable for the intended use unless otherwise specified below. a. For sodium hypochlorite and sodium bisulfite solution service: Hypalon 1/8-inch thick gaskets. 10. O-rings: Viton. 11. Position indicator: Carbon steel. D. Valve design: 1. End connections: Flanged. 2. Operator handle: Handwheel, with position indicator and adjustable travel stop to prevent overtightening. Provide acrylic stem cap. 3. Diaphragm valves: Weir type. 4. Pressure: 150 pound per square inch gauge at 70 degrees Fahrenheit. E. Electric actuator: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Asahi/America. b. Barton/ITT Fluid Technology Corporation. c. Gemu. 2. General: a. Reversing type motor. b. Suitable for 115 volt, 1 phase, 60 hertz power supply. c. Travel stop limit switches with remote valve open and closed status indication. October 2016 40_05_52-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_52 (FS-100) d. Brushless, capacitor-run motors with integral thermal overload protection and auto reset. e. Permanently lubricated gear train. f. Visual position indicator. g. Declutchable manual override. 3. Materials: a. Actuator housing: Aluminum. b. Output shaft: Stainless steel. c. Electrical housing: NEMA Type 4. d. Enclosure: NEMA Type 4. e. Thermally bonded epoxy powder coating with stainless steel trim. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install as specified in Section 40_05_51.01 in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Install sensing line insulation as specified in Section 40_05_06.55. C. Backflow preventers: 1. Install with a minimum clearance of 12 inches and with maximum clearance of 30 inches between the relief port and the floor or finished grade. 2. Install with sufficient side clearance for access for testing and maintenance. D. Plastic body diaphragm valves for sodium hypochlorite service: 1. When valves are installed horizontally, install valves with valve stem position rotated as necessary such that no internal valve obstruction prevents the passage of vapors traveling along the top of adjacent piping from traveling through the valve. 3.02 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services from each manufacturer for all valves supplied: 1. As specified in Section 40_05_51.01. 2. Source testing. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_57.13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.13 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_57.13 MANUAL ACTUATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Valve and gate actuators. 2. Handwheel actuators. 3. Hand-cranked geared actuators. 4. Floor Boxes. 5. Floor stands. 6. Key operated valves. 7. Bench stands. 8. Accessory equipment and floor boxes. B. Related sections: 1. Section 05_05_24 - Mechanical Anchoring And Fastening To Concrete And Masonry. 2. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 3. Section 40_05_59.23 - Electric Motorized Actuators. 4. Section 40_05_59.63 - Manual Actuators. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA). C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). D. National Electrical Code (NEC). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. NEMA: 1. Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 2. Type 7 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Include shop drawings and product data with associated gate or valve as an integrated unit. October 2016 40_05_57.13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.13 (FS-100) 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide valve actuators integral with valve or gate, except for valve actuators utilizing T-wrenches or keys, and portable actuators intended to operate more than 1 valve. B. Provide similar actuators by 1 manufacturer. C. Provide gates and hand operating lifts by 1 manufacturer. D. Provide hydraulic gate lifts by 1 manufacturer. E. Provide hydraulic valve actuators and motorized actuators by 1 manufacturer. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra materials: 1. Key operated valve keys or wrenches: Furnish a minimum 4 keys with 4-foot shafts and 3-foot pipe handles or wrenches with 4-foot shafts and 3-foot handles for operating key operated valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS A. Valve actuators: 1. Cylinder actuators, motorized actuators, and portable actuators are specified in Sections 40_05_57.23. 2. Manual actuators: a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Design: Hand lever c. Spring release handle: 12-inch. d. Notch plate: 10 position. e. Secure with mounting bolts. f. Locking device so that valve can be locked in any position with a wing nut. 3. Stem and cover: a. For submerged valves, provide extension stem as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Limit switches: Provide limit switches on manually actuated valves where indicated on the Drawings: a. Limit switches: Heavy-duty, industrial grade, oiltight, with not less than 2 auxiliary contacts. b. Rating: Rated for 10 amps, 120 volts alternating current. c. Enclosure: NEMA Type 4X enclosure and with stainless steel levers and arms. Provide switch with NEMA Type 7 enclosure when switch is located within areas with NEC Class 1, Division 1 or Class 1, Division 2 designations as indicated on the Drawings. B. Stem covers: 1. Aluminum pipe: 2. Threaded cap on top. 3. Bolted aluminum flange on bottom. October 2016 40_05_57.13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.13 (FS-100) 4. Slots cut 1- by 12-inch at 18 inches on center in front and back of pipe. 5. Capable of covering threaded portion of greased stems that project above actuators when gates or valves are opened or closed. 6. Ultraviolet light resistant, clear butyrate plastic or polycarbonate pipe: a. Capped on the upper end. b. Either threaded into the top of the gate operators or held in place by bolt-down aluminum brackets. c. Capable of covering threaded portion of greased stems that project above actuators when gates or valves are opened or closed. 7. Staff gauges: a. Adhesive-backed mylar, suitable for outdoor service. b. Calibrated in hundredths of feet. c. Read the weir crest elevations directly. d. Gauge range: 1.5 feet minimum. e. Indicate the following elevations on each staff gauge: 1) -0.75, -0.50, -0.25, 0.0, 0.25, 0.50, 0.75. f. Supplement with a stem-mounted pointer or indicator that permits direct observation of the weir gate crest elevation. g. Apply staff gauges to each stem cover after installation of the cover and after calibration and testing of the weir gates. h. Set gauges precisely by a survey crew using instruments acceptable to the Engineer. C. Stem cover flanges, pipes and caps: 1. After fabrication, etch and anodize to produce the following chemical finishes in accordance with AA publication DAF-45: a. A 41 - Clear Anodic Coating. b. C 22 - Medium Matte Finish. D. Gate stem covers: Concentric with stem. E. Position indicators: 1. For all aboveground worm gear or traveling nut manual actuators, provide position indication on the actuator enclosure. 2. Tail rods on hydraulic cylinders, or dial indicators with clear full-open and closed position indicators, calibrated in number of turns or percentage of opening. F. Manual or power actuator size: 1. Sized to deliver maximum force required under most severe specified operating condition, including static and dynamic forces, seat and wedge friction, and seating and unseating forces with safety factor of 5, unless otherwise specified. G. Actuator size: Capable of supporting weight of suspended shafting unless carried by bottom thrust bearings; shaft guides with wall mounting brackets. H. Provisions for alternate operation: Where specified or indicated on the Drawings, position and equip crank or handwheel operated geared valve actuators or lifts for alternate operation with tripod mounted portable gate actuators. October 2016 40_05_57.13-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.13 (FS-100) I. Operation: Counterclockwise to open with suitable and adequate stops, capable of resisting at least twice normal operating force to prevent overrun of valve or gate in open or closed position. J. Open direction indicator: Cast arrow and legend indicating direction to rotate actuator on handwheel, chain wheel rim, crank, or other prominent place. K. Buried actuator housing: Oil and watertight, specifically designed for buried service, factory packed with suitable grease, completely enclosed space between actuator housing and valve body so that no moving parts are exposed to soil; provide actuators with 2-inch square AWWA operating nut. L. Worm gear actuators: Provide gearing on worm gear actuators that is self-locking with gear ratio such that torque in excess of 160 foot-pounds will not need to be applied to operate valve at most adverse conditions for which valve is designed. M. Traveling nut actuators: Capable of requiring maximum 100 foot-pounds of torque when operating valve under most adverse condition; limit stops on input shaft of manual actuators for fully open and closed positions; non-moving vertical axis of operating nut when opening or closing valve. 2.02 HANDWHEEL ACTUATORS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Rodney Hunt Company. 2. Waterman Industries, Incorporated. B. Coating: Handwheel as specified in Section 09_96_01. C. Mounting: Floor stand or bench stand. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings position actuator 36 inches (nominal) above top of walkway surface. D. Bearings above and below finished threaded bronze operating nut: Ball or roller. E. Wheel diameter: Minimum 24 inches. F. Indicator: Counterclockwise opening with arrow, and word OPEN cast on top of handwheel indicating direction for opening. G. Pull to operate: Maximum 40 pounds pull at most adverse design condition. H. Stem travel limiting device: Setscrew locked stop nuts above and below lift nut. I. Grease fittings: Suitable for lubrication of bearings. 2.03 HAND-CRANKED GEARED ACTUATORS A. Type: Single removable crank; fully enclosed. B. Mounting: Floor and bench stand. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings position actuator 36 inches (nominal) above top of walkway surface. C. Operating nut: When scheduled for portable actuators. October 2016 40_05_57.13-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.13 (FS-100) D. Geared lifts: 2-speed with minimum ratio of 4 to 1. E. Teeth on gears, spur pinions, bevel gears, and bevel pinions: Cut. F. Lift nuts: Cast manganese bronze. G. Exterior surfaces on cast-iron lift parts: Smooth. H. Bearings above and below flange on lift nuts: Ball or roller; capable of taking thrust developed by opening and closing of gates under maximum operating head; with bronze sleeve bearings and sufficient grease fittings for lubrication of moving parts, including bearings and gears. I. Crank rotation indicator: Cast arrow with word OPEN in prominent location readily visible indicating correct rotation of crank to open gate. J. Hand cranks: 15-inch radius; requiring maximum 25 pounds pull to operate gate at maximum operating head; with: 1. Revolving brass sleeves. 2. Gears, spur pinions, bevel gears, and bevel pinions with cut teeth. 3. Cast manganese bronze lift nuts. 4. Cast-iron lift parts with smooth exterior surfaces. K. Indicator: Dial position type mounted on gear actuator; enclosed in cast-iron or aluminum housing with clear plastic cover; marked with fully open, 3/4, 1/2, 1/4, and closed positions. 2.04 FLOOR BOXES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Waterman industries, Inc. B. Floor boxes: Cast-iron; with: 1. Counter type indicator. 2. Hinged, lockable lid with directional arrow. 3. 2-inch square AWWA operating nut. 4. Packing gland providing drip-tight seal around valve shaft. 2.05 FLOOR STAND A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Rodney Hunt Company. 2. Waterman industries, Inc. B. Floor stand assemblies: Heavy-duty cast-iron, suitable for mounting specified actuator. 2.06 BENCH STANDS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Rodney Hunt Company. 2. Waterman industries, Inc. October 2016 40_05_57.13-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.13 (FS-100) B. Bench stands: Handwheel actuators or hand crank, geared actuators conforming to hand-cranked geared actuator requirements, except capacity to be mounted on haunch, wall bracket, or self-contained gate yoke. 2.07 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT A. Wall brackets or haunches: As indicated on the Drawings. B. Stems: Stainless steel; sized to match output of actuator; minimum gate or valve operating stem diameter; maximum 200 slenderness ratio. C. Stem couplings: Stainless steel; internally threaded to match stem; lockable to stem by set screw. D. Stem guides: Cast-iron with silicon bronze bushing; maximum 200 slenderness ratio; capable of being mounted with wall bracket; adjustable in 2 directions. E. Wall brackets: Cast-iron, capable of withstanding output of actuator, adjustable in 2 directions. F. Stem stuffing boxes: Cast-iron, with adjustable gland and packing. G. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel. H. Anchor bolts: As specified in Section 05_05_24 except that the material shall be Type 316 stainless steel. I. Geared valve actuators: Provided with cut gears, either spur or worm; sized to operate valves at most adverse design condition; with maximum 40-pound pull at handwheel or chain wheel rim. J. Geared valve traveling nut actuators: Acceptable only where specified or indicated on the Drawings. K. Accessory equipment for valves and gates requiring remote actuators: Operating stems, stem couplings, stem guides, wall brackets, and stem stuffing boxes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install floor boxes in concrete floor with lid flush with floor. B. After installation of gate and stem covers, mark stem covers at point where top of stems are at full-open position and at closed position. C. Attach floor stand to structure with anchor bolts. D. Install stem stuffing boxes where operating stems pass through intermediate concrete floor slabs. October 2016 40_05_57.13-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.13 (FS-100) 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Geared actuators: Provide geared actuators for following valves: 1. Butterfly valves larger than 6 inches, nominal size, on liquid service. 2. Butterfly valves larger than 10 inches, nominal size, on gas and air service. 3. Plug valves 6 inches, nominal size, and larger. B. Handwheel actuators: Provide handwheel actuators for valves mounted 6 feet or less above floors. C. Chain wheel actuators: Provide chain wheel actuators for valves mounted more than 6 feet to centerline above floors. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_57.23-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.23 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_57.23 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Electric motor-driven actuators for gates as identified in the valves and gates schedule. B. Related sections: 1. Section 40_05_59.34 - Heavy Duty Stainless Steel Slide Gates. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C504 - AWWA Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. 2. C540 - AWWA Standard for Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Slide Gates. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). 1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. NEMA: 1. Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a complete list/schedule of all actuators being provided with their associated tag names as indicated on the design drawings and/or specifications, service process area and the size of the valve they are actuating. B. Clearly identify any exceptions in terms of quantities and/or quality of actuator(s) being submitted. C. Product data: 1. Electrical ratings: a. Voltage and number of phases. b. Starting and running current. c. Voltage levels and source for control and status. 2. Description of integral control interface. 3. Environmental ratings, including NEMA enclosure rating and submergence capabilities. 4. Gear ratios for both manual and motorized actuation. 5. Opening and closing directions. 6. Allowable starts per hour. 7. List of all included options and accessories. 8. Full travel times. October 2016 40_05_57.23-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.23 (FS-100) 9. Gearbox data including gear ratio, and gearbox efficiency. 10. Affidavit in accordance with AWWA C540. D. Shop drawings: 1. Wiring diagrams: a. Include all options and expansion cards furnished with each actuator. 2. Dimensioned drawings of each valve and actuator combination. 3. Dimensioned drawings of each valve gearbox. 4. Electric motor data. E. Calculations: Submit the following for each valve/gate size and class: 1. Operating torque calculations. 2. Maximum torque calculations for seating and unseating. 3. Maximum operating torque at starting and normal operation. F. Test reports: 1. Factory test report and certificate. 2. Each actuator must be performance tested with a simulated load at the factory and individual test certificates and detailed test reports shall be provided. a. The test equipment used should simulate a typical valve load. G. Manufacturer's instructions: 1. Include manufacturer's instructions, description of system operation, start-up data, and troubleshooting checklist. H. Operations and maintenance data: 1. Include manufacturer's literature; cleaning procedures, replacement part lists, wiring diagrams, and repair data. 2. Include a list of all configurable parameters, and the final values for each. 3. List of recommended spare parts. 4. List of special tools necessary for proper operation and/or maintenance. 5. Exploded view drawings that illustrate all assemblies, sub-assemblies, and components. 6. Routine test procedures for all electronic and electrical circuits. 7. Troubleshooting chart covering the complete valve and controls/electrical power systems, showing description of trouble, probable cause, and suggested remedy. 8. Certified factory and field-test results. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain required information from the valve/gate supplier, including but not limited to: 1. Interface to gate or valve. 2. Operating range (In degrees). 3. Quarter turn or multi-turn. 4. Required turns for full travel on multi-turn applications. 5. Direction of rotation for opening and closing. 6. Maximum and normal torque requirements. 7. Additional sizing requirements indicated in the following Specifications: a. Section 40_05_59.34 - Heavy Duty Stainless Steel Slide Gates. October 2016 40_05_57.23-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.23 (FS-100) B. All motorized, intelligent actuators shall be the product of a single manufacturer for all valve and gate applications on this project, regardless of gate or valve type, manufacturer, or supplier. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts (minimum 10 percent of total number of actuators of each model type furnished, but not less than 1 for each model of actuator furnished): 1. Stem nut. 2. Worm shaft subassembly. 3. Drive sleeve subassembly. 4. Complete actuator seal kit. 5. Actuator gearbox oil (sufficient quantity to fill 4 gearboxes). 6. Encoder. 7. Control module. B. Provide 1 spare motor for each size motor furnished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or Engineer approved equal: B. Acceptable manufacturers for lines 4 inch and larger: 1. Rotork Controls Inc.: a. IQ3 (Multi-turn). 2.02 CHARACTERISTICS FOR ACTUATORS ON LINES 4 INCHES AND LARGER A. Provide actuators complete and operable with all components and accessories required for operation. B. Power supply: 1. Voltage and phases as indicated in the Schedule. 2. Valve or gate motion independent of power supply phase rotation. 3. Provide an internal backup power source to maintain settings and track valve position when main power is off. 4. The actuators shall incorporate all major components such as the motor, starter, local controls, terminals etc. housed within a self-contained, sealed enclosure. C. Size actuator to move gates or valves from full open to closed position within the time indicated in the Schedule: 1. If an operating time is not indicated on the Schedule, size the actuator to move gates or valves at minimum 12 inches per minute under maximum load. Measure rate of closure for valves at maximum diameter of disc, plug, or ball. 2. Size actuators so that gear boxes are not required where possible. October 2016 40_05_57.23-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.23 (FS-100) D. Control interface: 1. Configuration: a. Provide a non-intrusive, non-contacting interface for configuring all input and output settings, control values, ranges, torque switch settings, valve positions switch settings, and options. 1) Configurable from a hand-held configuring tool or input devices on the actuator. 2. Local interface, integral to actuator: a. Non-intrusive, non-contacting selector switches: 1) LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE: a) Motor actuator operation is prevented with the switch in STOP. 2) OPEN-CLOSE: a) Controls the valve when LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE is in LOCAL. b) Spring return to center. c) Configurable between maintained (actuator runs until end of travel, high torque, or a LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE is switched to STOP) and momentary (actuator stops when lever is released). b. Local display: 1) Valve fully open and fully closed indicators. 2) Numerical display showing actual valve or gate position in percent of travel. 3. Control inputs: a. Capable of using 120 VAC or 24 VDC inputs. b. Controls the valve when LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE is in REMOTE. c. Isolated inputs capable of operating from external control voltage source or internal power supply: 1) Furnish 120 VAC and 24 VDC control power supplies within the actuator. d. Provide the following inputs: 1) OPEN. 2) CLOSE. 3) STOP. e. OPEN and CLOSE inputs configurable between maintained (actuator runs until end of travel, high torque, or a STOP input) and momentary (actuator stops when command is removed). 4. Status outputs: a. Monitor relay output: Dry contact, normally closed, opens when actuator is not in REMOTE or in the event of any internal fault or alarm condition. b. Dry contact outputs configured for the functions indicated on the Drawings. Provide the following outputs for all actuators: 1) Fully closed. 2) Fully open. 3) LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE in REMOTE position. c. Capable of being configured for the following additional functions: 1) Communications failure. 2) Valve opening or closing. 3) Valve moving (continuous or pulsing). 4) Motor tripped on torque in mid-travel. 5) Open or close interlock active. 6) ESD active. October 2016 40_05_57.23-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.23 (FS-100) 7) Motor tripped on torque in mid-travel. 8) Motor tripped on torque going open. 9) Motor tripped on torque going closed. 10) Pre-set torque exceeded. 11) Valve jammed. 12) Lost main power phase. 13) Control supply lost. 14) Internal failure detected. d. All output contacts rated for 5 amps, 120 VAC and 24 VDC. 5. Network communications: a. Communications and control between the actuator and plant’s control system shall utilize the following protocol: 1) Profibus DP. E. Features: 1. Time delay on reversal: Incorporate time delay between stopping actuator and starting in opposite direction to limit excessive current, torque, and heating from instantaneous reversal. 2. Data logging: a. Store diagnostic data and reference data. 1) Store reference data (recorded during commissioning) and data from last operation. 3. Provide display of logged data on the actuator, or provisions to download to a personal computer. F. Materials: 1. Construct motorized actuators of materials suitable for the environment in which the valve or gate is to be installed. G. Components: 1. Motors: 2. Specifically designed for valve actuator service with high starting torque, totally enclosed non-ventilated construction. 3. Torque ratings equal to or greater than that required for valve seating and dynamic torques with a 25 percent factor of safety. a. Design requirements for rubber-seated AWWA butterfly valves: 1) Design actuators for maximum gate or valve operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C504 and AWWA C540. a) Valve actuator torque requirement for open-close service: Not less than the required valve-seating and dynamic torques under design operating conditions in accordance with AWWA C504. b) Valve actuator torque requirement for modulating service: Not less than twice the required valve dynamic torque under design operating conditions in accordance with AWWA C504. b. Design requirements for slide gates, gate valves, knife gate valves, globe valves, and diaphragm valves: 1) Design valves and actuators for maximum operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C540. 2) Design for the maximum torque and thrust running load over the full cycle. October 2016 40_05_57.23-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.23 (FS-100) 3) Maximum torque or thrust rating: The actuator stall torque or maximum thrust output shall not exceed the torque or thrust capability of the valve or gate, as determined by the valve or gate manufacturer. 4. Capable of being removed and replaced without draining the actuator gear case. 5. Motor bearings shall be amply proportioned of the anti-friction type and permanently lubricated. 6. Rated for operating under the following conditions without exceeding temperature limits with ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. a. Continuous operation for 15 minutes or twice the open-to-close operating time (whichever is greater) at normal operating torque or 33 percent of maximum torque (whichever is greater). b. 60 starts per hour for open/close service or 1,200 starts per hour for modulating service. 7. Provide the following motor protection features: a. Jammed valve (no valve motion detected through a time delay). b. High motor temperature (sensed by an embedded thermostats). c. High torque. d. Single phasing protection. H. Enclosures: 1. Actuator housing ratings as indicated in the Schedule. 2. Stainless steel external fasteners. 3. Provide 'O' ring seals for each of the following areas: a. Between the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements. b. Between the mechanical and electrical portions to protect from the ingress of oil, and to protect the mechanical components of oil from dust and moisture when the electrical terminal is open. 4. Provide the following minimum enclosure ratings: a. NEMA Type 4X enclosure for general applications. I. Position sensing: 1. Electronic and adjustable using a solid-state encoder wheel. a. Mechanical limit switches and potentiometers are not acceptable. 2. Capable of retaining position and monitoring valve or gate motion when valve is manually actuated and when main power is not present. 3. Valve range and position switch outputs field adjustable. J. Torque sensing: 1. Torque shutdown setting: 40 percent to 100 percent rated torque. a. Adjustable in 1 percent increments. 2. Torque display: 0 to 100 percent-rated torque. 3. Capable of interrupting control circuit during both opening and closing and when valve torque overload occurs. 4. Electrical or electronic torque sensing: 5. Independent of variations in frequency, voltage, or temperature. 6. Provide a temporary inhibit of the torque sensing system during unseating or during starting in mid-travel against high inertia loads. 7. Provide visible verification of torque switch status without any housing disassembly. October 2016 40_05_57.23-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.23 (FS-100) K. Manual actuators: 1. Hand wheel for manual operation. a. Maximum 80-pound pull on rim when operating gate or valve under maximum load. b. Provide pull chain when motorized actuator is located more than 6 feet above floor surface. 1) Chain shall be of sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet above the operating level. 2) Where the chain obstructs an aisle or walkway, provide holdback or other means to ensure chain does not create a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel. 2. Declutch lever: Padlockable, capable of mechanically disengaging motor and related gearing and freeing hand wheel for manual operation. L. Gearing: Hardened alloy steel spur or helical gears and self-locking, alloy bronze worm gear set. 1. Accurately cut to assure minimum backlash. M. Bearings: 1. Anti-friction bearing with caged balls or rollers throughout. 2. Sealed-for-life type thrust bearings housed in a separate thrust base. N. Drive bushing: 1. Easily detachable for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox input shaft. 2. Positioned in a detachable base of the actuator. O. Lubrication: 1. Provide totally enclosed actuator gearing with oil filled gear case suitable for operation at any angle. 2. Suitable for standard SAE80EP gear oil. 3. Actuators requiring special or exotic lubricants are not acceptable. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Setting tool: 1. If required for setting or configuring the actuator, provide a hand-held setting tool. a. Furnish 1 setting tool for every 10 actuators. B. Termination module cover: 1. For actuators on a valve network provide a means to keep the valve network in service, in the event where the actuator must be removed. 2. Provide sunshades for all outdoor installations of remote control stations that use a LCD or similar screen. Regular pushbutton, sector switches, and pilot light control stations will not require a sunshade. October 2016 40_05_57.23-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.23 (FS-100) 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test: 1. Test each actuator in the factory, and submit an individual test certificate for each actuator. 2. Perform a high potential test and record the following information: a. Test voltage. 3. Simulate a maximum and typical valve loads and record the following information: a. Current and power factor at maximum and set torque values. b. Torque as measured by the actuator. c. Actuator output speed or operating time. 4. Performance testing: Conduct performance test for each actuator simulating valve operating torque from full-open to full-close and from full-close to full-open. The following information shall be recorded during each performance test: a. Torque at maximum torque setting. b. Current at maximum torque setting. c. Test voltage and frequency. d. Actuator output speed and operating time for full-open to full-close. e. Amperage draw on motors at breakaway and under normal operation. B. Field verify characteristics prior to sizing motor actuator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install actuators in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 MOTORIZED ACTUATOR SCHEDULE A. Provide all actuators indicated on the Drawings. 1. Major process actuators are listed in the Intelligent Actuator Schedule in this section. 2. The schedule does not include all number and types of actuators required for the Project. B. Abbreviations relating to type: 1. BFV = Butterfly Valve. 2. BV = Ball Valve. 3. PV = Plug Valve. 4. SG = Slide Gate. C. Abbreviations relating to actuator type: 1. O/C = Open and Close Service. 2. MOD = Modulating Service. D. Abbreviations relating to controls: 1. PA = Profibus PA. 2. DP = Profibus DP. 3. DN = DeviceNet. October 2016 40_05_57.23-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.23 (FS-100) 4. FF = Foundation Fieldbus H1. 5. MB = Modbus RTU (RS-485). 6. NET = Manufacturer’s proprietary network. 7. A = Analog (4-20mA) control, modulating duty. 8. D = Discrete control, modulating duty. 9. D-O/C = Discrete Open/Close. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_57.23-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_57.23 (FS-100) INTELLIGENT ACTUATOR SCHEDULE Item Reference DWG Type Size Actuator Type NEMA Rating Voltage/ Phase/Hz Notes Open Time Controls UV Influent Gate UVG441 PI-UVD-1 SG O/C 4 480/3/60 120 s DP UV Influent Gate UVG442 PI-UVD-1 SG O/C 4 480/3/60 120 s DP UV Effluent Gate UVG443 PI-UVD-4 SG O/C 4 480/3/60 120 s DP UV Effluent Gate UVG444 PI-UVD-4 SG O/C 4 480/3/60 120 s DP Notes: (1) Provide actuators with remote control station. (2) New motorized actuator to be installed on existing equipment. (3) Provide Battery Backup Unit. October 2016 40_05_59.34-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_59.34 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_59.34 HEAVY-DUTY FABRICATED STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Heavy-duty fabricated stainless steel slide gates. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning and Process Start-Up. 3. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Section 01_78_36 - Warranties and Bonds 5. Section 40_05_57.23 - Electric Motor Actuators. 6. Section 40_80_01 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C560 - Cast-Iron Slide Gates. 2. C561 - Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 2. B584 - Standard Specifications for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Application. 3. D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyurethane Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable. 4. D2000 - Standard Classification for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 5. D4020 - Standard Specification for Ultra-High Molecular-Weight Polyethylene Molding and Extrusion Materials. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Slenderness ratio (l/r): The largest ratio obtained by dividing the unsupported length of the stem by the radius of gyration of the stem cross section. B. Design head: Depth from surface of water to centerline of gate. Use value specified in the gate schedule. C. Seating head: Pressure applied to gate slide from weight of water column above gate centerline that forces gate slide into seat. D. Unseating head: Pressure applied to gate slide from weight of water column above gate centerline that forces gate slide away from seat. October 2016 40_05_59.34-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_59.34 (FS-100) E. Substantially similar: 1. Similar in size, design head, and service. 2. Utilizes the proposed design for critical components including guides and seals. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Except as modified or supplemented as specified in this Section, all gates and operators shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C561, latest edition. B. Gate components: 1. Frames: a. Design for the design head scheduled with a minimum safety factor of 5 with regard to ultimate tensile, compressive, and shear strength. b. Self-contained gates: Where frames extend above the operating floor, design to be self-supporting so that no further reinforcing or support is required. 2. Stem: Select stem diameter, stem guide quantity and stem guide spacing based on following criteria: a. Slenderness ratio (l/r): Shall not exceed 200. b. Maximum diameter: Provide stem guides at a spacing to maintain stem diameter of 2 inches or less. c. Tensile strength: Suitable to withstand the force generated by the operator with the application of a 200 pound force applied to the crank or handwheel or a 250 foot-pound torque applied to the wrench nut. d. Compressive strength: 1) Suitable to withstand buckling due to the force generated by the operator with the application of an 80 pound force applied to the crank or handwheel or a 100 foot-pound torque applied to the wrench nut. 2) Determine buckling load using Euler Column formula in accordance with AWWA C 561, where C = 2. e. Design force for power actuators: 1) Hydraulic cylinder operators: 1.25 times the output thrust at maximum hydraulic fluid operating pressure. 2) Electric motor operators: 1.25 times the output thrust in the stalled- motor condition. f. Gates having widths greater than 2 times the height: Provide with 2 lifting mechanisms connected by a tandem shaft. 3. Thrust nut: Suitable to withstand thrust developed by operator with the application of a 40 pound force on the crank or handwheel with safety factor of 5. Base design on ultimate strength of material used. 4. Yokes for self-contained gates: a. Design yoke using design loading criteria for stem with safety factor of 5 based on the ultimate strength of the material used. b. Maximum deflection at design load: Not to exceed 1/360th of the span. 5. Slide: a. Deflection shall be less than or equal to 1/1000 of the span of the gate or 1/16 inch, whichever is less, when under the design head. b. Design for the maximum design head specified with a minimum safety factor of 5 with regard to ultimate tensile, compressive, and shear strength. October 2016 40_05_59.34-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_59.34 (FS-100) 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Leakage shall comply with allowable limits set forth in AWWA C561. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: 1. Wall thimbles. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Complete bill of materials. 4. Detailed performance test procedures for Source Testing and Functional Testing. 5. Electric Gate Operators: As specified in Section 40_05_57.23. a. Provide certification from both the motorized operator manufacturer and the gate manufacturer confirming that the proposed gate stem configuration has been coordinated with motorized operator selection. 1) Confirm that the proposed gate stem configuration provides the most efficient combination of stem diameter, pitch, and lead. 2) Confirm the design will keep the operating temperature at the stem nut to a minimum during operation. 3) Confirm the design will meet the specified motorized operator operating speed requirements. C. Shop drawings: 1. Layout and installation drawings for each gate size and type. 2. For coordination purposes, gate manufacturer shall supply calculations verifying the suitability of the selected motorized operator for the application. For each gate include: a. Open/close speed per Section 40_05_57.23. b. The maximum torque required for operation of the gate (including breakaway from seat) with a safety factor of 1.4. c. The torque supplied by the motorized operator scheduled in Section 40_05_57.23 for the operating speed specified in Section 40_05_57.23. d. The thrust output capacity of the motorized operator with the furnished motor. 3. Wall thimbles design. 4. Submit calculations and design data substantiating conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. 5. Gate opening and closing thrust forces that will be transmitted to the support structure with operator at extreme positions and load. 6. Torque required to open and close the gate, including maximum torque at any point along gate travel. Indicate thrust valve and stem factor. 7. Breakaway torque from seat. Indicate thrust valve and stem factor. D. Calculations: 1. Calculations and design data substantiating conformance with the drawings and specifications. October 2016 40_05_59.34-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_59.34 (FS-100) E. Vendor operation and maintenance manuals: As specified in Section 01_78_23. F. Commissioning submittals: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory markings: 1. Mark gates according to the schedule numbers when such numbers are used. 2. Where thimbles, frames, and other components are not interchangeable, match mark components. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 01_78_36. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Whipps, Inc. of Athol, Massachusetts; Series 900. B. Operator anchor bolts and wall thimbles: Provided by manufacturer of slide gates. C. All gates in this Section: Supplied by 1 manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless steel: ASTM A276, Type 304. 1. Components or structural shapes which are welded: ASTM A276, Type 304L. 2. All wetted and unwetted parts including all fasteners and hardware, except as specified in this Section, shall be stainless steel. B. Ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene: ASTM D1248 and D4020. C. Neoprene: ASTM D2000, Grade 2 BC 510. D. Manganese bronze: ASTM B584, UNS Number C86500 or Alloy 432. E. Silicon bronze: ASTM B584 UNS Number C87300. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Slide: 1. Type 304L stainless steel. 2. Rectangular or square. 3. Fabricated with a flat plate reinforced with formed plates or structural members. October 2016 40_05_59.34-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_59.34 (FS-100) B. Frame: 1. Construct gate frame of Type 304L stainless steel structural members or formed plate welded to form a rigid 1-piece frame. 2. Mounting: As scheduled on the Drawings. 3. Adjustable ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene pressure pads. 4. Flush bottom type unless otherwise scheduled on the Drawings. 5. Allow replacement of top, side, and bottom seals without removing the gate frame from concrete or wall thimble. 6. Machine surfaces matching with thimble. Provide seal between gate frame and thimble that will meet leakage performance requirements. 7. Embedded gates: Extend frame to provide access to pressure pad adjusting screws (For seal design alternatives A and B only). C. Yoke for self-contained gates: 1. Type 304L stainless steel. 2. Extend guides and frame so that bottom of yoke is at least 12 inches above top of slide at full open position. 3. Bolt or weld to frame. 4. Provide mounting plate on top of yoke to mount operator. 5. Design yoke to allow removal of gate slide. 6. Gates with enclosures: a. Provide extension spool piece of Type 304 stainless steel to support the motor operator outside the enclosure. D. Guides: 1. Type 304L stainless steel with ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene insert in contact with gate. 2. Minimum face width of 1 inch. 3. Length: To support the slide fully in the open position. 4. Anchor bolts shall not pass through the guides and seals. E. Seals: 1. Designed to achieve the specified leakage requirements. 2. Sealing and sliding surfaces shall provide a low coefficient of friction with the surface of the slide. 3. Field replaceable without removing gate from concrete or wall thimble. 4. Anchor bolts shall not pass through the guides and seals. 5. J-bulb seals are not acceptable. 6. Minimum seating surface width: 3/4 inch in contact with slide. 7. Bottom seal: a. Resilient neoprene, minimum durometer of 45. b. Attached to the bottom of the slide or embedded in gate frame invert. 8. Side and top seals: a. Provide one of the seal design alternatives listed below. b. Seal design alternative A: 1) UHMWPE fixed sealing surfaces that surround the clear opening. 2) Held in place in the guide with Type 304 stainless steel fasteners. 3) Seal compression shall be maintained by UHMWPE field adjustable pressure pads mounted to the slide with Type 304 stainless steel fasteners. October 2016 40_05_59.34-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_59.34 (FS-100) c. Seal design alternative B: 1) Neoprene crown seal with UHMWPE bearing bars. 2) Attached to the slide with Type 304 stainless steel fasteners. 3) Crown seal shall be actuated by water pressure in either the seating or unseating direction. 4) Primary contact with the slide shall be through the UHMWPE bearing bar. The neoprene shall not be solely relied upon for the contact seal. 5) Seal compression may be maintained by UHMWPE field adjustable pressure pads mounted to the guide with Type 304 stainless steel fasteners. d. Seal design alternative C: 1) UHMWPE self-adjusting type seals: Utilize a continuous compression cord to ensure contact between the seals and the slide. 2) Side seals: a) Attach to frame using one of the following approaches. (1) Held in place between the front and back angles of the guide with Type 316 stainless steel bolts passing through the guide and seal along the length of the guide. (2) Held in place between front and back of a formed, one piece, rigid channel guide. Attach seals to frame using Type 316 stainless steel bolts. b) Design and installation shall provide access to and removal of the bolt to allow removal of the side seal without removing the gate from the concrete. 3) Top Seal: UHMWPE self-adjusting type seal with double compression cord. F. Stem: 1. Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Machine cut or rolled threads. 3. Stem couplings: a. Silicon bronze or Type 304 stainless steel. b. Threaded and keyed to stem or threaded and bolted to stem. 4. Stem guides: a. Type 304 stainless steel. b. Split collar. c. Adjustable in 2 directions. d. Ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene bushing. 5. Provide manganese bronze stop collar on stem above actuator. 6. Drill and connect stem to slide structural sections with Type 304 stainless steel bolts. 7. Minimum Stem Diameter: 1-1/2 inch. 8. Coordinate the selection of the gate stem configuration with the gate operator and operating speed. a. The selected gate stem configuration shall provide the most efficient combination of stem diameter/pitch/lead and keep the operating temperature at the stem nut to a minimum during operation. b. For motorized applications, if the proposed gate stem configuration would result in any deviation from the operating rise rate specified in Section 40_05_57.23, submit proposed deviation for approval by the Engineer. October 2016 40_05_59.34-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_59.34 (FS-100) G. Operating nut: 1. Locate at operator level. 2. Material: Manganese bronze. H. Gate operators: As specified in Section 40_05_57.23. I. Coordination with motorized operator supplier: 1. Sizes and model numbers of motorized operators for gates are estimated in Section 40_05_57.23. Gate manufacturer’s responsibility shall extend to confirming these sizes and model numbers for each gate based on: a. Design seating and unseating head. b. Open/close speed specified in Section 40_05_57.23. c. Torque safety factor of 1.4, minimum, applied to the maximum torque requirement, including breakaway from seat. 2. Verify, in writing, that the motorized operators are adequately sized. 3. If the motorized operators are not properly sized for each furnished gate, notify the Engineer immediately. 4. In the event that a different size or model is required for any gate, gate manufacturer shall advise Contractor of the proper selection and Contractor shall provide, at no additional cost, the proper operator. 5. The gate supplier shall machine the stem nuts, provide proper mounting adaptation, and adaptation hardware to ensure adequate interface between the motorized operators and the slide gates. J. Bolts, nuts, and fittings: Type 304 stainless steel. K. Anchor bolts: 1. Type 304 stainless steel. 2.04 WALL THIMBLES A. Provide wall thimbles for gates where scheduled and as indicated on the Drawings. B. F-section of a depth equal to the thickness of the structure wall upon which the gate is mounted. 1. Modify F-sections where required for F-section and pipe bell ring connections in a wall. a. Provide flange-by-mechanical joint or flange by push on joint wall thimble where ductile iron piping connects to the wall thimble. Ensure that joint wall thimble has sufficient embedment to resist pipe thrust. b. Provide flange-by-bell ring wall thimble insert where reinforced concrete piping connects to the wall thimble. C. Fabricated Type 304L stainless steel of sufficient section to resist permanent distortion; minimum 3/8 inch thick plate. D. Width of mounting flange of wall thimble: 1/2 inch wider than mounting flange of gate. E. Fully machine front flange of thimble to a plane Drill and tap to match the drilling on the flange back gate seat. F. Clearly mark top center of each thimble for installation. October 2016 40_05_59.34-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_59.34 (FS-100) G. Provide Type 304 stainless steel studs for attaching the gate frame. H. Seal joint between thimble and gate watertight, in accordance with AWWA C561. I. To permit entrapped air to escape as the thimble is being cast in concrete, drill holes in each entrapment zone formed by ribs, flanges, and water stops. J. Provide annular weep ring to control seepage and resist thrust, where needed to anchor the pipe thrust restraint system. 1. Continuously weld weep ring to outside of the wall thimble. 2. Weep ring shall be minimum 1/4 inch thick and minimum 2 inches deep. 2.05 FINISHES A. Stainless steel: 1. Shot blast gates and wall thimbles after fabrication to remove weld splatter and to polish scratches. 2. Clean the entire surface to produce an even color and sheen. B. Operators, stands, and other accessory equipment: Surface preparation, factory prime, field prime, and finish coats as specified in Section 09_96_01. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Shop assembly: 1. Gates shall be factory assembled, adjusted, and tested. 2. Mount all accessories and appurtenances including, but not limited to, motor operators, and limit switches so that the complete system may be tested at the factory. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount thimbles and gates plumb in both vertical planes and level in horizontal plane. B. Coat seating surfaces between frame and wall thimble with a waterproof plastic compound or provide EPDM gasket prior to tightening frame studs. C. Adjust wedges or other parts of the gate to the point where it will not be possible to insert a 0.004 inch feeler gauge between the gate slide and the gate frame at any point. 1. Securely lock wedges into position after adjustment. D. Adjust limit switches in electric and hydraulic operators in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Face mounted gates: 1. Where wall thimbles are not provided, mount gate to wall with anchor bolts and provide a 1-inch grout pad in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. October 2016 40_05_59.34-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_59.34 (FS-100) F. Embedded gates: 1. Provide blockouts in sidewalls and channel bottom for installation of gates. 2. After gate placement, adjustment, and alignment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, grout frame with non-shrink grout. 3.02 COMMISSIONING A. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide certificates: a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. b. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. 2. Manufacturer’s Representative onsite requirements: a. Functional Testing: 1 trips, 1 day minimum each. 3. Training: a. Same trip as functional testing trip: 2 hours per session. 4. Process Operational Period: a. As required by Owner or Contractor. B. Source testing: 1. Slide gate: a. Test witnessing: Not witnessed. b. Conduct leak test in accordance with AWWA C560. 2. Electrical Instrumentation and Controls: a. Test witnessing: Not witnessed. b. Conduct testing as specified in Section 40_80_01. C. Functional testing: 1. Valves: a. Test witnessing: Witnessed. b. Conduct leak test in accordance with AWWA C560. c. After gate installation and checking, run gates through at least 2 full cycles from the closed position to full open position and back to the closed position. d. Verify functionality of all switches and controls. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. The Slide Gate Schedule is included on the following page(s). The Slide Gate Schedule is not a take-off list. Contractor shall provide additional gates per specifications and as indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 40_05_59.34-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_59.34 (FS-100) HEAVY-DUTY FABRICATED STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATE SCHEDULE Gate Tag Number or Mark Number Drawing Number Location Opening Size W X H (inches) Wall Opening Shape Gate Opening Direction Type of Closure(1) Gate Design Pressure(2) Gate Mounting(3) Type of Frame(4) Stem Type(5) Type of Operator(6) Minimum Gate Travel (inch) Seating (feet) Unseating (feet) UVG441, UVG442, M-UVD-01 UV Channel 4'-10" x 5'-0" Rectangu lar UP FB 6 n/a EMB SC RS MO 48" UVG443, UVG444 M-UVD-01 UV Channel 4'-10" x 5'-0" Rectangu lar UP FB 6 n/a FM SC RS MO 48" Notes: (1) Closure: DO = Downward Opening; FB = Flush Bottom; STD = Standard. See Typical Detail P710. (2) Gate design pressure applied at centerline of gate. (3) Mounting: FM = Face Mounted; EC = Inside Existing Channel; EMB = Embedded; SP = Spigotback; FWT = "F" Wall Thimble; EWT = "E" Wall Thimble (4) Frame: SC = Self-Contained; NSC = Non-Self Contained; F = Flatback; FL = Flangeback. October 2016 40_05_61-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_61 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_61 PLUG VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Non-lubricated plug valves. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning and Process Start-Up. 2. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 2. C517 - Resilient-Seated Cast Iron Eccentric Plug Valves. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 2. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 40_05_51.01. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NON-LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES A. Manufacturers: The following or no equal: 1. Milliken Valve Company. B. Design: 1. Type: Non-lubricated eccentric type, in accordance with AWWA C517. 2. Plug face: Resilient material that operates satisfactorily at a temperature of 180 degrees Fahrenheit continuous and 215 degrees Fahrenheit intermittent, except for valves in compressed air or digester gas service. a. Valves in compressed air service: Resilient material suitable for continuous duty at 250 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Valves in digester gas service: Resilient material suitable for petroleum or digester gas at continuous duty at 180 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Compression washer: Provide flat compression washer made of Teflon, or of a material having equal physical characteristics on valve stem between plug and bonnet. October 2016 40_05_61-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_61 (FS-100) 4. Stem seals: Provide stem seals serviceable without unbolting the valve bonnet assembly. 5. Grit excluders: Provide PTFE grit excluders at upper plug journals to prevent entry of foreign solids in bearing area. 6. Clearly mark valves to indicate their open and closed positions. 7. Provide valves with ends as required by piping details indicated on the Drawings. 8. Grooved end body valves: a. Usage: Plug valves with grooved ends may be used in piping systems specified in the Piping Schedule to have grooved end joints and as indicated on the Drawings. b. Grooved end joint design: In accordance with AWWA C606. C. Materials: 1. Body and plug: ASTM A126, Class B, cast-iron, with plug face of neoprene material suitable for the intended service as specified under paragraph "Design" above. 2. Body seats in valves 3 inch size and larger: Provide with overlay of not less than 90-percent nickel and minimum thickness of 1/8 inch on surfaces contacting the plug face. 3. Stem bearing and bottom bearing: Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Internal parts, except the body and plug: Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Exposed nuts, bolts, and washers: Zinc plated. Exception: Exposed nuts, bolts, and washers for buried service: Stainless steel. 2.02 VALVE OPERATORS A. Furnish valves with an operating wrench or worm gear operator: 1. Equip valves 4 inch nominal size and smaller with a lever operator. 2. Equip valves 6 inch nominal size and larger with a worm gear operator. 2.03 COATING A. Coat interior metal surfaces as specified in Section 40_05_51.01. B. Coat exterior metal surfaces as specified in Section 09_96_01. C. Field applied coating of valve exterior: 1. Match color and be compatible with manufacturer’s coating system and as specified in Section 09_96_01. a. When shop applied finish coating matches field applied coating on adjacent piping, touch up shop coating in damaged areas in accordance with instructions recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. When shop applied coating does not match field coating on adjacent piping, or when damage has occurred to the shop applied coating that requires more than touchup, blast clean valve surfaces or utilize other surface preparation recommended by the manufacturer of the coating material and apply the coating system used for coating adjacent piping. October 2016 40_05_61-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_61 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install valves as specified in Section 40_05_51.01 and the manufacturer’s instructions. B. Install valves so that in the closed position the pressure in the pipeline applies a seating head on the valves. C. Lubrication: Lubricate plug valves and fill extended lubricant pipes with lubricant suitable for service intended. D. Install valves so that in the open position the plug is located in the top half of the valve body. 3.02 COMMISSIONING AND PROCESS START-UP REQUIREMENTS A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services from each manufacturer for all valves supplied: 1. As specified in Section 40_05_51.01. 2. Source testing. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_63-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_63 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_63 BALL VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Metal body ball valves and plastic body ball valves. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 2. Section 40_05_00.01 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. 2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C507 - Standard for Ball Valves 6 Inch Through 48 Inch. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A216 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service. 3. A351 - Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings use: 1. Metal body ball valves on metallic pipelines. 2. Plastic body ball valves on plastic pipelines. B. Do not use metal body ball valves in sodium hypochlorite or sodium bisulfite systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 40_05_51.01. B. Metal body ball valves: 6 inches and larger only. Submit affidavit of compliance in accordance with AWWA C507. C. Operation and maintenance manual. October 2016 40_05_63-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_63 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL BODY BALL VALVES, LESS THAN 6 INCH SIZE A. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal: 1. Apollo Valves as manufactured by Conbraco Industries, Inc. 2. Metso Automation/Jamesbury. 3. NIBCO, Inc. 4. Flow-Tek, Inc. B. General: 1. Type: Non-lubricated, full port and capable of sealing in either direction. 2. End connections: a. Threaded or solder ends for sizes 3-inch and smaller. b. Class 150 flanged for sizes larger than 3 inch. 1) Flanges: In accordance with ASME B16.1 standards. 3. Stem packing: Manually adjustable while valve is under pressure. 4. Shafts: a. Rigidly connected to the ball by a positive means. 1) Design connection to transmit torque equivalent to at least 75 percent of the torsional strength of the shaft. 5. Handles: Stainless steel latch lock handle with vinyl grip and stainless steel nut designed to open and close the valve under operating conditions. 6. Temperature limits: Suitable for operation between minus 20 and 350 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Materials: 1. Valves in copper lines: Bronze body. 2. Valves in steel and ductile iron piping: Ductile iron or cast steel body. 3. Valves in stainless steel piping: Stainless steel body, material type to match piping material as specified in Section 40_05_00.01. 4. Ball: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, Type 316 in digester gas applications. 5. Seats: PTFE. 6. Stem seals: PTFE or Viton. 7. Bearings: Self-lubricated, corrosion resistant material that will not contaminate potable water. 8. Valves for combustible fluid applications (digester gas, natural gas, fuel oil, etc.) must be of fire safe design. 2.02 PLASTIC BODY BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Asahi America. 2. Chemtrol Division, NIBCO, Inc. 3. Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc. 4. Georg Fisher Piping Systems. B. General: 1. Type: Non-lubricated and capable of sealing in either flow direction. 2. End connections: True union; solvent or heat welded to piping. 3. Operator handle: Lever. October 2016 40_05_63-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_63 (FS-100) C. Materials: 1. Body: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 2. Ball: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 3. Seats: PTFE (Teflon). 4. O-rings: Viton. D. Valve actuator: 1. Manually operated valves: Self-locking worm gear type actuator with position indicator. Permanently lubricate gearing. Provide adjustable screws to stop travel at both open and closed positions. 2. Electric motor operated valves: Provide electric motor operator as specified in Section 40_05_57.23. E. Factory testing: 1. Shell test: With valve in the open position, conduct hydrostatic test of the valve body at 1.5 times the maximum rated pressure for 7 minutes. 2. Seat test: With valve in the closed position, conduct hydrostatic test of the valve seat seals at 1.1 times the maximum rated pressure for 7 minutes. Test each seat independently. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install each type of valve in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions. B. Special techniques: 1. PVC ball valves for hypochlorite service: a. Provide valve with factory drilled 0.125-inch hole in the upstream side of the ball. b. Provide an engraved plastic tag permanently attached to the valve stem stating "One side of ball drilled for hypochlorite service". 3.02 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services from each manufacturer for all valves supplied: 1. As specified in Section 40_05_51.01. 2. Source testing. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_65.24-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_65.24 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_65.24 CHECK VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Plastic ball check valves. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. 2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Inch Standard. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C508 - Standard for Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service 2 Inch Through 24 Inch (50-mm Through 600-mm) NPS. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 2. A313 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire. 3. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 4. B582 - Standard Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron-Molybdenum-Copper Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 5. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Check valves: When not otherwise specified as indicated on the Drawings, provide check valves suitable for service as follows: a. In either horizontal or vertical position. b. Suitable for service working pressures up to 150 pounds per square inch gauge. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 40_05_51.01. October 2016 40_05_65.24-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_65.24 (FS-100) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLASTIC BALL CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Chemtrol Division of Nibco. 2. Georg Fischer Piping Systems. 3. Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc. B. Valves: Ball type: 1. Material: Polyvinyl chloride. 2. End connection: Double or single union-type. 3. Seals: Viton. C. Valve body material: 1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), Polypropylene (PP) or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), as best suited for each individual service condition. D. Union connections material: 1. NPT or socket ends conforming to ASME B16.5 pipe flanges and flange fittings, class 150. E. Seats and seals material: 1. EPDM, Buna-N, or Viton. F. Maximum inlet pressure rating: 1. PVC, CPVC or PVDF: 150 pound per square inch at 77 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. PP: 100 pounds per square inch at 77 degrees Fahrenheit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install valves as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.02 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services from each manufacturer for all valves supplied: 1. As specified in Section 40_05_51.01. 2. Source testing. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_05_67.37-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_67.37 (FS-100) SECTION 40_05_67.37 PRESSURE REDUCING AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Pressure reducing and pressure relief valves for water, air, sludge and chemical service. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150 and 300. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 40_05_51.01. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Water pressure reducing valves, 2 1/2 inches and smaller: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Watts Regulator, Series LF223. b. Wilkins, 500 Series. 2. Direct operated, single seat type pressure reducing valve. 3. Materials: a. Body and spring cover: Bronze. b. Valve seat: Series 300 stainless steel. c. Diaphragm: Buna Nitrile. d. Disk: Buna Nitrile. B. Water pressure reducing valves, 3 inches and larger: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal: a. Watts ACV Series 115. b. Cla-Val Model 90-01. October 2016 40_05_67.37-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_67.37 (FS-100) 2. Design: a. Pilot controlled, hydraulically operated, diaphragm actuated, globe patterned valve. b. Rated for 125 pounds per square inch gauge. c. Pilot line: Equipped with a strainer. d. Flanges: 150 pound rating, in accordance with ASME B16.42. 3. Materials: a. Body and cover: Cast iron ASTM A48 or Ductile Iron ASTM A536. b. Valve trim: Bronze. c. Pilot control: Cast bronze with Series 303 stainless steel trim. d. Diaphragm: Nylon reinforced Buna N. 2.02 WATER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A. Water pressure relief valves: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal: a. Watts ACV Series 116. b. Cla-Val Model 50-01. 2. Design: a. Pilot controlled, hydraulically operated, diaphragm actuated, globe patterned valve. b. Rated for 125 pounds per square inch gauge. c. Pilot line: Equipped with a strainer. d. End connections: 1) 2 1/2 inch and smaller: Screwed. 2) 3 inch and larger: 150 pound rated flanges in accordance with ASME B16.42. 3. Materials: a. Body and cover: Cast iron ASTM A48 or Ductile Iron ASTM A536. b. Valve trim: Bronze. c. Pilot control: Cast bronze with Series 303 stainless steel trim. d. Diaphragm: Nylon reinforced Buna N. 2.03 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES FOR CHEMICAL SERVICE A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Plast-O-Matic, Series RVT, RVDT or TRVDT. 2. Asahi/America. 3. Georg Fischer Piping Systems. B. Materials: 1. Valve body: CPVC or PVC. 2. U-cup seals: a. Polymer service: Viton. b. Hypochlorite service: Viton. c. Caustic service: EPDM. d. Sodium Bisulfite: EPDM. 3. Adjusting bolt, locknut, control spring and fasteners: stainless steel. C. Design: 1. Pressure rating: Not less than 150 pounds per square inch. 2. In-line or angle pattern design, size as indicated on the Drawings. October 2016 40_05_67.37-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_05_67.37 (FS-100) 3. End connections: a. 1 inch and smaller: Threaded. b. Larger than 1 inch: Flanged. 4. Relief set point: a. Externally adjustable without removing valve from piping system. b. Set valve to open at 10 pounds per square inch more than pump discharge pressure at operating point, or as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Section 40_05_51.01. 3.02 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. B. Manufacturer services from each manufacturer for all valves supplied, 1. As specified in Section 40_05_51.01. 2. Source testing. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_61_00-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) SECTION 40_61_00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General requirements applicable to all Process Control and Instrumentation Work. 2. General requirements for process control and instrumentation submittals. 3. As specified in this Section, some PLC programming and SCADA/HMI software configuration will be provided by the Owner, hereinafter referred to as the Owner or Programmer. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_11_00 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01_14_00 - Work Restrictions. 3. Section 01_29_73 - Schedule of Values. 4. Section 01_31_19 - Project Meetings. 5. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 6. Section 01_35_22 - Safety Plan. 7. Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements. 8. Section 01_45_00 - Quality Control. 9. Section 01_60_00 – Product Requirements. 10. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 11. Section 01_77_00 - Closeout Procedures. 12. Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 13. Section 01_81_01 - Project Design Criteria. 14. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 15. Section 01_81_04 - Wind Design Criteria. 16. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 17. Section 26_05_09 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower. 18. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 19. Section 40_80_01 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning. C. Interfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components: 1. Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary information furnished by various equipment manufacturers, which identify a minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to, but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with mechanical systems. 2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished, include all costs to add any additional instruments, wiring, control system inputs/outputs, controls, interlocks, electrical hardware etc., which may be October 2016 40_61_00-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished: a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer’s wiring requirements. 3. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure that all items related to the instrumentation and control systems are completely accounted for. Include any items indicated on the Drawings or in Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work: a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer conflict to the Engineer as soon as possible for resolution. D. All instrumentation, and control equipment and systems for the entire project to comply with the requirements specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications, whether referenced in the individual Equipment Specifications or not: 1. The requirements of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications apply to all Instrumentation and Control Work specified in other Specifications, including HVAC controls, packaged mechanical systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc. 2. Inform all vendors supplying instrumentation, control systems, panels, and/or equipment of the requirements of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications. 3. The Owner is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of the Contractor to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications’ requirements. E. Contract Documents: 1. General: a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used together in order to fully describe the Work. 2. Contract Drawings: a. The Instrumentation and Control Drawings show in a diagrammatic manner, the desired locations, and arrangements of the components of the Instrumentation Work. Follow the Drawings as closely as possible, use professional judgment and coordinate with the other trades to secure the best possible installation, use the entire Drawing set for construction purposes. b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc. are approximate only, exercise professional judgment in executing the Work to ensure the best possible installation: 1) The equipment locations and dimensions indicated on the Drawings and elevations are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine the proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all instrumentation and control equipment is compatible with other equipment and space requirements. Make changes required to accommodate differences in equipment dimensions. 2) The Contractor has the freedom to select any of the named manufacturers as identified in the individual Specifications; however, the Engineer has designed the spatial equipment layout based upon a single manufacturer and has not confirmed that every named manufacturer’s equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the equipment being furnished fits within the defined space. October 2016 40_61_00-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) c. Installation details: 1) The Contract Drawings include installation details showing means and methods for installing instrumentation and control equipment. For cases where typical details are not provided or compatible with an installed location, develop installation details that are necessary for completing the Work, and submit these details for review by the Engineer. d. Loop Diagrams: 1) Loop diagrams are provided by the Owner. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Code compliance: 1. The following codes and standards are hereby incorporated into this Section: a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1) RP 550 - Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems; Part II-Process Stream Analyzers; Section 5-Oxygen Analyzers. 2) RP 551 - Process Measurement Instrumentation. c. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1) 9001 - Quality Management Systems - Requirements. d. International Society of Automation (ISA): 1) 5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 2) 5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams. 3) 20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. e. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1) 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). f. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). g. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). h. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1) 508 - Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment. 2) 508A - Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Panels. B. Compliance with Laws and Regulations: 1. As specified in Document 00_72_00. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations in accordance with: 1. Factory Mutual (FM). 2. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 4. International Society of Automation (ISA). 5. International Organization for Standardization (ISO). 6. National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 8. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). October 2016 40_61_00-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) 10. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 11. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). B. Specific definitions: 1. Control circuit: Any circuit operating at 120 volts alternating current (VAC) or direct current (VDC) or less, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of information (including performing logic) and not the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device. 2. Panel: An instrument support system that may be a flat surface, a partial enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems. 3. Power circuit: Any circuit operating at 90 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device. 4. Signal circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 50 VAC or VDC, which conveys analog information or digital communications information. 5. Digital bus: A communication network, such as PROFIBUS, Foundation Fieldbus, or DeviceNet, allowing instruments and devices to transmit data, control functions and diagnostic information. 6. 2-Wire transmitter (loop powered): A transmitter that derives its operating power supply from the signal transmission circuit and requires no separate power supply connections. As used in this Section, 2-wire transmitter refers to a transmitter that provides a signal such as 4 to 20 mA 24VDC regulation of a signal in a series circuit with an external 24 VDC driving potential: a. Fieldbus communications signal or both. 7. Powered transmitters: A transmitter that requires a separate power source (120 VAC, 240 VAC, etc.) in order for the transmitter to develop its signal. As used in this Section, the produced signal may be a 4 to 20 mA 24VDC signal, a digital bus communications signal or both. 8. Modifications: Changing, extending, interfacing to, removing or altering an existing circuit. C. NEMA: 1. Type 1 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 2. Type 3R enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 3. Type 4 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 4. Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 5. Type 12 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. D. Acronym definitions: 1. DPDT: Double-pole, double-throw. 2. ES: Enterprise system: Computer based communications or data sharing system utilized for non-process control functions such as E-mail, sharing files, creating documents, etc. 3. FAT: Factory acceptance test also known as Source Test. 4. HART: Highway addressable remote transducer. 5. HOA: Hand-Off-Auto control function. In the Hand mode, equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed based upon hardwired control circuits completely independent of the PLC with minimum interlocks and permissive conditions. In the Auto mode, equipment is started or stopped and valves are opened or closed through a control algorithm within the PLC software. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding from the PLC control. October 2016 40_61_00-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) 6. HMI: Human machine interface is a software application that presents information to an operator or user about the state of a process, and to accept and implement the operators control instructions. Typically information is displayed in a graphical format. 7. I/O: Input/Output. 8. IP: Internet protocol or ingress protection. 9. LCP: Local control panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an HMI, pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc. and does not contain a PLC or RIO. 10. LAN: Local area network: A control or communications network that is limited to the physical boundaries of the facility. 11. NJB: Network junction box. An enclosure that contains multiple access points to various networks within the facility. Networks could be Ethernet, Ethernet/IP, Fieldbus, RIO, etc. 12. P&ID: Process and instrumentation diagram. 13. PC: Personal computer. 14. PCIS: Process control and instrumentation system: Includes the entire instrumentation system, the entire control system, and all of the Work specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications and depicted on the Instrumentation Drawings. This includes all the PCS and instruments and networking components as well as the various servers, workstations, thin clients, etc. 15. PCS: Process Control System: A general name for the computerized system that gathers and processes data from equipment and sensors and applies operational controls to the process equipment. It includes the PLCs and/or RIOs, LOIs, HMIs, both LCPs, VCPs and all data management systems accessible to staff. 16. PLC: Programmable logic controller. 17. RIO: Remote I/O device for the PLC consisting of remote I/O racks, or remote I/O blocks. 18. RTU: Remote telemetry unit: A controller typically consisting of a PLC, and a means for remote communications. The remote communications devices typically are radios, modems, etc. 19. SCADA: Supervisory control and data acquisition system: A general name for the computerized system that gathers and processes data from sensors and equipment located outside of the facility, such as wells, lift stations, metering stations etc. 20. SPDT: Single-pole, double-throw. 21. SPST: Single-pole, single-throw. 22. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. 23. VCP: Vendor control panel: Control panels that are furnished with particular equipment by a vendor other than the Owner or Contractor. These panels may contain PLCs, RIO, LOI, HMI, etc. 24. WAN: Wide area network: A control or communications network that extends beyond the physical boundaries of the facility. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General requirements: 1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and completing the instrumentation and control system work indicated on the October 2016 40_61_00-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) Drawings and specified in the Specifications and reasonably inferable there from including but not limited to: a. Preparing hardware submittals for field instrumentation. b. Prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals. c. Procure all hardware. d. Fabricate panels. e. Perform bench calibration and verify calibration after installation. f. Oversee, document, and certify loop testing. g. Oversee, document, and certify system. h. Installation Testing. i. Oversee and document Functional Testing. j. Conduct the Process Operational Period and the Instrumentation and Controls Process Performance Testing. k. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals. l. Conduct training classes. m. Provide Record Documents. n. Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCS and interfacing devices. o. Perform all required corrective and preventative maintenance. 2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power, instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to final utilization equipment, including all connections, testing, calibration of all equipment furnished by others, as well as equipment furnished by the Contractor, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are necessary for successful operation. 3. The Owner will provide the configuration and programming for parts of the PLC and PC based control system. 4. Owner will provide the control panel hardware and software. B. Modified System: 1. Disconnect/abandon existing PLC, Newtork equipment, etc. at the Sample Building. Work shall not be completed until the sample instrumentation is online at the UV Building. 2. Demolish/relocate all sample instrumentation and support equipment at the sample building as indicated in the P&IDs. 3. Install new UV System, instrumentation, Master Control Panel, sample station, and network equipment in the new UV Building. a. Coordinate network rack installation and networking terminations with the Fort Collins IT department. C. Operating facility: 1. Portions of this existing facility must remain fully functional throughout the entire construction period. In consideration of this requirement, comply with the following guidelines: a. All outages must be of minimal duration and fully coordinated and agreed to by the Owner. Adjust the construction to meet the requirements of the Owner. b. As weather and facility demand conditions dictate, re-adjust the construction schedule to meet the demands placed upon Owner by its users. October 2016 40_61_00-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) c. Where portions of the Work are in existing facilities and require interface to existing circuits, power systems, controls and equipment, perform comprehensive and detailed field investigations of existing conditions. Determine all information necessary to document, interface with, modify, upgrade, or replace existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment. 2. According to individual circumstances and in compliance with the Drawings, extend or replace conduit and cable connections from existing locations. 3. Where shown or specified, replace existing field instruments with new. 4. The Contractor is responsible for the integrity and measurement accuracy of all loops. However, any defect found in existing equipment is the responsibility of the Owner. 5. The standards of documentation, instrument tagging, cable and conductor termination, terminal identification and labeling that apply to the new installation apply equally to the existing installation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01_33_00 and this Section. B. General: 1. Instruct all equipment suppliers of submittals and operation and maintenance manuals of the requirements in this Section. 2. Furnish the submittals required by each section in the Instrumentation Specifications. 3. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme specified in Section 26_05_53 throughout the Project: a. Uniquely number each wire. b. Wire numbers must appear on all Equipment Drawings. 4. Use equipment and instrument tags, as indicated on the Drawings, for all submittals. C. Submittal preparation: 1. In these Contract Documents, some items of Work are represented schematically, and are designated for the most part by numbers, as derived from criteria in ISA-5.1: a. Employ the nomenclature and numbers designated in this Section and indicated on the Drawings exclusively throughout shop drawings, data sheets, and similar submittals. b. Replace any other symbols, designations, and nomenclature unique to a manufacturer’s, suppliers, or subcontractor’s standard methods with those identified in this Section and indicated on the Drawings. D. Specific submittal requirements: 1. Product data: a. Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and other sections and shown on shop drawings. b. Include: 1) Catalog cuts. 2) Bulletins. 3) Brochures. 4) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents. October 2016 40_61_00-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) 5) Identify on the data sheets the Project name, applicable specification section, and paragraph. 6) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment being furnished. 7) Neatly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not intended to be supplied. c. Use equipment and instrument tags as depicted on the P&IDs for all submittals. d. Adhere to wiring numbering scheme outlined in Section 26_05_53 throughout the Project: 1) Uniquely number each wire per the Specifications. e. Wire numbers must appear on all equipment drawings. 2. Detailed sequence of operation for all equipment or systems. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals: a. As specified in Section 01_78_23. 4. Project Record documents: a. Furnish as specified in Section 01_77_00. 5. Commissioning and Process Start-up Submittals: a. Inform the Owner and or Engineer of the day, date, and time for a scheduled test at least 15 calendar days before the test takes place to allow the Owner and or Engineer sufficient time to plan travel to the test site. b. General testing submittal requirements are specified in this Section. c. Test Procedure Submittals: 1) Submit the proposed procedures to be followed during tests of the PCS and its components in 2 parts: a) Preliminary Submittal: Outline of the specific proposed tests and examples of proposed forms and checklists. b) Detailed Submittal: After successful review of the Preliminary Submittal, submit the proposed detailed test procedures, forms, and checklists. Include a statement of test objectives with the test procedures. d. Provide certified and witnessed test and calibration checklists for each of the following tests: 1) Source Testing: a) Also called Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT): b) Submit completed Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. 2) Functional Testing: a) Loop Validation Tests: (1) Loop Validation Certifications: (a) Complete field device loop tests have been successfully completed for all individual instruments, all separate analog control networks, all valves, all VCPs, all motors, all local operator interface panels, all motor control centers, etc.. b) Calibration, adjustment, and test details for all components and systems. c) Programming. d) Submit completed Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 3) Process Operational Period. October 2016 40_61_00-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) 6. Test reports: a. As specified in Section 01_33_00. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001. B. Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 01_60_00. B. Special instructions: 1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment. C. Tagging: 1. Tag each component and/or instrument to identify its location, instrument tag number, and function in the system. 2. Firmly attach a permanent tag indelibly machine marked with the instrument tag number, as given in the tabulation, on each piece of equipment constituting the PCS. 3. Tag instruments immediately upon receipt in the field. 4. Prominently display identification on the outside of the package. 5. Utilize the Tag and Loop Number identifications shown on the P&IDs. D. Delivery and inspection: 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original container or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of manufacture on label. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Site conditions: 1. Provide a PCS, including all equipment, raceways, and any other components required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for the Site as specified in the General Requirements and below. 2. Seismic classification: a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the seismic requirements for the site, as specified in Section 01_81_02. 3. Wind: a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the site wind loading criteria, as specified in Section 01_81_04. 4. Altitude, temperature and humidity: a. As specified in Section 01_81_00. b. Provide all equipment and instrumentation fully rated for continuous operation at this altitude, temperature and humidity conditions with no additional derating factors applied. c. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all equipment and instrumentation in non-conditioned spaces or outdoors subject to these ambient temperatures 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the October 2016 40_61_00-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature as determined by the equipment manufacturer’s guidelines: 1) Provide all power wiring for these devices (e.g., heaters, fans, etc.), whether or not indicated on the Drawings. 5. Area classifications: a. Furnish enclosures that match the area classifications as specified in Section 26_05_00. 6. Site security: a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the Work on the Site. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. General: 1. As specified in Sections 01_31_19 and 01_75_17. B. General Field Start-up and testing procedures: 1. As specified in Section 01_75_17. C. Installation testing: 1. As specified in Section 01_75_17. 2. Commence after acceptance of all training, wire test, calibration tests, and loop validation tests, and all inspections have demonstrated that the PCIS complies with all Contract requirements. 3. Acceptance of the PCIS Installation testing must be provided in writing by the Owner before the performance testing may begin. D. Functional testing: 1. Representatives from each of the following groups shall be in attendance during the functional Testing: Programmer, UV Supplier. Commence after acceptance of all training, wire test, calibration tests, and loop validation tests, and all inspections have demonstrated that the PCIS complies with all Contract requirements. 2. Loop validation test. 3. As specified in Section 40_80_01. a. Coordinate the scheduling of tests a minimum of 21 days before the estimated completion date of installation and wiring of the PCIS. b. Complete loop validation testing a minimum of 5 days before the pre- commissioning phase of the project. c. Loop validation certifications: 1) After the field device loop tests have been successfully completed as specified in Section 40_80_01 for all individual instruments, all separate analog control networks, all valves, all VCPs, all motors, all local operator interface panels, all motor control centers, etc., submit a certified copy of all test forms signed by the Contractor, Vendor, and the Owner’s representative with test data entered, together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all instrumentation, including all control and signal wiring, has been successfully calibrated, inspected, and tested. a) Acceptance of the PCIS Installation Testing must be provided in writing by the Engineer before the Process Operational Period may begin. October 2016 40_61_00-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) E. Provide all special tools and spare parts, as specified in the Maintenance paragraph of this Section, before Process Operational Period commences, suitably wrapped and identified. F. Process Operational Period: 1. Upon completion of the Process Operational Period, conduct an Instrumentation and Controls Process Performance Test as a condition for Project final completion. 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY (NOT USED) 1.12 SYSTEM PROCESS START-UP A. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design requirements: 1. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain compliance acceptance from the Engineer. 1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE A. Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by the Contract Documents including any calibrations, final adjustments, component replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment or systems in service. B. Furnish all spare parts as required by the Contract Documents. C. Provide additional spare parts specified in other sections of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications. D. Submit all special tools and spare parts, suitably wrapped and identified, before Process Operational Period commences. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide similar items from a single manufacturer throughout the PCIS portion of the Project. B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual instrument and equipment specifications. October 2016 40_61_00-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these devices and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications. B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard as specified in the Contract Documents. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Furnish all meters, instruments, and other components that are the most recent field proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the shop drawings unless otherwise specified to match existing equipment. B. Signal transmission: 1. Analog signals: a. Furnish analog measurements and control signals that vary in direct linear proportion to the measured variable, unless otherwise indicated. b. Furnish electrical analog signals outside control panels that are 4 to 20 milliamperes 24 VDC, except as indicated. c. Analog signals within enclosures may be 1 to 5 VDC. d. Electrically or optically isolate all analog signals from other signals. e. Furnish regulated analog signals that are not affected by changes in supply voltage or load resistance within the unit’s rating. f. Maintain the total 4 to 20 milliamperes loop impedance to 10 percent below the published value at the loop operating voltage. g. Where necessary, reduce loop impedance by providing current-to-current (I/I) isolation amplifiers for signal re-transmission. 2. Discrete input Signals: a. As indicated in the controller hardware specification. 3. Discrete output signals: a. Dry contacts or TRIAC outputs (with express written approval by the Engineer) as needed to coordinate with the field device. b. Provide external terminal block mounted fuse with blown fuse indication for all discrete outputs. c. Provide interposing relays for all discrete outputs for voltage and/or current compatibilities. d. Provide interposing relays as required for functionality of the control circuit. 4. Signal Performance and Design Criteria: a. Stability: 1) After Control have taken corrective action, oscillation of the final control element shall not exceed 2 cycles per minute or a magnitude of motion of 0.5 percent of full travel. October 2016 40_61_00-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) b. Response: 1) Any change in setpoint or controlled variable shall produce a corrective change in position of the final control element and stabilized within 30 seconds. c. Agreement: 1) Setpoint indication of controlled variable and measured indication of controlled variable shall agree within 3 percent of full scale over a 6:1 operating range. d. Repeatability: 1) For any repeated magnitude of control signal, from either an increasing or decreasing direction, the final control element shall take a repeated position within 0.5 percent of full travel regardless of force required to position the final element. e. Sensitivity: 1) Controls shall respond to a setpoint deviations and measured variable deviations within 1.0 percent of full scale. f. Performance: 1) All instruments and control devices shall perform in accordance with the manufacturers’ specifications. C. Discrete circuit configuration: 1. Configure discrete control circuits to fail safe, on loss of continuity or loss of power. 2. Alarm contacts: Fail to the alarm condition. 3. Control contacts fail to the inoperative condition unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. D. Grounding: 1. Provide control panels with a signal ground bus, isolated from the power ground bus: a. Provide multiple panels in one location with a common point for signal ground bus connection to ground. 2. Ground single point ground shields and measurement loops at the source panel external terminals, unless otherwise noted, by bonding to the control panel signal ground bus. 3. Provide isolating amplifiers within control panels for field equipment possessing a grounded input or output, except when the panel circuit is galvanically isolated. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Nameplates: 1. Provide a nameplate for each controller, instrument transducer, instrument power supply, solenoid, or any other control device located either in the field or within panels. 2. All nameplates shall be of identical style, color, and material throughout the facility. 3. Device nameplates shall include: a. Designations as indicated on the Drawings and identified on the Process and Instrumentation Drawings. 1) Device tag and loop number ID. October 2016 40_61_00-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) 2) PLC ID. 3) Power information (e.g. MCP440, 120VAC). b. White lettering on a black background, laminated plastic. 4. All instruments shall be equipped with Type 316 stainless steel nameplate with the instrument tag stamped in 3/8-inch letters and connected to the instrument using Type 316 stainless steel wire. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Provide a complete instrumentation and control system: 1. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to provide a complete and operating electrical, and process control and instrumentation system. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Equipment locations indicated on the Drawings may change due to variations in equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction: 1. Verify all dimensions as indicated on the Drawings: a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and levels. 2. Review all information indicated on the Drawings, including architectural, structural, mechanical, instrumentation, and the accepted electrical, instrumentation, and mechanical shop drawings, and coordinate Work as necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes. 3. Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by the Owner or Engineer. B. Perform all related Electrical Work in accordance with the applicable sections of the Electrical Specifications. C. The PCIS configurations are diagrammatic: 1. The locations of equipment are approximate unless dimensioned. 2. Where Project conditions require, make reasonable changes in locations and arrangements. October 2016 40_61_00-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) D. Field instruments installation: 1. Install field instruments as specified in the Contract Documents, API RP 550 and RP 551, and the manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Mount field instruments so that they can be easily read, readily approached, and easily serviced, and so they do not restrict access to mechanical equipment: a. Mount field instruments on a pipe stand or local panel, if they are not directly mounted, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Provide sun shields for all field electronic instruments exposed to direct sunlight. 3. Make connections from rigid conduit systems to field instruments with PVC coated flexible conduit: a. Type of flexible conduit required for the area classification: 1) Area classification as specified in Section 26_05_00. b. Maximum length of 18 inches. 4. Connect field instruments with cable as specified in the Electrical Specifications, except when the manufacturer requires the use of special cable, or otherwise specified in this Section: a. Special cable applications shall be in accordance with the NEC. 5. Verify the correctness of each installation: a. Polarity of electric power and signal connections. b. Ensure all process connections are free of leaks. E. Conduit, cables, and field wiring: 1. Provide all PCS equipment cables, and process LAN communication networks under the Instrumentation and Control Specifications. 2. Provide terminations and wire identification as specified in the Electrical Specifications. 3. Protect all wiring from sharp edges and corners. 4. Provide all conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. in accordance with all the requirements of the Electrical Specifications. F. Equipment tie-downs: 1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply with seismic and wind bracing requirements, which apply to the Site. 2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., shall be permanently mounted and tied down to structures. G. Existing instrumentation: 1. Clean, recondition and re-calibrate each existing instrument to be reused, removed, or reinstalled using an authorized service facility of the instrument manufacturer. 2. Provide certification of this Work before reinstallation of each instrument. H. Instrument tagging: 1. As specified in Section 26_05_53. 2. Provide all field-mounted instruments with nameplates: a. Nameplates engraved with the instrument’s full tag number as indicated on the Drawings: 1) Affix tags with stainless steel wire fasteners. October 2016 40_61_00-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) 3. Provide all back of panel instruments with nameplates: a. Engraved with the instrument’s full tag number as indicated on the Drawings: 4. Provide all front of panel instruments with a nameplate: 5. Provide all front of panel instruments with a nameplate: a. Engraving to include the following: 1) Instrument’s full tag number 2) Service description. b. Nameplates: 1) Secure nameplates to the panel with stainless steel screws. 2) Use an accepted adhesive if screws would violate the NEMA or other ratings of the enclosure. I. Cable and conductor termination: 1. Terminate all cables and conductors on terminal blocks. 2. Terminal block enclosures: a. Suitable for the area classification as specified in Section 26_05_00. J. Surge protection: 1. Provide outdoor field instrument loops with voltage surge protection units installed on the instruments. 2. Individually fuse each 4 to 20 milliamperes direct current loop with a 1/16 ampere fuse between power supplies and receiver surge protectors. 3. Provide voltage surge protection for 4 wire transmitters and analyzers: a. Protect both power source and signal loop. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Owner Training: 1. Demonstration requirements are specified in Section 40_80_01. 2. General: a. Provide system maintenance and operator training courses for all the instrumentation and control equipment and systems furnished, as described below. 1) All training described below shall be provided by the Contractor. b. Tailor training classes to the specific needs of the class participants: 1) Develop separate courses for operators, maintenance staff, and supervisors: a) The specific categories and number of personnel in each category are identified below. 2) Furnish training courses that are a combination of classroom and hands-on training: 3) Present the minimum number of sessions, specified in Table 40_61_00-3.10-T1, for each course in order to satisfy class size restrictions and limitations scheduling Owner staff. October 2016 40_61_00-17 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) 4) Furnish additional sessions if required to accommodate the total number of personnel identified for each course. 5) Provide training for the UV System as specified in the pre- procurement documents. c. Instructor qualifications: 1) Highly qualified training instructors for technical training with demonstrated expertise in not only control system functionality but also professional training techniques: a) Instructor qualifications are subject to the approval of the Engineer. Table 1 Course Title Minimum Course Length (hours per session) Personnel (Estimated Number of Students) Minimum Number of Sessions System Overview and Training 2 10 1 Instrument Training 4 10 1 3. Training course requirements: a. System overview training: 1) Coordinate training courses that give the Owner’s supervisory level personnel an overview of all elements of the PCIS system that focus on the overall functional aspect of elements of the control system and provide an understanding of the interaction of the various components. b. Instrumentation training: 1) Furnish training covering all instruments and control panels. 2) Furnish the specified quantity of training, allocated to cover new instruments and hardwired controls as specified in this Section and specifically determined in the accepted training plan. 3) Train maintenance staff in the use, cleaning, calibration, maintenance, and troubleshooting of all the instruments furnished within this Project. 4) Furnish training on the operation of new hardwired controls. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Allow for inspection of PCIS installation. 2. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities. 3. Engineer inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage. b. Inspect installation for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around equipment. d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage, and assembly. October 2016 40_61_00-18 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design requirements. f. Inspect cable terminations. g. Inspect/witness instrument calibrations/verifications. 4. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection requirements specified in Section 40_80_01. B. Instrument Installation Inspection: 1. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities. 2. Inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage. b. Inspect the installed arrangement, lay lengths, orientation, piping obstructions, etc., that could affect the instruments accuracy or repeatability. c. Inspect installation for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. d. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around equipment. e. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage, and assembly. f. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design requirements. g. Inspect cable terminations. h. Inspect/witness instrument calibrations/verifications. 3. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection requirements specified in Section 40_80_01. 4. Field acceptance testing: (Functional Testing) is specified in Section 40_80_01. C. Installation supervision: 1. Ensure that the entire PCIS is installed in a proper and satisfactory manner. At a minimum, the Contractor shall provide the following services: a. Installation resources: 1) Coordinate with the Contractor regarding installation requirements of the Contract Documents. b. Provide technical assistance to installation personnel by telephone: 1) Furnish installation personnel with at least one copy of the accepted submittals, including all installation details. c. Periodic inspections during the construction period. d. A complete check of the completed installation to ensure that it is in conformance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer and the Contract Documents. e. Field verify accuracy and calibration of all instruments. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Control valves: 1. Stroke all control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages from the control system as well as local control devices and adjust to verify proper control action, hand switch action, limit switch settings, torque settings, remote control actions, and remote feedback of valve status and position. 2. Check control valve actions and positioner settings with the valves in place to ensure that no changes have occurred since the bench calibration. October 2016 40_61_00-19 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_61_00 (FS-100) B. Make all revisions necessary to the control system software, as directed by the Engineer. 1. It is understood that the Contractor knows and agrees that changes will be required in the control system software during the Source Testing, Functional Testing, Process Operational Period, Process Start-up and during the Project Correction Period. 3.10 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 01_77_00. B. Vacuum clean all control panels and enclosures before process start-up and again after final completion of the project. C. Clean all panel surfaces. D. Return to new condition any scratches and/or defects. E. Wipe all instrument faces and enclosures clean. F. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations in a neat, clean, and organized manner: 1. Neatly coil and label all spare wiring lengths. 2. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive spare wire and cable lengths, as determined by the Engineer. G. As specified in other sections of the Contract Documents. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect all Work from damage or degradation until date of Substantial Completion. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 40_67_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) SECTION 40_67_01 CONTROL SYSTEMS: PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Design, fabrication and assembly of all instrumentation enclosures, control panels and components provided under this contract, including but not limited to: a. Custom built instrumentation and control panels, including all enclosures for hand stations controllers, low voltage power distribution and marshalling panels. b. Control panels furnished as part of equipment systems specified in other Divisions, such as vendor control panels (VCPs) and chemical feed panels. c. Control components. d. Control panel installation. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 3. Section 26_05_00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. Section 26_05_53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26_28_01 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 6. Section 40_61_00 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. C. Provide all control panels identified in Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.41.1 - Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 2. 508A - Standard for Industrial Control Panel. 3. 1283 - Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 4. 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. October 2016 40_67_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) B. Specific definitions: 1. The term “panel” in this Section is interchangeable with the term “enclosure.” 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Panel dimensions: 1. Minimum dimensions are scalable from or as indicated on the Drawings and are based upon manufacturer’s non-certified information. It is the responsibility of the Contractor or manufacturer to design and size all panels: a. Size panels to provide space for all equipment, wiring, terminations, and other items in the panel, including space for future build out. b. Panel sizes that substantially deviate (within 3 inches in any dimension) from the sizes indicated on the Drawings must be approved by the Engineer. c. Maximum panel depth: 30 inches, unless otherwise indicated. B. Structural design: 1. Completed and installed panel work shall safely withstand seismic requirements at the project site as specified in Section 26_05_00. Enclosures and internal equipment shall be braced to prevent damage from specified forces. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 40_61_00. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 40_61_00. 1. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP (NOT USED) 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) October 2016 40_67_01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) 1.14 COMMISSIONING (NOT USED) 1.15 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. As listed below in the individual component paragraphs. B. Provide instruments and other components performing similar functions of the same type, model, or class, and from 1 manufacturer. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Construct and finish enclosures using materials capable of withstanding the mechanical, electrical, and thermal stresses, as well as the effects of humidity and corrosion that are likely to be encountered in normal service: 1. Enclosures shall have the following properties: a. NEMA Type 4: Steel with gasketed door, rain-tight. b. NEMA Type 4X: Type 316 stainless steel (unless Type 304 is indicated on the Drawings). c. NEMA Type 12: Steel with gasketed door, dust-tight. B. Bolting material: 1. Commercial quality 1/2-inch diameter, stainless steel hex-head Grade 5 bolts, nuts, and washers, with unified coarse (UNC) threads. 2. Carriage bolts for attaching end plates. 3. All other bolted joints shall have S.A.E. standard lock washers. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Panels/enclosures: 1. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a. Rittal. b. Pentair (formerly Hoffman Engineering). c. Saginaw Control & Engineering. 2. Panel assembly: a. General guidelines for panel fabrication include: 1) Continuous welds ground smooth. 2) Exposed surfaces free of burrs and sharp edges. 3) Base formed of heavy channel iron, either galvanized or powder coated, minimum 1/2-inch holes at 12-inch spacing to accommodate anchoring of freestanding enclosures to floor. October 2016 40_67_01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) b. Construct enclosure and mounting panel using stretcher-level quality sheet metal having minimum thickness not less than the following sizes (U.S. Standard Gauge): Enclosure Height (inches) Minimum Enclosure Steel Thickness (gauge) Minimum Back Mounting Panel Thickness (gauge) Wall-mounted up to 48 14 14 Up to 57 12 12 57 - 69 12 10 69 - 82 12, except 10 on back 10 82 or more 10 10 1) Use heavier sheet metal to meet seismic requirements at the project site or when required due to equipment requirements. c. Construct supporting frame structure with angled, channeled, or folded rigid section of sheet metal, rigidly attached to and having essentially the same outer dimensions as the enclosure surface and having sufficient torsional rigidity to resist the bending moments applied via the enclosure surface when it is deflected. d. Provide stiffeners for back mounting panels in enclosures larger than 4 feet. In addition, secure the panels in place by collar studs welded to the enclosure. e. Door construction: 1) Turned-back edges suitably braced and supported to maintain alignment and rigidity without sagging. 2) Sufficient width to permit door opening without interference with rear projection of flush-mounted instruments. 3) Heavy-gauge piano-type continuous stainless steel hinges. 4) For NEMA Type 12, Type 4, and Type 4X, provide oil-resistant neoprene sealing gasket and adhesive to seal cover to enclosure. 5) Gasket installed to seal against roll lip on the enclosure opening. f. Latches: 1) For panels, provide each door with a 3-point latching mechanism and locking handle with rollers on the ends of the latch rods. Latch rods shall be connected to a common door handle, hold doors securely, and form a compressed seal between door and gasket, at the top, side, and bottom. a) Provide padlock for each enclosure with padlock provisions. 2) Include an oil-tight key-locking, 3-point latching mechanism on each door: a) Provide 2 keys per panel. b) All locks keyed alike. 3) For large NEMA Type 4 and NEMA Type 4X cabinets not available with 3-point latching hardware, provide multiple clips and padlock hasps. g. Panel cut-outs: 1) Cut, punch, or drill cutouts for instruments, devices, and windows. Smoothly finish with rounded edges. October 2016 40_67_01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) 2) Allow a minimum of 3-inch envelope around all displays, controllers, and monitors. 3) Reinforce around cut-outs with steel angles or flat bars for the following: a) Large panel cutouts; for example, openings for local operator interfaces. b) Pilot device groupings, where the removed metal exceeds 50 percent of the available metal. 3. In addition to the requirements specified above, the following requirements for NEMA Type 4X powder coated stainless steel enclosures apply: a. Minimum 14-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel. b. Captive stainless steel cover screws threaded into sealed wells. c. Inside finish: White polyester powder coating. d. Specifically designed for use with flange-mounted disconnect handles where required or as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Outdoor panels. Supplementary requirements for panels located outdoors are as follows: a. All enclosures located outdoors shall be explicitly designed and rated for outdoor service by the manufacturer. b. Door hardware: Stainless steel. c. Provide factory installed rain canopy and sun shield for all enclosures with operator interface panels. d. Bases: Heavy channel, gasketed stainless steel bases, flanges up, for anchoring to pad. B. Arrangement of components: 1. Arrange panel internal components for external conduit and piping to enter into panel either from above or below. 2. Arrange panel instruments and control devices in a logical configuration, associating pushbutton and selector switches with related readout devices, or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Mount internal control components on an internal back panel. Devices may be mounted on the side panel only by special permission from the Engineer. 4. All control-panel-mounted operator interface devices shall be mounted between 3 feet and 5 feet above finished floor. C. Conductors and cables: 1. Power and control wiring: a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper. b. Insulation: 600 volts type MTW. c. Minimum sizes: 1) Primary power distribution: 12 AWG. 2) Secondary power distribution: 14 AWG. 3) Control: 16 AWG. d. Color: 1) AC power (line and load): Black. 2) AC power (neutral): White. 3) AC control: Red. 4) AC control: Orange for foreign voltages. 5) DC power and control (ungrounded): Blue. 6) DC power and control (grounded): White with Blue stripe. 7) Ground: Green. October 2016 40_67_01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) 2. Signal cables: a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper. b. Insulation: 600 volts, PVC outer jacket. c. Minimum size: 18 AWG paired triad. d. Overall aluminum shield (tape). e. Copper drain wire. f. Color: 1) 2-Conductor: a) Positive (+): Black. b) Negative (-): White and red. 2) 3-Conductor: a) Positive (+): Black. b) Negative (-): Red. c) Signal: White. g. Insulate the foil shielding and exposed drain wire for each signal cable with heat-shrink tubing. D. Conductor identification: 1. Identify each conductor and cable with unique wire numbers as specified in Section 26_05_53. 2. Readily identified without twisting the conductor. E. General wiring requirements: 1. Wiring methods: Wiring methods and materials for panels shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for General Purpose (no open wiring) unless otherwise specified. 2. Install all components in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions included in the listing and labeling. 3. Provide a nameplate on the cover of the control panel identifying all sources of power supply and foreign voltages within the control panel. 4. Provide transformers, protective devices, and power supplies required to convert the supply voltage to the needed utilization voltage. 5. Provide power surge protection for all control panels. 6. Provide signal surge protection within control panels for each analog I/O, discrete I/O, and data line (Copper Ethernet, Coax, Fieldbus signals) that originates from outdoor devices. 7. Provide non-metallic ducts for routing and organization of conductors and cables: a. Provide wiring separation plan. b. Size ducts for ultimate build-out of the panel, or for 20-percent spare, whichever is greater. c. Provide separate ducts for signal and low-voltage wiring from power and 120-VAC control wiring: 1) 120 VAC: Grey colored ducts. 2) 24 VDC: White colored ducts. 8. Cables shall be fastened with cable-mounting clamps or with cable ties supported by any of the following methods: a. Screw-on cable tie mounts. b. Hammer-on cable-tie mounting clips. c. Fingers of the nonmetallic duct. October 2016 40_67_01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) 9. Wire Ties: a. No wire ties inside wire duct. b. Use Panduit Cable tie installation tool, with tension control/cutoff. c. Verify cut ends are cut flush filed smooth after installed. 10. Provide supports at the ends of cables to prevent mechanical stresses at the termination of conductors. 11. Support panel conductors where necessary to keep them in place. 12. Wiring to rear terminals on panel-mount instruments shall be run in nonmetallic duct secured to horizontal brackets run adjacent to the instruments. 13. Conductors and cables shall be run from terminal to terminal without splice or joints. Exceptions: a. Factory-applied connectors molded onto cables shall be permitted. Such connectors shall not be considered as splices or joints. 14. The control panel shall be the source of power for all 120-VAC devices interconnected with the control panel including, but not limited to: a. Solenoid valves. b. Instruments both mounted in the control panel and remotely connected to the control panel. F. Provide power circuits for all Contractor and Vendor-furnished PLC cabinets in accordance with typical detail NE303. 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Pilot devices: 1. General: a. Provide operator pushbuttons, switches, and pilot lights, from a single manufacturer. b. Size: 1) 30.5 millimeters. c. Heavy duty. d. Pushbuttons: 1) Contacts rated: a) NEMA Type A600. 2) Furnish 1 spare normally open contact and normally closed contact with each switch. e. Selector switches: 1) Contacts rated: a) NEMA Type A600. b) Knob type. 2) Furnish 1 spare normally open contact and normally closed contact with each switch. 3) Provisions for locking in the OFF position where lockout provisions are indicated on the Drawings. f. Pilot lights: 1) Type: a) LED for interior installations. 2) Push to test. October 2016 40_67_01-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) 3) Lamp color: a) On/Running/Start: Red. b) Off/Stop: Green. c) Power: White. d) Alarm: Amber. e) Status or normal condition: White. f) Opened: Red. g) Closed: Green. h) Failure: Red. 2. Indoor and outdoor areas: a. NEMA Type 4/13. b. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Allen-Bradley Type 800T. 2) Square D Class 9001, Type K. 3) General Electric Type CR104P. 4) IDEC TWTD Series. 3. Corrosive areas: a. NEMA Type 4X. b. Corrosion resistant. c. Exterior parts of high-impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester or multiple-layer epoxy-coated zinc. d. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Cutler Hammer Type E34. 2) Square D Class 9001, Type SK. 3) Allen-Bradley Type 800H. 4) IDEC TWTD Series. B. Relays: 1. General: a. For all types of 120-VAC relays, provide surge protection across the coil of each relay. b. For all types of 24-VDC relays, provide a free-wheeling diode across the coil of each relay. 2. General purpose: a. Magnetic control relays. b. NEMA Type A300 rated: 1) 300 volts. 2) 8 Amps continuous (minimum). 3) 7,200 volt-amperes make. 4) 720 volt-amperes break. c. Plug-in type. d. LED indication for energization status. e. Coil voltages: As required for the application. f. Minimum poles: DPDT. g. Touch-safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch. h. Enclose each relay in a clear plastic heat and shock-resistant dust cover. i. Quantity and type of contact shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as needed for system compatibility. j. Relays with screw-type socket terminals. October 2016 40_67_01-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) k. Provide additional (slave/interposing) relays when the following occurs: 1) The number or type of contacts shown exceeds the contact capacity of the specified relays. 2) Higher contact rating is required in order to interface with starter circuits or other equipment. l. DIN rail mounting on 35-millimeter rail. m. Ice-cube-type relays with retainer clips to secure relay in socket. n. Integrated label holder for device labeling. o. Manufacturer: 1) Entrelec RB series. C. Terminal blocks: 1. DIN rail mounting on 35-millimeter rail. 2. Suitable for specified AWG wire. 3. Rated for 15 amperes at 600 volts. 4. Screw terminal type. 5. Provide mechanism to prevent wire connection from loosening in environments where vibration is present. This mechanism shall not cause permanent deformation to the metal body. 6. Finger-safe protection for all terminals for conductors. 7. Construction: Polyamide insulation material capable of withstanding temperature extremes from - 40 to 105 degrees Celsius. 8. Terminals: Plainly identified to correspond with markings on the diagrams: a. Permanent machine-printed terminal identification. 9. Disconnect-type field signal conductor terminals with socket/screw for testing. 10. Identify terminals suitable for use with more than 1 conductor. 11. Position: a. So that the internal and external wiring does not cross. b. To provide unobstructed access to the terminals and their conductors. 12. Provide minimum 25-percent spare terminals. 13. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a. Entrelec M4/6. D. Wire duct: 1. Provide flame retardant plastic wiring duct, slotted with dust cover. 2. Type: a. Wide slot. b. Narrow slot. c. Round hole. 3. Manufacturer: The following or equal: a. Panduit. E. Din rail: 1. Perforated steel. 2. 35mm width. 3. 15mm deep. 4. Provide 2 inch offset using one of the following: a. Offset brackets. b. Preformed standoff Din Rail Channel. October 2016 40_67_01-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) F. Starters: 1. Magnetic motor starters: a. As specified in Section 26_29_05. G. Limit switches: 1. NEMA Type 4X. 2. AC contact rating 120 volts, 10 A. 3. DC contact rating 125 volts, 0.4 A. 4. Provide robust actuation mechanism not prone to degradation. 5. Provide complete actuator mechanism with all required hardware. 6. Allows for contact opening even during contact weld condition. 7. UL approved. 8. Operating temperature range: -18 to +110 degrees Celsius (0 to 230 degrees Fahrenheit). 9. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a. Allen-Bradley 802 Series. b. Honeywell HDLS Series. c. Omron D4 Series. d. Eaton E47, E49, E50. e. ABB. H. Current switches: 1. Operate from 120-VAC supply voltage. 2. 1 normally open and normally closed contacts. 3. Adjustable current setting. 4. Manufacturer: a. Zelio® RM35. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Provide nameplate to each panel as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Provide as specified in Section 26_05_53 on all internal and external instruments and devices. 2. Provide a nameplate with the following markings that is plainly visible after installation: a. Manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which the organization responsible for the panel can be identified. b. Supply voltage, phase, frequency, and full-load current. c. Power source or circuit ID. d. Short-circuit current rating of the panel based on one of the following: 1) Short-circuit current rating of a listed and labeled assembly. 2) Short-circuit current rating established utilizing an approved method. C. Grounding: 1. Provide the following: a. Grounding strap between enclosure doors and the enclosure. b. Equipment grounding conductor terminals. October 2016 40_67_01-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) c. Provide equipment ground bus with lugs for connection of all equipment grounding wires. d. Bond multi-section panels together with an equipment grounding conductor or an equivalent grounding bus. 2. Identify equipment grounding conductor terminals with the word “GROUND,” the letters “GND,” the letter “G,” or the color green. 3. Signal (24 VDC) grounding: Terminate each drain wire of a signal (shielded) cable to a unique grounding terminal block, or common ground bus at the end of the cable as shown on the Loop Drawings. 4. Ensure the continuity of the equipment grounding system by effective connections through conductors or structural members. 5. Design so that removing a device does not interrupt the continuity of the equipment-grounding circuit. 6. Provide an equipment-grounding terminal for each incoming power circuit, near the phase conductor terminal. 7. Size ground wires in accordance with NEC and UL Standards, unless noted otherwise. 8. Connect all exposed, noncurrent-carrying conductive parts, devices, and equipment to the equipment-grounding circuit. 9. Connect the door stud on the enclosures to an equipment-grounding terminal within the enclosure using an equipment-bonding jumper. 10. Bond together all remote and local control panels, processor racks, and conductive enclosures of power supplies and connect to the equipment- grounding circuit to provide a common ground reference. D. Provide sunshades and insulation for all outdoor installations. 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES A. Finishes: 1. Metallic (non-stainless): a. Metal surfaces of panels shall be prepared by chemical cleaning and mechanical abrasion in accordance with the finish manufacturer’s recommendations to achieve a smooth, well-finished surface. b. Scratches or blemishes shall be filled before finishing. One coat of zinc phosphate shall be applied per the manufacturer’s recommended dry-film thickness and allowed to dry before applying the finish coat. c. Finish coat shall be a baked polyester-urethane powder, aliphatic air-dry polyurethane, or epoxy enamel to meet NEMA rating specified application. d. Exterior of enclosures located outdoors shall be UV-resistant polyester powder coating. Total dry film thickness shall be 3 mils, minimum. 2. Stainless steel: a. Stainless enclosures shall be provided with a Number 4 brushed finish - not painted. October 2016 40_67_01-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) B. Colors: 1. Exterior color of panels mounted indoors shall be manufacturer’s standard light gray. 2. Exterior of panels mounted outdoors shall be manufacturer’s standard white. 3. Panel interiors shall be manufacturer’s standard white. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. 1. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosures so that their surfaces are plumb and level within 1/8 inch over the entire surface of the panel; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. Direct attachment to drywall is not permitted. B. Install the enclosure per guidelines and submitted installation instructions to meet the seismic requirements at the project site. C. Provide floor stand kits for wall-mounted enclosures larger than 48 inches high. D. Provide 3-1/2-inch high concrete housekeeping pads for freestanding enclosures. E. Install gasket and sealing material under panels with floor slab cutouts for conduit: 1. Undercoat floor-mounted panels. F. Provide a full-size equipment-grounding conductor in accordance with NEC included with the power feeder. Terminate to the incoming power circuit-grounding terminal. G. All holes for field conduits, etc. shall be cut in the field. There shall be no additional holes, factory cut holes, or hole closers allowed. Incorrect holes, additional holes, or mis-cut holes shall require that the entire enclosure be replaced. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, AND CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIRS/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) October 2016 40_67_01-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_67_01 (FS-100) 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.08 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.09 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION October 2016 40_72_13-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_72_13 (FS-100) SECTION 40_72_13 LEVEL MEASUREMENT: ULTRASONIC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Ultrasonic level instruments. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 40_61_00 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Specific definitions: 1. FDT: Field Device Tool. 2. DTM: Device Type Manager. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 40_61_00. B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. October 2016 40_72_13-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_72_13 (FS-100) C. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications. D. Provide instruments manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 40_61_00. 1. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures. 1.08 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following: 1. Ultrasonic level sensor with 4-wire remote transmitter: a. Siemens: Echomax Series sensor with HydroRanger 200 Series Transmitter. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Ultrasonic level measurement with 4-wire remote transmitter: 1. General: a. Continuous non-contact level measurement device with remote transmitter using ultrasonic echo sensing. The transducer generates an ultrasonic pulse in the range of 12 to 50 kHz and measures the time required for the pulse to travel to the process surface and return. The distance is calculated from the send and receive times. Each 4-wire level transmitter system includes, but is not limited to: 1) Ultrasonic transducer. 2) Signal cable. 3) Transmitter. October 2016 40_72_13-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_72_13 (FS-100) 2. Performance requirements: a. Accuracy: 1) 0.25 percent of range. b. Repeatability: 1) 0.1 percent of range. 3. Ultrasonic transducer: a. Encapsulated in chemical- and corrosion-resistant material as indicated on the Instrument Data Sheet or Instrument Index. b. Class I Division 1 for transducer only. c. Operating temperature range: -5 to 122 degrees Fahrenheit (-20 to 50 degrees Celsius). d. Operating relative humidity range: 5 to 95 percent. e. Functions: 1) Temperature compensation. f. Mounting: As indicated in the Contract Documents. 4. Transmitter: a. Level-indicating transmitter: 1) Indicator: Liquid crystal display with approximately 0.50-inch display scaled to read in engineering units. 2) Sensitivity: Able to ignore momentary level spikes or momentary loss of echo and indicate loss of echo condition on indicating transmitter unit. 3) Ability to allow for signal profiles and echo mapping: a) Provide manufacturer’s software for re-mapping the signal. b. Functions: 1) Level measurement. 2) Tank volume. 3) Flow measurement. c. Power supply: 1) 120 VAC. 2) Power consumption: 36 VA maximum. d. Outputs: 1) Isolated 4 to 20 milliamperes DC with HART communication protocol. 2) Relay outputs: a) 3 Form A or Form C contacts. b) Rated 5 amps at 250 VAC. c) Programmable. 3) Enclosure: NEMA Type 4X. 4) Mounting: As indicated in the Contract Documents. 5) Operating temperature range from -5 to 122 degrees Fahrenheit (-20 to 50 degrees Celsius); relative humidity of 10 to 100 percent. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting brackets: As indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide sunshades for outdoor installations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. October 2016 40_72_13-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_72_13 (FS-100) B. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to NIST. 1. Submit calibration data sheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before shipment of the instruments to the project site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. 1. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc., for proper installation of instruments. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. As specified in Section 40_80_01. B. Turn on turbulent surface software feature for all installations measuring surfaces lacking a placid surface. This would include but not be limited to level measurements in mixed media filters and potentially wet wells. 3.06 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.08 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. October 2016 40_72_13-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_72_13 (FS-100) 3.09 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be as indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_72_13-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_72_13 (FS-100) A/E: Carollo Engineers ULTRASONIC LEVEL INSTRUMENTS Spec. No. Rev. Contractor: No By Date Revision 40_72_13 Project: Drake UV Project Contract Date Customer: City of Fort Collins Plant: Drake Water Reclamation Facility Req. P.O. Location: Fort Collins, CO BOM No.: By Chk App File: G 1 Instrument Tag Number F442 E 2 Service UV Effluent N 3 P&ID PI-UVD-05 4 Other 5 Type Ultrasonic P 6 Housing Material R 7 Measurement Range 0-10 ft O 8 Op. Temp. Range B 9 Manufacturer Siemens E 10 Model Echomax 11 Model Number C 12 Style Mfg. Std A 13 Length B 14 Other L 15 Other E 16 Other 17 Type 4 Wire T 18 Operating Mode Channel Flow R 19 Enclosure NEMA 4X A 20 Mounting N 21 Temperature Range S 22 Voltage Requirements 115 VAC, 60 Hz M 23 Power I 24 Accuracy T 25 Display T 26 Output 4-20 mA E 27 Calibration R 28 Status Relay 29 Manufacturer Siemens 30 Model No. HydroRanger 200 31 Elect. Entry 32 Other O 33 P 34 T 35 S 36 Notes: October 2016 40_75_29-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_29 (FS-100) SECTION 40_75_29 ANALYZERS: AMMONIA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Ammonia analyzers. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 40_61_00 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 3. Section 40_80_01 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning. C. Provide all instruments as identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 40_61_00. B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. October 2016 40_75_29-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_29 (FS-100) C. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications. D. Provide instruments manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 40_61_00. 1. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures. 1.08 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. B. Furnish 2 sets of spare tubing for the peristaltic pumps and a spare o-ring kit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following: 1. Hach, Amtax Unit and SC1000 Transmitter. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Ammonia analyzers: 1. General: a. Ammonia monitors shall be supplied for continuous monitoring of ammonia in solution: 1) The ammonia monitoring system shall include: a) An electronic monitor. b) Chemistry module containing an optical measuring cell, a reference sensor. c) All Associated accessories. 2. Performance requirements: a. Accuracy: Within 3 percent of full scale. b. Repeatability: Within 2 percent of full scale. c. Range: 1) 0.05 to 20 milligrams/L N, NH3. or NH4. October 2016 40_75_29-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_29 (FS-100) 3. Sensor: a. Sample flow rate: 1-20 l/h. b. Sample rate: Minimum of 1 sample every 5 minutes. c. Operating temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to 45 degrees Celsius. d. Housed in a NEMA Type 4X enclosure with hinged door to allow tool-less access to reagents and sampling equipment. 4. Transmitter: a. Microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter. b. Display: 1) Backlit LCD digital display: a) Numerical or graphical format. 2) Capable of indicating ammonia up to 5,000 micrograms/L. 3) Capable of indicating control and alarm: a) Conditions. b) Set points. c) Temperature. 4) Configurable and programmable through the front keypad. 5) Self-diagnostics and automatic data checking. c. Self-diagnostics and automatic data checking. d. Provide an analyzer with automatic calibration, cleaning and self-priming. e. Housed in a NEMA Type 4X (IP65) enclosure with hinged door to allow tool-less access to controls and for viewing the LCD display. f. Provide keypad protected with a software lock and all programming information protected by an access code. g. Power supply: 1) 120 VAC. 2) Power consumption: 100 VA maximum. h. Outputs: 1) Isolated 4 to 20 milliamperes DC with Hart communication protocol. 2) Relay outputs: a) 3 form C contacts. b) Rated 3 amps at 120 VAC. c) Programmable. 5. Components: a. Provide a 3-way hand valve to bypass the process sample to provide a zero solution. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide sunshades for outdoor installations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to Manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST. 1. Submit calibration data sheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before shipment of the instruments to the project site. October 2016 40_75_29-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_29 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. 1. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Provide manufacturer’s services to perform installation inspection, start-up and calibration/verification. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. As specified in Section 40_80_01. 3.06 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.08 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_75_29-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_29 (FS-100) A/E: Carollo Engineers AMMONIA ANALYZER Spec. No. Rev. Contractor: No By Date Revision 40_75_29 Project: Drake UV Project Contract Date Customer: City of Fort Collins Plant: Drake Water Reclamation Facility Req. P.O. Location: Fort Collins, CO. BOM No.: By Chk App File: G 1 Tag No. Sample Unit Transmitter R442 E 2 Service UV Sample Station N 3 P&ID PI-UVD-05 S 4 Type Wet Chemistry M 5 Enclosure P 6 Sampling Method Filtrax Pump Unit L 7 Operating Temperature Range 8 Sample Temperature Range By Manufacturer U 9 Sample Flow Required By Manufacturer N 10 Manufacturer Hach I 11 Model No. Amtax T 12 Other C 13 Style N/A A 14 Length B 15 Model No. L 16 Other E 17 Other 18 Type Control Unit and Display T 19 Enclosure NEMA 4X R 20 Mounting Wall A 21 Accuracy N 22 Range S 23 Power Requirements 115 VAC, 60 HZ M 24 Display I 25 Resolution T 26 Output 4-20 mA T 27 Calibration E 28 Manufacturer Hach R 29 Model No. SC1000 30 Other 31 Other 32 Other 33 Buffer O 34 P 35 T 36 S 37 38 Notes: October 2016 40_75_53-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_53 (FS-100) SECTION 40_75_53 ANALYZERS: TURBIDITY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Turbidity analyzers (turbidimeters). B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 40_61_00 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 3. Section 40_80_01 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. CSA International (CSA). C. United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA): 1. Method 180.1 – Determination of Turbidity by Nephilometry. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01_33_00 and 40_61_00. B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. October 2016 40_75_53-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_53 (FS-100) C. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications. D. Provide instruments manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 40_61_00. 1. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures. 1.08 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Turbidimeters: 1. HACH - SOLITAX sensor with sc200 controller. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Turbidimeters: 1. General: Probe type turbidity sensor mounted directly in process piping or basin. 2. Performance requirements: a. Range: 0 to 1,000 NTU. b. Accuracy: 1) Within 3 percent of reading from 0 to 1,000 NTU. c. Resolution: 0.01 NTU. d. Repeatability: 1) 0 less than 40 NTU within 10 percent. 2) 40 to 1,000 NTU within 10 percent. e. Response time: 1) Initial response in 1 minute. 2) 1 second adjustable. October 2016 40_75_53-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_53 (FS-100) 3. Element: a. The turbidimeter shall be a microprocessor-based, continuous-reading, on-line nephelometric instrument. Each turbidity system shall consist of 1 sensor and 1 transmitter. b. Light shall be directed through the surface of the sample and the detector shall be immersed directly in the sample line, basin, or process pipe, eliminating windows and flow cells. c. Optical components shall be mounted in a sealed head assembly that can be removed easily for calibration/service, without disturbing sample or process flow. d. The turbidimeter body shall be constructed of stainless steel or corrosion- resistant PVC. e. Sample flow required: 250 to 750 milliliter per minute (4.0 to 11.9 gallons per hour). Maximum 3 meters per second flow velocity for direct mounting in process piping. f. Operating humidity: 5 to 95 percent non-condensing. g. Sample temperature: 0 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius (32 degrees Fahrenheit to 122 degrees Fahrenheit). h. Maximum total cable length: 200 meters (640 feet). 4. Transmitter: a. The graphical interface unit shall be a microprocessor-based device capable of functioning in a single sensor, and as a digital interface link between turbidimeters and other communication devices through a digital bus communications. b. The interface unit shall allow operators to control sensor and network functions with user-friendly, menu-driven software, and shall provide data logging of measurement data from up to 8 turbidimeters for 1 hour, 24 hours or 30 days, and the capability to transfer data to a computer or printer via an RS-232 serial input/output device. c. Operating temperature: 0 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius (32 degrees Fahrenheit to 104 degrees Fahrenheit). d. The interface unit and separate DC power supply shall be housed in NEMA Type 4X (indoor) industrial plastic enclosures. e. Microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter: f. Electrical connections: 1) 1/2 inch NPT female. g. Piping connections: 1) 2 inch flange connection. h. Enclosures NEMA Type 4X/IP66. i. Power supply: 1) 120 VAC. 2) Power consumption: 7.5 VA maximum. j. Outputs: 1) 2 Isolated 4 to 20 milliamperes DC with HART communication protocol. 2) Relay outputs: a) 2 Form C contact. b) Rated 2 amps at 120 VAC. c) Programmable. October 2016 40_75_53-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_53 (FS-100) 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting brackets as required or as indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide sunshades for outdoor installations. C. Flushing solenoids for cleaning the probe as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST. 1. Submit calibration data sheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before shipment of the instruments to the project site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. 1. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Provide manufacturer’s services to perform installation inspection, start-up and calibration/verification. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. As specified in Section 40_80_01. 3.06 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. October 2016 40_75_53-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_53 (FS-100) 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.08 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_75_53-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_75_53 (FS-100) A/E: Carollo Engineers TURBIDITY ANALYZER Spec. No. Rev. Contractor : No By Date Revision 40_75_53 Project: Drake UV Project Contract Date Customer: City of Fort Collins Plant: Drake Water Reclamation Facility Req. P.O. Location: Fort Collins, CO. BOM No.: By Chk Ap p File: G 1 Tag No. Sample Unit Transmitter B442 E 2 Service UV Sample Station N 3 P&ID PI-UVD-05 S 4 Type Probe Insertion M 5 Enclosure P 6 Sampling Method N/A L 7 Operating Temperature Range 8 Sample Temperature Range U 9 Sample Flow Required N/A N 10 Manufacturer Hach I 11 Model No. Solitax T 12 Other C 13 Style Mnfr Standard A 14 Length B 15 Model No. L 16 Other E 17 Other 18 Type Control Unit and Display T 19 Enclosure NEMA 4X R 20 Mounting Wall A 21 Accuracy N 22 Range S 23 Power Requirements 115 VAC, 60 Hz M 24 Display I 25 Resolution T 26 Output 4-20 mA T 27 Calibration E 28 Manufacturer Hach R 29 Model No. SC200 30 Other 31 Other 32 Other 33 O 34 P 35 T 36 S 37 38 Notes: October 2016 40_80_01-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) SECTION 40_80_01 TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND COMMISSIONING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Testing requirements that apply to process control and instrumentation systems for the entire Project. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning and Process Start-Up. 3. Section 40_61_00 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 4. Section 40_67_01 - Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components. 5. Engineer/Owner provided Control Descriptions. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA). C. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Sections 01_75_17 and 40_61_00. B. Specific definitions: 1. PTO: Profibus Trade Organization. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. General: 1. Reference additional detailed test submittal scheduling and prerequisite requirements as specified in the Sequencing article of Section 40_61_00. C. Test procedures: 1. Develop and submit detailed test procedures to show that the integrated SCADA system hardware and software is fully operational and in compliance with the requirements specified in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide a statement of test objectives for each test. October 2016 40_80_01-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) 3. Prepare specific procedures for each process system. 4. Describe sequentially the steps to be followed in verifying the correct operation of each process system, including all features described in the loop descriptions, control strategies, and shown in the P&IDs. Implied or generic test procedures are not acceptable. 5. Specify who will perform the tests, specifically what testing equipment will be used (including serial numbers and NIST-traceable calibration), and how the testing equipment will be used. 6. Describe the expected role of the Engineer, as well as any requirements for assistance from Owner’s staff. 7. Provide the forms and checklists to be used. D. Test forms: 1. Provide test and calibration forms and checklists for each of the following: a. Calibration. b. Factory acceptance tests (FAT). c. Loop validation tests. d. Installation tests. e. Functional tests. f. Instrumentation and Controls Performance test. g. Communication Testing including all digital bus and all forms of Ethernet. 2. Test forms shall include the detailed test procedures, or shall include clear references to separate pages containing the complete test procedure applicable to each form. If references to procedures are used, the complete procedure shall be included with each test binder. 3. Every page of each test form shall include project name, date, time, name of person conducting the test, signature of person conducting the test, and for witnessed tests, place for signature of person (Engineer and Owner) witnessing the test. 4. Some sample test forms are included at the end of this Section. These test forms show the minimum required test form content. They are not complete, and have not been customized for this Project. The Contractor is to develop and submit test forms customized for the Project and meeting all of the specified test and submittal requirements. E. Testing binders: 1. Sub-system to be tested, provide and submit a test binder containing all test procedures and individual test forms for the test. References to other documents for test procedures and requirements are not acceptable. 2. Fill out in advance headings and all other information known before the test. 3. Include applicable test plan information, as well as a list of all test prerequisites, test personnel, and equipment. 4. Include or list reference material and provide separately at the time of the test. 5. Record test results and verify that all test requirements and conditions have been met. F. Test reports: 1. At the conclusion of each test, submit a complete test report, including all test results and certifications. 2. Include all completed test binders, forms, and checklists. 3. Submission, review, and acceptance of each test report is required before the start of the sub-system. October 2016 40_80_01-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test personnel: 1. Furnish qualified technical personnel to perform all calibration, testing, and verification. The test personnel are required to be familiar with this Project and the equipment, software, and systems before being assigned to the test program. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS (NOT USED) 1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED) 1.10 SCHEDULING A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. 1.11 WARRANTY (NOT USED) 1.12 SYSTEM START-UP (NOT USED) 1.13 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED) 1.14 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS (NOT USED) 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) 2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED) 2.07 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED) 2.09 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) October 2016 40_80_01-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 40_61_00. B. Installation supervision: 1. Provide as specified in Section 40_61_00. 3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED) 3.07 COMMISSIONING AND PROCESS START-UP A. Installation Testing: 1. General: a. The Owner reserves the right to test any specified function, whether or not explicitly stated in the test submittals. b. Failure testing: 1) In addition to demonstrating correct operation of all specified features, demonstrate how the system reacts and recovers from abnormal conditions including, but not limited to: a) Equipment failure. b) Operator error. c) Communications sub-system error. d) Power failure. e) Process equipment failure. f) High system loading conditions. c. Conduct testing Monday through Friday during normal working hours for no more than 8 hours per day. 1) Testing at other times requires approval of the Engineer. 2. Sequencing: a. See additional requirements specified in the Sequencing article of Section 40_61_00. 3. Calibration: a. After installation but before starting other tests, calibrate and adjust all instruments, devices, valves, and systems, in conformance with the component manufacturer's instructions and as specified in these Contract Documents. b. Components having adjustable features are to be set carefully for the specific conditions and applications of this installation. Test and verify that components and/or systems are within the specified limits of accuracy. c. Replace either individually or within a system, defective elements that cannot achieve proper calibration or accuracy. October 2016 40_80_01-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) d. Calibration points: 1) Calibrate each analog instrument at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of span, using test instruments with accuracies traceable to NIST. e. Field verify calibration of instruments that have been factory-calibrated to determine whether any of the calibrations are in need of adjustment. f. Analyzer calibration: 1) Calibrate and test each analyzer system as a workable system after installation. Follow the testing procedures directed by the manufacturers' technical representatives. g. Complete instrument calibration sheets for every field instrument and analyzer. h. Calibration tags: 1) Attach a calibration and testing tag to each instrument, piece of equipment, or system. 2) Sign the tag when calibration is complete. 4. Industrial network testing: a. Profibus test procedures: 1) Provide qualified personnel and test equipment required to conduct the inspection and test procedures as specified herein. a) The scope of qualification and testing services is based on the network representation as indicated on the Drawings. The scope of qualification and testing services shall include the following network types: (1) Profibus DP networks. b) Network qualification and testing activities: (1) Network installation qualification, testing, and documentation: (a) This qualification and testing activity focuses on the physical media and its installation. (b) Conduct a physical inspection to establish the network configuration: (c) Validate the node type and quantity. (d) Identify improper installation and damaged components. (e) Validate integrity of cables and connectors via a physical media test to confirm the signal propagation capabilities of the network media. (f) Corrective measures shall be recommended based on the results of the inspections and testing. (2) Network operations qualification, testing, and documentation: (a) This qualification and testing activity takes place after the network is commissioned and is under normal operating conditions. (b) The network performance is monitored and measured using non-intrusive test equipment and procedures. (c) The test results are analyzed and corrective measures recommended. October 2016 40_80_01-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) (3) Report: (a) Prepare a report that documents the results of the qualification and testing activities. (b) Document the installed condition of the network and provide baseline values for future network maintenance and testing activities. (c) The report to include, but not limited to, the following: (d) Executive summary for each network. (e) Inspection and test results for each network. (f) Calculated network parameters. (g) Recommendations. (h) Description of test procedures and required test equipment. (4) Network agency specifications: (a) The testing and qualifications services will adhere to the recommended standards and practices of the referenced standards bodies and agencies: (b) Profibus networks. (c) Profibus network requirements, application specifications, designs, and services shall be in conformance with the applicable PTO specifications. (5) Manufacturer’s specifications and guidelines: (a) Include all applicable manufacturer’s specifications and guidelines. (b) Manufacturer’s specifications and guidelines may supersede the specifications of the applicable governing body for the associated network but at a minimum must meet all of the governing body’s requirements. (c) Test sequence and responsibilities: (d) All qualification and testing activities will be conducted by the Contractor. Figure 1, Network Test Sequence and Responsibilities, defines the general test sequence: • Before commencing any network inspection or testing activities, verify that all network segments and nodes are in their final installed condition. • The Contractor or installer to provide all necessary components and labor required to address changes required to bring the network into compliance. The installer shall be available at the time of network inspection and testing to address network deficiencies. • Before commencing any network inspection or testing activities, inspect all network components and all deficiencies addressed. October 2016 40_80_01-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) Network Installation Installer Test Results Network Installation Testing Network Tester Pass Fail Network Activation Engineer/Integrator Network Operations Testing Network Tester Correct Configuration Deficiencies Engineer/Integrator Pass Fail Network Commissioning Complete Test Results INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION AND TESTING OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION AND TESTING Network Installation Inspection Engineer Inspection Inspection Deficiency Correction Installer Fail Pass Installation Deficiency Correction Installer c) Profibus test procedure: (1) The following prerequisite conditions must be completed before commencing the qualification and testing activities: (a) Installation qualification and testing: • All cabling installed, terminated, and labeled. • All network node devices installed. • All node devices physically disconnected from the network. (b) Manufacturer’s data and specifications for all installed network components, available on-site for use by the network testing firm. (c) A complete set of construction drawings and specifications with all addenda and change orders are available on-site for use by the network testing firm. Figure 1 October 2016 40_80_01-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) d) Operations qualification and testing: (1) Network installation qualification and testing successfully completed. (2) Network is commissioned and is operating under normal conditions. (3) Process and process equipment is not dependent on operation of the network. b. Network operation may be interrupted for inspection and testing. c. Test equipment: 1) The following test equipment will be utilized in the execution of the described qualification and testing procedures. a) Network line analyzer, ProfiTrace v1.6. b) Oscilloscope, Fluke Scopemeter Series 190 or equivalent. c) Digital VOM, Fluke 87 Multimeter or equivalent. d) Network bus monitor, ProfiTrace v1.6. d. Installation qualification and test procedures: 1) Visual and mechanical inspection: a) Compare network devices nameplate data with drawings and specifications. b) Confirm network components are PTO compliant. c) Verify labeling of all trunk cables. d) Confirm minimum cable distance between nodes. e) Verify the presence/absence of stub lines. f) Verify network terminators are in place. g) Verify power supply source and connections for active terminations. h) Verify total network node count. i) Verify power supply specifications including quantity, ratings, locations, and configuration. Verify power supply source of supply location, conductor size, and rating. j) Inspect accessible network cabling for adherence to specified installation practices: (1) Cable installed in conduit or protective raceway. (2) Cable proximity to high voltage wiring. (3) Exposure to extreme temperatures, shock, vibration, chemicals, or moisture. (4) Bend radius. k) Inspect cable and conductor terminations for adherence to specified installation practices. l) Check all accessible components for evidence of physical damage. m) Check grounding techniques including ground conductor sizes and termination points. n) Non-permissible cable length. o) Wrong cable type. p) Signal reflections. e. Electrical tests: 1) Measure network resistance. 2) Measure network cable length. 3) Line analysis for the following conditions: a) Short circuit between signal lines A and B. b) Short circuit between signal lines A and B and the cable shield. October 2016 40_80_01-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) 4) Shield continuity. 5) Cross-wired signals lines. 6) Terminator installed in wrong position. 7) Poor transmission or reception levels. 8) Non-permissible stub line. f. Generate slave list. g. Measure power supply voltage at active terminations. h. Evaluation: 1) Confirm the network cable topology (length and configuration) does not exceed data rate limitations. 2) Confirm total stub length (if required by design) does not exceed data rate limitations. 3) Calculate spare trunk length for the specified data rate. i. Operations qualifications and test procedures: 1) Electrical tests: a) Examine the data traffic between the master and each slave device. b) Verify baud rate. c) Confirm signal level. d) Verify network cycle time. e) Generate “live” slave list. f) Verify and record scanner diagnostic data including node status and error codes. g) Monitor and capture network waveform. j. Evaluation: 1) Confirm all specified slave devices appear on the live list. 2) Evaluate data traffic between master and each slave to confirm proper slave configuration and performance. 3) Inspect waveform capture for evidence of excessive noise. 4) Evaluate and report any failed or questionable network tests. 5) Evaluate and report network error codes and related symptoms. 5. Loop check/validation: a. Assist Owner to check all control loops under simulated operating conditions by causing a range of input signals at the primary control elements and observing appropriate responses of the respective control and monitoring elements, final control elements, and the graphic displays associated with the SCADA system. Issue commands from the SCADA system and verify proper responses of field devices. Use actual process inputs wherever available. b. Provide “end-to-end” tests: 1) Test SCADA system inputs from field device to SCADA system operator workstations. 2) Test SCADA system outputs from SCADA operator workstations to field devices and equipment. 3) Observe and record responses at all intermediate devices. 4) Test and record operator commands and signal readouts to each operator device where there is more than one operator interface point. 5) For each signal, perform separate tests for SCADA computer screens, local operator interface (LOI) screens, and local control panels. c. Retest any loop following any necessary corrections. October 2016 40_80_01-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) d. Apply simulated sensor inputs corresponding to 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of span for networks that incorporate analog elements, and monitor the resulting outputs to verify compliance to accuracy tolerance requirements. e. Apply continuously variable up and down analog inputs to verify the proper operation and setting of discrete devices (signal trips, etc.). f. Apply provisional settings on controllers and alarm setpoints. g. Record all analog loop test data on test forms. h. Exercise each field device requiring an analog command signal, through the SCADA system. Vary, during the validation process, the output from the PLC SCADA system and measure the end device position, speed, etc. to confirm the proper operation of the device for the supplied analog signal. Manually set the output from the SCADA screen at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent and measure the response at the final device and at any intermediate devices. i. Exercise each field device providing a discrete input to the SCADA system in the field and observe the proper operation shall be observed at the operator workstation: 1) Test limit switches, set limits mechanically, and observe proper operation at the operator workstation. 2) Exercise starters, relay contacts, switch contacts, and observe proper operation. 3) Calibrate and test instruments supplying discrete inputs, and observe proper operation. j. Test each device accepting a discrete output signal from the SCADA. Perform the appropriate operator action at the SCADA operator stations (including LOIs, if present) and confirm the proper operation of the field device: 1) Stroke valves through outputs from the SCADA system, and confirm proper directional operation. Confirm travel limits and any feedback signals to the SCADA system. 2) Exercise motors starters from the SCADA system and verify proper operation through direct field observation. 3) Exercise solenoids and other field devices from the SCADA system and verify proper operation through direct field observation. k. Include in the test forms: 1) Analog input devices: a) Calibration range. b) Calibration data: Input, output, and error at each test value. c) Analog input associated PLC register address. d) Value in PLC register at each test point. e) Value displayed at each operator interface station (local operator interface displays and SCADA workstations). 2) Analog output devices: a) Calibration range. b) Test value at each test point. c) Analog output associated PLC register address. d) Control variable value at field device at each test point. e) Physical device response at each test point: (1) Response to be actual valve position, or motor speed, etc. 3) Discrete instrument input devices: a) Switch setting, contact action, and dead band. October 2016 40_80_01-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) b) Valve position switches: (1) Response in the PLC as the valve is stroked from the PLC. (2) Field observed actual valve position, and valve indicator position as the valve is stroked from the PLC. c) Operator interface switches (control stations and other pilot devices) and associated response. d) Starter and drive auxiliary device contact response. e) Response of all other discrete inputs to the PLC. 4) Discrete output devices: a) Observed response of field device to the discrete output from the PLC. b) Observe the proper operation of Open, Close, Start, Stop, On, Off, etc. 5) Test equipment used and associated serial numbers. B. Functional Testing: 1. General: a. Commence Functional tests after completion of all loop check/validation tests: 1) As specified in Section 40_61_00, Sequencing and Scheduling article. b. Functional to demonstrate proper operation of all systems with process equipment operating over full operating ranges under conditions as closely resembling actual operating conditions as possible. c. Additional tests are specified in other Instrumentation and Control Sections. d. Follow approved detailed test procedures and check lists for Functional Test activities. 2. Control logic operational validation: a. The purpose of control logic validation is to field test the operation of the complete control system, including all parts of the SCADA system, all control panels (including vendor control panels), all control circuits, all control stations, all monitored/controlled equipment, and final control elements. b. Demonstrate all control functionality shown on the P&IDs, control schematics, and other drawings, and specified in the loop descriptions, control strategies, Electrical Specifications, and Mechanical Equipment Specifications. c. Test in detail on a function-by-function and sentence-by-sentence basis. d. Thoroughly test all hardware and software functions: 1) Including all hardwired and software control circuit interlocks and alarms. e. Test final control elements, controlled equipment, control panels, and ancillary equipment under startup, shut down, and steady-state operating conditions to verify all logic and control is achieved. f. Control logic validation tests to include, but not limited to: a repeat of all control logic tests from the FAT, modified and expanded to include all field instruments, control panels, circuits, and equipment. 3. Loop tuning: a. Optimally tune all electronic control stations and software control logic incorporating proportional, integral, or derivative control. Apply control October 2016 40_80_01-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) signal disturbances at various process variable levels and adjusting the gain, reset, or rate settings as required to achieve proper response. b. Verify the transient stability of final control elements operating over the full range of operating conditions, by applying control signal disturbances, monitoring the amplitude and decay rate of control parameter oscillations and making necessary controller adjustments as required to eliminate excessive oscillatory amplitudes and decay rates. As a minimum, achieve 1/4 wave amplitude decay ratio damping (subsidence ratio of 4) under the full range of operating conditions. c. If excessive oscillations or system instability occur, as determined by the Engineer, continue tuning and parameter adjustments, or develop and implement any additional control algorithms needed to achieve satisfactory control loop operation. 4. Functional validation sheets: a. Document each Functional test on an approved test form. b. Document loop tuning with a report for each loop, including two-pen chart recordings showing the responses to step disturbance at a minimum of 3 setpoints or process rates approved by the Engineer. Show tuning parameters on the charts, along with time, date, and sign-off by Contractor and Engineer. c. Include on the form, functions which can be demonstrated on a loop-by- loop basis: 1) Loop number and P&ID number. 2) Control strategy, or reference to specification tested. 3) Test procedures: Where applicable, use the FAT function-by- function, sentence-by-sentence loop test checklist forms modified to meet the requirements of the Functional test. Otherwise, create new forms. d. For functions that cannot be demonstrated on a loop-by-loop basis (such as overall plant power failure), include on the test form a listing of the specific steps and tests to be conducted. Include with each test description the following information: 1) Specification page and paragraph of function demonstrated. 2) Description of function and/or text from specification. 3) Test procedures: use the FAT loop test checklist forms modified to meet the specific testing conditions of the Functional test. 5. Functional certification: a. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01_75_17. 1) Including all test forms with test data entered, submitted to the Engineer with a clear and unequivocal statement that all Functional test requirements have been satisfied. C. Instrumentation and Controls Performance Testing: 1. General: a. The performance test is part of the Work that must be completed as a condition of substantial completion and final completion for the entire Project. b. Test and use the entire process control system under standard operating conditions. c. Exercise all system functions. October 2016 40_80_01-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) d. Log failure, any system interruption and accompanying component, subsystem, or program failure including time of occurrence, duration of each failure, failure classification, and cause. 1) Provide a competently trained technician or programmer on call for the Project Site during all normal working days and hours from the start of the performance test until final acceptance of the system. a) Response time to the Project Site: 24 hours or less, for a major failure. 2. SCADA system testing: a. Exercise each system function, e.g., status report, alarms, logs, and displays several times at a minimum, and in a manner that approximates "normal" system operation. b. Failure of the SCADA system during testing shall be considered as indicating that the programs and operating system do not meet the requirements of the specifications. 1) Corrective action is required before restarting the performance test. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) 3.09 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.10 CLEANING (NOT USED) 3.11 PROTECTION (NOT USED) 3.12 SCHEDULES A. Example test forms: 1. Example test forms are attached at the end of this Section. They may be used as a starting point for the development of Project-specific test forms for this Project. 2. The example test forms are not intended to be complete or comprehensive. Edit and supplement the forms to meet the requirements for testing and test forms specified in this Section and other Contract Documents. END OF SECTION October 2016 40_80_01-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) INSTALLATION AND CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST DOCUMENTATION INSTRUMENT LOOP NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION A COPY OF LATEST ISSUE OF THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS ARE INCLUDED IN THIS INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FILE: INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEETS (FOR ALL INSTRUMENTS IN THE LOOP) INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS (FOR ALL INSTRUMENTS IN THE LOOP) INSTRUMENT LOOP WIRING DIAGRAMS INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST SIZING CALCULATIONS INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE (APPLICABLE PART) NAMEPLATE SCHEDULE (APPLICABLE PART) VENDOR LITERATURE CALIBRATION INFORMATION INSTRUMENT LOOP IS PART OF EQUIPMENT START-UP/SHUTDOWN INTERLOCKS? No Yes REMARKS: CHECKED BY (COMPANY) ACCEPTED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE SIGNATURE DATE DATE October 2016 40_80_01-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) TRANSMITTER/CONTROLLER/INDICATOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST INSTRUMENT LOOP IS PART OF EQUIPMENT START-UP/SHUTDOWN INTERLOCKS? No Yes INSTRUMENT TYPE INDICATOR TRANSMITTER CONTROLLER OTHER DESCRIPTION INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERIAL NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION BENCH CALIBRATION CHECK INPUT RANGE = OUTPUT RANGE = HEAD CORRECTION = LINEAR CALIBRATED SPAN = SQUARE ROOT % CALIB SPAN DESIRED VALUE ACTUAL VALUE EXPECTED VALUE ACTUAL VALUE 0 50 100 CHECK BELOW, WHEN COMPLETED: BENCH CALIBRATED PER SPECIFICATION SHEET NO. VERIFIED PER P&ID NO. CORRESPONDS TO SPECIFICATION SHEET NO. WIRING CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT LOOP DRAWING NO. INSTALLATION CORRECT PER DETAIL NO. ACCESSORIES ARE PRESENT AND PROPERLY INSTALLED INSTRUMENT IS ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE OR REMOVAL ENGRAVED LAMINATED NAMEPLATE (NO SPELLING ERRORS) PERMANENTLY INSTALLED FIELD CALIBRATION CHECK INPUT RANGE = OUTPUT RANGE = % CALIB SPAN DESIRED VALUE ACTUAL VALUE EXPECTED VALUE ACTUAL VALUE 0 50 100 October 2016 40_80_01-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) TRANSMITTER/CONTROLLER/INDICATOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST DIRECT REVERSE ACTION VERIFIED AT 50% SPAN ACTION VERIFIED AT SPAN CONTROLLER SETTINGS SETTING GAIN PB RESET (INTEGRAL) DERIV. (RATE) HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT ELEV. ZERO ZERO SUPP PRE-TUNE POST-TUNE PRE-TUNE SETTINGS GAIN PB RESET (REPEAT/MIN) RESET (MIN/REPEAT) DERIVATION (MINUTES) FLOW 1.0 100 10 0.1 N/A LEVEL 1.0 100 MIN. MAX. N/A PRESSURE 2.0 50 2.0 0.5 N/A TEMP. 4.0 25 0.1 10 OFF REMARKS CHECKED BY (COMPANY) ACCEPTED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE SIGNATURE DATE DATE October 2016 40_80_01-17 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) ANALYZERS INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST INSTRUMENT LOOP IS PART OF EQUIPMENT START-UP/SHUTDOWN INTERLOCKS? No Yes TYPE OF INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERIAL NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION CHECK BELOW, IF TRUE BENCH CALIBRATED PER SPECIFICATION SHEET NO. VERIFIED PER P&ID NO. CORRESPONDS TO SPECIFICATION SHEET NO. WIRING CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT LOOP DRAWING NO. INSTALLATION CORRECT PER DETAIL NO. ACCESSORIES ARE PRESENT AND PROPERLY INSTALLED INSTRUMENT IS ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE OR REMOVAL ENGRAVED LAMINATED NAMEPLATE (NO SPELLING ERRORS) PERMANENTLY INSTALLED REMARKS CHECKED BY (COMPANY) ACCEPTED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE SIGNATURE DATE DATE October 2016 40_80_01-18 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) CONTROL VALVES INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST INSTRUMENT LOOP IS PART OF EQUIPMENT START-UP/SHUTDOWN INTERLOCKS? No Yes VALVE TAG NO. SERIAL NO. TRANSDUCER TAG NO. SERIAL NO. SOLENOID TAG NO. SERIAL NO. VOLUME BOOSTER TAG NO. SERIAL NO. POSITIONER SERIAL NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION TRANSDUCER CHECK INPUT RANGE = OUTPUT RANGE = CALIBRATED SPAN = CALIBRATED SPAN = BENCH SPAN DESIRED ACTUAL SPAN EXPECTED ACTUAL 0% 0% 50% 50% 100% 100% FIELD SPAN DESIRED ACTUAL SPAN EXPECTED ACTUAL 0% 0% 50% 50% 100% 100% CHECK BELOW, IF TRUE: BENCH CALIBRATED PER ABOVE VERIFIED PER P&ID NO. CORRESPONDS TO SPECIFICATION SHEET NO. VALVE SPECIFICATION NO. TRANSDUCER SPECIFICATION NO. SOLENOID SPECIFICATION NO. WIRING CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT LOOP DRAWING NO. INSTALLATION CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS VALVE DETAIL NO. TRANSDUCER DETAIL NO. SOLENOID DETAIL NO. October 2016 40_80_01-19 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) CONTROL VALVES INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST ACCESSORIES ARE PRESENT AND PROPERLY INSTALLED INSTRUMENT IS ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE OR REMOVAL ENGRAVED LAMINATED NAMEPLATE (NO SPELLING ERRORS) PERMANENTLY INSTALLED VALVE CHECK FLOW CHECK PROCESS FLOW DIRECTION THROUGH THE VALVE IS CORRECT SAFETY CHECK ON LOSS OF AIR VALVE FAILS ON LOSS OF POWER SOLENOID FAILS OPEN CLOSE TO VENT TO VALVE TRAVEL CHECK FULL OPEN AT FULL CLOSED AT MEASURED TRAVEL PSI PSI INCHES SEATING CHECK ON BENCH RESULTS ACTUATOR BENCH SET IN-LINE POSITIONER CHECK VALVE FULL OPEN AT PSI TO POSITIONER VALVE FULL CLOSED AT PSI TO POSITIONER VOLUME BOOSTER CHECK BYPASS VALVE (GAIN) ADJUSTING SCREW BACKED OUT TURNS FROM CLOSED TO ENSURE QUICK BUT STABLE OPERATION (TYPICALLY 1-1/2 TO 2 TURNS) REMARKS CHECKED BY (COMPANY) ACCEPTED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE SIGNATURE DATE DATE October 2016 40_80_01-20 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) PROFIBUS INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION AND TESTING General Network Description The Profibus network serves the RO pretreatment, blended water, and concentrate processes and consists of both DP and PA slave devices. The master is located in programmable logic controller, PLC-900. Profibus DP repeaters are deployed in the network to essentially support a radial network topology from each process control panel. Network Design Characteristics ARCHITECTURE BAUD RATE (kbits/sec) MASTER SINGLE REDUNDANT 9.6 187.5 3,000 TOTAL NODE COUNT ≤ 126 19.2 50 6,000 REPEATER COUNT 93.75 1,500 12,000 CASCADED REPEATER COUNT <9 NODE COUNT PER DP SEGMENT <32 DP/PA SEGMENT COUPLERS REDUNDANCY (DP/PA COUPLERS ACTIVE TERMINATORS PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS PA ONLY DP & PA SURGE PROTECTION FOR SLAVES LOCATED OUTSIDE SURGE PROTECTION FOR MEDIA ENTERING THE CONTROLLER CABINET INTRINSIC SAFETY WIRING: REQUIRED FOR ANY PA NETWORK INSTALLED NODE LIST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 R 126 R 127 ALL NODES PRESENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH NETWORK DESIGN DOCUMENTS. LEGEND M MASTER NODE PRESENT AT THIS ADDRESS D PROFIBUS DP NODE PRESENT AT THIS ADDRESS P PROFIBUS PA NODE PRESENT AT THIS ADDRESS R RESERVED ADDRESS NO DEVICE PRESENT AT THIS ADDRESS COMMENTS (Comments referenced by number. Refer to the Comments, Observations, and Recommendations Summary.) PROJECT NAME: TEST DATE: FACILITY NAME: TESTED BY: PROCESS AREA: COMPANY: NETWORK ID: PAGE: WITNESSED BY: SIGNATURE: October 2016 40_80_01-21 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) PROFIBUS INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION AND TESTING Media Inspection CABLING DP NETWORK PA NETWORK SEGMENTS PI COMPLIANT LABELING COMPLETE GROUNDING CABLE AND CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS NO STUB LINES (DP ONLY) TERMINATING RESISTORS (IN PLACE) DEDICATED DIAGNOSTICS BUS INSTALLATION NO EVIDENCE OF PHYSICAL DAMAGE INSTALLATION IN PROTECTIVE RACEWAY CLEARANCES FROM HIGH TEMPERATURE SOURCES CLEARANCES FROM HIGH VOLTAGE SOURCES BEND RADIUS NO INSTALLATION SUBJECT TO VIBRATION, SHOCK, HIGH FLEX, CHEMICALS, OR MOISTURE TERMINATING RESISTORS TURNED ON AT CORRECT LOCATION COMMENTS (Comments referenced by number. Refer to the Comments, Observations, and Recommendations Summary.) Device Inspection DEVICE QUANTITY/TYPE INSTALLATION TOTAL SLAVE COUNT NO EVIDENCE OF PHYSICAL DAMAGE MOST UPDATED DEVICE DRIVER INSTALLED? ACCESSIBLE FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE INSTALLED DEVICES COMPLY WITH DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FDT COMPLIANT DEVICES PI COMPLIANCE DEVICES DIAGNOSTICS MODULE INSTALLED COMMENTS (Comments referenced by number. Refer to the Comments, Observations, and Recommendations Summary.) Power Supplies ACTIVE TERMINATIONS COUPLERS REPEATERS SOURCE LOCATION SOURCE LOCATION SOURCE LOCATION OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OVERCURRENT PROTECTION CONDUCTOR SIZE CONDUCTOR SIZE CONDUCTOR SIZE GROUNDING GROUNDING GROUNDING COMMENTS (Comments referenced by number. Refer to the Comments, Observations, and Recommendations Summary.) PROJECT NAME: TEST DATE: FACILITY NAME: TESTED BY: PROCESS AREA: COMPANY: NETWORK ID: PAGE: WITNESSED BY: SIGNATURE: October 2016 40_80_01-22 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/40_80_01 (FS-100) PROFIBUS INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION AND TESTING DP Network Media Testing DESCRIPTION SEGMENT ID TRUNK LENGTH (feet) ALLOWABLE TRUNK LENGTH AT SPECIFIED DATA RATE: MEASURED TRUNK LENGTH: SPARE TRUNK LENGTH RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS (ohms) NETWORK CABLE: NO TERMINATIONS ONE TERMINATION TWO TERMINATIONS POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE (volts DC) ACTIVE TERMINATOR REPEATER CP1100-RPT1 REPEATER CP1000-RPT1 REPEATER CP1000-RPT2 REPEATER CP2700-RPT1 CABLE TEXTS PASS FAIL PASS FAIL PASS FAIL PASS FAIL PASS FAIL PASS FAIL TESTED FOR SHORT CIRCUIT BETWEEN SIGNAL LINES TESTED FOR SHORT CIRCUIT BETWEEN SIGNAL LINES AND SHIELD TESTED FOR SHIELD CONTINUITY TESTED FOR OPEN SIGNAL LINES TESTED FOR CROSSED SIGNAL LINES TESTED FOR CORRECT TERMINATOR POSITION CORRECT CABLE TYPE AND LENGTH TESTED FOR SECURE AND TIGHT CONNECTORS COMMENTS (Comments referenced by number. Refer to the Comments, Observations, and Recommendations Summary.) PROJECT NAME: TEST DATE: FACILITY NAME: TESTED BY: PROCESS AREA: COMPANY: NETWORK ID: PAGE: WITNESSED BY: SIGNATURE: October 2016 46_05_10-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) SECTION 46_05_10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Basic design and performance requirements for building mechanical equipment and process mechanical equipment. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_60_00 - Product Requirements. 3. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 4. Section 01_77_00 - Closeout Procedures. 5. Section 01_78_23 - Operating and Maintenance Data. 6. Section 01_81_01 - Project Design Criteria. 7. Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. 8. Section 03_60_00 - Grouting. 9. Section 05_05_24 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry. 10. Section 05_12_00 - Structural Steel. 11. Section 05_14_05 - Structural Aluminum. 12. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 13. Section 26_05_09 - Low Voltage Motors Up to 500 Horsepower. 14. Section 26_08_50 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 15. Section 40_05_00.01 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 16. Section 40_05_06.55 - Piping Insulation. 17. Section 40_80_01 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning. 18. Section 46_05_94 - Mechanical Equipment Testing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA) Standards: 1. 6001-E08 – Design and Selection of Components for Enclosed Gear Drives. B. American Bearing Manufactures Association (ABMA) Standards: 1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. 682 - Shaft Sealing Systems for Centrifugal and Rotary Pumps. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. A125 - Standard Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated. 4. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. October 2016 46_05_10-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) 5. A194 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. 6. A320 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service. 7. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 8. A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 9. B61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. 10. B62 - Standard specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 11. B505 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous Castings. 12. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 13. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 14. F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. E. Hydraulic Institute (HI). F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). G. Unified Numbering System (UNS). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Resonant frequency: That frequency at which a small driving force produces an ever-larger vibration if no dampening exists. B. Rotational frequency: The revolutions per unit of time usually expressed as revolutions per minute. C. Critical frequency: Same as resonant frequency for the rotating elements or the installed machine and base. D. Peak vibration velocity: The root mean square average of the peak velocity of the vibrational movement times the square root of 2 in inches per second. E. Rotational speed: Same as rotational frequency. F. Maximum excitation frequency: The excitation frequency with the highest vibration velocity of several excitation frequencies that are a function of the design of a particular machine. G. Critical speed: Same as critical frequency. H. Free field noise level: Noise measured without any reflective surfaces (an idealized situation); sound pressure levels at 3 feet from the source unless specified otherwise. I. Operating weight: The weight of unit plus weight of fluids or solids normally contained in unit during operation. October 2016 46_05_10-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Product requirements as specified in Section 01_60_00. 2. Project conditions as specified in Section 01_81_01. 3. Provisions specified under each technical equipment specification prevail over and supersede conflicting provisions specified in this Section. 4. Equipment manufacturer's responsibility extends to selection and mounting of gear drive units, motors or other prime movers, accessories, and auxiliaries required for proper operation. 5. Vibration considerations: a. Resonant frequency: 1) For single speed equipment, ensure there are no natural resonant frequencies within 25 percent above or below the operating rotational frequencies or multiples of the operating rotational frequencies that may be excited by the equipment design. 2) For variable speed equipment, ensure there are no natural resonant frequencies within 25 percent above or below the range of operating frequencies. b. Design, balance, and align equipment to meet the vibration criteria specified in Section 46_05_94. 6. Equipment units weighing 50 pounds or more: Provide with lifting lugs or eyes to allow removal with hoist or other lifting device. B. Power transmission systems: 1. V-belts, sheaves, shaft couplings, chains, sprockets, mechanical variable- speed drives, variable frequency drives, gear reducers, open and enclosed gearing, clutches, brakes, intermediate shafting, intermediate bearings, and U-joints are to be rated for 24 hour-a-day continuous service or frequent stops- and-starts intermittent service, whichever is most severe, and sized with a service factor of 1.5 or greater in accordance with manufacturer recommendations: a. Apply service factor to nameplate horsepower and torque of prime source of power and not to actual equipment loading. b. Apply service factors in accordance with AGMA 6001-E08, other applicable AGMA standards, or other applicable referenced standards. C. Equipment mounting and anchoring: 1. Mount equipment on cast iron or welded steel bases with structural steel support frames. a. Utilize continuous welds to seal seams and contact edges between steel members. b. Grind welds smooth. 2. Provide bases and supports with machined support pads, dowels for alignment of mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and openings for electrical conduits. 3. Provide jacking screws in bases and supports for equipment weighing over 1,000 pounds. 4. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections for dead load, running loads, loads during start-up, seismic load specified in October 2016 46_05_10-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) Section 01_81_02, and other loads as required for proper operation of equipment. a. For equipment with an operating weight of 400 pounds or greater and all equipment that is supported higher than 4 feet above the floor, provide calculations for: 1) The operating weight and location of the centroid of mass for the equipment. 2) Forces and overturning moments. 3) Shear and tension forces in equipment anchorages, supports, and connections. 4) The design of equipment anchorage, supports, and connections based on calculated shear and tension forces. 5. Anchorage of equipment to concrete or masonry: a. Perform calculations and determine number, size, type, strength, and location of anchor bolts or other connections. b. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, select and provide anchors from the types specified in Section 05_05_24. c. Provide bolt sleeves around cast-in anchor bolts for 400 pounds or greater equipment. 1) Adjust bolts to final location and secure the sleeve. 6. Anchorage of equipment to metal supports: a. Perform calculations and determine number, size, type, strength, and location of bolts used to connect equipment to metal supports. 7. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install equipment supported on concrete over non-shrink grout pads as specified in this Section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Product data: 1. For each item of equipment: a. Design features. b. Load capacities. c. Efficiency ratings. d. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and Grade. e. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications. f. Catalog data. g. Name plate data. h. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and accessories or options being furnished. 2. Gear reduction units: a. Engineering information in accordance with applicable AGMA standards. b. Gear mesh frequencies. C. Shop drawings: 1. Drawings for equipment: a. Drawings that include cut-away drawings, parts lists, material specification lists, and other information required to substantiate that proposed equipment complies with specified requirements. October 2016 46_05_10-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) 2. Outline drawings showing equipment, driver, driven equipment, pumps, seal, motor(s) or other specified drivers, variable frequency drive, shafting, U-joints, couplings, drive arrangement, gears, base plate or support dimensions, anchor bolt sizes and locations, bearings, and other furnished components. 3. Installation instructions including leveling and alignment tolerances, grouting, lubrication requirements, and initial Installation Testing procedures. 4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar for computer based controls. 5. Recommended or normal operating parameters such as temperatures and pressures. 6. Alarm and shutdown set points for all controls furnished. D. Calculations: 1. Structural: a. Substantiate equipment base plates, supports, bolts, anchor bolts, and other connections meet minimum design requirements specified and seismic design criteria as specified in Section 01_81_02. 2. Mechanical: a. ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 L10 life for bearings calculation methods for drivers, pumps, gears, shafts, motors, and other driveline components with bearings. b. Substantiate that operating rotational frequencies meet the requirements of this Section. c. Torsional analysis of power transmission systems: When torsional analysis specified in the equipment sections, provide: 1) Sketch of system components identifying physical characteristics including mass, diameter, thickness, and stiffness. 2) Results of analysis including first and second critical frequencies of system components and complete system. d. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a licensed engineer. 3. Drinking water: a. If applicable, conform to the requirements of Section 01_60_00 for materials in contact with drinking water. E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. As specified in Section 01_78_23. 2. Equipment with bearings: a. Include manufacturer and model number of every bearing. b. Include calculated ball pass frequencies of the installed equipment for both the inner and outer raceways. F. Commissioning submittals: As specified in Section 01_75_17. G. Project closeout documents: As specified in Section 01_77_00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials as specified in Section 01_60_00 including special requirements for materials in contact with drinking water. October 2016 46_05_10-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) B. Ferrous materials: 1. Steel for members used in fabrication of assemblies: ASTM A36. 2. Iron castings: ASTM A48, tough, close-grained gray iron, free from blowholes, flaws, and other imperfections. 3. Ductile iron castings: ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, free from flaws and imperfections. 4. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A653, minimum 0.0635 inch (16 gauge). 5. Expanded metal: ASTM A36, 13 gauge, 1/2-inch flat pattern expanded metal. 6. Stainless steel: a. As specified in Section 05_12_00. b. In contact or within 36 inches of water: Type 316 or 316L. c. In sea air environment: Type 316 or 316L. d. Other locations: Type 304 or 304L. e. Source cleaning and passivation as specified in Section 05_12_00. C. Non-ferrous materials: 1. Bronze in contact with drinking water: Composition of not more than 2 percent aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc; UNS Alloy C89833, C89520, or C92200 in accordance with ASTM B61, B62, B505, or B584, when not specified otherwise. 2. Bronze in contact with wastewater: Composition of not more than 2 percent aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc; UNS Alloy C83600, C89833, C89520, C92200, or C93700 in accordance with ASTM B61, B62, B505, or B584, when not specified otherwise. 3. Aluminum: As specified in Section 05_14_05. D. Dielectric materials for separation of dissimilar metals: 1. Neoprene, bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers, or other materials as specified. E. Non-shrink grout and epoxy non-shrink grout: As specified in Section 03_60_00. 2.02 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS A. Mechanical anchoring to concrete and masonry: 1. As specified in Section 05_05_24: a. Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Design as specified in Section 01_81_02. B. High-strength fasteners: 1. As specified in Section 05_12_00. C. Flange bolts: 1. As specified in Section 40_05_00.01. D. Mechanical assembly fasteners: 1. Stainless steel: a. High Temperature Service or High Pressure Service: 1) Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B8 (304 SST) or Grade B8M (316 SST), Class 1, heavy hex. 2) Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 8, heavy hex. 3) Washers: Alloy group matching bolts and nuts. October 2016 46_05_10-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) b. Low Temperature Service: 1) Bolts: ASTM A320, Grade B8 (304 SST) or Grade B8M (316 SST), Class 1, heavy hex. 2) Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 8 (304 SST) or Grade B8M (316 SST), heavy hex. 3) Washers: Alloy group matching bolts and nuts. c. General service: 1) Bolts: ASTM F593, Alloy group 1 (304 SST) or Alloy group 2 (316 SST). 2) Nuts: ASTM F594, Alloy group 1 (304 SST) or Alloy group 2 (316 SST). 3) Washers: Alloy group matching bolts and nuts. 2.03 SHAFT COUPLINGS A. General: 1. Type and ratings: Provide non-lubricated type, designed for not less than 50,000 hours of operating life. 2. Sizes: Provide as recommended by manufacturer for specific application, considering horsepower, speed of rotation, and type of service. B. Shaft couplings for close coupled electric motor driven equipment: 1. Use for: a. Equipment 1/2 horsepower or larger. b. Reversing equipment. c. Equipment subject to sudden torque reversals or shock loading: d. Examples: 1) Reciprocating pumps, blowers, and compressors. 2) Conveyor belts. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Lovejoy. b. T.B. Woods. 3. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, and end float. 4. Manufacture flexible component of coupling from synthetic rubber, or urethane. 5. Provide service factor of 2.5 for electric motor drives and 3.5 for engine drives. 6. Do not allow metal-to-metal contact between driver and driven equipment. C. Shaft couplings for direct connected electric motor driven equipment: 1. Use for 1/2 horsepower or larger and subject to normal torque, non-reversing applications. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Rexnord. b. T.B. Woods. 3. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate shock loading, vibration, and shaft misalignment or offset. 4. Provide flexible connecting element of rubber and reinforcement fibers. 5. Provide service factor of 2.0. 6. Connect stub shafts through collars or round flanges, firmly keyed to their shafts with neoprene cylinders held to individual flanges by through pins. October 2016 46_05_10-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) D. Spacer couplings: Where cartridge type mechanical seals or non-split seals are specified, provide a spacer type coupling of sufficient length to remove the seal without disturbing the driver or driven equipment unless noted otherwise in the individual equipment specifications. E. Specialized couplings: Where requirements of equipment dictate specialized features, supply coupling recommended for service by manufacturer: 1. Includes any engine driven equipment. 2.04 STUFFING BOX, SEAL CHAMBER, AND SHAFT SEALS A. General: 1. Unless otherwise noted in the equipment section, provide cartridge type, double mechanical shaft seals for pumps. 2. Provide a stuffing box large enough for a double mechanical seal. 3. Where packing is specified, provide stuffing box large enough to receive a double mechanical seal. 4. Provide seal or packing flush connections, (3/4-inch size unless another size is indicated on the Drawings). 5. Provide and route leakage drain line to nearest equipment floor drain indicated on the Drawings. 6. For pumps with packing, design packing gland to allow adjustment and repacking without dismantling pump except to open up packing box. 7. Seal or packing flush requirements shall be in accordance with API Standard 682 requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, specified or required by the equipment and seal manufacturers, the following API flushing Plan arrangements shall be utilized as appropriate for the application: a. Single seal, clean water applications: Plan 11 (Discharge bypass to seal). b. Single seal, vertical pump applications: Plan 13 (Seal bypass to suction). c. Single seal, clean hot water (greater than 180 degrees Fahrenheit) applications: Plan 23 (Seal cooler and pumping ring). d. Single seal, solids, or contaminants containing water applications: Plan 32 (External seal water). e. Double seal applications: Plan 54 (External seal water) B. Packing: When specified in the equipment section of the specifications, provide the following type of packing: 1. Wastewater, water, and sludge applications: a. Asbestos free. b. PTFE (Teflon) free. c. Braided graphite. d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Chesterton, 1400. 2) John Crane Inc., equivalent product. 2. Drinking water service: a. Asbestos free. b. Material: Braided PTFE (Teflon). c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Chesterton, 1725. 2) John Crane, Inc., equivalent product. October 2016 46_05_10-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) C. Mechanical seals: Provide seal types specified in the equipment sections and as specified. 1. Provide seal types meeting the following requirements: a. Balanced hydraulically. b. Spring: Stationary, out of pumping fluid, Hastelloy C; Type Elgiloy or 17-7 PH stainless steel for split seals. c. O-ring: Viton 747. d. Gland: Type 316L stainless steel. e. Set screws: Type 316L stainless steel. f. Faces: Reaction bonded, Silicon Carbide. g. Seal designed to withstand 300 pounds per square inch gauge minimum differential pressures in either direction; no requirement for seal buffer pressure to be maintained when pump is not operational even though process suction head may be present in pump. 2. Cartridge type single mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Chesterton, S10. b. John Crane, 5610 Series. 3. Cartridge type double mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Chesterton, S20. b. John Crane, 5620 Series. 4. Split face single mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Chesterton, 442. b. John Crane, 3740. 2.05 GEAR REDUCTION UNITS A. Type: Helical or herringbone, unless otherwise specified. B. Design: 1. Made of alloys treated for hardness and for severe service. 2. AGMA Class II service: a. Use more severe service condition when such is recommended by unit's manufacturer. 3. Cast iron housing with gears running in oil. 4. Anti-friction bearings. 5. Thermal horsepower rating based on maximum horsepower rating of prime mover not actual load. 6. Manufactured in accordance with applicable AGMA standards. C. Planetary gear units are not to be used. 2.06 BELT DRIVES A. Sheaves: 1. Separately mounted on bushings by means of at least 3 pull-up bolts or cap tightening screws. 2. When 2 sheave sizes are specified, provide separate belts sized for each set of sheaves. October 2016 46_05_10-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) 3. Statically balanced for all; dynamically balanced for sheaves that operate at a peripheral speed of more than 5,500 feet per minute. 4. Key bushings to drive shaft. B. Belts: Anti-static type when explosion-proof equipment or environment is specified. 1. When spare belts are specified, furnish 1 spare belt for every different type and size of belt-driven unit: a. Where 2 or more belts are involved, furnish matched sets. b. Identify as to equipment, design, horsepower, speed, length, sheave size, and use. c. Package in boxes labeled with identification of contents. C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Dodge, Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Taper-Lock bushings. 2. T.B. Wood's, Ultra-V belts with matching Sure-Grip sheaves and Sure-Grip bushings. 2.07 BEARINGS A. Type: Oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller antifriction type, of standard manufacture. B. Oil lubricated bearings: Provide either pressure lubricating system or separate oil reservoir splash type system: 1. Size oil lubrication systems to safely absorb heat energy generated in bearings when equipment is operating under normal conditions and with the temperature 15 degrees Fahrenheit above the maximum design temperature as specified in Section 01_81_01. 2. Provide an external oil cooler when required to satisfy the specified operating conditions: a. Provide air cooled system if a water-cooling source is not indicated on the Drawings. b. Equip oil cooler with a filler pipe and external level gauge. C. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed: Fit with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings. 1. Lubrication lines and fittings: a. Lines: Minimum 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel tubing. b. Multiple fitting assemblies: Mount fittings together in easily accessible location. c. Use standard hydraulic type grease supply fittings: 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Alenite. b) Zerk. D. Ratings: Rated in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 L10 life for bearings rating life of not less than 50,000 hours: 2.08 MOTORS A. As specified in Section 26_05_09. October 2016 46_05_10-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) 2.09 GEAR MOTORS A. Motors as specified in Section 26_05_09. B. Helical gearing for parallel shaft drives and worm gearing for right angle drives. C. One of the following or equal: 1. Baldor Electric Company. 2. Bodine Electric Company. 2.10 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT FRAMES A. Bolt holes shall not exceed bolt diameter by more than 25 percent, up to a limiting maximum diameter oversize of 1/4 inch. 2.11 PIPING AND VALVES A. Piping as specified in Section 40_05_00.01. B. Valves as specified in Section 40_05_51.01. 2.12 SAFETY EQUIPMENT A. Safety guards: 1. Provide guards that protect personnel from rotating shafts or components within 7.5 feet of floors or operating platforms. 2. Requirements: a. Allow visual inspection of moving parts without removal. b. Allow access to lubrication fittings. c. Prevent entrance of rain or dripping water for outdoor locations. d. Size belt and sheave guards to allow for installation of sheaves 15 percent larger and addition of 1 belt. 3. Materials: a. Sheet metal: Carbon steel, 12 gauge minimum thickness, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. b. Fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel. B. Insulation: 1. Insulate all surfaces with normal operating temperatures above 120 degrees Fahrenheit when surface is within 7.5 feet height from any operating floor or level; 2. Insulation thickness such that temperature is below 120 degrees Fahrenheit; 3. Insulation Type 3 and cover Type 5 as specified in Section 40_05_06.55. C. Warning signs: 1. Provide warning signs in accordance with OSHA requirements for equipment that starts automatically or remotely. 2. Material, sign size, and text: As specified in Section 10_14_00. 3. Mount warning signs with stainless steel fasteners at equipment. October 2016 46_05_10-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) 2.13 NAMEPLATES A. Fastened to equipment at factory in an accessible and visible location. B. Stainless steel sheet engraved or stamped with text, holes drilled or punched for fasteners. C. Fasteners: Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. D. Text: 1. Manufacturer’s name, equipment model number and serial number, motor horsepower when appropriate, identification tag number. 2. Indicate following additional information as applicable: a. Maximum and Normal rotating speed. b. Service class per applicable standards. 3. Include for pumps: a. Rated total dynamic head in feet of fluid. b. Rated flow in gallons per minute. c. Impeller, gear, screw, diaphragm, or piston size. 4. Include for gear reduction units: a. AGMA Class of service. b. Service factor. c. Input and output speeds. 2.14 SHOP FINISHES A. Provide appropriate factory coatings as specified in Section 09_96_01. 1. Motors and gear reducers: Shop finish paint with manufacturer's standard coating, unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specification. 2.15 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Supply one set of special tools as specified in Section 01_60_00. 2.16 SOURCE TESTING A. Testing requirements unless specified otherwise in the individual equipment specifications: 1. Mechanical equipment: Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test as specified in Section 46_05_94. 2. Motors: As specified in Section 26_05_09. 3. Vendor Control Panels: As specified in Section 40_80_01. 2.17 SHIPPING A. As specified in Section 01_60_00. B. Prior to shipment of equipment: 1. Bearings (and similar items): a. Pack separately or provide other protection during transport. b. Greased and lubricated. October 2016 46_05_10-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) 2. Gear boxes: a. Oil filled or sprayed with rust preventive protective coating. 3. Fasteners: a. Inspect for proper torques and tightness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 01_60_00. B. Inspect fasteners for proper torques and tightness. C. Storage: 1. Bearings: a. Rotate units at least once per month or more often as recommended by the manufacturer to protect rotating elements and bearings. 2. Gear boxes: a. Inspect to verify integrity of protection from rust. D. Protection: 1. Equipment Log shall include description of rotation performed as part of maintenance activities. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Field measurements: 1. Prior to shop drawings preparation, take measurements and verify dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 2. Ensure equipment and ancillary appurtenances fit within available space. B. Sequencing and scheduling: 1. Equipment anchoring: Obtain anchoring material and templates or setting drawings from equipment manufacturers in adequate time for anchors to be cast-in-place. 2. Coordinate details of equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. C. Metal work embedded in concrete: 1. Accurately place and hold in correct position while concrete is being placed. 2. Clean surface of metal in contact with concrete immediately before concrete is placed. D. Concrete surfaces designated to receive non-shrink grout: 1. Heavy sandblast concrete surface in contact with non-shrink grout. 2. Clean concrete surfaces of sandblasting sand, grease, oil, dirt, and other foreign material that may reduce bond to non-shrink grout. 3. Saturate concrete with water. Concrete shall be saturated surface damp at time non-shrink grout is placed. October 2016 46_05_10-14 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) E. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. F. Lubrication lines and fittings: 1. Support and protect lines from source to point of use. 2. Fittings: a. Bring fittings to outside of equipment in manner such that they are readily accessible from outside without necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards. b. Mount fittings together wherever possible using factory-mounted multiple fitting assemblies securely mounted, parallel with equipment lines, and protected from damage. c. Fittings for underwater bearings: Bring fittings above water surface and mount on edge of structure above. G. Alignment of drivers and equipment: 1. Where drive motors or other drivers are connected to driven equipment by flexible coupling, disconnect coupling halves and align driver and equipment after complete unit has been leveled on its foundation. 2. Comply with procedures of appropriate HI, AGMA Standards, alignment tolerances of equipment manufacturers and the following requirements to bring components into angular and parallel alignment: a. Maximum total coupling offset (not the per plane offset): Not to exceed 0.5 mils per inch of coupling length for spacer couplings based on coupling length (not dial separation). b. Utilize jacking screws, wedges, or shims as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as specified in the equipment sections. 3. Use reverse-indicator arrangement dial type or laser type alignment indicators: Mount indicators on the driver/coupling flange and equipment/coupling flange. Alignment instrumentation accuracy shall be sufficient to read angular and radial misalignment at 10 percent or less of the manufacturer's recommended acceptable misalignment. 4. Alignment and calculations shall include measurement and allowance for thermal growth, spacer coupling length, indicator separation, and axial spacing tolerances of the coupling. 5. When alignment satisfies most stringent tolerance of system components, grout between base and foundation. a. Allow minimum 48 hours for grout to harden. b. After grout hardens, remove jacking screws, tighten anchor bolts and other connections, and recheck alignment. c. Correct alignment as required. 6. After functional testing is complete, dowel motor or drivers and driven equipment: a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. H. Grouting under equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids: 1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, grout with non-shrink grout as specified in Section 03_60_00. a. Non-shrink epoxy grout required only when indicated on the Drawings. 2. Comply with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions for grouting spaces, and tolerances for level and vertical and horizontal alignment. October 2016 46_05_10-15 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) 3. Install grout only after: a. Equipment is leveled and in proper alignment. b. Piping connections are complete and in alignment with no strain transmitted to equipment. 4. Do not use leveling nuts on equipment anchors for supporting and leveling equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids for grouting. 5. Use jack screws for supporting and leveling equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids for grouting following the procedure defined below: a. Drill and tap equipment base plates, sole plates, and skids for jack screws. b. Use suitable number and size of jack screws. c. End of jack screws shall bear on circular steel plates epoxy bonded to equipment foundation. d. Jack screw threads that will be in contact with grout: Wrap with multiple layers of tape or other material, acceptable to Engineer, to prevent grout from bonding to threads. e. Place and cure grout as specified in Section 03_60_00. f. After grout is cured, remove jack screws and material used to prevent bonding to grout. 1) Provide jack screws to Owner for future use. g. Tighten equipment anchors in accordance with equipment manufacturer requirements. h. Fill holes where jack screws have been removed with grout. i. Cure as specified in Section 03_60_00. 6. For equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids where it is not practical to use jack screws, use steel wedges and shims. a. Wrap wedges and shims that contact grout with multiple layers of tape or other material, acceptable to Engineer, to prevent grout from bonding. b. Place and cure grout as specified in Section 03_60_00. c. Remove wedges or shims. d. Tighten equipment anchors to in accordance with equipment manufacturer requirements. e. Fill voids where wedges and shims have been removed with grout. f. Cure as specified in Section 03_60_00. 7. Preparation of equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids for grouting: a. Metal in contact with grout: Grit blast to white metal finish. b. Clean surfaces of equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids in contact with grout of dirt, dust, oil, grease, paint and other material that will reduce bond. 8. Preparation of concrete equipment foundation for grouting: a. Rough concrete surfaces in contact with grout. b. Concrete contact surface shall be free of dirt, dust, laitance, particles, loose concrete, or other material or coatings that will reduce bond. c. Saturate concrete contact surface area with water for minimum of 24 hours prior to grouting. d. Remove standing water just prior to grout placement, using clean rags or oil-free compressed air. 9. Forms and header boxes: a. Build forms for grouting of material with adequate strength to withstand placement of grouts. October 2016 46_05_10-16 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_10 (FS-100) b. Use forms that are rigid and liquid tight. Caulk cracks and joints with an elastomeric sealant. c. Line forms with polyethylene film for easy grout release. Forms carefully waxed with 2 coats of heavy-duty paste wax will also be acceptable. 10. Grout placement requirements: a. Minimum ambient and substrate temperature: 45 degrees Fahrenheit and rising: 1) Conform to grout manufacturer’s temperature requirements. b. Pour grout using header box. c. Keep level of grout in header box above bottom of equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids at all times to prevent air entrapment. d. Grout shall flow continuously from header box to other side of forms without trapping air or forming voids. e. Vibrate, rod, or chain grout to facilitate grout flow, consolidate grout, and remove entrapped air. f. After grout sets, remove forms and trim grout at 45-degree angle from bottom edge of equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids. g. Cure as specified in Section 03_60_00. I. Special techniques: 1. Use applicable special tools and equipment, including precision machinist levels, dial indicators, and gauges as required in equipment installations. J. Tolerances: 1. Completed equipment installations: Comply with requirements for intended use and specified vibration and noise tolerances. K. Warning signs: 1. Mount securely with stainless fasteners at equipment that can be started automatically or from remote locations. 3.03 FIELD PAINTING A. Compatible with factory painting. B. As specified in Section 09_96_01. 3.04 COMMISSIONING A. As specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Functional testing requirements unless specified otherwise in the individual equipment specifications: 1. Mechanical equipment: Level 1 tests as specified in Section 46_05_94. 2. Motors: As specified in Sections 26_05_09 and 26_08_50. 3. Vendor Control Panels: As specified in Section 40_80_01. END OF SECTION October 2016 46_05_11-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_11 (FS-100) SECTION 46_05_11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Equipment nameplates. 2. Special items. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01_60_00 - Product Requirements. 3. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 4. Section 01_77_00 - Closeout Procedures. 5. Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Product data. 2. Installation instructions. C. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01_75_17. D. Samples. E. Submit following as specified in Section 01_77_00: 1. Warranty. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory requirements: Comply with Owner's requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES A. Material and fabrication: 1. Stainless steel sheet engraved or stamped with text, holes drilled, or punch for fasteners. October 2016 46_05_11-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_11 (FS-100) B. Fasteners: 1. Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. C. Text: 1. Manufacturer’s name, equipment model number and serial number, identification tag number; and when appropriate, drive speed, motor horsepower with rated capacity, pump rated total dynamic head, and impeller size. 2.02 SPECIAL ITEMS A. In addition, special coating of following items will be required: Item Color Hoist hooks and blocks Yellow and black stripes Steel guard posts In accordance with standard details B. Paint minimum 2 inches high numbers on or adjacent to accessible valves, pumps, flowmeters, and other items of equipment which are indicated on the Drawings or in Specifications by number. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify satisfactory conditions of substrate for applying identification. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation and application of products as specified in Section 01_60_00. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare and coat surfaces of special items as specified in Section 09_96_01. B. Prepare surface in accordance with product manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 COMMISSIONING AND PROCESS START-UP REQUIREMENTS A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. October 2016 46_05_11-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_11 (FS-100) B. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. Manufacturer Rep Onsite Source Testing (Witnessed or Non- witnessed) Training Requirements Installation Testing Functional Testing Process Operational Period Maintenance (hrs per session) Operation (hrs per session) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Trips Days (each trip) Witnessed Not Required Not Required Not Required Not Required END OF SECTION October 2016 46_05_94-1 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) SECTION 46_05_94 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Testing of mechanical equipment and systems. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 2. Section 26_05_09 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower. 3. Section 31_23_17 - Trenching. 4. Section 40_05_00.09 - Piping Systems Testing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. S1.4 Specification for Sound Level Meters. B. Hydraulic Institute (HI). C. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of source (factory) tests, Owner training, installation testing, functional testing, clean water facility testing, closeout documentation, process start-up and process operational period as specified in this Section and in Section 01_75_17 and equipment sections. B. Test instrumentation calibration data: C. Operation and maintenance manual: 1. Include motor rotor bar pass frequencies for motors larger than 500 horsepower. D. Commissioning and Process Start-up Plan: As specified in Section 01_75_17. E. Test plan as specified in Section 01_75_17 and equipment sections. F. Test reports as specified in this Section and in Section 01_75_17 and equipment sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. October 2016 46_05_94-2 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Commissioning and process start-up of equipment as specified in: 1. This Section. 2. Section 01_75_17. 3. Equipment sections. a. If testing requirements are not specified, provide Level 1 Tests. B. Comply with latest version of applicable standards. C. Test and prepare piping as specified in Sections 31_23_17 and 40_05_00.09. D. Operation of related existing equipment: Owner will operate related existing equipment or facilities necessary to accomplish the testing. Schedule and coordinate testing as required by Section 01_75_17. E. Provide necessary test instrumentation that has been calibrated within 1 year from date of test to recognized test standards traceable to the NIST or approved source. 1. Properly calibrated field instrumentation permanently installed as a part of the Work may be utilized for tests. 2. Prior to testing, provide signed and dated certificates of calibration for test instrumentation and equipment. F. Test measurement and result accuracy: 1. Use test instruments with accuracies as recommended in the appropriate referenced standards. When no accuracy is recommended in the referenced standard, use 1 percent or better accuracy test instruments. a. Improved (lower error tolerance) accuracies specified elsewhere prevail over this general requirement. 2. Do not adjust results of tests for instrumentation accuracy. a. Measured values and values directly calculated from measured values shall be the basis for comparing actual equipment performance to specified requirements. G. Report features: 1. Report results in a bound document in generally accepted engineering format with title page, written summary of results compared to specified requirements, and appropriate curves or plots of significant variables in English units. 2. Include appendix with a copy of raw, unmodified test data sheets indicating test value, date and time of reading, and initials of person taking the data. 3. Include appendix with sample calculations for adjustments to raw test data and for calculated results. 4. Include appendix with the make, model, and last calibration date of instrumentation used for test measurements. 5. Include in body of report a drawing or sketch of the test system layout showing location and orientation of the test instruments relative to the tested equipment features. October 2016 46_05_94-3 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) H. Provide necessary fluids, utilities, temporary piping, temporary supports, temporary access platforms or access means and other temporary facilities and labor necessary to safely operate the equipment and accomplish the specified testing. 1. With Owner's permission, some utilities may be provided by fully tested permanently installed utilities that are part of the Work. I. Prepare and submit test reports as specified. J. Testing levels: 1. Level 1 Tests: a. Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test: 1) For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for 15 minutes minimum after components reach normal operating temperatures. 2) Operate at rated design load conditions. 3) Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements, and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed. b. Level 1 Pump Performance Test: 1) Measure flow and head while operating at or near the rated condition; for factory testing, testing may be at reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws. 2) Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 26_05_09 or the applicable equipment section. Use actual driver for field tests. 3) Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and make observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels. c. Level 1 Vibration Test: 1) Test requirement: a) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency in 3 perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; 1 plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component. b) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with Vibration Acceptance Criteria. 2) Equipment operating condition: Test at specified maximum speed. d. Level 1 Noise Test: 1) Measure unfiltered overall A-weighted sound pressure level in dBA at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment and at a mid- point of the equipment height. 2. Level 2 Tests: a. Level 2 General Performance Test: 1) For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 2 hours after components reach normal operating temperatures. 2) Operate at rated design load conditions. October 2016 46_05_94-4 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) 3) Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed. b. Level 2 Pump Performance Test: 1) Test 2 hours minimum for flow and head at the rated condition; for factory testing, testing may be at a reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws. 2) Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 26_05_09. Use actual driver for field tests. 3) Test for flow and head at 2 additional conditions; 1 at 25 percent below the rated flow and 1 at 10 percent above the rated flow. 4) Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels at each condition. c. Level 2 Vibration Test: 1) Test requirement: a) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency and measure vibration phase in 3 perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; 1 plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component; measure actual rotational speeds for each vibration spectra measured using photometric or other tachometer input connected directly to the vibration data collector. b) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with Vibration Acceptance Criteria. 2) Equipment operating condition: Repeat test requirements at design specified maximum speed and at minimum speed for variable speed equipment. 3) Natural frequency test of field installed equipment: a) Excite the installed equipment and support system in 3 perpendicular planes, use same planes as operating vibration measurement planes, and determine the as-installed natural resonant frequency of the driven equipment, the driver, gears, and supports. b) Perform test at each bearing housing, at each support pedestal, and for pumps on the suction and discharge piping. c) Perform with equipment and attached piping full of intended service or process fluid. d. Level 2 Noise Test: 1) Measure filtered A-weighted overall sound pressure level in dBA for each of 8 octave band mid-points beginning at 63 hertz measured at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid-point height of the noise source. October 2016 46_05_94-5 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) 3. Level 3 Tests: a. Level 3 General Equipment Performance Tests: 1) For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 4 hours after components reach normal operating temperatures. 2) Operate at rated design load conditions for 1/2 the specified time; operate at each of any other specified conditions for a proportionate share of the remaining test time. 3) Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment rotates in the proper direction, shafting and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual noise, vibration, or temperatures are observed. 4) Take appropriate capacity, power or fuel consumption, torque, revolutions per minute, pressure, and temperature readings using appropriate test instrumentation to confirm equipment meets specified performance requirements at the design rated condition. 5) Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity performance testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time. b. Level 3 Pump Performance Test: 1) Test 4 hours minimum for flow and head at or near the rated condition; for factory testing, testing may be at a reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws. 2) Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 26_05_09. Use actual driver for field tests. 3) Test each specified flow and head condition at the rated speed and test at minimum as well as maximum specified speeds; operate at each test condition for a minimum of 15 minutes; for factory testing, test at other speeds may be omitted if test driver at reduced speeds is used for rated condition testing. 4) Record measured shaft revolutions per minute, flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure; record measured bearing temperatures (bearing housing exterior surface temperatures may be recorded when bearing temperature devices are not required by the equipment section) and record observations on noise levels. c. Level 3 Vibration Test: 1) Requirements: Same as Level 2 vibration test except data taken at each operating condition tested and with additional requirements below. 2) Perform High Frequency Enveloping Analysis for gears and bearings. a) Measure bearing element vibration directly on each bearing cap in a location close as possible to the bearing load zone that provides a smooth surface and direct path to the bearing to detect bearing defects. b) Report results in units of acceleration versus frequency in cycles per minute. 3) Perform Time Wave Form analysis for gears, low speed equipment and reciprocating equipment; plot true peak amplitude velocity and displacement versus time and label the period between peaks with the likely cause of the periodic peaks (relate the period to a cause). October 2016 46_05_94-6 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) 4) Plot vibration spectra on 3 different plots; peak displacement versus frequency, peak acceleration versus frequency and peak velocity versus frequency. d. Level 3 Noise Test: Measure filtered, un-weighted overall sound pressure level in dB at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid- point height and at 4 locations approximately 90 degrees apart in plan view; report results for each of 8 octave band mid-points beginning at 63 hertz. 4. Level 4 Tests: a. Level 4 General Equipment Performance Test: 1) For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 8 hours after components reach normal operating temperatures. 2) Operate at rated design load conditions for 1/2 the specified time; operate at each of any other specified conditions for a proportionate share of the remaining test time. 3) Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment rotates in the proper direction, shafting and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual noise, vibration, or temperatures are observed. 4) Take appropriate capacity, power or fuel consumption, torque, revolutions per minute, pressure, and temperature readings using appropriate test instrumentation to confirm equipment meets specified performance requirements at the design rated condition. 5) Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time. b. Level 4 Pump Performance Test: 1) Test 8 hours minimum for flow and head; begin tests at or near the rated condition; for factory and field-testing, test with furnished motor at full speed. 2) Test each specified flow and head condition at the rated speed and test at minimum as well as maximum specified speeds; operate at each test condition for a minimum of 20 minutes or longer as necessary to measure required performance, vibration, and noise data at each test condition. 3) Record measured shaft revolutions per minute, flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure; record measured bearing temperatures (bearing housing exterior surface temperatures may be recorded when bearing temperature devices not required by the equipment section) and record observations on noise levels. 4) Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time. 5) Perform efficiency and/or Net Positive Suction Head Required (NPSHr) and/or priming time tests when specified in the equipment section in accordance with the appropriate HI standard and as follows: a) Perform NPSHr testing at maximum rated design speed, head and flow with test fluids at ambient conditions; at maximum rated speed, test at 15 percent above rated design flow, and 25 percent below rated design flow. October 2016 46_05_94-7 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) b) Perform efficiency testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed. c) Perform priming time testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed. c. Level 4 Vibration Test: Same as Level 3 vibration test. d. Level 4 Noise Test: Same as Level 3 Noise Test except with data taken at each operating condition tested. K. Variable speed equipment tests: 1. Establish performance over the entire speed range and at the average operating condition. 2. Establish performance curves for the following speeds: a. The speed corresponding to the rated maximum capacity. b. The speed corresponding to the minimum capacity. c. The speed corresponding to the average operating conditions. L. Pump tests, all levels of testing: 1. Test in accordance with the following: a. Applicable HI Standards. b. This Section. c. Equipment sections. 2. Test tolerances: In accordance with appropriate HI Standards, except the following modified tolerances apply: a. From 0 to plus 5 percent of head at the specified flows. b. From 0 to plus 5 percent of flow at the rated design point head. c. No negative tolerance for the efficiency at the specified flows. d. No positive tolerance for vibration limits. Vibration limits and test methods in HI Standards do not apply, use limits and methods specified in this or other Sections of the Specifications. M. Drivers tests: 1. Test motors as specified in Section 26_05_09. 2. Test other drivers as specified in the equipment section. N. Noise requirements and control: 1. Perform noise tests in conjunction with vibration test analysis. 2. Make measurements in relation to reference pressure of 0.0002 microbar. 3. Make measurements of emitted noise levels on sound level meter meeting or exceeding ANSI S1.4, Type II. 4. Set sound level meter to slow response. 5. Unless otherwise specified, maximum free field noise level not to exceed 85 dBA measured as sound pressure level at 3 feet from the equipment. O. Pressure testing: 1. Hydrostatically pressure test pressure containing parts at the appropriate standard or code required level above the equipment component specified design pressure or operating pressure, whichever is higher. P. Inspection and balancing: 1. Statically and dynamically balance each of the individual rotating parts as required to achieve the required field vibration limits. October 2016 46_05_94-8 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) 2. Statically and dynamically balance the completed equipment rotating assembly and drive shaft components. 3. Furnish copies of material and component inspection reports including balancing reports for equipment system components and for the completed rotating assembly. Q. Critical speed of rotating equipment: 1. Satisfy the following: a. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment that is considered rigid such as horizontal pumps, all non-clog pumps, blowers, air compressors, and engines shall be at least 25 percent above the equipment’s maximum operating speed. b. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted such as vertical pumps (vertical in-line and vertical non-clog pumps excluded) and fans shall at least 25 percent below the equipment’s lowest operating speed. c. The second lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum operating speed. R. Vibration tests: 1. Definitions: a. Root mean square: for pumps operating at speeds greater than 600 rpm, the vibration measurement shall be measured as the overall velocity in inches per second root mean square (RMS). b. Peak-to-peak displacement: The root mean squared average of the peak-to-peak displacement multiplied by the square root of 2. c. Peak velocity: The root mean squared average of the peak velocity multiplied by the square root of 2. d. Peak acceleration: The root mean squared average of the peak acceleration multiplied by the square root of 2. e. High frequency enveloping: A process to extract very low amplitude time domain signals associated with impact or impulse events such as bearing or gear tooth defects and display them in a frequency spectrum of acceleration versus frequency. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Rockwell Automation, Entek Group, "Spike Energy" analysis. b) CSI, "PeakVue." f. Low speed equipment: Equipment or components of equipment rotating at less than 600 revolutions per minute. g. High speed equipment: Equipment and equipment components operating at or above 600 revolutions per minute. h. Preferred operating range: Manufacturer’s defined preferred operating range (POR) for the equipment. i. Allowable operating range: Manufacturer’s defined allowable operating range (AOR) for the equipment. 2. Vibration instrumentation requirements: a. Analyzers: Use digital type analyzers or data collectors with anti-aliasing filter, 12 bit A/D converter, fast fourier transform circuitry, phase measurement capability, time wave form data storage, high frequency enveloping capabilities, 35 frequency ranges from 21 to 1,500,000 cycles October 2016 46_05_94-9 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) per minute, adjustable fast fourier transform resolution from 400 to 6,400 lines, storage for up to one hundred 3,200 line frequency spectra, data output port, circuitry for integration of acceleration data to velocity or double integration to displacement. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Computational Systems Inc., (CSI) Division of Emerson Process Management, Model 2120A, Data Collector/analyzer with applicable analysis software. b) Pruftechnik, VIBXPERT II. b. Analyzer settings: 1) Units: English, inches/second, mils, and gravitational forces. 2) Fast fourier transform lines: Most equipment 1,600 minimum; for motors, enough lines as required to distinguish motor current frequencies from rotational frequencies, use 3,200 lines for motors with a nominal speed of 3,600 revolutions per minute; 3,200 lines minimum for High Frequency Enveloping; 1,600 lines minimum for low speed equipment. 3) Sample averages: 4 minimum. 4) Maximum frequency (Fmax): 40 times rotational frequency for rolling element bearings, 10 times rotational frequency for sleeve bearings. 5) Amplitude range: Auto select but full scale not more than twice the acceptance criteria or the highest peak, whichever is lower. 6) Fast fourier transform windowing: Hanning Window. 7) High pass filter: Minus 3 dB at 120 cycles per minute for high speed equipment. Minus 3 dB at 21 cycles per minute for low speed equipment. c. Accelerometers: 1) For low speed equipment: Low frequency, shear mode accelerometer, 500 millivolts per gravitational force sensitivity, 10 gravitational force range, plus/minus 5 percent frequency response from 0.5 hertz to 850 hertz, magnetic mount. a) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: (1) Wilcoxon Research, Model 797L. (2) PCB, Model 393C. 2) For high speed equipment: General purpose accelerometer, 100 millivolts per gravitational force sensitivity, 50 gravitational force range, plus/minus 3dB frequency response range from 2 hertz to 12,000 hertz when stud mounted, with magnetic mount holder. a) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: (1) Wilcoxon Research, Model 793. (2) Entek-IRD Model 943. 3. Accelerometer mounting: a. Use magnetic mounting or stud mounting. b. Mount on bearing housing in location with best available direct path to bearing and shaft vibration. c. Remove paint and mount transducer on flat metal surface or epoxy mount for High Frequency Enveloping measurements. 4. Vibration acceptance criteria: a. Testing of rotating mechanical equipment: Tests are to be performed by an experienced, factory trained, and independent authorized vibration analysis expert. October 2016 46_05_94-10 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) b. Vibration displacement limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds 600 revolutions per minute or less is not to exhibit unfiltered readings in excess of following: Operating Conditions & Application Data Overall Peak-to-Peak Displacement Field, mils Factory, mils Operation within the POR 3.0 4.0 Operation within the AOR 4.0 5.0 Additive value when measurement location is greater than 5 feet above foundation. 2.0 2.0 Additive value for solids-handling pumps 2.0 N/A Additive value for slurry pumps 2.0 N/A c. Vibration velocity limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds greater than 600 revolutions per minute is not to exceed the following peak velocity limits: HI Pump Type Horsepower Field Test Factory Test Overall RMS Overall RMS Horizontal Solids Handling Centrifugal Pumps Below 33 hp 0.25 0.28 Horizontal and Vertical In-Line Centrifugal Pumps (other than Non- Clog type) Vertical Solids Handling Centrifugal Pumps Between 33 and 100 hp 0.28 0.31 100 hp and above 0.31 0.34 Below 33 hp 0.30 0.33 Vertical Turbine, Mixed Flow, and Propeller Pumps Between 33 and 100 hp 0.32 0.35 100 hp and above 0.34 0.35 Non-Solids Handling Centrifugal Pumps HI Types BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, OH1, OH2, OH3, OH4, OH5, and OH7 Below 268 hp 0.15 0.19 268 hp and above 0.19 0.22 Vertical Turbine, Mixed Flow, and Propeller Pumps HI Types VS1, VS2, VS3, VS4, VS5, VS6, VS7, and VS8 Below 268 hp 0.13 Gear Reducers, Radial 268 hp and above 0.17 Slurry Pumps 0.25 0.30 October 2016 46_05_94-11 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) HI Pump Type Horsepower Field Test Factory Test Overall RMS Overall RMS Motors See Applicable Motor Specification See Applicable Motor Specification Gear Reducers, Radial Not to exceed AGMA 6000-B96 limits Not to exceed AGMA 6000- B96 limits Other Reducers, Axial 0.1 N/A d. Equipment operation: Measurements are to be obtained with equipment installed and operating within capacity ranges specified and without duplicate equipment running. e. Additional criteria: 1) No narrow band spectral vibration amplitude components, whether sub-rotational, higher harmonic, or synchronous multiple of running speed, are to exceed 40 percent of synchronous vibration amplitude component without manufacturer's detailed verification of origin and ultimate effect of such excitation. 2) The presence of discernable vibration amplitude peaks in Test Level 2 or 3 vibration spectra at bearing inner or outer race frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment. 3) For motors, the following shall be cause for rejection: a) Stator eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency that are more than 40 percent of the peak at rotational frequency. b) Rotor eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency with spectra side bands at the pole pass frequency around the 2 times line frequency peak. c) Other rotor problems evidenced by pole pass frequency side bands around operating speed harmonic peaks or 2 times line frequency side bands around rotor bar pass frequency or around 2 times the rotor bar pass frequency. d) Phasing problems evidenced by 1/3 line frequency side band spectral peaks around the 2 times electrical line frequency peak. 4) The presence of peaks in a High Frequency Enveloping spectra plot corresponding to bearing, gear or motor rotor bar frequencies or harmonics of these frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment; since inadequate lubrication of some equipment may be a cause of these peaks, lubrication shall be checked, corrected as necessary and the high frequency envelope analysis repeated. 5. Vibration testing results presentation: a. Provide equipment drawing with location and orientation of measurement points indicated. b. For each vibration measurement take and include appropriate data on equipment operating conditions at the time vibration data is taken; for pumps, compressors, and blowers record suction pressure, discharge pressure, and flow. c. When Vibration Spectra Data required: October 2016 46_05_94-12 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) 1) Plot peak vibration velocity versus frequency in cycles per minute. 2) Label plots showing actual shaft or part rotation frequency, bearing inner and outer race ball pass frequencies, gear mesh frequencies and relevant equipment excitation frequencies on the plot; label probable cause of vibration peaks whether in excess of specification limits or not. 3) Label plots with equipment identification and operating conditions such as tag number, capacity, pressure, driver horsepower, and point of vibration measurement. 4) Plot motor spectra on a log amplitude scale versus frequency. d. For low speed equipment, plot peak vibration displacement versus frequency as well as velocity versus frequency. e. Provide name of manufacturer and model number of the vibration instrumentation used, including analyzer and accelerometer used together with mounting type. 3.02 PLANNING PHASE A. Submit test plans as specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. 1. Indicate test start time and duration, equipment to be tested, other equipment involved or required; temporary facilities required, number and skill or trade of personnel involved; safety issues and planned safety contingencies; anticipated effect on Owner's existing equipment and other information relevant to the test. 2. Provide locations of all instruments to be used for testing. Provide calibration records for all instrumentation. 3.03 COMMISSIONING PHASE A. Source testing: 1. Witnessing not required unless specified otherwise in equipment section. 2. Witnessed tests: Schedule test date and notify Engineer at least 30 days prior to start of test. 3. Test equipment as specified in Section 01_75_17 and equipment sections. 4. Test fluids as specified in Section 01_75_17. 5. Submit reports as specified in Section 01_75_17. B. Installation testing: 1. Test equipment as specified in Section 01_75_17 and equipment sections. C. Functional testing: 1. Witnessing required as specified in Section 01_75_17. 2. Schedule test date and notify Engineer at least 7 days prior to start of test. 3. Test equipment as specified in equipment sections. Test fluids as specified in Section 01_75_17. 4. Submit reports as specified in Section 01_75_17. D. Clean Water Facility Testing: 1. Test equipment as specified in Section 01_75_17 and equipment sections. E. Closeout documentation: 1. Provide closeout documentation as specified in Section 01_75_17 and equipment sections. October 2016 46_05_94-13 10188A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CO/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/46_05_94 (FS-100) 3.04 PROCESS START-UP PHASE A. Process start-up: 1. Process start-up equipment as specified in Section 01_75_17 and equipment sections. B. Process Operational Period: 1. Operate equipment as specified in Section 01_75_17 and equipment sections. 2. Test fluids as specified in Section 01_75_17. END OF SECTION Network Test Sequence and Responsibilities (5) Stem: RS = Rising Stem; NRS = Non-Rising Stem. (6) Operator: CO = Handcrank operator with 2-inch AWWA nut for portable operator; HW = Handwheel; HC = Handcrank; MO = Motor Operator; MOD = Modulating Motor Operator; HO = Hydraulic Operator; MHO = Manual Hydraulic Operator (Hand Pump); BS = Bench Stand; FS = Floor Stand; IFS = Interconnect Floor Stand; PS = Pedestal Support. END OF SECTION trip) Non-witnessed Not required Not required Not required Not required END OF SECTION 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit; use Type II calcium silicate for exhaust temperatures above 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit. (6) Install insulation on all aeration air piping located within the Blower Building from the discharge of blowers to 10 feet above floor slab. Insulation is not required for aeration air piping that is installed higher than 10 feet above the floor slab. (7) Insulate all piping systems that are specified to be heat traced. END OF CONDUIT SCHEDULE END OF SECTION October 2016 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_06_01.pdf (FS-100) 26_06_01-7 10188A10 TO: WIREWAY 1 2/CS-#16 >> O442 SIGNAL US144 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: H442 US202 TO: WIREWAY 1 2/CS-#16 >> H442 SIGNAL US145 E-UVD-02 0.75" 1 2/CS-#16 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: R445 US202 TO: WIREWAY 1 2/CS-#16 >> R445 SIGNAL October 2016 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_06_01.pdf (FS-100) 26_06_01-6 10188A10 UP115 E-UVD-02 2" 3 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #1/0 XHHW-2 FR: ATS1232 TO: 1232PP1 3 #4/0 >> 1232PP1 POWER FEED UP116 E-UVD-02 2" 3 #4/0 XHHW-2 1 #1/0 XHHW-2 FR: ATS1232 TO: 1232PP1 3 #4/0 >> 1232PP1 POWER FEED UP120 E-UVD-01 1.5" 3 #1 XHHW-2 1 #6 XHHW-2 FR: 1232PP1 TO: XFMR-1232LP1 3 #1 >> XFMR-1232LP1 POWER FEED October 2016 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_06_01.pdf (FS-100) 26_06_01-5 10188A10 TO: WIREWAY (VIA DISCONNECT) 2 #12 >> AHU441 POWER UL180 E-UVD-02 1" 3 #6 XHHW-2 1 #10 XHHW-2 FR: HUH441 TO: WIREWAY (VIA DISCONNECT) 3 #6 >> HUH441 POWER UL200 E-UVD-02 1" 4 #8 XHHW-2 1 #10 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: 1232LP1 2 #8 >> SWH441 POWER FEED UL120 2 #8 >> SWH442 & SWH443 POWER FEED UL120 UL201 E-UVD-02 1" 4 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY TO: 1232LP1 2 #12 >> EXF448 POWER UC101 2 #12 >> EXF449 POWER UC106 October 2016 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_06_01.pdf (FS-100) 26_06_01-4 10188A10 TO: WIREWAY 2 #14 >> F442 POWER UC180 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: SCADA WORKSTATION TO: WIREWAY 2 #12 >> SCADA WORKSTATION POWER UC185 UC185 E-UVD-02 0.75" 2 #12 XHHW-2 1 #12 XHHW-2 FR: WIREWAY UC180 TO: NETWORK RACK 2 #12 >> SCADA WORKSTATION POWER October 2016 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_06_01.pdf (FS-100) 26_06_01-3 10188A10 UC123 E-UVD-02 0.75" 10 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: EWC4421 TO: EBE4421 VIA WIREWAY 6 #14 >> EWC4421 CONTROL 4 #14 >> SPARE UC125 E-UVD-01 1.5" 4 4/C-#14 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: MLC4425 TO: UV MODULES VIA CABLE TRAY 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4425D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4426D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4427D/E 1 4/C-#14 >> Z4428D/E UC126 E-UVD-02 1" 12 #14 XHHW-2 1 #14 XHHW-2 FR: MLC4425 TO: EBE4425 VIA WIREWAY 8 #14 >> MLC4425 CONTROL 4 #14 >> SPARE October 2016 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/Fort Collins (Wastewater)/10188A10 DWRF UV Design/Specifications/26_06_01.pdf (FS-100) 26_06_01-2 10188A10 21. Thermostat Provided by AC Unit Manufacturer. 22. Control system specified in Section 23_09_13. 23. Provide condensing unit sized per air handler manufacturer to provide cooling requirements as indicated for associated air handler. 24. Wall mounted unit with self-contained controls 25. Supply/return grilles and ductwork provided by air conditioning manufacturer. 26. Include service option with return-air smoke detector sensor to be wired in field to shut down unit upon detection of smoke. END OF SECTION jurisdiction over the Work. Periodic: Prior to the commencement of grouting, confirm that the mortar joints in the wall section to be grouted have been constructed in accordance with the referenced criteria. ACI 530.1, Article 3.3B 7. Grout placement will be verified to ensure compliance with code and construction document provisions. Continuous: Provide continuous inspection during grout placement. ACI 530.1, Article 3.5 1.2.2(e), 1.16.1 5.c. Specified size, grade and type of reinforcement and anchor bolts. Periodic: Confirm grade of reinforcing upon delivery to site. Confirm size and type of reinforcing is as indicated on the Project Drawings every 2 hours or for every 250 square feet of wall construction, whichever is more frequent. ACI 530, Section 1.15, ACI 530.1, Articles 2.4, 3.4 5.d. Welding of reinforcing bars. Continuous: Provide continuous inspection as defined in Section 01_45_24. ACI 530, Sections 2.1.9.7.2, 3.3.3.4(b) Building Department Notification Date: Time: (7) Provide set retarding admixture in sufficient dosage to delay initial set to allow minimum 4 hours of placement time for Class UW concrete. (8) Class UW concrete shall have the following additional plastic properties when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1611: (a) Slump flow: Between 16 inches and 24 inches. (b) Time to reach final spread: Between 3 seconds and 11 seconds. (c) Visual Stability Index (VSI): 0 (Highly Stable) with no evidence of segregation or bleeding. X 4d Preparation, construction, and protection of masonry during cold weather (temperatures below 40 degrees F) or hot weather (temperatures above 90 degrees F). ACI 530.1: 1.8.C, 1.8.D X 4f Placement of grout. ACI 530.1: 3.5, 3.6.C X proper installation techniques. ACI 318: 5.9, 5.10 X 4d Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques. ACI 318: 5.11- 5.13 X 4e Verification of in-situ concrete strength, prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs. ACI 318: 6.2 X X PROPERTY DAMAGE $ $ $ $ THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSD ADDL WVD SUBR N / A $ $ (Ea accident) (Per accident) OTHER: THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: INSURED PHONE (A/C, No, Ext): PRODUCER ADDRESS: E-MAIL FAX (A/C, No): CONTACT NAME: NAIC # INSURER A : INSURER B : INSURER C : INSURER D : INSURER E : INSURER F : INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. INS025 (201401) 11/11/2016 Flood and Peterson PO Box 578 Greeley CO 80632 Nikki Mosbrucker CIC,CISR (970)266-7123 (970)506-6823 NMosbrucker@floodpeterson.com Hydro Construction Company Inc. 301 E Lincoln Ave Fort Collins CO 80524 Phoenix Insurance Company 25623 Travelers Indemnity Company 25658 Travelers Property Casualty Company 25674 Pinnacol Assurance 41190 Indian Harbor Insurance Co 36940 CL1632809881 A X X X X DTCO8G990899PHX16 4/1/2016 4/1/2017 1,000,000 300,000 10,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 Employee Benefits 2,000,000 B X X X X DT8108G990899IND16 4/1/2016 4/1/2017 1,000,000 Underinsured motorist 1,000,000 C X X X DTSMCUP8G990899TIL16 4/1/2016 4/1/2017 5,000,000 D N 2091550 4/1/2016 4/1/2017 X 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 E Builders Risk 71003020200006 4/1/2016 4/1/2017 $15,000,000 Limit E Installation Floater 71003020200006 4/1/2016 4/1/2017 $1,000,000 Limit RE: 17-01-425 DWRF UV System Construction (Project #H-WRF-2016-19) Certificate holder and Carollo Engineers, Inc. (10822 W Toller Dr, Suite 200, Littleton, CO 80127) are included as Additional Insured as required by written contract with respects to liability arising out of work performed by the named insured. N Mosbrucker CIC,CISR City of Fort Collins 300 Laporte Ave Fort Collins, CO 80522